Class. 
 Book 
 
 SÊ^AOf 
 
 ^-7 
 
 / /A 
 
 1 6^^ 
 
L 
 
I 
 
THEORETICAL AND PRACTICAL 
 
 GRAMMAR ^ 
 
 FRENCH LANGUAGE; 
 
 7^à 
 
 THE PRESENT USAGE IS DISPLAYED AGREEABLY TO THE DECISIONS OF 
 THE FRENCH ACADEMY. BY M. DE LEVIZAC. 
 
 WITH 
 
 NUMEROUS CORRECTIONS AND IMPROVEMENTS, 
 
 AND WITH THE ADDITION OP 
 
 A COMPLETE TREATISE 
 
 ON THE 
 
 GENDERS OF FRENCH NOUNS, 
 
 AS ALSO WITH THE ADDITION OP 
 
 ALL THE FRENCH VERBS, 
 
 BOTH REGULAR AND IRREGULAR, CONJUGATED AFFIRMATIVELY — NEGATIVELY 
 — INTERROGATIVELY — AND NEGATIVELY AND INTERROGATIVELY. 
 
 BY A. BOLMAR, 
 
 PRINriFAI, OF THE WEST CHESTER ACADEMY, AND AUTHOR OF SEVERAL WORKS XO 
 FACILITATE THE ACQUIREMENT OF THE FRENCH LANGUAGE. 
 
 TWENTY-EIGHTH EDITION. 
 
 PHILADELPHIA: 
 
 CAREY AND HART. 
 
 Sold by Grigg & Elliott, Hogan & Thompson, Thomas, Cowperthwatt & 
 Co., Philadelphia.— WiL-EY & Putnam, A. S. Barnes & Co., Paine & Burgess, 
 Neio York.—\Y. D. Ticknor, C. C. Little & Co., Boston.—J. Steele, Ntvo 
 Orleans.— W. H. Berrett, Charleston.— F . Taylor, Washington. 
 
 1848. 
 

 ■^''vV 
 
 *• 
 
 ExTERED according to the act of the Congress of the United States, 
 A. D. 1834, by Anthoxt Bolmar, in the office of the Oierk of the 
 Eastern District of Pennsylvania. 
 
 BY TRANSFER 
 
 'UN 20 ;U^. 
 
 Printed by T K. & P. G. Collins. 
 
COIÏTENTS. 
 
 PAGB 
 
 Names of the French Letters 1 
 
 Observation on the French Letters 1 
 
 Sounds of the French Letters 2 
 
 Table of the Simple Sounds of Vowels 7 
 
 Table of Dipthongs 8 
 
 Observation on the Pronunciation of a in mare and è in mère 10 
 
 Pronunciation and Accentuation 11 
 
 Introduction to the Exercises 13 
 
 Elision or Apostrophe, &c 14 
 
 Words alike in both Languages 16 
 
 English Words which become French by changing their Termina- 
 tion 17 
 
 PART I. 
 
 OF WORDS CONSIDERED IN THEIR NATURE AND IN- 
 FLECTIONS. 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 Of the Substantive or Noun 18 
 
 Of Genders 19 
 
 List of Nouns ending with eur for the masculine, and cure for the 
 
 feminine 33 
 
 List of Nouns ending with eur for the masculine, and rice for the 
 
 feminine . . , 36 
 
 List of Nouns ending with eiir for the masculine, and which form 
 
 their feminine variously , 38 
 
 Of Numbers 39 
 
 Formation of the plural of French Substantives or Nouns 39 
 
 Formation of the plural of Compound Nouns 41 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 Of the Definite Article 41 
 
 Elision of the Article 42 
 
 Contraction of the Article 43 
 
 Cases in which Contraction does not take place ~. 43 
 
 General Rule of the Article 44 
 
 Of the Article in a Partitive Sense , 45 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 Of the Adjective 46 
 
 Of the Formation of the Feminine of French Adjectives 46 
 
 Of the Formation of the plural of the French Adjectives 51 
 
 Of the Degrees of Signification of French Adjectives 54 
 
 iii 
 
IV CONTENTS 
 
 m Pass 
 
 Of the Positive 54 
 
 Of the Comparative of Superiority 54 
 
 Of the Comparative of Inferiority 54 
 
 Of the Cornparative of Equality 65 
 
 Observations on JMeillp.ur, JVIoindre, and Pire 55 
 
 Of the Superlative. ... 56 
 
 Of the Superlative Absolute 56 
 
 Of the Superlative Relative 56 
 
 Agreement of the Adjective with the Substantive 57 
 
 When the Adjective relates to two Substantives Singular of the same 
 
 Gender 57 
 
 When the Adjective relates to two Substantives Singular of differ 
 
 ent Genders 58 
 
 Nouns and Adjectives of Number 58 
 
 Observations on several Numerical Adjectives * 60 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 Of the Pronouns , 61 
 
 Of the Personal Pronouns , . 61 
 
 Pronouns of the 1st Person 61 
 
 Pronouns of the 2d Person 62 
 
 Pronouns of the 3d Person 63 
 
 Reflected and Reciprocal Pronouns 64 
 
 Of the Relative Pronoun en 65 
 
 Of the Relative Pronoun x 66 
 
 Of Possessive Pronouns 66 
 
 Pronominal Adjectives relating to one Person expressed 67 
 
 Pronominal Adjectives relating to many Persons expressed 67 
 
 Pronominal Adjectives relating to one Person understood 68 
 
 Pronominal Adjectives relating to many Persons understood 68 
 
 Of the Relative Pronouns ï 65 
 
 Of Pronouns Absolute 69 
 
 Of Demonstrative Pronouns 7G 
 
 Of Indefinite Pronouns 71 
 
 Of Indefinite Pronouns of the 1st Class 71 
 
 Of Indefinite Pronouns of the 2d Class 72 
 
 Of Indefinite Pronouns of the 3d Class 73 
 
 Of Indefinite Pronouns of the 4th Class 73 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 Of the Verbs 74 
 
 Ç;Cj' See at the end of the Verbs for a Table of the Contents of the 
 part containing the Verbs. 
 
 Exercises on Avoir to have Affirmatively 74 
 
 Exercises on Avoir to have Negatively 77 
 
 Exercises on Avoir to have Interrogatively 79 
 
 Exercises on Avoir to have Interrogatively and Negatively 79 
 
 Exercises on FAre to be 80 
 
 Exercises on the 1st Conjugation in ek 83 
 
 Exercises on the 2d Conjugation in ir 87 
 
 Exercises on the 3d Conjugation in gir' 89 
 
 Exercises on the 4th Conjugation in re 91 
 
CONTENTS V 
 
 PAQB 
 
 Of the Pronominal Verbs 94 
 
 Of the Passive Verbs 97 
 
 Of the Neuter Verbs 98 
 
 Of the Impersonal or Unipersonal Verbs 98 
 
 Of the VerbrALLoiR 99 
 
 Of the Verb t avoih 99 
 
 Exercises on the Irregular Verbs of the 1st Conjugation 100 
 
 Exercises on the Irregular Verbs of the 2d Conjugation 100 
 
 Exercises of the Irregular Verbs of the 3d Conjugation 103 
 
 Exercises on the Irregular Verbs of the 4th Conjugation 105 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 Of the Prepositions 110 
 
 Of the Prepositions denoting Place 110 
 
 Of the Prepositions denoting Order Ill 
 
 Of the Prepositions denoting Union Ill 
 
 Of the Prepositions denoting Opposition 113 
 
 Of the Prepositions denoting Derivation 113 
 
 Of the Prepositions denoting the End 113 
 
 Of the Preposition denoting the Cause and Means 113 
 
 Of the Preposition à , 113 
 
 Of the Preposition de , 114 
 
 Of the Preposition en. . , 1 14 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 Of the Adverbs 110 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 Of the Conjunctions.. 1I9 
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 Of Interjections 123 
 
 PART II. 
 
 SYNTAX, 
 OR WORDS CONSIDERED IN THEIR CONSTRUCTION. 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 Of the Substantive 123 
 
 Of Compound Nouns 123 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 Of the Article , 124 
 
 A Comparative Table on the use of the Article 126 
 
 On Measure and Weight 127 
 
Vi CONTENTS. 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 txea 
 
 Of the Adjectives 128 
 
 Difference of Construction between the EngUsh and French Lan- 
 guages 129 
 
 Regimen of the Adjectives 130 
 
 Promiscuous Exercises 130 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 Of the Pronouns 131 
 
 Of the Personal Pronouns 131 
 
 Of the Place of Personal Pronouns 131 
 
 Of Personal Pronouns used as Subject 131 
 
 Of Personal Pronouns used as Regimen 133 
 
 Of the Relative Pronouns 135 
 
 Of Pronouns Absolute , 138 
 
 Of Demonstrative Pronouns 14C 
 
 Of Indefinite Pronouns 141 
 
 Of Indefinite Pronouns 1st Class 141 
 
 Of Indefinite Pronouns 2d Class 144 
 
 Of Indefinite Pronouns 3d Class 145 
 
 Of Indefinite Pronouns 4th Class 149 
 
 A General Exercise on the Pronouns 151 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 Of the Verb 1 53 
 
 Agreement of the Verb vi^ith the Subject 153 
 
 O the Regimen of Verbs 1 54 
 
 Of the Nature and Use of Moods and Tenses 157 
 
 Of the Indicative 157 
 
 Of the Conditional 160 
 
 Of the Imperative IGO 
 
 Of the Subjunctive .161 
 
 Of the Infinitive 162 
 
 Of the Participle 162 
 
 Of the Participle present 163 
 
 Of the Participle past 163 
 
 Agreement of the Participle past with its Subject 163 
 
 Agreement of the Participle past with its Regimen 165 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 Of the Adverbs 1 68 
 
 Situation of the Adverbs 168 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 Of the Conjunction 170 
 
 Of the Conjunction que 170 
 
 Government of Conjunctions 171 
 
 Conjunctions that are followed by an Infinitive 171 
 
 Conjunctions that are followed by the Indicative 172 
 
 Conjunctions that are followed by the Subjunctive 173 
 
 Promiscuous Exercises on the nine Parts of Speech , . . 173 
 
CONTENTS. Vil 
 PART III. 
 
 PASB 
 
 Idioms, ok Wouds considebed iif their pabticxjiar RrxES ... 177 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 Of the Substantive 177 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 Of the Article 1 79 
 
 Cases in which the Article is to be used 1-79 
 
 Cases in which the Article is not used 183 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 Of the Adjectives 187 
 
 Of the Adjective with the Article 187 
 
 The Place of the Adjectives 189 
 
 Regimen of the Adjectives 191 
 
 Adjectives of Number 192 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 Of the Pronouns 191 
 
 Of the Personal Pronouns 194 
 
 Office of Personal Pronouns 194 
 
 On the Pronoun soi 198 
 
 Cases in which the Pronouns elle, elles, eux, lui, leur, may 
 
 apply to things 199 
 
 Difficulty respecting the Pronoun le explained 201 
 
 Repetition of the Personal Pronouns 203 
 
 Relation of the Pronouns of the 3d person to a Noun as expressed 
 
 before 205 
 
 Possessive Pronouns 206 
 
 Explanation of some difficulties attendant on the Use of the Pos- 
 sessive Pronouns '. 206 
 
 Relative Pronouns 210 
 
 Of aui 210 
 
 OfauE 212 
 
 Of leq,uel and dont 213 
 
 Of auoi 214 
 
 Of ou 214 
 
 Absolute Pronouns 215 
 
 Demonstrative Pronouns 216 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 Pronouns Indefinite 220 
 
 ^^^^ 220 
 
 Of auTcowauE 220 
 
 Of CHACUN 220 
 
 Of PBKSONNE 221 
 
 Of l'un ET l'autre , 22i 
 
Vill CONTENTS. 
 
 PAGB 
 Of yi Ts^TTS Ki l'autre 222 
 
 Of TOUT and rieiî 222 
 
 Of Q.UELQ,UE aUE and Q.UEL Q,UE « 223 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 Of the Verb 225 
 
 Agreement of the Verb with the Subject 225 
 
 Of the Collective Partitive 226 
 
 Place of the Subject with regard to the Verb 227 
 
 Government of the Verbs 230 
 
 On the use Proper or Accidental of Moods and Tenses 232 
 
 Of the Indicative 232 
 
 Of the Conditional 238 
 
 Remark on the use of the Conditional and Future 239 
 
 Of the Subjunctive 240 
 
 Relations between the Tenses of the Indicative 242 
 
 Relations between the Tenses of the Subjunctive and the Indicative 244 
 
 Further Observations upon the Conditional and Subjunctive 247 
 
 Relations between the Tenses of the different Moods 243 
 
 Relations of the Indicative 248 
 
 Relations to the Conditional and of the Conditional 249 
 
 Relations of the Present and Future Absolute, &c 249 
 
 Principal Relations with the Subjunctive 250 
 
 Of the Infinitive. 251 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 Of Prepositions 253 
 
 Of the Use of the Article with Prepositions 254 
 
 Repetition of the Prepositions 255 
 
 Of the Government of Prepositions 256 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 Of the Adverbs 257 
 
 Of the Negative 7ie 257 
 
 Of the Place of the Negatives 257 
 
 Of the Use of pas and point 257 
 
 When mat/ both pas and point be omitted 258 
 
 When ought both pas and point to be omitted 259 
 
 Of phis and davantage 262 
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 
 Of Grammatical Construction 263 
 
 Of Inversion 267 
 
 Of the Ellipsis 268 
 
 Of the Pleonasm 268 
 
 Of the Syllepsis 269 
 
 CHAPTER X. 
 
 Of Grammatical Discordances 269 
 
 Of Amphibologies / 270 
 
 Of Gdhcisms 271 
 
CONTENTS. IX 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Free Exeucises ; . 275 
 
 Phrases 283 
 
 Examples of Phrases on the principal Difficulties of the French 
 
 Language 283 
 
 On the Collective Partitive 283 
 
 On some Verbs which cannot be conjugated with Avoir to have. . . 283 
 
 On Words of Quantity 283 
 
 On the Personal Pronouns 284 
 
 On soi, lui, soi-même, and lui-même 284 
 
 On the Relative Pronouns 284 
 
 On the Demonstrative Pronouns . 285 
 
 On the verb Avoir to have employed Impersonally 286 
 
 Promiscuous Phrases 287 
 
 Phrases in which the Article is used 288 
 
 Phrases in which the Article is omitted 289 
 
 Phrases on the Pronoun le 290 
 
 Phrases on the Participle Past 291 
 
 Phrases on the Relations of Moods and Tenses 99 1 
 
 Phrases on the Negative ne 292 
 
 Phrases on some Delicacies of the French Language , ,....., 294 
 
EXPLANATION 
 
 Of the ^abbreviations and Signs used in this Grammar, 
 
 L when the letter h at the beginning of a word is followed by a (.) 
 period, it shows that h is mute in that word. 
 
 m after or in the place of a French word, shows the word to be maa- 
 culine. 
 
 f. after or in the place of a French word, shows the word to he femi- 
 nine. 
 
 pi. under an English word or after a French one, shows that that French 
 word is to be put in the plural, though the corresponding English 
 word is in the singular. 
 
 art. put before a French word indicates that the definite article must be 
 put before that word, though there is no article before the correspond- 
 ing English word. 
 
 • an asterisik (*) under an English word, means that that word is not 
 to be expressed in French. 
 
 When under an English word there Is neither a French word or an *, 
 it means that the French of that word has already been given in some 
 previous exercise, or is to be Frenchified according to the directions given 
 page 16th and 17th. 
 
 The Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, &c. placed before French worda, show the or- 
 der m which they must be placed in writing down the French exercises. 
 If the Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, &c. are placed before English words, they show 
 the order in which the corresponding French words must be placed in 
 writing down the French exercises. 
 
 When several English words are put between a parenthesis (), they 
 aie all expressed by the French word or words placed under them. 
 
 The letters a. p. c. n., ,&c. placed under an English verb, shows the 
 tense in which tbe French corresponding verb must be put. 
 
GRAMMAR 
 
 FRENCH I.ANCÎUAGE. 
 
 
 3. 
 
 
 a, 
 
 b, 
 
 c, 
 
 ah. 
 
 hay. 
 
 say, 
 
 r, 
 
 s, 
 
 t, 
 
 air, 
 
 ÇSS, 
 
 tay. 
 
 1. Frencli Grammar is the art that teaches how to speak 
 and write the French Language with propriety. 
 
 2. The French alphabet consists of twenty-five letters : 
 Of the Names of French Letters, 
 
 d, e, f, gt, , h, i, jt, k, 1, m, n, o, p, qt, 
 day, fl, eff,*zhay, ash, e*zhee, kaJi, el, em, en, o, pay, ku, 
 ut, V, X, y, z. 
 u, vay, eeJcs, ee-greck, zed. 
 ■f 4. The names of letters thus marked, f cannot be given with precision, 
 and must be learned from a teacher. 
 
 5. Letters are either vowels or consonants. 
 
 6. A vowel is a letter that forms a perfect sound when 
 uttered by itself. 
 
 7. Tliere are in French six vowels : a, e, i, o, u, y. 
 
 8. The letter y is by some considered as a consonant, but as it has 
 the sound of i and often of two i's, it is prefcrable to call it a vowel. 
 
 9. A consonant is a letter that forms but an imperfect sound 
 when uttered by itself. 
 
 10. There are 19 consonants, b, c, d, f, g, h, j, k, 1, m, n, 
 p, q, r, s, t, V, X, z. 
 
 11. The letter w which is named in French double vay, does not ])e- 
 long to the French alphabet, it is never met with in French books, except 
 in forcig-n words. 
 
 12. Of the Sounds of the French Letters. 
 
 The sound of a letter, or of a combination of letters, must not 
 be confounded with the naine of the letter or letters ; for instance 
 in English, the letter a, which is named ay, has several sounds, 
 as heard in fr/te, far, far, fall, what; the name of d^ in English, 
 is dee, and its sound, that heard at the beginning and at the 
 end of the word dead when pronounced. The letters sh, are 
 
 * Zh in the name of g and j are pronounced like 2, glazier. 
 
 A 1 
 
2 THE SOUNDS 
 
 named, in English, ess, and aitch, and their sound, when to 
 gether, is that heard in she, pronounced sh-e. The same 
 might be said of other letters, and combinations of letters. 
 
 13. Of the Sounds of the French Simple Vowels. 
 a, sounds like-a in ai, fat, mat, rat, marry, flat. 
 â, sounds like-a in arm, barn, far, dart, part, mark. 
 e sounds like-w in twb, burn, gust, Iwrk, r?<st, àusk. 
 é, sounds like-a in ale, bale, cave, dale, fate, game. 
 è, sounds like-a in mare, fare, or ai in air, pair, fair.* 
 ê, sounds like-e in there, where. f 
 i, sounds like-i in idiom, dip, kit, big, tin, pin. 
 Î, sounds like-ee in eel, bee, deer, keel, reed, peer. 
 o, sounds like-o in opera, not, crop, frog, prop, trot. 
 Ô, sounds like-o in over, more, no, bone, rope, note, 
 lit, sounds neither like u as heard in tube, nor u as heard in 
 
 bMll. 
 
 14. It has nearly the sound o?w in the word twenty, in which this letter 
 is not pronounced so full as in other words. In order to pronounce «, let 
 the pupil pronounce the English letter e; then, without changing the posi 
 tion of his organs, let him close his lips a little more tlian for the e, and 
 articulate the sound of the French u. 
 
 ût, has the same sound as the above, only a little longer, 
 y, sounds like i, in idiom, dip, bit, big. 
 y, sometimes sounds like two Vs. 
 
 y, sometimes has the sound of y in ^/ard, year, and may then 
 be considered as a consonant. 
 
 15. Of the Sounds of the French Compound Vowels. 
 
 eu, sounds like u in mwfF, cuff, pwfF. 
 
 eût, has the same sound as the above, only much longer. 
 
 eur, that is eu follov/ed by r sounds exactly like ur in \Aur, (ur. 
 
 ou, sounds like oo in too, or u in bwll, fall, pull. 
 
 OÛ, sounds like oo in fool, moon, cool, mood 
 
 16. Of the Sounds of the French Nasal Vowels. 
 
 ant, sounds nearly like an in rang, sang, sprang, hang. 
 int, sounds nearly like en in strength, stre^zgthen, leîîgth. 
 om, sounds nearly like on in wrong, long, 
 unt, sounds nearlv like wn in clwng, hung, rung, sung. 
 
 17. Of the Compound Sounds^ of oi, oî, 
 
 oit. sounds nearly like o in opera and a in at, put together; 
 as boiter, to limp — pronounce boa té. 
 
 * See page 10. î When there and where are pronounced with great emphas -i. 
 
OF THE FRENCH LANGUAGE. 
 
 3 
 
 oîf, sounds nearly like o in opera and a in arm, put together; 
 
 as boite, a box — pronounce boat, or like iva in water. 
 f 18. All tliese sounds, and particularly those marked t, will be better 
 learned from a master tlian from any direction ; however, an intelligent 
 person may, from tlie above directions, learn enough of the pronunciation to 
 make himself perfectly understood. 
 
 19. Of the Sounds of the French Consonants, 
 
 h, sounds like b in 6ad, rue, 5ed, mo6. 
 c, before a consonant sounds like k in key, kiia, 
 c, before a, o, or u, sounds, like k in key, kite. 
 c, before e, i, sounds like s in sat, seat. 
 
 Ç, that is c with a cedilla before a, o, or u, sounds like s in 
 sat, seat. 
 
 c, sounds like g in second and its compounds, 
 ch, sounds like sh in sAad, das^. 
 
 ch, sometimes sounds like k in kick. 
 
 d, sounds like d in ded.d, den, had, rod, did. 
 
 d, sometimes takes the sound of t at the end of words, when 
 followed by a word beginning with a vowel, to whicii 
 it must be joined, if the meaning of the sentence re- 
 quires it. 
 
 % sounds like / in fit, /an, if, cal/, for. 
 
 f, sometimes takes the sound of v, at the end of words, when 
 
 followed by a word beginning with a vowel, to which 
 it must be joined, if the meaning of the sentence re- 
 quires it. 
 
 g, before a consonant sounds like g in g*a^. . 
 g, before a, o, or u, sounds like g in ^a^. 
 
 g, sometimes takes the sound of k in kick, when followed by 
 a word beginning with a vowel, to which it must be 
 joined, u, after g is very seldom pronounced, 
 g, before e or i, sounds like J. (See that sound.) 
 gn, sounds like ni in u?îion, pi/zion, mi?iion, onion. 
 
 20. Pay great attention to the pronunciation of this combination of le^ 
 ters, for it is difficult ; and hence it is not uncommon, even in France, to hear 
 magnifique, S^c. pronounced as if spelt ma-ni-Jique. The same soxmd in the 
 Itahan language is represented by the same letters gn, and in the Spanish 
 by n. There are a few words m the French language, in which gn are 
 sounded a.s g and n, as in magnétique, pronounced mag-ne-tique. 
 
 h, there are two kinds of h, one silent, the other aspirated. 
 
 21. But in eitlier case it has no sound; (such is also the case with the 
 Italian and Spanish kinguage.) By aspiration is not meant, in French, as 
 in EngUsh, a forcible breathing, as" heard in ^igh, horse, Aouse, &c. The 
 best proof of this, is the difficulty which every Frenchman has to pronounce 
 Uie EngHsh aspirated h, even after a number of yecrs' practice. Besides 
 
^ THE SOUNDS 
 
 my own observation, as a native of France, I can here mention li'Abbé 
 d'OlJvet, wliose opinion and vvriting-s are for us, what Walker's are for an 
 Englishman. He says, in speaking of the aspiration of the Greek and 
 German languages, the French language, which always aims at softness 
 and euphony, attributes no other effect to the aspiration of the h, than that 
 of communicating to the vowel, following the said aspirated h, the pro- 
 perty of a consonant; that is, to prevent the elision of the final vowel of the 
 preceding word. For instance, le lieras, in which the h is called aspirated, 
 is pronounced le-é-ro, and not lé-rô, as would be the case with Vhéritier. in 
 which the h is called mute, and which is pronounced lé-ri-tié, and not 
 le-é-ri-tié. The aspirated A, prevents, also, the final consonant of the 
 word that precedes it, from being connected with the vowel which follows 
 it; for instance plus haut, in which h is called aspirated, is pronounced 
 plu and not plu zo ; while plus honorable, in which h is mute, is 
 pronounced plu-zo-no-rable and not plu-o-no-rahle. Again, des auteurs 
 some authors — is pronounced dè-zô-teur, and des hauteurs some heights — is 
 pronounced dè-ô-ieur; the only difference in the pronunciation of the above 
 two expressions, merely consists in joining the s of des to auteurs 
 authors — whereas it must not be done to hauteurs heights. From my ac- 
 quaintance with the English pronunciation, I am confident that if Boyer, 
 Chambaud, &c., from whom all others have copied this error, without taking 
 the trouble of ascertaining the fact, had been well acquainted with the nature 
 of the English aspirated A, they would never have assimilated the 
 French to it. 
 
 j, sounds like s in pleasure, or like z in gla;2;ier, a2;ure. 
 
 22. The sound of which letter is represented by Walker by zh. 
 
 k, sounds like k in kick, keel, wea/^, kià, cloaA:. , 
 
 ], sounds like I in /ad, coa/, lot, pupiZ,/ump, soul. 
 il or illf, sounds like Hi in Wi/Ziam, bi/Hard, collier. 
 
 23. With regard to the pronunciation of the I or II, mouillées, it is 
 proper to mention that they are differently pronounced by different persons, 
 thus the words soleil, Jille, travail, tailleur, &c. instead of being pronounc- 
 ed as directed above, are pronounced as if written thus: so-U-ye, Ji-ye, 
 tra-va-ye, ta-yeur, giving to the y the sound it has in the word year. 
 
 24. This last pronmaciation being the easier of the two, has been adopted 
 by so many people in France, that it is no longer considered as a fault, 
 except by grammarians. However I recommend the fermier, not only on 
 account of its correctness, but also on account of its being a sound very 
 common to the Spanish, the Italian, and the Portuguese languages; in 
 which languages this sound does not admit of any variation. It is repre- 
 sented in °the° Spanish by 11, in the Italian by gli, and in the Portuguese 
 by Ih. 
 
 25. When in a- word Z or II preceded by i, are liquides, or 7nouillées, 
 I have, in the figured pronunciation of the verbs, and of the fables, repre- 
 sented this sound by ill, standing by itself; and this with a view of forcing 
 the attention of the pupil. It will be seen also, that in those words in which 
 tlie i that precedes the Z, or II, is pronounced; I have repeated it, as in 
 /ille, fi-ill, hillet, bi-ill-è, in which the i is distinctly heard, before the 
 utterance of the U, mouillées; which is not the case in travail, tra-^a-iU, 
 tailleur, ta-ill-eur; soleil, so-lè-Hl ; sommeiller, so-mè-ill-é. 
 
 m. sounds like win ?7zan, men, stem, minim, ûim. 
 
OF THE FRENCH LANGUAGE. 5 
 
 am, em, im, om, um, ym, are pronounced like 
 an, en, in, on, un, in, which see. 
 
 n, sounds at the beginning of syllables like n in nap, nip, note. 
 
 n, -preceded by the vowels a, i, o, u^ form the four nasal sounds 
 an, in, on, un, mentioned under article 16th, which see 
 
 n, at the end of a word, although preceded by a vowel, some- 
 times has the sound of n in pan, pen, pin, ton, sun. 
 
 26. When it is to be pronounced so, it is indicated by a capital n, 
 which refers to the word amen, in the key to the figured pronunciation 
 of the verbs of this Grammar, and in that of the Fables. 
 
 n, final — When a word ends with an n, and is followed by a 
 word beginning with a vowel or an h mute to which it 
 must be joined, the n final is dpubled; that is, another n is 
 added in the pronunciation ; and that added n is joined to, 
 and pronounced with the next word, for instance : 
 
 ancien ami, bien heureux, are pronounced as if spelt, 
 ancien nami, bien neureu. 
 
 27. However it is a pretty general custom with regard to 
 the four following words : bon, mon, ton, son, not to double the 
 final n, but to pronounce the final n of each of these words, 
 with the following words, beginning with a vowel, or an h 
 mute, for instance : 
 
 bon ami, mon ami, ton ami, son ami, must be pronounced as 
 bo nami, mo nami, to nami, so nami. [if spelt, 
 
 28. I must also here observe, that un when followed by a word begin- 
 ning with a vowel, or a silent A, is pronounced in two ways. Thus for 
 instance, the masculine nouns, un esclave, un exemple, un ami, will be 
 pronounced by some, u-nesclave, u-ncxemple, u-nami, as t!iey would pro- 
 nounce the féminin nouns, une esclave, une exemple, une amie ; by others, 
 un esclave, un exemple, unami, will be pronounced as if written, unnesclave^ 
 un nexemple, un nami, and une esclave, une exemple, une amie, u-nesclace, 
 u-nexemple, u-namie. 
 
 29. By the latter way of pronouncing un, the sj^eakcr, besides pre- 
 serving the proper nasal sound of un, does away witli tlie ambiguity about 
 the gender, to which the former way of pronouncing gives rise. 1 nave 
 adopted the latter in tlie figured pronunciation; not because it is the most 
 used, but because it is considered the most correct way of the two. 
 
 p, sounds like p, in p^p, pet, step, pip, pop. 
 q, sounds like k, in kick, kid, keel, A:oran. 
 
 30. U after q is very seldom pronounced. 
 
 r, sounds like r in roar, rat, rap, red, rid, rod, rub. 
 
 31. The French r, must always have the jarring sound. The jarring 
 sound of the initial or rough r, is formed, says Walker, by jarring, or vibra- 
 ting the tip of the tongue against the roof of the mouth, near the fore teeth, 
 
 a2 
 
6 THE SOUNDS 
 
 S, sounds like s in sassafras, atlas, seldom, silk, sole. 
 
 s, between two vowels, or at the end of a'word, followed by 
 
 a v/ord beginning with a vowel, or an h mute, to which 
 
 it must be joined, has generally the sound of z, as heard 
 
 in zedA, zone, or s in rose, 
 bh, sounds like sh in s^ad, dasA., s^ed, fres^, s^ip, û.sh, s^op, 
 
 clas^, shun, blus^. 
 t, sounds like t in far/, fell, jef, top, spot. 
 t, in the middle of a word, has sometimes the sound of s, as 
 
 in sat, seat, for instance, in patience, caution, &lc. 
 th, sounds like t in tup, top. 
 t, at the end of a word, is generally joined and sounded with 
 
 the ne?it w'ord, beginning with a vowel or h mute. 
 V, sounds like v in cat, t;ent, vi\, uotitje, «ulgar. 
 
 k-s 
 has five sounds <J g-z 
 \ s 
 
 f excellence-èA'-sé-lans. 
 
 as in the I axiome aA;-si-om.* 
 
 -French < exemple — èg-'^an-ple 
 
 words soixante soi-sant. 
 
 l^ sixième si-^ri-èm. 
 
 32. * In the words in which x is pronounced like k-s; s must not be 
 pronounced like sh, as it 1=5 in the English word axiom, pronounced 
 ak-slmm, but like s in sister. 
 
 z, sounds like z in 2:eal, 2:est, ^rone, and s in rose. 
 w, is generally pronounced like v in rery. 
 w, is in a few words pronounced as it is in the English, in 
 î^jork*, word. 
 
 33. I should have mentioned that new names have been 
 given to the letters of the French alphabet, which, though far 
 preferable to the old ones, are as yet not generally taught. 
 
 b, c, d, e, f, g, h, i, j, k, 1, m, 
 
 o 
 
 a, be*,ke, de, a, fe\, ge, he, eX,je, ke, le, me, ne, 0, 
 
 p» 
 
 q» 
 
 r, 
 
 s. 
 
 t, 
 
 u, 
 
 V, 
 
 X, 
 
 7' 
 
 z. 
 
 ve. 
 
 ke. 
 
 re. 
 
 se. 
 
 te. 
 
 u, 
 
 '■^, 
 
 kse. 
 
 e grec. 
 
 ze. 
 
 * Tlie e after earl consonant has the sound of u in tub, and is pronounced but 
 feebly, 
 tg- here has the sound it has in gag, gig, &c. 
 I J sounds like i in glazier. 
 
OF THE FRENCH LANGUAGE. 
 
 34. Table ot the Simple sounds of Vowels ; showing at 
 one view the different combinations, by which these simple 
 sounds are represented in tlifferent words.* 
 
 sounds 
 
 examples 
 
 Bounds like represented by 
 
 examples 
 
 a 
 
 ami 
 
 a, in at < 
 
 -e 
 
 femme 
 
 Tuoman 
 
 
 
 tea 
 
 il gagea 
 
 he betted 
 
 â 
 
 âne 
 
 a, in arm < 
 
 ;a 
 
 bas 
 
 stocking " 
 
 e 
 
 te 
 
 u, in tub ^^f 
 ai 
 
 rougeâtre 
 nous faisons 
 
 reddish 
 we do 
 
 
 
 
 fai 
 
 aigu 
 
 sharp 
 
 é 
 
 écrit 
 
 a, in ale , 
 
 eai 
 
 geai 
 
 Jay 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 ée 
 
 année 
 
 year 
 
 
 
 
 U 
 
 sesophage 
 
 œsophag^is 
 
 
 
 
 fai 
 
 aide 
 
 aid 
 
 èf 
 
 mèref 
 
 a, in mare-j- 
 
 aie 
 
 baie 
 
 bay 
 
 
 
 
 ei 
 
 baleine 
 
 ■whale 
 
 
 
 
 ^eai 
 
 monnaie 
 
 money 
 
 ê+ 
 
 êtret 
 
 e, in there^: 
 
 aî 
 
 aîné 
 
 eldest 
 
 
 idole 
 
 i, in idiom 
 
 i 
 
 imiter 
 
 to imitate 
 
 î 
 
 gîte 
 
 ee, in eel 
 
 ie 
 
 folie 
 
 folly 
 
 
 
 ( 
 
 rau 
 
 aurore 
 
 aurora 
 
 
 
 opéra 
 
 0, m opera ^^^ 
 
 flageolet 
 
 Jlagelet 
 
 
 
 ( 
 
 .au 
 
 auteur 
 
 author 
 
 ô 
 
 ôter 
 
 o, in over -= 
 
 jBau 
 
 marteau 
 
 hammer 
 
 
 
 ( 
 
 leo 
 
 geôle 
 
 goal 
 
 
 
 ( 
 
 5" eu 
 
 gageure 
 
 •wager 
 
 u 
 
 mur 
 
 none * 
 
 ^eua 
 
 eue 
 
 had 
 
 
 
 ( 
 
 {.ue 
 
 laitue 
 
 lettuce 
 
 û 
 
 mûr 
 
 none 
 
 11 
 
 flûte 
 
 flute 
 
 eu 
 
 jeune 
 
 u, in muff 
 
 aeu 
 
 œuf 
 
 ^gg 
 
 
 
 
 • asu 
 
 nœud 
 
 knot 
 
 eu 
 
 jeûne 
 
 none 
 
 ?.eub 
 
 queue 
 
 tail 
 
 ou 
 
 tout 
 
 00, in too 
 
 ou 
 
 tout 
 
 all 
 
 
 
 < 
 
 J^aoû 
 
 août 
 
 aiig'ust 
 
 où 
 
 voûte 
 
 00, in fool 
 
 ^oue 
 
 roue 
 
 ■wheel 
 
 
 
 
 "ara 
 
 ample 
 
 ample 
 
 
 
 
 aon 
 
 paon 
 
 peacock 
 
 an 
 
 ancre 
 
 an, in sang ^ 
 
 ean 
 
 affligeant 
 
 aj^:tting 
 
 
 
 
 em 
 
 membre 
 
 member 
 
 
 
 
 ^en 
 
 entendre 
 
 to hear 
 
 
 
 
 ""aim 
 
 essaim 
 
 s-warn^ 
 
 
 
 
 ain 
 
 crainte 
 
 fear 
 
 in 
 
 ingrat 
 
 en, in length •< 
 
 ein 
 im 
 
 peinture 
 impoli 
 
 picture 
 impolite 
 
 
 
 
 ym 
 
 symbole 
 
 symbol 
 
 
 
 
 Lyn 
 
 syntaxe 
 
 syntax 
 
 on 
 
 onde 
 
 on, in long 
 
 "aon 
 
 taon 
 
 ox-fly 
 
 
 
 
 |eon 
 
 pigeon 
 
 pigeon 
 
 
 
 ( 
 
 _om 
 
 ombre 
 
 shade 
 
 un§ 
 
 un§ 
 
 un§,insung 
 
 ;^eun 
 cum 
 
 à jeun 
 parfum 
 
 fasting 
 perfuMb 
 
 * Ste page 10. t See page 10. J See note page 2. § See page 5, Art. 28 
 
ê 
 
 THE SOUNDS 
 
 Table of Diphthongs. 
 
 85. A diphthong is a coalition of two sounds, which are 
 distinctly heard by a simple emission of the voice. The 
 diphthongs of the French language will all be found in the 
 following table, opposite to the simple sounds of w^hich they 
 are composed. 
 
 36. Li the jig'ired prommciation of the Fables, and of the Verbs, the 
 two sounds forming a diphthong have been separated, ivith a vie^u of 
 causing the pupil to pro7iounce distinctly the tivo sounds. The master 
 viust not alloiv the pupil to pause bet~ueen the ttvo vorvels, but pronounce 
 them as closely as possible. 
 
 diphthougs 
 
 simple sounds 
 
 1 
 
 examples. 
 
 ia 
 
 i-a 
 
 fiacre 
 
 hackney couch 
 
 ia 
 
 i-à 
 
 galimatias 
 
 nonsense 
 
 iai") 
 
 
 je défiai 
 
 I challenged 
 
 ié C 
 
 i-é 
 
 amitié 
 
 friendship 
 
 ie J 
 
 
 riez 
 
 laugh 
 
 iai"! 
 
 
 je purifiais 
 
 Ipurifed 
 
 iè C 
 
 i-è 
 
 bière 
 
 beer 
 
 ie J 
 
 
 ciel 
 
 heaven 
 
 io 
 
 i-o 
 
 violon 
 
 violin 
 
 iau 
 
 i-ô 
 
 miauler 
 
 to meiv 
 
 iu 
 
 i-û 
 
 reliure 
 
 binding 
 
 ieu 
 
 i-eu 
 
 relieur 
 
 book binder 
 
 ieu I 
 
 . ^ 
 
 mieux 
 
 better 
 
 ieue 3 
 
 i-eu 
 
 lieue 
 
 leagnie 
 
 iou 
 
 i-ou 
 
 chiourme 
 
 the crew of a galley 
 
 ian7 
 ien3 
 
 
 viande 
 
 meat 
 
 i-an 
 
 audience 
 
 audience 
 
 ien 
 
 i-in 
 
 chrétien 
 
 christian 
 
 ion 
 
 i-on 
 
 passion 
 
 passion 
 
 oi 
 
 o-a 
 
 boite 
 
 matiLrity of wine 
 
 oie 3 
 
 ^ 
 
 boîte 
 
 box- 
 
 o-a 
 
 foie 
 
 liver 
 
 oe 7 
 
 ^ 
 
 moelle 
 
 marrow 
 
 eoi5 
 
 0-e 
 
 nageoire 
 
 fin 
 
 oi 
 
 ou-è 
 
 voisin 
 
 neighbour 
 
 oin 
 
 ou-in 
 
 besoin 
 
 ■want 
 
 oua 
 
 ou-a 
 
 rouage 
 
 wheel-work 
 
 ouâ 
 
 ou-â 
 
 nous nouâmes 
 
 we tied 
 
 ou eu 
 
 ou-eu 
 
 boueur 
 
 dust man 
 
 oue "^ 
 
 
 dénouer 
 
 to untie 
 
 oué V 
 
 ou-é 
 
 déjoué 
 
 baffled 
 
 ouée f 
 
 trouée 
 
 opening 
 
 ouai J 
 
 
 je jouai • 
 
 I played 
 
 oi "^ 
 
 
 oiseau 
 
 bird 
 
 oue y 
 
 ou-è 
 
 fouetter 
 
 to -whip 
 
 ouai 3 
 
 
 je louais 
 
 J praised 
 
 oiu 2. 
 
 
 cambouis 
 
 coom 
 
 ouie 3 
 
 ou-i 
 
 l'ouïe 
 
 the hearing" 
 
 oueii 
 
 ou-eû 
 
 noueux. 
 
 knotty 
 
 ouan> 
 ouen S 
 
 
 louange 
 
 praise [France 
 
 ou-an 
 
 Rouen 
 
 JRouen., city of 
 
OF THE FRENCH LANGUAGE. 
 
 dipbltaongs 
 
 simple sounds 
 
 1 
 
 examples. 
 
 ouin 
 
 ou-in 
 
 babouin 
 
 baboon 
 
 ouon 
 ua 
 
 ou-on 
 ou-a' 
 
 nous jouons 
 lingual 
 
 tve play 
 Ungual 
 
 ua 
 ua 
 
 u-a 
 u-â 
 
 nuage 
 nous tuâmes 
 
 cloud 
 xve killed 
 
 ueu 
 uai~^ 
 
 u-eu 
 
 lueur 
 
 je remuai 
 
 glimmering 
 J moved 
 
 ue 1 
 né > 
 ueej 
 
 u-é 
 
 éternuer 
 
 dénué 
 
 nuée 
 
 to sneeze 
 
 stript 
 
 cloud 
 
 uai5 
 ui 
 
 u-è 
 u-i 
 
 menuet 
 il suait 
 buisson 
 
 minuet 
 
 lie perspired 
 
 brisk 
 
 uie 
 
 U-Î 
 
 pluie 
 
 rain 
 
 uo 
 ueu 
 uan^ 
 ten 5 
 
 U-Ô 
 
 u-eû 
 u-an 
 
 impétuosité 
 majestueux 
 nuance 
 influence 
 
 iynpetnosity 
 majestic 
 shade 
 influence 
 
 uin 
 
 u-in 
 
 juin 
 
 Jxme 
 
 uon 
 
 u-on 
 
 nous tuons 
 
 •we kill 
 
 37. A single view of the t-wo tables, here given, -will show of what advari' 
 tage figured prommciation -will be to him, who is desirous of acquiring 
 an accurate pronunciatio7i, whether he has a master or not. Jf he has a 
 master he will be able to revise his reading lesson, and by this means 
 make great progress ; if he is deprived of the assistance of a master, he 
 xvill be able to obtain a tolerable pronunciation, which would have been 
 impossible for him, without this help. 
 
 88. The following table treats of some terminations which 
 differ very materially in pronunciation from the English. 
 English learners, in these terminations, are always inclined to 
 sound e before I or r as they do in their own language ; for 
 instance, they will pronounce aci'e, akur. 
 
 ble 
 
 ^ 
 
 bul 
 
 
 ta-ble 
 
 -li 
 
 bl-aze 
 
 bre 
 
 S 
 
 bur 
 
 1, 
 
 sa-bre 
 
 "S o 5^ 
 
 br-ace 
 
 cle"^ 
 fori 
 klej 
 
 1 
 
 S 
 
 kul 
 
 -S 
 
 miia-cle 
 
 lations mi 
 \d giving 
 have at ti 
 h words. 
 
 kl-ick 
 
 ere ^ 
 
 for[ 
 
 ■•2 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 I'll 
 
 
 krej 
 dre 
 
 «0 
 
 kur 
 dur 
 
 i 
 
 =9 
 
 a-cre 
 pou-dre 
 
 final t 
 out th( 
 ounds 
 mig JE. 
 
 cr-ane 
 dr-ain 
 
 fie 
 fre 
 
 
 fui 
 fur 
 
 
 buf-fle 
 cof-fre 
 
 these ^ 
 iving 
 : the Si 
 
 follotL 
 
 fl-ame 
 fr-a me 
 
 gle 
 
 11 
 
 gui 
 
 "S 
 
 o 
 
 an-gle 
 
 
 gl-are 
 
 gre 
 
 ii 
 
 gur 
 
 l3 
 
 mai-gre 
 
 ?^ ^ s O' 
 
 gr-ave 
 
 pie 
 
 .5^ 
 
 pul 
 
 am-ple 
 
 ^lii' 
 
 pl-ane 
 
 pre 
 
 ^ 1 
 
 pur 
 
 '6 
 
 pro-pre 
 
 ^iri 
 
 pr-aise 
 
 Ire 
 
 8 
 
 tur 
 
 
 an-tre 
 
 Irg, 
 
 tr-aiJi 
 
10 NOTES. 
 
 * In comparing this table of simple sounds of voivels with Levizac's, it 
 will be seen that though he gives but seventeen sounds I give twenty. 
 
 Since Levizac gives the short and long sounds of o and of eu, I do not 
 see why he omitted the long sound of î, oïu, and oî ou. ^ 
 
 ■j- Soon after the pubUcation of my book of Fables, at the beginning of 
 which I have drawn an approximative comparison between the French 
 and the EngUsh sounds, I saw in a number of the Yankee, then (1829) 
 published in Portland or in Boston, an article which reproved me for 
 having dared to compare the sound of è in mère with the sound of a in 
 mare, or which amounts to the same thing, for having dared to make a 
 difference between the sound of a in mare, fare, &c. and the sound of a 
 in ale, fate, &c. 
 
 At the time I made that difference I looked for no authority, but I 
 trusted to my ear, which seldom deceives me with regard to the least 
 shades in the sounds of languages. Smce the publication of the above 
 mentioned article in the Yakkee, I have made some researches, the result 
 of which has proved to me, that if I was wrong, many eminent English 
 and American orthoëpists were so too. ~ 
 
 For the information of the writer of said article in the Yajstkee I shall 
 quote the authors who are in favour of the difference I made, and still 
 make between, the above two sounds. 
 
 See J. A. CxjMMiKGs' Pronouncing Spelling Book, third edition, Bos- 
 ton, 1822 ; preface, page ix. 
 
 See John Franklin Jones' Analytical Spelling Book, second edition, 
 New York, 1824, page 14, line 10th; page 19, the word rare ; page 60, 
 the word beware ; page 61, column 4th, the word affair, and following. 
 
 See E. Hazen's Speller and Definer, New York, 1830 ; page 7, the 
 word/a^e ,• page 1 89, the words pair, pare, and pear. 
 
 See William Pelham's System of Notation, Boston, 1808, pagexxiii. 
 the words mare, tare, and care. 
 
 See Webster's 4to. Dictionary, Vol. I. Directions for the pronuncia- 
 tion of words, page 2, 17th line from the bottom. 
 
 See Webster's 8vo. Dictionary, page iv., 2ist line from the bottom. 
 There will be seen not only the opinion of Mr. Webster himself, but that 
 of Mr. J. E. Worcester of Cambridge, and of Professor Goodrich of 
 Yale College, who, we are told by Webster's preface, have had much to 
 do with the editing of his 8vo. dictionary. 
 
 In the passage referred to, it will also be seen that Perry, the English 
 orthoëpist, has made the same difference in his Dictionary, which is, and 
 has been, since its publication, the best authority quoted by well informed 
 people in England. 
 
 See T. E. Worcester's 12mo. Dictionary, New York, 1830, page iii. 
 Key to the sounds of the marked letters, and also, page xi., 14th Ihie from 
 the bottom. 
 
 See Henry Butter's Etymological Spelling Book, London, 1831, a 
 book much esteemed in England. 
 
 See William Russell's Lessons in Enunciation, Boston, 1830, page 
 12, i 1th line from the top. 
 
 Mi. William Russell is the editor of the Journal of Education (first 
 series), and taught elocution for many years in Cambridge and Boston. 
 
PUNCTUA^TION AND ACCENTUATION. 1 1 
 
 Punctuation and jîccentuation. 
 
 39. Besides the marks of punctuation, which are the same 
 both ill French and in English — comma , virgule — semicolon, 
 ; point-virgule — colon : deux points — period . un point — 
 note of interrogation 1 point d'interrogation — note ot admira- 
 tion, or exclamation ! point d'admiration ou d' exclamation 
 — the parenthesis () laparenthese — the dash — le trait de sé- 
 paration — a quotation " " guillemets ; there are other marks 
 called accents. 
 
 40. The acute accent ' accent aigu — is placed over e m 
 certain words, and gives it the sound C2]\.eà fermé ; as heard 
 in préféré, régénéré, ^c. 
 
 41. The grave accent ^ accent grave — is placed over a, e, 
 u, in certain words ; and gives to the e the sound called 
 ouvert ; as heard in mere, procès, Sfc, 
 
 42. The grave accent, put over «, u, has no influence on 
 their sound : it is used principally to distinguish one part of 
 speech from another ; for instance, to distinguish à to, from 
 a has — là there, from la the — oil where, from ou or, &c. 
 
 43. The circumflex accent '^ accent circonflexe — is placed 
 over «, e, z, o, u, in certain words, to give these vowels a 
 long sound ; as in âge, tête, épître, côte, bûche, ^c, which 
 were formerly written aage, teste, épistre, coste, busche, &c. 
 
 44. The cedilla ç cédille — is a kind of comma placed un- 
 der c, to give it the sound of s, before a, o, u, as in façade, 
 façon, reçu, Sfc. ; in which words c would be hard, and pro- 
 nounced like k in kick, were it not for the cedilla. 
 
 45. Thedioeresis •• tréma or diérèse — are tv.^o dots placed 
 over the vowels e, i, u, to indicate that these vowels are not 
 to form a diphthong with the preceding vowel, but are to be 
 pronounced separately ; as in poète, naivete, saul, <^c. 
 
 46. The hyphen - tiret or trait d''union — is used to con- 
 nect — 1st, compound words ; as belles-lettres, arc-en-ciel, S^-c. 
 2dly, the personal pronouns ; je, tu, il, elle, nous, vous, ils, 
 elles, to tlie verb, when used interrogatively : as parlé-je, 
 parlcs-tu, 4'C. 3dly, the oonjunctive pronouns ; inoi, toi, lui, 
 4'C. to the verb, when put after it ; as parles-moi, dites-hd 
 4thly, and also, to show at the end of a line, that a word has 
 been divided, part of which begins the following line. 
 
 47. The apostrophe ' apostrophe — is used to show the 
 suppression or elision of a vowel before another vowel, or 
 before an li mute ; as — V église, instead of /« église — Vliomme, 
 instead of le homme, Sfc, 
 
i2 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 INTRODUCTION TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 48. The learner is to render the English definite article 
 
 {le before a noun masculine "> 
 
 la before a noun feminine I in the sin 
 
 V before a noun masculine or feminine Ç gular. 
 beginning with a vowel or h mute J 
 
 les before nouns of either gender in the plural. 
 
 49. The learner is to render the English indefinite article 
 
 , Ç un before a noun masculine singular. 
 a o an y ^ ^^^^ before a noun feminine singular. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 the book les plantes the plants 
 
 the street un homme __^ a man 
 
 the soul une femme a -woman 
 
 the history un héros a hero. 
 
 EXERCISES, 
 the forest, the houses, the men, the court, 
 
 forêt, f. maisons, h.nmmes, cour, i. 
 
 arms, the room, the garden, the windows, 
 
 Le livre 
 la rue 
 f'ame* 
 ^histoire 
 
 Tue wood, 
 
 bois, m. 
 tlifc foot, 
 
 pied, m. 
 a history, 
 
 histoire, f. 
 a night, 
 
 nuit, f. 
 a card, 
 
 carte, f. 
 
 the 
 
 bras, 
 a novel, 
 
 roman, m. 
 the sun, 
 soleil, m. 
 a crown. 
 ecu, m. 
 
 chambre, f. 
 a foreigner, 
 
 étranger, m. 
 the moon, 
 lune, f. 
 
 jardin, m. 
 a walk, 
 
 promenade, 
 the stars, 
 étoiles, 
 
 fenêtres, 
 a day, 
 , jour, m, 
 a body, 
 corps, m 
 
 of the by 
 
 or 
 
 from the by 
 
 50. The learner will render the English prepositions 
 of and fro7n by de, ~) and when followed by the article the he will render 
 to and ai by à 5 them thus: 
 
 fdn before a noun masculine 7 ^^"-"^^" beginning with 
 I de la before a noun feminine ^ rateT"""' °' ^'^'" 
 I de r before any noun beginning with a voivel or h mute. 
 \jdes before any noun in the plural. 
 
 , , r„„ before a noun masculine >mgular beginning with 
 
 tothehy a /a before a noun feminine \ ^ consonant ox h ^^x- 
 
 or -^ J rated. 
 
 at the by 1 à /' before any noun beginning with a vo-ael or h mute 
 \jCAix before any noun in the plural. 
 
 51. When the above prepositions of, from 
 a or an, he will render them thus : 
 
 r J- X. ^ f^''"i before a noun masculine. 
 
 of a ox from a by | ^^.^^^^ ^^^^^^ ^ ^^^^ feminine. 
 
 , '} à un before a noun masculine. 
 foaor at a hy ^ ^ ^^^^^ ^^^^^^ ^ ^^^^ feminine. 
 
 to, and at, are followed by 
 
 • Lévjzac in his own grammar writes âme contrary to the best authorities. See 
 Grammaire des Grammaires, 7t,h éd. page 1073. 
 
TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 m 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Du parc 
 de la rivièro 
 de l'esprit 
 des carrosses 
 au parc 
 à la rivière 
 
 of the park à l'esprit 
 
 of the river aux carrosses 
 
 of the mind d'un jour 
 
 of the coaches d'une nuit 
 to the park 
 to tlie river 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 The palace of the king, of the queen, 
 
 palais, m. roi, reine, 
 
 king, to the queen, to the man, 
 
 a un jour 
 à une nuit 
 
 to the mind 
 to the coaches 
 of a day 
 of a night 
 to a day 
 to a night 
 
 of the man, to the 
 
 h.omme, 
 to the men, from 
 
 a balcony, from a window. 
 
 of a prince. 
 
 to a princess, 
 
 , balcon, m. fenêtre, f. 
 
 prince. 
 
 princesse. 
 
 of the gardens, of the evening. 
 
 to the courtiers. 
 
 of a table, 
 
 jardins, soir, m. 
 
 courtisans. 
 
 table, f. 
 
 to the master, to a lady, 
 
 of the soul, of the horse, 
 
 to a cat, 
 
 maître, dame. 
 
 ame, f. cheval, chat, va. 
 
 of the houses, of a carpet. 
 
 
 
 maisons, tapis, 
 
 m. 
 
 
 
 55. The learner will render 
 
 
 
 
 (a) 
 
 .(b) 
 
 (c) 
 
 singidar, m. 
 
 sing.f. plur. m., and f. 
 
 of ox from my by 
 
 de mon 
 
 de ma 
 
 de mes 
 
 of or from thy by 
 
 de ton 
 
 de ta 
 
 de tes 
 
 of ox from his"^ 
 
 
 , 
 
 
 of or from her C by 
 
 de son 
 
 de sa 
 
 de ses 
 
 of or from itsj 
 
 
 
 
 .of or from our by 
 
 de notre 
 
 de notre 
 
 de nos 
 
 of or from yoiir by 
 
 de votre 
 
 de votre 
 
 de vos 
 
 of or fr 0711 their by 
 
 de leur 
 
 de leur 
 
 de leurs 
 
 to or at my by 
 
 à mon 
 
 à ma 
 
 à mes 
 
 to or at thy by 
 
 à ton 
 
 à ta 
 
 à tes 
 
 to or at his'^ 
 
 to or at her' y by 
 
 to or at its j 
 
 
 
 
 à son 
 
 à sa 
 
 à ses 
 
 
 
 
 to or at our by 
 
 à notre 
 
 à notre 
 
 à nos 
 
 to or at your by 
 
 à votre 
 
 à votre 
 
 à vos 
 
 to or at their by 
 
 à leur 
 
 à leur 
 
 à leurs. 
 
 (?■) Mon, ton, son, are put before nouns singular m. and before nouns 
 sing. f. when the sing. f. nouns begin with a voivel or an h mute. 
 
 (b) Ma, ta, sa, are put before nouns singular f. beginning with a con- 
 sonant or an h aspirated. 
 
 (c) Mes, tes, ses, are put before any nouns plural m. or f. 
 53. The learner will render 
 
 "ce before a noun singular 
 m. beginning with a con- 
 sonant or an h aspirated. 
 
 cet before a noun singular 
 m. beginning with a vow- 
 el or h mute. 
 
 cette before any noun sin- 
 gular 1. 
 
 of this, of that, from this, from thai hy de J 
 to this, to that, at this, at that, by à "^ 
 
s 
 
 14 INTRODUCTION 
 
 of these, of those, from these, from those, by de ces") before aray noun 
 to these, to those, at these, at those, by à ces S in the plural. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 de mon père of my father à leur travail to tJieir -work 
 
 à ta mère to thy mother de cette terrace from this terrace 
 
 de son frère of his brother de ce lieu of that place 
 
 de notre ville of our town de cet homme of this man 
 
 à votre maison to your hoiise de ces arbres of these trees 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 Of my clothes, of thy handkerchief, of his pocket, of youi 
 
 habits, mouchoir, m. poche, f. 
 
 letters, of our treasure, to their house, of this steeple of 
 lettres, trésor, m. maison, f. clocher, m. 
 
 that hero, of this tower, of these models, of my sister, to 
 
 héros, tour, f. modèles, sœur, 
 
 your relations, the top of this mountain, to my friend, of these 
 parens, sommet m. montagne, f. a7ni, m. 
 
 pleasures, of our duties, to their connexions, of his acquaintances, 
 plaisirs, devoirs, liaisons, connaissances, 
 
 to my neighbours. 
 voisins. 
 
 ELISION. 
 
 54. The Apostrophe ' marks, we have said, (page 11, art. 
 47.) the suppression of a vowel before another vowel or an h 
 mute. 
 
 55. This suppression is called Elision, The only vowels 
 that suffer elision before another vowel or h mute are a, e, i. 
 
 56. The vowel i is only suppressed in the word si when 
 it comes before either of the two following words il, he or it 
 — ils, they, thus : s'z7, if he or if it, instead of si il, if he or 
 if it — sHls, if they, instead of si ils, if they. 
 
 57. The vowels a, e, are suppressed in the following words : 
 when these words are placed before other words beginning 
 with a vowel or h mute. 
 
 58. Throughout this book, whenever a word begins with an h mute, 
 the h will be an italic h if the French word is in Roman ; if in italics, 
 then a . will be put after the h — thus, h.omme. 
 
 si if See article 56. above. 
 
 le the before a vowel, or /i mute, 1' 
 
 le* him " " " V 
 
 le* it^^ " " « r 
 
 Za tlie « « ** 1' 
 
TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 15 
 
 la* 
 
 her 1 
 
 la* 
 
 it 
 
 J^* 
 
 I 
 
 me 
 
 me 
 
 te 
 
 thee 
 
 fi 
 
 himself 
 
 iC 
 
 herself 
 
 se 
 
 itsel 
 
 se 
 
 themselves 
 
 ce 
 
 this 
 
 ce 
 
 that 
 
 ce* 
 
 it 
 
 de 
 
 of 
 
 ne 
 
 not 
 
 que 
 
 that 
 
 que 
 
 which 
 
 que 
 
 whom 
 
 parcegue 
 
 because 
 
 quoique 
 
 although 
 
 puisque 
 
 since 
 
 jusque 
 
 till 
 
 vu que 
 
 since 
 
 dès que 
 
 as soon as 
 
 quelque 
 
 some 
 
 entre 
 
 between 
 
 before a vowel or h mute, 
 
 T 
 
 V 
 
 V 
 
 j' 
 
 m» 
 f 
 s' 
 s» 
 
 9' 
 
 c' 
 
 c' 
 c' 
 
 d' 
 
 n' 
 
 qi; 
 
 qu' 
 
 qu' 
 
 parcequ» 
 
 quoiqu' 
 
 puisqu' 
 
 jusqu' 
 
 VÛ qu' 
 
 dès qu' 
 
 quelqu' 
 
 entre 
 
 59. The e in entre, before eux, elles and autre, may or may not be 
 suppressed ; it is indifferent whether we write, entre eux, or entr'eu-x^ 
 eîitre elles, or entr'elles — entre autres, or entr* autres. 
 
 60. *When the words (all pronouns) thus marked * in the above list, are p;it 
 after the verb of which thej- are the nominative — or by which they are governeo 
 in the objective case — they do not suffer elision, although the word that comes 
 after them begins with a vowel or an h mute— thus, apportez-le ici, est-ce à lui, dec. 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 The soul, the heroine, the mind, he loves him, she loves her 
 ame,ï. héroïne, f. esprit, m., il ^aime He, elle ^aime Ha, 
 
 I love this man, you do not understand me, he eeteems thee, 
 
 je aime h.omme, vous * 7ic ^pas ^entendez hney il "^estime He, 
 
 he goes away 
 se en va 
 
 he comes, 
 vient. 
 
 it was the golden age, 
 ce était "^d^nr ir 
 
 if they please, 
 ils veulent, 
 
 do not go there, if 
 2J'ûr ^âg-e, *^ne^pas "^ allez ^là, si 
 
 what has he said 1 till night, 
 
 que a-t- il dit ? jusqxie au soir, m 
 
 though he says, since he knows, when he saw, between them, 
 quoique dise, puisque sait, lorsque vit, entre eux, 
 
 somebody is come. 
 quelque un est venu. 
 
 iil. In the following French negative modes of speech, which answer 
 •to the accompanying English translation, the caret " points out the place 
 which the French verb must occupy, whenever it is not in the inlinitive 
 niood. 
 
to 
 
 INTKODUCTION 
 
 JSTot 
 
 ne pas 
 ne*point 
 
 never ne jamais 
 nothing- ne'^rien 
 
 nobody ne^personne 
 
 not a jot ne " goutte 
 ne* nulle 
 
 ■we have not 
 
 je ne suis pas, &c. / am not, &c^ 
 
 nous n'avoîis 
 
 point, 
 
 il ne Joue jamais, he never plat^j 
 
 vous ne dites '} , . 
 
 > you say nothing. 
 
 rien, 
 
 ^as <( je ne vois per- 
 sonne, 
 
 je ne vois goutte, 
 
 no -where 
 
 part 
 
 / see nobody. 
 
 "^ I do not see, or 
 >/ see not in the 
 J least. 
 
 je ne vais nulle ~) 
 
 L part. 
 
 \Igo 
 
 no Tvhet^e. 
 
 62. But in compound tenses, it is the auxiliary verb that parts the ne- 
 gative ?ie from Uie pas, or point, &c. that accompanies it, as nous n'avons 
 point parlé, -we have not spoken ; on n'aurait jamais cru, one could never 
 have believed. 
 
 63. The addition of pas, or point, to the negative particle ne, must not 
 be considered as a second negation ; but only as a complimentai part of 
 it. For in such cases, pas, point, goutte, are mere restrictive terms, 
 nearly resembling the English word, jot, bit, tittle, ' sometimes added to 
 not, with this difference, that pas and point in French have nothing trivial 
 in them. 
 
 I do not say, I have not said, I have never seen, I never (tell a 
 * dis, ai dit, vu, 
 
 falsehood), I do nothing, I have done nothhig, is he not arrived 1 
 mens, fais fait est-il arrivé ? 
 
 does he not come 1 I see nothing, has he never seen ? he never loses 
 * HI ^vieiit ? vois a-t- vu ? perd 
 
 his time, that (is worth) nothing, I met nobody. 
 temps, m.. cela vaut rencontrai 
 
 N. B. The above exercise and direction, article 61, are out of place. 
 Livizac ought to have remembered that the scholar knoivs as yet nothing 
 about simple and compoimd tenses. 
 
 64. There are many words which are alike in both languages, and 
 others which differ only in their termination. 
 
 65. The erpressions, which are perfectly alike, are particularly those 
 that have the following terminations : 
 
 Ç animal, cardinal, fatal, general, local, moral, natal, origi- 
 
 ^ nal, principal, &c. 
 
 Ç capable, fable, &c. bible, éKgible, &c. noble, double, 
 
 (_ soluble, insoluble, «fee. 
 
 Ç face, grimace, grace, place, préface; race, surface, trace, 
 
 i «fee. 
 
 Ç chance, complaisance, extravagance, ignorance, lance, 
 
 C. tempérance, «fee. 
 
 5 abstinence, conférence, continence, diligence, éloquenoCj 
 
 c patience, «fee. - 
 
 C artifice, auspices, édifice, justice, injustice, office, orifice, 
 
 C précipice, solstice, &c 
 
 -al 
 -ble 
 
TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 17 
 
 acîe 
 -ade 
 
 I ^^ Çmiiucîe, oracle, obstacle, réceptacle, tabernacle, specta- 
 (_ cle, &c. 
 Ç ajnbuscade, cavalcade, brigade, esplanade serenade, ré- 
 
 -age 
 
 -ege 
 
 -ge 
 
 -ule 
 
 ■ile 
 
 -ion 
 -ant 
 
 -ent 
 
 -arv 
 -or y 
 
 -cy 
 
 -ty 
 
 -oils 
 -our 
 or 
 -ine 
 -ivc 
 -ry 
 -dy 
 
 \ trograde, &c. 
 
 Ç ^ge, adage, bandage, cage, cordage, image, page, plumage, 
 
 C rage, &c. 
 
 college, privilege, sacrilege, siege, sortilege, &c. 
 Ç vestige, doge, barge, charge, orange, forge, rouge, refuge, 
 C déluge, &;c. 
 
 5 globule, ridicule, animalcule, corpuscule, formule, module, 
 t mule, pustule, valvule, &c. 
 
 5 bile, débile, agile, docile, ductile, facile, fragile, nubile, 
 \ reptile, versatile, &c. 
 
 5 carabine, fascine, doctrine, heroine, machine, marine, fa- 
 t mine, mine, rapine, &c. 
 
 S action, fraction, légion, nation, opinion, passion, question, 
 C. religion, &c. 
 
 S arrogant, constant, élégant, éléphant, pétulant, piquant, 
 (- poignant, vigilant, &c. 
 
 5 absent, accident, compliment, argument, content, élément, 
 C fréquent, serpent, &c. 
 
 66 Many other English words require only the change of termination, 
 b» the follovying manner : 
 
 into -gie as energy 
 
 -aire — military 
 
 -oire — glory 
 
 -ce — clemency 
 
 — beauty 
 
 — dangerous 
 
 — favour 
 • — error 
 -— clandestine 
 
 — expressive 
 
 — fury 
 
 — perfidy 
 
 Ç-eux"^ r-eus( 
 
 < -if V make their feminine in <, -ive 
 C.-in J C.-i^6 
 
 ,'7 EXERCISE. 
 
 The beauty of the fable, the horror of 
 f. f. h.orreur, m. 
 
 the atrocity of this action, the violence of his passions the simplicity of 
 
 f. f. f. passions f. 
 
 that machine an ^audacious 'conspirator, the absurdity of that opinion. 
 
 f. f. f. 
 
 the military evolutions, an ^industrious 'nation, an ^important' victory, 
 
 ^militaires ^évolutions, f hnportante f. 
 
 an ^alimentary 'pension, a ^dangerous 'animal, a2figuiative 'expression, 
 
 f. m. f. 
 
 a famous general, his ^constant 'generosity, he is incapable of attention, 
 constante f. est f. 
 
 b3 
 
 -té 
 
 -eux 
 
 -eur 
 
 -eur 
 
 -in 
 
 -if 
 
 -rie 
 
 -die 
 
 N. B. Adjectives in- 
 
 énergie 
 
 militaire 
 
 gloire 
 
 clémencb 
 
 beauté 
 
 dangereux 
 
 faveui 
 
 erreur 
 
 clandestin 
 
 expressif 
 
 furie 
 
 perfidie 
 
 vice,the utility of science, 
 art. m. f. art. f. 
 
18 INTRODUCTION TO THE EXERCISES, 
 
 hb imprudence is visible, iiis fidelity is indubitable, she is very at- 
 
 f. f. elle ires- 
 
 tentive, your clemency is admirable, the destruction of his fortune was 
 f. f. t f. fut 
 
 the consequence of his temerity, she is very scrupulous, his condition 
 
 f. f. très- r. f. 
 
 IS horrible, his parents are very miserable, this historj'^ is incontestable, 
 
 parens sont misérables, f. 
 
 your facility is prodigious, his perfidy is odious, it was a 'horrible -famine, 
 
 f. perfidie, f. ce était f. 
 
 the sublimity of his sentiments is still preferable to the energy of his 
 
 f. sentimens encore énergie, f. 
 
 expressions, it was a 2decisive 'action, the carnage was terrible, that 
 expressions, f. f. m..fut 
 
 obstacle is invincible, this instrument is not harmonious, the prosperity 
 
 m. m, f. 
 
 of the wicked is not durable, your ^insidious 'presents ai-e not acceptable, 
 méchans, présens sont acceptablts, 
 
 his memory is truly extraordinary, that is his ^principal 'occupation, a 
 
 f. vraiment ce est principale f. 
 
 ^central 'position, his extravagance is visible, these arguments are 
 centrale f. f. argwnens 
 
 insoluble. 
 insolubles 
 
 PART I. 
 
 OF V/ORDS CONSIDERED IN THEIR NATURE AND INFLECTIONS, 
 
 67. There are, in French, nine sorts of words, or parts of speech, namely : 
 
 1. Substantive, or Noun, 4. Pronoun, 7. Preposition, 
 
 2. Article, 5. Verb, 8. Conjunction, 
 
 3. Adjective, 6. A^dverb, 9. Interjection. 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 OF THE SUBSTANTIV^E, OR NOUN. 
 
 68. The substantive is a word, which serves to name a person, or things 
 as Pierre, Peter ; livre, book, &c. 
 
 69. There are two sorts of substantives, the stibstantive proper, or 
 proper name, and the sîibstantive common, also called appellative. 
 
 70. The proper name is that which is applied to a particular person, or 
 thing, as César, Caesar ; la Tamise, the Thames. 
 
 71. The sicbsta?itive common is that which belongs to a whole class of 
 objects. The word hojnme, man, is a substantive common, as it is appli- 
 cable to any individual. 
 
 72 Of these nouns, some are collective, and others alstract. 
 
 7b. Collective nouns express either a whole mass, as U7ie armée, an 
 army ; une forêt, a forest : or a partial assemblage, as une quantité de, &c., a 
 quantity of ; la plupart, most part, &c. 
 
 74. abstract nouns are the names of qualities abstracted from their 
 subjects, as surface, rondeur, science, sagesse ; surface, roundness, know- 
 ledge, wisdom, &c. 
 
 75. In substantives, are to be considered Gender and J^umber. 
 
19 
 
 OF GENDERS. 
 
 76. GENDfiii is the distinction of sex, or the difference be- 
 tween male and female. 
 
 77. There are in the French Language but two Genders : 
 the Masculine, which belongs to men and animals of the male 
 kind ; as, John, lion, ^c. The Feminiiie, which belongs to 
 women or animals of the female kind ; as, Lucy, lionness, ^c. 
 
 78. This distinction has, through imifetion, been extended 
 in the French to all those substantives (inanimate objects) that 
 are neither male nor female ; and which, in English, are of the 
 neuter gender. Thus in French — un livre a book, is mascu- 
 line — une table a table, is feminine, 8fc. ^ 
 
 79. The gender of French nouns, which in English are 
 neuter, is commonly ascertained by their ternsinations. 
 
 A great number of writers have endeavoured to give rnles: 
 but none have had the patience to go carefully over the 
 " Dictionnaire de l'Académie," to make themselves sure 
 that the rules they were giving embraced a greater number 
 of words, than the list of exceptions to^those rules. 
 
 They ail found it less irksome, after having given the ex- 
 ceptions they could remember, to have recourse to this 
 phrase — " You must except such and such words ; and others 
 that usage will teach.'' By this method it is evident that the 
 scholar cannot know whether the nouns, whose gender he 
 wants to ascertain, come under the rules given, or is one of 
 those words that usage is to teach him: in this predicament he 
 must have recourse to a dictionary; and if there is none with- 
 in his reach, he must expose himself to make a blunder in the 
 gender of some noun, which will sometimes change entirely 
 the meaning of his phrase, and sometimes excite laughter. 
 
 The follov/ing few pages contain A Treatise on the Gen- 
 ders OF French Nouns, as short as the subject would admit. 
 The rules are precise, and the list of exceptions complete ; so 
 that any person, after having learned the rules and exceptions, 
 can, without the help of any dictionary, which he cannot 
 always carry about him, ascertain at once the gender of any 
 noun contained in the Dictionnaire de l'AcadÉihie and io 
 the supplement to that work. 
 
m 
 
 A. Boîmar's Complete Treatise 
 
 MASCULINE, 
 
 FROM THEIR SIGNIFICATION. 
 
 1. Dieu God-^homme man — all animals of the male kind — 
 
 lion lion, 6lc. — and all those objects to which we fancifully 
 attribute masculine qualities ; as — ange angel — satire satyr 
 — soleil sun, 6lc. 
 
 2. The names of Trees ; as — chêne oak — peuplier |)apZar, &.c. 
 
 Exception. 
 yeuse hohn. 
 
 3. The names of Shrubs ; as — rosier rose-bush, &c. 
 
 Exceptions. 
 aubépine hawthorn, ronce briar, 
 
 bourdaine black alder, 
 épine thorn, 
 
 4. The names of the Seasons of the year; printems spring-^ 
 
 été summer, &c. 
 
 automne autumn, is of both genders. 
 
 5. The names of the Days of the week ; dimanche Sunday—^ 
 
 lundi monday, &-c. 
 
 6. The names of Metals and Minerals ; as^ — fer iron-^ 
 
 mercure mercury, &lc. 
 
 7 The names of Colours; as— noir black — blanc white, &c. 
 
 8 The letters of the Alphabet ; as — -un a — un b, &c. 
 
 9. Adjectives, numeral adjectives, pronouns, verbs, adverbs, 
 prepositions, conjunctions, and interjections, used sub- 
 stantively ; as — le bon good—la manger the eating — un 
 quart oiie fourth — un dixième one tenth, &c. 
 Exceptions. 
 
 une moitié a half, and all Nos. ending with aiiie as 
 
 douzaine, quinzaine, &;c. 
 une antique antique, "j are fem. statue statue or 
 
 une courbe a curve, [dicular, I médaille medal in the 
 une perpendiculaire a perpen- | 1st, andligne line in the 
 une tSingentG a tangent J ) three last being underst. 
 
21 
 
 on the Genders of French Nouns. 
 
 FEMININE, 
 
 FROM THEIR SIGNIFICATION. 
 
 1. Déesse goddess — femme woman — all animals of the female 
 
 kind; lionne lioness — and all those objects to which we 
 fancifully attribute^emim/ze qualities ; as — ^^lune moon., &;c. 
 
 2. The names of Virtues ; as — modestie modesty, &c. 
 
 Exceptions. 
 courage courage, mérite merit. 
 
 3. The names of Vices ; as — jalousie jeaZows^/, &c. 
 
 4. The names of Holy-days ; as — Toussaint all-saint'' s day^ 
 
 Pâque the passover, <fec. 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 Pâque or Pâques easier, is masculine. 
 
 Noël Christmas, is masculine. 
 
 N. B. When the diminutive mi half, is prefixed to a noun, the noun is then 
 fern, as La mi-carême. All other diminutives follow the gender of the nouns 
 from which they are derived ; thus une globule a small globe, is mase. 
 
 5. The names of the Four Parts of the world ; as — Europe 
 
 Europe — Amérique America, &;c. 
 
 FEMININE, 
 
 FROM their termination. 
 
 Nouns with the following terminations are feminine, 
 1. té] as — santé health — bonté goodness, &;c 
 Exceptions. 
 
 aparté aside, comité committee, 
 arrêté decree, comté county, 
 bénédicité grace côté side, 
 at meal. 
 
 2. tie] as — RUiitié friendship — moitié half, &c. 
 
 3. ion] as — nation nation — religion religion, &;c 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 pâté pie, 
 
 précipité precipitate, 
 
 traité treaty or treatise 
 
 bastion bastion, 
 best) on beak-head, 
 brimborion bauble, 
 
 camion miniJcin pin, 
 galion galleon, 
 lampion small lamp, 
 
 pion pawn, 
 scion twig, 
 talion retaliation 
 
22 bolmar's complete treatise 
 
 MASCULINE. 
 
 10. Nouns compounded of a verb and a noun are also mascu- 
 
 line ; as — cure-dent tooth-pick — casse-noisette nut-cracker 
 — tourne-broche a jack, &c. Although dent, noisette, 
 . broche, are feminine. 
 
 Exception. 
 garde-robe wardrobe. 
 
 11. The names of the Cardinal Points, and of the winds ; 
 
 as— le sud the south — le nord the north, &c. 
 Exceptions. 
 bise north-east wind, I tramontane tramontane, 
 brise light wind, \ mousson monsoon, 
 
 12. The names of Empires, Kingdoms, and Countries ; as — 
 
 Brésil Brasil — Portugal Portugal, &.c. 
 
 Exceptions. 
 Those names of Empires, Kingdoms, and Countries, that 
 end with e mute, are feminine; as — Russie Russia — 
 France France, &c. 
 
 However, Bengale Bengal — Mexique Mexico — Pé- 
 loponèse Peloponnesus — Le Caire Cairo — are masculine^ 
 although ending with e mute. 
 
 13. The names of Mountains ; as — Caucase Caucasus — 
 
 Parnasse Parnassus — Vésuve Vesuvius, &c. 
 Exceptions. 
 Alpes, Cordillière, | Pyrenees, Vosges. 
 
 14. The names of Towns, Boroughs, and Villages ; some 
 
 are masculine, some feminine ; and as no good rule can 
 be given it is better both for a Frenchman and a 
 foreigner, to avoid mistake, to use after them, the words 
 ville, hour g, village — and say, for instance — Paris est une 
 belle ville Paris is a fine town, &c. instead of Paris est 
 beau Paris is fine. 
 
 15. The names of Rivers, follow their termination, if they 
 
 end with any other letter except e mute, they are mas- 
 culine ; as — le Rhin the Rhine — le Nil the Nile, &lc. 
 Those ending in e mute, are feminine ; as — la Seine 
 the Seine — la Tamise the Thames, &c. 
 
 ^ Exceptions. 
 
 le Rhône, le Tibre, le Danube, le Cocyte, are masculiiie, 
 though they end with e mute 
 
ON THE GENDERS OF FRENCH NOUNS 
 
 2n 
 
 FEMININE. 
 
 4. son] as — chanson soiig" — maison house, &c. 
 
 Exceptions. 
 blason heraldry, poison poison, 
 
 diapason diapason, tison firebrand. 
 oison gosling- 
 
 N. B. All nouns ending with sson or on, except tliose 
 ending with the above terminations (ion and son) are 
 masculine, according to the rule 1st, in the masculine 
 column ; all nouns ending with a consonant are masculine. 
 For the exceptions, see the table annexed to that article. 
 
 5. eur] as — fureur fury — douceur mildness, &lc. 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 bonheur happiness, 
 chœur chorus, 
 cœur heart, 
 déshonneur dishonour, 
 équateur equator, 
 
 extérieur the outside, 
 honneur honour, 
 intérieur the inside, 
 labeur labour. 
 malheur misfortune. 
 
 Except also all nouns ending with eur, which can only be 
 applied to man ; as — docteur doctor, &c. And also 
 those nouns ending with eur, which have a feminine, 
 as- — masculine, acteur actor — feminine, actrice actress — 
 masculine, parleur talker — feminine, parle^use talker — 
 ma5;c. pécheur sinner — fem. pécheresse sinner, &c. 
 
 All nouns ending with e mute, are feminine, provided 
 they be neither comprised under the rules of Masculine 
 nouns, nor in the following list of those Masculine 
 nouns ending with e mute, which cannot be brought 
 under any particular rule. 
 
 List of Nouns which cannot be brought under any particu- 
 lar rule, and which are Masculine, though ending with c 
 mute. 
 
 Abaque 
 
 Abacus. 
 
 aide 
 
 assistant. 
 
 acousmate 
 
 acousma. 
 
 aide 
 
 support, is fem. 
 
 acrostiche 
 
 acrostic. 
 
 aigle 
 
 eagle (bird) or a 
 
 acte 
 
 act. 
 
 
 great genius. 
 
 adminicule 
 
 adminicle. 
 
 aigle 
 
 eagle (a standard,) is 
 
 adverbe 
 
 adverb. 
 
 
 [fem. 
 
24 
 
 BOLMAR S COMPLETE TREATISB 
 
 MASCULINE, 
 
 16. The names of some Animals, Birds, Fish, Shell-fish; 
 Reptiles, and Insects, in which the male is not dis- 
 tinguished from the female, and that do not end with 
 e mute ; as — ours bear — vautour vulture — saumon sal- 
 mon — homard lobster- — ver nwrm, &c. 
 
 souns mouse, 
 chauve-souris bat. 
 
 Exceptions. 
 fourmi ant, 
 perdrix partridge, 
 
 Those names of animals, birds, fish, shell-fish, reptiles 
 and insects, in which the 77iale is not distinguished from 
 the female, and that end with e mute, are feminine, 
 as — panthère panther — colombe dove — truite trout — 
 huître oyster — vipère viper — mouche jîî/, &/C. 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 aigle eagle, 
 bievre beaver, 
 buffle buffalo, 
 capricorne Capricorn, 
 crabe crab, 
 
 cygne swan, 
 dromadaire dromedary ^ 
 lièvre hare, 
 merle black-bird, 
 rouge-gorge redbreast. 
 
 MASCULINE 
 
 FROM their TERMINATION 
 
 l. Nouns ending with a consonant ; as — fusil «-w/z, dec. 
 Exceptions. 
 
 amours amours, flame. 
 
 amours loves, plural façon making, 
 
 of amour is masc. 
 boisson beverage, 
 chair^es^, 
 chaux lime, 
 clef key, lfeifi?ig, 
 contrefaçon counter- 
 cour yard, 
 croix cross, 
 cuiller spoon, 
 cuisson baking, 
 délices delights, 
 délice delight, in the 
 
 singular is masc. 
 dent tooth, 
 
 dot dower. 
 
 faim hunger, 
 faux sithe, 
 fin end, 
 
 fin main point, is 
 fois time. [mas. 
 forêt forest, 
 gent nation, race, 
 gens people m. & f. 
 hart halter, 
 leçon lesson, 
 main hand, 
 mœurs manners, 
 mer sea, 
 moisson harvest. 
 
 mort death, 
 
 nef nave, 
 
 noix walnut, 
 
 nuit night, 
 
 paix peace, 
 
 part share, 
 
 plupart most part, 
 
 poix pitch, 
 
 prémices first fruits, 
 
 rançon ransom, 
 
 soif thirst, 
 
 tour toiver, 
 
 tour trick, is mas. 
 
 toux cough, 
 
 vis screw 
 
 voix voice. 
 
ON THE GENDERS OF FRENCH NOUNS. 
 
 25 
 
 List of Masculine nouns, ending with e mule. 
 
 alvéole 
 
 alveolus. 
 
 caustique 
 
 caustic. 
 
 
 C combination of 
 
 cénotaphe 
 
 cenotaph. 
 
 ambe 
 
 < two numbers at 
 
 cerne 
 
 circle. 
 
 
 ( the lottery. 
 
 chambranle 
 
 jamb. 
 
 amiante 
 
 amiantus. 
 
 chose (quelque) something. 
 
 amulette 
 
 amulet. 
 
 chose 
 
 thing, is fem 
 
 animalcule 
 
 animalcule. 
 
 cimeterre 
 
 cimeter. 
 
 antidote 
 
 antidote. 
 
 cimetière 
 
 church-yard. 
 
 antipode 
 
 antipodes. 
 
 cippe 
 
 cippus. 
 
 aphélie 
 
 aphelion. 
 
 cirque 
 
 circus. 
 
 apogée 
 
 apogee. 
 
 cistophore 
 
 cistophorus. 
 
 apographe 
 
 autograph. 
 
 cloaque 
 
 sink. 
 
 apologue 
 
 apologue. 
 
 coche 
 
 barge. 
 
 aromate 
 
 aromatic. 
 
 coche 
 
 notch, is fem 
 
 astérisque 
 
 asterisk. 
 
 code 
 
 code 
 
 astragale 
 
 astragal. 
 
 codicille 
 
 codicil. 
 
 athénée 
 
 athceneum. 
 
 codille 
 
 codil. 
 
 augure 
 
 augur. 
 
 cotisée 
 
 colisoeum. 
 
 automate 
 
 automaton. 
 
 colloque 
 
 colloquy. 
 
 axe 
 
 axis, [baptism. 
 
 collyre 
 
 collyrium. 
 
 baptistère 
 
 certificate of 
 
 collosse 
 
 colossus. 
 
 basalte 
 
 basaltes. 
 
 colure 
 
 colure. 
 
 bécarre 
 
 c-sharp. 
 
 commerce 
 
 trade. 
 
 béjaune 
 
 ninny. 
 
 compte 
 
 account. 
 
 beurre 
 
 butter. 
 
 conciliabule 
 
 conventicle. 
 
 branle 
 
 jogging. 
 
 conclave 
 
 conclave. 
 
 caducée 
 
 caduceum. [ing. 
 
 cône 
 
 cone. 
 
 calque 
 
 counter-draw- 
 
 conte 
 
 tale. 
 
 calville 
 
 calville. 
 
 contrôle 
 
 register. 
 
 camée 
 
 camea. 
 
 conventicule 
 
 private meeting. 
 
 campestre 
 
 campestre. 
 
 corpuscule 
 
 corpuscle. 
 
 camphre 
 
 camphire. 
 
 corymbe 
 
 corymbus. 
 
 cantique 
 
 canticle. 
 
 coryphée 
 
 coryphoeus. 
 
 capitole 
 
 capital. [teer. 
 
 cothurne 
 
 buskin. 
 
 câpre 
 
 a sort of a priva- 
 
 coude 
 
 elbow. 
 
 câpre 
 
 caper {a pickle) 
 
 courage 
 
 courage. 
 
 capuce 
 
 capuche [isfem. 
 
 crâne 
 
 skull. 
 
 carrosse 
 
 coach. 
 
 cratère 
 
 crater. 
 
 caractère 
 
 character. 
 
 crêpe 
 
 crape. 
 
 casque 
 
 helmet. 
 
 crêpe 
 
 a kind of pan- 
 
 calafalque 
 
 catafalco. 
 
 
 cake, is fem. 
 
 catalogue 
 
 catalogue. 
 
 crépuscule 
 
 twilight. 
 
 catarrhe 
 
 catarrh. 
 
 C 
 
 cromorne 
 
 krumhorn. 
 
m 
 
 BOLMAR s COMPLETE TREATISE 
 
 MASCULINE. 
 
 après-midi after- 
 foi faith, [noon. 
 
 merci thank, is masc. 
 paroi partition* 
 
 From the Masculine nouns, that end with a consonant — 
 except, also, nouns ending with 
 
 ion J which are feminine, with very few exceptions ; 
 son > see these terminations among the feminine 
 eur J terminations. 
 Nouns ending with the following letters, are Masculine 
 2 a] as — opéra opera — sofa sofa, &c. 
 3. é] as — café coffee — dé thimble, <&c. 
 Exceptions. 
 Nouns ending with 
 
 •^ > are feminine ; see feminine terminations. 
 
 4 i] as — parti party — pli fold, &c. 
 Exceptions. 
 loi law, 
 merci mercy, 
 
 5. o] as — piano piano— nnmexo number, &c. 
 
 Exceptions. 
 albugo albugo, \ virago virago, 
 
 6. u] as — chapeau hat — couteau knife, &c. 
 
 Exceptions. 
 eau water, I peau skin, I vertu virtue, 
 
 glu bird-lime, \ tribu tribe, \ 
 
 7. ge] as — usage wsa^e— cirage blacking. 
 
 Exceptions. 
 grange barn, orge barley, 
 
 horloge clock, page page of a book, 
 
 hypallage hypallage, parasange parasang, 
 image image, 
 jauge gage, 
 litige litigation, 
 loge hut, box. 
 longe loin, [dre, 
 malerage violent de- 
 méninge meninges, 
 à la nage swimming, 
 neige siiow, 
 orange orange^ 
 
 alonge eking-piece, 
 apophyge apophyge, 
 auge trough, 
 bauge retreat of a 
 cage cage,\wild boar, 
 enallage enallage, 
 epitoge Roman coat, 
 éponge sponge, 
 fangc mire, 
 frange fringe, 
 forge forge, 
 gorge throat, 
 gouge gouge, 
 
 phalange phalanx, 
 plage fat shore, 
 piirge cleansing, • 
 rage rage, 
 rechange re-eX' 
 serge serge, [change 
 tige stalk, 
 toge Roman gown, 
 vendange vintage, 
 vidange clearing. 
 
^ 
 
 ON THE GENDER 
 
 OF FRENCH NOONS. 
 
 List of Masculine nouns, ending with e mute. 
 
 cube 
 
 cube. 
 
 génie 
 
 genius. 
 
 culte 
 
 worship. 
 
 genre 
 
 gender. 
 
 decalogue 
 
 decalogik. 
 
 gîte 
 
 abode. 
 
 décompte 
 
 discount. 
 
 glaive 
 
 sword. 
 
 dédale 
 
 labyrinth. 
 
 globe 
 
 globe. 
 
 délire 
 
 delirium. 
 
 globule 
 
 globule. 
 
 démérite 
 
 demerit. 
 
 golfe 
 
 gulf. 
 
 derrière 
 
 back part. 
 
 grade 
 
 degree. 
 
 diacode 
 
 dyacodium. 
 
 greffe 
 
 rolls, graft. 
 
 dialecte 
 
 dialect. 
 
 groupe 
 
 group. 
 
 dialogue 
 
 dialogue. 
 
 guide 
 
 guide, tutor. 
 
 dièse 
 
 sharp. 
 
 guide is fern. 
 
 rein. 
 
 diocèse 
 
 diocese. 
 
 gymnase 
 
 gymnasium. 
 
 disque 
 
 disk. 
 
 gynécée 
 
 gymnceceum. 
 
 distique 
 
 distich 
 
 gypse 
 
 gypsum. 
 
 dithyrambe 
 
 dithyrambus. 
 
 hale 
 
 sun-burnmg. 
 
 dividende 
 
 dividend. 
 
 hémisphère 
 
 hemisphere. 
 
 divorce 
 
 divorce. 
 
 hémistiche 
 
 hemistich. 
 
 domaine 
 
 domain. 
 
 hère 
 
 poor wretch. 
 
 doute 
 
 doubt. 
 
 hiéroglyphe 
 
 hieroglyphic. 
 
 ellébore 
 
 hellebore. 
 
 horoscope 
 
 horoscope 
 
 élysée 
 
 elysium. 
 
 hyménée 
 
 hymen. 
 
 émétique 
 
 emetic. 
 
 hymne 
 
 hymn. 
 
 empire 
 
 empire. 
 
 iambe 
 
 iambus. 
 
 empirée 
 
 empyreum. 
 
 incendie 
 
 conflagration. 
 
 entr'acte 
 
 interlude. 
 
 indicule 
 
 index. 
 
 épilogue 
 
 epilogue. 
 
 insecte 
 
 insect. 
 
 épisode 
 
 episode. 
 
 interligne 
 
 interline. 
 
 équinoxe 
 
 equinox. 
 
 intermède 
 
 interlude. 
 
 érysipèle 
 
 erysipelas. 
 
 intervalle 
 
 interval. 
 
 escompte 
 
 discount 
 
 jable 
 
 crome. 
 
 espace 
 
 space. 
 
 jade 
 
 jade. 
 
 euphorbe 
 
 euphorbium. 
 
 jaspe 
 
 jasper. 
 
 exergue 
 
 exergue. 
 
 jeûne 
 
 fasting. 
 
 exode 
 
 exodus. 
 
 labyrinthe 
 
 labyrinth. 
 
 exorde 
 
 -exordium. 
 
 laque 
 
 lacco. 
 
 faîte 
 
 topi summit 
 
 laticlave 
 
 laticlavium 
 
 faune 
 
 faun. 
 
 leurre 
 
 lure. 
 
 feurre 
 
 kind of a straw. 
 
 levitique 
 
 leviticus. 
 
 filigrane 
 
 filigrane. 
 
 lexique 
 
 lexicon. 
 
 fleuve 
 
 river. 
 
 fibelle 
 
 libel. 
 
 fluide 
 
 fluid. 
 
 limbe 
 
 limb. 
 
 foie 
 
 liver. 
 
 lithophyte 
 
 lithopyton. 
 
 27 
 
28 
 
 bolmar's complete treatise 
 
 MASCULINE, • 
 
 me] as — crime criîne — baume hahn, &;c 
 Exceptions.* 
 alarme alarms 
 ame soul, [ness, 
 amertume bitter- 
 arme arm, 
 
 brume thick fog, 
 cime top, 
 coutume custom, 
 crème cream, 
 dîme tithe, 
 drachme drachm, 
 écnxïïQ froth, 
 enclume anvil, 
 énigme enigma, 
 épigramme epi- 
 gram, 
 escnme fencing, 
 estame ivorsted. 
 
 estime esteem, 
 ferme farm, 
 flamme fame, 
 forme form, 
 frime pretence, 
 gamme gamut, 
 gomme guîn, 
 gourme the stran- 
 gles. 
 lame blade, 
 larme tear, 
 légitime share, 
 lime fie, 
 maxime maxim, 
 palme victory, 
 palme a hand's 
 breadth, is m. 
 
 pantomime panto- 
 
 mime, 
 paume tennis, palm 
 
 of the hand, 
 plate-forme plat' 
 
 form, 
 plume feather, 
 
 quill, and pen. 
 pomme apple, 
 prime prime, 
 rame oar, ream, 
 réforme reform, 
 rime rhyme, 
 somme sum, 
 somme nap, is m 
 trame woof, plot, 
 victime victim. 
 
 9. ice] as — orifice opemw^— sacrifice sacrifice, &c. 
 Exceptions. 
 
 avarice avarice, 
 
 cicatrice scar, 
 
 délices delights, is 
 fem. but délice 
 delight, is masc. 
 
 épice spice. 
 
 immondice rubbish, 
 injustice injustice, 
 iMsiiGe justice, 
 lice list, 
 malice malice, 
 matrice mould. 
 
 milice militia, 
 notice notice, 
 office pantry, 
 office ofice, is m. 
 police police, 
 varice varix, 
 
 10. ile or yle] as — asile asylum — style style, &c. 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 argile clay, huile oil, vigile vigil, 
 
 bile bile, île isle, voile sail, 
 
 file file, tuile tile, voile veil, is m. 
 
 11. aire] as — dictionnaire dictionary — vocabulaire vocabulary 
 
 — inventaire inventory, &;c. 
 exceptions. ^ 
 affaire business, grammaire grammar 
 
 aire area, haire haircloth, 
 
 chaire pulpit, paire fair^ 
 
 circulaire circular. 
 
ON THE GENDERS OF FRENCH NOUNS. 
 
 29 
 
 LibT of Masculine nouns, ending with e mute. 
 
 lohe 
 
 lobe 
 
 omoplate 
 
 shoulder-blade. 
 
 lobule 
 
 lobulus. 
 
 opuscule 
 
 opuscule. 
 
 logogriphe 
 
 riddle. 
 
 orbe 
 
 orb. 
 
 luxe 
 
 luxury. 
 
 organe 
 
 organ. 
 
 lycée 
 
 lyceum. 
 
 orgue 
 
 organ. 
 
 malaise 
 
 trouble. 
 
 orgues, is fem. 
 
 organs. 
 
 manche 
 
 handle. 
 
 ovale 
 
 oval. 
 
 manche, is fern, sleeve. 
 
 pacte 
 
 bargain, [there. 
 
 manipule 
 
 maniple. 
 
 panache 
 
 bunch of fea- 
 
 manque 
 
 want. 
 
 pancrace 
 
 pancratium. 
 
 masque 
 
 mash. 
 
 panégyrique 
 
 panegyric. 
 
 mausolée 
 
 mausoleum. 
 
 pantographe 
 
 pantograph. . 
 
 mécompte 
 
 mis-reckoning. 
 
 paradoxe 
 
 paradox. 
 
 ménisque 
 
 meniscus. 
 
 paragraphe 
 
 paragraph. 
 
 mercure 
 
 mercury. 
 
 parafe 
 
 fiourish to a sig- 
 
 mérite 
 
 merit. 
 
 
 nature. 
 
 mésaise 
 
 trouble. 
 
 parallèle 
 
 parallel. 
 
 Messie 
 
 Messiah. 
 
 parapluie 
 
 umbrella. 
 
 météore 
 
 meteor. 
 
 parère 
 
 advice. 
 
 microscope 
 
 mici'oscope. 
 
 parjure 
 
 perjury. 
 
 ministère 
 
 ministery. 
 
 parterre 
 
 flower - gardeUy 
 
 mode 
 
 mood. 
 
 
 or pit [theatre.) 
 
 mode, is fem. 
 
 fashion. 
 
 participe 
 
 participle. 
 
 modèle 
 
 model. 
 
 patrimoine 
 
 patrimony. 
 
 module 
 
 module» 
 
 pécule 
 
 peculium. 
 
 mole 
 
 pier. 
 
 pédicule 
 
 pedicle. 
 
 monde 
 
 world. 
 
 peigne 
 
 cnmb. 
 
 monocorde 
 
 monochord. 
 
 pendule 
 
 pendulum. 
 
 monologue 
 
 soliloquy. 
 
 pendule, is ïem.clock. 
 
 monopode 
 
 monopodium. 
 
 pêne 
 
 bolt. 
 
 monopole 
 
 monopoly. 
 
 pentacorde 
 
 pentachord. 
 
 monastère 
 
 monastery. 
 
 pentateuque 
 
 pentateuch. 
 
 monticule 
 
 small hill. 
 
 périgée 
 
 perigeum. 
 
 moule 
 
 mould. 
 
 {périnée 
 
 perinaeum. 
 
 multiplicande 
 
 multiplicand. 
 
 période 
 
 pitch, summit. 
 
 murmure 
 
 murmur. 
 
 'période, ia fem. period. 
 
 musée 
 
 musœum. 
 
 ^péritoine 
 
 peritoneum. 
 
 mystère 
 
 mystery. 
 
 personne 
 
 nobody. 
 
 navire 
 
 ship. 
 
 personne, is 1 
 
 . person. 
 
 négoce 
 
 trafic. 
 
 ■pétale 
 
 petal. 
 
 nimhe 
 
 nimbus. 
 
 'phare 
 
 light-house. 
 
 obélisque 
 
 obelisk. 
 
 phénomène 
 
 phenomenon 
 
 olympe 
 
 olympus. 
 
 phosphore 
 
 phosphorus. 
 
 c2 
 
30 
 
 EOLMAR S COMPLETE TREATISE 
 
 MASCULINE. 
 
 1*2. oirej as — auditoire auditory — mémoire account, &/C 
 Exceptions. 
 
 écritoire ink-stand,' nageoire fin, 
 gloire glory, passoire strabier 
 
 histoire history, ]ioire pear, 
 mémoire memory, ] victoire victory. 
 
 13 cide] as — homicide homicide — acide acid, &c. 
 Ï4. ste] as — buste bust — i^osie post, (military station,) &lc 
 Exceptions. 
 
 15. 
 
 16. 
 
 armoire press, [tub, 
 baignoire bathing- 
 décrottoire shoe- 
 foire fair, [brush, 
 
 améthyste amethyst, 
 batiste cambric, 
 
 ble 
 cle 
 He 
 
 liste list, pi s ce track, 
 
 peste pest, poste post, (for iet- 
 
 veste vest, [ters,) 
 
 sable sand — couple a couple (as man and 
 wi'ie)— siècle century — exemple example 
 — ongle nail, &c. 
 
 aigle eagle (stand- 
 bible bihle, [ard,) 
 boucle buckle, 
 coupl 
 
 bre 
 
 couple. 
 
 two, 
 
 Exceptions. 
 debacle breaking 
 of ice, 
 é table btable, 
 exemple copy, 
 
 fable fable, 
 
 règle rule, 
 table table. 
 
 ere 
 dre 
 fre 
 
 gre 
 pre 
 tre 
 vre 
 
 câpre a sort of a privateer — foudre large 
 as < vat — livre book — pourpre purple (stuff) 
 — monstre monster — cadre frame, ôlc 
 
 acre acre, 
 algèbre algebra, 
 ancre anchor, 
 anti-chambre anti- 
 chamber, 
 balafre scar, 
 calandre calender, 
 capre caper (pickle) 
 chambre chamber, 
 cendre ashes, 
 diartre charter, 
 dartre letter, 
 'Mîcre v:ik 
 
 Exceptions. 
 épitre epistle, 
 escadre squadron of 
 fibre fibre, [ships, 
 fenêtre window, 
 fièvre fever, 
 foudre thunder bolt, 
 gaufre wafer, 
 guêtre gaiter 
 lettre letter, 
 lèvre lip, 
 
 livre pound, [vre, 
 manœuvre manœu- 
 
 I mitre mitre, 
 montre ivatch, 
 nacre nakre, 
 œuvre ivorks of an 
 ofire offer, [author, 
 ombre shade, 
 outre leather bottle, 
 poudre powder, 
 pourpre purple (co- 
 poutre beam, [lor,) 
 rencontre meeting 
 vitre pane of glass. 
 
ON THE GENDERS OF FRENCH NOUNS. 
 
 SI 
 
 List of Masculine nouns, ending with e mute. 
 
 planisphère 
 
 planisphere. 
 
 remise, is fem. coach-home 
 
 plébiscite 
 
 plebiscitum. 
 
 repère 
 
 mark. 
 
 poêle or poile 
 
 stove, pall. 
 
 reproche 
 
 reproach. 
 
 poêle, is fern. 
 
 frying-pan. 
 
 rêve 
 
 dream. 
 
 pôle 
 
 pole. 
 
 réverbère 
 
 street-lamp. 
 
 polygone 
 
 polygon. 
 
 risque 
 
 risk. 
 
 pohjpe 
 
 polypus. 
 
 rôle 
 
 part. 
 
 polypode 
 
 polypodium. 
 
 sacerdoce 
 
 priesthood. 
 
 ponche 
 
 punch» 
 
 scandale 
 
 scandal. 
 
 pore 
 
 pore. 
 
 scrupule 
 
 scruple. 
 
 porche 
 
 porch. 
 
 sexe 
 
 sex. 
 
 porphyre 
 
 porphyry. 
 
 signe 
 
 sign. 
 
 portique 
 
 portico. 
 
 silence 
 
 silence. 
 
 pouce 
 
 thumb, incU. 
 
 simulacre 
 
 simulacre. 
 
 préambule 
 
 preamble. 
 
 site 
 
 site. 
 
 précepte 
 
 precept. 
 
 socque 
 
 sock. [count. 
 
 prêche 
 
 protestant ser- 
 
 sold-e 
 
 balance of ac- 
 
 prélude 
 
 pr elude, [mon. 
 
 solde, is fem. 
 
 soldier^s pay. 
 
 presbitère 
 
 presbytery. 
 
 soliloque 
 
 soliloquy. 
 
 prétexte 
 
 pretext. 
 
 somme 
 
 nap. 
 
 principe 
 
 principle. 
 
 somme 
 
 sum, is fem. 
 
 prologue 
 
 prologue, [ing. 
 
 sourire 
 
 smile, 
 
 prône 
 
 sermon, scold- 
 
 sphéroïde. 
 
 sphe7'oid. 
 
 protocole 
 
 protocol. 
 
 spécifique 
 
 specific. 
 
 proverbe 
 
 proverb. 
 
 spondée 
 
 spondee. 
 
 pylore 
 
 pylorus. \^gure. 
 
 squelette 
 
 skeleton. 
 
 quadrilatère 
 
 quadrilateral Ji- 
 
 stade 
 
 stade. 
 
 quadrille 
 
 quadrille. 
 
 store 
 
 blind. 
 
 quaterne 
 
 combination of 
 
 subside 
 
 subsidy. 
 
 
 four numbers 
 
 symbole 
 
 symbol. 
 
 
 at the lottery. 
 
 synode 
 
 synod. 
 
 quinconce 
 
 quincunx. 
 
 tarse 
 
 tarsus. 
 
 quine 
 
 combination of 
 
 télégraphe 
 
 telegraph. 
 
 
 five numbers 
 
 télescope 
 
 telescope. 
 
 - 
 
 at the lottery. 
 
 ténare 
 
 taenarus 
 
 f£Hinquenove 
 
 quinquenôve. 
 
 téorbe or iuoi l 
 
 be theorbo. 
 
 quinquerce 
 
 quinquertium. 
 
 terne 
 
 combmation of 
 
 règne 
 
 reign. 
 
 
 three numbers 
 
 régule 
 
 regulus. 
 
 
 at the lottery 
 
 relâche 
 
 relaxation. 
 
 texte 
 
 text. 
 
 relâche, is fen 
 
 ). harbour. 
 
 thyrse 
 
 thyrsus. 
 
 emède 
 
 remedy. 
 
 tintamarre 
 
 thundering noise 
 
 .émise 
 
 hired coach. 
 
 tithymale 
 
 tithymal 
 
32 
 
 BOLMAR S COMPLETE TEEATISE, 
 
 List of Masculine nouns, ending with e mute. 
 
 tonnerre 
 
 thunder. 
 
 ulcère 
 
 ulcer. 
 
 topique 
 
 topic. 
 
 vase 
 
 vase. 
 
 toxique 
 
 toxicum. 
 
 vase, is fem. 
 
 mud. 
 
 traité 
 
 treaty^ treatise. 
 
 vaudeville 
 
 ballad. 
 
 trapèze 
 
 trapazium. 
 
 véhicule 
 
 vehicle. 
 
 tribute 
 
 calthrop. 
 
 verb© 
 
 verb. 
 
 triomphe 
 
 triumph. 
 
 vermicelle 
 
 vermicelli. 
 
 trochée 
 
 trochee. 
 
 verre 
 
 glass. 
 
 trochisque 
 
 trochisch. 
 
 vestibule 
 
 lobby. 
 
 trône 
 
 throne. 
 
 viatique 
 
 viaticum. 
 
 trope 
 
 trope. 
 
 vide 
 
 emptiness. 
 
 trophée 
 
 trophy. 
 
 vignoble 
 
 small vineyard 
 
 tropique 
 
 tropic. 
 
 violoncelle 
 
 violoncello. 
 
 tube 
 
 tube. 
 
 viscère 
 
 intestines. 
 
 tubercule 
 
 tubercle. 
 
 vote 
 
 vote. 
 
 tumulte 
 
 tumult. 
 
 zèle 
 
 zeal. 
 
 tuorbe 
 
 theorbo. 
 
 zodiaque 
 
 zodiac» 
 
 type 
 
 type. 
 
 
 
 80. Among the French nouns ending with eur, there are some that are 
 used both for the mascuUne and the feminine. We say, in speaking of a 
 gentleman, il est V auteur de ce liv^e, he is the author of this book ; and 
 of a lady, elle est tauteur de ce livre, she is the authoress of this book. 
 Some change the termination eur into eiLse for the feminine ; thus we say 
 of a gentleman, un danseur, a dancer; and of a lady, ime danseuse, a 
 dancer. Some change the termination eur into rice thus, we say of a 
 gentleman, un lecteur, a reader; and of a lady, une lectrice, a reade*. 
 Some others are very irregular in the formation of the feminine. 
 
 81. Some of the nouns ending with eur are also used as adjectives; 
 they will be found among the adjectives, page 49, and will be pointed 
 out in the three follov^Hlng lists, by an asterisk * placed before them, 
 
 82. All substantives ending with ewr, not found in the three following 
 -lists, have no feminine, or their feminine is like the masculine. 
 
 83. List of nouns ending with eur for the masculine, and eiise for the 
 feminine. 
 
 Masculine. 
 
 Feminine. 
 
 English. 
 
 .Accapareur 
 
 accapareuse 
 
 monopoliser. 
 
 .acheteur 
 
 acheteuse 
 
 buyer. 
 
 affronteur 
 
 affronteuse 
 
 impostor. 
 
 .an-acheur 
 
 arracheuse 
 
 puller. 
 
 avaleur 
 
 avaleuse 
 
 one that stvalloios 
 
 .baigneur 
 
 baigneuse 
 
 bather. 
 
 .balayeur 
 
 '^alayeu.'se 
 
 i-weeper 
 
ON THE GENDERS OF FRENCH NOUNS. 
 
 33 
 
 Masculine. 
 
 Femiaijie. 
 
 English. 
 
 baragouineur 
 
 baragouineuse 
 
 jabberer. 
 
 barguineur 
 
 barguineuse 
 
 haggler. 
 
 bateleur 
 
 bateleuse 
 
 juggler. 
 
 bayeur [e?- 
 
 bayeuse 
 
 gaper. 
 
 .blanchisseur, bleach- 
 
 blanchisseuse 
 
 tvasher-Moman. 
 
 -boudeur 
 
 boudeuse 
 
 oîie -who pouts 
 
 bousilleur 
 
 bousilleuse 
 
 bungler. 
 
 .brasseur 
 
 brasseuse 
 
 brexver. 
 
 bredouilleur 
 
 bredouilleuse 
 
 stammerer. 
 
 brocardeur 
 
 brocardeuse 
 
 scoffer. 
 
 brocheur 
 
 brocheuse 
 
 siitcheK 
 
 .brodeur 
 
 brodeuse 
 
 embroiderer. 
 
 brunisseur 
 
 brunisseuse 
 
 burnisher. 
 
 .buveur 
 
 buveuse 
 
 driîiker. 
 
 .cajoleur 
 
 cajoleuse 
 
 cajoler. 
 
 caqueteur 
 
 caqueteuse 
 
 prattler. 
 
 cardeur 
 
 cardeuse 
 
 carder. 
 
 *. causeur 
 
 causeuse 
 
 talker. 
 
 .chanteur 
 
 [ \ chanteuse 
 1 1. cantatrice 
 
 singer. 
 
 singer 
 
 a theatrical singer. 
 
 .chasseur 
 
 5 chasseuse 
 C chasseresse 
 
 huntress. [huntress. 
 
 hunter 
 
 used in poetry, 
 
 chercheur 
 
 chercheuse 
 
 seeker. 
 
 chicaneur 
 
 chicaneuse 
 
 chicaner. 
 
 chuchoteur 
 
 chuchoteuse 
 
 ivhisperer. 
 
 clabaudeur 
 
 clabaudeuse 
 
 clamorer. 
 
 coiffeur 
 
 coiffeuse 
 
 hair dresser. 
 
 .complimenteui 
 
 complimenteuse 
 
 complimenter. 
 
 .confiseur 
 
 confiseuse 
 
 confectioner. 
 
 .connaisseur 
 
 connaisseuse 
 
 connoisseur 
 
 conteur 
 
 conteuse 
 
 teller. 
 
 .coucheur 
 
 coucheuse 
 
 bed-fellotv. 
 
 .coupeur 
 
 coupeuse 
 
 cutter. 
 
 .coureur 
 
 coureuse 
 
 runner. 
 
 .crache ur 
 
 cracheuse 
 
 spitter. 
 
 craqueur 
 
 craqueuse 
 
 Jibber. 
 
 criailleur 
 
 criailleuse 
 
 squaller. 
 
 crieur 
 
 crieuse 
 
 ba-wler. 
 
 .danseur 
 
 danseuse 
 
 dancer. 
 
 .débiteur 
 
 débiteuse 
 
 spreader of news. 
 
 .débiteur à 
 
 débitrice 
 
 debtor. 
 
 dé coupeur 
 
 découpeuse 
 
 carver. 
 
 demandeur 
 
 demandeuse 
 
 begger. 
 
 demandeur 
 
 demandresse 
 
 prosecutor. 
 
 dévideur 
 
 devideuse 
 
 ■winder. 
 
 .devineur 
 
 devineuse 
 
 guesser. 
 
 devineur, diviner 
 
 devineresse 
 
 divineress. 
 
 discoureur 
 
 discoureuse 
 
 tattler 
 
 .diseur 
 
 diseuse 
 
 teller. 
 
 .donneur 
 
 donneuse 
 
 giver. 
 
 doreur 
 
 doreuse 
 
 gilder. 
 
 .dormeur 
 
 dormeuse 
 
 sleeper. 
 
 écornifleur 
 
 écornifleuse 
 
 Bpunge^, 
 
34 
 
 4 
 
 GENDERS 
 
 
 Masculine. 
 
 Feminine. 
 
 English. 
 
 .écouteur 
 
 é coûteuse 
 
 - listener. 
 
 emboiseur 
 
 emboiseuse 
 
 coaxer. 
 
 empailleur 
 
 empailleuse 
 
 Ç one that makes strav, 
 ^ bottoms for chairs. 
 
 erapeseur 
 
 empeseuse 
 
 starcher. 
 
 empoisonneur 
 
 empoisonneuse 
 
 poisoner. 
 
 .emprunteur 
 
 emprunteuse 
 
 borroxver. 
 
 enjôleur 
 
 enjôleuse 
 
 ivheedler. {or prints. 
 
 enlumineur 
 
 enlumineuse 
 
 one -who colors maps 
 
 ensorceleur 
 
 ensorceleuse 
 
 bewitcher. 
 
 .entrepreneur 
 
 entrepreneuse 
 
 undertaker. 
 
 éplucheur 
 
 éplucheuse 
 
 picker 
 
 escroqueur 
 
 escroqueuse 
 
 sharper. 
 
 .faiseur 
 
 faiseuse 
 
 maker. 
 
 faneur 
 
 faneuse 
 
 haymaker. 
 
 fendeur 
 
 fendeuse 
 
 cleaver. 
 
 .fileur 
 
 fileuse 
 
 spinner. 
 
 finasseur 
 
 finasseuse 
 
 a sly person. 
 
 flagorneur 
 
 flagorneuse 
 
 sycophant. 
 
 * flatteur 
 
 flatteuse 
 
 fiatterer. 
 
 Auteur 
 
 flûteuse 
 
 •whistler. 
 
 frappeur 
 
 frappeuse 
 
 striker. 
 
 fraudeur 
 
 fraudeuse 
 
 cheat. 
 
 gageur 
 
 gageuse 
 
 better. 
 
 .gagneur 
 
 gagneuse 
 
 gainer. 
 
 gardeur 
 
 gardeuse 
 
 keeper. 
 
 gaspilleur 
 
 gaspilleuse 
 
 squanderer. 
 
 gausseur 
 
 gausseuse 
 
 fouter. 
 
 .glaneur 
 
 glaneuse 
 
 gleaner. 
 
 glisseiur 
 
 glisseuse 
 
 slider. 
 
 glose ur 
 
 gloseuse 
 
 censurer. 
 
 goailleur 
 
 goailleuse 
 
 jeerer. 
 
 grapilleur 
 
 grapilleuse 
 
 grape gleaner. 
 
 .grasseyeur 
 
 grasseyeuse 
 
 Usper. 
 
 •grondeur 
 
 grondeuse 
 
 scolder. 
 
 hâbleur 
 
 hâbleuse 
 
 boaster. 
 
 jargonneur 
 
 jargonneuse 
 
 gibberer. 
 
 .jaseur 
 
 jaseuse 
 
 prater. 
 
 jeûneur 
 
 jeûneuse 
 
 faster. 
 
 .joueur 
 
 joueuse 
 
 gamester. 
 
 jugeur 
 
 jugeuse 
 
 judger. 
 
 louangeur 
 
 louangeuise 
 
 praiser. 
 Cpraiser, or a person 
 
 loueur 
 
 loueuse 
 
 "S xoho lets out any 
 C thing. 
 
 laveur 
 
 laveuse 
 
 •washer. 
 
 leveur 
 
 leveuse 
 
 5 one toho takes up 
 i. printed sheets. 
 
 ligueur 
 
 ligueuse 
 
 leaguer. 
 
 liseur 
 
 liseuse 
 
 a lover of reading. 
 
 mâcheur 
 
 , mâcheuse 
 
 cheiver. 
 
 .mangeur 
 
 mangeuse 
 
 eater. 
 
 jnarcheui 
 
 marcheuse 
 
 ■walker. 
 
OF FRENCH NOUNS. 
 
 35 
 
 masculine 
 
 Feminine. 
 
 English. 
 
 marieur 
 
 marieuse 
 
 matchmaker 
 
 *. menteur 
 
 menteuse 
 
 liar. 
 
 .moissonneur 
 
 moissonneuse 
 
 reaper. 
 
 •.moqueur 
 
 moqueuse 
 
 mocker. 
 
 .nageur 
 
 nageuse 
 
 swimtner. 
 
 ouvreur 
 
 ouvreuse 
 
 box-keeper. 
 
 .parfumeur 
 
 parfumeuse 
 
 perfumer 
 
 .parleur 
 
 parleuse 
 
 talker. 
 
 piailleur 
 
 piailleuse 
 
 sgualler. 
 
 .plaideur 
 
 plaideuse 
 
 narrator. 
 
 .pleureur 
 
 pleureuse 
 
 ■weeper. 
 
 plieur 
 
 plieuse 
 
 folder. 
 
 polisseur 
 
 polisseuse 
 
 polisher. 
 
 .porteur 
 
 porteuse 
 
 porter. 
 
 pourvoyeur 
 
 pourvoyeuse 
 
 purveyor. 
 
 .preneur 
 
 preneuse 
 
 taker 
 
 .prêteur 
 
 prêteuse 
 
 lender. 
 
 •prometteur 
 
 prometteuse 
 
 promiser. 
 
 .prôneur 
 
 prôneuse 
 
 praiser. 
 
 ♦.querelleur 
 
 querelleuse 
 
 quarreller. 
 
 .questionneur 
 
 questionneuse 
 
 questioner, 
 rone that goes about to 
 
 quêteur 
 
 quêteuse 
 
 ^ obtain money for 
 (^ charitable purposes, 
 rone that makes tire- 
 
 rabâcheur 
 
 rabâcheuse 
 
 ^ some repetitions in 
 (_ discourse. 
 
 raccomodeur 
 
 raccomodeuse 
 
 mender. 
 
 raconteur 
 
 raconteuse 
 
 relater. 
 
 .radoteur 
 
 radoteuse 
 
 dotard. 
 
 '.railleur 
 
 railleuse 
 
 jeerer. 
 
 .raisonneur 
 
 raisonneuse 
 
 reasoner. 
 
 ► rançonneur 
 
 rançonneuse 
 
 exacter. 
 
 •rapporteur 
 
 rapporteuse 
 
 reporter. 
 
 ravaudeur 
 
 ravaudeuse 
 
 patcher. 
 
 receleur 
 
 receleuse 
 
 concealer. 
 
 .receveur 
 
 receveuse 
 
 receiver 
 rone -who puts new 
 
 rempailleur 
 
 rempailleuse 
 
 ^ stra-w bottoms to 
 (^ chairs. 
 
 remueur 
 
 remueuse 
 
 mover. 
 
 .repasseur, grinder 
 
 repasseuse 
 
 one ivho irons linau 
 
 .revendeur 
 
 revendeuse 
 
 huckster 
 
 *. rêveur 
 
 rêveuse 
 
 dreamer 
 
 .ricaneur 
 
 ricaneuse 
 
 giggler. 
 
 .rieur 
 
 rieuse 
 
 laugher. 
 
 rioteur 
 
 rioteuse 
 
 smiler. 
 
 rogneur 
 
 rogneuse 
 
 clipper. 
 
 .ronfleur 
 
 ronfleuse 
 
 snorer. 
 
 rôtisseur 
 
 rôtisseuse 
 
 one that roasts meat. 
 
 roupilleur 
 
 roupilleuse 
 
 dozing person. 
 
 sarcleur 
 
 sarcleuse 
 
 weedcr. 
 
 .sauteur 
 
 sauteuse 
 
 leaper. 
 
80 
 
 GENDERS 
 
 Masculine 
 .siffleur 
 
 soufileteur 
 
 souffleur 
 suborneur 
 tâteur 
 talonneur 
 
 tille ur 
 
 .tisonneur 
 
 tousseur 
 
 •trembleur 
 
 tricoteur 
 
 *. trompeur 
 
 troqueur 
 
 veilleur 
 
 .vendeur 
 
 vendeur 
 vendangeur 
 verbiageur 
 vé tille ur 
 
 vielleur 
 
 .voleur 
 .voyageur 
 
 Feminine, 
 siffleuse 
 
 souffleteuse 
 
 souffleuse 
 suborneuse 
 tâteuse 
 tâtonneuse 
 
 tilleuse 
 
 tisonneuse 
 
 tousseuse 
 
 trembleuse 
 
 tricoteuse 
 
 trompeuse 
 
 troque use 
 
 veilleuse 
 
 vendeuse 
 
 venderesse 
 vendangeuse 
 verbiageuse 
 vétilleuse. 
 
 vielleuse 
 
 voleuse 
 voyageuse 
 
 English. 
 
 tvhistler. 
 c one -who slaps the 
 (^ cheeks of another. 
 
 prompter. 
 
 stiborner. 
 feeler, 
 fumbler. 
 Cone ■who takes the 
 ^ filaments from the 
 (_ hemp or flax plant, 
 c one -who likes to poke 
 ^ the f re 
 
 cougher. 
 
 co-ward. 
 
 knitter. 
 
 deceiver. 
 
 sivapper. 
 
 night -watcher, 
 rone -whose profes' 
 ^ sion is to sell any 
 (^ thing. 
 
 one who sells. 
 
 vintager. 
 
 a prolix talker. 
 
 punctilious persoti. 
 C player of the hicrdy 
 i gnrdy. 
 
 thief. 
 
 traveller. 
 
 84. List of nouns ending with eztr for the 
 feminine. 
 
 Masculine. 
 Accélérateur 
 .accompagnateur 
 .accusateur, accuser 
 .acteur, actor 
 administrateur, admi- 
 .admirateur [jiistrator 
 *. adorateur 
 .adulateur, adulator 
 .ambassadeur, ambas- 
 approbateur [sa dor 
 .bienfaiteur, henefac- 
 .calomniateur \tor 
 .collaborateur 
 .conciliateur \tor 
 
 .conducteur, conduc- 
 .conservaîeur 
 .consolateur 
 
 contemplateur 
 
 co-opérateur 
 .correcteur 
 
 Feminine. 
 accélératrice 
 accompagnatrice 
 accusatrice 
 actrice 
 
 administratrice 
 admiratrice 
 adoratrice 
 adulatrice 
 ambassadrice 
 approbatrice 
 bienfaitrice 
 calomniatrice 
 collaboratrice 
 conciliatrice 
 conductrice 
 conservatrice 
 consolatrice 
 contemplatrice 
 co-opé rat rice 
 corre<: trice 
 
 masculine and rice for the 
 
 English. 
 accelerator, 
 accompanist, 
 accxiseress. 
 actress. 
 
 administratrix, 
 admirer, 
 adorer, 
 adulatress. 
 a7nbassadress, 
 approver, 
 benefactress, 
 calumniator, 
 fello iv-la bourer, 
 conciliator, 
 conductress, 
 coîtservator. 
 consoler, 
 contemplator. 
 co-operator, 
 corrector 
 
OF FRENCH NOUNS. 
 
 37 
 
 Masculine, 
 .corrupteur 
 *. créateur, creator, 
 .curateur 
 .débiteur 
 .débiteur 
 .délateur 
 •dénonciateur 
 * .dé sapprobateur 
 .dessinateur,c?raw^^f- 
 détenteur \7nan 
 
 *. dévastateur 
 dilapidateur 
 .directeur, director 
 .dispensateur 
 .dissimulateur 
 .dissipateur 
 .distributeur 
 divulgateur 
 dominateur 
 .donateur 
 
 émulateur, emulator 
 .exagérateur 
 .exécuteur, extcntor 
 .expositeur 
 fauteur, yaîi^or 
 .fondateur 
 .générateur 
 .imitateur 
 •im probate ur 
 
 improvisateur 
 
 inoculateur 
 insidiateur 
 .inspecteur 
 .instigateur 
 .instituteur,msfrMrf or 
 •inlerprétateur 
 interrupteur 
 introducteur 
 •inventeur 
 investigateur 
 .lecteur 
 
 .législateur, legislator 
 •libérateur 
 •littérateur 
 •médiateur, mediator 
 .modérateur 
 *. observateur 
 ,opé rateur 
 .persécuteur 
 perturbateur 
 présentateur 
 profanateur 
 
 Feminine, 
 corruptrice 
 créatrice 
 curatrice 
 débitrice 
 débiteuse 
 délatrice 
 dénonciatrice 
 désapprobatrice 
 dessinatrice 
 détentrice 
 dévastatrice 
 dilapidatrice 
 directrice 
 dispensatrice 
 dissimulatrice 
 dissipatrice 
 distributrice 
 divulgatrice 
 dominatrice 
 donatrice 
 émulatrice 
 exagératrice 
 exécutrice 
 expositvice 
 fautrice 
 fondatrice 
 génératrice 
 imitatrice 
 improbatrice 
 
 improvisatrice 
 
 inoculatrice 
 insidiatrice 
 inspectrice 
 instigatrice 
 institutrice 
 interprétatrice 
 interruptrice 
 introductrice 
 inventrice 
 investigatrice 
 lectrice 
 législatrice 
 libératrice 
 littératrice 
 médiatrice 
 modératrice 
 observatrice 
 opératrice 
 persécutrice 
 perturbatrice 
 présentatrice 
 profanatrice 
 D 
 
 English. 
 
 corruptor. 
 
 creatress. 
 
 curator. 
 
 debtor. 
 
 spreader of nevjs, 
 
 delator. 
 
 denunciator 
 
 blâmer. 
 
 a lady -who draws' 
 
 detainer. 
 
 destroyer. 
 
 spendthrift. 
 
 directress. 
 
 dispensator. 
 
 dissembler. 
 
 ■waster. 
 
 distributer. 
 
 divulger. 
 
 dominator. 
 
 donor. 
 
 emulatress. 
 
 amplifier. 
 
 executnx. 
 
 expositor. 
 
 fautress. 
 
 founder. 
 
 generator. 
 
 imitator. 
 
 one who improhatea, 
 y one who speaks ex 
 ^ tempore. 
 
 inocvlator. 
 
 insidiator. 
 
 iîispector. 
 
 instigator. 
 
 iiistriictress. 
 
 interpreter. 
 
 interrtipter. 
 
 introducer. 
 
 inventor. 
 
 indagator. 
 
 reader'. 
 
 legislatress. 
 
 liberator. 
 
 a literary character. 
 
 mediatress. 
 
 moderator.^ 
 
 observer. 
 
 operator. 
 
 persecutor. 
 
 perturbatoj. 
 
 patron. 
 
 profaner. 
 
38 
 
 GENDERS OF FRENCH NOUNS. 
 
 Masculine. 
 * .iprolecieuT,protectQr 
 .ré conciliateur 
 .Téformateur 
 .séducteur 
 
 .spectateur, spectator 
 suborn ateur 
 tentateur, tempter 
 .testateur 
 .tuteur 
 .violateur 
 .usurpateur 
 .zélateur 
 
 Feminine. 
 protectrice 
 ré conciliatrice 
 réformatrice 
 séductrice 
 spectatrice 
 subomatrice 
 tentatrice 
 testatrice 
 tutrice 
 violatrice 
 usurpatrice 
 zélatrice 
 
 English. 
 protectress, 
 reconciler, 
 reformer, 
 seiticer. 
 spectatress. 
 b 'iber. 
 temptress, 
 testator, 
 guardian, 
 infringer, 
 usurper, 
 zealot. 
 
 85. List of nouns ending with eur for the 
 their feminine variously. 
 
 Masculine. 
 •Avant-coureur 
 bailleur 
 chanteur 
 chanteur 
 
 .chasseur, hunter 
 
 défendeur 
 demandeur 
 demandeur 
 devineur 
 •devineur 
 dissertateur 7 
 .iisserteur $ 
 .empereur, emperor 
 * .enchanteur, 
 
 enchanter 
 .gouverneur, gover- 
 •pécheur [nor 
 
 procureur 
 procureur, solicitor 
 .serviteur 
 .vendeur 
 vendeur 
 
 Feminine, 
 avant-courière 
 bailleresse 
 cantatrice 
 chanteuse 
 ■ chasseresse 
 chasseuse 
 défendresse 
 demandresse 
 demandeuse 
 devineresse 
 devineuse 
 
 disserteuse 
 
 impératrice 
 enchanteresse 
 
 gouvernante 
 
 pécheresse 
 
 procuratrice 
 
 procureuse 
 
 servante 
 
 venderesse 
 
 vendeuse 
 
 *. vengeur, avenger vengeresse 
 
 masculine, and which form 
 
 English. 
 foretmnner. 
 lessor. 
 
 opera singer, 
 singer. 
 
 huntress, (in poetry.') 
 huntress, 
 defendant, 
 prosecutor, 
 beggar, 
 divineress. 
 guesser. 
 
 dissertator. 
 
 empress, 
 enchantress. 
 
 governess. 
 
 sinner. [proxy. 
 
 one -who acts by 
 
 the solicitor's -wife. 
 
 servant. 
 
 seller. [is to sell 
 
 one -whose profession 
 
 avensreress. 
 
 86. I have said much on the nouns ending with eur because the sub- 
 j ect could not be treated in a shorter way to be of any use. No grammar 
 that I know gives any information on this subject. Wanostrocht does 
 not speak of it. What Lé\izac says about it, page 87, of his own gram- 
 mar, is no direction for the learner. Many nouns in the above three lists 
 are seldom used. It would be well if the learner committed to memory 
 those before which a . is placed as the most used. 
 
NUMBERS. È9 
 
 OF NUMBERS. 
 
 87. By Number is understood that property which nouns have of de- 
 noting either one or several persons or things. 
 
 88. There are two numbers, the singular and the pkirai. 
 
 89. The singular number expresses but one person or one thing — as, 
 a man, a table, &c. 
 
 90. The plural number expresses more, than one person or thing — as 
 men, tables, &c. 
 
 Of the Formation of the Plural of French Substantives, 
 
 Direction. 
 
 91. Whenever you want to form the plural of any French noun — 1st, 
 See whether that noun does not come under the following exceptions 
 (which may be ascertained by its termination in the singular) : if it does 
 not come under any of the exceptions, then it comes under the general 
 rule. 
 
 General Rule. 
 
 92. The plural of French nouns, is generally formed, as in English, ry 
 the addition of an s to the singular, as : 
 
 porte door, portes doors, 
 
 rue street, rues streets. 
 
 Exceptions, 
 
 93. 1st, All nouns ending in the singular, with s, x, or z, remain the 
 same for the plural, as : 
 
 fils son, fils sons, 
 
 voix voice, voix voices, 
 
 nez nose, nez noses. 
 
 94. 2d, All nouns ending in the singular with au, en, or ceu, take .t to 
 form the plural, as : 
 
 bateau boat, bateaux boats, 
 
 feu ^r^f feux fires, 
 
 vœu vo-w, vœux voios. 
 
 95. 3d, Of nouns ending in the singular, with ou, 6 of them take x to 
 form the plural ; the rest follow the general rule, that is, they take -s. 
 
 bijou jexvel, bijoux Jewels, 
 
 caillou pebble, cailloux pebbles, 
 
 chou cabbage, choux cabbages, 
 
 genou knee, genoux knees, 
 
 hibou oivl, hiboux owls, 
 
 joujou playtkinc, joujoux playthings. 
 
 96. 4th, Of nouns ending in the singular with al, 21 of them change 
 that termination al into aux, to form the plural. The rest follow the ge- 
 aeral rule, that is, they simply take s to form the plural. 
 
 amiral admiral, amiraux admirals. 
 
 animal animal, animaux animals. 
 
 arsenal arsenal, arsenaux arsenals. 
 
 canal canal, canaux canals. 
 
40 
 
 
 NUMBERS. 
 
 
 capital 
 
 pi^incipal. 
 
 capitaux 
 
 principals. 
 
 cheval 
 
 horse. 
 
 chevaux 
 
 horses. 
 
 cristal 
 
 crystal, 
 
 cristaux 
 
 crystals. 
 
 fanal 
 
 light-house. 
 
 fanaux 
 
 light-houses 
 
 général 
 
 general, 
 
 généraux 
 
 generals. 
 
 hôpital 
 
 hospital. 
 
 hôpitaux 
 
 hospitals. 
 
 madrigal 
 
 madrigal, 
 
 madrigaux 
 
 madrigals. 
 
 mal 
 
 evil, 
 
 maux 
 
 evils. 
 
 maréchal 
 
 farrier, marshal. 
 
 maréchaux 
 
 farriers. 
 
 métal 
 
 metal. 
 
 métaux 
 
 metals. 
 
 minéral 
 
 viiiieral. 
 
 minéraux 
 
 minerals. 
 
 quintal 
 
 quintal. 
 
 quintaux 
 
 qidntals. 
 
 rival 
 
 rival, 
 
 rivaux 
 
 rivals. 
 
 signal 
 
 signal. 
 
 signaux 
 
 signals. 
 
 total 
 
 total. 
 
 totaux 
 
 totals. 
 
 tribunal 
 
 tribunal. 
 
 tribunaux 
 
 tribunals. 
 
 vassal 
 
 vassal. 
 
 vassaux 
 
 ■vassals. 
 
 97. 5th, Of nouns ending in the singular with ail, 8 of them change 
 that termination ail into aux, to form the plural. The rest follow the 
 general rule, that is, they take s for the plural. 
 
 bail 
 
 lease. 
 
 
 baux 
 
 leases. 
 
 corail 
 
 coral. 
 
 
 coraux 
 
 corals. 
 
 émail 
 
 enamel. 
 
 
 émaux 
 
 enamels. 
 
 soupirail 
 
 vent. 
 
 
 soupiraux 
 
 vents. 
 
 sous-bail 
 
 under-lease, 
 
 sous-baux 
 
 mider-leases. 
 
 travail 
 
 -ivork 
 
 
 travaux 
 
 -cvorks. 
 
 vantail 
 
 Ca leaf 
 (_ folding 
 
 of a 
 
 door, 
 
 vantaux 
 
 Ç leaves of a 
 \ foaling door. 
 
 9R 6th, Nouns of more than one syllable ending in the singular with 
 ant and ent, according to the most general practice, drop the t and take 
 s to form the plural, as ; 
 
 enfant child, enfans children. 
 
 moment moment, momens moments. 
 
 99. 7th, Monosyllables retain the t and take s to form the plural, as: 
 
 gant glove, gants gloves. 
 
 dent tooth, dents teeth. 
 
 100. 8th, The only monosyllable that drops the t and takes s is gent, 
 nation, which makes geiis, people. 
 
 101. 9th, The six following nouns are quite irregular in the formation 
 of their plural. 
 
 ail 
 bétaU 
 
 gariick, 
 cattle. 
 
 aulx 
 bestiaux 
 
 garlicks. 
 cattle. 
 
 aïeul 
 •ciel 
 
 grandfather, 
 heaven. 
 
 aïeux 
 deux 
 
 ancestors, 
 heavens. 
 
 œil 
 
 bercail 
 
 miel 
 
 eye, yeux 
 sheepfold, has no plmal. 
 honey, has no plural. 
 
 eyes. 
 
 102. lOth, Aïeul, œil, ciel, make also 
 meaning a person's two grandfathers , 
 des œils de boeuf, ovals. 
 
 aïeuls, ciels, ails, as : ses aïeuls, 
 des ciels-de-lit, testers of beds i 
 
NUMBERS. 4i 
 
 Of the formation of the plural of Compound Nouns. 
 
 103. N. B. As several part& of speech are here introduced which have 
 not yet been explained, no exercise on them will be given in this place. 
 I give these rules now to be referred to hereafter. 
 
 104. When a noun is compounded of a substantive and an adjective 
 both take the mark of the plural, as ; 
 
 un gentilhomme, a nobleman , des gentilshommes, noblemen ; 
 une basse-cour, a poultry-yard ; des basses-cours, poultry yards. 
 
 105. We say for the sake of pronunciation without giving to the ad- 
 jective the mark of the plural : 
 
 graiufmere grandmother, grand'mères grandmothers. 
 
 grand' messe high mass, grancVmesses high masses. 
 
 106. When a noun is compounded with a verb or with an adverb and 
 a substantive, the substantive alone takes the mark of the plural, as • 
 
 uti tournebroche a jack, des tournebroches jacks. 
 
 un avant-coureur a fore-runner, des avant-coureurs fore-runners. 
 
 107. When a noun is compounded of two substantives united by a 
 preposition, the first alone takes the mark of the plural, as : 
 
 un 7naltre-dliàtel, a steward. des maiîres-d^ hôtel, stewards. 
 
 108. Cog-à-fâne, and téte-à-téte do not take the mark of the plural , 
 We say un coq-à-1'âne, des coq-à-l'àne, un tête-à-tête, des tête-à-tête. 
 
 109. Words compounded with a verb and an adverb, or with a prepo- 
 sition, do not take the mark of the plural, as : 
 
 U7i passe-partout, a master key. des passe-partout, master keys. 
 
 110. The following nouns, compounded with sieur, dame, demoiselle, 
 and with the possessive pronoun tnon and ma, take s for the plural, and 
 change 7non and 771a into mes : 
 
 Monsieur, Sir or Gentleman, Messieurs, Sirs or Gentlemen, 
 
 JMadame, Madam, JMesdames, Ladies, 
 
 Mademoiselle, Miss, Mesdemoiselles, Misses. 
 
 111. N. B. In the following exercises the French noun, when put under 
 the English, will be put in the singular : the learner will have to form 
 the plural according to the foregoing rules and exceptions whenever the 
 EngUsh noun is in the plural : 
 
 J EXERCISE. 
 
 The flowers of the gardens, the niceties of the languages, 
 
 Jleur jardin, délicatesse langue, 
 
 the palaces of the kings, the woods of those countries, 
 
 palais , roi, bois /'"î/*". 
 
 the walnuts of their orchards, the pictures of those painters, 
 
 7ioix veiger, tableau peintre, 
 
 the feathers of these birds, the melody of their voices, the gods of 
 
 pbime oiseau, mélodie f. To?a-, dieu 
 
 the pagans, the jewels of my sisters, the cabbages of our gardens, 
 
 païen, bijou, sœur, chou jardin, 
 
 these charming places, the horses of my stables, the fans of these 
 
 ^chai'7na7is ^lieu, cheval écjirie, éventail 
 
 ladies, the (front gates) of those churches, the actions of my 
 dame, portail église, 
 
 d2 
 
V 
 
 4^ OF THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 
 
 ancestors, the evils of this life, the victories of those generals, 
 
 aïeul, mal vie, 
 
 the works of those architects, the corals of those seas, the 
 
 travail architecte, corail mer, 
 
 (learned men) of those times, the presents of my parents, the 
 
 savaîii temps-là, 
 
 teeth of your combs, the playthings of our children, the heads of 
 dent peigne, joujou enfant, ttte 
 
 these nails. 
 clou» 
 
 CHAPTER 11. 
 
 OF THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 
 
 112. The dejinite article is a small word prefixed to substantives to 
 determine the extent of their signification. 
 
 Ç le before a sing, mascu. "\ 
 The French defi- J substantive. f^ the plural is les for both 
 
 iiite article is '\ la before a sing, femin. Ç genders. 
 
 C substantive. 3 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Sincr 5 ^^ J^"'' ^^^ ^^^ ? nlur ^ ^^* J^"^"^ ^^^ '^^^'^' 
 ^ *^' \la nuit the night 5 c fes nuits the nights. 
 
 ,' EXERCISE. 
 
 The sun, the moon, and the stars, are the glory of nature. 
 soleil,ia. lune, f. étoile, f. ào?^t f. art. f. 
 
 The king, the queen, and the princes are well pleased. I'he 
 
 roi, reine, très-satisfaits. 
 
 rose, the violet, the tulip, the narcissus, the hyacinth, 
 
 f. violette, f. tulipe, f. 7iarcisse, m. jacinthe, i. 
 
 the gilliflower, the jasmine, the lily, the honeysuckle, the 
 
 giroflée, f. jasmin, m. lis, m. chtvre-feuille, m. 
 
 ranunculus, are the delight of the sight. Poetry, 
 
 renoncule f. délices f. pi. vue f. art. poésie, f. art. 
 
 painting, and music are (sister arts). The day and the 
 
 peinture, f. art. musique f. sœurs. jour m. 
 
 night are equally necessary. 
 nuit f. également nécessaires. 
 
 113. The article is subject to elision and contraction. {See page 14.) 
 
 114. Elision of the article is the omitting of the e in le, or the a in /a, 
 when these articles precede a noun beginning with a vowel or h mute. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 l'argent C- . -, r-CZe argent the money, 
 l'histoire \ (_ la histoire the history. 
 
 115. But in this case the place of the letter thus omitted is supplied by 
 an apostrophe. 
 
 The soul of man without cultivation is like a diamond 
 ame f. art, homme m. satis culture est comme diamant m. 
 
OP THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 
 
 43 
 
 (in the rough). The history of Spain is sometimes very interesting 
 brut, histoire f. Espagne est quelquefois très-intéressante. 
 
 (Look at) the amaranth and the anemone ; what beauty ! 
 Considérez amaranthe f. f. quelle 
 
 Self-love and pride are always the offspring of a weak 
 
 art. amour-propre art. orgueil sont toujours partage m. "^faible 
 mind. Honesty, innocence, honour, and the love of 
 
 ^espritm. art. Honiieteté, art. <xx\. honneur amoi:r art. 
 
 virtue are (very much esteemed). Summer, autumn, imd 
 
 vertu f. très-estimés art. /té art. automne, ar!.. 
 
 winter are very changeable. France is separated from Italy by the 
 hiver variables, art. séparée de art. Italie par 
 
 Alps, and from Spain by the Pyrenees. 
 Alpes^ art. Pyrénées. 
 
 116. Contraction in grammar is the reducing of two syllables into one, 
 and takes place when the preposition à or de precedes the article , m 
 which case, instead of putting de le before a masculine singular, begiiining 
 with a consonant or h aspirated, du must be employed ; instead of à le, 'tu 
 must be used ; and before the plural substantives of both genders, de les 
 is chanjred into des, and à les into aux\ 
 
 Thus-< 
 
 Du roi 
 du héros 
 au roi 
 au héros 
 des rois 
 des reines 
 aux rois 
 {jlUx reines 
 
 is instead of 
 
 de le roi 
 de le héros 
 à le roi 
 à le héros 
 de les rois 
 
 are 
 
 The 
 
 of the king 
 of the hero 
 to the king 
 to the hero 
 of the kings 
 ds les reines of the queens 
 à les rois to the kings 
 
 /^^aux renies à les reines to the queens 
 
 y EXERCISE. 
 
 The top of the mountains and the bottom of the vailles 
 
 sommet m. montagne fond m. value 
 
 equally agreeable. Silk is soft to the touch. 
 
 également. agréables, art. Soie f. douce toiicher m. 
 
 happiness of a -feeling 'man is to relieve the wants of the poor. 
 
 bonheur m. seiisible ^ de subvenir à besoin pauvre m. s. 
 
 A man given to pleasure was never a great man. Ke obeyed the 
 
 livré art. plaisir m. fut grand II obéit à 
 
 orders of the king. The warbling of birds, the murmuring of 
 ordres gazouillement m. art. oiseau, murmure m. art. 
 
 streams, the enamel of meadows, the coolness of woods, the 
 
 ruisseau, email m. art. prairie, fraicheur f. art. bois, 
 
 fragrance of flowers and the sweet smell of plants contribute 
 parfum ra. art. feur douce odeur f. art. plante contribuent 
 
 greatly to the pleasures of the mind and to the health of the body. 
 beaucoup esprit santé f. corps m. 
 
 117. De and à are never contracted with la before a sing. fern, sub- 
 stantive beginning with a consonant or an A aspirated. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 De la reine of the queen à la rein*» to the queen. 
 
 118. Nor are de and à contracted with le or la before any substantive 
 singular beginning with a vowel oi h mute, but then the article suffers 
 elision. 
 
44 OF THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 I)e r esprit of tlie mind de Vhomme of the man 
 
 A Vesprit to the mind à rhomme to the man 
 
 De Vame of the soul à l'ame to the soul 
 
 De rhistoire of the history à l^ histoire to the history 
 
 119. Contraction likewise does not take place when the adjective toutf 
 all, every, intervenes between de or à and the article. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 De tout le monde, of every body A tous les hommes, to alt men 
 l)e tous les hommes, of all men De toutes les vertus, of all virtues 
 
 Â tout le inonde, to every body A toutes les maiso7is, to all houses 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 The hope of success strengthened the cause of virtue 
 esp.'rance f. art. réussite f. fortifia f. art. vertu f. 
 
 and weakened the audaciousness of rebellion. Fire of 
 
 affaiblit audace f. art. f. art. Feu m. art. 
 
 imagination, strength of mind, and firmness of soul, 
 
 f. art. force Î. art. esprit, art. fermeté î. art. ame, 
 
 are gifts of nature. We saw with horror that man (given up) 
 
 des don art. f. J\'ous vîmes avec livré 
 
 to avarice and voluptuoiisness. Good cultivation is that 
 
 art. à art. volupté f. art. Jionne culture f. ce 
 
 which contributes most to the fertility of the soil. More or less 
 
 (jui contribue le plus terre L J* lus ou moins 
 
 pain is the lot of (every body.) The history of man under 
 
 de peine partage m. totit le monde m. art. dans 
 
 all the circumstances of life is the study of the wise. 
 fQutes circonstance f. art. vie f. étude sage m. sing. 
 
 Plaj'fulness (does not become) all ages nor all 
 
 art. Enjouement m. ne sied ni à art. m. ?« à -art. 
 
 characters. 
 caractère m. 
 
 120. General Rule. In French, the article always agrees in gender 
 and number with the substantive to which it relates. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Le livre que je cherche, The book which I am looking for. 
 
 \ja femme que je vois. The woman v/hom I see. 
 
 Les hommes qui étudient. The men that study. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 The father, mother, brothers, sisters, uncles, aunts, 
 père art. mère art. frère art. sœur art. oncle art. tante 
 and several other relations were present. What we 
 
 plusieurs autres parens étaient présens. Ce que nous 
 value is health, frugality, liberty, vigour of 
 
 estimons cest art. saiité f. art. f. art. f. art. vigueur f. art. 
 mind and body ; it is the love of virtue, reverence 
 
 de art corps m. ce ainour m. art. f. art. crainte f. 
 
 for the gods, fidelity to all mankind, moderation in 
 
 de dieu m. art. f. envers art. monde m art. f." dans 
 
 prosperity fortitude in adversity, courage, good 
 
 art. f. art. force f. art. f. art. m. art bonnes 
 
 moralsj and the abhorrence of flattery. 
 mœurs. horreur f. art. f. 
 
OF THE DEFINITE ARTICLE 45 
 
 121. Geî^eral Rule. The article and the prepositions à and ile, 
 whether contracted or not, are invariably to be repeated before, every 
 «ubstanlive. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Uespi^it, les grâces, et la. beauté notis M' it, grace, and beauty, captivate 
 
 captiveiit. us. 
 
 Je vis hier le roi, la reine, et les I saw yesterday the king, queen, 
 
 princes. and princes, 
 
 'Wignora?ice est la mère de Verre^ir, Ignorance is the mother of error, 
 
 de V admiration, et (\es preventions admiration, and prejudices of 
 
 de toute espèce. every, kind. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 Innocence of manners, sincerity, obedience, and 
 
 art. _ f. art. maiir art. f. art. dbiissance f. art. 
 
 abhorrence of vice, irdiabit this happy region. The plants 
 
 horreur art. m. habitent heureuse f. plante 
 
 of the gardens, the animals of the forests, the minerals of the earth, 
 
 jardin, m. forêt, f. terre f. 
 
 the meteors of the sky, must all concur to store the mind 
 
 météore ciel, ra. doivent tous concourir à enrichir 
 
 with an -inexhaustible 'variety. Neither suffering punishment 
 par inépiiisable f. * art. peine, f. art. châtiment m. 
 
 nor kindness (make any) impression on those minds. 
 
 * art. carresse f pi. nefo?it mdle sur àme. 
 
 The lily is the emblem of virginity, candour, 
 
 lis m. symbole m. art. f. de art. f. de art, 
 
 innocence, and purity, 
 
 f. de art. pureté f. 
 
 122. Bu, de la, de l\ des, answering to the English indefinite adjoctive 
 pronoun some or any, expressed or understood, have by way of ellipsis 
 passed into habitual use. The same directions must be attended to as are 
 given page 12, art. 50. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Je 7nange du pain. I eat bread. 
 
 II prend de la peine. He takes some trouble. 
 
 JVuus mangeons du hachis. We eat some hash. 
 
 Elle conçoit de la haine. She conceives a hatred. 
 
 Vous avez de Vamitié. You have some friendship. 
 
 Vo^ls prenez de Vhumeur. You go into an ill humour. 
 
 JYous cueillons des po^nmes. We gather apples. | 
 
 Ils vendent des oranges. They sell oranges. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 (jive me some bread and butter. Offer him some m eat, 
 Bonnez-moi pain m. beurre m. Offrez-lui viande f. 
 
 Take some salt. (There is) mustard. We have some girkins. 
 prenez sel m. Voilà moutarde f. JVous avons cornichon. 
 
 (Shall I offer you) some chicken 1 (Shall I help you to) some fruit ? 
 
 Vous offrirai-je poulet m. Vous servirai-je m. 
 
 I (will take) (with pleasure) some broth. Bring me some bread. 
 
 Je prendrai volo7itiers boidllonm. Apportez-moi 
 
 (Pour me out) some beer. Drink some wine. Take some tea. 
 
 Versez-moi bière f. Jiuvcz vm m. Prenez thé m,, 
 
46 OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 (Put in) some sugar and milk. I hear some noise. (There 
 
 J\fettez-y sucre m. lait m. J'entends bruit m. // 
 
 rails) some hail. She has some pride. Have you any ink 
 
 tombe grêle f. s. Elle a orgueil. Avez-vous encre f. 
 
 and pens ! Put some oil and vinegar to the salad. Eat 
 
 jtluines? JMettez huile vinaigre Ti\. sur salade ï.JYIange 
 some lobster. He has received gold and silver. 
 
 homard m. Il a reçu or m. argent m. 
 
 CHAPTER m. 
 OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 123. The adjective is not, like the substantive or noun, the name of 
 any person or thing, physical, metaphysical, or abstract, but it is a word 
 which, when added to a substantive or noun, expresses the particular 
 quality or defect of that substantive or noun, as 
 
 bon père, good father. bonne mère, good mother. 
 
 mauvais pères, bad fathers. mauvaises mères, bad mothers. 
 
 bon ange, good angel. mauvais ange, bad angel. 
 
 beau livre, fine book. mauvais livides, bad books. 
 
 124. In the above sentences, _§-oof/ and bad are the adjectives which 
 express the qualities and defects of the substantives or nouns father, 
 fathers, mother, mothers, angel, angels, book, books. 
 
 125. In English the adjective is invariable; that is, the English adjec- 
 tive is the same before a nomi, whether that noun be masculine or. femi- 
 nine, singular, or plural, as 
 
 un hoîume savant, a learned man. 
 
 tine femme savante., a learned woman. 
 
 hommes savans, learned men. 
 
 femmes savantes, learned women. 
 
 126. In French, the adjective must agree with the noun which it quali- 
 fies, in gender and number ; that is, the adjective must be masculine 
 singular, if the noun be mas. sing. ; feminine singular, if the noun be fem. 
 sing. ; masculine plural, if the noun be mas. pi. ; feminine plural, if the 
 noun be fern, pi. The adjective learned, which is the same in the above 
 four English sentences, has in French four diiFerent terrninations. 
 
 Of the formation of the Feminine vf Frencli Adjectives. 
 
 127. N. B. Whenever you want to form the feminine of any adjective, 
 first see whether that adjective is to bo found amongst the hsts of excep- 
 tions to the dilïerent rules : if not to be found there, find out from its 
 masculine termination under what rule it comes. 
 
 128. Foi the formation of the plural of French adjectives, sec page 5i 
 art. 150. 
 
' 
 
 OF THE ADJECTIVE. 47 
 
 129. French adjectives that end in the masculine singular with an e 
 mute* remain the same for the feminine singular. 
 
 Masculine. Feminine. Enj^ijsh. 
 
 aimable aimable atniable. 
 
 aveugle aveugle ^ blind. 
 
 130. *The name of mute is ^iven to the French e without an accent ; it is not 
 pronounced at all at the end of French words of more than one syllable, but causes 
 the consonant that procèdes it to be pronounced very forcibly : it is of the same 
 nature as the English e at the end of love, mate, tare, &c. 
 
 131. French adjectives that do not end in the masculine singular with 
 e mute, take e mute to form the feminine singular, if not found under the 
 following rules or exceptions : 
 
 Masculine. Feminine. English, 
 
 prudent prudente prudent, 
 
 sensé sensée sensible. 
 
 poli polie polite. 
 
 tortu tortue crooked. 
 
 instruit instruite informed. 
 
 132. Adjectives ending in er in the mas. sing., besides taking an e 
 mute to form their fem. sing., require a grave accent to be put over the e 
 that precedes the r in the masculine, as 
 
 Masculine- Feminine. Enjriish, 
 
 léger légère light. 
 
 cher chère dear. 
 
 133. French adjectives that end in the mas. sing, with the following 
 terminations, 
 
 el, eil, ten, on, et, 
 form their feminine, by doubling the last consonant and taking e mute. 
 Masculine. Feminine. English, 
 
 cruel cruelle cruel. 
 
 pareil pareille like. • 
 
 ancien ancienne ancient. 
 
 bon bonne good. 
 
 net nette clean. 
 
 134. The following adjectives, although ending with et, form their 
 feminine by taking an e, and placing a grave accent on the e that pre- 
 cedes the t in the masculine : 
 
 Masculine. Feminine. English 
 
 concret concrète concrete. 
 
 discret discrète discrete. 
 
 indiscret indiscrète indiscreet. 
 
 inquiet inquiète tineasy. 
 
 complet complète complete. 
 
 incomplet incomplète iyicomplete. 
 
 replet . replète replete. 
 
 suret sure te sourish. 
 
 135. The thirteen followmg French adjectives, though not enJing in 
 the masculine singular with el, eil, ten, on, or et, form their fern. sing, by 
 doubling the last consonant and taking an e mute : 
 
 Masculine. Feminine. English. 
 
 bas basse 7o7v. 
 
 C hoarsCy or 
 i brokers 
 
48 
 
 OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 Masculine. 
 
 Feminine 
 
 English 
 
 gras 
 
 grasse 
 
 faU 
 
 las 
 
 lasse 
 
 tired. 
 
 exprès 
 
 expresse 
 
 express. 
 
 profès 
 
 professe 
 
 professed. 
 
 épais 
 
 épaisse 
 
 thick. 
 
 métis 
 
 métisse 
 
 mongrel. 
 
 gros 
 
 grosse 
 
 big, large. 
 
 sot 
 
 sotte 
 
 foolish, or silltf. 
 
 vieillot 
 
 vieillotte 
 
 oldish. 
 
 nul 
 
 nulle 
 
 null, or none. 
 
 gentil 
 
 gentille 
 
 genteel. 
 
 136. The French adjectives that end in the masculine singular with an 
 f, change this letter f into v, and take e mute to form the feminine 
 singular, as 
 
 Masculine. Feminine. English, 
 
 bref brève short. 
 
 actif active active. 
 
 naïf naïve ingeîiuous. 
 
 neuf neuve new. 
 
 137. French adjectives that end in the masculine singular with an x, 
 en ange this letter x into s, and take an e mute to form the feminine 
 singular : 
 
 Masculine. Feminine, 
 
 honteux honteuse 
 
 vertueux vertueuse 
 
 jaloux jalouse 
 
 i38. EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 Masculine. Feminine. 
 
 prefix préfixe 
 
 faux fausse 
 
 roux rousse 
 
 doux douce 
 
 aigre-doux aigre-douce 
 
 l39. TReJir^e following French adjectives have two masculines singu« 
 lar, and they form their feminine singular by doubling the I in the mas- 
 culine singular before a vowel and taking an e mute ; 
 .'Vlasculine, before a Masculine, before a 
 
 English. 
 shameful, 
 virtuous, 
 jealous. 
 
 English. 
 
 prefixed. 
 
 false. 
 
 reddish. 
 
 STjeet. 
 
 tart. 
 
 cons, or A aspirated. 
 
 vowel or h mute. 
 
 Fcmiîiine. 
 
 Er.glish. 
 
 beau 
 
 bel 
 
 belle 
 
 fine. [zy 
 
 fou 
 
 fol 
 
 folle 
 
 mad or era- 
 
 nouveau 
 
 nouvel 
 
 Tiouvelle 
 
 new. 
 
 mou 
 
 mol 
 
 molle 
 
 soft. 
 
 vieux 
 
 vieil 
 
 vieille 
 
 old. 
 
 140. The nineteen following French adjectives are entirely irregular 
 in the formation of their feminine singular : 
 
 Masculine Feminine. English, 
 
 blanc blanche -white. 
 
 franc franche frank. 
 
 frais fraîche fresh. 
 
 sec sèche d'^y. 
 
 grec grecque G^eek, 
 
 public publique public. 
 
OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 49 
 
 Masculine. 
 
 Feminine. 
 
 English. 
 
 caduc 
 
 caduque 
 
 decrepit. 
 
 turc 
 
 turque 
 
 Turkish. 
 
 long 
 
 longue 
 
 Ions'. 
 
 bénin 
 
 bénigne. 
 
 benign. 
 
 malin 
 
 maligne 
 
 malignant. 
 
 tiers 
 
 tierce 
 
 third. 
 
 tors 
 
 torse or torte 
 
 twisted. 
 
 coi 
 
 coite 
 
 still. 
 
 favori 
 
 favorite 
 
 favorite. 
 
 jumeau 
 
 jumelle 
 
 t-ivin. 
 
 traître 
 
 traîtresse 
 
 traitor. 
 
 141. French adjectives ending with eur, and which are also used as 
 substantives, form their feminine singular as follows : 
 
 The eight following change the mas. termination eur into euse for the £ 
 Masculine. Feminine. English. 
 
 causeur _ causeuse prattler. 
 
 flatteur flatteuse flattering. 
 
 menteur menteuse lying 
 
 moqueur moqueuse mocker. 
 
 querelleur querelleuse quarrelsome. 
 
 railleur railleuse jeering. 
 
 rêveur' rêveuse thoughtful. 
 
 trompeur trompeuse. deceitful. 
 
 142. The se^en following change the masculine termination eur into 
 rice for the feminine : 
 
 Masculine. Feminine. English, 
 
 adorateur adoratrice adoring. / 
 
 créateur créatrice creating. 
 
 désapprobateur désapprobatrice blâmer. 
 
 dévastateur dévastatrice destructive. 
 
 improbateur improbatrice disapproving. 
 
 observateur observatrice observing. 
 
 protecteur protectrice. protecting. 
 
 143. The two following change the masculine termination eJir into 
 eresse for the feminine : 
 
 Masculine. Feminine. English, 
 
 enchanteur enchanteresse charming. 
 
 vengeur vengeresse revengefid. 
 
 144. The eleven following adjectives, ending also with eur, simply 
 take e mute to form their feminine : 
 
 Masculine. 
 
 Feminine. 
 
 English. 
 
 antérieur 
 
 antérieure 
 
 anterior. 
 
 cité rieur 
 
 citérieure 
 
 citerior. 
 
 extérieur 
 
 extérieure 
 
 exterior. 
 
 inférieur 
 
 inférieure 
 
 inferior. 
 
 intérieur 
 
 intérieure 
 
 interior. 
 
 majeur 
 
 majeure 
 
 of age. 
 
 meilleur 
 
 meilleure 
 
 better. 
 
 mineur 
 
 mineure 
 
 minor. 
 
 postérieur 
 
 postérieure 
 
 posterior. 
 
 supérieur 
 
 supérieure 
 
 superior. 
 
 ultérieur 
 
 ultérieure 
 
 E 
 
 ulterior. 
 
50 OF THE ADJECTIVE 
 
 145. The eleven above adjectives, ending with eicr, are not used as 
 substantives, as those of the three preceding U.sts are. 
 
 146. The above twenty-eight adjectives are the only adjectives ending 
 in eur in the French. 
 
 147. Some adjectives have no feminine, as dispos, active ; fat, foppish s 
 paillet, pale, &c Others have no mascuUne, as blette, melloiv, &c. 
 
 148. For the formation of the plural in French adjectives, see page 51. 
 
 149. N. B. In the following exercises, when the French adjective is 
 jmt under the English, it is put in the mascuUne : the learner will have 
 to form the feminine, when required, by the foregoing given directions : 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 She is decent. This house is v/ell situated. This pear is 
 Elle Cet maison f. bien situé. poire 
 
 too ripe. She is tall and well formed. This story is very enter- 
 fro^ mar. grand bien fait. histoire i. très-amu- 
 taining. 'J'his person is very unsteady. This mountain is steep. 
 sant, personne f. bien léger. montagne f. escarpé, 
 l'his road is not very safe. The door is not open. This 
 rovte f. sûr. porte f. ouvert. 
 room is dark. This street is too narrow. It is an ancient cus- 
 chambre f. obscur. me f. étroit. Ce cou- 
 lom. She has carnation lips. His memory will be immortetl. 
 inme f. a art. "^vermeil Utvre f. Sa immortel. 
 His manners are natural. The engagement was warm. (That is) an 
 
 manière naïf. action f. fut vif voilà 
 
 original thought. This cloth is the best of all. They are 
 
 "^nenf ^pensée f. étoffe f. meiUeJir toutes. Ce des 
 
 delusive promises. He seduces by his fawning manners. The 
 ^troinpeur 'promesse f. sédxnt par "^fatteur ^manières f. 
 
 dclightf:^ valley of Tempe is in Thessaly. 
 
 délicieux vallée f. Tempe dans art. Tliessalie î. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 The grass is very thick. That soup is very good, but too fat. It 
 herbe f. soupe f. mais trop 
 
 is a foolish undertaking. (There is no) truth in all that. This 
 
 sot entreprise f. // îi'y a md vérité f. da7is tout cela, 
 water is not clean. It is a ^very silly 'history. It is in the newest 
 eau f. 7iet. Ce fou f. h nouveau 
 
 fashion. It is a fine statue. The law is express upon that point. 
 viode f. beau f. loi f. sur nu 
 
 He lives in a state of luxurious idleness. This wax is not very white. 
 It vit dans * * mou oisiveté f. cire f. 
 
 She is as fresh as a rose. The paint on thaï wainscot is not dry. 
 
 * comme f. peinture f. de lambris va. 
 
 His answer is a mere evasion. The thing is pubUc. That plant 
 
 réponse f. franc défaite f. chose f. herbe £ 
 
 possesses a pernicious property. She (is of) a benevolent character. 
 
 a "^malin 'qjialiîé- ■ a "^bénin Uiuîneur f. 
 
 The avenging thunderbolt smote that (impious wretch). He extended 
 
 "^vengeur foudre (.frappa impie m. ^tendit 
 
 to us a protecting hand. This woman is jealous and deceitful. His 
 
 * 'noi/s ^protecteur ^main f. femme Ï. Jaloux . faux. 
 
OF THE ADJECTIVE. 51 
 
 temper is mild. This color is too red. These old clothes 
 
 humeur f. doux. couleur f. trop roux. hwdea f. 
 
 are good for nothing. 
 
 à ne rien. . 
 
 Formation of the Plural of French Jldjectives. 
 
 150. Genekai. Kule. The plural of adjectives and participles is gene- 
 rally formed like the plural of nouns by adding an « to the singular : 
 
 Mas. eing, Mas. plu. Fem. sing. Fem. plu. English. 
 
 grand, grands, grande, grandes, • great. 
 
 poli, polis, polie, polies, polite. 
 
 aimé, aimés, aimée, aimées, loved. 
 
 151. The above rule admits of no exceptions with respect to the forma- 
 tion of the plural feminine from the sing. fem. of adjectives'^ but in form- 
 ing the masculine plural from the mas. sing, there are several exceptions, 
 which must be attended to. 
 
 152. N. B. To form the plural feminine of any adjective, it is necessary 
 first to find its feminine singular, from which the feminine plural is formed 
 Dy the addition of an s ; 
 
 153. First exception — Adjectives ending with s or a: in the mas. sing 
 do not change their termination for the plural masculine : 
 
 Mas. sing. Mas. plu. English, 
 
 gras, gras, fat. 
 
 heureux, heureux, happy. 
 
 154. Second exception — Adjectives of more than one syllable (polysyi- 
 Jables), ending with ant and ent, according to the most general practice, 
 
 change t into « to form the plural masculine : 
 
 Mas. sing. Mas. plu. English, 
 
 reconnaissant, reconnaissans, grateful. 
 
 diligent, diligens, diligent. 
 
 155. Third exception — However, adjectives of one syllable (monosyl- 
 lables) retain the t final and take an s to form the plural masculine : 
 
 lent, lents, sloiv. 
 
 156. Fourth exception — The adjective tout makes tout mas. sing. \ 
 toute, fem. sing. ; tous, mas. plu. ; toutes, fem. plu. all. 
 
 157. Fifth exception — Adjectives ending with an in the sing. mas. take 
 X to form the plu. mas. ; as 
 
 Mas. sing. Mas. plu. English, 
 
 beau, beaux, Jîne. 
 
 nouveaji, nouveaux, neiv. 
 
 158. Sixth exception — Some adjectives, ending with al in the masculine 
 singular, change that termination al into aux, to form the plu. mas ; 
 
 159. List of adjectives ending with al, which form their plural mascu- 
 line in changing that termination al into aiix : 
 
 English. 
 
 a7iimal. 
 
 austral. 
 
 atitumnal. 
 
 comvion. 
 
 baptismal. 
 
 biennial. 
 
 Masculine singular. 
 
 Masculine plural. 
 
 .annal 
 
 annaux 
 
 austral 
 
 austraux 
 
 .automnal 
 
 automnaux 
 
 banal 
 
 banaux 
 
 .baptismal 
 
 baptismaux 
 
 biennal 
 
 biennaux 
 
52 
 
 OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 Masculine singular. 
 
 Masculine plural. 
 
 English. 
 
 .brutal 
 
 brutaux 
 
 brutal. 
 
 bursal 
 
 bursaux 
 
 pecxmiavy. 
 
 xapital 
 
 capitaux 
 
 capital. [braiTU 
 
 cérébral 
 
 cérébraux 
 
 belonging to the 
 
 cérémonial 
 
 cérémoniaux 
 
 ceremonial. 
 
 claustral 
 
 claustraux 
 
 claustral. 
 
 collatéral 
 
 collate rau 
 
 collateral. 
 
 .collégial 
 
 collégiaux 
 
 collegiate. 
 
 ,col<^sal 
 
 Ç colossals 
 ^ colossaux 
 
 colossal. 
 
 commensal 
 
 commensaux 
 
 commeiisal 
 
 conjugal 
 
 conjugaux 
 
 conjugal. 
 
 costal 
 
 costaux 
 
 costal. 
 
 crural 
 
 cruraux 
 
 crural. 
 
 décemviral 
 
 décemviraux 
 
 deceinviraL 
 
 décennal 
 
 décennaux 
 
 decennial. 
 
 décimal 
 
 décimaux 
 
 decimaL 
 
 .déloyal 
 
 déloyaux 
 
 disloyal. 
 
 diagonal 
 
 diagonaux 
 
 diagonal. 
 
 doctrinal 
 
 doctrinaux 
 
 doctrinal. 
 
 domanial 
 
 domaniaux 
 
 belonging to a de- 
 
 dorsal 
 
 dorsaux 
 
 dorsal, [mesne. 
 
 dotal 
 
 dotaux 
 
 dotal. 
 
 .égal 
 
 égaux 
 
 equal. 
 
 .électoral 
 
 électoraux 
 
 electoral. 
 
 .episcopal 
 
 épiscopaux 
 
 episcopal. 
 
 .equilateral 
 
 équilatéraux 
 
 equilateral. 
 
 .équinoxial 
 
 équinoxiaux 
 
 equinoxial. 
 
 féal 
 
 féaux 
 
 tmisty. 
 
 féodal 
 
 féodaux 
 
 feudal. 
 
 fiscal 
 
 fiscaux 
 
 JiscaL 
 
 •fondamental 
 
 fondamentaux 
 
 fundamental. 
 
 .général 
 
 généraux 
 
 general. 
 
 .grammatical 
 
 grammaticaux 
 
 grammatical. 
 
 .horizontal 
 
 horizontaux 
 
 horizontal. 
 
 idéal 
 
 idéaux 
 
 ideal. 
 
 illégal 
 
 illégaux 
 
 illegal. 
 
 immoral 
 
 immoraux 
 
 immoral. 
 
 impartial 
 
 impartiaux 
 
 impartiaL 
 
 .impérial 
 
 impériaux 
 
 imperial. 
 
 inégal 
 
 inégaux 
 
 unequal. 
 
 infernal 
 
 infernaux 
 
 infernal. 
 
 .latéral 
 
 latéraux 
 
 lateral. 
 
 .légal 
 
 légaux 
 
 legal. 
 
 .Ubéral 
 
 libéraux 
 
 liberal. 
 
 .littéral 
 
 littéraux 
 
 literal. 
 
 .local 
 
 locaux 
 
 local. 
 
 .loyal 
 
 loyaux 
 
 loyal. 
 
 machinai 
 
 machinaux 
 
 machinal. 
 
 .martial 
 
 martiaux 
 
 martial. 
 
 .médicinal 
 
 médicinaux 
 
 medicinal. 
 
 .méridional 
 
 méridionaux 
 
 méHdîonoL 
 
 .moral 
 
 moraus 
 
 movah 
 
OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 53 
 
 .natal 
 
 5" natals 
 ^ nataux 
 
 natal. 
 
 .national 
 
 nationaux 
 
 national. 
 
 .numéral 
 
 numéraux 
 
 mimerai. 
 
 .nuptial 
 
 nuptiaux 
 
 nnptial. 
 
 .occidental 
 
 occidentaux 
 
 occidental. 
 
 .ordinal 
 
 ordinaux 
 
 ordinal. 
 
 .oriental 
 
 orientaux 
 
 oriental. 
 
 •original 
 
 originaux 
 
 original. 
 
 paradoxal 
 
 paradoxaux 
 
 paradoxical. 
 
 patrimonial 
 
 patrimoniaux 
 
 patrimonial. 
 
 .partial 
 
 partiaux 
 
 partial. 
 
 patriarcal 
 
 patriarcaux 
 
 patriarchal. 
 
 .pectoral 
 
 pectoraux 
 
 pectoral. 
 
 presidial 
 
 présidiaux 
 
 presidial. 
 
 prévôtal 
 
 pré vô taux 
 
 provoslal. 
 
 primordial 
 
 primordiaux 
 
 primordial. 
 
 .principal 
 
 principaux 
 
 principal. 
 
 .proverbial 
 
 proverbiaux 
 
 proverbial. 
 
 .provincial 
 
 provinciaux 
 
 provincial. 
 
 .pyramidal 
 
 pyramidaux 
 
 pyramidal, 
 
 quatriennal 
 
 quatriennaux 
 
 quadrennial. 
 
 .radical 
 
 radicaux 
 
 radical. 
 
 •royal 
 
 royaux 
 
 royal. 
 
 •rural 
 
 ruraux 
 
 lierai. 
 
 seigneurial 
 
 seigneuriaux 
 
 seigneurial. 
 
 •septentrional 
 
 septentrionaux 
 
 nortfdy. 
 
 sépulcral 
 
 sépulcraux 
 
 sepxdckral. 
 
 •social 
 
 sociaux 
 
 social. 
 
 spiral 
 
 spiraux 
 
 spiral. 
 
 synodal 
 
 synodaux 
 
 synodal. 
 
 transversal 
 
 transversaux 
 
 transversal. 
 
 triomphal 
 
 triomphaux 
 
 triumphal. 
 
 trivial ' 
 
 triviaux 
 
 trivial. 
 
 vénal 
 
 vénaux 
 
 venal. 
 
 verbal 
 
 verbaux 
 
 verbal. 
 
 vertical 
 
 verticaux 
 
 vertical. 
 
 vital 
 
 vitaux 
 
 vital. 
 
 160. Ail adjectives ending with al not found in the above list have no 
 plural or are only used in the plural feminine. The learner will do well 
 to commit to memory those most commonly used in conversation, and 
 which are marked with a . before them. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 They are envious and jealous. Those fowls are big and fat. 
 
 Its poulet m. 
 
 Owls are frightful birds. (There are) some beautiful jewels, 
 art. hibou m. des "^hideux oiseau m. Voilà de beau bijou m. 
 
 The two new operas have succeeded. Men are only 
 
 deux nouveau m. 07it réussi, art. '^so7it 'ne '^que 
 
 equal in the infirmities of nature. The ^general 'o/Picers are assem- 
 ^ég-al par art. f. officiers assem- 
 
 blai]. This fruit is excellent. His proficiency is slow, but solid. 
 blé. m. pi. sont Ses progrès m. pi, aoiit soUde, 
 
 E 2 
 
54 OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 All his friends have been very glad to see him. Those ladies are 
 
 ami ra. ont été bien aise de "^voir He. dame 
 
 tired with walking. You have powerful enemies, but their efforts 
 las de marcher. Vous avez de ennemi m. mais leurs 
 
 (will be) vain and useless. The four ^cardinal 'points are the 
 seront inutile. quatre point m. 
 
 east, west, south, and north. 
 
 orient m. art. occident m. art. midi m. art. nord r/i. 
 
 Of the Degrees of Signification of the Adjective. 
 
 161. Grammarians commonly reckon three degrees of comparison : the 
 positive, the comparative, and the superlative. 
 
 162. The positive is the adjective expressing the quality of an object, 
 without any increase or diminution, as beau, fine ; bon, good. 
 
 y. -;? / r:' EXERCISE. 
 
 A child gentle, amiable, and docile, is beloved (by every body.) 
 
 enfant m. doux, aimable, aimé de tout le monde. 
 
 An ■''ingenuous 'candour, an amiable simplicity, and a lively artlessness, 
 
 ingénu f. f. '^piquant ^naïveté f. 
 
 are the charms of youth. The sight of an agreeable landscape 
 
 charme m. art. jeunesse f. vue f. agréable paysage m. 
 
 is a -varied 'and ""rapid 'source of ^delightful 'sensations. 
 varié rapide f. délicieux f. 
 
 163. l'he comparative is so called because it draws a comparison be- 
 tween two or many objects. When two things are compared, the one is 
 either superior, inferior, or equal to the other ; hence, three sorts of com- 
 parison — that of superiority, inferiority, and equality. 
 
 164. The adverbs phis, moins, and aussi, which mark these three kinds 
 of comparison, are to be repeated before every adjective, when several are 
 joined to the same substantive, and are followed by the conjunction que, 
 rendered in English by than or as. 
 
 165. The comparative of superiority is formed in French by putting 
 plus, more, before the adjective, and que, than, after it. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 La rose est plus belle que la vio- The rose is more beautiful than 
 
 lette, the violet. 
 
 166. Observe that in English the comparative of superiority may be 
 expressed by putting more before the adjective — as more -wise s or in» 
 adding to the adjective the termination er — as tviser. When the compa- 
 rative is expressed in English in the last manner, it must be rendered in 
 French as if it stood more -wise. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 The republic of Athens was more illustrious than that of Lacede- 
 ri' publique f. Athènes a été illustre celle Lacédé- 
 
 mon. Homer was perhaps a greater genius _ than Virgil; but Virgil 
 mone. Homcre était peut-être grand génie va, Virgile ; mais 
 had a -more ^delicate ""and *more ''refined 'taste 'than Homer 
 avait ^ fill délicat goût m. H.omère. 
 
 Vlilton appears (to me)more sublime than all the other epic poets. 
 -parait hne autre ^épique ^poète. 
 
 167. The comparative oi inferiority is formed by prefixing ?noî»ff, less, 
 lo the adjective, and adding qaie, than, after it. 
 
OF THE ADJECTIVE. 96 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 La violette est moms belle que la The violet is less beautiful than 
 
 rose, the rose. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 Shipwreck and death are less fatal than the pleasures 
 art. naufrage m. art. mort f. funeste ni. 
 
 which attack virtue. The violet is less brilliant to the eye than 
 
 qui attaquent zxt f. f. brillant m. pi. 
 
 the lily, a true emblem of modesty and of pride. 
 
 lis, m. * "^véritable ''emblème m. art. f. de ait. orgueil m. 
 
 Autumn is less varied than spring, but it is richer, 
 
 art. automne f. varié art. printemps m. elle riche, 
 
 168. The comparative of equality is formed by placing aussi, as, before 
 the adjective, and que as, after it. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 La tulipe est aussi belle que la The tulip is as beautiful as the 
 
 rose, ;,,y , rose. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 ■j-Pope's images are as perfect as his style is harmonious. Deli 
 
 I*ope f. parfait son m. art deli' 
 
 cacy of taste is a gift of nature, as scarce as true 
 catesse f. art. goût m. don m. art. f. rare art. vrat 
 
 genius. The love (of our neighbour) is as necessary in society 
 q'énie m. amour du prochain dans art. 
 
 for the happiness of life, as in Christianity for eternj^ 
 
 potir bonheur m. art. vie f art. Christianisme m. art. ^étemel 
 
 salvation. It is as easy (to do) good as to do evil. 
 ^salufm, aisé défaire du bien du mal. 
 
 ^Pope's images translate The images of Pope. 
 
 169. The three following adjectives — meilleur, hetter, pire, worse, 7noi7i- 
 dre, less — are comparatives in themselves : 
 
 170. N. B. As most beginners are apt to confound these comparative 
 adjectives with the comparative adverbs, mieux, pis, and moins, because 
 they are generally rendered by the same English words better, worse, and 
 
 j^ss, it may be advisable to subjoin here these comparative adverbs with 
 their positives, that the difference of meaning may serve as a distinction : 
 
 f Meillexir, better, is the comparative of bon, good, and is used 
 ^ j instead of plus bon, which is never said. 
 
 *g' J Pire signifies plus inauvais, worse, or more v/icked, and is used 
 P- "^ instead of plus mauvais. 
 ^ Moindre means plus petit, less, or smaller, and is used instead 
 
 l^of plus petit. 
 
 Mieux, better, is the comparative of bien, well, and is used 
 instead of plus bien, more well, which is said in neither language, 
 
 ^ Pis is the comparative of mal, badly, and is used for plus mal, 
 
 ^ ] worse, which is liljewise employed. 
 
 «n I Moins is the comparative oï peu, little, and is used for plus peu, 
 which is never used. 
 
56 
 
 OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Ce fruit-là est bon, mais celui-ci est That frnit h goody but this ta 
 
 meilleur, bette?'. 
 
 Sa condition est mauvaise, mais His condition is bad, but it has 
 
 elle a été pire, beeii ivorse. 
 
 Ma dépense est petite, mais la vô- J\îy expense is small, but yours is 
 
 tre est moindre, sjnaller. 
 
 n se conduit bien, mais elle se He behaves -well, but she behaves 
 
 conduit encore mieux, still better. 
 
 II se portait mal, mais il est pis He xoas mnvell, but he is yvorse 
 
 que jamais, than ever. 
 
 Je parle peu, vous parlez encore / speak little ; you speak still 
 
 moins, less. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 His reasoning is not better than yours. V'our style is 
 
 Son raisonnement m. le vôtre. Votre m. 
 
 (a great deal) better than that of his brother. The thickness of this 
 de beaucoup celui son épaisseur f. 
 
 wall is less than that of the ^next 'wall. This column is less than 
 viur m. celle voisin colonne f. 
 
 the other in height and thickness. The remedy is worse than 
 
 autre en hautejir f. e7i grosseur f. remède m. 
 
 the disease. Your horse is worse than mine. 
 mal m. cheval m. le mien. 
 
 171. The adjective is in the superlative degree when it expresses the 
 quality in a very high, or in its highest state ; hence there are two sorts 
 of superlatives, the absolute and the relative. 
 
 172. The superlative absolute is formed by putting très, fort, bien, 
 very, before the adjective ; it is called absolute, because it does not express 
 any relation to other objects. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 Londres est une très-belle ville, London is a very fine city. 
 
 173. Remakk. The adverbs extrêmement, extremely, injlnijnent, infi- 
 nitely, are likewise marks of the superlative absolute. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 Cet homme est extrêmement savant. That man is extremely learned. 
 Dieu est infiniment heureux, God is supremely happy. 
 
 EXERCISE. * 
 
 That, landscape is very diversified, very extensive, and infinitely 
 paysage m. varié étendu 
 
 agreeable (on every side). The Alps are veiy high and very steep. 
 agréable de toxit coté m. Alpes f. haut ' escarpé, 
 
 The style of Fenelon is very rich and very harmonious, but it is some- 
 m. Fénélon il quelque' 
 
 times prolix ; that of Bossuet is extremely sublime, but it is sometimes 
 fois prolixe; celui élevé ^ 
 
 harsh and unpolished. 
 
 dur rude. 
 
 174. The superlative relative is formed by prefixing the article le to 
 the comparatives meilleur, moindre, pire, and to the adverbs plus and 
 mtAns ; it is called relative, because it expresses a relation to other objects. 
 
OF THE ADJECTIVE. 57 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Londres est la plus belle des villes. Ijomlon is the finest of cities. 
 /e préfère une maison de campagne ï prefer a country-house to the 
 au plus beau palais. finest palace. 
 
 175. Plus and moins with the article are repeated before every adjective 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 The most beautiful comparison (that there is) perhaps in any 
 comparaison f. que il y ait peut-être dans avciin 
 language is that which Pope has drawn from the Alps, in his Essay 
 langue f. celle que tire f. de dans son Essai 
 
 on Criticism. The most able men are not always the most 
 
 sur art. Critique f. habile gens toujours 
 
 virtuous. The most ancient and most general of all kinds of 
 
 vertuetix. f. f. art. espèce f. 
 
 idolatry was the worship rendered to the sun. The least excusable 
 
 était culte m. rendît soleil m. 
 
 of all errors is that which is wilful. 
 
 art. f. celle qui volontaire. 
 
 Agreement of the Adjective with the Substantive, 
 
 176. Rule I. The adjective always agrees in gender and number with 
 the substantive to which it relates. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Le bon père, The good father. 
 
 La bonne mère, The good mother. 
 
 De beaux jardins. Fine gardens, 
 
 De belles promenades, Fine walks. 
 
 177. Bon is masculine singular, because père is mas. and in the sing.; 
 bonne is feminine singular, because mère is fern, and in the sing.; beaux 
 is in the masculine plural, hecdnxsQ jardins is mas. and pi., «fcc. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 The&^e hills are covered with trees loaded with fruit already 
 coteau m. couvert de arbre m. chargé de m. pi. déjà 
 ripe. A pure stream rolls its limpid water through the 
 mûr. clair ruisseau m. roide son Himpide ^eau à 
 
 midst of meadows enamelled with flowers. (Every thing) mterests 
 milieu m. de prairie f.. émaillé de fleur. Tout i?itéresse 
 
 the heart in this abode, which is full of charms. Fly, incon- 
 cœur m. séjour m. * * plein attrait m. Ftiyez, Hncon- 
 
 siderate youth, fly from the enchanting allurements of a vain 
 
 vaiv 
 
 sidéré ^jeunesse f. * "^enchanteur ^attrait 
 
 world : its perfidious sweets are a ^slow ' poison, which (would 
 ^monde m. ses "^perfide ^douceur f. lent m. qui dé- 
 
 destroy) in your soul the noble enthusiasm of goodness and 
 truirait dans ame enthousiasme m. art. bien m. 
 
 the precious seeds of ^sublime 'virtues. 
 germe m. art. vertu. 
 
 178. Rule II. When the adjective relates to two substantives singulai 
 of the game gender, it must be put in the plural, and agree with them iu 
 gender. 
 
58 
 
 OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 Le roi et le berger sont égaux The king and the shepherd aro 
 après la mort, equal after death. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 Uprightness and piety are much esteemed even by tlie 
 
 art. droiture f. art. piété f. très estimé même de 
 
 wicked. A man in the most elevated and a man in the 
 
 méchant pi. Le dans ^le ^plus ^élevé He "^état le He 
 
 most obscure situation are equally precious in the eyes of God. 
 ^phis ^obscur ^le -état m. également à m. Dieu. 
 
 Pilpay and Confucius are very celebrated among the nations of Asia. 
 célèbre parmi peuple m. art. 
 
 179, RuLK III. When the two substantives to which the adjective 
 relates are of different genders, the adjective is to be put in the masculine 
 plural. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Man père et ma mère sont contens, My father and mother are contented. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 His probity and disinterestedness are known (every where). 
 
 f. son désintéressemejit m. connu partout. 
 
 The love of life and the fear of death are natural to 
 amour m. art. vie f. crainte oxi. mort f. naturel 
 
 man. Ignorance and self-lo\e are equally presump- 
 
 art. art. f. art. amour-propre m. présomp- 
 
 tuous. My sister and brother were very attentive to the instruc- 
 
 tueux. f. mon orit été 
 
 tions of their masters. 
 ^ maître m. 
 
 NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES OF NUMBER. 
 
 180. Numbers are divided into five classes, viz. cardinal, ordinaly 
 collective, distributive, and proportional. 
 
 CARniNAL 
 
 . ORDINAL ÎTUMBEH. 
 
 NUMERICAL COLLECTIVE 
 XOUNS. 
 
 T 
 
 un, une 
 
 premier 
 
 first 
 
 unité 
 
 iinit 
 
 2 
 
 Jeux 
 
 Ç àexxxième, "> 
 (_ second S 
 
 2d 
 
 couple, paire 
 
 couple 
 
 3 
 
 trois 
 
 troisième 
 
 3d 
 
 trio 
 
 trio 
 
 
 quatre 
 cinq 
 
 six 
 
 quatriè/ne 
 cinquième 
 
 sixième 
 
 4th 
 5th 
 
 6th 
 
 deux couples 
 
 Ç demi- 
 1 douzaine 
 
 tiuo couple 
 half a dozen 
 
 a 
 
 sept 
 huit 
 
 septième 
 huitième 
 
 7th 
 8th 
 
 huitaine 
 
 eight 
 
 9 
 10 
 
 neu/ 
 dix 
 
 neurième 
 dixième 
 
 9th 
 lOth 
 
 neuvaine 
 dizaine 
 
 Ç nine days of 
 t prayer 
 half a score 
 
 u 
 
 onze 
 
 onzième 
 
 llth 
 
 
 
 12 
 
 douze 
 
 douzième 
 
 12th 
 
 douzaine 
 
 dozen 
 
OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 59 
 
 CARDINAX 
 NUMBER. 
 
 ORDINAL NUMBER. 
 
 NUMERICAL COLLECTIVE 
 NOUNS. 
 
 1000 mill 
 
 treize 
 
 quatorze 
 
 quinze 
 
 seize 
 
 dix -sept 
 
 dix-huit 
 
 dix-neu/" 
 
 vingt 
 
 vingt-et-un 
 
 vingt-deux 
 
 trente 
 
 Ç trente-et- 
 
 i un, &c. 
 quarante 
 
 Ç quarante- 
 
 ^ et-un 
 cinquante 
 
 C cinquante- 
 
 C et-un 
 soixante 
 
 C soixante- 
 
 ^ et-un 
 
 C soixante- 
 
 ^ et-dix 
 
 Ç soixante- 
 
 ^ onze 
 
 Ç soixante- 
 
 ^ dou^iie, &c, 
 
 5 quatre- 
 
 C vingts. 
 
 Çquatre- 
 
 < vingt-un, 
 
 C quatre- 
 ^ vingt-dix 
 
 Çquatre- 
 
 < vingt- 
 ^onze 
 
 cent 
 
 Ç cent-un, 
 l&c. 
 
 deux cents 
 
 treiziè7ne 
 
 quatorzième 
 
 quinzù'?ne 
 
 seizî'eVne 
 
 dix-septîè?ne 
 
 dix-huitièrae 
 
 dix-neuT;iè??ie 
 
 vingtième 
 
 Ç vingt-et- 
 
 (_ unième 
 
 Ç vingt deux- 
 
 (_{ème, &c. 
 trentièîue 
 
 Ç trente- 
 
 (_ unième 
 quarantième 
 
 C quarante- 
 
 2. uniètne 
 cinquantième 
 
 Ç cinquante- 
 
 (^ uniètne 
 soixantième 
 
 Ç soixante- 
 
 (_ unième 
 
 Ç soixante- 
 
 C dixzème 
 
 5 soixante- 
 
 C onzième 
 
 5 soixante- 
 
 •C douzième 
 
 5 quatre- 
 
 c vingtième 
 
 Çquatre- 
 
 '^ vingt- 
 
 Cunième 
 
 Çquatre- 
 
 ^ vingt- 
 
 C dixième 
 
 Çquatre- 
 
 ^ vingt- 
 
 C onzième 
 centièftie 
 
 cent-uni- 
 ème, &c. 
 
 Ç deux-cent- 
 ^ ièine 
 
 milliè7?ie 
 
 13th 
 14th 
 15th 
 16th 
 17th 
 18th 
 19th 
 20th 
 
 21st 
 
 22d 
 30th 
 3 1st 
 40th 
 41st 
 50th 
 51st 
 60th 
 61st 
 
 70th 
 
 71st 
 
 72d 
 
 80th 
 
 81st 
 
 90th 
 
 9 1st 
 lOOth 
 lOlst 
 
 200th 
 
 lOOOth 
 
 quinzaine 
 
 vingtaine 
 
 trentaine 
 
 quarantaine 
 
 C cinquan- 
 C taine 
 
 soixantaine 
 
 quatre- 
 vingtaine 
 
 centaine 
 
 1 centaine 
 
 2 centaines 
 
 1 millier 
 
 fortnight) 
 fifteen 
 
 a score & a half 
 
 t-ivo score 
 
 Ç tivo score 
 \and ahalf 
 
 three score 
 
 {fo 
 
 five score 
 
 one hitndred 
 
 iivQ hundred 
 
 mie thousand 
 
 * Lf'vizac had soixante-dix ; in liis dictionary, al the word soixante, he gives 
 foizantedix ; and in the same dictionary, at the word seventy, he gives soixanteet 
 dix. It should be soixante- et-dix. See Grammaire des Grammaires, 7th ed page 333 
 
GO 
 
 OF THE AI>JECTI\'E. 
 
 CARDINAL 
 KU3ISER. 
 
 ORDIITAL KUMBER. 
 
 NUMERICAL COLLEC- 
 TIVE NOUNS. 
 
 2000 
 10,000 
 
 1,000,000 
 
 Ç deux mille 
 
 dix mille 
 
 5 miîle-fois 
 C mille 
 
 deux-mill- ') 
 itme, &c. 5 
 dix-milh'ème 
 
 \ millioneèwie 
 
 2000th 
 10,000th 
 
 millionth 
 
 2 milliers 
 1 myriade 
 
 1 million 
 
 2 thousand 
 1 myriad 
 
 1 million 
 
 181. The formation of the ordinal number from the cardinal does not 
 require any explanation, except that -unième is only found in compound 
 numbers, where premier and second are inadmissible. 
 
 182. When mentioning the days of the month, the French make use 
 of the cardinal instead of the ordinal number, and say le onze d'avril, 
 not le onzième, &c. le vingt-cinq du mois prochain, and not le vingt- 
 Li7iqtnème, &c. except, however, that instead of l^mi du mois, they say le 
 premier, the first day of, &c., and sometimes le second, though not so 
 well, for le denx ; but this mode proceeds no farther. 
 
 183. Although onze eleven, and onzième eleventh, begin by a vowel, 
 when the article is put before them it does not suffer elision ; for we say 
 le onze, le onziè?ne, and not Conze, V onzième ; we say also sur les onze 
 heures, and not s^tr le zonze heures. 
 
 184. Remark that in French we use the conjunction et, and, although 
 not used in English, in the following numbers : — vingt-et-2in, vingt-et- 
 line, twenty-one ; trent-et-un, trente-et-xme, thirty-one ; qT.arantr-ei-wi, 
 guar ant e-et-ïme, forty-one ; cinquante-et-xin, cinquante-et-une, fifty-one ; 
 soixa7ite-et-un, soixante-et-une, sixty-one ; soixante-et-dix, seventy. The 
 above are the only ones used with et and ; for though we say vingt-et-un, 
 &c., we cannot say vingt-et-dettx, &c. ; some say and waite soixante-et- 
 07ize, soixante-et-donze ; but it is not right. 
 
 185. The following mode of counting in English, one-and-tiventy, six- 
 and-îldrty, &c., is not used in French. 
 
 186. When in quatre-vingts, vingt is immediately followed by a noun^ 
 either expressed or .understood, it takes an s as the mark of the plural. 
 We say, for instance, quatre-vingts chevaux, eighty horses ; how many 
 books have you ? fen ai quatre-vingts, I have eighty, &c. ; but if in 
 quatre-vingts, vingt is followed immediately by any other munber, it 
 does not take s, and we say quatre-vingt-trois chevaux, eighty-three 
 horses ; how many books have you 1 fen ai quatre-vingt-quatre, I have 
 eight3'^-four, &c. 
 
 187. When in deux cents, trois cents, &c., cent is immediately fol- 
 lowed by a noun, either expressed or understood, it takes an s as the mark 
 of the plural : we say, for instance, trois cents livres, three hundred books ; 
 how many pens have you 1 fen ai quatre cents, I have four hundred, &c. ; 
 but if in deux cents, trois cents, &c., cent is immediately followed by an- 
 other number, it does not take s, and v/e say trois cent six livres, three 
 hundred and six books ; how many pens have you ? fen ai cinq cent huit, 
 I have five hundred and eight, &c. 
 
 188. JMille, thousand, takes no s as mark of the plural : we say deux 
 mille, two thousand, &c. ; but millerm'ûe, takes an s for the plural ; as il 
 y a deux milled do B. à P., it is two miles from B. to P. 
 
OF THE PRONOUN. 61 
 
 189. JifîC, instead of mille, is used for the date of the year: thus we 
 write mil Jmit cent trente, one thousand eight hundred and thirty. 
 
 190. Observe that a, o?ie, put in EngUsh before hundred and before 
 thousand, are not expressed in French ; and that and put in English after 
 hundred and after thousand, when followed by another number, is not 
 expressed in French : thus we say, for instance, cent cinquante tables, 
 one hundred and fifty tables ; mille soixante tables, one thousand and 
 sixty tables, &c. 
 
 191. In some parts of France, instead oï soixante-et-dix, soixante-onze^ 
 &c., they say septante, septante-un, septante-deux, &c. 
 
 192. Instead of quatre-vingts, quatre-vingt-u7i, quatre-vingt-deuXf 
 &c., they say octante, octante-im, octante-deux, &c. 
 
 193. Instead of quatre-vingt-dix, quatre-vingt-onze, quatre-vingt- 
 douze, &c., they say nouante, nonante-un, nonante-deux, &c. 
 
 194. There are many other numerical expressions used in poetry, music, 
 games, &c., as distique, tercet, quatrain, sixain, huitain, &c. ; tolo, duo, 
 tHo, quatuor, quinque, quinte, octave, &c. ; beset, sonnez, &c. 
 
 195. Un millier is very often employed for one thousand -weight; 
 quintal is never used except in the sense of one hundred weight. 
 
 196. The DISTRIBUTIVE numbers are those which express the different 
 parts of a whole; as la moitié, the half; le quart, the quarter; un 
 cinquième, a fifth, &c. 
 
 197. The piiopoRTioNAL denote the progressive increase of things ; ob 
 le double, the double ; le triple, treble ; le centuple, a hundred-fold, &c. 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 OF THE PRONOUN. 
 
 198. A pnoxouN is a word substituted in the place of a noun. 
 
 199. There are several kinds of pronouns, as Ûiç. personal, possessive-, 
 relative, absolute, demonstrxitive, and indefinite. 
 
 Of the Personal Pronouns. 
 
 200. Personal pronouns are used for the names of persons or things. . 
 
 201. There are three persons : the first, who speaks ; the second, who 
 is spoken to ; and the third is the person or thing spoken of. 
 
 202. 
 
 
 Pronouns of 
 
 the First Person. 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 
 Subject, je 
 
 
 I 
 
 je loue Dieu 
 
 1 praise God 
 
 *: C "^^ 
 
 for 
 
 à moi to nie 
 
 il me donne 
 
 he gives me. 
 
 ^ ^me 
 
 for 
 
 moi me 
 
 il me blesse 
 
 he hurts me. 
 
 ^ ) moi 
 
 for 
 
 à moi to me 
 
 donnez-moi 
 
 give me. 
 
 ^ ( moi 
 
 for 
 
 moi me 
 
 aidez -moi 
 
 help me. 
 
62 OF THE PRONOUN. 
 
 Plural. 
 Stibj nous -we nous louons Dieu -we praise God, 
 
 Ç., . Ç nous for à nous to iis il nous donne he gives us. 
 
 •'■ ^nous for nous us il nous blesse he hurts us. 
 
 203- They are both masculine and feminine ; that is, of the same gender 
 as the person or persons they represent. 
 
 204. In general, je and me are put before the verb, 7720/ after it, and 
 nous before, but sometimes likewise after it. 
 
 '^'^^ EXERCISE. 
 
 t oast my eyes upon the objects which surrounded me, and 
 
 portai vue f. sing, siir objet qui environnaient me, 
 
 saw with pleasure that all was calm and tranquil. Do ^you 'not'' 
 je vis avec que était calme tranquille. * 
 
 2see in all the features of my father that he is satisfied with me 1 
 voyez dans trait m. que il content de moi ? 
 
 We have told the truth. What were they saying of us \ If we desire 
 avons dit vérité f. Que * ^on hlisait Si désirons 
 
 to be happy, we ^must 'not^ deviate from the path of virtue. 
 
 de être devons nous écarter de sentier m. art. f. 
 
 205. Pronouns of the Second Person. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Subj.iw thou tu crains Dieu thou fear est God. 
 
 to thee il te parle he speaks to thee. 
 
 thee il te voit he sees thee. [ble. 
 
 to thee donne-toi la peine give thyself the trou- 
 
 thee habille-toi dress thyself. 
 
 te 
 
 for 
 
 à toi 
 
 te 
 
 for 
 
 toi 
 
 toi 
 
 for 
 
 à toi 
 
 toi 
 
 for 
 
 toi 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 vous 
 
 
 ç WHS 
 
 for 
 
 St^. vous ye or you vous louez Dieu you praise God. 
 
 ^ , . N .Tj'^a xv^i à vous to yon il vous parle he speaks to you. 
 •^' ^v««s for vous you il vous respecte he respects you. 
 
 206. In general tu and te are put before the verb, toi after, and vous 
 before, but sometimes after it. 
 
 207. Rex.4RK. Politeness has led to the use of the plural vous, instead 
 of" the singular tu : as vous êtes bien bon, you are very good, for tu es 
 bien bon, thou art very good. (See verbs page 6, art. 55.) 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 Thou art greater than I ; and from thee I have ^(at once) 'learnt 
 es moi; toi ai en même temps appris 
 
 humility and wisdom. I (was telling) thee that dancing is 
 art. f. art. sagesse f. disais te que art. danse f. 
 
 to the body what taste is to the mind. You '■'have -'shown 'us 
 
 m. ce que art. m. esprit. avez montré de 
 
 great talents ; when 2 (will you show) 'us great virtues'! How "amiable 
 
 m. quand mojitrerez-vous de f. Qiw 
 
 'you 2are ! How ^good 'you ^are (to have thought) of us ! (It was said) 
 
 êtes ! de vous être occupé On disait 
 
 of yoa the other day, that (you intended to) spend a winter in 
 
 autre jour va. vous vous proposiez de passer m. à 
 
OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUN. 63 
 
 London, (in order to) see (every thing) ^curious 'which ^that 'city 
 Londres pour voir tout ce que cette ville 
 
 ''presents. 
 offre de. 
 
 208. Pronouns of the Third Person. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 he 
 
 elleyi she 
 
 il perd son 7 ht loses his 
 
 temps 5 tnne. 
 
 elle travaille "> she is always 
 
 toujours 5 cit xvoric. 
 
 it il pleuvra it -.vill rain. 
 
 luim. for à lui to him < ;,,,• „„-i„_„j y I icill speak to 
 
 dites-/?«" que je , 
 
 tell him that 
 
 lid parlerai 
 
 Id m. 
 
 r dites-lui que '^ tell her that 
 lui/. for à elle to her < vows lui àonxie-\ you -will giz>€ 
 
 rez 3 her. 
 
 -< lui m. for le him <J que lui de ca- 
 
 pable 
 
 le ne connais ) , , , 
 
 •^ ,.... j„ _„ f -< kiio~LV ont 
 
 him capable. 
 
 le m. for lui him je le méprise / despise him. 
 
 la/*. for elle her je ^a respecte I respect her 
 
 „ - „ , Çil ne connaît"? Ae knoius but 
 
 ^"^/- ^"« ^^^'' iquVZe ^ S her. 
 
 . , . C.ie XiQ le sixsd\s~? I did not knov) 
 
 ^cm. for cela »^ l'^^^ ^ -.^ 
 
 Plural 
 ^filsm. - - they ^7. chantent } (g'/^tto) 
 
 libelles/. - - they elles xieni } '^''^(/^j-fs^J 
 
 Çpayez leur ceÇpaythemivhat 
 
 leur 771. for à eux fo them -s que vous leur s yoii o~ii<e to 
 
 Cdevez C.them(tomen). 
 
 ^j.^ , rtellîhemthat 1 
 
 Ç dites-leur, que . , , ^ , 
 , /• r ^11 ^ ^i 3 • T' • 7 ; wî5/i ^0 speak 
 
 leur /. for a elles to them < le desire leur< . ,, ^ ^^ 
 
 ? parler ' *° . ^^^'^ "^^^ 
 
 ^^ l^ladies). 
 
 , - _., Çvous /es trou-Çvo7i -rtvV/ find 
 
 les 7n. for eux them < i fv, / x 
 
 ^ verez ^lhem(men). 
 
 les /. for elles them il les admire j ! fT'^V^^\ 
 
 
 — — them 
 
 je ne vois Ç / see but them 
 qn'eJc.T ^ (gentlemen). 
 ,, - . Ç il ne connaît C /ie kiiou^s but 
 
 celles/. - ._ ther^. ^ q^,^^^^^ i them (ladies). 
 
 209. All the personal pronouns Je, tn, il, elle, nous vous, ils, ellesj 
 when subjects, are put after the verb in interrogations, as 
 
64 
 
 OF THE REFLECTED AND RECIPROCAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 dois'/e payer 1 
 a.s-tu dit ] 
 chante-t-iV bien 1 
 travaille-t-e//e P 
 
 must I pay ? 
 hast thou said? 
 does he shtg well Î 
 does she -work ? 
 
 ij J vous 
 -§^1 ils m. 
 ^ Lelles/. 
 
 210. Il, le 
 
 irons-no îi5 .? 
 \ïenàxez-vous ? 
 chantent-//* P 
 travaillent-eZ/es P 
 
 shall we £-0 ? 
 xvill you come ? 
 do they sing P 
 do they ivork P 
 
 eux, are always masculine : elle, la, elles, feminine ; 
 and les, leur, of both genders, as well as lui, when meaning to him or to 
 her : in other cases, hd exclusively belongs to the masculine. 
 
 211. All personal pronouns, when subjects, are placed before their 
 verbs, except in interrogative sentences, and most of them likewise, when 
 objects precede them, except in the imperative affirmative. But the objec- 
 tive eux, elles, lui, for le, and jnoi, toi, soi, with one exception of this last, 
 in soi-disant, styling himself, are invariably placed after the verbs by 
 which they are governed. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 He loved them because they were mild, attentive, and grateful. 
 
 aimait m. parce que doux reconnaissant 
 
 He 2(was saying) '(to them) do ^you 'not^ ^j^^^ow that the property 
 
 disait savez que propre m. 
 
 of merit is to excite envy 1 She often exhorted me to 
 
 art. mérite m. de exciter art. envie f. "^souvent ^exhortait 
 
 the study which is the most useful, that of the ^human 'heart. They 
 
 étude f. * * utile, celle m. 
 
 make us love virtue, more by their examples than by their words. 
 font aimer art. f. par exemple va. parole f. 
 
 What (has been said) of them ] Did they sgeak of them ] Do 
 ^Que ^071 ^a-t ^dit m. * ^oii ^par^ 
 
 *you 
 
 ^dit 
 'not^ ^see ^her "^ 
 voyez 
 
 ^a-t 
 
 Sspft 
 
 Hait 
 With what pleasure she plays ! 
 quel joue ! 
 
 f1 
 
 212. Reflected and Reciprocal Fronouns of the Third Person. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 C with a preposi- 
 \ tion 
 
 KXAMPLES. 
 
 chacun tire à 
 
 sol Ç governed by the Ç l'égoïsmefaitqu'- 
 
 verb 
 
 se for 
 
 se for 
 
 se for 
 
 se for 
 
 C so 
 
 a sot, à lui- 
 même 
 elle mê- 
 me 
 ' or lui- 
 mème 
 
 on ne voit que soi 
 
 il se donne des 
 
 louanges 
 elle se fait illu- 
 sion. 
 
 Ç every one draivs 
 ^ to himself. 
 C egotism makes a 
 < person see none 
 (^but himself. 
 
 gives himself 
 praises. 
 Ç she imposes on 
 C herself. 
 
 $he 
 
 < il se perd " < he ruins himself. 
 
 Csoi or e//eC ^u^ «e flatte 
 i même (_ 
 
 Ç she fiatters her- 
 \ self. 
 
OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUN EN. 
 
 65 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 se for à eux-mtmes 
 
 se for à elles-mêmes- 
 
 se for Pun à r autre- 
 
 se for eux-mêmes 
 
 ils s'attribuent 
 gloire de, &c. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 . ■) thei/ attrihute to 
 \ themselves the 
 J g'iory of, &c. 
 they prescribe to 
 themselves as a 
 rule to, &c. 
 
 SB 
 
 for 
 for 
 for 
 
 elles-mêmes 
 
 l'un l'autre 
 les uns les au- 
 tres 
 213. Remark. Se is placed before a verb, and 
 
 elles se prescrivent 
 pour règle de, &c. 
 
 "ils s'entredonnent,"^ 
 
 ou se font des ca- V they exchange gifts» 
 
 de aux j 
 
 ils se sont désho-') they have disg^^ated 
 norés 5 themselves. 
 
 elles se sont flattées 
 
 "^ they have flattered 
 ' 3 themselves, 
 
 ils s'entr'aident ?/iet//je//;one another, 
 
 les rats, dit-on, s'en- ") rats, it is said, eat 
 tre-dévorent 5 ^^ch other. 
 
 after a preposition, 
 and sometimes after a verb. 
 
 .V EXERCISE. 
 
 In a thousand instances we do not watch sufficiently over ourselves. 
 * mille occasion f. oti * veille assez sur soi. 
 
 The glory of the world (passes away) in an instant. He gives himself 
 
 monde m. s'évanouit en m. ^donne 'se 
 
 (a great deal) of trouble. She tires herself. People should (very seldom) 
 beaucoup peine f. lasse se. On doit rarement 
 
 speak of themselves. Virtue is amiable in itself. We must take 
 parler soi. art. f. de soi. On doit prendre 
 
 upon ourselve§ the care of our own affairs. 
 sur soi soin m. ses propre affaire f. 
 
 214. 
 
 
 de lui 
 
 d'elle 
 
 of him 
 
 of her 
 
 d'eux of them 
 
 d'elles 
 
 de cela of it 
 
 Of the Relative Pronoun en. 
 
 cet homme vous"^ ^Aa^ man pleases 
 plaît, vous en par- v you, you speak of 
 lez souvent ) him often. 
 
 crois pas cette S I do not believe that 
 
 femme sincère, je ^ ivoinan sincc'^e, I 
 
 'en méfie j distrust her. 
 
 ces fruits paraissent"^ these fruits look: 
 
 bons, j'e?i mange- ^ good,Ishould like 
 
 rais volontiers j to eat some of them. 
 
 voilà de belles oran-"^ these are beautiful 
 
 ges, voulez-vous > oranges, -will you 
 
 m'e?i donner 1 j give me some. 
 
 "^ / have not oeen im- 
 
 Cje ne 
 < fen: 
 C. m'e 
 
 of them 
 
 on ne ma pas trompe . ^ . ^ , 
 ., ^ ^ ^ )> posed upon, I am 
 Yen suis sur Ç ^ r -^ 
 
 d'ici 
 
 de là 
 
 hence 
 
 thence 
 
 il arriva ici, comme i 
 j'e/i partais 
 
 vous allez à Paris, et 
 monsieur en vient 
 
 F 2 
 
 he arrived here as 
 I ivas setting off 
 from hence. 
 are going toPa- 
 
 yo 
 
 c(/mes from thence 
 

 66 \ OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUN Y. 
 
 215 Of the Relative Pronoun, or Adverb v. 
 
 " à lui t 1 ' 5 ^'^''^ ^^ honnête "^ he is an honest man^ 
 
 ^ homme, fiez-vous-j/ 3 ^rusf him. 
 
 V „ . , Ç cette raison est so- ~) that reason is Q-ooci, 
 
 a elle to her -i i-j • > j r r ■ ? / ^ • 
 
 ^ hde, je m z/ rends > / i/zeW to it 
 
 Çces argumens sont~) these arguments are 
 
 à eux to them < pressans, je n'y vois > codent, I see no 
 
 C. point de réplique j reply to them. 
 
 r 1,1 ' J • -r "^ loaded 7v it h 1/ our ci' 
 
 I accable de vos civili- .... /, 
 
 » 11 ^ ^, J t' • • V viuties, I do not 
 
 a elles to them < tes, le ne sais com- > , / 
 
 1 4. ' J I knoiu iLO-iV to ac' 
 
 ment y re pondre , ? j »u 
 
 \^ ^ i J knoivledge them. 
 
 r j'ai éprouvé cette "^ / experienced that 
 à cela to it ^ perte quand j'y > /oss, ty/ie?j / least 
 
 (_ pensais le moins 3 thought of it. 
 
 Çnous partions àc'^-cve set off from Lon- 
 ici here -^ Londres, quand > don, ~vhen you 
 
 (^ vous y veniez J caine hither. 
 
 r c'est un endroit char- "j) It is a fine place, 1 
 là there < mant, je compte > intend to settle 
 
 (^ m'y fixer j there. 
 
 216. Remakk. y and e7i are always put before the verb, except with 
 the imperative affirmative. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 They speak (a great deal) of it. You like French authors, you 
 
 On parle beaucozip aimez art. -français ^auteur, 
 
 are ^always 'speaking of them. That is a -delicate 'affair ; the success 
 
 * parlez Ce délicat f. succès m. 
 
 of it is doubtful. See them ; I consent to it, but (do not trust 
 
 douteux. Voyez conseils ne vous y fez 
 
 them). That is a fine appointment : he had 'long ^aspired 
 
 pas. Ce charge f. * depuis long-temps aspirait 
 
 Ho it. He has done it ; but he will get nothing by it. 
 a fait ^gagnera hie ^rien y. 
 
 OF POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS 
 
 217. These pronouns (now called pronominal possessive adjectives), 
 denote the possession of things. When we say inon habit, my coat ; votre 
 maison, your house ; so7i jardin, his or her garden ; it is the same as 
 saying Vliabit qui est à moi, the coat which belongs to me ; la ?naison qui 
 est à vous, the house which belongs toyou; le Jardin qui est à lui, or à 
 elle, the garden which belongs to him or to her. 
 
 218. Of these pronominal adjectives, some always agree with a noun 
 expressed, and the others with a noun understood ; hence there are tivo 
 sorts of possessive pronouns. 
 
 219. Of those that always agree with a noun expressed^ some relate to 
 9ne person and others to several 
 
I 
 
 OF POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 67 
 
 220. Pronominal ^adjectives relating to One Person. 
 
 Singular. Plural, 
 
 mon, m, nia, y*. mes, vi.f. my. 
 
 for the «^ 2d ton, m. ta, /. tes, m. /. thy. 
 
 son, 771. sa, /. ses, m. f. his, her, its. 
 
 221. Pronominal Adjectives relating to Many Persons. 
 
 pehson. Singular. Plural. 
 
 Cist notre, 7n.y. nos, m.f. our. 
 
 of the < 2(1 votre, m. f. vos, m. f. your. 
 
 i_Zà leur, TO./. leurs, m./. their. 
 
 222. N. B. These possessive pronouns in French always agree in gen- 
 der and number with the object possessed, and not with the possessor as 
 in" English, for which reason they must be repeated before every noun. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Mon père, ma mère, et mes frères My father, mother, and brothers 
 sont à la caynpagne avec vos amis et are in the country, with your 
 leurs enfans, friends and their children. 
 
 Mon cousin est allé consoler sa My cousin is gone to visit and con- 
 sœur, qui a perdu son fis, sole his sister, who has lost her son. 
 
 223. jyfon, ton, son, are also used before a noun fcminme when begin- 
 ning with a vowel or h mute ; thus, mon ame, my soul ; ton humeur, thy 
 humour ; son amitié, his friendship ; must be said instead of ma ame, ta 
 humeur, sa amitié. 
 
 <^- y EXERCISE. 
 
 My principles, my love of retirement, my taste for 
 
 principe m. goût m. pour art. retraite f. . amour m. 
 (every thing) that (is connected) with learning, and my detestation 
 tout ce qui tient à art. instruction, haine 
 
 of all spirit of party, (every thing) has induced me to prefer a life 
 pour esprit parti, tout porté préférer la vie f. 
 
 passed in the closet, to the ^active Uife of the world. Do not think, 
 * de * cabiîiet, f. monde m. * pense, 
 
 my daughter, that thy candour, thy ingenuousness, thy taste, so delicate 
 que f. ingénidté f. m. si délicat 
 
 and so refined, and even thy graces, can (shelter) thee from 
 
 fn, mime m. puissent mettre à l'abri de 
 
 censure. His wit, his talents, his honesty, and even Ida 
 art. f. esprit m. m. h.onncteié f. ^ mtvie 
 
 (good natUTe), make him beloved (by every body). Our constancy and 
 bonhomie f. font aimer de tout le moiide. f. 
 
 our efforts will (at last) surmoimt all obstacles. I see nothing 
 m. * "^enfin ^surmonteront art. m. vols ne rien 
 
 that can (be censured) in your conduct. Their taste for the 
 que on pidsse reprendre dans conduite f. pour 
 
 fantastical, the monstrous, and the marvellous, gives to all theii 
 bizarre m. monstrueux m. merveilleux, m. donne 
 
 compositions, although very fine in themselves, an air of deformity, 
 f. quoique beau en elles-mêmes, m. difformité f. 
 
 which shocks at first sight. 
 qui choque à art. coup-d' œil m. 
 
68 OF POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 224. Of the pronouns, which always agree with nouns understoodf 
 some relate to one person and others to several persons. 
 
 225. Those which relate only to one person are : 
 PEusox. m. Sing. f. Sing. m. Plur. f. Plur. 
 
 1st Le mien, la mienne, les miens, les miennes, mine 
 2d Le tien, la tienne, les tiens, les tiennes, thine 
 
 3d Le sien, la sienne, les siens, les siennes, his, her, its. 
 
 226. Those which relate to several persons are ; 
 PERSON. m. Sing. f. Sing. PI. of both gen. 
 
 1st Le nôtre la nôtre les nôtres ours. 
 
 2d Le vôtre la vôtre les vôtres yours. 
 
 3d Le leur la leur les leurs theirs. 
 
 227. N. B. The real use of these pronouns is to s'pare the repetition 
 of the nouns which have been expressed a little before. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 Arez-vous toujours voire cheval ? Have you still your horse ? T 
 je 11 ai plus le mien. have disposed of mine. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 Is it your temper or hers that hinders you from living well together ? 
 
 ce humeur f. qui empêche de vivre ensemble ? 
 
 If it be yours, it ^is 'easy for 'you (to remedy) it (by mastering 
 
 ce est il aisé * de porter remède y en le prenant 
 
 your temper ;) if it be hers, redouble (your) complaisance, atten- 
 snr vous-mhne ; ce redoublez de de 
 
 tion, and good behaviour ; it is very seldom that this, method 
 de procédé m.. \)\. il très-rare ce moyen 
 
 (proves unsuccessful). If my friends had served me with the same 
 ne réussisse pas. Si avaient servi même 
 
 zeal as yours, it is very certain that I (should have) succeeded : but 
 zèle m. que il très-sfi"" aurais réussi: 
 
 yours have been all fire, and mine all ice. All the pictures which 
 oyj été de de glace. tableau m. que 
 
 we expected from Rome are arrived : (there are some) that are a little 
 
 attendions arrivés : il y C7i a qui un peu 
 
 damaged ; but yours, his, and mine are in good condition. We know 
 end.jyniragés ; en état m. savons 
 
 perfectly well what are your amusements in town, and I assure 
 parfaitement * quels _ à art. ville f. assure 
 
 you we are very far from 'envying 'you ^them ; but if you 
 
 que s'bmmes bien éloigné envier 
 
 knew ours in the country, (it is most likely) 
 
 saviez quels sont à campagne f. il y a toute apparence que 
 
 you (would not be long) in giving them the preference. You have 
 ne tarderiez pas à donner leur f. avez 
 
 opened your heart to me with that noble frankness which -so 'well 
 ruvert franchise f. qui si 
 
 'becomes an honest man : this confidence -'well 'deserves mine. 
 sisd à honntt( confiance f. mérite 
 
 228. Remark. When through politeness vous is used for txi, then volre^ 
 vos must take the place of ton, ta, tes, and le vôtre, la vôtre, les vôtres, 
 must be used for le tien, la tienne, les tiens, les tiennes. 
 
OF THE RELATIVE AND ABSOLUTE PRONOUNS. 
 
 69 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Que vous ressemblez peu à vos How little you resemble your an* 
 
 aiicHres ! cestors ! 
 
 Quand vous aurez enteiidu nos W^ken you have heard our rea- 
 
 raisonsy nous écoicterons les vôtres. sons, we shall listen to yours. 
 
 Qui 
 
 Que 
 
 Dont 
 
 or 
 de qui 
 
 ' who 
 
 . which 
 
 " whom 
 
 . which 
 r of which 
 
 J whose 
 
 of whom 
 
 OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 229. Relative pronouns are tlio&o which relate to a preceding noun, or 
 
 pronoun, called the antecedent. In the phrase r homme qui joue, the man 
 
 who plays, qrd relates to the substantive homme ; l''hom7ne is then the 
 
 antecedeut to the pronoun relative qui. 
 
 -r.. • •, J ^ Ç God, rvho sees every 
 
 Dieu qui voit tout > th' 
 
 , , . ^ Ç the horses -which are 
 
 les chevuîix qui courent -K 
 
 ^ ^ running. 
 
 Ç V homme que vous cher- Ç the man -whom you 
 
 \ chez (_ seek. 
 
 C les lois que nous obser- Ç the laws lohich we ob- 
 
 \ vons \ serve. 
 
 Ç rinsrdte dont vous Ç the insult of -which you 
 
 (^ vous plaignez i_ complain. 
 
 ^ la nature dont nous Ç nature -whose secrets 
 
 ^ ignorons les secrets (_ are unknown to us. 
 
 Ç les gens de qui vous Ç the people of -whom 
 
 ^ parlez (_ you speak. 
 
 C c'est une co/iJîY/ore Ç it is a condition, with- 
 
 < sans laquelle il ne <. out -which he will do 
 
 C. veut rien faire C. nothing. 
 
 Cceux auxquels il s'esïÇ those to -whom he ap- 
 
 s adressé, out refusé 
 
 C de le défendre 
 
 Cce sont des choses à 
 
 =\ quoi vous lie pensez 
 
 pas 
 
 Lequel 
 Laquell 
 
 4 
 
 auxquels 
 auxquelles 
 
 wnich 
 
 to whom • 
 
 Quoi 
 
 which 
 
 plied, refused to pro- 
 tect him. 
 these are things 
 ■which you do 
 think. 
 
 of 
 not 
 
 L 
 
 why 
 
 la cause, pourquoi C the reason -why 
 on l'a arrêté, est^ was arrested. 
 
 he 
 is 
 
 comme (_ known. 
 
 230. Qid, que, and dont, are of both genders and both numbers. 
 
 231. Lequel is a compound of quel, and the article le, la, les, with which 
 it coalesces in the following manner : 
 
 m. Singular, f. m. Plural, f. 
 
 lequel laquelle lesquels lesquelles -which 
 
 duquel de laquelle desquels ' desquelles of -which 
 
 auquel à laquelle auxquels auxquelles ta xvhich 
 
 232. This pronoun always agrees in gender and number with its ante- 
 c dent. Quoi, which sometimes supplies its place, is always governed by 
 a preposition. 
 
 OF PRONOUNS ABSOLUTE. 
 233. Pronouns absolute are those whiçh have no relation to an ante 
 cedent. They are the five following : 
 
70 
 
 OF THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN^. 
 
 Ç je vous dirai qui ta Ç I will tell you tclio has 
 
 (_ fait ^ done it. 
 
 Ç vous pouvez consulter Ç you may consult -whom 
 
 C qui vous voudrez, (^ you please. 
 
 Ç • ,,„ 9 Ç ivhom will you con- 
 
 < qui consulterez-vous P < c it l 
 
 Ç ., ' -^ ^ 7 ^ he does not know on 
 
 ■s il ne sait que résoudre \ i . ^ i ^ 
 
 C ^ ^ 7{;/mi to determine. 
 
 que ye^er-^•o?^s .? ^y/ta? will you do 1 
 
 Ç en quoi puis-je vous Ç in w/zaf can I serve 
 (_ servir? \ you? 
 
 ^il y a là je ne sais Ç there is in it I do not 
 ^ quoi d'obscxir (_ know ivhat obscurity. 
 
 Ç quelle instabilité dajis Ç ivhat instability in hu^ 
 \ les choses humaines ! c ™an affairs ! 
 
 C ., -^ 1 ^ .Che does not know 
 
 ^il ne sait quel partt^ ^,^,^^^^ resolution 
 
 to 
 
 prendre y 
 
 lequel aitnez-vous leÇ j . , •, ^ 
 
 ^ . , ^ ) w/ucA do you prefer 
 
 mieux de ces ta-< ^ . . • * i 
 
 Ti 2 € those pictures î 
 
 ^*e sa?s 6zen lequel je C I know* well which I 
 choisirais i would choose. 
 
 ,'hich 
 Lequel -i 
 
 j which 
 I 
 
 234. Qui applies only to persons. Que and quoi to things. 
 
 235. Qiiel, mas. sing., quelle, fern, sing., quels, m. pi., quelles, f. pi., 
 always precede a substantive, the gender and number of which they take. 
 
 236. Lequel, m. s., laquelle, f. s., les quels, m. pi., les quelles, f. pi. — 
 which ; duquel, m. s., de laquelle, f. s., desquels, m. pi., desquelles, f. pi. 
 • — of which ; auquel, m. s., à laquelle, f. s., a7<.r quels, m. pL, aî^or quelles, 
 f. pi. — to which ; are used to mark a distinction between several nouns or 
 objects. 
 
 OF DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 237. Demonstrative pronouns are those which point, as it were, to the 
 objects spoken of. They are, 
 
 mas. 
 ce, cet* 
 celui 
 celui-ci 
 celui-là 
 ceci 
 
 Singular. 
 fem. 
 
 -t: 
 
 cette 
 celle 
 celle-ci 
 celle-là 
 
 CE 
 
 CE 
 
 CET 
 
 CET 
 
 mas. 
 ces 
 ceux 
 ceux-ci 
 ceux-là 
 
 ' > these have no plural. 
 
 / 
 
 238. CE 
 
 tJiis or that 
 this or that 
 this 
 that 
 this, 
 that 
 rcE before a consonant 
 ! '^^ before an h aspirated 
 before a vowel 
 before an 7i mute 
 CETTE before any feminine noun 
 when without a noun, 
 intimates a person or 
 thing spoken of, 
 
 Plural. 
 
 fem. 
 
 ces 
 celles 
 celles-ci 
 celles-là 
 
 these or those 
 these or those 
 these 
 those 
 
 CE livre 
 CE héros 
 CET enfant 
 CET h.omme 
 CETTE /è?njHe 
 
 qui est-ce 1 
 
 ce que je vous 
 dis est vrai 
 
 this book 
 that hero 
 this child 
 that man 
 thai xvoman 
 
 who is it ? 
 
 what I tell you 
 is true. 
 
OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 
 
 71 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 Nothing is so opposite to that true eloquence, ^the office 
 "^ne ^rien opposé véritable f. fonction f. 
 
 ^(of which) is to ennoble (every thing), as the use of those refined 
 
 *de "^ennoblir Hont que emploi m. ^n 
 
 thoughts and hunting after those light, airy, (unsolid) 
 
 ^pensée Ï. art. recherche Ï. dé "^Uger '^délié '^sans consistance 
 
 ideas, which, like a leaf of ^beaten 'metal, ^ ^acquire) 
 Hdée f. comme feuille f. battu m. prennent de 
 
 ^brightness 'only'' by losing part of their solidity. This lîian 
 art. éclat m. ne que en perdajit * * art. f. 
 
 has nothing in common with that hero. This long restramed 
 
 en commun hero. Hong-temps ^contenu 
 
 hatred (broke out), and was the unhappy source of those dreadful 
 ^haine Î. éclata fut malheur e^ix f. terrible 
 
 events. It is a great pleasure to me. It was a great 
 
 événement m. plaisir m. pour fit 
 
 pain to us. 
 
 déplaisir m. pour 
 
 t 
 
 OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 
 
 239. Indefinite pronouns are those which are of a vague and indeter- 
 minate nature. They are of four soi;ts : 
 
 240. 
 
 (-1 s 
 
 somebody 
 people 
 they 
 we 
 [_you 
 
 FIRST CLASS. 
 Those that are never joined to a substantive. 
 
 ^ on aime à se fatter ^ '''' ''^ ^P^ ^^ ^«^«^^ «"«'« 
 
 Ç on n^est pas toujours Ç a maji is not always mas- 
 
 \ maître de soi ^ ter of his own temper. 
 
 Con n^est pas toujours C it is not always in the 
 
 in < maltresse dialler ou* <. powei of a woman to 
 
 ^ l'on veut (_ go where she wishes. 
 
 /• ^, > 7 > ^ Ç somebodii knocks at the 
 
 on frappe a la porte A -^ , 
 
 on pense et * l'on dit Ç people think and say 
 
 toiLt haut \ openly. 
 
 on raconte diversement Ç they relaie Ûï^i ?-\oTy àiî- 
 
 cette histoire \ ferently. 
 
 on acquiert V expérience Ç toe acquire experience at 
 
 à ses dépens C our own expense. 
 
 on trouve partoiit des Ç you mil find troublesome 
 importuns (^ people everyw^here. 
 
 ♦In- 
 stead 
 of 
 
 and 
 
 ♦In- 
 
 etead 
 of 
 
 !" 
 
 is better for euphony 
 to pari these words 
 with an V 
 
 les habitudes qu'an contracte. 
 ce après quoi on court, 
 quoiqu'on croie, 
 un homme à qui on reproche. 
 
 et Ton 
 ou Z'on 
 si Z'on 
 
 when the next word 
 does not begin with 
 an /, as is seen bj 
 the examples. 
 
 les habitudes que Von contracte 
 ce après quoi Von court, 
 quoi que Von croie. 
 un homme à qui l'on reproche. 
 
72 
 
 OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 
 
 I I 
 
 < I 
 
 tliey 
 
 Quelqu\in 
 
 Con prévient qiCon 
 < point eu l'intention 
 C &c. 
 
 Ç Quand on vous dit 
 que * l'on compte sw 
 vous 
 
 l'on vous blâme 
 on le loue, on a 
 
 n'a CI 
 de,< 
 
 Quiconque 
 
 Chacur, 
 
 beg to observe, that 
 / had no intention to, 
 
 &c. 
 
 when / tell you that 1 
 depend upon you. 
 
 if they blame 
 praise him, 
 wrong. 
 
 you and 
 they are 
 
 quelqu^un tTi'a dit, somebody told me. 
 
 Autrui 
 
 Personne 
 
 Rien 
 
 each 
 every one 
 
 other people 
 
 others 
 
 nobody 
 
 no one 
 C nothing 
 < not any thing 
 i_ any thing 
 
 quiconque connaît les hommes, apprend 
 à s'en défier, whoever knows man- 
 kind, learns to distrust them. 
 Ç chacun s'en plaint, every one complains 
 \ of him. 
 
 Çn' enviez pas le bien d' autrui, do not 
 I covet the property of others. 
 
 J ne faites pas à autrui ce que vous ne 
 ] voudriez, pas qu'on votts fit, do not 
 I do to others what you would not have 
 l^ done to you. 
 
 Ç la fierté ne convient à personne, pride 
 \ becomes nobody. 
 
 lui plaît, nothing pleases him. 
 Hen qui puisse lui plaire ? is 
 any thing that can please him ? 
 EXERCISE. 
 If you (behave yourself) (in that manner), what will people say of 
 vous conduisez ainsi que * "^on ^dira-t 
 
 you ? It (is thought) that this news is true. They write me word 
 
 071 croit nouvelle f. écrit * 
 
 from Ispahan that thou hast left Persia, and art 
 
 Ispahan as quitté art. Perse f. que tu es 
 
 now at Paris. One (cannot) read Telemachus without becoming 
 actiœllement à ne peut lire Télimaque sans devenir 
 
 better : we there find (every where) a mild philosophy, ^noble 
 ■meilleur : on y trouve partout doitx f. des 
 
 %nd ''elevated 'sentiments : we there find in every line the effu- 
 élévé y voit à chaque ligne épau' 
 
 sions of a noble souI, and we admire precepts calculated t». 
 
 chement m. beau f. des précepte propre 
 
 effect the happiness of the world. 
 faire '■bonheur m. monde m. 
 
 241. 
 
 Quelque 
 
 Chaque 
 
 SECOND CLASS. 
 Those which are always joined to a substantive. 
 
 C Csi cela était vrai, quelqu' historien en 
 
 < some < aurait parlé, if that were true, some 
 
 C. c historian would have mentioned it. 
 
 à chaque jour suffit sa peine, the trouble 
 of each day is sufficient of itself. 
 
 each, every 
 
OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 
 
 73 
 
 ^ , Ç whoever 
 
 quelconque ^^^atever 
 
 Certain, m. s. 
 
 Certaine, f. s. ! certain 
 Certains, m. pi. "S some 
 Certaines, f. pi. 
 
 t7>i, m. wne, f. 
 
 il n^y a raison quelcoiique qui puisse 
 a y obliger, no reason whatever can 
 oblige him to it. 
 
 r 
 
 J certain homme, a certain man. 
 certaines 7ioiivelles, some news. 
 
 Ç j*ai vu un homme, I saw a" man; 
 (_ prenez une orange, take an orange. 
 
 THIRD CLASS 
 
 242. 7^056 which are sometimes joined to a substantive and some- 
 times not. 
 
 JVul, m, s. 
 JVulle, f. s. 
 JVuls, m. pi. 
 JVulles, f. pi. 
 
 Pas un, m. s. 
 Pas une, f. s. 
 
 Aucun, m. s. 
 Aucune, f. s. 
 Aucuns, m. pi. 
 Aucu7ies, f. pi. 
 
 Autre, m. f. s. 
 Autres, m. f. pi. 
 
 Même, m. f. s. 
 JMèmes, m. f pi. 
 
 Tel, m. s. 
 Te/fe, f. s. 
 Te/s, m. pi. 
 Telles, f. pi. 
 
 Plusieurs, inde- 
 clinable 
 
 To?/.;, m. s. 
 Toute, f. s. 
 ToKS, m. pi. 
 Toutes, f. pi. 
 
 no, none 
 
 S no, 
 
 r 
 
 < no, n( 
 
 r 
 
 -^ other 
 
 L 
 
 < same 
 
 { such 
 I like 
 
 not one 
 
 I several 
 
 many 
 
 fall 
 -^ every 
 I every thing 
 
 f nulle raison ne peut le convaincre, no 
 1 reason can convince him. 
 
 I nul cTeux ne Va rencontré, not one 
 1^ of them has met him. 
 
 Cil Vby à pas une erreur dans cet ou- 
 < vrage, there is no error in that work. 
 (^ pas un ne le dit, not one says so. 
 fje ne connais aucun de vos Juges, I 
 
 tknow none of your judges. 
 il n^a fait aucune diJîcuUé, he has 
 made no difficulty. 
 Çservez-vous d'une autre expression, 
 J make use of another expression. 
 I je vous prenais pour un autre, I took 
 l^ you for another. 
 
 Çc^est le même homme que je vis hier 
 j he is the same man I saw yesterday. 
 "^ cet homme n^est plus le mé?ne, that 
 \^ man is no longer the same. 
 fil tint à peu près un tel discours. 
 J he delivered nearly such a discourse. 
 I je ne vis jamais rien de tel, I never 
 V_ saw any thing like it. 
 
 ~il est arrivé plusieurs vaisseamv, se- 
 veral vessels are arrived. 
 il ne faut pas que plusieurs pâtis sent 
 pour un seid, many must not surfei 
 for one. 
 
 'tous les êtres créés, ail created be- 
 ings. 
 tout disparaît devant Dieu, every 
 thing vanishes before God. 
 
 243. 
 
 Qui que 
 
 FOURTH CLASS. 
 Of those which are followed by quk. 
 
 \ 
 
 C qui que tu sois, whoever thou mayest. 
 whoever < be. 
 
 Cqui que ce soit, whoever it may be. 
 
 G 
 
74 OF THE VERBS. 
 
 Ç Cqiioi que ce soit, whatever it may l>e. 
 
 Quoi que < whatever < quoi que vans disiez, whatever you 
 
 C. C "^ay say- 
 
 r Cquel que soil cet homme, whoever 
 
 Q . J whoever J that man may be. 
 
 ^ ^ "S whatever 'S quelque soit votre cour age, XfhsX&yex 
 
 \_ V. your courage may be. 
 
 Tel aue 5 such as i ^^^^^ ^^^^^ ^^^ ^^'^^ "^"^ """* '" '"oulezy 
 
 ■' ^ C this stuff is such as you wish for. 
 
 r Cquelque raison que vous donniez, 
 
 Q J J whatever J whatever reason you may give. 
 
 ' ^ ] however j quelque pxdssuut que vous soyez, 
 
 L L however powerful you may be. 
 
 ^ ^ Ç . C tout savant qu^il est, however learned 
 
 Tout-que ^however ^ ^he may be. 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 OF THE VERBS 
 
 244. Hkke, instead of adopting Lévizac's plan about the arrangement 
 of the diflercnt kinds of verbs — that is, instead of scattering them in 
 different parts of the Grammar — I have placed them all at the end ol it. 
 
 'i'he arrangement and division or classification of the verbs adopted by 
 Lévizac I know, by long experience, is far from being advantageous to 
 scholars ; and if I have adopted a different arrangement, &c., it is because 
 I have been convinced in the course of my teaching that the verbs in 
 Lévizac's own Grammar are not laid down at sufficient length to make 
 plain to scholars tktj difference and the relation of the French and English 
 verbs. 
 
 N.B. At the beginning of each exercise on the verbs, I have indicated 
 the page of the particular verb on which each exercise is given ; and in 
 order to facilitate the finding out of the verbs, the part that contains every 
 thing about them is of a different color from that of the rest of the Grammar. 
 
 A thorough knowledge of the French verbs is one-third of the acquisi- 
 tion of the French language, and should of course be better explained and 
 better learned than is generally done. 
 
 Note.— The verb avoir, to have, must of course be thoroughly learned before the 
 following exercises are written. 
 
 EXERCISES ON AVOIR, TO HAVE— VERBS, PAGE 10. 
 
 245. In the following exercises, the substantive being taken in a parti- 
 live sense, it will be necessary to use the article according to the direction 
 given, page 45, art 132. 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 PttESENT. — I have books. Thou hast friends. He has honesty. 
 lix^re. ami. h.onnêteté f. 
 
 She has sweetness. We have credit. You have riches They have 
 
 douceur f m. ric/tesee pL m. 
 
 virtues. They have modesty. 
 vertu i. £ 
 
EXERCISES ON THE VERB AVOIR, TO HAVE. 75 
 
 Pretïhit IxDEFiNiTE. — I have had pleasure. Thou hast had gold. 
 
 planir m. or m. 
 
 He has had patience. She has had beauty. We have had honours. 
 
 f. f. honneur. 
 
 You have had friendship. They have had sentiments. They have had 
 
 amitié f. m. f. 
 
 sensibility, 
 f. 
 Imperfect. — I had ambition. Thou hadst wealth. He had sincerity, 
 f. b{e7i m. f. 
 
 She had graces. We had oranges. You had pears. They had apples, 
 
 poire. m. pomme 
 
 They had lemons. 
 f, citron. 
 
 Plitperfegt. — I had had apricots. Thou hadst had nectarines. He 
 ' abricot. bruq-no?i. 
 
 had had walnuts. She had had hazel-nuts. We had had chestnuts. You 
 
 noix. noisette. châtaigne. 
 
 had had figs. They had had medlars. They had had filberts. 
 figue. m. nèfie. f. aveline. 
 
 Preterit definite. — I had plums. Thou hadst cherries. He had 
 prune. cerise. 
 
 strawberries. She had pineapples. We had almonds. You had cur- 
 fraise. ananas. atnande. gro- 
 
 rants. They had raspberries. They had grapes. 
 seille. m. framboise. f. raisin. 
 
 246. Tn the following exercises, the addition of an adjective, after the 
 substantive, will make no change in the remark on the preceding exercise. 
 
 Preterit anterior. — I had had '-^very 'black 'ink. Thou hadst had 
 
 fo7^t noir encre f. 
 ^honest 'proceedings. She had had -^uncommon 'graces. We had had 
 honnête procédé. rare 
 
 2very ^ripe 'grapes. You had had ^exquisite 'melons. They had had 
 mûr exquis m. 
 
 ^ready 'money, 
 comptant argent m. 
 
 Future absolute. — I shall have ^studious 'pupils. Thou wilt have 
 
 appliqué élève m. 
 ^horrid 'pains. He will have ^ridiculous 'ideas. We shall have 
 horrible peine f. ridicule idée f. 
 
 ^useless 'cares. You will have ^true ^and '^real 'pleasures. They will 
 17171 tile soin m. . réel ni. 
 
 have ^poignant 'griefs. 
 
 cuisant chagrin m. 
 
 247. But if the adjective precedes the substantive, then de before an 
 adjective beginning with a consonant or an h aspirated, and rf before an 
 adjective beginning v^^ith a vowel or an h mute, only is to be used. 
 
 Future anterior. — I shall have had good paper. Thou wilt have 
 
 papier m. 
 had excellent fruit She will have had charming flowers. We shall have 
 m. pi charmant fieurs f. 
 
76 EXERCISES ON THE VERB AVOIR, TO HAVE. 
 
 had good pens. You will have had large buildings. They will 
 
 plume f. grand bâtiment m. 
 
 have had fine clothes. 
 siiperbe habit m. 
 Peesent of the C0ÎÎDITI0S-A1. — I should have fine engTa^^ngs. Thou 
 
 gravure f. 
 shouldst have pretty playthings. He should have immense treasures. 
 joli Joî/Jou m. * trésor m. 
 
 We should have beautiful pictures. You would have pretty houses. 
 
 tableau m. f. 
 
 They should have long conversations. 
 f. 
 
 248. After words expressing quantity, such as beaucoup, a great deal,- 
 ^eat many ; peu, little, few ; phis, more ; moins, less ; trop, too much, 
 too many, &c., de and d'' are used as directed art. 247. 
 
 249. After bien, much, many, du, de la, de I', des, are used as directed 
 page 45, art. 122. 
 
 CoxDiTio^TAL PAST. — I should have had a great deal of trouble. Thou 
 
 pei?ie f. 
 wouldst have had more pleasure. He would have had (a vast deal) of 
 
 injlnimetit 
 knowledge. We should have had more opportunities of succeeding 
 
 connaissance f. pi. occasion f. réussir. 
 
 You would ^certainly ^have ^had many advantages over him. 
 certai?ie?nent beaucoup avantage sur lui 
 
 They would have had many enemies. 
 bien ennemi. 
 
 250. Observe that when the verb is followed by several substantives, the 
 proper article and preposition must be repeated before each. 
 
 Imperative. — Have complaisance, attention, and politeness. Let him 
 f. <?^ar^ m. pi. politesse f. 
 
 have modesty, and ^more ^correct 'ideas. Let her have more decency. 
 f. juste décence. 
 
 Let us have courage and firmness. Have gravy soup, nice 
 m. fermeté f. un ^gras ^soiipe f. bon 
 
 (roast beef), and a pudding. Let them have ale, rum, and punch. 
 rosbif m. ponding vn.. m. aile f. rum m. ponchem. 
 
 Let them have manners and conduct, 
 f. mϔirs f. conduite f. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 251. The subjunctive, in French, is always preceded by the conjunction 
 q7te, that, which is often suppressed in English. 
 
 Presext. — That I may have many friends. That thou may'st have 
 beaucoup 
 good reasons to give him. That he may have ^elevated 'sentiments. 
 
 donner lui, élevé m. 
 
 That we may have courage and magnanimity. That you may have 
 
 bravoure f. f. 
 
 ''delightful 'landscapes, and beautiful (sea-pieces). That they may 
 délicieux paysage m. marine f. pi. 
 
 nave more condescension and ^more ^prepossessing 'manners. 
 condescendance prévenant manière £ 
 
EXERCISES ON THE VERB AVOIR, TO HAVE. 77 
 
 Pheterit. — That I may have had wine, beer, and cider. That 
 
 viji m. bicre f. cidre m. 
 
 thou raay'st have had a e^otd norse, and a fine dog. That he may have 
 
 cheval chien. 
 
 had ^enlightened 'judges. That we may have had snow, rain, and 
 
 éclairé j^ige. neige f. pluie f. 
 
 wind. That you may have had a great (dining-room), a beautiful 
 vent ni. salle à manger f. superbe 
 
 (drawing-room), a pretty (dressing-room), and a ctiarming 
 
 salon m. joli cabinet de toilette m. charmant 
 
 (bed-room). That they may have had vast possessions, fine 
 
 chambre à coucher f. • vaste f. 
 
 meadows, and '^deHghtful 'groves. 
 -prairie f. délicieux bois m. 
 
 Impeufect. — That I might have a sword, musket, and pistols. 
 
 épée f. fusil, n^ pistolet m 
 
 That thou might'st have a knife, a spoon, and a fork. That 
 
 couteau m. cuillère f. fourchette f. 
 
 we .might have a penknife, pencils, and good copies. That he might 
 
 canif m. pinceau m. modèle xn. 
 
 have a coach, a good house, and furniture, simple but elegant. 
 
 carrosse m. f. meuble m. pî. mais 
 
 That you might have health and great respect That they might 
 
 santé f. un considération i. 
 have ^fruitful 'lands. 
 
 fertile terre f. • 
 
 Pluperfect. — That I might have had friendship. That thou might'st 
 
 amitié f. 
 have had gloves, boots, and horses. That he might have had ^zealous 
 
 gant m. botte f. cheval m. zélé 
 
 ^and ■'faithful 'servants. That we might have had fine clothes, ^precious 
 
 fdtle domestique m. 
 'jewels, and -magnificent 'furniture. That you might have had ^warm 
 bijou va.. magnifique m. pi. chaud 
 
 'friends. That they might have had greatness of soul and pity. 
 
 grandeur f. pitié f. 
 
 Sentences on the same Verb, with a Negative. 
 
 252. In the following sentences, the preposition de or d'' is put before 
 tlie substantive, according as it begins with a consonant, an h aspirated, 
 a vowel, or an h mute (see art. 247) ; ne is put between the personal 
 pronoun and the verb, and pas or point after the verb in the simple tenses, 
 and between the verb and the participle in the compound tenses ; as, 
 
 Je n'ai pas de livres, / have no books. 
 
 Tu n'avais pas de bien, Thoxi hadst no tveaitn. 
 
 Elle n'eut pas d'honnêteté. She had no honesty. 
 
 Nous n'avons pas eu d'amitié, We have had no Jriendship. 
 
 Vous n'aviez pas eu de puissans amis, Yoîi had not had poiverful friends. 
 \U n'auront pas d'ennemis redou- They ivill not have formidable one- 
 tables, mies. 
 
 ii2 
 
78 EXERCISES ON THE VERB AVOIR, TO HAVE. 
 
 EXERCISE— 5ed Verbs, page 13. 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 Presext. — I have no -precious 'medals. We have no ^useless 
 
 médaille f. inutile 
 
 things. Preterit isdefi>"ite. — I have had no constancy. We have 
 chose f. f. 
 
 had no generosity. Imperfect. — Thou hadst not a beautiful park. 
 
 f. pare m. 
 
 You had no good cucumbers. Pluperfect. — He had had no fine 
 
 concvjnbre m. 
 houses. They had had no money. Preterit defixite. — He had not 
 
 argent m. 
 a skilful gardener. They had no carpets. Preterit anterior. — 
 
 habile Jardinier m. tapis m. 
 
 Thou hadst had no complaisance. You had had no great talents. 
 
 f. m. 
 
 FrxuEE ABsoLci-E. — I shall have no great business. We shall have 
 
 affaire f. pi. 
 no ^uncommon 'prints. Future anterior. — Thou shalt have had 
 
 rare estampe f. 
 no consolation. You shall not have had ^quiet 'days. 
 f. tranquille m. 
 
 COXDITIOXAL. 
 
 Present. — He should not have bad pictures. They should 
 • mauvais tableau m. 
 
 have no leisure. Past. — I should have had no griefs. We should 
 
 loisir m. chagrin m. 
 
 have had no troubles. 
 peine f. 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 Have no impatience. Let him not have ^absurd 'ideas. Let us not 
 sing. absurde f. 
 
 have ^dangerous 'connexions. Have no such whims. Let them n(^ 
 
 liaison f. caprice m 
 
 have ho Whimsical 'a ^project. 
 bizarre projet m. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Present. — That I may have no protectors. That vï^e may have no 
 
 m. 
 success. Preterit. — That he may have had no perseverance. That 
 succès m. f. 
 
 they may have had no valour. Imperfect. — That thou might'st have 
 
 bravoure f. 
 no principles of taste. That you might not have a just 
 
 principe m. goût m. Juste 
 
 rewcird. Pluperfect. — That I might have had no good advice. 
 récompense f. avie m. pi. 
 
 That we might have had no news. 
 
 nou/veUe f. pi. 
 
EXERCISES ON THE VERB AVOIR, TO HAVE. 79 
 
 The Verb Avoir, mterrogatively. 
 
 253. In interrogations, the personal pronoun, accompanied by a hyphen 
 (-), is placed after the verb in the simple tenses, and between the verb 
 and the participle in the compound tenses ; and when the third person 
 singular of the verb ends with a vowel, for euphony a ^ is put between it 
 and the pronoun, preceded and followed by a hyphen; thus, (-). 
 
 254. Mind what has been said page 45, art. 122. 
 
 Ai-je des livres 1 Have I books ? 
 
 Avais-tu du bien ? Hadst thou -wealth ? 
 
 Eut-elle de l'honnêteté 1 Had she honesty ? 
 
 Avons-nous eu de bons conseils 1 Have tue had good advice ? 
 
 Aviez-vous eu de la prudence 1 Had you had prudence ? 
 
 Aura-t-il de l'argent ? Will he have money ? 
 
 Aura-t-elle eu des protecteurs 1 Will she have had protectors ? 
 
 EXERCISE.— ^ee Verbs, page 16. 
 INDICATIVE. 
 Present. — Hast thou needles 1 Have you ^coloured 'mapsi 
 aiguille f. enluminé carte f. 
 
 Pretehit istdefikite — Have I had pens 1 Have vfe had ^conveiiient 
 
 plume f. corr.mode 
 
 houses 1 Imperfect. — Had she silk ? Had they large buildings I 
 
 soie f. grand bâtiment m. 
 
 Pluperfect. — Had she had pins Î Had they had ^extensive 'fields 1 
 épingle f. spacieicx champ m. 
 
 Preterit definite. — Had he good shoes % Had they (looking-glasses)l 
 
 soulier m. f. miroir m. 
 
 Preterit anterior. — Hadst thou had lace '] Had you had ^odoriferous 
 
 den telle f. o do riféranî 
 
 shrubs 1 Future absolute. — Shall I have gold, silver, and pla- 
 arbuste m. m. argenrS m. pla' 
 
 tina 1 Shall we have (good luck) ? Future anterior. — Will she 
 tine m. bonheiir m. 
 
 have had joy ? Will they have had company 1 
 joie ? compagnie f. 
 
 CONDITIONAL. 
 Present. — Shouldst thou have happy moments \ Should you have 
 heureux va. 
 good wine and ^nice 'cordials? Past. — Should he have had 
 
 vi7i m. Jin liqueur f. 
 
 uncommon fruits 1 Should they have had rich clothes ? 
 rare m. 
 
 The Verb Avoir, interrogaiively and negatively. 
 
 255. In interrogative and negative sentences, observe the diffeient rules 
 (art. 245, 246, 247, 248, 249), and always place 7ie at the beginning of 
 sentences, and pas or poi?it after the personal pronoun, whether in the 
 simple or compound tenses. 
 
 N'ai-je pas des livres 1 Have I no books ? 
 
 N'avais-tu pas des amis 1 Hadst thou no friends /? 
 
80 EXERCISES ON THE VERB ETRE, TO BE. 
 
 N'a-t-clle pas beaucoup d'esprit"? lias she not a great deal of mt? 
 
 N 'avons-nous pas eu de bons pro- Have we not acted fairly ? 
 
 cJtiés 1 
 
 N'aviei'.-vous pas eu de nouvelles Had you not had new gowns ? 
 
 robes 1 
 
 iS^'aura-t-il pas des ressources ? Will he have no resources ? 
 
 N'auront-elles pas eu des consola- Will they have had no consola- 
 
 lions ] tions ? 
 
 EXERCISE.— ^ee Verbs, page 18. 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 Present. — Hast thou no diamonds ? Have you no ^indulgent 'parents'* 
 
 diamant m. ^ m. 
 
 Preterit inuefiivite. — Hast thou not had contempt and even hatred 
 
 mépris m. même haîne f. 
 for that man "! Have you not had better examples 1 Imperfect. — 
 poitr meilleur exemple m. 
 
 Had he not a ^rigij 'censor? Had they not -inattentive 'children ? 
 severe censeur m. enfant m. 
 
 Pluperfect. — Had I not had other views 1 Had we not had amethysts, 
 autre vue ? f. améthyste f. 
 
 rubies, and topazes 1 Preterit definite. — Had I no great wrongs 1 
 rubis m. topaze f. tort m. 
 
 Had we not ^perfidious 'friends? Preterit anterior. — Had he not 
 
 perfide 
 used 2far.fetched 'expressions 1 Had they not excellent models ? 
 eu très-recherché f. modèle m. 
 
 Future absolute. — Wilt thou not lead a ^more ^regular 'life ] Will 
 
 avoir réglé conduite ï. 1 
 
 you not have ^fashionable 'gowns 1 Future anterior. — Shall I have 
 
 à la mode robe f. 
 had no sweetmeats 1 Shall we not have had a good preacher ] 
 
 confiture f. 1 prédicateur m. 
 
 CONDITIONAL 
 Present. — Should she not have ^clear 'and ''just 'ideas 1 Would 
 
 clair 
 they not have ^more ^extensive 'knowledge 1 Past. — Should she 
 
 - étendu connaissances f. pi. 
 have had no patience ? Should they have had no rectitude 1 
 
 f. droiture f. 1 
 
 Note.— The verb ttre, to be, must of course be thoroughly learned before the fol 
 lowing exercises are written. 
 
 EXERCISES ON ETRE, TO BE.— See Verbs, page 24:. 
 INDICATIVE. 
 Present. — I am very glad to see you. Art thou not pleased with 
 aise de voir satisfait de 
 
 that book 1 Is she really amiable 1 We are happy. Are you 
 
 véritablement heureux. 
 
 not too condescending 1 * A re your friends still in London! 
 complaisant ? encore à Londres ? 
 
 * About such sentences, see Verbs, page 8, art. 63. 
 
EXERCISES ON THE VERB ETRE, TO BE. 81 
 
 Pretekit indefinite. — Have I not been constant ] Hast thou always 
 
 been steady ] She has been faithful. Have we been firm and courage- 
 
 posé ? fidtle. ferme 
 
 DUS 1 You have been charitable. Have those men always been good 
 
 and benevolent ? 
 bienfaisant ? 
 
 Imperfect. — I was too busy to see you. Wast not thou 
 occupé pour recevoir 
 troublesome 1 Was this girl idle ] Were we not too untractable 1 You 
 importun? file paresseux ? indocile? 
 
 were not ^qujet 'enough. They were vain, frivolous, and coquettish, 
 tranquille assez. . f. frivole coquette. 
 
 Pluperfect. — I had hitherto been very indifferent. Hadst thou not 
 jusqiC alors insouciant. 
 
 been too imprudent] Had his wife been sufficiently modest and 
 
 épouse assez assez 
 
 reserved î We had not yet been sufficiently attentive. Had you 
 réservé ? encore appliqué. 
 
 been envious and jealous 1 They had not been grateful. 
 
 jaloux ? recomiaissant, 
 
 Pbetebit DEFiifiTE. — Pcihaps I was not sufficiently prudent. 
 
 Peut-être que assez 
 
 Wast thou ^discreet 'enough on that occasion 1 Was not that princess 
 discret en f. princesse 
 
 too proud 1 We were very unhappy. Were you not too hasty 1 
 fier ? prompt ? 
 
 They were not much satisfied. 
 fort satisfait. 
 
 Future absolute. — To-morrow I shall be (at home) till 
 
 Demain chez-moi jusqu'à 
 
 (twelve o'clock.) Wilt thou always be restless, brutal, and sour 1 
 
 midi inqidet, bourru, chagrin ? 
 
 Will your father be (at home) this evening % Shall we not be 
 
 *JMonsieur chez-hii soir va. 
 
 more diligent ] Will you 'always ^then 'be capricious, obstinate, and 
 
 done quinteux, opiniâtre, 
 
 particular 1 Will not your scholars be troublesome ? 
 pointilleux ? écolier incotnmode ? 
 
 Future anterior. — Shall I not have been too severe 1 Thou wilt 
 
 have been too distrustful. Will not his sister have been whimsical and 
 
 défiant. sœiir fantasque 
 
 capricious] Shall we not have been ^eager 'enough! Will you not 
 
 empressé 
 have been inconsiderate 1 Will not the judges have been just 1 
 indiscret ? j'>tge 
 
 * 25G. It is ciistoniiiry, through respect, in speaking of a person's relations, to 
 prefix to the name Mr., Mrs., or Miss: thus we say, Monsieur votro père ; Monsieur 
 votre frère ; Madame votre mère ; Mademoiselle votre bccur, &c. 
 
82 ' EXERCISES ON THE VERB ETRE, TO BE. 
 
 Conditional present. — I would not be so rash. Would'st thou 
 
 téméraire. 
 be as consistent in thy behaviour as in thy language 1 Would not 
 
 conséquent dans conduite f. propos m. pi. 
 
 his son be ready in time 1 Should we be always incorrigible 1 You would 
 
 Jils prêt à 
 not be ^disinterested 'enough. Would not those ladies be always virtuous ? 
 désintéressé dame ' vertueux? 
 
 Past. — (Had it not been for) your instructions, I should have been 
 
 Sans conseil m. 
 
 proud and haughty. Would'st thou not have been malicious and 
 dédaigneux hautain. malin 
 
 sarcastic 1 Would that man have been so destitute of common sense 1 
 ricaneur? tellement dépourvu bon sens? 
 
 Certainly we should not have been so ridiculous. Would you not have been 
 
 si ridicule. 
 
 more kind and indulgent? They would not have been so ungenteel 
 
 doux plus complaisant ? tnalhonnete. 
 
 Imperative. — Be liberal. Do not be so lavish. Let us be equi- 
 
 sing. sing. prodigue. 
 
 table, humane, and prudent. Let us not be covetous. Be economical 
 
 humain avide. pi. économe 
 
 and temperate. Do not be thoughtless. 
 sobre. pi. léger. 
 
 257. As the third person singular and plural of the imperative mood 
 belong rather to the subjunctive, they are there exemplified. 
 
 258. Before the subjunctive can form a complete sense, it must be 
 preceded by another verb. For the sake of brevity, therefore, complete 
 sentences will only be given on the present tense. This remark applies 
 alike to the four conjugations. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 Present. — Is it possible I can be so credulous ? They wish 
 ■[que crédule On désire 
 
 thou may'st be more modest. Is it possible she can be so obstinate ? 
 
 modeste. entêté? 
 
 They wish us to be more assiduous. It is not expected you should be 
 
 assidu. On * s'attend 
 
 timid. It is feared they may be guilty 
 timide. 0?i * craint ne coupable. 
 
 Preterit. — That I should have been so hasty and impatient. That 
 
 emporté si 
 thou should'si have been so (puffed up) with pride. That she should have 
 
 bouffi de 
 been so fickle. That we should have been so (headstrong). That you should 
 
 volage têtu. 
 
 have been so avaricious. That they should have been so unreasonable. 
 avare. déraisonnable 
 
 259. Observe, the verb être serves as an auxiliaiy to conjugate the 
 jMssive verbs through all their tenses, the compound tenses of the pron- 
 ominal verbs, and those of about fifty neuter verbs. See Verbs,/». 162. 
 
 t See page 76, art. 251. _ 
 
EXERCISES ON TIIïï REGULAR VEUfiS IN EF 83 
 
 Impf.ufect. — That I should not be humane and generous. That t-iou 
 
 hicmaiii 
 might'st be more careful. That she might not be so arrogant. That 
 
 soi^îietix. 
 we might be victorious. That you might not be so stern. That they 
 
 sévèi^e. 
 might not be so cruel. 
 
 Pluperfect. — That I might have been more studious. That thou 
 
 might'st have been more circumspect. That she might have been more 
 
 circonspect. 
 
 attentive to her duty. That we might have been less addicted to 
 
 devoir m. pi. livré â 
 
 pleasure. That you might have been more assiduous and more 
 
 art. m, pi. assidu pins 
 
 grateful. That they might have been less daring. 
 
 reconnaissant. hardi. 
 
 First Conjugation m er. 
 See Verbs, page 34 and following, and 48 and following. 
 
 Note. — The verb parler, to speak, must of course be thoroughly learned before 
 the following exercises are written. 
 
 260. Observe, that in the following exercises the French verbs, which 
 are found under the English verbs, are in the infinitive present ; it is for 
 the student to put them in the tenses required by the meaning of the 
 English sentences. 
 
 261. Adverbs, with few exceptions, must be placed after the verb in 
 simple tenses, and between the auxiliary and the participle in compound 
 tfinses, when this adverb is only a single word. 
 
 EXERCISES ON THE FIRST CONJUGATION IN ER. 
 Indicative present. — I willingly give that plaything to your sister. 
 volontiers donner joujou m. 
 Do I prefer pleasure to my duty 1 Dost thou not irritate thy 
 
 prlfi^rer art. m. devoir m. h riter 
 
 enemies ] He does not propose -salutary 'advice to his friends. Wc 
 cnyiemi ? proposer U7i avis m. 
 
 sincerely love peace and tranquillity. We do not neglect 
 sincèrement art. paix f. art. f. 7ie négliger 
 
 (any thing) to ^please 'you. Do you not admire the beauty of that 
 
 rien pour plaire admirer f. 
 
 landscape 1 Do not your parents comfort the afflicted ] They 
 
 paysage m, consoler ciffiigé m. pi. 
 
 (make use of) all means to succeed. 
 
 employer art. moyen m. pi. pour réussir. 
 
 Pheterit indefinite. — I have (given up) my -favourite 'horse to m^ 
 
 céder favori cheval 
 
 cousin. Hast thou not exchanged watches with my sister 1 Ha,s the 
 changer de montre 
 
84 EXERCISES ON THE REGULAR VERBS IN ER. 
 
 tutor given fine engravings to his pupil Î We have spoken 
 
 précepteur gravure f. pupille m. 
 
 (a long vi^hile) of your adventure. Have you not insisted (too much) 
 
 long-teinps aventure f. iiisisté trop 
 
 upon that point 1 Have your aunts prepared their ^ball 'dresses 1 
 mr m. tante préparer de bal habit m. 
 
 Imperfect. — I unceasingly thought of my misfortunes. Didst thou 
 
 sans cesse penser à malhetir m. 
 
 dread his presence and firmness ? He exhibited in his person all 
 redouter f. sa fermeté ? retracer en f. 
 
 the virtues of his ancestors. Did not that v^oman accuse her friend of 
 f. ancêtre. accuser amief. 
 
 levity? We did not protect that bad man. You despised a 
 légèreté f. protéger méchant mépriser 
 
 ^vain 'erudition. Did the Eomans disdain ^so ''vpeak 'an ^enemyl 
 
 f. Romain dédaigner faible m. 
 
 The bees were there sucking the cups of the flowers. 
 abeille y sucer calice m. fleur. 
 
 PtuPETiïECT. — I had drained an ^unwholesome 'marsh. Had'st 
 dessécher mal sain marais m. 
 
 thou not married a man rich, but unluckily without education ? 
 
 épouser malheureusement sans f. 
 
 Had his father rejected these ^advantageous 'offers ? We had not 
 
 rejeter avantageux offre f. 
 
 long hstened to the singing of the birds. Had you already 
 long-tetnps écouter * chant m. oiseau m. déjà 
 
 studied geography and history 1 Had not his friends procured 
 étudier art. f. art. h.istoire f. procurer 
 
 him a troop of cavalry 1 
 
 lui compagnie f. cavalerie ? 
 
 Preterit DEFiîfiTE. — Did I not gladly give peaches and flowers 
 
 avec plaisir pêche f. fleur f 
 
 to my neighbours'! Thou forgo ttest an -essential 'circumstance. Did 
 
 voisin m. oublier essentiel circonstance f. 
 
 not your cousin relate that charming history with (a great deal) of 
 
 raconter charmant avec beaucoup 
 
 grace 1 He lightly judged of my intentions. Did we not shew 
 
 légèrement juger tnontrer 
 
 courage, constancy, and firmness ] Did you visit the grotto and the 
 
 m. f. f. visiter grotte f. 
 
 grove ■? They did not generously forgive their enemies. 
 
 bois m. généreusement pardonner à 
 
 Preterit anterior. — I had soon wasted my money and exhausted 
 
 bientôt manger argent m. épuiser 
 
 my resources. Hadst thou (very soon) reinforced thy party ? Had not 
 
 ressource f. vite renforcer parti m. 
 
 Alexander soon surmounted all obstacles 1 We had not ^soon 'enough 
 Alexandre surmonter tous art. m. . tôt assez 
 
 shut the shutters, and (let down) the curtains. Had you not quickly 
 Jermcr volet baisse? rideau. promptement 
 
 dined 1 In (the twinkling) of an eye. they had dispersed the mob. 
 diner ? Bans un din * œil, dispei^ser popidact f. 
 
EXERCISES ON THE REGULAR VERBS IN ER. 85 
 
 2C2. There is a fourth preterit, cilled preterit anterior indejinile, which is used 
 instead of the preterit anterior, when speaking of a time not entiieîy elapsed, as 
 fai eu achevé mon ouvrage ce matin, cette semaine, &c., and no\. feus achevé: as itis 
 found in every conjugation, I shall insert it here : fai eu parlé, tu as eu parlé, il a 
 eu parlé, nous avons eu parlé, vous avez eu parlé, ils ont eu parlé, they had spoken. 
 
 FuTUBE ABSoiuTE. — I sliall relieve tue poor. Wilt thou faith- 
 
 soulager pauvre m. pi. fidile- 
 
 fully keep that secret 1 Will he consult 2enlightened 'judges 1 He 
 
 ment garder m. consulter éclairé Jiige P 
 
 will support you with all his credit. We shall not prefer pleasure 
 
 appuyer de m. préférer art. m. 
 
 to glory, and riches to honor. 'By ^such ^a ^conduct, 
 
 art. f. art. art. tel conduite f. 
 
 will you not afflict your father and mother 1 Will they astonish 
 
 affliger votre étonner 
 
 their hearers ] 
 auditeur m. 
 FuTURK ANTEaioR. — I sliall soou have finished this book. By thy 
 
 achever m. 
 
 submission, wilt thou not have appeased his anger 1 Will the king have 
 soumission f appaiser colère f. 
 
 triumphed over his enemies 1 ^ vy^e 'perhaps shall not have rewarded 
 triomplier de récompenser 
 
 enough the merit of this 2good 'man. Will you not have flown to 
 
 mérite m. de bien voler 
 
 his assistance ■? Will our servants have brought money? 
 ~ secours m. domestique m. apporter argent ? 
 
 Cos^DiTîONAL PRESENT. — Should I form conjectures without number? 
 
 former f. nombre? 
 
 Thou would'st not avoid ^so 'great 'a Manger. Would not his attorney 
 éviter procureur 
 
 (clear up) that business ? We would (drive away) the importunate. 
 débrouiller affaire f. chasser importun m. pi. 
 
 Would you not discover that ^atrocious 'plot ? They would not 
 
 dévoiler atroce complot m. 
 
 unravel the clue of that intrigue. 
 démêler fl m. f. 
 
 Past. — I should have liked hunting, fishing, and the coun- 
 aimer art. chasse f. art, pèche f. cam- 
 
 try. Would'st thou not have played 1 Would he not have bowed 
 
 pagne f. jouer ." saluer 
 
 to the company ? Would we ^gladly 'have upraised his pride 
 * compagnie f. avec plaisir louer orgueil m. 
 
 and incivility ! You would have awakened (every body.) Would 
 
 sa malhonnêteté f. éveiller tout le monde 
 
 those merchants have paid their debts ? 
 marchand payer dette f. 
 
 Imperative. — In all thy actions, consult the light of reason, 
 Dans f. consulter lumière art. 
 
 Never yield to* the violence of thy passions. Let us love justice, 
 te abandomier f. art. 
 
 peace, and virtue. Let us not cease to work. Sacrifice 
 art. f. art. f. cesser de travailler. Sacrifier 
 
 H 
 
86 EXERCISES ON THE REGULAR VERBS IN ER. 
 
 your own interest to the ^public 'good. Do not omit sach 
 
 * intéréfo). pi. bien nigliger des 
 
 ^useful •''and ^interesting 'details. 
 
 si utile si intéressant m. 
 
 263. The scîcond person singular of the imperative of this conjugation, 
 and likewise of some verbs of the second ending in vrir, frir, lir, take s 
 after e before the word y and en ; as, portes-en à ton frère, carry some to 
 thy brother ; offres-en à ta sœur, offer some to thy sister ; cneilles-en 
 aussi pour toi, gather some likewise for thyself; apportes-y tes livres, 
 bring there thy books. 
 
 Subjunctive present. — That I may not always listen to a ^severe 
 
 écouter * 
 •censor of my defects. That thou should'st find real friends. 
 
 défaut m. trouver vrai 
 
 That he would adorn his speeches with the graces of a -pure 'diction. 
 
 parer discours de f. 
 
 That she v/ould remain in her boudoir. That we should so hastily 
 
 rester m. légcrement 
 
 condemn the world. That you may pout incessantly. That 
 condamner monde m. bonder saris cesse. 
 
 they may work more willingly. 
 travailler plus volojitiers. 
 
 PiiETERiT. — That I may have caressed insolence and flattered 
 
 caresser art. f. flatter 
 
 pride. That thou would'st have added nothing to that work, 
 art. ajouter ouvrage m. 
 
 That he should have carried despair into the soul of his friend. 
 
 porter art. désespoir m. dans ame 
 That we may have blamed ^so ''prudent *and ^so ''wise 'a ^conduct. 
 
 blâmer sage condidte f. 
 
 That you may have exasperated -^so ''petulant 'a '-^character. That they 
 
 exaspérer caractère m. 
 
 may not have (taken advantage) of the circumstances. 
 profiter circonstance. 
 
 Imperfect. — That I should not copy his example. That thou might'st 
 imiter exemple m. 
 
 (give up) ^perfidious 'friends. That he might inhabit a hut 
 abandonner perfide habiter chaumière f. 
 
 instead of a palace. That we should fall at the feet of an ^iUe- 
 an lieu palais m. tomber pied m. illé' 
 
 gitimate 'king. That you would respect the laws of your country. 
 gitime respecter loi f pays m. 
 
 That they would not speak (at random). 
 
 à tort et à travers. 
 
 Pluperfect. — That I should not have burnt that work. That thou 
 
 brûler m. 
 
 lïiight'st not have contemplated the beauties of the country. That he 
 
 contempler campagne. 
 
 should have perfected his ^natural 'qualities. That we might not 
 perfectionner naturel f. 
 
EXERCISES ON THE VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJ. IN lU. 87 
 
 have gained the victory. That you had enchanted the pullic That 
 
 remporter f. enchanter m. 
 
 they would have struck their enemies with fear. 
 frapper de crainte. 
 
 Second Conjugation in ir. 
 
 See Verbs, page 52 and following. 
 
 Note. — The verbs finir^ to finish, page 54; ouvrir, to open, page 130; ssntirAo 
 feel, page 130; and tenir, to hold, page 132, must be thoroughly learned befcre the 
 following exercises are written. 
 
 264. Important DiRECTiojir. — Whenever -the student has a French verb 
 ending with ir to translate, the first thing he must do is to look for it 
 among the verbs composing the list given page 163. If the verb looked 
 for is not to be found in the above mentioned list, he must conjugate it on 
 Jinir, to finish, page 54 ; and if it be found in the Ust, he will be directed 
 on which verb to conjugate it, 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 Present. — I choose this picture. I feel all the unpleasantness 
 
 choisir tableau m. dtsagrkment ra. 
 
 of your situation. Whence comest thouî Does he thus define 
 
 UPoù venir ainsi définir 
 
 that word ] Does his mother (go out) so soon ? Do we not (set off) 
 
 mot m. sortir tut partir 
 
 for the country 1 Do you not pity his sorrows 1 Do you 
 
 campagne f. co7npâtir à mal m. 
 
 not (tell a lie) 1 They are finishing at this moment. They 
 
 mentir finir dans art. m. 
 
 (act contrary) to your orders. 
 contrevenir ordre. 
 
 Imperfect. — I fortified his soul against the dangers of seduction. 
 
 prémunir contre art- f. 
 
 I served my friends warmly. Did'st not thou amuse him with 
 
 servir avec chaleur. entretenir de 
 
 fair promises'? He complied (at last) with the wishes of his 
 
 beau promesse f. consentir enfin à désir m. 
 
 family. Did we not frequently warn our friends of the bad 
 famille f. fréqiiemment avertir 
 
 state of their affairs 1 Did we sleep then "? Did you not belie 
 état dormir alors ? démentir 
 
 your character 1 Did not the enemies invade an ^immense 'country 1 
 caractère m. envahir pays m. 
 
 Did the ■^wild 'beasts often (come out) from the bottom of their 
 
 sauvage btte f. souvent sortir fond m. 
 
 mountains ] 
 montagne ? 
 
 Preterit. — I softened my father by my submission. I foresaw 
 fiéchir soumission f. pressentir 
 
 that ^terrible 'catastrophe. Tliou did'st not (come again) as thou 
 
 revenir comme le 
 
88 EXERCISES ON THE VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJ. IN IR, 
 
 had'st promised. He did not succeed through thoughtlessness. Did 
 
 promis. réussir par étoiirdevie. 
 
 ■ his daughter not (set out again) irameJiatel)' ? Did not Alexander sully 
 
 repartir sJir le champ ? ternir 
 
 his glory by his pride ! Did we (go out) of the city before him ? We 
 
 ' sortir ville f. avant hii ? 
 
 never betrayed that ^important 'secret. Did you not agree (to 
 
 trahir m. consentir de vous en 
 
 trust) to me 1 They served their country with courage. Did the 
 rapporter moi P pays 
 
 ancient philosophers enjoy great consideration 1 
 
 philosophe m. jouir de un f. 
 
 Future. — Shall I not obtain this of yon % What will become 
 
 obtenir cela de Que deveîiir 
 
 of thee if 1 forsake thee"! Will he not embellish his (country-seat) ? 
 
 * tu abandonner embellir maison de campagne? 
 
 He will not sleep quietly. Shall we consent to that ^ridiculous 
 
 tranqiiillement. 
 'bargain 1 With time and patience you will compass your 
 marché m. Avec m. f. venir à bout de 
 
 end. We shall not sully the splendor of our life by an ^unworthy 
 
 dessein m. éclat m. indigîie 
 
 'action. Will those men enrich their country by their industry 1 
 
 enrichir pays industrie? 
 
 Will not our friends offer us their assistance ] 
 
 offrir sccoiirs ? 
 
 Conditional. — I would open the door and the window. I should 
 
 porte f. fenttre f. 
 
 still cherish life. Would'st thou not interpose in that affair '.' Would 
 
 chérir art. intervenir 
 
 my brother (set off again) mthout taking leave of us ? You would 
 
 repartir sans prendre f A. congé 
 not succeed (in injuring him) in the ^public 'opinion. Could'st 
 
 parvenir à nidre jA bii dans f. 
 
 thou soften that "^Qxntj 'heart ] Could thev foresee their misfor- 
 attejidrir de rocher pressentir mal' 
 
 tune 1 "VS'ould men always (grow old) without growing wiser, 
 heur ? art. vieillir sans devenir A.t 
 
 if they reflected on the shortness of life ? 
 réfléchir sur brièveté f. art. 
 
 Imperative. — Shudder with horror and terror. Support thy 
 Frémir de h.orreur de effroi m. Souteiiir 
 characler in good and bad fortune. Do not obtain thy 
 
 art. daiis art. mauvais f. ne parvenir à 
 
 point but by means ^consistent with 'delicacy. Let us 
 
 fin f. pi. que par des moyens que la avoiie * délicatesse, 
 
 \ The student must have before this time observed that, in th; conjugation of the 
 verbs, letters A, B, C. «fee, have been put before the name of each tense, with a 
 view to use these letters as references in the exercises. Here, for instance, grow- 
 ing is in the present participle ; and as the French idiom requires the French verb 
 devenir in the present of the infinitive, the letter A is put after devenir as a warning 
 to the student 
 
EXERCISES ON THE VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJ. IN OIR. 89 
 
 feed the poor. Let us gain glory by our perseverance. Let 
 
 nuxirrir va. pi. obtenir art. f, 
 
 us not divulge our secrets (to every body). Never submit to -'so 
 
 découvrir à toiit le monde. fléchir sous 
 
 ''unjust 'a 2yoke. Do not maintain ^so ^absurd 'an ^opinion. Do 
 
 joiig m. soutenir absurde 
 
 not (come upon us) again (in that unexpected manner.) 
 ne survenir ^ plus ainsi à f improviste. 
 
 ScBJUNCTiYE PRESENT. — That I may never blemish my reputation 
 
 Jlétrir f. 
 
 That I may (be beforehand) with ^such "dangerous 'enemies. (I will 
 prévenir de si je ne veux 
 
 not have thee) (go out) this morning. That he may not enjoy his 
 pas que tu sortir Q. matin m. jouir de 
 
 gloiy. That he may not obtain his ends. That we may become 
 f. parvenir a fin f. devenir 
 
 just, honest, and virtuous. That you may punish the guilty. That 
 
 honnête vertueux. coupable pi. 
 
 you may return covered with laurels. That they may establish ^wise 
 
 revenir couvert de laiirier m. établir 
 
 ^and 'just 'laws. That they may agree about the conditions. 
 
 convenir de 
 
 [mperfect. — That I might stun the whole neighbourhood. That 
 étourdir tout voisinage m, 
 I might not (bring about) my designs. That thou would'st 
 
 venir à bout de projet m. 
 (tell a wilful lie). That lie might not bear his disgrace with 
 
 mentir de dessein prémédité. ' soutenir f 
 
 firmness. That we mighty disobey the laws. That we should 
 fermeté, désobéir à 
 
 belong to that great king. That you might renounce your errors 
 appartenir • revenir de 
 
 and prejudices. That they might weaken the force of their 
 
 de vos préjitgé. affaiblir f. 
 
 reasons. That they might hold Hha ^most ''absurd 'ideas. 
 raisonnement. tenir aux 
 
 Third Conjugation in oir. 
 
 See Verbs, page 64 and following. 
 
 EXERCISES ON THE VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJ. IN OIR. 
 
 Indicative present. — I perceive the summit of the Alps covered 
 apercevoir sommet Alpes f. 
 
 with ^perpetual 'snow. What gratitude dost thou not owe 
 
 de éternel neige i. y^\. reconnaissance ï. devoir 
 
 to her ^who ^(has discharged) ^(-the duty of a mother) ^(to thee) 
 
 celle remplir prts de toi 
 
 "^(in thy infancy) ! Does youjt scholar understand well that rule which 
 
 écolier concevoir bien règle f. * 
 
 is so simple 1 We do not owe a large sum. Do you not perceive the 
 • devoir gros somme f. 
 
 h2 
 
90 EXERCISES ON THE VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJ, IN OIR. 
 
 snare 1 ^Ought ^firm 'and ""courageous 'men to yield to 
 
 piège m. Devoir des hommes * céder art 
 
 circumstances 1 
 circonstance ? 
 
 Lripebfect. — Did I not receive him kindly 1 Did he see 
 
 ■ le avec amitié ? apercevoir 
 
 the castle from such a distance 1 We did not receive our income. 
 
 château si * loin? percevoir revenura.-çl. 
 
 Did you not receive great civilities 1 Did those tyrants conceive 
 de honnêteté f. tyran concevoir 
 
 all the blackness of their crimes î 
 noirceur f. 
 
 Preterit. — I perceived him walking (by moon light). 
 
 le qui se promenait au clair de la lune. 
 
 Did the queen conceive a great esteem for that ^honest 'man. Did we 
 
 estime f. de bien 
 
 not immediately perceive the snare 1 You did not receive his letters (in 
 
 lettres à 
 time). Did the ministers conceive the depth of his plan. 
 temps. ministre p^^ofondeur f m. 
 
 Future. — Shall I receive visits to-day 1 He will not discover 
 visite aujo urd'hid ? 
 the spire of his village. We shall conceive 2well-"founded 'hopes. 
 
 clocher va. m. fondé espéranceï. 
 
 Will you never conceive 'so ''luminous 'a ^principle % Shall men 
 
 art. 
 always owe their misfortunes to their faults 1 
 malheur faute ? 
 
 CoîfDiTioKAE. — Should I rcceive the offers of my enemy 1 ''Should 'a 
 
 offre Devoir 
 
 ^wise 2inan ^thus ^(give himself up) to despair 1 Should we con- 
 
 s'abandonner art. désespoir m. 
 ceive 2such ^abstract 'ideas 1 You would easily perceive ^so ''gross 'a 
 
 si abstrait des idées ? grossier 
 
 2trick. Would not my sisters receive their friend with tenderness 1 
 ruse f. te?idresse f. ? 
 
 Imperative. — Conceive the horror of his situation. Do not receive 
 
 that mark of confidence with indifference. Let us entertain a 
 
 marque f. confiance concevoir* 
 
 horror of vice. Let us never owe (any thing). Receive 
 
 de le h.orreur pour art. m. rieii. 
 
 his advice vsdth respect and gratitude. Receive no more of his letters. 
 avis lettre f. 
 
 SuBJu>"CTiyE fresext. — That I may receive consolations. That he 
 
 should not conceive a thought so well explained. That we may always 
 
 pensée f. développé. 
 
 receive false news. That you may not perceive the danger of 
 
 nouvelle f. pi. ^ art 
 
EXERCISES ON THE VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJ. IN RE. 91 
 
 Dooks which are contrary to good morals. That they may not 
 
 * * contre * art. mœurs f. 
 
 collect ^unjust 'taxes. 
 percevoir iyijusie f. 
 
 Imperfect. — That I might conceive ^such 'a ^project. That he might 
 ^ tel projet m. 
 
 perceive the ^secret 'designs |of the enemy's general. That we should not 
 
 caché dessem * 
 
 receive every body with civility. That you could not conceive the 
 honnêteté. 
 depth of this book. That they might not perceive the masts 
 
 profondeur f. md.i ra. 
 
 of the ship. 
 
 vaisseau m. 
 
 Fourth Conjugatiop. in re. 
 See Verbs, page 76 and following. 
 
 Note.— The verbs vendre, to sell, page 78 ; joindre, to join, page 148; paraître, \o 
 appear, page 152 ; plaire, to please, page 153 ; and réduire, to reduce, page 156, must 
 be thoroughly learned before the following exercises are written. 
 
 265. Important birection. — Whenever the student has a French verb 
 ending with re to translate, the first thing he must do is to look for it 
 among the verbs composing the list given page 162. If the verb looked 
 for is not to be found in the above mentioned list, he must conjugate it on 
 vendre, to sell, page 78 ; and if it is iound in the list, he will be directed 
 on which verb to conjugate it. 
 
 Indicative present. — I know his ^gery s^nd ""impetuon ^tem- 
 
 connaître bouillant carac- 
 
 per. I wait his return with impatience. Does he fear 
 
 tère m. attendre retotir craindre art 
 
 death 1 Does not virtue please everybody! We do not force you 
 
 f. plaire à contraindre 
 
 to adopt this opinion. We suppress for the present several ^interesting 
 de adopter f. taire m. i7itéressant 
 
 'circumstances. Do you not confound these notions one with 
 
 f. confondre art. art. 
 
 another 1 You seduce your hearers by your ^modest 'exterior. Do 
 
 sédidre auditeur m. m. 
 
 your sons acknowledge their errors 1 Do not those workmen waste their 
 
 reconnaître ouvrier perdre 
 
 time about trifles 1 
 
 à des bagatelle? 
 
 Imperfect. — I did not displease by my conduct. I was pitying 
 déplaire plaindre 
 
 those sad victims of the revolution. ^D'ià not this dog bite ] Did 
 triste victime f. f. chien mordn ? 
 
 t Translate, of the general of the enemies. \ See verbs, page 8, art 63. 
 
92 EXERCISES ON THE VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJ. IN RE. 
 
 that man (at last)" acknowledge his injustice 1 We did not appeaî 
 
 eîijin f. 
 
 convinced. We joined our sighs and tears. Were you painting 
 convaincu f. soupir m. nos larme f. peindre 
 
 an ^historical •subject? Did those orators throw the graces of ex- 
 
 (f histoire tableau m. répandre art. 
 
 pression into their speeches 1 They led the people into '"an error. 
 discours ? induire m. en * 
 
 Preterit. — I aimed at an ^honest 'end. Did his prudence extinguish 
 
 tendre à but m. f. éteindre 
 
 the fire of a ^disordered 'imagination 1 Did not your conduct (do away) 
 
 déréglé f. conduite f. détruire 
 
 his prejudices 1 We led our friend back to his ^country 'house. 
 
 préveîitio7i f. reconduire * de campagne f. 
 
 Did we offer our incense to the pride of a blockhead ] Did you feign 
 ■vendre encens sot ? feindre 
 
 to think as a madman 1 Did you conduct your children from truth 
 de en * fou ? conduire vérité 
 
 to truth 1 Did 'those 'frightful ^spectres appear again? Did 
 
 en effrayant m. apparaître de iiouveau ? 
 
 not the children (come down) at the first summons 1 
 
 descendre à ordre m. sing. 
 
 FoTURE. — Shall I hear the music of the new opera ? I shall 
 entendre vmsique f. 
 aot conceal from you my mind. Will the general constrain 
 
 taire * façon de penser f, contraindre 
 
 the oflicers to join their ^respective 'corps 1 Will not a thought, true, 
 
 officier rejoindre f. 
 
 grand, and well expressed, please at all times ? We shall (make 
 
 exprimé dans art. m. 
 
 our appearance) on this great theatre ^^ext 'month. Shall we 
 
 paraître sur m. art. prochain ynois m. 
 
 describe all the horror of this ^terrible 'night 1 Will you not (new- 
 df peindre nuit f. re- 
 
 model) a work so full of ^charming 'ideas? Will you know 
 fondre plein reconnaître 
 
 your things again ? Will they always reduce our duties to " bene- 
 effet m. * devoir m. art. bieu' 
 
 fieence ? They will assiduously correspond with their friends. 
 faisance f. assidâment correspondre 
 
 Conditional. — Should I, by these means gain the ^desired" 
 
 moyen m. atteindre à desire 
 
 'end ? I should (^ carry on) the undertaking with success. Would his 
 but m. conduire entreprise f. 
 
 mother wait witn (so much) patience ? Could sincerity displease 
 
 tant de art. f. à 
 
 the man (of sense) ! Should we sell our liberty ? Should we 
 sensé vendre 
 
 build our house upon that plan ? Would you oblige young 
 
 construire m. astreindre des 
 
 people to live as you do ? Would you reduce your child to 
 
 gens pi. vivre comme * 
 
EXERCISES ON THE VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJ. IN RE. 93 
 
 despair 1 They should dread 'the ^(public) ^censure. Would 
 art. désespoir m. craindre du public f. 
 
 m}' protectors introduce an unknown person into the world \ 
 introdtiire inconnu ra. * 
 
 Imperative. — Depict in thy idyl all the charms of a ^j-^j-al 
 
 Peindre idylle doncenr f. champêtre 
 
 ■life. Expect not happiness from ^p^^ternal 'objects; it is in 
 
 Attendre art. art. extérieitr m, il 
 
 thyself. Know the powers of thy mind before thou writest. Let us 
 force f. avant de * écrire A. 
 
 unite prudence with courage. Let us not descend to 
 
 joindre art. f. à art. m. descendre dans des 
 
 ^useless 'particulars. Let us not (give offence) by an air ofhaugh- 
 
 particularité. déplaire des m. pi. 
 
 tiness 1 '^Seem 'neither^ too cheerful nor too grave. Ye sovereigns, 
 Paraître ne ni gai ni scrieux. * souverain 
 
 make the people happy. Do not deapise his friendship. Sweet 
 rendre pi. dédaigner doux 
 
 illusion?; vain phantoms, vanish ! (Keep to yourself) such truths 
 
 f. fantôme m. disparaître ! taire certain 
 
 as may offend. 
 qui peuvent offenser. 
 
 Subjunctive present. — That I may fear that cloud of enemies. 
 
 nuée f. 
 That I should please every body, is impossible. That he may not 
 à ce 
 
 reply to ^guc^ Sai^gm-^^ icnticism. That he may lead his pupil 
 répondre un si critique f. conduire élève 
 
 step by step to a perfect knowledge of the art of speaking and writing. 
 pas à connaissance de A 
 
 That we may entice by an ^enchanting 'style. That we may confound 
 
 séduire enchanteur m. 
 
 the arts with the sciences. That you may have ^the ^same ''end 
 
 hut m. 
 i(in view.) That they may not depend on anybody. That they 
 tendre à dépendre de personne. 
 
 may not increase our sufferings. 
 accroître peines. 
 
 Imperfect. — That I might not melt into tears. That I would 
 fondre en larme. 
 acknowledge the truth. That he might (draw a picture of) 
 reconnaître peindre art 
 
 '■^distressed 'virtue. That she might please by her accomplishments 
 malheureux f. elle grâce f. 
 
 more than by her beauty That we might conduct him to court 
 
 conduire art. courî, 
 
 That we should affect ^such ^low 'sentiments. That you might 
 
 feindre des si bas m. 
 
 hear their justification. That you might know your real friends 
 
 entendre vrai 
 
 That they might (wait for) the opinion of ^sensible 'persons. That 
 
 attendre art. se7isé f. 
 
 they would not appear so scornful and vain. 
 f. dédaigneux ni si 
 
04 EXERCISES ON THE PRONOMINAL VERBS. 
 
 Of Pronominal Verbs. 
 
 See Verbs, page 88 and following. 
 
 Note.— In all past participles, except absous, dissous, and résous, which are to be 
 seen hereafter, the feminine is formed by adding e mute to the masculine, and the 
 plural by adding s to the singular, both masculine and feminine, when it does not 
 already end with s. In the following exercises the past participles, if put in 
 French under the English, are always put in the masculine singular; it is for the 
 stu^dent to put them in the number and gender required. 
 
 Indicative PRESENT. — I coram only walk (by moonlight). 
 
 (T ordinaire se promener au clair de la lune. 
 Dost thou not (deceive thyself) 1 He (is never happy) but (when he 
 se tromper ne se plaire que à 
 
 is doing) wrong ! Do we not (nurse ourselves) too much 1 How 
 faire A. du mal! s'écouter 
 
 do you do : They mean to travel in the spring. 
 
 se porter ? se proposer de voyager à m. 
 
 Preterit indefikite. — I (have been) tolerably well for some 
 se porter assez bien depuis 
 time. Didst thou not (lose thyself) in the wood ] (It is said) that he 
 
 s'égarer On dit 
 
 (killed Iiimself ) (out of) despair. Have we (flattered ourselves) witiiout 
 
 se ttier de se fatter 
 
 foundation ] Ladies, have you walked this morning 1 Did 
 
 fondement ? JVTesdames, se pro7ne7ier 
 
 those ladies (recognise themselves) in this portrait! 
 dame se reconnaître à m. 
 
 Imperfect. — I (tormented myself) incessantly about the affairs of 
 se tourmenter sans cesse pour 
 
 others. Wast thou not (laying the foundation for) much sorrow by 
 autrui. se préparer bien des regrets 
 
 thy foolish conduct 1 He (made himself) more and more unhappy 
 se rendre 
 
 (every day). We despaired without reason. Did you not 
 de jour en jour, se désespérer 
 
 laugh at us 1 They (ruined themselves) wantonly. 
 se moquer de se perdre de gaieté de caur. 
 
 Pluperfect. — l (had trusted myself ) to ^^ very uncertain) 'guides. 
 se livrer à des peji siir m. 
 
 Didst thou not confide too inconsiderately in this man ? Had that 
 
 se confer Ugtrement à 
 
 officer rushed rashly into this danger 1 We had con- 
 
 officier se précipiter témérairement dans m. se coîi' 
 
 demned ourselves. Had you not (been engaged) in trifles ? Had 
 
 damner nous-mêmes. s'occuper de bagatelle f. 
 
 those travellers (gone out) of the right way 1 
 voyageurs se détourner droit chemin m. 
 
 Preterit. — I repented but too late of having taken ^such 'a step. 
 
 tard A. fait tel démarchei. 
 
 Wast thou not well entertained (yesterday evening ]) He (sufTered 
 
 n'amuser hier au soiv^^ ne se trouver. 
 
EXERCISES ON THE PRONOMINAL VERBS. 95 
 
 for) his imprudence. We met in the street, but did 
 
 pas bien de se rencontrer rue 
 
 not speak. Did you say nothing (to each other) ] Did not 
 
 se parler. dites-vous * 
 
 those ^rash 'children (applaud themselves) for their folly 1 
 téméraire s^ applazidir de sottise ? 
 
 Pretekit anterior. — (As soon as) I discovered that they sought 
 
 Dès que s'apercevoir on chercher 
 
 to deceive me, I was on my guard. What didst thou, when 
 
 H. tromper se tenir J. garde f. pi. Jis quand 
 
 thou (sawest thyself) thus forsaken ] When she recollected 
 
 se trouver ainsi abandonné? se souvenir 
 
 ail the circumstances, she was quite ashamed. When he had 
 
 de f. J. toute honteux. 
 
 rejoiced sufficiently, we parted. When you (had amused 
 
 se réjouir assez se séparer J. s'amuser 
 
 yourself) sufficiently at his expense, did you not leave him quiet 1 
 
 à dépens m-yl- laissera. tranquille? 
 
 When they had walked enough, they (sat down) at the foot of a tree. 
 se prome7ier s'assirent à 
 
 Future absolute. — I will yield if they convince me. Wilt thou 
 se rendre on convainc 
 remember the engagement that thou makest 1 What will not he 
 se souvenir de prends ? Que 
 
 reproach (himself for) Î We shall not (forget ourselves) (so far as) 
 se reprocher à lui-même ? s'oublier jusque 
 
 to 2(be wanting) ^in respect towards 'him. Will you employ the 
 
 manquer A. de * lui. se servir de 
 
 means I (point out) to you 1 Will not these flowers fade 1 
 
 que indiquer * f. se Jiétrir ? 
 
 Future akterior. — Shall I have betrayed myself? Wilt thou 
 
 se trahir 7noi-mhne ? 
 not have (degraded thyself) in his eyes 1 He will have (been proud) of 
 
 s'avilir à s'enorgueillir 
 
 this trifling advantage. We shall have (fatigued ourselves) 
 
 faible avantage m. se jutiguer 
 
 (to no purpose). In the end, you will have (been undeceived.) Will 
 
 inutilement. à fin f. se désabuser. 
 
 your children have (loved each other) (too much) 1 
 s'entr'aimer trop ? 
 
 CoKBiTioîirAL present. — Should I (suflfer myself) to (be drawn) 
 
 se laisser * entraîner 
 into the party of the rebels! Wouldst ^thou be ^ (so easily) 
 
 parti m. de si peu de chose 
 
 •frightened 1 Would not the nation submit to '^so ''just 'a ^law i 
 8^ effrayer ? f. se soumettre 
 
 We should not rejoice to see the triumph of guilt. Would 
 
 se plaire voir triomphe art. crime m. 
 you (dishonour yourselves) by Sguch 'an action 1 Would those 
 ae déshonorer tel 
 
96 EXERCISES ON THE PRONOMINAL VERBS. 
 
 lords (avail themselves) of their birth and fortune, 
 
 seig-neur se prévaloir de naissance f. de leurs richesses 
 
 (in order to) hurt our feelings 1 
 
 pour faire violence à sentiment-? 
 
 Past. — Should I not (have_ devoted myself) entirely to the service 
 
 se dtvouer entièrement 
 of my country 1 (Had it not been for) thy carelessness, thou wouldst 
 
 pays m. sans insouciance f. 
 
 certainly have (grown rich). Would this pleasing hope have vanished 
 s'enrichir doux espoir m- s'évanouir 
 
 so soon? Should we have (degraded ourselves) to ^such 'a degree? 
 
 se dégrader point m. 
 
 You would have (reduced yourselves) to every kind of want. 
 
 se réduire toute sorte ^^l. privation f.Tpl. 
 
 They would have (been drowned) if (they had not had assistance). 
 se noyer on ne les avait secourus. 
 
 Imperative. — O man, remember that thou art mortal. Do not 
 
 se souvenir 
 flatter (thyself that thou wilt succeed easily). Let us take an 
 te promets un succès facile. se rendre 
 
 2exact 'account of our actions. Let us not deceive ourselves. 
 
 compte se séduire nous-mêmes, 
 
 (Rest yourself) under the shade of this tree. Do not (expose 
 
 Se reposer à ombre s'exposer 
 
 yourself) so rashly. 
 * témérairement. 
 
 Subjunctive present. — (I must) rise to-morrow at an ear- 
 
 11 faut que se lever de meil- 
 
 lier hour. I wish that thou mayst be better. (I wish him to) 
 
 leur heure i. souhaiter se porter mieux. Je veiLX qu'il 
 
 (conduct himself) better. Is it not essential that we should contain 
 
 se conduire essentiel se conteiur 
 
 ourselves? They wish that you should (accustom yourselves) 
 * On désire s'habituer 
 
 early to labor. It is time that they should 
 
 de boinie heure art. travail m. 
 (have relaxation) from the fatigue of business. 
 se délasser f. art. f. pi. 
 
 Preterit. — Can I have (been deceived) so grossly ? 
 
 Se peut-il que se tromper grossièrement? 
 
 It is astonishing' that thou hast determined to stay. It is not said that 
 
 étonnant se décider rester. On* dit 
 
 he interfered in this business. It will never (be believed) that we have 
 
 se mêler de On croira 
 
 (conducted ourselves) so ill. It is not suspected that you have 
 
 se comporter mal. On * soiipçonne 
 
 (disguised yourselves) so ingeniously. It is not feared that they 
 
 se déguiser adroiternent. On * craint 
 
 have behaved ill. 
 se conduire 
 Imperfect. — They required that I should (go to bed) at ten o'clock. 
 071 exigeait se coucher à heure. 
 
EXERCISES ON THE PASSIVE VERBS. 97 
 
 Thcy wish that thou shouldst walk oftener. Did they not 
 On voudrait se promener On 
 
 wish that he should practise fencing 1 ^ Was it necessary that 
 
 voulait s^ exercer à faire des artnes ? 
 
 we should (make use) of this method ] Did they wish that you should 
 se servir moyen m. voïilait 
 
 complain without reason 1 Did they not wish them 
 
 se plaindre on desire H. ^ue its 
 
 (to make more haste) 1 
 se hâter S, davantage ? 
 
 Pluperfect. — Would they have wished that I had (revenged 
 
 voulu se venger 
 
 myself) 1 I could have wished that thou hadst (shewn thyself) 
 
 * désirer se montrer 
 
 (more accommodating). I could have wished that this painter had 
 
 moins difficile. voulu peintre 
 
 (been less negligent.) Would you have wished that we should have 
 se négliger moins. voulu 
 
 (ruined ourselves) in the ^public 'opinion, (in order to) satisfy your 
 
 se perdre f. pour satisfaire 
 
 resentment ] I could have wished perhaps that you had (applied 
 
 ressentiment ? désirer peut-être s^ appliquer 
 
 yourselves) more to your studies. We could have wished that they 
 
 y * davantage 
 
 had (extricated themselves) more skilfully from the difficul(ief=î 
 se tirer adroitement embarras 
 
 (in which) they (had involved themselves), 
 où s'étaient mis. 
 
 Conjugation of the Passive Verbs. 
 
 266. There is but one mode of conjugating passive verbs : it is by 
 adding to the verb être, through all the moods and tenses, the participle 
 past of the verb active, which then must agree in gender and number 
 with the subject ; as. 
 
 Je suis aimé, or aimée I am loved. 
 
 tu étais estimé, or estimée thou wast esteemed. 
 
 ce roi fut chéri de son peuple that kiyig -was beloved by his people. 
 
 elle fut toujours chérie she -was always beloved. 
 
 mon père fut respecté my father iv as respected. 
 
 ma mère fut révérée my mother -was revered. 
 
 nous serons loués or louées ive shall be praised. 
 
 vous en serez blâmés, or blâmées you ivill be blamed for it. 
 
 ils seroient craints et redoutés they -would be feared and dreaded. 
 
 je voudrais que les portes fussent 7 x .» 7 ^ , 
 
 ouvertes \ I tvisri the doors were opened. 
 
 tu en avais été averti, or avertie thon hadst been apprized of it. 
 
 lorsfju'il eut été mordu \.'hen he had been bitten. 
 
 je soupçonne que la ruse aura été \ I suspect the artifice will have been 
 
 découverte _ 3 discovered. 
 
 vous auriez été aperçus, or aperçues yov would have been perceived 
 
98 EXERCISES ON THE NEUTER AND UNIPERSO^AL VERBS. 
 
 bien qu'elles aient été reconnues although they were recognised. 
 
 supposez que les lumières eussent 7 ^, .# i- i ^ i u ^ . * ■ 
 ^../.-^ ^ snhpose thehsi'hts hailbeen put out. 
 
 ete éteintes j 
 
 267. In the following exercises upon the verbs, the tenses will now 
 be promiscuously intermixed •. — 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE PASSIVE VERBS. 
 That young lady is so mild, so polite, and so kind, that she is 
 Jeune demoiselle doux, honntte, boti, 
 
 beloved by every body. He performed with (so much) ability, that 
 
 aimé de Jouer J. taiit de intelligence, 
 
 he was universally applauded. He is known by nobody. How many 
 
 J. ap/ddudi. corinu de Que de 
 
 countries, unknown to the ancients, have been discovered by ^modern 
 
 pays, inconnu découvert art. 
 
 ^navigators ] 
 navigateur m. 
 
 Of the Neuter Verbs. 
 
 See Verbs, page 160 and following. 
 
 268. Remaiik. — The participle of these neuter verbs, which take être 
 for auxiliary, must accordingly agree both in gender and number with 
 their subject. 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE NEUTER VERBS. 
 They came to see us in the greatest haste. When 
 
 G. * voir avec empressement. Quand est-ce qite 
 
 did they arrive] That estate fell to his lot. He fell 
 
 arriver G . terre f. lui est échfi e7i * partage. tomber G. 
 
 from his horse, but happily received only a slight contusion on the knee. 
 • it G. ne que léger f. à genoïi m. 
 
 Of the Impersonal or Unipersonal Verbs. 
 See Verbs, page 123 and following. 
 
 269. Observe that, in impersonal verbs, il has no relation to a substan- 
 tive, as may be seen by the impossibility of substituting a noun in its place. 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE UNIPERSONAL VERBS. 
 Does it rain this morning? Did it hail ^last 'night? It 
 
 pleuvoir matin m. grêler J. art. dernier f. 
 
 Joes not snow. I thought it had thundered. Does it not 
 
 neiger. croyais que tonner I. 
 
 lighten Î Do you think it freezes ? It is a ^remarkable 'thing. It 
 éclairer ? croyez que geler ? Ce Ce 
 
 was a ^terrible 'hurricane. It is ten o'clock. It (was not my friend's fault) 
 
 J, ouragan. heure. ne tenir pas à mon ami 
 
 Xiiat (it) was not so. It will freeze long. I do not think 
 ia chose S. tie ainsi. long-temps. crois 
 
 so , it seems, (on the contrary), that it thaws. It (is fit) to act 
 icf sembler au contraire dégeler. convenir de 
 
EXERCISES ON FALLOIR AND Y AVOIR. 99 
 
 SO. It (was of great importance) to succeed. Would it be proper 
 ainsi. importer H. beaiicoîip de réussir. à firopo? 
 
 to write to your friends 1 It appears that he has not attended to that 
 lie écrire s'occuper de 
 
 business". Perhaps it (would be) better (to give up) the undertaking. 
 
 vaudrait abandonner entreprise. 
 
 It (was sufficient to) know his opinion. 
 suffisait de 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE VERB FALLOIR. 
 See Verbs, page 136. 
 
 270. Observe, that all expressions implying necessity, obligation, or 
 want, majf be rendered by falloir as, I want a new grammar, il me faut 
 une grammaire 7ieiive. 
 
 You must speak to him about that affair. It was necessary for him 
 de f. H. que * il 
 
 to consent to that bargain. We were obliged to (set out) immediately. 
 * S. marché m. J. partir S. S7tr le champs 
 
 ■ Children should learn every day something by heart. Shall I suffer 
 art. N. S. L. Q. 
 
 patiently ^such 'an ^insult 1 He must have been a blockhead not to 
 
 0. S. sot pour 
 
 understand "^such ^easy 'rules. (How much) do you warn ? He 
 comprendre des si règle f. Combie^i 
 
 does what is requisite. Do that as it (should be). What must he 
 fait Faites . F. Que lui F. 
 
 have for his trouble 1 You are the man I want. Do not give me 
 
 * peine f. que F. 
 
 anymore bread; I have already more (than I want). (I need 
 * de en déjà quHl ne m^en faut. È ne me 
 
 not) ask you whether you will come. I do not think that it is neces- 
 
 faut pas A. si crois il Q,, 
 
 sary to be a conjurer to guess hismonves. I could not suspect 
 
 * * sorcier pour deviner motif. pouvais soiipcoitner 
 
 that I ought (to ask) pardon for a fault I have not committed. 
 
 S. A. de faute f. que commise. 
 
 EXERCISE ON Y AVOIR, THERE TO BE. 
 See Verbs, page 20 and following. 
 
 271. N.B. This verb in English is used in the plural, when followed 
 by a substantive plural ; in French it remains always in the singular. 
 
 There must be a great difference of age between those two persons. 
 il doit f. 
 
 There being (so many) Mcious 'people in this world, is it astonishing 
 
 taut de gens m. pi. étonnant 
 
 that there are so many persons who become the victims of the corruption 
 
 Q. devenir perversité (. 
 
 of the age 1 (It is a thousand to one) that he will not succeM. 
 
 siècle m. Il y a mille à parier contre un réussir. 
 
J 00 EXERCISES ON THE IRREGULAR \^RBS. 
 
 There would be more happiness if (^every one) knew how to moderate 
 bonheur chacun savait * * modérer 
 
 his desires. I did not think that there could be (any thing) to blame 
 
 disir. croyais S. rieii reprendre 
 
 in his conduct. There would not be so many duels (did people) 
 conduite f. si Von 
 
 reflect that one of the first obligations of a Christian is to forgive 
 réjîéchir H. f. f. Chrétien de pardonner 
 
 injuries. Could there be a king more happy than this, who 
 art. Potirrait-iL celui, 
 
 has always been the father of his subjects ? 
 
 siijet ? 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE 
 FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 See Verbs, s'cti aller, to go away, page 112 ; also page 122. 
 
 272. The imperative va of aller, to go, takes an s when followed by 
 y ; as vas-y, go thither : however, it takes no s when the y is followed 
 by a verb ; as x-a z/ donner ordre, go and order that affair. 
 
 27.3. Je vas, I go, and je men vas, I am going, although authorized, 
 are but seldom used by any writer. 
 
 Will you go this evening into the country 1 I am going to pay 
 soir à campagne f. * faire 
 
 some visits, and if I be ^early '(at liberty) I shall certainly 
 
 F. de bonne heure libre 
 go home. Go there with thy brother. Go and do that 
 
 s'en aller chez-moi. * faire 
 
 errand. Go there, and put (every thing) in order. Let him go 
 
 commission f. * mettre tout en 
 
 \o church on (holidays). By being loaded with scents, 
 
 art. église f. * les jour de fete. A force de A. chargé de odeur f, 
 
 and particularly amber, he (offends the smell). They have woven 
 
 surtout d'' ambre, sentir mauvais. tissu 
 
 silk and cotton together, and (made) a very pretty stuff. I shall 
 
 m. en ont fait étoffe f. 
 
 send ^spring iflowers to those ladies. I would go to Rome, if I 
 printanier f. dame. 
 
 could. We would (serid back) our horses. Why do they go 
 le pouvais. Pourquoi 
 
 away so soon 1 My brother and my sister went yesterday to 
 
 ma J. 
 
 Windsor. I will not go (any more) (a hunting). 
 plus à la chasse, 
 
 EXERCISES ON THE IRREGULAR VERB& OF THE 
 SECOND CONJUGATION. 
 
 See Verbs, page 124 and following. 
 
 May the name of that good king be fblessed from generation to gener- 
 nom m. bé7iir en 
 
 t See page 87, art 254. 
 
EXERCISES ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS, 101 
 
 ation ! These trees blossomed twice (every year). The arts and 
 H. (Jeiix fois tous les ans. 
 sciences -j-flourished at Athens in the time of Pericles. Horace 
 art. H. à .Athènes Périclh. 
 
 and Virgil -{-flourished under the reign of Augustus. We discovered 
 Virgile H. sons ri'giie Auguste. d'cotivrir 
 
 from the top of the mountain a vast plain full of '-^flowery 
 
 liant phiifief. rempli ^fleurissant 
 
 'meadows. The empire of the Babylonians was long a flourishing 
 
 pré m. Babyloniens J. long-temps * 
 
 one. We did not thate the man, but his vices. Does she really thate 
 * 
 
 that vain pomp and all the parade of grandeur 1 
 pompe f. appareil art. 
 
 Take that water off the fire ; it boils too fast. Do not let 
 
 JRetirer f. de dessus m. elle bouillir fort. laisser 
 
 the ^soup 2(boilaway) '(so much). That sauce (has boiled away) 
 
 ébouillir tant f. 
 
 (too much). Boil that meat again; it has not ^boiled 
 
 trop. Faites rebouillir viande f. * f. 
 
 (long enough). He runs faster than I. He ran about uselessly 
 
 assez. plus vite moi. J. * inutilement 
 
 all the morning. We ran at the voice of that honest man, and assisted 
 
 matinée Î. J. f. J. 
 
 him. (The moment) he saw us in danger, he ran to us and delivered us. 
 
 Dès que vit en J. * J. 
 
 By ^so "whimsical 'a -conduct, should we not contribute to our destruction ^ 
 
 bizarre concourir perte f. 
 
 He discoursed so long on the immortality of the soul, and the certaijity 
 
 J. sur certitude f. 
 
 of another life, that he left nothing unsaid. If we (were to act 
 
 laisser J. en arrière. agir H. 
 
 thus), we should certainly incur the displeasure of our parents, I 
 ainsi disgrâce f. 
 
 would not have recourse to ^so ''base 'a ^method. Will men 
 
 bas moyen m. art. 
 
 always run after shadows'? 
 chimère f. 
 
 He (was near) losing his life in that rencounter. He (was near) 
 faillir i. perdre * art. rencontre ï. faillir 
 
 falling into the snare which was laid for him. His strenglh 
 donner A. piège m. qu'on avait tendu * lui. * art. f. pi. 
 
 fails him (every day). Let us have something ^to ^eat 
 
 défaillent lui tons les joins. Donnez-nous * * manger 
 
 'directly ; we are fainting with fatigue anff hunger. I cannot meet 
 v!te ; défaillons de de faim, ne puis rencontrer 
 
 him ; he shuns me. When (we have no employ), vve endca- 
 
 f^i^" on ne sait pas s'occjiper, 07i cher- 
 
 v'or to fly from ourselves. Would he not av()i<l flatterers, if he 
 
 die se fuir * soi-mtme. fuir art. flatteur m. 
 
 t See Veuds, page 128. J See Vkrds. page 129 
 
 i2 
 
102 EXERCISES ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 knew all their falsehood] He died by a 2(very painful) 'disease 
 cmniiûtrelî. fausseté f. de cruel maladie Î 
 
 8he died of grief (for the loss of) her son. He (is dying.) She 
 
 J. cJiagrinm. d'' avoir perdu se mourir. 
 
 was expiring with grief, when the fear of death (at last) wrested 
 
 se 7nourir de crainte f. art. enjlii arracher J, 
 
 her secret from her. 
 ra. * lui. 
 
 (Send for) the physician, and follow exactly his advice. Go and 
 Envoyez quérir médecin, suivez * 
 
 fetch my cane. Every day he acquired celebrity by works 
 
 canne f. Tous les jours H. f. des oiivrage m. 
 
 calculated to fix the attention of an ^enlightened 'public. That I 
 
 fait pour éclairé 
 
 woiild acquire riches at the expense of my honesty ! He had acquired 
 
 S. dipensm.-ç\. probité ï. 
 
 by his merit great influence over the opinions of his contemporaries, 
 une f. siir opinion sing. contemporain. 
 
 r have inquired about that man (every where), and have not 
 
 de homme-là partout je 
 
 (been able) (to hear any thing of him). Who ^has ^requested 
 
 pu en avoir de nouvelles. Qiii est-ce qui requérir 
 
 ■^it of 'you ? Sesostris, king of Egypt, conquered a great part of Asia. 
 en * J. art. 
 
 Tlie ^f:;rmidable 'empire which Alexander conquered did not last 
 
 Alexandre I. ne durer pas 
 
 longer than his life. I have heard that ^important 'news. 
 
 plus long-temps f. ouir-dire sing. 
 
 He dressed himself (in haste^, and (went out) immediately. I wish 
 
 se vêtir à la hâte sortir J. sur-le-champ, voudrais 
 
 she would dress the children with more care. If his fortune 
 
 que vêtir S. , de 
 
 "permitted 'him, he would clothe all the poor of his parish. Two 
 le permettait lui, paroisse f. 
 
 servants clothed him with his -ducal 'mantle. He only passed 
 
 domestiqiie revêtir H. de manteau m. ne que H. 
 
 for a traveller ; but lately he has assumed the character of an envoy. 
 
 voyageur ; depuis peu revttir tin * envoyé. 
 
 It begins to be very warm ; it is time to (throw off some clothing). 
 
 commencer faire chaud ; de se divttir. 
 
 I will gather with pleasure some of these flowers and fruits, 
 
 quelques-unes de ces 
 
 since you wish to ^have 'some. Do not gather those peaches 
 
 pu.isque seriez bien aise fie en t. 
 
 oefore they are ripe. That is a country where they neither 
 avant que ne Q. jnûr. Ce pa.ys où on ne 
 
 reap com nor gather grapes. We shall collect in ^ancient 
 
 recueillir ni blé ni * vin. recueillir 
 
 history -important "and 'valuable 'facts. He received us in "the 
 
 précieux fait. acciLeillir delà la 
 
 Smost ^polite 'manner. Poverty, misery, sickness, per 
 
 mamère f art. f. art. f, art. maladie i art 
 
EXERCISES ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 103 
 
 secution, in a word, ail the misfortunes in the world, have (fallen upon) 
 
 f. en malheur m. de accueillir 
 
 him. You will give six inches to that cornice ; it will project 
 voiriez donner pouce corniche f. elle saillir 
 
 toc much. That balcony projected too much ; it darkened the 
 
 balcon m. H. obscurcir H. 
 
 dining-room. When Moses struck the rock, there gushed out 
 Quand JMoïse frapper J. rocher m. il saillir- J, 
 
 of it a spring of 2( fresh running) 'water. The blood gushed from 
 
 en source f. vif f. H. 
 
 his vein with impetuosity. We shall assault the enemy to-morrow in 
 
 ■y,eine f. pi. demain 
 
 their entrenchYnents. Were we not overtaken by a horrible storm 1 
 
 retranchement. J. assailli tempête f, 
 
 At every word they said to him concerning his son, the good 
 A cliaqne que on disait * de 
 
 (old man) • leaped for joy. Shall you not shudder with fear 1 
 
 vieillard tressaillir H. de joie. tressaillir peur f. 
 
 EXERCISES ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE 
 THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 See Vekbs, page 134 and -following. 
 
 274. Impoktatvt direction. — Whenever the student has a French verb 
 ending with oin to translate, the first thing he must do is to look for it 
 among the verbs composing the list given page, 162. If the verb looked 
 for is not to be found in the above mentioned list, he must conjugate it on 
 recevoir, to receive, page 66 ; and if it be found in the list, he will be 
 directed on which verb to conjugate it. 
 
 I had apartments that I liked ; I v/ill endeavor to have them 
 
 H. tin logement sing. aimer H. veux essayer de le smg, 
 
 again. Beware of falling. How has he fallen into poverty ? 
 
 Prenez-garde A. Comment déchoir en pauvreté? 
 
 Since the publication of his last work, he has much fallçn in the 
 T/epnis dernier déchoir dans 
 
 esteem of the public. If he do not alter his conduct, he will 
 
 changer F. de * 
 decline (every day) in his reputation and credit. He has 
 
 déchoir de jour en jour de f. de son m. 
 
 put in the lottery, and he hopes that a capital prize will fall 
 mis à loterie f. * art. gros lot m. échoir 
 
 (to his share). That bill of exchange has expired. The first terra 
 
 hii lettre f. change écJioir. feryiie m. 
 
 expires (at Midsummer). You have drawn on me a bill of ex- 
 
 à la Saint Jean. tirer sur moi 
 
 change ; when is it payable 1 I did not believe that (I must) so ' 
 
 échoir Y . croyais il me fallût 
 
 soon (have taken) that journey. He must have sunk un(kr 
 
 faire voyage m. afalhiquHl succomber S 
 
 the efforts of (so many) enemies. 
 tant de 
 
104 EXERCISES ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 The spring which moves ^the 'whole machine is very ingenious, 
 ressort m. tout f. 
 
 though very simple. It was passion which moved him to that 
 quoique Ce H. art. f. J. 
 
 iclion. Can you doubt that the soul, though it is spiritual, moves 
 
 f. Pouvez clouter f. * * spirituel ne Q. 
 
 the body (at pleasure) ? That is a man whom nothing moves. We 
 
 à sa volo}ité ? Ce tmoircoir. 
 
 had scarcely lo&t ^sight ^of 'land- when there arose a 
 Ht h peine perdu vue f. la terre f. que il s^émoux'oir 
 
 violent tempest. We were moved with fear and pity. When 
 q-rujide temjicte f. J. hnus de crainteî. de pitié (. Quand 
 
 the famous d'Aguesseau was promoted to the dignity of chancellor, all 
 cilèbre J. f. chancelier 
 
 France shewed the greatest joy. That bishop ^^yell 
 art. f. en témoigner J. f. évtqjie 
 
 'deserved, by Lis talents and by his virtues, that the king should promote 
 mériter H. S. 
 
 him to the dignity of primate. The people think that it rains 
 prim?ct. peuple sm^. croit 
 
 frogs and insects at certain seasons. It will not rain 
 
 ^-renouille f. insecte m. en temps m. 
 
 to-day, but I (am fearful) (of its) raining to-morrow. 
 d/axijourd'hui craindre qiiil ne Q. 
 
 When he arrived at home he (was quite exhausted). The 
 fut arHvé chez-lui nen pouvoir H. plus. 
 
 minister had (so many) people at his levee, that I could not 
 ■ministre H. tant de monde à audience f. G. 
 
 speak to him. Are -you 'afraid that he will not accomplish 
 
 * craignez pouvoir Q. venir à bout de 
 
 that affair 1 I know that he is not your friend, but I know hkewise 
 
 savoir de pi. aussi 
 
 that he is a man of probity. Let them Rnow that their pardon depends 
 * bien. savoir grâce dépendre 
 
 on their submission. I could wish that he knew his lessons a 
 de soumission. désirer N. savoir Q. 
 
 little better. Let us see if this ^(new-fashioned) 'gown becomes 
 
 voir d\in nouveau goût robe seoir 
 
 you or not. Be assured that -too 'gaudy 'colors will not become 
 
 7^0 77, art. voyant f. seoir 
 
 you. The head-dress which that lady wore became her very ill. 
 
 co':ffuret que porter H, H, bii 
 
 These colors become you so well, you (would do wrong) to wear any ~ 
 
 C. avoir l>i. tort de en porter 
 
 Others Set that child in this arm-chair, and lake care lest 
 
 Asseoir m. fauteuil m, prenez-garde que 
 
 he fall. I will sit down on the top of that hill, whence 
 
 ne Q. s'' asseoir soinmet m, coteau m. 
 
 I shall discover a prospect (no less) magnificent than diversified. 
 
 .décoicvrir scène î. aussi ma:i-wfique vari . 
 
 We (were seated) on the banks of the Thames, whence we were 
 s''asseoir I. bord m. Tamise f. 
 
EXERCISES ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 105 
 
 contemplating myriads of vessels, which bring (every year) the 
 
 H. milliers vaisseau, apporter tous les ann 
 
 riches of the two hemispheres. 
 
 See the ^admirable 'order of the universe : does it not announce a 
 Voir m. 
 
 ■^supreme 'architect 1 Has he again seen with pleasure his country and 
 
 artisan m. revoir p-i^/s 
 
 nis friends ] (Had he a glimpse of) the dawn of this fine day 1 To 
 
 entrevoir aurore Pour 
 
 finish their affairs, it would be necessary for them to (see one another) 
 
 falloir N. que * ils * s'entrevoir S. 
 
 I clearly foresaw (from that time) all the obstacles he would have to 
 bien prévoir J. dès lors m. 
 
 surmount. Would you have the judge (put off) the execution 
 surmonter. H. * que surseoir S. 
 
 of the sentence that he had pronounced 1 I shall not put off the 
 arrêt rendu ? 
 
 pursuit of that affair. If men do not provide (for it), God 
 
 poursuite f. pi. art. pourvoir y 
 
 will provide for it. Would this book (be good for) nothing 1 You 
 
 valoir N. 
 have not paid for this ground more than it is worth ; (are ypu afraid) 
 
 * terre f. f. ne valoir F. craignez-vous 
 
 that it is not worth six hundred pounds ? Let us take arbitrators. 
 
 que Q. livres sterlings? prenons arbitre. 
 
 One ounce of gold is equivalent to fifteen ounces of silver. Doubt 
 
 once f. équivaloir 
 
 not that reason and truth will prevail (at last). I can 
 
 art. art. * iie prévaloir Q,. à la longue, pouvoir 
 
 and will tell the truth. If you are willing, he will be willing 
 je votdoir dire le voidoir le 
 
 too. Let us resolve to resist our passions, and we shall be sure 
 aussi. veidllons combattre 
 
 to conquer them. (Be so good as) to lend me your grammar. 
 de vaincre veidllez * prêter 
 
 EXERCISES ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE 
 FOURTH CONJUGATION. 
 
 See Verbs, page 141 and following. 
 
 Wood which (is burned) (resolves itself) into ashes and 
 art. bois m. on brûle fse résoiidre en cendre f. en 
 
 smoke. Have they resolved on peace or war 1 The fog 
 fumte f. 071 résoiidre * art. f. art. f. brouillard m. 
 
 (has resolved itself) into ram. Could that judge -thus 'lightly 
 
 se résoudre G. phùe f. si légèrement 
 
 'absolve the guilty 1 -Strong 'waters dissolve metals. 
 
 absoudre N. coupable m. pi. art. Fort f. dissoudre art. 
 
 Î See page 91 art. 205. 
 
106 EXERCISES ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS 
 
 ■^Those 'drugs (were dissolved) (before they were put) înto that 
 
 drogve on a dlsscois avant que de les mettre A. 
 
 medicine. My sister was sewing all day yesterday. That piece is not 
 remède m. coudre S. * hier m. 
 
 well sewed ; it must (be sewed over again). Unpick that lace, 
 
 la recoudre JJécondre dentelle 1 
 
 and sew it again very carefully. Does he set a great value 
 
 avec beaucoup de soin. mettre prix m. 
 
 upon riches ? I never admitted those principles. Has he committed 
 aux admettre J. commettre 
 
 that fault "? If he (would take my advice), he would resign his 
 
 faute f. ni'en croyait se démettre de 
 
 charge in favor of his son. He put his arm (out of joint) 
 
 f. en se démettre J. le bras m. * 
 
 yesterday. I will omit nothing that depends on me to serve 
 
 omettre de ce qui dépendre L. de pour 
 
 vou. God frequently permits the wucked to prosper. 
 
 souvent permettre que méchant m. pi. * prospérer Q. 
 
 Put this book in its place again. Under whatever form of govem- 
 
 Remettre à f. * Sous quelque gouverne- 
 
 ment you may live, remember that your first duty is to be 
 
 ment m. que vivre, se souvenir devoir m. de 
 
 obedient to the laws. It frequently happens that fathers transmit to 
 •ioinnis arriver art. transmettre 
 
 their children both their vices and their virtues. He has long 
 
 et long-temps 
 
 meddled with ^public 'affairs; but his endeavors have not 
 
 s entremettre de art. effort 
 
 been crowned with success. 
 couronner de art. m. 
 
 I took great pains ; but, at last, I ground all the coffee. 
 
 prendre ^. beaucoup enfin moudre J. café va. 
 
 Grind those razors with care. Those knives (are just) ground. 
 
 cmoudre rasoir m. couteau m. viennent d'être 
 
 This grain is not sufficiently ground ; it should be (ground again). 
 
 assez il fnit le remoudre. 
 
 I wish that you would take courage. What news have you learned ? 
 
 vouloir Q. f. pi. 
 
 Philosophy comprehends logic, ethics, physics, 
 
 art. comprendre art. logique^. Q.Yt.77ioralef.s.aYt.phifsiq7ief.s. 
 
 and metaphysics. It is (with difficulty) that he (divests himself) 
 
 art. métaphysique f. s. Ce difficilement q\ie se déprendre 
 of his opmions. He has forgotten all that he knew. I fear 
 désapprendre ce que savoir H. 
 you will undertake a task above your strength. Could 
 
 nue ne entreprendre (^. tàcheï. au-dessus de f. pi. 
 
 hc have been mistaken so grossly 1 I reproved him continually 
 
 se tromper O. grossièrement reprendreH. sans cesse 
 
 for his faults, but (to no pur})ose). We surprised the enemy, and 
 défaut, iniiti'ement. surprendre^: pi. 
 
 cut them to pieces. In the middle of the road the axletree of oiu 
 tailler S. C7i à chemin essieu m. 
 
EXERCISES ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 107 
 
 carriage broke. Bad company corrupts the minds of young people. 
 
 carvosseseroîupreJ.art. f. pi. corrompre esprits. _§-e«spl. 
 
 Why do you interrupt your brother, when you see him busy ] 
 Pourquoi interrompre occupé? 
 
 3 (For a long while) 'we ^followed that method, which was only 
 long-temps suivre J. f. H. ne que 
 
 calculated to mislead us. What (is the consequence) 1 See the errors 
 propre égarer Que s^ensiiivre 
 
 that (have sprung) from this proposition, which appeared so true. 
 
 se sont ensuivies f. H. 
 
 We pursued our course, when some cries, which came from the 
 
 suivre H. chemin, lorsque des cri, * sortis 
 
 midst of the forest excited terror in our souls. The Greeks 
 
 ■fond m. forêt f. porter J. art. f. ame. Grec 
 
 vanquished the Persians at Marathon, Salamis, Platea, and Mycale. 
 
 Perse à à Salamine, à Platée, à 
 
 I have at last convinced him, by '-'such ^powerful 'reasons, of the 
 
 convaincre des si fort f. 
 
 greatness of his fault, that I (have |io doubt) but he will 
 énormité faute f. ne doute nullement que ne 
 
 repair it. It is during winter that they thrash corn in 
 
 repairer Q. Ce pendant art. on battre blé 
 
 ^cold 'countries. The enemy wa? so completely beaten in that 
 les froid pays m. pi. battre 
 
 engagement, that he was forced to abandon thirty leagues of the country. 
 rencontre f. de lieue f. * piiys. 
 
 The cannon (beat down) the tower. They were fighting with 
 
 canon abattre J. totir f. combattre un 
 
 ^unexampled 'fury when a '-^panic 'terror made them take 
 
 sans exemple acharnement m. panique f. faire S. leur 
 
 flight, and dispersed them in an instant. Beat these mattresses 
 art. fuite f. J. m. Rebattre matelas m. 
 
 again- Happy are those who live in solitude ! ^Long 'live that 
 
 * * vivre art. retraite f. Long-temps Q. 
 
 good king ! He did not long survive a person who was so dear to him. 
 survivre à f. 
 Fathers live again in their children. He was in a strange dejection 
 art. revivre accablement 
 
 of mind ; but the news which he has received (has revived) him. 
 esprit; f. pi. f. pi. ont fait revivre K. 
 
 What will you (have him do) ? Do not make (so much) 
 Que vouloir que il fasse ? tant 
 
 noise. Do they never exact 1 That woman mimicked ail the 
 de oi-uit. surfaire ? contrefaire H. 
 
 persons whom she had seen ; this levity rendered her odious. It was 
 f. que f. pi. légèreté i. J. f. Ce i. 
 
 with difficulty he (divested himself) of the false opinions which 
 
 peine que se défaire f. on 
 
 had been given him in his infancy. Could it be possible that we should 
 
 * f. pi. lui f. 
 
 not agaiii make a journey to Paris, Rome, and Naples I He 
 refaire S. art. * voyage de de de 
 
108 EXERCISES ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 says that you have offended him, and that, if you do not satisfy hnn 
 dit offense satisfaire 
 
 quickly, he will find means to satisfy himself. 
 
 promptement, art. moyen sing, de se satisfaire lui-même. 
 
 (Every night) she milked her sheep, which gave her a ^(great 
 Toils les soirs traire H. brebis pi. H. lui abon- 
 
 quantity) of ^wholesome 'milk. Have you milked your goats'? Are 
 da?it * ct sain lait m. chèvre f. 
 
 the cows milked ] Salt is good to entice pigeons. You 
 
 vache art. Sel m. pour attraire art. m. •- 
 
 will never know the nature of bodies, if you do not abstract their 
 
 connaître art. * abstraire 
 
 ^necessary 'qualities from those which are inherent (in them). The 
 celles leur. 
 
 least thing (diverts his attention). Will, you not extract that 
 moindre le distraire F. extraire 
 
 charming passage 1 Have you darned your gown ? Should he 
 
 m. rentraire 
 
 not redeem that land 1 What ! would you (have me screen) 
 retraire Quoi ! F. que je soustraie 
 
 those (guilty persons) from the rigor of the laws 1 
 coupable m. pi. à rigueur f. 
 
 Was not Virgil born at Mantua 1 It is from that ^poisoned 'source 
 naître i. JHantoue? Ce empoisonné f. 
 
 that have arisen all the '•^cruel 'wars that have desolated the universe. 
 que naître f. pi. f. désoler 
 
 The fable says that, (as soon as) Hercules had (cut off) one of the heads 
 f. dit aussitôt que H.ercule couper tête f. 
 
 of the hydra, ^others '(sprang up). While their ^united 
 
 hydre f. d'autres il en renaître H. Tandis que réuni 
 
 'flocks fed on the ^tender ^and ''flowery 'grass, they 
 
 troupeau m. paître H. * Jlexiri herbe f. 
 
 sang under the shade of a tree the sweets of ^j-u^al 'hfe 
 
 chanter H. à ombre douceur f. art. champêtre f. 
 
 Your horses have not fed to-day: (you must have them fed). 
 
 repaître d'aiijourd'hui il faut les faire repaître A, 
 He is a man who thirsts ^after nothing 'but blood and slaughter. 
 Ce ne se repaître de * que de carnage m, 
 
 The thunder which roared from afar announced a 
 
 toivierre m. bimyait dans art. lointaiji m. H. 
 
 ^dreadful 'storm. They heard roar the waves of an "^agitated 
 
 terrible orage m. On entendre H. bruire A. fot m. agité 
 
 'sea. That street is too noisy for those who love retirement and 
 
 7Jier f. rue f, bruyant art, retraite f. 
 
 study. I (have a glimpse of) something that shines through 
 art. eritrevoir quelque chose à travers 
 
 those trees. A ray of hope shone upon us in the midst of the 
 
 rayon m. luire J. * à milieu 
 
 misfortunes which overwhelmed us. (Ever)'- thing) is well rubbed in 
 malheur m. accabler H. Tout frotté' 
 
 that house : every thing shines, even the floor. Would he not 
 y reluire, Jusque à plancher m. 
 
EXERCISES ON THE IRREGULAR VKRBS 109 
 
 have injured you in that affair 1 Jesus Christ was circumcised eight 
 
 nuire circoncis 
 
 days after his birth. Will you preserve these peaches with sugar, 
 
 7iaissaiicef. confire à art. sucre m, 
 
 with honey, or with brandy 1 Did you pickle cucumbers, 
 
 à art. miel m. à art. eau-de-vie f. concombre m. 
 
 purslane, and sea-fenneH If he loses his lawsuit, all his 
 
 pourpier m. perce-pierre f. procès m. 
 
 property will not suffice. 
 
 bien suffire. 
 
 Always speak truth, but with discretion. Never contradict 
 dire art. f. 
 (any one) in public. You thought you were serving me in speaking 
 personne en penser G. * * A. en parler 
 
 thus : well (let it be so) ; you shall not be contradicted. What ! 
 ainsi : eh ! bien, soit ; n^en pas dédire. Quoi ! 
 
 would you forbid him all communication with his friends 7 That 
 
 interdire f. 
 
 woman who slandered (every one) soon lost all kind of 
 
 H. de tout le monde, J. espèce f. 
 
 respect. You had foretold that event. Let us curse no one ; 
 
 considération. ne personne ,• 
 
 let us remember that our law forbids us to curse even those who 
 
 se rappeler défendre * de 
 
 persecute us. Write (every day) the reflections which you make 
 persécuter écrire tous les jours 
 
 on the books you read. Did he not read that ^interesting 'history with 
 
 lire. J. 
 
 (a great deal) of pleasure 1 God is an ^infinite 'being, who is circum- 
 
 beaucoup être m. ne 
 
 scribed neither by time nor place. V/ill you not describe 
 
 ni art. ni par art. lie%i m. pi. 
 
 in that episode the ^^eadful 'tempest which assailed your hero 1 'Get 
 m. , horrible f. J. faire 
 
 ^those 'soles 'and ^-whitings ^fried. If you wish to form your taste, 
 
 CSS merlan frire h.. votdoir * 
 
 (read over and pver) unceasingly the ancients. He was elected by a 
 
 lisez et relisez sans cesse J. à 
 
 great majority of voices. We have laughed heartily, and have 
 
 f. m-e de bon cœur, nous 
 
 resolved to (go on). He did not answer him (any thing:) but he 
 résolu, de continuer. ne répondre J. lui rien 
 
 smiled at him, as a sign of approbation, in the ^j^indest 'manner. 
 &ourire J. * lui, en * de gracieux air m. 
 
 Seated under the- shade of palm-trees, they were milking their 
 Assis à art. pahnier 
 
 goats and ewes, and ^^errily 'drinking that nectar, which 
 
 chèvre f. leurs brebis f. avec joie m. 
 
 (was renewed) every day. Should they not have drunk with ice 1 
 se renouveler H. boire à art. 
 
 This window does not shut well ; when you have made some alterations 
 clore M. réparation f. 
 
 K 
 
110 OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 (to it), it will shut better. He had scarcely closed his eyes, when the 
 
 1/ f. cloi^e mieux. à peine I. les que 
 
 noise which they made at his door awoke him. Have they not 
 
 que on H. à réveiller J. 071 
 
 enclosed the suburbs within the city? Will you enclose your park 
 enclore faubourg m. dans ville f. pare 
 
 with a wall or a hedge ? Put the eggs of those silk-worms 
 de mur va. de haie ï. jSïettez œuf m. vers à soie m. 
 
 in the sun, that they may hatch. Those flowers just. blown, 
 cu soleil m. éclore Q. no^ivellement éclose, 
 
 spread the sweetest fragrance. When did they conclude this treaty 1 
 répandre. doux parfum m. G. traité m. 
 
 His enemies managed so well, that he was unanimously excluded from 
 
 faire J. J. unanimeinent 
 
 the company. Did you think me capable of ^so -black 'an ^act? 
 
 compagnie f croire F. 7ioir trait m, 
 
 Repossesses some kind of knowledge; but (not so much as he thinks). 
 
 quelque espèce savoir il s'' en fait trop accroire. 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 275. Prepositions, which are so called from being /)?'efixcd to the nouns 
 which they govern, serve to connect words with one another, and to show 
 the relation between them. Thus, in this phrase, le fruit de V arbre, the 
 fruit of the tree, de expresses the relation between fridt and arbre. 
 Likewise in this, %itile à Vhomme, useful to man ; à forms the relation 
 between the noun homme and the adjective utile. De and à are />?'eposi- 
 tions, and the word to which they are pre^ixeà is caJJed their regime?!. 
 
 276. There are different kinds of prepositions. 
 
 277. 'Some denote place, as : 
 Chez. Jl est chez-hd, he is at home. 
 
 Dans, n se proinène dans le jardin, he is walking in the garden. 
 Devant. // est toujours devant mes yeux, he is always before my eyess 
 Derrikhe. line regarde jamais derrière hn,he never looks behindhim. 
 Parmi. Que de fous parmi les hommes ! how many fools among men ! 
 Sous. La taupe vit sous terre, the mole lives rmder ground. 
 Sur. Il a le chapeau sur 7a tête, he has his hat on his head. 
 Vers. V aimant se tourne vers le nord, the loadstone points towards 
 the north. 
 
 EXERCISE ON THESE PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 We find less "^ledX 'happiness in an ^elevated 'condition than in a 
 On de bonhetir f. 
 
 ^middling 'state. One is never truly peaceful, but at home. 
 
 moyen véritablement tranquille que soi. 
 
 He walked before me to serve me as a guide. There was a ^delightful 
 marcher pour de * H. 
 
OF THE PREPOSITIONS. Ill 
 
 'grove behind his house. x\mong (so many) ^different 'nations, 
 bosquet m. tant de 
 
 (there is not one) tliat has not a ^religious 'worship. Nature 
 
 il rt y en a pas une Q. culte m. art. 
 
 displays her riches with magnificence under the ^torrid 'zone. 
 déployer torrkle f 
 
 ^Eternal ^snows '(are to be seen) on the summit of the Alps. Towards 
 
 f. on voit sommet Alpes. 
 
 the north, nature assumes a ^gloomy and wild 'aspect, 
 art. prend. triste sauvage aspect m. 
 
 278. Some mark order, as : 
 
 Ayant. La nouvelle est arrivés avaut le courrier, the news is come 
 
 before the courier. 
 Apkes. // est trap vain pour marcher après les autres, he is too proud 
 
 to walk after other people. 
 Entre. Elle a son enfant entre les bras, she holds her child m (foi 
 
 between) her arms. 
 Depuis. Depuis la création jîisqu''à nous, from the creation to the 
 
 present time. 
 Des. Dès son enfance, from his infancy ; dès sa source, from its source, 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 We (were up) before (daylight) (in order to) enjoy the ^maç* 
 
 se lever I. art. jour pour de mar 
 
 nificent 'spectacle of the ^rising 'sun. After such great faults. 
 
 s^nifiqiie m. levant. de si faute f, 
 
 it only remained for us to repair them (as well as we could). Be- 
 
 iie que rester H. * réparer de notre mieux. 
 
 tween those two mountains runs a -deep ^hollow 'road. ^jvfany 
 
 est profond et creux chemin m. 
 <very ^astonishing ^events '(have taken place) '^within these ten years. 
 
 il s''est passé depuis * 
 From my earliest infancy I have had an abhorrence of lying. 
 
 tendre * horreur art. mensonge m 
 
 279. Some denote union, as : 
 
 Avec. Il faut savoir avec qui on se lie, we ought to know -with whom 
 
 we associate. 
 Durant. Durant la guerre, during the war ; durant Vété, auring 
 
 the summer. 
 Pendant. Pendant Shiver, in winter ; pendant la paix, in time of peaca 
 
 This preposition denotes a duration more limited than durant 
 Outre. Outre des qualités aimables, il faut encore, &c., besides 
 
 amiable qualities, there ought still, &c. 
 Suivant. Je me déciderai suivant les circonstances, I shall determine 
 
 according to circumstances. 
 Selon. Le sage se conduit selon les maximes de la raison, a wise 
 
 man acts according to the dictates of reason. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 With wit, politeness, and some (readiness to oblige), one generally 
 un peu de prévena?ice. 
 
112 OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 succeeds in the world. We are fit for meditation during winter 
 
 réussir On est propre à art. f. 
 
 (In the course of) that siege the commandant of the city made some 
 
 Pendant siege m. J. 
 
 2very 'successful 'sallies. Besides the ^exterior 'advantages of figure 
 
 h Air eux sortie f. art. 
 
 and the graces of deportment, she possesses an ^excellent 'heart, a 
 
 art. maiiitien m. avoir 
 
 "correct 'judgment, and a ^sensible 'soul. Always act accordmg 
 
 sain jugement se condi'V^e 
 
 to the maxims which I have given you. 
 * f. incidquer f. pi. 
 
 280. Some express opposition, as : 
 
 Contre. Je plaide contre Ini, I plead against him. 
 Malgré. // fa /dit malgré moi, he has done it in spite of me. 
 Nonobstant. Nonobstant ce qxCon lui a dit, notiuithstanding what 
 has been said to iiim. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 We cannot long act (contrary to) our own character : notwith- 
 savoir N. agir contre * 
 
 standing all the pains we take to disguise it, it (shews itself), and 
 
 que pour se montrer 
 
 betrays us on many occasions. (In vain we dissemble) ; in spite 
 trahir en bien nmis avons beau faire ; 
 
 of ourselves, (we are known) at last. 
 
 on 710US coîuiaît à la longue. 
 
 281. Some express privation or separation, as: 
 
 Sans. Des troiipes sans chef troops -without commanders. 
 Excepte. Excepté quelqiies malheureux, except some wretches. 
 Hors. Tout est perdu hors Vhoujieur, ail is lost save honor. 
 Hormis. Totis sont entrés hormis mon frère, they are ail corne in 
 except my brother. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 (Had it not been for) your care, I should have been ignorant all my 
 Sans pi. un 
 
 life. All the philosophers of antiquity, except a few, 
 
 art. très-petit nombre, 
 
 have held the world to be eternal. All laid down their arm^ 
 
 croire * * mettre bas les 
 
 except two regiments, who preferred (making their way) through 
 
 se faire A. jour à travers 
 the enemy. Every thing is absurd and ridiculous in that work, 
 
 pi. 
 «■xcept a chapter or two. 
 
 282. Some denote the end, as : 
 
 Envers. Il est charitable envers les pauvres, he is charitable to the 
 poor 
 
OF THE PREPOSITIONS. I IB 
 
 Touchant. Il a écrit touchant cette affaire, he has written respect- 
 
 ing that business. 
 Pour. // travaille pour le bien public, he labors ybr the public good. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 I have written to you con-cerning that business, in which I take the 
 
 à laquelle 
 most lively interest ; and as I know your benevolence towards the 
 . vif connaître bienveillance f. 
 
 unfortunate, I (make not the least doubt) that you (will carefully 
 malhe7irenx pi. lie doute nullement ne donner Q. tous 
 
 attend) (toit), (not so much) for the satisfaction of obliging me, as for 
 iios soins y moins A. 
 
 the pleasure of justifying innocence and confounding calumny. 
 justijier A. art. de confondre K. zxi. f. 
 
 283. Others mark the cause and means, as : 
 
 Par. II VafîécJd par ses prières, he has softened him bi/ his entreaties. 
 MoTENNANT. // réussira moyennant vos avis, he will succeed by 
 
 means of your counsels. 
 Attexdu. II ne petit partir attendu les vents contraires, he cannot 
 
 sail oîi account 0/ contrary winds. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 Is there any man that has never been softened by tears or àxs- 
 
 aucun ■ Q. fléchir art. m dés' 
 
 armed by submission 1 Through the precautions which we took, 
 
 armer art. cue J. 
 
 we avoided the rocks of that ^dangerous 'coast. Owing to the bad 
 
 J. écueil m. cote f. 
 
 state -}-(of my father's health), I shall not travel this year. 
 
 voyager année f. 
 
 284. The use of the prepositions à, de, en, is veiy extensive. 
 
 285. A is generally used to express several relations, as destination, 
 tendency, place, time, situation, &c., being often a substitute for various 
 other prepositions ; ex. : — destination, to : aller à Londres, to go to 
 London. — Tendency, to, toivard : courir à sa perte, to hasten to one's 
 ruin. — Aim, at, for : aspirer à la gloire^ to aspire to glory. — Résidence. 
 at, in : être à Rome, to be at Rome. — Time, at : à midi, at twelve 
 •o'clock. — Concern, on : à ce sujet, on this subject. — Manner, iviih : sup- 
 plier à mains joi?ites, to entreat earnestly. — Means, with : peindre à 
 V huile, to paint in or xvith oil ; iviih : bas à trois fils, three-thread stock- 
 ings — that is, iviih three threads. — Situation, at, ivith : être à son aise, 
 to be at ease. — Purpose, ^or ; inie table à manger, a dining-table. — Suit- 
 ableness, /or, to : homme à réussir, a man likely lo succeed. — Desert, to : 
 crime à 71e pas pardonner, a crime not to be forgiven, &c. 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE PREPOSITIOiN à. 
 Fathers ' give good counsels and 'still 'better ^examples to your 
 
 encore meilleur 
 
 t Translate as if it stood thus -.—Of the health of my father 
 
 k2 
 
114 OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 children. A good minister only aims at the glory of ^serving ^his 
 
 ne que aspirer à A. 
 
 ''country 'v/ell. When we were in the country^ we devoted the 
 pays H. à campagne f. consacrerU. 
 
 morning to study, we walked at noon, and at three or four 
 viatinée, f. art. se promener H. midi 
 
 o'clock we went a hunting or fishing. Michael Angelo has 
 heure H. à art. chasse f à la pèche f. JVIichel-Ajigc 
 
 painted (a great deal) in fresco. It is a bed with (ivory posts) 
 
 beaiicoup oxi. fresque Ï. Ce Ut m. colonnes (Tivoire 
 
 and (mahogany feet). That man, with his ^gloomy 'looks and 
 à pied d^ acajou. les sombre regard m. 
 
 ^surly 'behaviour, seems fit only to serve as a scarecrow. 
 au brusque maintienxa, semble propre ne que de * épouvantail. 
 
 286. De is generally used to express separation, extraction, possession, 
 appartenance, cause, shift, result, &c., and supplies the place of several 
 prepositions; BlS, from : je viens de France, I come from France; d^un 
 bout à F autre, from one end to the other, — Of: le palais du roi, the 
 palace of the king; les facîdtés de fame, the faculties of the soul; un 
 homme (ïesprit, a man of wit. In a partitive sense — of: moitié de, 
 quart de, &c., the half of, the fourth of, &c. : it is used for par, by : il 
 est aimé de tout le monde, he is beloved by every hody ; for, through, 
 or by, &c. ; mourir de faijn, de soif, to die of hunger, of thirst — On, 
 upon, 7uith : vivre de fruits, to live upoii fruit. — On account of, ox for : 
 sauter de joie, to leap /or joy. 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE PREPOSITION de. 
 I come from London, where I have spent (a week) very agreeably. 
 où passé huit jours 
 
 From one end of the horizon to the other, the sky was covered with 
 
 bontm. m. ciel m . 
 
 2thick ^black 'clouds. The marble of Paros is not finer than thai 
 epjais et noir nuage m. 
 which we get from Carrara. Montaigne, Madame de Sévigné, and 
 
 qid 710US vient Carrare. 
 
 La Fontaine, were writers of ^t^-uly ^original 'genius. One half 
 
 H. écrivain tin moitié f 
 
 of the ^terrestrial 'globe, is covered with water, and above a (third part) 
 
 terrestre globe m. plus de tiers m. 
 
 of the rest is uninhabited, either through ^extreme 'heat or through 
 inhabité, ou par un chaleur f. 
 
 ■^excessive 'cold. In that happy retreat, we lived on the milk of 
 un froid m. asile m. H. 
 
 our flocks, and the ^dehcious 'fruits of our orchards. 
 brebis pi. de verger m 
 
 287. En serves to mark the relations of time, place, situation, &c., and 
 is variously expressed ; as, c'' était en hiver, it was during winter ; être 
 en Angleterre, to be in England; aller en Italie, to go into Italy; elle 
 est en bonne santé, she is in good health ; il vaut mieitx être en paix, 
 gu' en guerre, it is better to be at peace than at war ; il Va fait en haine 
 de lui, he did it out of hatred to him, &c. 
 
OF THE ADVERB, 115 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE PREPOSITION en. 
 ^He had 'for ~(a. long v^rhile) ''lived in France ; the troubles which 
 * depuis lonff-temps niure H. 
 agitated that fine kingdom obliged him to retire to Switzerland, 
 
 J. royaume m. J. de se retirer Suisse, 
 
 whence "he 'soon ^after (set out) for Italy. We were at peace, and 
 d'où se rendre J. H. 
 
 enjoyed all its blessings, when ambition rekindled the 
 nov s en goûter a. art. * cliarme in. art. rallumer 
 
 flames of war, and forced us to put our frontiers in a state of 
 feu sing. art. J. de mettre frontière f. * 
 
 defence. The savage is almost continually at war ; he cannot remain 
 
 presque toujours 
 at rest. He has acted, on this occasion, like a great man. 
 repos, dans en * 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 OF THE ADVERB. 
 
 288. The adverb is a word which accompanies verbs, adjectives, and 
 even other adverbs, to express their manner or circumstances. 
 
 289. Remark. There are adjectives which are sometimes used as 
 adverbs ; as, it chante juste, he sings well ; elle chante faux, she sings 
 out of tune ; Us ne voient pas clair, they do not see clear ; cette fleur 
 sent bon, this flower has a good smell, &c. The adjectives juste, faux, 
 clair, and bon, here supply the place of adverbs. 
 
 290. Adverbs are of different kinds. 
 
 291. The most numerous are those which express manner, and are 
 formed from adjectives by the following method : 
 
 292. Rule I. When the adjective ends in the masculine with a vowel^ 
 the adverb is formed by adding ment ; as, modeste-ment, modestly; poli- 
 imnt, politely; ingénu-meiit, ingenuously, &c. 
 
 293. Exceptions. Impuni makes impunément, and traître, traî- 
 treusement. 
 
 294. The following six take é close before ment, instead of the e mute 
 in the adjective : 
 
 aveuglément, blindly conformément, conformably 
 
 commodément, commodlously énormément, eîiormously 
 
 incotnmodément, incommodiously opiniâtrement obstinately 
 
 295. Rule II. When the adjective ends with a consonant, in the mas- 
 culine, the adverb is formed from the feminine termination, by adding 
 me7it ; as, grand, grandement, ^,XQai\y ; franc, franchement, frankly 3 
 naif, naïvement, artlessly, &c. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 296. 1st, Gentil, vcï^es gentiment, 'Çiïe'Ciûy. 
 
 297. 2d, The following eight adverbs, 
 
 communément, commonly importuné ment, importunately 
 
 confusément, confusedly obscurément, obscurely 
 
116 OF THE ADVERB. 
 
 diffusément, diffiisedly précisément, precuely 
 
 expressément expressly profondément, deeply 
 
 take before ment the é close, instead of the e mute, in the feminine of the 
 
 adjectives from which they are derived. 
 
 298. Remark. The six following adverbs are not derived from adjectives: 
 comment, hoxo . profusément, lavishly 
 incessamment, presently nuitamm.ent, by night 
 notamment, especially sciemment, knoivingly 
 
 299. 3d, Adjectives ending in nt form their adverbs by changing nt 
 into mment ; as consta-nt, consta-mment, constantly ; éloque-nt, éloque' 
 mmcnt. Except lent and présent, the only two of this class that follow 
 the second general rule, making lentement and présentement. 
 
 300. Remahk. Most adverbs denoting manner, and a few others, have 
 the three degrees of comparison ; as, profondément, aussi, pins, or moins 
 profondément, fort, bien, or très-profondément, and le plus profondément. 
 
 301. The following degrees of comparison are irregular : 
 
 POSITIYE. COMPARATIVE. SUPERLATIVE. 
 
 bien, ivell mieux, better le mieux, the best 
 
 mal, bad pis, ivnrse le pis, the -worst 
 
 peu, little moins less le moins the least 
 
 EXERCISE ON THESE ADVERBS.^ 
 
 Bourdaloue and Massillon have both spoken very eloquently 
 
 Vun et Vautre 
 
 on ^evangelical 'truths ; but (the former) has principally (proposed 
 
 art. évangélique celui-là se pro- 
 
 to himself) to convince the mind ; (the latter) has generally had in 
 
 poser de convaincre celui-ci ■> en 
 
 view to touch the heart. Several of fLa Bruyère's characters are 
 
 vue de art. 
 
 as finely drawn as they are delicately expressed. EufFon is one of 
 
 finement tracé * * 
 
 the best writers- of the ^last 'century; bethinks deeply, describes for- 
 siècle m. peiîidre for- 
 
 cîbly, and expresses himself (with dignity). Corneille and Racine are 
 tement, nohlement. 
 
 the two best ^French ^tragic 'poets ; the pieces of the former are 
 
 tragique f. 
 
 ^strongly %ut ^incoriorctly 'written; those of the latter are more regu- 
 larly beautiful, more purely expressed, and more delicately conceived. 
 beau, pensé. 
 
 302. There are likewise various other sorts of adverb? 
 ("Affirmation, as Certes, certainly ; oj«', yes. 
 
 Consent, as Soit, be it so ; volontiers, willingly. 
 
 I Doubt, as Peut-être, perhaps. 
 
 l^Denial, as JVon, ne, ne pas, ne point, no, not. 
 
 '\ 
 
 t Translate, Of the characters of La Bruyere.-^AW such phrases are rendered in 
 French in this manner. 
 
OF THE ADVERB. 117 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE ADVERBS OF AFFIRMATION, &c. 
 
 Certainly, either I mistake, or the business passed (iu that 
 oit se tromper, se passer J. 
 
 manner). Do you think that he listens willingly to this proposal 1 
 ainsi. écouter * 
 
 Have you ever read in Racine the famous scene of Phsedra's delinum ? 
 
 f. Phèdre délire m. 
 
 Yes, I have ; and I own it is one of the finest of the -French 
 
 la hie ; avotier qice ce 
 
 'theatre. Perhaps you will discover, on a second perusal of La 
 
 da?is lectxire f. 
 
 Fontaine's Fables, beauties which you did not perceive at first 
 f. que avoir H. aperçues à la f. 
 
 Will you have some ] No. Will 3'ou not have any 1 The 
 
 Vouloir F . * en * 
 
 man who (is willing) to do good is not stopped by any obstacle 
 
 vouloir F. * * art. arrêté aucun 
 
 I will pay him what I owe, but not (all at once). 
 bii ce que lui non pas tout à la fois. 
 
 'Premièrement, first; secondement, seconàly. «fee. 
 ^ , ' ° < B' abord, at first ; ensuite, après, afterwards, then ; 
 n J ' C auparavant, before. 
 
 > ~- C Où, where ; ici, here ; là, there ; de-ca, on this side; 
 
 de-la, on that side ; partout, every where ; près, 
 proche, near, nigh ; loi?i, far, &c. 
 
 Order, or 
 
 Place, or 
 Distance, 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE ADVERBS OF ORDER, &c. 
 We ought first to avoid doing evil ; afterwards we ought to do 
 II faut * de art. * 
 
 good. 'Read ^books ^of -"instruction ^first, and then you may 
 art. art. * 
 
 proceed to those of entertainment. If you will go, settle 
 
 passer L. agrément. vouloir s'e?i aller régler 
 
 first what is to be done. The painter had (brought together) 
 auparavant falloir * * A. rassembler 
 
 in the same picture several ^different 'objects : — here, a troop of Bac- 
 u?i tableau Bac- 
 
 chants : there, a troop of young people ; here, a sacrifice ; there, a 
 chante : . g'eîis 
 
 disputation of philosophers. Sesostris carried his conquests farther 
 
 dispute Sesostris pousser cojiguête 
 
 than Alexander did afterwards. Call upon your cousin ; he 
 
 ne faire 3. depîds. Passer chez 
 
 lives 2near 'here, I cannot see that, if I be not near it. VvHien 
 loger F. auprès * Quand 
 
 he knew where he Vv^as, he began to fear the consequence of 
 
 savoir J. H. cominencer J. s^iite 
 
 his imprudence. Contemplate (at a distance) lofty mountains, 
 
 de loin art. haut f 
 
 if you wish to behold prospects ever varied and ever new, 
 vouloir * découvrir site ra. 
 
118 OF THE ADVERB. 
 
 Tprp e t Ç Maintenant, now; à présent, at pre^ 
 
 \ sent ; actuellement, this moment, &c 
 
 ■D ^ Ciller, yesterday ; avant-hier, the day 
 
 < before yesterday ; autrefois, former- 
 
 S04.oFTmEJ >J^'^''\ . ^ r • .X. 
 
 ^ -p . ^ yDeinai)i,to-morxo-w; apres-cle}nain,me 
 
 "'* C day after to-morrow, &c. 
 
 C Souvent, often; cV ordinaire, generally; 
 
 Indeterminate s quelquefois, sometimes ; matin, early ; 
 
 l^ C. tut, soon ; tard, late, &;c. 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE ADVERBS OF TIME. 
 I have finished the work you prescribed me ; what do you wish 
 achever que ordonner I. qiie vouloir 
 
 me to do now 1 Formerly, education was neglected ; it is "^now 
 que je * Q. 071 
 
 -(very much) 'attended to; it is (to be hoped) that 'new ""views 
 
 beaucoup s^ occuper en; falloir Y . espérer A. on 
 
 will -soon '(be adopted). They grieved (at it) yesterday; now 
 
 adopter. On s'affligera, en aujourdlmi 
 
 they laugh (at it) ; to-morrow, it will no longer (be thought) of. It is 
 
 rire' en; on plus penser \t. y. 
 
 one of those accidents which it is sometimes impossible to avoid. The 
 
 de 
 dew nncommcded 'me ^(very much) ; I shall not (in future) 
 serein m. G. désormais 
 
 walk so late. ^j^u^e ^and ^coarse 'criticism genè- 
 
 se promener Malhonnête grossier une f. 
 
 rally (does greater injur}') to the person who indulges himself in 
 mure plus se permettre * * 
 
 it, than to him who is the object (of it). 
 celle en. 
 
 C rPezi, little, few; assez, enough; trop, too 
 
 I Quantity, as < much ; beaucoup, much, very much, ma- 
 
 305, OF-^ C. iiy ; tant, so much, «fee. 
 
 \ r- • Ç Plus, more ; moins, less ; aussi, so ; autant, 
 
 Gomnarison, as ^ u >? 
 
 l^ '^ ^ as much, &c. 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE ADVERBS OF QUANTITY, &c. 
 There are many people who have pretensions ; but very few who 
 
 gens * * à ' en 
 
 have such as are well founded. To ^embellish -^a 'sutject 'too much, 
 
 Q. * * * * de fo7idé f. p\. * 
 frequently betrays a want of judgment and taste. One very often 
 
 souvent être faute 
 
 experiences disgust in the midst of ^the most riotous '"pleasures. 
 
 trouver art. enmd à des bruyant 
 
 Shp is a ^giddy ^and ^thoughtless 'woman, who speaks much and 
 Ce léger inconséquent 
 
 reflects little. She has so much kindness, that it is impossible 
 réfléchir de de 
 
 not to love her These stuffs are beautiful ; consequently they (are 
 étoffe f. aussi coûtent 
 
OF CONJUNCTIONS. 119 
 
 dear). This book has merit ; but there are others as good. If he 
 
 cher. en de aussi 
 
 has done that, I can do (as much). What I say to you (about it) is 
 
 en autant. en 
 
 meant less to give you pain, than to apprize you of the language 
 * * p 01 ir faire avertir p'^oposvl. 
 
 (that is used). She is six years younger than her brother. NoboJy 
 qii'on tient. avoir de moins 
 
 is more interested than you are ^^(m the success) of Uhe ^aflair. 
 
 ne * à ce que réussir Q, * 
 
 You do not offer enough for this garden : give something more. The 
 
 offrir de de * 
 
 'more ''ignorant ^we ^are, the ^less we (believe ourselves so). 
 on est, * on croit Vetre. 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 OF CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 306. The conjunction is a word which serves to connect words or sen- 
 tences ; as, 77 pleiire et rit en même temps, he cries ajid laughs at the 
 same time : the word et unites the first sentence, il pleure, with the second 
 it rit. Xikewise in Pierre et Paul rient, Peter ajid Paul laugh : the 
 word et unites these two sentences into one, Pierre rit îind Paul riL 
 
 307. There are different kinds of conjunctions. 
 
 308. To unite two words under the same affirmation, or under the 
 same negation, et is used for the affirmation and ni, neither, nor, for the 
 negation. 
 
 309. To denote an alternative or distinction — on, eithei_ or ; ^oit, que, 
 whether, or ; tantôt, sometimes, &c. 
 
 310. To restrict an idea — sinon, but, except; quoique, encore que, 
 though, although ; à moins que, unless, till. 
 
 EXERCISE ON THESE CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 Gold and silver are metals less useful than iron. To listen 
 art. art. art. * 
 
 with joy to a slanderer, and to applaud him, is to cherish the serpent 
 
 * médisant, * lid, ce * réchauffer ^ 
 
 which stings, that he may sting more effectuaily. I like neither 
 
 piquer, afin que plus sûrement. les 
 
 flatterers nor the wicked. Those who have never suffered, know 
 Jlatteur pi. savoir 
 
 nothing ; they know neither good nor evil. You may choose 
 connaître art. bien art. mal. avez à choisir 
 
 either a happy mediocrity or a sphere more elevated, but exposed to 
 
 de de f. 
 
 many dangers. He is an ^inconsistent 'man ; he is sometimes of one 
 bien Ce inconséquent tantôt 
 
 opinion and sometimes of another. I have (nothing more) to say to 
 avi» ne antre chose 
 
120 OF CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 you, only that I will have it so. I shall not yet proceed to the perusal 
 
 sinon que 'vouloir * * €?icore lecture f. 
 
 of the authors of the second class, unless you advise me to do so. 
 
 ordre m. ?ie conseiller Q. * * le 
 
 311. To express opposition — mais, hut; cependant, yet, nevertheless ; 
 néanmoins, for all that, however ; pourtant, however, though ; toutefois 
 bien que, although. 
 
 312. To express a condition — si, if; sinon que, except that; pourvu 
 que, provided that ; à condition que, on condition that. 
 
 313. To express consent — à la vérité, indeed ; à la bonne heure 
 very well. 
 
 314. For explanation — savoir, c''est'à-dire, viz., that is to say; 
 comme, as. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 The serpent bites ; it is only a bite ; but from this bite the venom 
 ce iie que morsure f. ; venin 
 
 communicates itself to the wlïole body : the slanderer speaks ; it is but 
 
 ne que 
 a v/ord ; but this word resounds every where. (That is) certainly a 
 
 parole f. retentir Voilà 
 
 superb picture ; nevertheless, there is some incorrectness in the design. 
 tableau; incorrection -pi. dessein. 
 
 Although Homer, according to Horace, slumbers (at times), he (is) 
 
 Homère, sommeiller Q,, quelquefois n'' en est 
 
 nevertheless the first of all poets. You will succeed, provided you 
 pas moins art. réussir, 
 
 act with vigor. We have within us two faculties that are seldom 
 agir Q. en * * 
 
 united, viz : imagination and judgment, 
 art. f. art. m. 
 
 315. To express relation or parity — comme, as; ainsi, thus, so; de 
 même, as, just as ; ainsi que, as ; autant que, as much as ; si que, as, &c. 
 
 316. To express augmentation — d' ailleurs, hesiies, moreover; outre 
 'jue, besides that ; de plus, an szirplus, besides, furthermore. 
 
 317. For dim^inution — aii moins, du moins, pour le moins, at least. 
 
 318. To express the cause or the reason of a thing — car, for; cojume, 
 as; parce qtie, because ; puisque, since ; pour que, tliat, in order that, «Sec. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 The most beautiful flowers last but a moment ; thus %uman 
 durer 7ie que art. 
 
 21ife 'passes away. The (greatest part) of mankind have, like 
 * plupart f. art. h.or.ime pi. 
 
 piants, ^hidden 'qualities that chance discovers. Madame 
 art. caché propriété f. art. hazard fait découvrir. 
 
 de Sévigné's letters are models of elegance, simplicity, and taste ; 
 
 art. de de 
 
 besides, they are replete with ^interesting 'anecdotes. Nothing is 
 
 plein de f. * de 
 
 more entertaining than history ; besides, nothing is more instructive. 
 amusant art , * de 
 
OF CONJUNCTIONS. 121 
 
 Circumstances show us to others, and still more to our- 
 
 art Occasion faire cojinaître encore 
 
 selves. I shall always advise you to take the ancients as youi 
 
 conseiller de pour 
 
 guides ; at least, ^q^it >but seldom the way which they 
 
 écarter de ne vous que de route f. que i 
 
 ûave traced for you. We must, at least, know the ^general iprmciplea 
 
 tracée * B faut, 
 
 of a language, before (we take upon ourselves) to teach it." 
 
 langue f. de se mêler A. de * enseigner 
 
 Certain people hate grandeur, because it lowers and hu- 
 
 f. -gens art. f. elle lea rabaisser qtCelle 
 
 miliates them, and makes them feel the privation of the 
 
 que elle leur 
 
 advantages which they covet. 
 bien aimer. 
 
 319. To draw a conclusion — or, now; done, then; par conséquent, 
 consequently ; c'est pourquoi, therefore. 
 
 320. To express a circumstance — quand, lorsque, when; pendant que^ 
 tandis que, whilst, while ; tant que, as long as : depuis que, ever since , 
 avant que, before; dès-que, aussitôt que, d'abord que, as soon as; 
 à peine, hardly, scarcely ; après que, after that ; enfin, in fine, finally, to 
 conclude, &c. 
 
 321. To express a transition — car, for; en effet, indeed, in elîect; au 
 reste, besides, otherwise ;' à propos, now I think of it ; après tout, after all. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 We ought to love what is amiable : now, virtue is amiable ; there- 
 // faut * cequi art. 
 
 fore we ought to love virtue. We ought to practise what the 
 * art. * ce que 
 
 Gospel commands us ; now, it commands us, not only to forgive 
 évangile m. non de pardonner 
 
 our enemies, but also to love them. Despréaux was (extremely 
 à encore de de la plus grande 
 
 particular) in not coming late, when he was invited to dinner ; he 
 exactiticde à A. trop H. 
 
 said that all the faults of those who (are waited for) present themselves 
 H. .défaut se font attendre 
 
 to those who wait for them. The pride which possesses us, 
 
 attendre * posséder toiu 
 
 visible as it is, escapes our eyes, while it manifests itself to the eyes of 
 
 que à 
 
 the public, and displeases (every one). After( we had) examined 
 
 choquer tous les esprits. avoir 
 
 that -singular 'eflfect, we (inquired into) (its) causes. We had hardly 
 , rechercher J. en les H. 
 
 done, when he (came in). Pride counterbalances all our imperfections; 
 finir, que entrer S . contre-peser misère. 
 
 for, whether it hides them, or whether it discovers them, it glories in 
 ou cacher si se glorifier de 
 
 knowing them. (None but) an Englishman can (be a judge) 
 connaître A. Jl iCy a que Anglais qui Q. juger A. 
 
122 
 
 OF INTERJECTIONS. 
 
 of Shakspeare ; for what foreigner is sufficiently versed in the English 
 quel aîiglaia 
 
 language to discover the ^sublime 'beauties of that author % 
 langue f. pour 
 
 322. The conjunction que is alv^ays placed between two ideas, both 
 necessary to complete the sense ; as, // est très-important que tout le 
 monde soit instruit, it is of great importance that every body should be 
 well instructed. It differs from the relative pronoun que, as it can never 
 be converted into lequel, laquelle. The conjunction que is generally 
 repeated in French before every member of a period, although it is often 
 understood in English. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 (As long as I live), this image will be before my eyes ; and, if 
 
 Toute ma vie f. f. peint f. 
 
 ever the gods permit me to reign, I shall not forget, after ^so ^ terrible 'an 
 
 faire ^ 
 ^example, that a king (is not) worthy to govern (nor) happy in 
 
 Ti'est de commander et n'est 
 
 his power, (but in proportion as) he subjects it to reason. I 
 
 puissance f. qu'aritant que soumettre art. 
 
 am very glad to see that you do not love flattery, and that one 
 
 de 
 (runs no risk) in speaking to you with sincerity. 
 ne hazarde rien à K: • 
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 OF INTERJECTIONS. 
 
 323. Interjections are words which serve to express the sudden emo- 
 tions of the soul. The only point to be attended to, is not to place them 
 between words which custom has made inseparable. There are interjec- 
 tions for every feeling, viz : Of 
 
 Pain ahi, aie ! ouf! ah ! 
 
 Grief hélas ! mon Dieu, &.c. 
 
 Fear ha! hé! 
 
 Joy ah ! bon, bon ! o ! 
 
 Aversion fi ! fi done ! oh, oh ! 
 Disgust pouah, pouah ! 
 
 Indignation foin de ! 
 Imprecation peste de, la peste de ! 
 Uisbelief chansons, tarare ! 
 Surprise ouais ! 
 
 Astonishment oh ! bon Dieu ! misé- 
 ricorde ! peste ! 
 Warning gare ! hem ! holà, ho ! 
 Checking tout beau ! holà ! 
 Encouraging alerte ! allons ! ça cou- 
 Applauding bravo, vivat ! [rage ! 
 Encoriîig bis, bis î 
 Calling hola ! ho ! hem, hem ! 
 
 Derision oh! eh! zest! oh, oh, oh! 
 Sile?ice chut ! paix ! s 
 
(123) 
 
 PART II. 
 
 THE SYNTAX; 
 
 OR, 
 
 WORDS CONSIDERED IN THEIR CONSTRUCTION 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 OF THE SUBSTANTIVE. 
 
 324. There are some substantives which are never used in the plural ; 
 such are — I. The names of metals, consid^ed in their original stale: as, 
 I' or, gold ; le platine, platina. — 2. The names of virtues and vices ; as, la 
 chasteté, chastity ; V ivrognerie, drunkenness. — 3. Some words of a phy- 
 sical or moral nature ; as, l'ouïe, hearing ; l'odorat, smelling ; le sang", 
 blood; le sommeil, sleep; la pauvreté, poverty. — 4. The infinitive of 
 verbs and adjectives used substantively, together with some other words, 
 which cannot be reduced to any particular class. 
 
 325. Others, on the contrary, which likewise cannot be reduced to any 
 particular class, are never used in the singular ; as, annales, annals ; ancê- 
 tres, ancestors ; mouchettes, snuffers, &c. 
 
 OF COMPOUND NOUNS. 
 Of the formation of their Plural 
 
 326. When a noun is compounded of a substantive and an adjective, 
 they both take the sign of the plural ; as, un gentilhomme, a nobleman ; 
 des gentilshommes, noblemen. 
 
 327. When a noun is compounded of two substantives, united by a 
 preposition, the first only takes the sign of the plural ; as, arcen-ciel, a 
 rainbow ; des arcs-eîi-ciel, rainbows. 
 
 328. When a noun is compounded of a preposition or verb and a sub- 
 stantive, the substantive alone is put in the plural ; as, un entresol (a 
 low room between two floors), des entresols ; un garde-fou (rails on 
 bridges), des-garde-fous. 
 
 329. Remark. There is a small number of substantives composed of 
 a verb and an adverb; as, xin passe-pariont, a master or general key; or 
 of a verb repeated ; as, passe-passe, sleight of hand : they never talce the 
 &/gn of the plural. 
 
 See page 41, art 103 and following. 
 
124 SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. 
 
 EXERCISE ON SUBSTANTIVE AND COMPOUND NOUNS. 
 
 Gold is the most pure, the most precious, the most ductile, and, 
 art parfait, 
 
 after platina, the heaviest of all metals. Chastity is an obligation 
 
 art. m. pesant art. art. * * 
 
 of all times, all ages, and all conditions. Intoxication 
 art. de art. de art. état m. art. Ivresse 
 
 which proceeds from beer is of longer duration than that which pro- 
 
 ■venir art. * * celle 
 
 ceeds from wine. It is the sense of feeling which teaches 
 
 art. Ce art, toucher apprendre 
 
 to guard against the errors of sight. Sleep is the image of 
 à se garantir de art. art. 
 
 death. 2 (Early) Uearn to distinguish truth from 
 
 art. De bonne-heure apprendre disti?ig-uer art. 
 
 falsehood. That is more bitter than wormwood. Dignity 
 
 art. faux. amer de art. absinthe, art. Elévation 
 
 of mind was formerly the (distinguishing mark of) 
 
 art. sentiment m. pi. H. ce qui * distinguer H. 
 
 noblemen. One of the buttresses of the vault has fallen, 
 
 art. arc-boutant m. pi. tomber. 
 
 He is always making (cock-and-bull stories). The Tartars always 
 
 * fait des coq-à'Vâne m. Tartare 
 
 form the scouts of an army. The fish-carriers did not 
 
 être avant-courier m. chasse-marée m. 
 
 arrive in time. This door is only fastened with a latch ; and 
 
 J. à ne que .fermer à * art. loquet m. * 
 
 all (the persons) in the house have each their key. 
 
 ceux de passe-partout m. 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 OF THE ARTICLE. 
 
 330. The difficulty attendant on rendering into French the a or an 
 which precedes a substantive, when it follows the verb to be, will easily 
 be removed by examining whether that substantive be restricted by a 
 particular idea : if it be not restricted, the a or an is not expressed in 
 French ; thus, I am a Frenchinan, I a^n a prince, must be translated by 
 je suis Français, je suis prince. But if it be restricted, then the a or 
 an must be expressed by the word un placed before the substantive ; as, 
 T am a Frenchman of an illustrious family, I am a very ujifortimate 
 prince, must be translated by je suis un Français d^une illustre maison, 
 je suis un prince très-vialheu'^eux. 
 
 331. When the verb être is preceded by the demonstrative ce, in 
 phrases of this ki.id, ^ln is always required before the substantive ; a-s, 
 c est tin trésor, &c. 
 
 332. The French do not use the article before substantives expressing 
 the quality of a preceding noun, though in cases of this kind the English 
 
SYNTAX' OF THE ARTICLE. 125 
 
 lisually employ the article the, and still more frequently a or an } as, 
 Télémaque, fis lV Ulysse roi (V Itaque, Telemachus, the son of Ulysses 
 king of Ithaca; le Duc it York, prince du sang, the Duke of York, a 
 prince of the blood. 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE ARTICLE. 
 I am a Frenchman and a merchant ; after having (been at) the most 
 négociant ; A. parco7iru 
 
 famous (trading towns) in the Levant, (my commercial concerns) have 
 
 échelle f. de m. les affaires de mon commc^'cc 
 
 brought me here. I am an unhappy Frenchman, who, a Sstriking 
 conduire * mémorable 
 
 'example of the vicissitudes of fortune, seeks an asylum where I 
 art. chercher asile m. 
 
 may end my days in peace. He was a man of ^Q^common 'probity 
 puisse Jinir Ce un rare ' f. 
 
 and of 2tried 'virtue : (as a reward) for the services he 
 
 nn éprouvé f. pour le récompenser de que 
 
 had rendered to the church and state, the king has made him a 
 
 H. m. pi. église à le 
 
 bishop. Neoptolenms had hardly told me that he was a Greek, when 
 évèque. JSl'éoptolème eut à peine dit que 
 
 I (cried out), " O, enchanting words ! after so many years of silence 
 
 s'écrier J. doux parole î. de 
 
 and ^u'nceasing 'pain ! O, my son, what misfortune, what 
 
 de sans consolation ' malheur m. 
 
 storm, or rather what ^propitious 'wind has brought you hithei 
 tempête f. plutôt favorable conduire 
 
 to end my woes ?" He replied, " I am of the island of Scyros, I 
 pour mal P m. répondre 3. île 
 
 am returning thither ; (I am said to be) the son of Achilles." 
 retourner y on dit que je suis Achille. 
 
 333. Without entering more minutely into this subject, the following 
 comparative table, in which the same words are exhibited, according to 
 circumstances, both v/ilh and without the article, will, it is presumed, be 
 considered as a sufficient illustration of custom. 
 
 COMPARATIVE TABLE 
 
 WITH THE ARTICLE. 
 
 The writings of Cicero are full of 
 
 the soundest ideas. 
 Divest yourself of the prejudices 
 se défaire 
 
 of childhood. 
 The different kinds of animals that 
 
 are upon the earth. 
 He enters into a detail of the rules 
 
 of a good grammar. 
 He affects circumlocutions. 
 
 chercher des détour. 
 
 WITHOUT THE ARTICLE. 
 
 The writings of Cicero are full of 
 
 ^sound 'ideas. 
 Have no prejudice (with regard 
 
 to) this question. 
 
 sicr 
 There are different kinds of animals 
 
 upon the earth. 
 He enters into a long detail of -fri- 
 volous 'rules. 
 He affects long circumlocutions, in 
 
 order to explain the ^pimplcst 
 
 'things, 
 l2 
 
126 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. 
 
 WITH THE ARTICLE. 
 
 He loads his memory with the verses 
 
 of Virgil and the phrases of Cicero. 
 Essays supported by ^strong ^ex- 
 Discours soutenu 
 
 pressions. 
 He has collected precepts of 
 •^ecueilUr sur 
 
 morality. 
 
 7}ioeurs'i>\. 
 Make use of the tokens 
 
 se servir signe dont 
 
 (we agreed upon). 
 
 nous sommes convenu. 
 The choice of studies, proper &c. 
 
 Knowledge has always been the 
 Connaissance pi. 
 object of the esteem, the praise, 
 
 éloge pi. 
 and the admiration of men. 
 The riches of the mind can (only 
 be acquired) by study. 
 
 ne que s'acquérir. 
 The gifts of fortune are uncertain. 
 
 fragiles. 
 The connexion of proofs makes 
 enchaînement preuve 
 them please and persuade. 
 qtûelles 
 It is by meditation upon what we 
 read, that we acquire '-afresh 
 ^knowledge. 
 connaissance pi. 
 The advantages of memory. 
 The memory of facts is the most 
 showy. 
 brillant. 
 The aim of good masters should 
 devoir F. 
 be to cultivate the mind and 
 être de 
 -eason of their pupils. 
 The taste of mankind is liable to 
 homme pi. 
 great changes. 
 Re has no need of the lessons you 
 
 wish to give hira. 
 France, Spain, England, &c. 
 
 The isle of Japan. 
 He comes from China. 
 He arrives from America 
 Tbe extent of Persia. 
 
 WITHOUT THE ARTICLE. 
 
 He loads his memory with ^insipid 
 
 'verses ^and ^phrases. 
 Essays supported by lively ex- 
 vive 
 
 pressions. 
 A collection of precepts in morals. 
 * recueil sur 
 
 We are obliged to use some ^ex- 
 
 terior ^signs in order to make 
 
 ourselves understood. 
 nous entendre. 
 He has made a choice of books 
 
 which are, &c. 
 It is an object of esteem, of praise, 
 Ce 
 
 and admiration 
 
 There is in .Peru a prodigious 
 le Pérou 
 
 abundance of ^ useless 'riches. 
 Gifts of fortune. 
 Bien 
 There is in this book an admirable 
 
 connexion of '-^solid 'proofs. 
 
 It is by meditation that we acquire 
 fresh knowledge. 
 
 nouveau 
 
 There are different kinds of memory. 
 He has only a memory of facts. 
 
 He has an air of pedantry that 
 ton m. maître 
 shocks you at first sight. 
 abord. 
 
 Society of ^chosen 'men. 
 
 He has no need of lessons. 
 
 avoir besoin 
 Kingdom of France, of Spain, of 
 
 England, &c. 
 Island of Candia. 
 He comes from Poland. 
 He arrives from Italy. 
 He is gone to Persia. 
 
 €31 
 
SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. 
 
 127 
 
 "WITH THE auticli;. 
 He has returned from the East In- 
 dies, from Asia, &c. 
 He lives in Peru, in Japan, in the 
 à 
 Indies, in Jamaica, &c. 
 The politeness of France, &c. 
 The circumference of England. 
 The interest of Spain. 
 The invention of printing is attri- 
 buted to Germany. 
 He comes from ^French 'Flanders. 
 français Flandre f. 
 
 avithout the article. 
 He has returned from Spain, from 
 
 Persia, &c. 
 He lives in Italy, in France, 
 
 in London, in Avignon, &c. 
 
 à à 
 
 The fashions of France. 
 The horses of England. 
 The wines of Spain. 
 The empire of Germany is divided 
 
 into a great number of states. 
 He comes from Flanders. 
 
 ON MEASURE, WEIGHT, &c. 
 
 334. The English make use of a or an before nouns of measure, 
 weight, and purchase ; as, wheat is sold for a crotvn a bushel ; butter 
 sells for sixpence z. pound ; -wine sold yesterday for forty crotvns a hogs- 
 head, His more than a groat a bottle. But the French make use of the 
 article le, la ; as, le blé se vend un ecu le boisseau ; le beurre se vend 
 six sous la livre ; le vin se vendit hier quarante ecus le muid, c'est plus 
 de quatre sous la bouteille. 
 
 335. When speaking of time, a or an is expressed in French by the 
 preposition par ; as, so much a tveek, tant par semaine. 
 
 336. In English a is sometimes put between the pronoun which ex- 
 presses admiration and the substantive that accompanies it ; as, ivhat a 
 beauty ! but in French, the un is never expressed in similar cases ; as, 
 qicelle beauté ! 
 
 337. In English, when the adverbs more oxiàless are repeated to express 
 a comparison, they must be preceded by the article ; as, the more difficuLt 
 a thing is, the more honorable it is. But in French, the article is omitted ; 
 as, plus une chose est difficile, plus elle est hoîiorable. 
 
 EXERCISE ON MEASURE, WEIGHT, &c. 
 
 Corn sells for eight shillings a bushel. Veal and mut- 
 
 art. blé m. se vendre * • schelling boisseau, art. Veau art. 
 
 ton cost ten pence a pound. This lace (is sold at) ^half 'a ^guinea 
 
 coûter sou livre f. f. se vendre F. demi guinea 
 
 an ell. The best ^French 'wines (are sold at) from twelve to fifteen 
 
 aune. de France se vendre F. 
 
 shillings a bottle. My father goes to Ireland four or five times a year, 
 bouteille f, en Irla?ide fois an. 
 
 He gives his son seven shillings a day. It (is necessary), if you 
 
 falloir 
 desire (to improve fast) that you should take a lesson three 
 
 faire des progrès rapides preniez * 
 
 times a week. The more I contemplate those precious remains of 
 
 reste m. 
 antiquity, the more I am struck with wonder. What a beautiful 
 art fff^PP^ de étonnement, 
 
 morning ! come, let us go and walk in the fields. 
 matinée f. • se promener A. champ m. 
 
128 SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 338. It has been said (page 46) that an adjective agrees in gendei 
 and number with the substantive which it qualifies : from this rule, how- 
 e\er, must be excepted, 7iu, bare, and demi, half, when placed before a 
 substantive, oxiàfeii, late, when before the article or a pronominal adjec- 
 tive ; as il va nu-pieds, he goes barefoot ; je suis à vous dans une demi- 
 heure, I will be with you in half an hour; feu la reine, the late queen; 
 feu ma mere, my late mother. But the agreement takes place \Ç nu and 
 demi be placed after the substantive, ■&xïà feu between the article or prono- 
 minal adjective and thé substantive ; as, il a les pieds nus, his feet are 
 bare ; je suis à vous dans une heure et demie, I will be with you in an 
 hour and a half; la feue reine, ma feue mère. 
 
 339. An adjective frequently serves to qualify two or more substantives 
 expressing either persons or things of different genders. 
 
 340. If it be used to qualify more than two substantives, it must agree 
 with them, for either these substantives perform the office of subject ; as, 
 la grammaire, la logique, et la rhétorique, méthodiquement enseignées, 
 ne s^oublient giière, grammar, logic, and rhetoric, when taught with 
 method, are seldom forgotten : or they constitute the regimen ; as, c'est 
 un homme d^une valeur, dhme vertu et d'une fidélité, éprouvées, he is 
 a man of tried courage, virtue, and fidelity. 
 
 341. If it be used to qualify only two substantives, the substantive of 
 peisons must be distinguished from the substantive of things; with the 
 first, the rules of agreement are to be observed in all cases ; with the 
 second, custom allows, when the substantives form the regimen, to make 
 the adjective agree with the last only ; as, elle avait les yeux et la bouche 
 ouverte. Nevertheless, modem grammarians prefer the agreement, even 
 m this case. 
 
 343. With respect to phrases like the following, les langues anglaise 
 et française sojit fort cultivées, though they are in opposition to the 
 rules of grammar, yet it is allowable to use them. However, in strict 
 propriety, it seems better to say, la langue française et l'anglaise sont 
 Irès-cultivées. 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE ADJECTIVE. 
 Ke ran through the streets like a madman, bare-foot and bare-headed. 
 H. * rue f. tête. 
 
 His ^legs ' (were) ^bare. Give me half a guinea, and then you 
 
 * art. jambe f. il avait 
 
 (will only owe) me a guinea and a half. I shall be at home in 
 ne devrez phis qtie chez-moi dans 
 
 half an hour. Come before ^half ' (past one). 2The 'late queen 
 
 une heure et. 
 was idolized. The late queen was universally regretted. His impetuosity 
 H. adoré. J. 
 
 said courage, long restrained, soon surmounted all obstacles. The 
 son enchaîné, J. art 
 
SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. 129 
 
 imagination and genius of Ariosto, although irregular in their 
 
 art. VArioste, qiioique 
 
 course, yet interest, (hurry along), and captivate the reader, 
 
 marche, néanmoins attacher, entraîner, lecteur, 
 
 who can never be tired of admiring them. I'here are m Gessner's 
 se lasser A. 
 
 idylls sentiments and a grace altogether affecting. The good taste 
 art. idylle tout-à-fait touchant. 
 
 of the Egyptians, (from that time), made them love solidity and 
 
 dès-lors J. leur art. 
 
 ^unadorned 'regularity. In those climates, the dry and the rainy 
 
 toiit nu sec pluvieux 
 
 monsoons divide the year. 
 mousson f. se diviser année. 
 
 Difference of construction between the English and French 
 Languages. 
 
 343. In English, the substantive of measure is placed before the sub- 
 stantive or adjective expressing the dimensions ; as, a toiver two hundred 
 feet high, or in height. In French, the word which expresses dimension 
 is placed first, if it be an adjective, and the preposition de be added to it 
 as a regimen ; as, une tour haute de deux cents pieds. But if it be a 
 substantive, or an adjective used substantively, it is placed after, with the 
 preposition de, either before the noun of measure or of dimension j as, 
 une tour de deux cents pieds de haut, or de hauteur. This last mode 
 is the most elegant. 
 
 344. The English manner of expressing dimensions is to use the verb 
 to be ; as, the xvalls of Algiers are t-welve feet thick and thirty feet high^ 
 the French, in general, make use of the verb avoir when there are two 
 constructions ; as, les murs d'Alger ont douze pieds d'épaisseur, et trente 
 de hauteur ; or les murs d'Alger ont douze pieds d'épaisseur sur trente 
 de hauteur. This second mode of expression is most generally adopted. 
 
 345. In comparative sentences, to express difference, the English sen- 
 tence often runs thus : she is taller than her sister by the -whole head. 
 The French, in this manner : elle est plus grande que sa sœur de toute 
 la tête 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE DIFFERENCE OF CONSTRUCTION. 
 
 This trunk, which is six feet long, is very convenient. You will 
 coffre m. commode. 
 
 be stopped m your march by a river three hundred feet broad. This 
 
 arrêté f. 
 
 otiservatory, which is twelve hundred feet high, is very proper foi 
 
 knowing the true position of the stars. It is a terrace a hundred 
 connaître K. astre m. Ce terrace ï. 
 
 and eighty feet broad and twelve hundred feet long. The walls of 
 
 large mur m. 
 
 our garaen are twenty feet high and three broad. It is one of the 
 jardin Ce 
 
ISO SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE 
 
 finest stones that (was ever seen) : it is twenty feet long and six 
 
 on ait jamais vues : " longueur 
 
 thick. This ditch is nine feet six inches deep and six 
 
 (épaisseur. fossé m. pouce m. profondeur f. 
 
 feet broad. My son is taller than yours by two inches. 
 
 Regimen of the Mjectives. 
 
 346. Several adjectives have a regimen ; some require the preposition 
 de and others the preposition à before a noun or a verb, which is then 
 called the regimen or government of the adjective. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Digne de récomperise, Worthy of reward. 
 
 Utile à V homme, ^ Useful to man. 
 
 Digne de régner, Worthy ©/"reigning. 
 
 Conteîit de son sort, de vivre, &c. Satisfied -witli his lot, -with living. 
 
 Beau à voir, bon à manger, Fine to the sight, goodyb?' eating. 
 
 ,^pre au gairi, avide dJ honneur, Eager after gain, greedy o/" honor. 
 
 Propre à la guerre, Fit for war. 
 
 347. Récompense is the government of the adjective digne, as it is 
 joined to that adjective by the word de : f homme is the government of 
 the adjective îitile, because it is joined to that adjective by the word à, 
 and so of the rest. 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE REGIMEN OF THE ADJECTIVES. 
 
 ^Virtuous 'men are always worthy of esteem. A ^weak 'mind 
 
 art. Vertueux toujours estime f. faible m. 
 
 is liable to many contradictions. A heart free from cares enjoys 
 
 SKJtt bien des f. cœur m. libre de soin m. jouit 
 
 the greatest 'possible 'felicity. Voltaire was always greedy of 
 
 de f. fut avide 
 
 praise and insatiable of glory. Rousseau, endowed with a ^strong 
 
 iouange f. pi. doué de fort 
 
 ^and ^fiery 'imagination, was all his (life time) subject to frequent 
 
 bouillant f. vie f. enclin à de 
 
 fits of misanthropy, and liable to all the variations (attendant upon it). 
 
 accès m. - sujet f. qui en sont la suite. 
 
 PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES ON THE ARTICLE AND THE 
 ADJECTIVES. 
 
 THE FAÏTLTS OF IKFANCX. 
 
 défaut m. art, enfance. 
 
 The amiable Louisa and her young brother Charles were gentle, 
 
 Louise H. doux, 
 
 humane, and sensible. To the ^most interesting 'person, Louisa joined 
 
 sensible, spirituel. intéressant figure î. Louise H. 
 
 all the modesty, the pleasing ingenuousness, and ^jirtless graces of her 
 
 f. heureux ingénuité f. naïf art. f. 
 
 fiex ; and Charles, the vivacity, the fire, and the manly gracefulness 
 sexem, i. feu va. mâle agrément m.'çL 
 
SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 131 
 
 of his. But these advantages, the ^prerious 'gifts of nature, were 
 du sieîi. avantage m. * don m. an. f. H. 
 
 obscured by great defects. They were both incUned 
 
 unpen obscurci de défaut m. Vun et Va^ttre enclin 
 
 to idleness, and liable to fits of sullenness and ill humor 
 
 art. paresse f sujets des accès bouderie f. de * h.umeuv 
 
 when they were contradicted. Faults are diseases of the soul, 
 
 lorsque H. contredit, art. Défaut des maladies aine, 
 
 2the ^c.\ne '(of which) is the work of time. In (good dispositions), 
 
 gtiérisoîi f. dont ouvrage art. m. les aines bien nées 
 
 it is generally the fruit of the developement of reason and 
 
 elle d^ ordinaire m. développement m. art. de 
 
 the desire of pleasing. Though their parents ^were •''persuaded ' (of this), 
 
 m. A. Quoique S. en 
 
 they employed, to hasten it, an expedient which succeeded. If 
 employer J. pour hâter la, moyen m. leïir réussir. * 
 
 2they 'were satisfied with them, contentment and joy were painted 
 H. content de art. satisfaction f. art. f. H. peint 
 
 in their countenances ; if dissatisfied, they did not 
 
 sur figure f. * en étaient-ils mécontent, * les 
 
 scold, but they received them with a ^sorrowful 'air, a ^dejected 
 gronder H. H. triste regard, abattu 
 
 'countenance, and every sign of chagrin and trouble. 
 
 maintien^ tous art. signe m. pî. art. m. de art. doideur. 
 
 Louisa and Charles were naturally kind and feeling ; they could 
 
 naturellement bon sejisible ; jie pouvaient 
 
 not long support the idea of having afflicted "^swch -"tender 
 
 long-temps résister à idée A. affligé des si tendre 
 
 'parents. They felt their error, burst into tears, and asked pardon. 
 
 H. faute Î. fondreH. larme, H. m. 
 
 2A11 ^was 'immediately "^forgotten, and satisfaction (again smiled) 
 
 H. aïissitôt oublié, art. contentement m. renaître H. 
 
 around. It was by this means that these amiable children ^soon 
 
 autour d'eux. Ce fut moyen que bientôt 
 
 'became models of dociUty, complaisance, and application. 
 
 dtveniri. des modèle m. de de 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS 
 
 Of the Place of Personal Pronouns. — See page 61. 
 
 348. There is no difficulty in placing personal pronouns, when they 
 act as subjects ; the person who speaks always names himself last, and 
 the person addressed is generally named first 
 
132 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Vous et moi, nous irons à la cam- You and I will go into the coun- 
 
 pagne, try. 
 
 JVous irons ce soir à la promenade, We will take a walk this evening, 
 
 vous, votre frère, et moi, you, your brother, and I. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 My sister and I were walking by the last rays of the ^setting 
 nous H. à rayons m. couchant 
 
 'sun, and we were saying, what a mild splendor does ^it ^still 'spread 
 
 disions, éclat m. pas ne répand 
 
 over all nature ! In the long ^^i^ter 'evenings, my father, my 
 
 art. de h.iver soirée f. 
 
 brothers, and I (used to spend) two hours in the library, and 
 
 nous passer H. bibliothèque f. nous 
 
 to read there', (in order to) (unbend our minds) from the ^serious 'studies 
 
 * lisions y, pour nous se délasser 
 
 of the day, those ^amiable 'poets who interest most the heart, by the charms 
 
 le plus 
 of a ^lively 'imagination, and make us love truth, by disguising it under 
 
 riant art. en déguiser 
 
 the mask of an ^ingenious 'fiction. You and your friend shall accompany 
 trait m.Tpl. f. accompagner 
 
 me to the museum, where we shall study nature in her three kingdoms. 
 musée m. où règne m. 
 
 349. Rule. The pronouns il and ils always represent a substantive 
 masculine — il, if it be singular and ils, if it be plural ; and elle and elles, 
 on the contrary, represent a substantive feminine — elle, if it be singular, 
 and elles, if plural. 
 
 350. Thus, in speaking of the rose, we should say, elle a un parfum 
 exguis, aussi est-elle la fleur la plus 'recherchée, it has an exquisite fra- 
 grance, and is indeed the choicest of flowers — because rose is feminine 
 and singular ; and. in speaking of several ladies, elles ont autant de mo- 
 destie que de beauté, d^esprit, et de grâce, they have as much modesty 
 as they have beauty, wit, and accomplishments — beeause dames is femi- 
 nine and plural. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 (Look at) that magnificent building ; it unites grace to beauty, 
 
 Regarder magnifique bâtiment va. réunir ntt. grâce f. art. ^. 
 
 and elegance to simplicity. Ignorance is jealous, presumptuous, 
 
 art. f. art. f. f. présomptueux 
 
 and vain ; it sees difiiculties in nothing, (is surprised) at nothing, 
 
 ne de f. à rien, ne s'étonner de 
 and stops at nothing. Let us gather these roses ; Heavens ! what 
 ne s'arrêter à cueillir Ciel ! quel 
 
 a sweet fragrance they exhale ! Never judge from appearances ; 
 
 * parfum exhaler ! sur art f. 
 they are often deceitful : the wise man examines them, and does not 
 
 * * fe 
 
 decide upon them till he has had time to fix his judgment 
 décider diaprée f. qice lorsque art. m. de^fixer 
 
SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 13r^ 
 
 351. With respect to pronouns, when used as a regimen, custom has 
 established the following rules : 
 
 352. Rule I. The pronouns ine, te, se, leur, le, la, les, y, and en, are 
 generally placed before verbs, as are no^ls, vous, and lui, when without a 
 preposition in French, whether they are or not in English. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 H me dit, he tells me. Je lui parle, I speak to him. 
 
 Je le voiSf I see him. J^t/ songerai, I will think of it. 
 
 Je les écoute, I hsten to them. J'en suis ravi, I am delighted at it. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 (As soon as) he had explained to us the maxims of Socrates, he 
 Dès que expliquer K. * So crate, 
 
 said, you see that it is not without reason (he is looked upon) as 
 J. ce - qtie on le regarde 
 
 truly wise. He was continually saying to me, Yet a little patience, 
 un vrai de 
 
 and you will disarm even envy itself. You have, no doubt, 
 désarmer * art. être, sans doute, 
 
 (some foundation) for reproaching him with his faults ; but is there 
 
 fondé à A. lui de * art. m. 
 
 (any man) on earth that is exempt (from them) 1 To please 
 quelqu''un art. q^d Q. en Pour 
 
 her, you must never flatter her. To abandon one's self to ^jnetaphy- 
 lui, des métaphy' 
 
 sical 'abstractions, is to plunge into an ^unfathomable 'abyss. 
 sique ce * se jeter sans fond abîme m. 
 
 353. Rule II. The pronouns moi, toi, soi, nous, vous, lui, eux, elle, 
 and elles, are placed after verbs, when they are preceded by a preposition, 
 in French, whether they are or not in English. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 C^la depend de moi. That depends on me. 
 
 Jt pense à toi, I think of thee. 
 
 On s'' occupe trop de soi. We are too attentive to ourselves 
 
 Que dites-vous d'eux ? What do you say of them 1 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 My father loved me so tenderly, that he thought of none but me, 
 H. penser H. à ne que 
 
 (was wholly taken up) with me, and saw none but me in the universe 
 ne s'' occuper H. que de H. 
 
 If you wish to obtain that favor, you must speak to him himself. It 
 
 de 
 depended on you to excel your rivals, but you would not. 
 
 H. de de Vemporter sur le vouloir G. 
 
 2Philip, ^father ''of s Alexander, '(being advised) to expel from 
 Philippe comme on conseillait à de chasser 
 
 his dominions a man who (had been speaking) ill of him, I shall take care 
 état m. parler I. se garder bien 
 
 not to do that, said he ; he would go and slander me every where. 
 * * * en, J. * médire de 
 
 M 
 
134 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 354. Rule III. In imperative phrases, when affirmative, moi, toi, nous, 
 vous, lid, leur, eux, elle, elles, le, la, les, y, and en are placed after verbs ; 
 but, with a negation, me, te, se, nous, vous, lui, leur, le, la, les, y, and 
 en are placed before verbs. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 AFFIRMATIVELT. 
 
 B'ltes-mox, Tell me. 
 
 JDonnez-men la moitié, Give me half of it. 
 
 Snngez-y sérieusement. Think of it seriously. 
 
 iîEOATIVELY. 
 
 JW" me elites pas, Do not tell me. 
 
 JVe m'en donnez point. Do not give me any. 
 
 A"î/ songez pas. Do not think of it 
 
 355. Rematik. If the pronouns me, te, ?noi, toi, intervene between an 
 imperative and an infinitive, me, te are used when the imperative is 
 without a regimen direct. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Venez me parler. Come and speak to me. 
 
 Va te faire cotffer. Go and get thy hair dressed. 
 
 356. But moi, toi are used if the imperative have a regimen direct. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Laissez-moi faire. Let me do it. 
 
 Fais-toi cotffer. Get thy hair dressed. 
 
 357. If moi, toi, when placed after the imperative, be followed by tho 
 pronoun en, they are changed into me, te. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Donnez-m^en, Give me some. Retourtie-fen, Go back. 
 
 358. When there are two imperatives joined together by the conjunc- 
 tions et, oîi, it is most elegant to place the second pronoun before the verb. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 PolissezAc sa7is cesse etlerepolissez, Polish and repolish it continually 
 GiirJez-\(i% on les renvoyez. Keep them or send them back. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 Listen to me ; do not condemn me without a hearing. Complain ; 
 écouter * * m^ écouter A. se plaindre ; 
 
 ihou hast just cause of complaint: however, do not complain too 
 un sujet plainte : 
 
 bitterly of ttie injustice of mankind. Give some. Do not give any. 
 amèrement art. Aora/nepl. eii. en. 
 
 Think (of it). Do not think of it. Repeat to them continually, that, 
 
 y 
 
 without honesty, one can never succeed in the world. Do not repeat to 
 
 on 
 them continually the same things. Acknowledge him as your master, 
 
 Reconnaître pour 
 
 aiid obey him. Tread upon that spider, and kill it. 
 lui. Marcher araignée f. écraser 
 
SYNTAX OF TTJE PRONOUNS. 135 
 
 359. Rule IV. When several pronouns accompany a verb, 7ne, te, se, 
 no7is, vous, must be placed first; le, la, les, before hii, leur ; and y before 
 en, which is always the last. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Prêtez-moi ce livre ; je vous le Lend me that book ; I will return it 
 
 rendrai demain ; si vous me le to you to-morrow ; if you refuse 
 
 refusez, je saurai m'en passer, me, I can make shift without it. 
 
 Aiirez-vous la force de le leur Will you have resolution enough to 
 
 dire ? mention it to them ? 
 
 // 7t'a pas voulu vous y mener, He would not take you there. 
 
 Je vous y en porterai, I will bring you some there. 
 
 360. ExcEPïioîf. In an imperative sentence, when affirmative, le. la, 
 les, are always placed first ; as, donne z-le-moi, give it me ; offrez-la-lui, 
 offer it to him ; conduisez-les-y, conduct them thither : and moi is placed 
 after y ; as, menez-y-7noi, carry me thither : but nous will precede y ; as, 
 menez-nous-y, take us thither. 
 
 361. Remark. The word même is sometimes added to the pronouns 
 moi, toi, soi, nous, vous, eux, lui, elle, elles, to specify the person or thing 
 spoken of. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Ils se sont perdus eux-mêmes. They have ruined themselves. 
 
 Le inonde estime bien des choses The world prizes many things whichj 
 gui, en elles-mêmes, sont fort in themselves, are worthless. 
 méprisables, 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 You wish to make a present to your sister. (There is) a beautiful 
 
 vouloir * Voilà 
 
 fan ; you should present her with it. (How many) people are there 
 éventail m. devoir N. offrir lui * Que de gens * * 
 
 (destitute of) merit and without occupation, (who would be mere nothings) 
 
 sans . ne tenir N. à rien 
 
 in society, did not gaming introduce them (into it). I shall speak 
 
 art. si art. jeu m. introduire H. y. 
 
 to them (about it), and give you a ^faithful 'account of it. It is cer- 
 eal je rendre exact compte m. 
 tain that old Géronte has refused his daughter to Valère : but because 
 
 art. 
 he does not give her to him, it does not follow that he will give her to you. 
 
 s*ensidvre 
 
 OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 362. The relative pronouns are qui, que, dont, lequel, &c. — See page 69. 
 
 363. Rule I. Qui, when a relative, is always of the number, gender, 
 and person of its antecedent. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 J[ïoi qui suis so?ifls, I who am his son. 
 
 Toi qui es si jeune. Thou who art so young. 
 
 V enfant qrii joue, The child who plays. 
 
 Aoîis qui étudions. We who study. 
 
 Vous qui riez, You who laugh. 
 
 Les livres qui instruisent j The books which insurucu 
 
136 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 364. In the first example, qui is singular and of the first person, because 
 the pronoun moi is in the singular and of the first person. In the second, 
 it is singular and of the second person, for a similar reason, &c. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 I, who did not suspect (so much) falsehood, cunning, and 
 
 soupçoîiner H. tajit de fausseté f. de rnse f. de 
 
 perfidy, in a man whom I loved, blindly followed his counsels. 
 
 f. H. aveuglément je suivre 1. coriseil m. 
 
 Thou, who art candor and innocence itself, trust not too lightly. 
 
 art. f. art. f. même, te confie légèrement. 
 
 The great empire of the Egyptians, which was, (as it were), detached 
 
 m. Egyptien, J. comme, détaché 
 
 from all others, was not of long duration. We who know the 
 
 art. J. durée f. connaître 
 
 value of time ought to make a good use (of it), instead 
 
 prixra. art. nous devoir F.* emploi m. en, au lieu 
 
 of wasting it in idleness and frivolity. What ! is it you, my 
 
 perdre A. dujis art. oisiveté f. art. inutilité f. Quoi ! ce 
 daughter, who (would wish) that I (should love) you lessl The 
 
 vouloir N.' que S. 
 
 greatest men, who were the ornament and glory of Greece, Homer, 
 G. ornement art. f. art. Grèce L Homère, 
 
 Pythagoras, Plato, even Lycurgus and Solon, went to learn 
 Pythagore, Platon, même Lycurgue Solon, J. * apprendre 
 
 wisdom in Egypt. 
 an. sagesse f. en Egypte. 
 
 365. Rule II. Que, when a relative, is of the number and gender 
 of its antecedent. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 C^est moi qxie fon demande, It is I whom they ask for. 
 
 C^est toi qxûon appelle. It is thou whom they call. 
 
 La femme qxte je vois si bien parée. The woman whom I see so well 
 
 dressed. 
 C^est nous qtce vous offensez, It is we whom you offend. 
 
 C'est vous que je cherche. It is you I am seeking. 
 
 Les dames que vous voyez, The ladies whom you see. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 I, whom temptation surrounded on every side, fell 
 
 zxi. séduction Î. e?ivironner H. de tout part \.^\. je tombai 
 mlo the snare. It is thou whom the 2public 'voice calls to that 
 dans piégera.. Ce f. appeler 
 
 employ. A power which terror and force have founded, 
 place f. puissance f. art. f. art. f. fondé £ 
 
 cannot be of long duration. [t is we whom they persecute with 
 ne peut durée f. Von poursuit avec une 
 
 2unexampled 'rage. You, whom (every body) respects, hasten to 
 sayis exempAe fureur f. tout le monde respecter, se hâter de 
 
 (come forward). (Everything) in the universe alters and perishes, 
 
 paraître. Tout dans univers m. s'altérer périr ; 
 
 but the writings which genius has dictated shall be immortal. 
 écrit m, axi.^géniem, dicté m. v^. immortel. 
 
I 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 137 
 
 366. Dont sometimes represents dequi, duquel, de laquelle, desqueln, 
 desquelles, and even de quoi. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Vhomme dont vous parlez est The man of whom you aie speak- 
 
 parti, ing is gone. 
 
 La tour dont nous apercevons les The tower whose battlements we 
 
 créneaux doit être très-élevée, perceive must be very high. 
 
 Ce dont je vous ai parlé l'autre What I was speaking to you of ttie 
 
 Jour n'a pas réussi, other day did not succeed. 
 
 367. Qui, que, and do?it may equally apply to persons and thmgs ; 
 but qui, preceded by a preposition, can never apply to things : in this 
 case, lequel, duquel, aicquel, &c. must be used. 
 
 368. Lequel, laquelle, &c. apply both to persons and things ; but 
 qtioi applies only to things. 
 
 369. The adverb où is likewise employed as a relative pronoun, foi 
 dans leqîiel, auquel, dans laquelle, &c. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Voilà le but où il tend. That is the object he has in view. 
 
 Ce sont des affaires, où je suis Those are afiairs with which I am 
 embarrassé, perplexed. 
 
 370. Remark. Où admits the pi-epositions de and par, 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Voilà une chose d'où dépend le That is an affair on which the 
 bonheur public, public happiness depends. 
 
 Tels sont les lieux par où il a These are the places through 
 passé, which he passed. 
 
 EXERCISE, 
 Persons of ^ordinary 'condition have not the same need of 
 art. 'Personne f. commun f. même besoin m 
 
 being cautioned against the dangers to which elevation and 
 
 A. précautionné f. pi. contre écueil m. art. f. 
 
 authority expose those who are destined to govern man- 
 
 art, autorité f. exposer cetix destiné m. gouverner art. horn- 
 
 kind. The protection on which he relied has been too weak. 
 me pi. f. _ sur compter H. faible. 
 
 That after which a true philosopher sighs most ardently, is 
 
 Ce après vrai philosophe m. soujnrer m't. plus ardemment, 
 
 to spread that sentiment of ^uni versai 'benevolence which should 
 de répandre m. universel bienveillance f. devrait 
 
 unite and (bring together) all men. These are conditions 
 umr rapprocher art. Ce sont de 
 
 without which the thing would not have been concluded. Nature, of 
 
 eans fuit f. art. f. 
 
 whose Sgecrets 'we -(are ignorant), will be always 'a ^source *of 
 
 art. m. ignorer f, 
 
 ^conjecture 'to ^mankind. That of which we complain most 
 
 L ph pour art. homme pi. Ce se plaindre 
 
 M 2 
 
138 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 bitterly is not always what affects us the most. The only 
 amèrement ce qui affecter seul 
 
 moments in which his soul -still 'expands to pleasure, are 
 
 m. pendant encore s'ouvrir art. 
 
 ihose which he devotes to study. The mountains from whence 
 ceux consacrer art. étude f. f. où 
 
 2gold '(is extracted) are not in general fruitful. The different 
 art. or on tire * en infertile. 
 
 countries through which he has passed have furnished his pencil 
 pays m. par passé fourni à pinceau m. 
 
 with -romantic ^and ''picturesque 'scenes. 
 
 de art. romantique pittoresque 
 
 OF PRONOUNS ABSOLUTE. 
 
 JSee page 112 — The pronouns absolute qui, que, quoi, quel, lequel. 
 
 371. Qifî signifies quel homme, what man ; quelle personne, what person. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Qui vous a dit cela ? Who told you that ? 
 
 Tignore qui a fait cela, I don't know who did that. 
 
 372. Que signifies quelle chose, what thing. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Que dit-on ? What do they say ? 
 
 Je tie sais qu'en pe7iser, I don't know what to think of it, 
 
 373. Quoi has the signification of que. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 „9 quoi s' oc cup e-t- 071 P What are they engaged in Î 
 
 Dites-moi en quoi je puis vous servir, Tell me how I can serve you. 
 
 374. Remare. If que or quoi be followed by an adjective, it requires 
 the preposition de before that adjective. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Que dit-on de nouveau ? What news is there 1 
 
 Quoi de plus instructif et de plus What is more instructive and 
 amusant ? amusing ] 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 Who will not agree that life has few real pleasures and 
 
 convenir art. f. peu de vrai 
 
 many ^(Ji-eadful 'pains 1 (Some one) entered secretly ; guess 
 beaucoup d\iffreux peine Ï. On entra secrètement; deviner 
 
 who it was. What have you read in that book that can have excited 
 * * m. qui pxiisse porté 
 
 in your soul emotion and enthusiasm 1 I know not what to 
 
 art. f. art. enthousiasme m. savoir * 
 
 think (of it) At what did you find them occupied 1 There is in 
 
 e?i. avez trouvés occupé m. pi. 
 
 that discourse I know not what, which appears to me designing. What 
 discours m. savoir sembler * insidieux, « 
 
SyNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 139 
 
 have you remarked good, beautiful, and sublime in Homer 1 What more 
 
 remarqué Homère ? 
 
 brilliant, and, at the same time, more false than the expressions of a 
 man who has (a great deal) of wit, but wants judgment \ 
 
 beaucoup esprit, qui manque de jugement ? 
 
 375. In interrogations, or after a verb, quel is used to ask the name 
 or qualities of a person or thing. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Quel homme est-ce ? What man is it 1 
 
 Quel temps fait-il ? What weather is it î 
 
 Je îie sais quel homme c'est, I don't know what man it is. 
 
 II sait quel parti prendre, He knows what steps to pursue. 
 
 376. The adverb où, it has been already seen, is employed as a relative 
 pronoun ; it is likewise used as a kind of absolute pronoun. 
 
 377. Où represents en quel endroit, in what place, or à quoi, to what. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Où allez-vous P Where are you going to 1 
 
 Où cela nous mtnera-t-il ? Where will that take us to 1 [me 
 
 J'ignore où Von me conduit, I don't know whither they are taking 
 
 11 n'a pas prévu où cette conduite He did not foresee where such a con- 
 le mènerait, duct would lead him to. 
 
 378. Remauk I. When où is preceded by the preposition de, it marks 
 the place or cause spoken of. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 D'où vient-il? Where does he come from ? 
 
 D'où sa haîne procède-t-elle ? Whence proceeds his hatred Î 
 
 Voilà d'où il vient. It was there he came from. 
 
 Le mal me vient d'où j'attendais The evil proceeds from that quarter 
 mon remède, whence I had expected a remedy. 
 
 379. Remark IL Où, preceded by the preposition par, signifies 
 through wTiat place, or by what means. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Par où avez-vous passé ? Which way did you come ? 
 
 Par où me tirerai-je d'affaire P Which way shall I extricate myself? 
 Voilà par où j'ai passé. This is the way I came. 
 
 Te ne sais par où je me tirerai I don't know which way I shall ex* 
 d'affaire, tricate myself. 
 
 380. By the manner in which these pronouns are employed, it will bo 
 seen they are only interrogative when at the beginning of a sentence, and 
 consequently the most proper name for them is that oï pronouns absolute 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 What grace, wjiat delicacy, what harmony, what coloring, what 
 grâce f. délicatesse f. f. coloris m. 
 
 beautiful Unes in Racine! What, sthen, 'must have been that 
 
 vers m, done doit 
 
140 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 ^extraordinary 'man, to whom seven cities contested the glory of 
 
 se sont disputé f. 
 
 having given birth 1 He does not know what model to follow. 
 avoir K, doimé art. Jour m. savoir modèle m,* suivre, 
 
 I have told you what man it is. Which of those ladies do you 
 ce f. dames f. 
 
 think the most amiable ] Choose which ''of ^those ^two ''pictures 
 t7 Oliver f. Choisir m. tableau m. 
 
 'you mke 'best. Where am 11 He knows not where 
 
 aimer art. mieux. Oà en savoir 
 
 he is. He is gone, I don't know whither. (Whence) does he get 
 
 en allé, ne savoir D'où * lui vient 
 
 that pride 1 (It is) from where he derives his origin. (Which way) 
 
 orgueilm. Voilà de tirer origine. Par où 
 
 did you come ? (That is) (the road) I came. 
 
 etes-vous arrive ? Voilà par où venir G. 
 
 OF DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.— Page 113. 
 
 381. Ce, cette, ces, are often joined to the adverbs of place — ci, here, 
 and là, there — in order to point out in a more precise manner the thing 
 spoken of; the demonstrative pronoun is then placed before the substan- 
 tive, and ci and ià after it. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Ce livre-cî, this book. Cet homme-là, that man. 
 
 Cette fieur-ci, this flower. Ces femmes-là, those women. 
 
 3S2. Celui, celle, ceux, celles, are followed by the pre})osition de, when 
 placed before a substantive, and by a pronoun relative when placed before 
 a verb. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Les muladies de Vame sont plus The disorders of the mind are more 
 
 dangereuses que celles du corps, dangerous than those of the body. 
 V homme dont je vous ai parlé, The man of whom I spoke to you is 
 
 est celui que vous voyez, he whom you see. 
 
 De toutes les choses du inonde. Of all the things in the'v^orld, it is 
 
 c'est celle que f aime le moins, that which I like least. 
 
 383. Remark. The pronouns cehd, celle, ceux, celles, when followed 
 by a pronoun relative, are expressed in English by the personal pronouns 
 \e, she, they, or by that xvhich, those -which, such as, &c. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 The pleasures of the wise resemble in nothing those of a ^dissipated 
 ressembler à dissipé 
 
 'man. He that suffers himself to (be ruled) by his passions, must 
 se laisse * dominer A. doit 
 
 renounce happiness. This stulf will become you wonderfully. 
 
 reiioncer à art. bonheiir m. étoffe-ci Î. siéra à merveille. 
 
 That action is worthy of blame. This scene is calculated to 
 f. là blâme. f. ci faite pour 
 
 interest all men, but that cannot succeed. 
 rJéresser art. là ne saurait réussir 
 
SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 141 
 
 384. Celui-ci and celui-là adopt the gender and number of the sub- 
 stantives whose place they supply. When opposed to each other, celui- 
 ci marks the nearest object, and celui-la the remotest. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Celui-ci plaît, mais celui-là captive, This pleases, but that captivates. 
 
 385. Ci and là coalesce with ce, and form two other demonstrative 
 pronouns, ceci and cela — the first of which signifies cette chose- ci, tliis 
 object ; the second, cette chose-là, that object. 
 
 386. They may be used singly ; but when they are opposed to each 
 other, ceci expresses the nearest object and cela the remotest. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 Je n^ aime point ceci, donnez-moi cela, I don't like this, give rae that, 
 
 387. Remark. When cela is alone, and not opposed to the pronoun 
 ■:eci, it refers, like this last, to an object pointed to. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Qwe dites-vons de cela ? What do you say of thati 
 
 Cela est fort beau, That is very handsome. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 (Here are) certainly two charming prospects; this has some- 
 Voilà certai7iement beaii perspective f. quelque 
 
 thing more cheerful, but many people think that more 
 
 chose de riant, bien de art. personne f. pi. trouver 
 
 striking and more majestic. The body perishes, the soul is 
 imposant majestueux. m. périr, f. 
 
 immortal; yet all our cares are for that, while we neglect 
 
 immortel; cependant soin tandis que négliger 
 
 this. What means this ? That is true. It is not that. This 
 
 veut dire Ce 
 
 is low and mean, but that is grand and sublime. 
 bas rampant, 
 
 OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 
 
 FIRST CLASS. 
 
 Of those that are never joined to a Substantive. — Page 114. 
 
 388. Quelqii'un, quelqu'une, means un, ime, one. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 A''ous attendons des hommes, il en We expect men, some one will 
 
 viendra quelqu^un, come. 
 
 Plusieurs femmes m^ 07it promis de Several women have promised mo to 
 
 venir, il en viendra quelqu'une, come, some one of them will come. 
 
 389. Quelquhin, quelqu'une, taken absolutely and substantively, is ol 
 both genders, and means une personne, a person, some one, any one. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 J'attends ici quelqu'un, I wait here for somebody. 
 
142 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 390. Quelques-uns, guelqiies-mies, signifies some people, some ; plip- 
 sieurs dans un plus grand nombre, several out of a great liumber. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Quelques-'.ms assurent. Some people affirm. 
 
 Entre les 7i07ivelles qii'il a débitées. Among the reports he has circu- 
 il y en a qxielqiies-unes de vraies, lated, several are true. 
 
 391. Quiconqtie, whoever, signifies quelque personne que ce soit, qui 
 que ce soit, any person whatever. It takes no plural, and is never used 
 but of persons. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 Ce discours s'adresse à quiconque This speech is addressed to who- 
 est coupable, ever is guilty. 
 
 392. Chacun, chacune, every one, is used either distributively or col- 
 lectively. It has no plural. 
 
 393. Distributively, it means chaque personne, chaque chose, each 
 person or thing. It is then used likewise in the feminine, and requires 
 the preposition de after it. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Chacun de nous vit à sa mode, Each of us lives as he pleases. 
 
 Voyez sf'parément chacune de ces Look at each of these medals 
 médailles, separately. 
 
 394. Collectively, it signifies toute personne, every person. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Chacun a ses défauts, Every body has his faults. 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 
 
 2Can 'any one (be still ignorant) that it is from the earliest 
 
 Pourrait-il ignorer encore ce dès tendre 
 
 hifancy we ought to form the mind, the heart, and the taste Î Will 
 
 enfance f. on doit * former 
 
 not some one of these ladies be of the party ? Some people like to read 
 
 f. partie f. aimer 
 
 (every thing new). (There are) beautiful pictures ; I could wish 
 toutes les nouveautés. Voilà de superbe tableau m. vuxdoir en 
 
 to buy some. Whoever has studied the principles of an art, knows that 
 * acheter principes m. savoir 
 
 it (is only) (by length of time) and by deep reflection, that he can 
 ce n^est que à la longue de profond réflexion f. 
 
 succeed in making it his own. AU the ladies at the ball were very fine- 
 réussir se rendre le * propre. balm. H. superhe- 
 
 ly dressed, and each differently. Every one should, for 
 
 mint paré, avait une parure différente. devrait, pour 
 
 (the sake of ) his own happiness, listen only to the voice of reason 
 * propre m. n^ écouter que * voix f. art. raison f 
 
 and of truth. • AVhat is the price of each of these medals ? 
 art. vérité f. prix m. f. médaille f 
 
 395. autrui means Les autres personnes, other people : it only applies 
 to persons, is never accompanied by an adjective, has no plural, and is 
 never used in a sentence without being preceded by a preposition. 
 
SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 143 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 La charité se réjouit du bonheur Charity rejoices in the happiness 
 iV autrui, of others. 
 
 396. Personne, which is always masculine and singular, means nul, 
 qui que ce soit, no one, nobody, whosoever. In this sense, it is preceded 
 or followed by the negative ne, which is placed difler personne when this 
 word stands before the verb, and before the verb when personne stands 
 after. The same observation applies to rien, 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 E ne faut nuire à persenne, We must injure nobody. 
 
 Personne n^est assuré de vivre Nobody is certain of living till to- 
 jusqu^au lendemain, morrow. 
 
 397. Remark L The negative is sometimes understood ; as, y a-t-it 
 quelqu\in ici ? is there any body here 1 personne, nobody. Personne 
 stands for il n^y a personne, there is nobody here. 
 
 398. Remark IL In interrogative phrases without negation, or in 
 those expressing doubt, personne signifies quelqtCun, any body. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Personne oserait-il nier ? Would any body dare deny ? 
 
 Je doute que personne soit assez I doubt whether any body be bold 
 hardi, enough. 
 
 399. Remark III. When personne is placed in the second member 
 of a comparison, it means any body. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Cette place lui convient mieux That place suits him better thar 
 qii'à personne, any body. 
 
 400. Rien, nothing, which is masculine and singular, is used with cr 
 without a negation. When with a negation, it means nulle chose, nothing. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 77 ne s'attache a rien de solide. He applies himself to nothing axed. 
 
 401. When used without a negation it means quelque chose, something. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 Je doute que rien soit plus propre I doubt whether any thing be more 
 à faire imp'ression que, &c. suited to make an impression 
 
 than, &c. 
 
 402. The negation is sometimes understood — que vous a coûté cela.' 
 rie?i, how much did you pay for that ! nothing. 
 
 403. It always requires the preposition de before the adjective or parti* 
 cjple that follows it, and then the verb is understood, as is likewise the 
 negation ; as, rieîi de beau que le vrai, nothing is noble but truth. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 To most men, the misfortunes of others are but a 
 
 Potir la plupart de art. mal m. ne * 
 
 dream. Do not to others what you would not wish (to be done to you") 
 Bongem. T'Ojihir qu\n vous fit. 
 
144 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. ' 
 
 No one knows whether he deserves love or hatred. An egotist 
 savoir si est aigne de de egoiste 
 
 loves nobody, not even his own children ; in the whole universe, he 
 
 pas mtme propre dans * mdvers, 
 
 sees no one but himself. He is, more than (any body), worthy of the 
 voit que hn seul. digne 
 
 confidence (with which) the king honors him. I doubt whether any 
 confiance Ï. dont honorer que 
 
 one (ever painted) nature, in its amiable simplicity, better than 
 
 ait jamais peint art. f. f. 
 
 the sentimental Gessner. Has ^any body 'called 'on me this 
 
 sensible * est-il venu chez 
 
 morning 1 Nobody. There was nothing but what was great 
 matin m. H. que "* de * grand 
 
 in the designs and works of the Egyptians. I doubt 
 
 da7i3 dessein m. art. ouvrage m. Hgyptiens. 
 
 whether there is any thing better calculated to exalt the soul than the 
 
 que Q. plus propre 
 
 contemplation of the wonders of nature. 
 merveille f. art. f. 
 
 OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 
 
 SECOND CLASS. 
 
 Of those which are always joined to a Substantive. — P. 116. 
 
 404. Quelque, some, signifies «n, une, entre plusiexirs, one out of 
 several ; it is of both genders, and takes the number of the substantive. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Adressez-vous à quelque autre personne, Apply to somebody else. 
 
 405. Chaque, each, every, which is of both genders, has no plural. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 Chaque pays a ses coutumes. Each country has its customs. 
 
 406. Quelconque, aucun, any, quel que ce soit, whatever it be ; qvei 
 qitil soit, whoever he be, is of both genders, and is always placed after a 
 substantive ; when used with a negative it is always singular. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 12 ne veut se soumettre à auctme He will submit to no authority 
 autorité quelconque, whatever. 
 
 407 Certain signifies quelque, certain, some. In this sense it is used 
 alike of persons and things ; but it is always placed before the substantive. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 /''ai ouï dire a certain homme, à I have heard some man say. 
 un certain homme, 
 
 408. Un, une, a or an, when used indeterminately for quelque, certain, 
 some person or some thing, takes the gender of the substantive to which 
 Lt is joined 
 
• SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 145- 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 J* ai vu un homme qui courait, I saw a man who was running. 
 
 Je me suis promené dans une I walked in a large fine meadow. 
 grande et belle prairie^ 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE SECOND CLASS. 
 Some ^enlightened 'people among the Egyptians preserved the 
 éclairé esprit m. pi. Egyptiens conserver H. 
 
 idea of a first being, whose ^attributes 'they ^represented under 
 idée êtrcy art. attribut m. représenter H. 
 
 various symbols; (this is proved by the following) inscription 
 différent symbole m. c'est ce que prouve cette f. 
 
 upon a temple : — " I am all that has been, is, and shall be : ^no ^mortal 
 de m. ce qui mortel 
 
 'ever removed the veil that covers me." Every nation has 2 (in its turn) 
 lever G. voile m. f. à son tour 
 
 'shone on the theatre o^the world. There is no reason whatever that 
 brillé m. raison f. 
 
 can bring him to it. Some figures appear monstrous and deformed, 
 puisse déterminer f. monstrueux 
 
 considered separately or too near ; but if (they are put) in their proper 
 
 f. pi. séparément de près ; on les met * 
 
 light and place, the true point of view restores their beauty 
 
 jour à leur m. vue m. leur rendre * art. f. 
 
 and grace. Yesterday I saw a lady ^remarkably 'beautiful. 
 
 art. f. J. d'une rare beauté. 
 
 \ 
 
 OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 
 
 THIRD CLASS. 
 
 Of those which are sometimes joined to a Substantive and 
 sometimes not. — Page 117. 
 
 409. JSTul, m. nulle, f. and pas un, m. pas une, f., not any, not one, no 
 one, are employed either alone or in conjunction with a substantive. 
 They are accompanied by the negation, have no plural, and may be fol 
 lowed by the preposition de. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 JVw/ de tous ceux qui y ont été Not one of those who went there 
 
 n'en est revenu, has returned. 
 
 P^s un ne croit cette nouvelle. Not one believes that intelligence. 
 
 Je rHen ai nulle connaissance, I have no knowledge of it. 
 
 7Z n'y a pas une seule personne There is not a single person that 
 
 qui le croie, believes it. 
 
 410. Aucun, m. aucune, f., signifies mil, no, not any, none, when 
 accompanied by a negation, and may be followed by the preposition de. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Vous n'avez aucun moyen de réussir You have no means of succeeding 
 dans cette affaire, - m that affair. 
 
 N 
 
146 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS, 
 
 411. This pronoun is seldom employed in the plural, except before 
 substantives which, in some particular sense, are better employed in the 
 plural. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 E n a fait aucunes dispositions, He has made no? dispositions. 
 
 412. Remahk. Jlucun, m. aucune f.. any, any one, may be employed 
 without a negation in interrogative sentences, or those which express 
 doubt or exclusion. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Aucun homme fut-il jamais plus Was ever any man more success- 
 
 heureux ? ful ] 
 
 On chute qu^ aucune de ces affaires They doubt whether any of those 
 
 réussisse, affairs will succeed. 
 
 Le plus beau morceau d'éloquence The finest piece of eloquence that 
 
 qu^il y ait dans a^icime langue, exists in any language. 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE THIRD CLASS. 
 
 No one likes (to see himself) as he is. No expression, no truth of 
 se voir tel que f. f. 
 
 design and coloring, no strokes of genius in that great work. He is 
 dessein de coloris, trait ozivragem. 
 
 as learned as any one. Not one of these engravings announces any 
 aussi sava7it que gravure f. annoncer un 
 
 great skill. None of his works will descend to posterity. He is so 
 
 talent m. passer art. f. 
 
 ignorant, and at the same time so obstinate, that he will not 
 
 en * même temps obstiné, 
 
 (be convinced) by any reasoning. Did any man ever attain 
 
 se rendre à raisonnement va. jamais parveinr i. 
 
 to such a pitch of glory ! I doubt whether there be, in any science, 
 
 ce * comble m. que Q. f. 
 
 a ^nioro ^evident 'principle. 
 phis lumineux principe m. 
 
 413. Autre, other, expresses a difference between two objects, or 
 between one and several ; as, quelle autre chose souhaitez-votis de moi ? 
 what else do you wish of me 1 
 
 414. Remark. Autre is sometimes used to express a person but inde- 
 terminate ; as, j^aiine 7nieux que vous Vappre7iiez de tout autre que de 
 moi, I'had rather you learn it of any other person than of me. 
 
 41 Ù. Un is sometimes opposed to autre, in which case these two words 
 are preceded by the article, supply the place of the substantives to which 
 they relate, adopt their gender and number, and form the pronouns Ihm 
 Vautre, Vune Vautre, les uns les autres, les unes les autres, Vun et Vautre^ 
 and ni Vun ni Vautre. 
 
 4 1 6. Vun Vautre, each other, one another, applies both to persons and 
 things : it takes both gender and number, and requires the article before 
 the two words of which it is composed. If there be any preposition, it 
 must be placed before the last. When these two words are used in con- 
 junction, they express a reciprocal relation between several persons or 
 things. 
 
SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. Î47 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Ufaut se secourir Ûnn Cautre, We ought to assist each other. 
 
 417. When used separately, they denote a difference. 
 EXAMPLE. 
 Les passions s'entendent les unes Our passions have a relation with 
 avecles autres ; si V on se laisse each other; if we indulge some, 
 
 aller aux tines, on attire bientôt the others will soon follow. 
 
 les autres, 
 
 , 418. Remark. In the latter case Vun is used for the person or thing 
 first mentioned, and Vautre for the person or thing last spoken of. 
 
 419. Vun et Vautre, m., Vune et Vautre, f., both; these two words 
 mark union. They require the verb to be in the plural. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 Vune et Vautre sont bonnes. Both are good. 
 
 420. JVi Vun ni /'aw^re, neither ; these two words mark separation. 
 The verb ought to be put in the singular ; however, many writers put it 
 in the plural in French. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 JsTi Vun ni Vautre n^ ont fait leur devoir, Neither has done his duty, 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 Ask another. Would any other have been so 
 
 Demander à * aurait-il eu * assez 
 
 self-conceited as to think that his ^private 'opinion could counter- 
 d* amour-propre * pour penser pai^ticuUer f. put ■ ba- 
 
 balance the ^public 'sentiment 1 Reason and faith ^equally 
 
 lancer opinion f. art. Raison f. art. foi f. 
 
 'demonstrate that we were created for another life. They speak ill nf 
 démontrer créer G. f. mal 
 
 one another. The happiness of the people constitutes that of the prince , 
 
 m. faire m, 
 
 their true interests are connected with each other. Presumption 
 intérêt m, lié à pi. pi. aiti. Présomption f, 
 
 and pride ^easily 'insinuate themselves into the heart ; if we 
 
 art. orgueil se glisser * m. Von y 
 
 allow 2one the 'entrance, it is much to (be feared) that we shall 
 donne à f. * entrée, bien craindre on * 
 
 2soon '(abandon ourselves) to the other. Both relate the same 
 bientôt ne se livre rapporter 
 
 story, though neither believes it to be true. 
 
 fait m. ne penser que * soit 
 
 421. JMème, same, signifies qui n^ est pas autre, which is not different 
 It is of both genders, and takes the plural. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Cest le même homme. It is the same man. 
 
 La même personne. The same person. 
 
 Ce sont les mêmes raisons, They are the same reasons. 
 
 Ce poème est le même que celui This poem is the same that I was 
 dont je vous ai parlé, mentioning to you. 
 
148 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 422. Tel, va. telle, f. tels, m. pi. telles, f. pL, means pareil, semblable, 
 de même, such, like, similar. It takes both genders and both numbers. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Un tel projet ne saurait réussir, Such a scheme cannot succeed. 
 77 n*y a pas de tels animaux, de There are no such animals, no such 
 telles coutumes, customs. 
 
 423. When used alone, it either preserves its proper signification, or it 
 
 expresses a person indeterminately. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Vous ne sauriez me persuader You cannot persuade me of any such 
 
 rien de tel, thing. 
 
 Tel fait des libéralités, qui ne The same man is liberal in giving 
 
 paie pas ses dettes, who does not pay his debts. 
 
 424. Plusietirs, several, which is plural and of both genders, is used 
 alike of persons and of things. When united to a substantive, or relating 
 to it, it signifies an indeterminate number, without relation to another. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Plusieurs motifs Pont déterminé. Several reasons determined him. 
 Je crois cela pour plusieurs raisons, I believe that for several reasons. 
 
 425. But it is likewise used as a part of a greater number. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 Parmi un si grand nombre de gens, Out of so great a number of per- 
 il y en eut plusieurs qui s'y oppo- sons, several objected to it. 
 
 426. When plusieurs is employed absolutely as a substantive, it 
 always means pbisieurs personnes, several persons. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 Plusieurs aiment mieux mourir que Many would rather die than forfeit 
 de perdre leur réputation, their character. 
 
 427. Tout is used either alone or vdth a substantive. 
 
 428. When employed alone, it signifies toutes choses, all things ; toute 
 sorte de choses, every kind of things. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Tout nous abandonne au moment Every thing forsakes us at the mo- 
 de la mort} il ne nous reste que ment of death ; we retain nothing 
 nos bonnes œuvres, but our good works. 
 
 429. When \mited to a substantive, it is used either collectively or 
 
 distributively. 
 
 430. Considered collectively, tout signifies the totality of a thing, and 
 is then followed by the article. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Tout Vunivers, The whole imiverse. 
 
 Teua les corps célestee, All the celestial bodies. 
 
SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 149 
 
 431. Considered distributively, tout signifies chaque, each; in this 
 case, it is not accompanied by the article. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 Tout bien est désirable. Every good is desirable. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 Does he always maintain the same principles ? Yes, they are abso- 
 soutenir principe ? Oui, ce abio- 
 
 lutely the same. That general is the same that commanded ^jast 
 lument pi. H. art. de ■'nier 
 
 'year. ^guch 'a ^conduct is inexplicable. There are no such 
 année f. conduite f. de 
 
 customs in this country. I never heard (any thing) similar. 
 
 couttimes f. pays m. ai entendu dire rien de 
 
 The same man sows who often reaps nothing. 'I ^this ''morning 
 
 * * semer recueillir matin 
 
 ^received several letters. Among those manuscripts, there are several 
 G. lettre f. manuscrits, 
 
 much esteemed. Many, by endeavoring to injure others, 
 
 qu'on beaucoup estime. en s'efforcer de nuire à art. 
 
 injure themselves more than they think. All is in God aiid 
 se nuire à ne penser. en 
 
 God is in all. The whole course of his life has been distinguished 
 
 cours m. f. marqué 
 
 by ^generous 'actions. Every vice is odious. 
 des f. m. 
 
 OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 
 
 FOURTH CLASS. 
 
 Of those which are followed by que. — Page 118. 
 
 432. Qui, que, whoever, is only said of persons, and signifies quelque 
 personne que, whatever person ; it requires the verb following to be in 
 the subjunctive. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Qui que ce soit qui ait fait cela. Whoever has done that is a matt 
 
 c'est un habile homme, of talent. 
 
 Qui que je sois, Whoever I may be. 
 
 Qui qite c'ait été. Whoever it may have been. 
 
 Qui que c'eut été. Whoever it might have been. 
 
 Qui que ce pidsse être. Whoever it may be. 
 
 433. When qui que, followed by ce soit, is used with a negative, it 
 signifies aucune personne, nobody, no one ; as, je n'y trouve qui que ce 
 soit, I find nobody there. 
 
 434. Quoi que, whatever it be, is only used of things, and signifies 
 quelqiie chose que, whatever thing ; it requires also the verb following to 
 be in the subjunctive. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Quoi que ce soit qxCil fasse, ou Whatever he does or says, he is 
 
 qiCiX dise, on se défie de lui, distrusted. 
 
 Quoi que vous disiez, je le ferai, Whatever you may say, I will do it. 
 
 n2 
 
150 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 435. Remark. When quoi que, followed by ce soit, is used with a 
 uegation, it signifies micmie chose, not any thing. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Sans application, on ne peut ré- Without application, it is impossible 
 
 ussir en quoi que ce soit, to succeed in any thing whatever. 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE FOURTH CLASS. 
 Whoever heis told you so, he is mistaken. Passenger, whoever 
 le, se tromper G. Passant, 
 
 thou be, contemplate with ^j-ghgious 'veneration this monument erected 
 
 conteynpler un respect m. m. élevé 
 
 by gratitude; it is the tomb of adjust ^and 'benevolent 'man. 
 
 art. reconnaissance f. ce tombeau m. bienfaisant 
 
 How can he hope to be beloved who has regard for no one Î 
 Comment espérer de lui ne cVégards 
 
 Whatever he may do or say, he (will find it) very difficult to de- 
 quHl aura bien de la peine dé- 
 
 stroy prejudices so deeply rooted. A mind vain, presump- 
 
 truire des préjugé m. si profondé?nent enraciné. présomp- 
 
 tuous, and inconsistent, will never succeed in any thing whatever. 
 tueux, sans consistance, réussir 
 
 Whatever a ^frivolous 'world may think of you, never swerve 
 
 frivole monde priisse se détourner 
 
 from the path of virtue. 
 chemin m. art. f. 
 
 436. Qtiel que, m. quelle que, f. quels que, m. pi. quelles que f. pi., 
 signifies de quelque sorte, de quelque espèce que ce soit, of whatever sort 
 or kind it may be, when relating to things ; or, qui que ce soit, whoever 
 it may be, when relating to persons. It takes both gender and number 
 according to the person or thing it relates to, and requires the subjunctive. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Quelles que soient vos affaires. Whatever business you may have, 
 
 venez, come. 
 
 Je rCen excepte personne, quel I except nobody, whoever he may 
 
 qu^il soit, be. 
 
 437. Remakk. Lequel que, m. laquelle que, f. lesquels que, m. pi. 
 lesquelles que, f. pi., whosoever, whichever, is also used ; as, lequel des 
 trois que vous choisissiez, peu m^importe, whichever of the three yott 
 choose, I care little. 
 
 438. Quelque-que m. f. s. quelques-que m. f. pi., of both genders, when 
 united to a substantive, signifies qtiel que soit le, quelle que soit la, &c., 
 whatever be the, &c. It has both numbers, and requires the subjunctive. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Quelque raison qu^on lui apporte, Whatever reason is adduced, he 
 
 il iHen c^oit rien, believes nothing about it. 
 
 Quelques efforts que vous fassiez, Whatever attempts you may make^ 
 
 ruons ne réussirez point, you will never succeed. 
 
 439. When united to an adjective, it operates as an adverb, and signifies 
 à quelque point que, however great a degree ; it then does not take number. 
 
SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 161 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Quelque belle qu'elle puisse être, However beautiful she may be, she 
 
 elle ne doit pas être vaine, ought not to be vain. 
 
 Quelque puissans qu'ils soient, je However powerful they may be, 1 
 
 ne les crains point, am not afraid of them. 
 
 440 Tel que, such as, serves to mark a parity between objects by com- 
 parison. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 Cest un homme tel qu'il vous le faut. He is just such a man as you want. 
 
 44 L Tout — que signifies quoique, encore que, though, quelque, how- 
 ever. On this occasion, tout is considered as an adverb, and is employed 
 with adjectives of every kind, and even with some substantives. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Tout artificieux qu'ils sont, je Artful as they are, I doubt whether 
 
 doute que le public soit long- the public will be long their dupe. 
 
 temps leur dupe. 
 Toute femme qu'elle est, Woman as she is. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 Let ^the laws ^be '(what they may), we must always respect them 
 * loi f. Q. quel que respecter 
 
 Whatever efforts you make, I doubt whether you will succeed. All 
 m. Q. que * réussir Q, 
 
 men, however opposite they may be, agree on that point. The 
 art. oppose s'accorder m. 
 
 man who descends into himself only to discover his defects, and 
 rentrer en ne que pour y démêler m. 
 
 correct them, likes to see himself as he is. However surprising 
 se corriger en, surprenant 
 
 2that •''phenomenon 'may be, it is not against the order of nature 
 
 phénomène m. contre ordre m. art. 
 
 Children as they are, they behaved remarkably well. 
 se sont conduits fort 
 
 A GENERAL EXERCISE ON THE PRONOUNS 
 
 *THE «EVENING ^WALK. 
 
 du soir promenade f. 
 
 On a fine ^summer 'evening, my brother, my sister, and myself 
 Dans de soirée f. moi 
 
 (were walking) (by the side) of a wood (not far distant) 
 nous nous promenions le long bots m. qui n'est pas bien éloigné 
 
 from the castle which we inhabit. We (were contemplating) with 
 chateau m. habiter. contempler H. 
 
 rapture the ^jj^gjestic 'scenery which nature exhibits at the 
 transport majestueux scene f. art. déployer 
 
 approach of night, when we perceived at the foot of an ancient 
 approche Ï. divi. nuit ï. quand apercevoir i. à pied m. xieux 
 
 oak a boy of a '^vaost ^interesting 'countenance. His beauty, 
 chêne m. enfant art. intéressant art. figure t f. 
 
15^ SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 his air of ingenuousness and candor, his gracefulness struck us, and 
 
 ra. ingi'nidté de grâce pi. frapper J. 
 
 we approached him. What Î alone here, my boy ] said we ; 
 
 noiis approcher J. en. seul ici, enfant lui dîmes 
 
 whence art thou T Whence comest thou ] What art thou doing here 
 
 d'où fais 
 
 alone ? I am not alone, answered he, (smiling) ; I am not alone ; 
 
 rt pondre J. d^un air riant ; 
 but I was fatigued, and I (have seated myself) under the shade of this 
 H. fatigué s'asseoir G. à ombre f. 
 
 tree, while my mother is busy in gathering simples to 
 drbre m. taîidis cue occupé à cueillir des pour 
 
 give some relief to the pains which ^her ^aged ''father 
 
 apporter soulagemeîit va. douleur f. vieux 
 
 'sulfers. Ah ! (how many) troubles ^my ^good ''mamma ^has ! 
 souffrir, que de peine f. maman 
 
 How many troubles! Did you know them, there is not one of you 
 
 si connaître H. 
 
 that would not be touched with pity, and who could refuse the tribute 
 qui * S. pitié, lid S. un tribut 
 
 of your tears. We said to him, lovely child, thy ingenuousness, 
 
 * larme f. J. * aimable ta 
 
 candor, innocence, (every thing), interests us in thy misfortunes and 
 f. ton f. tout, intéresser à malheur 
 
 those of thy mother. Relate them to us ; whatever they be, fear not 
 à Raconter * 
 
 to afflict us. (Wo be) to whoever cannot feel for the 
 
 de affliger Jilalheur ne sait pas s'attendrir sur 
 
 misfortunes of others ! 2jje immediately related the history of his mother, 
 
 mal m. aussitôt J. 
 
 with an expression, an artlessness, a grace, altogether affecting. Our 
 
 f. naïveté f. f. tout-àfait touchant f. sing, 
 
 hearts felt the liveliest emotions ; tears (trickled down our cheeks); 
 
 éprouvera. vif f. itos couler J. 
 
 and we gave him what little money we had about us. (In the 
 
 lui le peu de argent que H. sur Ce- 
 
 mean time), the mother returned. (As soon as) he saw her, he 
 
 pendant revenir J. Dès-que apercevoir J. 
 
 exclaimed, (make haste), mamma; make haste: see what these good 
 s^ écrier J. accourir sing. sing. sing, ce que 
 
 Little folks have given me ; I have related to them thy misfortunes ; 
 
 gens f. 
 they have been affected (by them), and their sensibility (has not been 
 m. touché m. pi. en f. ne s'est pas 
 
 satisfied) with shedding tears) See, mamma, see what they have 
 borné f. à * des sing. sing, 
 
 given me. The mother was moved ; she thanked us, and 
 
 J. attendri f. remercier J. nous 
 
 said : ^generous, 'feeling 'souls, the good action which you (have 
 
 J et sensible arne f. f. 
 
 just been doing) will not be lost. He who sees (every thing) and 
 
 vtnez de faire perdu f. 
 
 judges ("every thing) will not let it go unrewarded. 
 juger laisser * sans récompense. 
 
SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 153 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 OF THE VERB. 
 
 Agreement of the Verb with the Subject. 
 
 442. The subject is that of which something is affirmed, and may 
 always be known by the answer to this question, qui est-ce qui ? who 
 or what is it ] as, Pierre vit, Peter lives ; Voiseau vole, the bird flies. 
 If it be asked, qui est-ce qui vit ? who is it that lives 1 — qui est-ce qui 
 vole ? what is it that flies 1 — the answers Pierre and Voiseau show that 
 Pierre and Voiseau are the subjects of the verbs vit and vole. 
 
 443. RuiE. The verb must be of the same number and person as its 
 subject. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Je ris I laugh. JSTous parlons, We speak. 
 
 Tu joues. Thou playest Vous plaisantez, You jest 
 
 II aime, He loves. Ils sont fous, They eu-e mad. 
 
 La vertu est aimable, Virtue is amiable. 
 
 444. Ris is in the singular number and the first person, because je, its 
 subject, is in the singular and the first person. Joues is in the shigular 
 and the second person, because tu is in the singular and the second 
 person, &c. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 The most firee of all men is he who can be free, even in slave- 
 
 libre art. celui même axUescla- 
 
 ry. Are we not often blind to our defects 1 All men 
 
 vag-e m. s'aveugler sur défaut ? art. 
 
 (are inclined) to idleness, but the savages of ^j^ot 'countries are 
 
 tendre art. sauvage art. chaud pays 
 
 the laziest of all men. Do you think of imposing long on the 
 
 * en imposer A. long-temps à 
 credulity of the public 1 Thou canst not deny that he is a great man. 
 f. m. pouvoir nier ' ne Q. 
 
 445. Remark I. When a verb has two subjects, both singular, it is 
 put in the plural. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 Mon père et ma mère m^ aiment My father and mother love me 
 tendrement, tenderly. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 His uprightness and honesty make him courted by every body. 
 droiture f. his honnêteté faire rechercher de 
 Strength of body and of mind meet not always 
 
 art. f. art. celle art. se rencontrer 
 
 together. A good heart and a noble soul are ^precious 'gifts of nature. 
 ensemble. m. beau f. don m. art. t 
 
164 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 
 
 446. Remark IT. When a verb relates to subjects of different persons, 
 It agrees with the first, in preference to the other two, and with the second, 
 in preference to the third. The person addressed is named ^r*^ and the 
 person addressing last. On this occasion, the pronoun plural nous is 
 generally placed before the verb, if the first person has been mentioned 
 before, or the pronoun plural vous, if no first person has been mentioned. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Vous, votre frère, et moi, nous lisons You, your brother, and I, read 
 ensemble la brochîu^e nouvelle, together the new pamphlet. 
 
 Fous et votre ami, vous viendrez You and your friend will come 
 avec moi, with me. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 You, your friend, and I, have each a ^different 'opinion. In our 
 chacun f. 
 
 childhood, you and I (were pleased) with playing together. Neither 
 enfance f. se plaire H. A. ni 
 
 i nor (any one else) has been able to understand (any thing) in that 
 
 ni d'autres ne pouvoir G. * comprendre rien à 
 
 sentence. (Take good care), you and your brother, not to 
 phrase f. se garder bien P. * de 
 
 (give way) to the impetuosity of your character. 
 s'abandonner caractère m. 
 
 447. Rem AH K III. When a verb has the relative pronoun qui for its 
 subject, it is put in the same number and person as the noun or pronoun 
 
 to which qui relates. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Est-ce moi qui ai dit cette nouvelle? Is it I who told this news Î 
 Est-ce nous qui V avons vouhi ? Is it we who desired it 1 
 
 Ceux qui aiment sincèrement la Those who sincerely love virtue 
 vertu sont heureux, are happy. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 He that complains most of mankind, is not always he that 
 Celui se plaindre le plus art. homme pi. 
 (has raost reason) to complain (of them). You that wish to enrich 
 est le pi lus fondé en. voidoir * enrichir 
 
 youT- mind with thoughts vigorously conceived and nobly expressed, 
 esprit de ■ f. fortement conçu . noblement exprimé 
 
 re ad the works of Homer and Plato. 
 ouvrage Homère 
 
 OF THE REGIMEN OF VERBS. 
 
 448, A verb is active when it will admit after it quelqiCun or quelque 
 chose, and the v/ord which is put after the verb is called the regimen of 
 that verb. Observe that this regimen may be known by asking the ques- 
 tion, qu^est-ce que? It is called direct — that is, governed directly by 
 the verb, without any preposition being necessary between the verb and 
 its object, and may be either a noun or a pronoun. 
 
SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 155 
 
 449. RuiE. When the regimen of the active verb is a noun. It IS always 
 placed after the verb ; when it is a pronoun, it is generally placed before it. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 J^a mère aime tous ses enfans, My mother loves all her children. 
 
 Je vous aime, and not as in English, J^aime vozis, I love you ; 
 Jl m'aijne, and not II aime moi, he loves me. 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE REGIMEN OF VERBS. 
 He has discovered to all other nations his ^ambitious 'design of 
 montrer art. peuple m. dessein m. 
 
 enslaving them, and has left us no means of 
 
 mettre dans V esclavage A. ne' laisser aucun moyen 
 
 defending our liberty but by endeavoring to overturn his new kingdom. 
 
 A. que en tâcher de renverser royaume m. 
 
 Homer represents Nestor as he that restrained the ungovernable 
 H/omère celui modérer H. bouillant 
 
 wrath of Achilles, the pride of Agamemnon, the haughtiness of Ajax, 
 courroux m. fierté 
 
 and the ^impetuous 'courage of Diomed. He dared not (lift up) his 
 m. Diomède. oser H. lever * 
 
 eyes, lest they should meet those of his friend, whose 
 
 art. de peur de * * rencontrer A. art. 
 
 2very 'silence condemned him. He caresses them, because he loves them. 
 même m. H. 
 
 450. Besides this regimen direct, some active verbs may have a second, 
 which is called indirect, and is marked by the words à or de. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 n a fait un présent à sa sœur. He has made a present to his sister. 
 Ji accuse son ami d'imprudence, He accuses his friend of imprudence. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 In submitting to the yoke of Asia, Greece would have thought 
 En subir * joug va. art. art. croire 
 
 ^virtue 'subjected to voluptuousness, the mind to the body, and 
 art. assujettir A. art. volupté f. 
 
 courage to a ^senseless 'force, which consisted only in numbers, 
 art. insensé f. H. ne que art. midtitudef.s. 
 
 Three hundred Lacedemonians hastened to Thermopylse to 
 
 Lacédémoniens courir i. art. Thermopiles "pX. un 
 ^certain 'death, content, in dying, to have sacrificed to their country an 
 assicré f. e7i de immtder pays m. 
 
 ^infinite^numbcr of barbarians, and to have left to their countrymen the 
 
 barbare de laisser compatriote 
 
 example of an ^unheard of 'bravery. You knew the importance 
 
 inouï * hardiesse f. savoir H. f. 
 
 which your parents attached to the success of that affair : why 
 
 que H. retissite f. f. pourquoi 
 
 have you not hastened to announce it to them ? 
 s^ empresser G. de £ 
 
156 syKtax of the verb. 
 
 451. The second regimen is known by the answer to these questions : à 
 qui ? to whom 1 à quoi ? to what ] de qui P of whom 1 de quoi ? of what ! 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 ,A qui a-t-ilfait un présent ? . To whom did he make a present 1 
 Ji sa sœur, To his sister. 
 
 De quoi accuse-t-il son ami ? Of what does he accuse his friend Î 
 
 DHmprudence, Of imprudence. 
 
 453. Passive verbs require de or par before the noun or pronoun that 
 follows them. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 La souris est mangée par le chat, The mouse is eaten by the cat. 
 Un enfant sage est aimé de tout le A good child is loved by every 
 monde, body. 
 
 453. Remark. The French never use the word par before Dieu, God ; 
 they say, les méchans seront punis de Dieu, which, in order to avoid 
 making use of by, may be thus Englished : God will punish the wicked. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 The city of Troy was taken, plundered, and destroyed by the ^con 
 Troie pris, saccagé, détruit con- 
 
 federate 'Greeks, eleven hundred and forty-eight years before the ^Christian 
 fédéré avant 
 
 'era : this event has been celebrated by the two greatest poets of Greece 
 ère f. art. 
 
 and Italy. You will only be beloved, esteemed, and courted 
 
 de art. rechercher 
 
 by men (in proportion as) you join the qualities of the heart 
 de art. que autant que Joindre L. 
 
 to those of the mind. -j-God punished the Jews every time when, 
 punir J. peuple Juif toutes les fois que 
 deaf to the voice of the prophets, they fell into idolatry and 
 sourd f. prophète, sing, tomber J. dans art. 
 
 impiety. 
 
 454. Some few neuter verbs have no regimen ; as, dormir, to sleep i 
 but many of them have a government. 
 
 455. RciE. Some neuter verbs require à and others de before their 
 regimen. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Tout genre d^excès nuit à la Every kind of excess is hurtful to 
 
 santé, health. 
 
 h médit de tout le monde. He slanders every body. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 This sentiment has pleased the king and all the nation. In his 
 à à Dans 
 
 retirement, he (has the full enjoyment) of the faculties of his soul. To 
 retraite f. Jouir de tout f, • 
 
 t Translate as if it stood thus .—The people Jewish were punished by Qod everu, &c 
 
SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 157 
 
 slander (any one) is to assassinate him in ^cold 'blood. The honest 
 médire de quelqu'un c'est * de sang. 
 
 man seldom (permits himself ) (to jest), because he knows 
 
 rarement se permettre des plaisanteries parce que savoir 
 the most innocent jests may sometimes hurt the reputation. 
 que f. pi. * pouvoir F. quelquefois nuire à f. 
 
 It is only in retirement that one truly enjoys one's self. His 
 Ce ne que art. on véritablement jouir de soi. 
 
 work has pleased (every one) because it unites to "^xqA 'utility 
 ouvrage m. à tout le monde joindre un f. 
 
 the charms of style and the beauties of sentiment. 
 
 agrément m. art. m. sing. art. pi. 
 
 456. Reflected verbs have for their regimen the personal pronouns me, 
 te, se, nous, and vous, and this regimen is sometimes direct and some- 
 times indirect. 
 
 OF THE NATURE AND USE OF MOODS AND TENSES. 
 Of the Indicative. 
 
 457. The indicative is that mood which simply declares and affirms a 
 ihmg. It contains eight tenses, viz : — the prese7it, the imperfect, the 
 preterit definite, the preterit indefinite, the preterit anterior, the plu- 
 perfect, the future simple, and the futui^e anterior, 
 
 458. The present marks that a thing is either existing or doing at the 
 moment one mentions the circumstance. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 J^aime, I love. Us jouent, They play. 
 
 459. The imperfect is used to express a thing done at a time past, but 
 as present with regard to another thing done at a time likewise past. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 J'entrais au moment où vous I came in at the moment you were 
 sortiez, going out. 
 
 460. It is also used to express something past, but habitual, without 
 fixing the time of its duration. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 César était un habile général, Caesar was an able general. 
 
 461. The preterit definite marks that a thing took place at a time 
 mentioned and completely past. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 J'écrivis lùer à Home, I wrote yesterday to Rome. 
 
 462 The preterit indefinite expresses a thing as having taken place 
 at a time which is neither precise nor determinate. 
 
 o 
 
 «r 
 
158 SYNTAX OF THE VER'B. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 n m!a fait un vrai plaisir en He has given me real pleasure by 
 venant me voir, coming to see me. 
 
 463. Or at a time which is not absolutely past. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 J'ai vu cette semaine beaucoup de I have seen many people this 
 inondcy week. 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE INDICATIVE. 
 My sister is in her chamber, where she (is occupiecl) in reading 
 
 où s'occuper F. à. A. 
 
 ^ancient 'history, ^the study '(of which) pleases her extremely, 
 art. dont lui infiniment. 
 
 Benefits bestowed are (so many) tiophies erected 
 
 art. Bienfait que on répandre F. des trophée que on s'érigerY. 
 
 in the hearts of those whose ^felicity ' (has been promoted) (by theni)^ 
 
 art. on faire F. * 
 
 The great Corneille was busy in his study tracing the plan of one 
 
 occupé cabinet à k. m. 
 
 of his tragedies, when a servant, terrified, came to tell him that 
 
 domestiquera., tout effrayé i. * hii 
 
 ^his ''house ^-^^g on 'fire : " Go and find my wife," re- 
 
 prendre I. à * art. * trouver A. re- 
 
 plied he ; "I do not understand household concerns." 
 
 pondre J. entendre rien à art. affaire pi. du ménage m. 
 
 Some ^Hungarian 'noblemen revolted from the Emperor Sigismund ; 
 lyes Hongrois seigneur se révolter contre Sigismond ; 
 
 this prince heard it, and marched boldly against them : 
 
 apprendre fièrement au-devant de 
 
 " Which among you," said he (to them), " will lay ^jn^ji^^jg ?upon 
 
 d'entre mettre art. f. sing, 
 
 his king 'first ■? If there be one ^bold 'enough, let him advance." 
 
 art. en un hardi 
 
 This noble firmness struck the rebels (with awe), who returned 
 en imposer à séditieux * rentrer 
 
 immediately to their duty. I have travelled through almost all 
 aussitôt dans le * devoir. voyager da?is 
 
 Europe, and I have visited the most ^celebrated 'places in Asia, 
 art. f. ' célèbre lieu de art. ,âsie, 
 
 and Afi'ica ; if, on the one hand, I admired the masterpieces 
 
 de art. ^^frique ; côté m. G. chef s-d' œuvre 
 
 of art, of every kind, which the protection of ^enlightened 'govern- 
 
 art. en tout genre, art. 
 
 ments has produced, on the other, I shed tears (on seeing) the 
 
 faire naître, G. sur 
 
 ratages of ignorance and barbarism, 
 
 art. de art. barbarie f. 
 
 464. The preterit anterior expresses that a thing had taken place 
 immediately before a time which is passed, and this tense is either definite 
 or indefinite. There is the same difference between its two forms as 
 petween the two preterits, definite and indefinite. — See page 93, art. 54. 
 
SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 159 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 J^eus dîné hier à midi, I had dined yesterday at twelve 
 
 Quand feus dine hier, midi When I had dined yesterday, it 
 
 sonna, struck twelve. 
 
 J^ai en déjeûné ce matin à dix I had done breakfast this morning 
 
 heures, at ten o'clock. 
 
 465. The pluperfect is that past tense which expresses a thing as 
 having taken place at any period antecedent to the time when another 
 thing happened, or it expresses a tljing habitually done before another. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Tavais soupe quand il entra, I had supped when he came in. 
 
 Lorsque fêtais à la campagne, dès When I was in the country, as 
 que f avais déjeûné, f allais à la soon as I had breakfasted, I 
 chasse, used to go a hunting. 
 
 466. The future absolute is that tense which expresses that an action 
 or event will take place at a time which does not yet exist. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 J'irai demain à la campagne, I shall go to-morrow into the country. 
 
 467. The future anterior is the tense which expresses that at a lime 
 when a thing will take place, another thing will have already taken pJace. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Quand j'aurai fui, je sortirai, When I have done, T shall go out. 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE PRETERIT ANTERIOR, &c. 
 I had done yesterday at noon. I (went out) (as soon as) I had dined. 
 fnir midi. sortir J. dès que 
 
 As soon as Csesar had crossed the Rubicon, he had no longer to deliberate ; 
 
 passer plus 
 
 he (was obliged) to conquer or to die. I had finished the task that 
 
 devoir H. * vaincre * tâche f. 
 
 you had imposed upon me when you came in. Those who had con- 
 imposer f. * con- 
 
 tributed most to his elevation to the throne of hi-s ancestors, were those 
 tribuer le phis sur 
 
 who labored with the most eagerness to precipitate him (from it). 
 
 travailler de acharnement en. 
 
 I shall shortly go into the country, where I intend to (collect 
 ne poi?it tarder à à campagne, se proposer de h.erbo- 
 
 plants), (in order to) (make myself perfect) in the knowledge of 
 riser, pour se perfectionner 
 
 botany. When I have done reading the '-^divme 'writings 
 
 «ri. botanique f. acheverM.de A. écrit m. 
 
 of Homer and Virgil, and my mind has imbibed their 
 
 H-omtre de que se pénétrer M. de 
 
 beauties, I shall read the other ^epic 'poets. 
 
160 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 
 
 Of the Conditional. 
 
 468. The conditional is the mood which affirms on conditions ; it has 
 two tenses, the present and the past. 
 
 469. l!h.e present of the conditional is that tense which expresses that 
 a thing would take place on certain conditions. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 Je ferais votre affaire avant peu, si I would settle your business before 
 elle dépendait uniquement de moi, long, if it only depended upon me. 
 
 470. The past of the conditional is that tense which expresses that a 
 thing would have taken place at a time which no longer exists, dependant 
 on certain conditions. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 J^avrais, ou f eusse fait votre I would have settled your business, 
 affaire, si vous m'en aviez, ou if you had mentioned it to me. 
 «î'ew eussiez parlé, 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE CONDITIONAL. 
 
 What would not be the felicity of man, if he always sought his 
 Quel * f. art. chercher H. 
 
 happiness in himself? I shall be glad to see you harmonious, happy, 
 
 um, 
 and comfortable. A dupe to my imagination, I should have (been 
 
 tranquille. * de 
 
 bewildered), (but for) you, in my search after truth. Enquire 
 
 s'égarer sans * axt. recherche î. art. s'informer 
 
 whether he would have consented to those conditions, in case 
 
 si consentir dans art. que 
 
 he had thought himself able to fulfil them. 
 se croire T. capable de remplir 
 
 Of the Imperative. 
 
 471. The imperative is that mood which commands, exhorts, entreats, 
 or reproves. It is a present with respect to the injunction and a future 
 with respect to the thing enjoined. 
 
 472. In many verbs a compound of the imperative may be used to 
 express an injunction to have a thing done previously to another; as, 
 ayez dîné avant que Je revienne, have dined before I return. 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE IMPERATIVE. 
 
 Be not fond of praise ; but seek virtue, which pro- 
 
 sing, passionné pour art. louange f. art. aj- 
 
 oures it. Let us remember that unless virtue guide us, our 
 
 tirer se souvenir à moins que art. ne 
 
 choice must be wrong. Let us not be deceived by the first 
 
 devoir F. mauvais. se laisser prendre à 
 
 appearances of things ; but let us take time to fix our judgment. 
 
 art. se donner art. de 
 
 Arbiters of the destinies of men, do good, if you wish to be happy; 
 ^^rbitre destinée art. art. bien vouloir • 
 
SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 16^1 
 
 do good, if you wish that your memory should be honored ; do good, if 
 
 Q. 
 you wish that heaven should open to you its ^eternal 'gates. Never 
 
 art. Q. porte f. 
 
 forget that the HxxxXj Hxee 'man is he who, superior to all fears 
 véritablement dégagé de f. sing 
 
 and all desires, is subject only to God and to reason. 
 de m. sing. soumis ne que art. f. 
 
 Of the Subjunctive. 
 
 473. The subjunctive is that mood which expresses a subordination to 
 what precedes. With this dependence it forms a sense, and none without. 
 Je voudrais qu'il lut, forms a sense, but qu'il lût, alone and unconnected, 
 does not. 
 
 474. This mood contains four tenses : the present — which sometimes 
 expresses a. future — the imperfect, \he preterit, and the pluperfect. 
 
 475. The present and the future of the subjunctive can only be distin- 
 guished by the sense. In this phrase, 77 faut que je vous sois bien 
 attaché pour venir vous voir par le temps qu'il fuit, I must have a great 
 esteem for you to come and see you in such weather as this, je sois ex- 
 presses a present time ; but in this. Je ne crois pas que vous obte?iiez 
 cela de lui, I do not think you will obtain that of him, vous obteniez 
 expresses a future, and stands for vous obtiendrez. 
 
 476. The imperfect, the preterit, and the pluperfect of the subjunctive 
 express also a past or future, according to circumstances. In this phrase, 
 Sonpçonniez-vous qu'il ne le fit pas ? Did you suspect he would not do 
 it, fit expresses a past ; but in this, Je désirerais qu'il vît du monde, 1 
 wish him to see company, vît marks a future. 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 2Men 'must 'be (very much) blinded by their passions, not to 
 art. il faut que bien aveuglé pour 
 
 acknowledge that they ought (to love one another) as parts of a 
 
 convenir devoir F. s'entr^aimer art. 
 
 whole, and as 2(the members of our body) '(would do) if (every one) 
 totit, chacun 
 
 had a ^particular 'vitality. You asked him to come with us, but I 
 
 sa vie. prier G. de 
 
 doubt whether he will have that complaisance. I could not persuade 
 
 que Q. H. 
 
 myself that he was so vain as to aspire to that place. Though every 
 
 S assez * polir , f. 
 
 body says so, I do not believe that he is gone to Rome. (Is it possible) 
 Q. le, Q. se pouvoir F. 
 
 that he should let slip "^so 'good 'an ""opportunity of acquiring 
 
 laisser R. échapper beau occasion f. A. itn 
 
 ^immortal 'glory 1 I could have wished that he had availed himself of his 
 
 profiter T. 
 abode in the country to perfect himself in the study of philosophy 
 séjour à campagne pour se perfectionner art. f 
 
 0'4 
 
1 62 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 
 
 Of the Infinitive. 
 
 477. The injinitive is that mood which affirms indeterminately, without 
 either number or person. 
 
 478. It denotes of itself neither present, past, nor future, except when 
 it follows other verbs. The present always expresses a present, relative 
 to the preceding verb ; as, je le vois, je le vis. je le verrai venir, I see. I 
 saw, I shall see him come. The past always expresses a past, relative to 
 the verb that precedes it ; as, je crois, je croyais l'avoir vu venir, I think, 
 I thought that I had seen him coming. To express a future, the infinitive 
 must be preceded by the infinitive of the verb devoir ; as, je croyais 
 devoir y aller, I thought I was to go there. 
 
 479. Reimakk. The infinitive also expresses a future after the verbs 
 permettre, espérer, compter, s'attendre, and menacer ; as, il promet de 
 venir (qtCil viendra), he promises to come (that he will come) ; il 
 vienace de s'y rendre (qu'il s'y rendra), he threatens to go (that he 
 will go) there. 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE INFINITIVE 
 We only shut our eyes to truth, because we fear to ^see 
 ne * art. art. que parce que de 
 
 'ourselves as we are. We were yet far from the castle, when 
 
 nous tel que H. encore 
 
 one of our friends came to join us. I did not think I was to set 
 
 J. * H. * devoir A. * 
 
 out so soon. He promises every day that he will amend, but I do 
 
 de * * se corriger A. 
 not rely upon his promises. They talk of a ^secret 'expedition; he 
 
 compter promesse f. On 
 
 hopes to be (in it). He relies upon seeing you (very soon) to 
 
 * en. compter * A au premier jour pour 
 
 terminate amicably his affair with you. You expected to take a 
 
 à l'amiable s'attendre H. faire 
 
 journey this year, but your father has changed his mind. He threat- 
 voyagem. de * avis. 
 
 ens to punish us severely, if we (fall again) into the same error. 
 de sévèrement retomber faute. 
 
 OF THE PARTICIPLE. 
 
 480. The participle is a part of the verb which partakes of the properties 
 both of a verb and an adjective : of a verb, as it has its signification and 
 regimen — of an adjective, as it expresses the quality of a person or thing. 
 
 481. There are two participles, the participle present and the parti- 
 ciple past. 
 
 Of the Participle Present. 
 
 482. The participle present always terminates in ant ; as, aimant, 
 finissant, recevarit, rendant. 
 
 483. Rule. The participle present remains unchanged, and takes 
 neither gender nor number when it expresses an action ; as, une mo7itagne, 
 or des montagnes dominant sur des plaines immenses, a mountain, ot 
 
SYNTAX OF THE PARTICIPLE. 103 
 
 mountains commanding immense plains; tm homme, des hommes, une 
 femme, des femmes lisant, parlant, marchant, a man, men, a woman, 
 women reading, speaking, walking. But when, like an adjective, it ex- 
 presses simply a quality, it takes both the gender and number of its sub- 
 stantive ; as, un homme obUg-ea?it, an obliging man ; tine femme obligeante, 
 an obliging woman ; des tableaux parlans, speaking portraits; la religion 
 dominante, the established religion ; à la nuit tombante, at night fall. 
 
 484. What grammarians call" gerund is nothing but the participle 
 present, to which the word en is prefixed ; on se forme l'esprit en lisant 
 de bons livres, we form our minds by reading good books. 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 
 
 That mountain being very high, and thus commanding a vast 
 
 élevé, ainsi dominer sur grande 
 
 extent of country, was very well calculated for our observations. This 
 
 étendue pays, H. * propre à 
 
 woman is of good disposition, obliging every one whenever she 
 
 caractère m. tout le monde quand 
 
 (has it in her power). They go cringing before the great, that they 
 
 en a le pouvoir. ra?nper devant pi. afn de * 
 
 may be insolent to their equals. The state of pure nature is that of 
 
 * A. avec égal. 
 
 the savage living in the desert, but living in his family, knowing his 
 
 famille f. connaître 
 children, loving them, (making use) of speech, and (making himself 
 
 user axt. parole, se faille 
 
 understood). An ^agreeable 'langor imperceptibly (laying hold) 
 entendre. langueur f. insensiblement s'emparer 
 
 of my senses, suspended the activity of my soul, and I (fell asleep) 
 sens, suspendre J. s' endormir J. 
 
 Time is a real blunderer, placing, replacing, ordering, disordering, 
 art. vrai brouillon, mettre, remettre, ranger, déranger, 
 
 impressing, erasing, approaching, removing, and making all things, good 
 imprimer, effacer, approcher, éloigner, rendre f. 
 
 and bad ; and almost always (impossible to be known again). 
 presque mécoiinaissable. 
 
 Of the Participle Past, 
 
 485. The participle past has various terminations ; as, aimé, fini, reçu^ 
 ouvert, dissous, &c. 
 
 486. This participle sometimes agrees with its subject and sometimes 
 with its regimen. 
 
 ^agreement of the Participle Past with its Subject. 
 
 487. Rule I. The particible past, when accompanied by the auxiliary 
 verb être, agi-ees with its subject in gender and number. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Jtlon frère est tombé, My brother is fallen. 
 
 JHes frères sont.tombés, My brothers are fallen. 
 
 Ma sœur est tombée, My sister is fallen. 
 
 Mes aeeurs sont tombéevy My sisters are fallen 
 
164 SYNTAX OF THE PARTICIPLE 
 
 La nuit sera bientôt passée, The night will soon be over. 
 
 Les spectacles sont fréquentés, The theatres are frequented. 
 
 Cette Jleur est fort recherchée, This flower is mueh sought after. 
 
 lis sont fort estijnés. They are very much esteemed. 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE PARTICIPLE PAST. 
 
 Fire-arms were not known to the ancients. Ishmael, the son of 
 art. arnie-àfeii f. H. connu de Ismaél, * 
 
 Abraham, is knoWn among the Arabs as (the man) from whence they 
 parmi Arabe celui 
 
 sprung, and circumcision has remained (among them) as the 
 être sorti G. art. f. être demeuré leur 
 
 mark of their origin. Heaven is that -permanent 'city (into which) 
 
 f. art. cité f. où 
 
 the just are to be received after this life. In -Abraham's 'time, 
 
 pi. devoir * après De • art. 
 
 the threatenings of the true-God was dreaded by Pharaoh, king of Egypt; 
 
 menace f. H. redouté de Pharaon, 
 
 but in the time of Moses, all nations were corrupted, and the world. 
 
 Moïse, art. f. H. perverti, 
 which God has made to manifest his pov/er, was become a temple of 
 
 pour pouvoir, H. devenu 
 
 idols. That ^dreadful 'crisis which threatened the state with -instant 
 terrible crise Ï. H. de prochain 
 
 'destruction, was happily soon over. She is come to, bring us atl 
 
 f. J. lietireitsement passé. * 
 
 kinds of refreshments. The sciences have always been 
 
 iorte f. sing, rafra' chissement. f. 
 
 protected by ^enlightened 'governments. 
 
 protege art. iclairk 
 
 488. Rule IL The participle past, when it follows the verb avoir-, 
 never agrees with its subject. 
 
 Mon frère a écrit. My brother has written. 
 
 Mes frères ont écrit, My brothers have written. 
 
 Ma sœur a écrit, My sister has written. 
 
 Mes sœîtrs ont écrit. My sisters have v/ritten. 
 
 Les Amazones ont acquis de la The Amazons have acquired cele- 
 
 céltbrité, brity. 
 J^ai contraint les soldats à marcher, I have forced the soldiers to march. 
 
 489. Remark. The participle of the verb être, and of all the neuter 
 verbs which are conjugated with the auxiliary verb avoir, never vary ; as, 
 il or elle a été, he or she has been ; ils or elles ont été, they have been ; 
 il or elle a dormi, he or she has slept ; ils or elles ont nui, they have 
 annoyed. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 The Romans successively triumphed over the ^most warlike 'na- 
 Bomains successivement G. de belliqueux 
 
 lions. Lampridius relates that Adrian erected to Jesus Christ some 
 raconter Adrien élever I. de 
 
 temples, which (were still to be seen) in his time. Happy those 
 art. on encore voir H. de * 
 
SYNTAX OF THE PARTICIPLE. 165 
 
 princes who have never (made use) of their power but to do 
 art. tiser poiivoir que pour 
 
 good Î We have spent the wliole day in tormenting ourselves. 
 art bien! journée i. à A. nous. 
 
 One has seldom, seen a great stock of good sense in a man of ima- 
 On rarement fonds m. sens a 
 
 gination. The errors of Descartes (proved very useful) to Newton. 
 
 beaucoup servir G. 
 
 agreement of the Participle Past ivith its Regimen. 
 
 490. Rule I. The participle past always agrees with its regimen 
 direct, when that regimen is placed before the participle, whether the 
 auxiliary verb that accompanies it be avoir or être. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Les écoliers que fai ens, 07it fait de The pupils whom I have had^ have 
 
 grands progrès, made rapid progress. 
 
 Lucrèce s'est tuée, Lucretia has killed herself. 
 
 Tai renvoyé les livres que vous I have sent back the books which 
 
 irC aviez prêtés, you had lent me. 
 
 Que de soins je me suis donnés ! What pains I have taken ! 
 
 Quelle affaire avez-vous entre- What business have you under- 
 
 prise ? taken ? 
 
 Quand la race de Cain se fut mid- When thé race of Cain had mul- 
 
 tipliée, tiplied. 
 
 Ces yeux que n^ont émus ni soupirs Those eyes which neither sigiis 
 
 ni terreur, nor terror have moved. 
 
 Le Dieu JMercure est un de ceux The god Mercury is one of those 
 
 qiie les anciens ont le plus mul- whom the ancients have multi- 
 
 tipliés, plied the most. 
 
 491. Remark. The regimen which precedes the participle is either 
 one of these pronouns — que, me, te, se, le, la, les, nous, and vous — or a 
 noun sometimes joined to the pronoun quel, sometimes preceded by the 
 word of quantity, combien or qite — signifying combien, how much — as 
 may be seen in the examples already given. 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE AGREEMENT OF THE PARTICIPLE 
 PAST WITH ITS REGIMEN. 
 
 All the letters which I have received, confirm that ^important 'news. 
 
 f. confirmer sing. 
 
 The ^agitated 'life which I have led till now, makes me* sigh 
 
 agité f. mener jusqu^à présent, soupirer 
 
 for retirement. The difficulties which the academies (have pro- 
 
 après art. retraite f. f. se 
 
 posed to one another) do not seem easy to (be resolved). The 
 
 faire G. paraître aisé résoudre. 
 
 sciences which you have studied will prove infinitely useful (to you). 
 
 f. être 
 
 The death which Lucretia (gave herself) has (made her immortal). The 
 f. se donner G. immortalises G. 
 
 cities which those nations have (built for themselves) are but a 
 ville f. peuple se bâtir G. ne que 
 
166 SYNTAX OF THE PARTICIPLE. 
 
 collection of huts. The persons whom you have instructed appear to 
 
 amas m. chau7nicre. f. 
 
 me possessed of reason and taste. Nothing can equal the ardor of 
 
 plein ■ de égaler 
 
 the troops which I have seen (setting off). The chimeras which she 
 f. A. chimère f. 
 
 has got m her head (are beyond) all belief. What measures 
 se mettre * art. passer croyance î. dêmarcheî, 
 
 have I not taken ! What fortunes has not this revolution ruined ! 
 
 faire ! f. reîiverser ! 
 
 What tears has she not shed ! what sighs has she not heaved! The 
 Q_ue de f. verser ! m. pousser ! 
 
 Amazons (made themselves) famous by their courage. The city of 
 
 f. îe rendre G. célèbre f. 
 
 London (has made itself), by its commerce, the metropolis of the uni- 
 
 m. métropole f. 
 
 verse. I have thought her agitated by the furies. This day is one 
 
 croire 
 of those which they have consecrated to tears. The language in 
 m. consacrer art. langue f. * 
 
 which Cicero and Virgil have written will live in their works. I 
 
 Cic'eron Virgile par ouvrage. 
 
 could have wished to avoid entering into those details, but I thought 
 vouloir * éviter d'entrer A. m. croire G. 
 
 them necessary. The tribunes demanded of Clodius the execution 
 
 tribun m. J. à 
 
 of the promises which the consul Valerius had given them, 
 f. faire leur. 
 
 492. Rule II. The participle past never agrees with its regimen, 
 either when that participle is without regimen direct or when, having a 
 regimen direct, that regimen is placed after it. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 La lettre dont je vous ai parlé, The letter whi^'h I have mentioned 
 
 to you. 
 La perte et les profits auxquels il a The loss and profits which he has 
 
 participé, shared. 
 
 Les académies se sont fait des oh- The academies have proposed ob- 
 
 jections, jections to one another. 
 
 Vous avez instruit ces personnes à You have taught these persons to 
 
 dessiner, draw. 
 
 Lucrèce s^est doîiné la mort, Lucretia has put a period tocher 
 
 existence. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 The persons whose ^visit 'you ^had ''announced to ^me, are not 
 f. art. f. * 
 
 come. Men built themselves cities. The Amazons acquired 
 art. se bâtir G. * G. 
 
 great celebrity. I have forced the soldiers to march. That 
 beaucoup de contraindre 
 
 woman (has bestowed on herself) fine gowns. ^"Lieii^xs ^and 
 
 se donner G. de art. 
 
SYNTAX OF THE PARTICIPLE. 167 
 
 ^writing 'were ^invented to represent speech. She has 
 art. écriture on a pour peinche art. parole. 
 
 cut two (of her) fingers. Titus has made his wife mistress of his 
 se couper * doigt m. rendre 
 
 riches. I have given myself (a great deal) of trouble. Commerce 
 bien. bien art. peine f. art. m. 
 
 has made this city flourishing. They have made an appointment. 
 rendre f. florissant. se donner * rendezvous. 
 
 493. Rule III. The participle past takes neither gender nor number 
 when the participle and the auxiliary verb to which it is joined are used 
 impersonally, nor when that participle is followed by a verb which governs 
 the pronoun or pronouns preceding it. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Les chaleurs excessives qu'il a fait The excessive heats which we have 
 cet été, ont beaucoup nui à la had this summer have done great 
 récolte, injury to the corn. 
 
 Quelle fâcheuse aventure vous est-il What unpleasant adventure have 
 
 arrivé ? you met with ? 
 
 La maison que f ai fait bâtir. The house which I have ordered 
 
 to be built. 
 Imitez les vertus que vous avez Imitate the virtues which you have 
 
 entendu louer, ■ heard praised. 
 
 Les mathématiques que vous rCavez The mathematics which you would 
 
 pas voulu que f étudiasse, not permit me to study. 
 
 Elle s^est laissé séduire, She has suffered herself to be se- 
 
 duced. 
 
 494. Remark. To make aright application of the second part of this 
 rule, we ought to examine whether we can put the regimen immediately 
 after the participle. As we cannot say, J'ai fait la maison, vous avez 
 entendu les vertus, vous n'avez pas voulu les mathématiqiies, it follows 
 that the regimen belongs to the second verb. Sometimes, however, the 
 regimen may relate either to the participle or to the following verb, 
 according to the meaning of the speaker. Thus, Je Vai vu peindre. 
 means, I saw her picture drawn ; but Je Vai vue peindre, signifies, I saw 
 her painting. 
 
 495. Sometimes it happens likewise that, in sentences which seem to 
 resemble each other, the regimen in one belongs to the «participle and in 
 the other to the verb which follows it. For instance, this question — Avez 
 vous entendu chanter la nouvelle actrice ? Have you heard the new- 
 actress sing 1 — should be thus answered. Oui, je Vai entendue, chanter ; 
 Yes, I have : but this question — Avez-vous entendu chanter la nouvelle 
 ariette? Have you heard the new song 7 — must be answered, Oui, je Vai 
 entendu chanter ; Yes, I have. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 The great changes which (have taken place) in the administration 
 changement y avoir G. 
 
 have astonished many . people. The heavy rains which (we 
 
 Men des personnes. grand phde f. it 
 
 have had) in the spring have been the cause of many diseases. The 
 faire G. maladie f. 
 
168 SYNTAX OF THE ADVERB. 
 
 scarcity which there was ^last ^ winter has afforded the opportunity 
 
 disette f. G. art. dernier donner occasion 
 
 of doing much good. What news (has reached you?) (How many) 
 
 A. bien. vous est-ilvenu ? Que de 
 
 imprudent steps (were taken) on that occasion ! How many large 
 faux démarcheï. il s'est fait en gros 
 
 Bhips have been built in England within these fifty years ! The 
 
 il se constridre G. depids * 
 
 figures which you have learned to draw are of great beauty. (We 
 
 apprendre dessiner un II 
 
 ought) never to swerve from the good path which we have begun 
 
 falloir F. * s'' éloigner route f. on 
 
 to follow. The measures which you advised me to adopt have 
 
 mesure f. conseiller G. de prendre 
 
 not succeeded. The rule which I have begun to explain seems to 
 
 réussir. règle f. expliquer sembler 
 
 me very easy to (be understood). You see that I have not been mistaken 
 saisir A. se tromper G. 
 
 respecting the affairs which I had foreseen you would have in hand. 
 
 prévoir que * * 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 OF THE ADVERBS. 
 
 Situation of the adverbs. 
 
 496. Rule I. In the simple tenses, the adverb is generally placed 
 after the verb, and, in the compound tenses, between the auxiliary and 
 the jfarticiple. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Vhomme le plus éclairé est ordi- The man who is most learned is 
 
 nairement celiù qui pense le plus generally he who thinks most 
 
 modestement de lui-mane, modestly of himself. 
 
 Avez-vons jamais vu un pédant plus Have you ever seen a pedant more 
 
 absurbe et plu» vain? absurd and more vain"! 
 
 497 Compound adverbs, and those which have or might have a regi- 
 men like the adjectives from which they are derived, are always placed 
 after the verb. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 C^est à la mode. That is fashionable. 
 
 U a agi co7iséquem7nent, He has acted consistently. 
 
 498. Adverbs which denote time in an indeterminate manner are like- 
 mse placed after the verb., 
 
 EXAMPLES. . 
 H eût fallu se lever plus mati7i, It would have been necessary to 
 
 rise earUer. 
 On a vu cela autrefois^ That has been seen formerly 
 
SYNTAX OF THE ADVERBS. 169 
 
 499. Exceptions. 1st. — Adverbs of order, rank, and those which 
 express a determinate time, are placed either before or after the verb. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 JVoMs devons premièrement faire We ought, first, to do our duty; 
 
 notre devoir; secondement, c/ier- secondly, enjoy lawful pleasures. 
 
 cher les plaisirs permis, 
 Aujourd'hui il fait beau; il pleuvra To-day it is fine ; it will rain per- 
 
 peut-étre demain, haps to-morrow. 
 
 500. 2d. — These adverbs — comment, où, d'où, par où, combien, pour- 
 quoi, quand, used with or without interrogation — are always placed before 
 the verb which they modify. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Comment vous portez-vous ? How do you do 1 
 Où allez-vous ? Where are you going Î 
 
 II ne sait comment s'y prendre, He does not know how to set about it 
 
 501. Rule IL The adverb is always placed before the adjective which 
 it modifies. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Cest ur.e femme fort belle, très- She is a woman very beautiful, of great 
 
 sensible, et infiniment sage, sensibility, and infinitely prudent. 
 
 502. Rule IIL Adverbs of quantity and comparison, and the three 
 adverbs of time — souvent, toujours, jamais — are placed before the other 
 adverbs. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Si poliment, fort poliment, So politely, very politely 
 
 Très -heureusement, Very happily. 
 
 Le plus adroitement. The most skilfully. 
 
 Us ne seront jamais étroitement urns. They never will be intimately united 
 Us sont towjours ensemble, \_arrive, They are always together. 
 C'est soxivent à Vimproviste qu'il He often comes unexpectedly. 
 
 503. Souvent may, however, be preceded by an adverb of quantity or 
 comparison ; as, si souvent, assez souvent, fort souvent, plus souvent^ 
 moins souvent, trop souvent. 
 
 504. Remark. When adverbs of quantity and comparison meettoge» 
 ther in a sentence, the following is the order which custom has established : 
 
 Si peu Bien peu ^ fBeaucoup trop Tant mieux 
 
 Trop peu Bien plus Beaucoup plus Tant pis 
 
 Très-peu Bien^ davantage Beaucoup moins &c. 
 
 505. When bien stands before another adverb, it means very, muUi^ 
 <fcc., as in the preceding and following examples. 
 
 Bien assez. Quite enough. Frapper bien fort, To strike very hard 
 Bien inoins. Much less. Bien tard, Very late. 
 
 506. But when it is placed after the adverb, it signifies tvell ; as, 
 Jissez bien, Pretty well. Fort bien. Very well. 
 Moins bien, Not so well. Aussi bien, As well. 
 
 t Beaucoup is not, as the English much, susceptible of being modified by any 
 adverb preceding; thus, très-beaucoup, trop beaucoup, &c. would ba barbarism 
 
 P 
 
170 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 OF THE CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 507. The conjunction que serves to complete a comparison ; it is 
 elliptically used to express a restriction when placed after ne, and it gene- 
 rally gives grace, energy, and precision to sentences. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 VAsie eat phis') » • . , ,, 
 
 grande que VEu- ^"^'^^E^Jf f ^^^ 
 
 rope, 3 P 
 
 ■ On ne parle que de'^ They talk of 7io^A/n^ 
 
 la nouvelle vie- ' ' 
 
 toire, 
 ■Qu'iV vive, pour je' 
 
 souhaite quV/ \ 
 
 vive. 
 
 expressing compari- 
 son. 
 
 for rien que 
 
 — je souhaite que 
 
 — a moins quo 
 
 — avuîit que 
 
 — sans que 
 
 — dès que 
 
 — aussitôt que 
 
 — si, or quand 
 
 — soit que 
 
 —jusqu a ce que 
 — pourquoi ? 
 
 Cela ne finira pas 
 (\\xil ne vienne. 
 
 but the new vie 
 
 tory. 
 May he live, for 1 
 
 •wish that he may 
 
 live. 
 There will be no 
 
 end to it, unlesi 
 
 he come. 
 If he commits the 
 
 least excess, he is 
 
 ill. 
 
 1 
 
 combien 
 
 (^u^ il fasse le moin- 
 dre excès, il est 
 malade, 
 ÇQu* il perde, ou qu'ils Whether he gains 
 gagne son procès, l or loses his law- 
 c'est un homme Ç suit, he is a ruined 
 ruiné, J man. 
 
 5 Attendez quV/? ,,, .^ ^.,, , 
 
 ■> • ^ ^ W ait ?i// he comes. 
 
 C viemie, j 
 
 5 Que 7ie *e corrige- \ Why does he not 
 
 1 mV? 5 reform] 
 
 J\Téchant qu'zY esf. Wicked as he is. 
 
 TQue Dieu est ? //o7y great is the 
 
 J grand ! 5 Almighty ! 
 
 I Que Je hais les nié- ? How imich I hate 
 
 L cJians ! S the wicked ! 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE CONJUNCTIONS. 
 We have every thing to fear from his wisdom, even more than from 
 
 encore 
 
 his power. What men style greatness, glory, power, profound 
 
 Ce que art. appeler profond 
 
 policy, is in the eyes of God only miserj', weakness, and vanity. 
 
 politique f. à 
 
 May they understand, at last, that without ^internal 'peace, there 
 
 comprendre, avec soi-même art. 
 
 is no happiness. May she be as happy as she deserves to be ! 
 
 poijit de de le 
 
 Never write before you have ^thoroughly 'examined the subject 
 
 que Q. so^ts tontca aes faces 
 
 which you propose to treat. Let him but hear the least noise, his 
 se proposer de traiter. • 
 
SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTIONS. 171 
 
 ^terrified 'imagination presents to him nothing but monsters. Do 
 effrayé f. * ne que 
 
 not sift this question till I (can be your guide). Do nut go 
 
 approfondir ne vons mettre Q. *«• la voie. 
 
 out till your brother comes in. Why does he not (take advantage) of 
 
 7ie rentrer Q. profiter 
 
 his youth, (in order to) acquire the knowledge he wants 1 
 
 porir connaissance pi. dont avoir besoin. 
 
 508. Another frequent use of the conjunction que is to save the repe- 
 tition of comme, parceque, puisque, quand, quoi que, si, &c., when to 
 phrases beginning with these words, others are added under the same 
 regimen, by means of the conjunction et ; as, 
 
 Si Von aimait son pays, et qu^on en If we loved our country, and 
 désirât sincèrement la gloire, 07i sincerely wished its glory, wo 
 se conduirait de manière, &c. should act so as &c. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 Full as he was of his prejudices, he would not acknowledge- 
 Rempli H. préjugé, J. convenir de 
 
 (any thing). Full ^of Sgeif-iove '(as he is), expect nothing good 
 
 rie7i. Pétri 
 
 (from him). 'How ^beautiful *is 'that ^cultivated ^nature ! How, by 
 €71 par 
 
 the care of man, it is brilliantly and richly adorned ! Had 
 
 f. pompeusemeiit orné ! si * dc 
 
 profound philosophers presided at the formation of languages, and 
 
 I. à art. Iang7ie, cue 
 
 had they carefully examined the elements of speech, not only in 
 
 ax^cc soin T. m. art. discours, 7i07i 
 
 their relations (to one another), but also in themselves, it is not 
 
 entr^eux e7icore en m. 
 
 (to be doubted), that languages would present principles more 
 
 douteux art ne offrir S. 
 
 simple, and, at the same time, more luminous. 
 
 Government of Conjunctions, 
 
 509. The conjunctions which unite sentences to one another are fol- 
 lowed either by the infinitive, the indicative, or the subjtmctive. 
 
 510. Those which are followed by an infinitive are, 
 
 511. 1st. — Such as are distinguished from prepositions only by bemg 
 followed by a verb ; as, 
 
 n faiU se reposer après avoir One ought to rest after having 
 travaillé, labored. 
 
 512. 2d. — Those which have the preposition de after them ; as, 
 
 n travaille afin de vous surpasser, He works that he may surpass you. 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE GOVERNMENT OF CONJUNCTIONS. 
 They were going to spend (a few) days in town, only that 
 ne * passer quelques à art que pour 
 
172 SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 they might return with more pleasure to their charming solitude 
 
 * * se retrouver A. dans 
 
 Many persons work only (in order to) acquire consideration and riches, 
 
 ne que afin de 
 but the ^honest, *^humane 'man spends (so much) time in 
 de bien sensible ne employer tant de à 
 
 study, only to be useful to his fellow-creatures. I reveal to you 
 art. que pour semblables. dévoiler 
 
 the plot which your enemies have concerted in secret, 
 
 trame f. ourdir art. ténèbres f. pi. 
 
 in order to warn you against their artifices. 
 prémunir 
 
 513. Conjunctions that govern the indicative 
 
 bien attendu que, autant que, puisque, peut-être que, 
 
 a condition que, non plus que, lorsque, comme, 
 
 à la charge que, outre que, pendant que, comme si, 
 
 de même que, parce que, tandis que, quand, 
 
 ainsi que, attendu que, durant que, pourquoi, 
 
 aussi bien que, vu que, tant que, comment, &c. 
 
 514. They are followed by the indicative, because the principal sen- 
 tence, which they unite with that which is incidental, expresses the 
 affirmation in a direct, positive, and independent manner. 
 
 515. The use of the six following conjunctions, 
 
 si non que, de sorte que, tellement que, 
 
 si ce n'est que, en sorte que, de manière que, 
 
 varies according to the meaning expressed by the principal sentence. 
 
 EXAMPLE OF THE INDICATIVE. EXAMPLE OF THE SUBJUXCTIVF. 
 
 Je ne lui ai répondu autre chose Je ne veux autre chose, si non 
 si non que f avais exécuté ses que voiis travailliez avec plus 
 
 ordres, d'ardeur, 
 
 I made him no other answer but I desire nothing else but that you 
 that I had executed his orders. would study with greater ardor. 
 
 516 The indicative is required in the first sentence by the verb fai 
 répondu expressing a positive affirmation, and the subjunctive in the 
 second, because ^'e veux expresses but a desire. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 When you have a more ^extensive 'knowledge of geometry and 
 
 L. art. de 
 
 algebra, I shall give you (a few) lessons in astronomy and 
 art. algèbre f. quelques de de 
 
 optics. Form your mind, heart, and taste while you are still 
 optique. votre votre encore 
 
 young. Do not keep truth a prisoner, though you should (draw 
 
 retenir art. * captive, qxiand devoir N. «'co- 
 
 upon you) a cloud of enemies. I will give you this fine picture upon 
 tirer nuée f. tableau m. à 
 
 condition that you keep it as a testimony of my friendship. 
 conserver li. témoignage m. 
 
PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES. 173 
 
 517. The conjunctions which govern the subjunctive are, 
 
 soit que, jusqu'à ce que, supposé que, afin que, 
 
 sans que, encore que, au cas quo, • de peur que, 
 
 pour que, à moins que, avant que, de crainte que, 
 
 4uoique, pourvu que, non pas que, &.c. &.c, 
 
 518. They require the subjunctive, as they always imply doubt, desire, 
 ignorance. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 You know too well the value of time, to ^j^ake 'it 
 
 connaître prix m. art. ponr que être Q. il 
 
 necessary to tell you to (make a good use of) it. Study only great 
 
 de de ■ bie7i employer art. 
 
 models, lest those which are but middling should spoil your 
 
 de peur que * médiocre ne gâter Q. 
 
 taste before it be entirely formed. I (make not the least doubt) that 
 
 ne douter F. nullement 
 your method will succeed, provided it be well known. Several 
 
 f. ne Q. f. 
 
 phenomena of nature are easy (to be explained), supposing the 
 
 art. à expliquer, 
 
 principle of 2 universal 'gravitation to be true 
 art. f. * 
 
 PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES on the NINE PARTS OF SPEECH 
 
 THE GOOD MOTHER 
 
 What a fine morning ! said the amiable Charlotte to her brother 
 matinée f. J. 
 George. Come, let us go into the garden, and enjoy the ^magnificcm 
 sing. * A. de 
 
 'sight of 2jich Sand "abundant 'nature. We will gather there 
 spectacle m. une fertile cueillir »/ 
 
 the -^freshest ^and "sweetest 'flowers. We will make a nosegay, which 
 
 frais odorant £,~ bouquet m. 
 
 we will offer to mamma. You know she loves flowers. This 
 
 maman. sing, savoir que art. 
 
 attention will give her pleasure. Ah ! brother, it will obtain us a 
 
 faire lui mon f. valoir 
 
 emile, a caress, perhaps even a kiss. Ah ! sister, replied 
 
 sourire ra. f. baiser va.. ma répon<lrei. 
 
 George, your proposal delights me ; let us run, let us fly, that 
 
 sing, projet enchanter courir, voler, afin de 
 
 we may offer her (when she rises) this tribute of our gratitude and 
 * * A. bd à son lever hommage de 
 
 our love. Full of this idea, Charlotte and George hastened 
 
 Plein se hater J. de se rendre 
 
 into the garden. Charlotte gathered violets, jessamine, and (young 
 
 J. des boil' 
 
 rose-buds), which (had but just begun) to open their ^purjde 
 
 tojis de rose, ne commencer H. que * entr'ouvrir de pourpre 
 
 'cups, while George prepared '•^green 'sprigs of myrtle and thyme 
 
 cciUcCy H. 'verdoyant jet va. myrte thum, 
 
 p2 
 
174 PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES. 
 
 intended to support the flowers. 'Never ^had ^these ^amiable ''children 
 destiné soutenir H. 
 
 ^worked with (so much) zeal and ardor. Satisfaction and pleasure 
 travailler tant de zèle art. f. art. 
 
 beamed in all their features, sparkled in their eyes, and added still 
 être peint U. trait m. pétiller H. 
 
 to their beauty. 
 
 While they (were employing themselves) (in this manner), their 
 s'occuper H. ainsi 
 
 mother, who had seen them in the garden, came to join them. 
 
 J. joindre 
 
 (As soon as) they perceived her, they flew to her, and said : Ah ' 
 
 Dès gne J. J. elle, lui J. 
 
 mamma, how ^glad 'we ^are to see you ! how (impatient we were) 
 
 gne aise de gne il tardait à notre impatienct 
 
 (for) this pleasure ! In the pleasing expectation (of it) we were preparing 
 (Vavoir ce dotix attente f. * 
 
 this nosegay for you. What satisfaction- should we have had in 
 
 f. ne pas à 
 
 presenting it to you ! Look at these rose-buds, these violets, this jessamine, 
 
 oJ^}-ir Voir * 
 
 this myrtle, and this thyme. Well, we designed them for you. 
 JEA/ bien, destiner H. 
 These flowers, coming from us, would have been dear to you. When 
 
 cher En 
 
 you v-ore them, you would have said, My children were thinking of 
 
 * porter C. s'occuper 
 
 me while I slept. I am always as present to their minds as to their 
 
 dormir H. sing, 
 
 hearts. They love me, and it is by giving me every day new proofs 
 sing. ce en de preuve f. 
 
 of their affection that they acknowledge the care I have taken 
 
 reconnaître soin m. pi. gue 
 
 of them in their childhood, and all the marks of tenderness I 
 
 que 
 (am unceasingly) gi^ong them. 
 ne cesser F. de A. leur. 
 
 My dear children, replied the mother, embracing them, how 
 répondre J. en embrasser guel 
 
 charming you render all my days ! your gratitude, your tenderness, 
 channe répandre sur 
 
 your attention to me, make me forget my former misfortunes, and 
 pi. poiir oublier ancien malheur m. 
 
 yield my heart again to the soft impressions of pleasure. May 
 rouvHr * f. art. Pouvoir Q,. 
 
 Heaven continue to bless my labor ! May it be your guide and 
 art. continiœr de soin pi. Pouvoir 
 
 your support ill the career which (will soon be opened) to you! 
 
 soutien carrière f. aller F. s'ouvrir devant 
 
 may il complete its kindness by preserving you from the dangers 
 
 mettre le comble à bienfait'pX. en garantir de 
 
 to which you (cannot fail) to be soon exposed ! Alas ! I shudder 
 ne pas tarder L. • fréndr 
 
PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES. 175 
 
 (at them) beforehand, my dear children ; the moment is come when you 
 
 en (f avance où 
 
 must enter the world. Your persons, your birth, and your 
 devoir dans f-g'ure sing. naissance, 
 
 fortune call you there, and ensure you a ^distinguished 'rank (in it) 
 
 appeler y assurer m. y 
 
 I cannot always be your guide. Young and inexperienced, you will 
 
 L. sans expérience, allerY. 
 
 (find yourselves) surrounded by every kind of temptition. 
 
 se trouver A. entouré sorte f. séduction. 
 
 (Every thing), even vice, (presents itself ) there under an '^agreeable 
 
 Tout jusqtie à art. m. s'offrir F. y sous * 
 'form, and almost always in the shape of pleasure, which has (so many) 
 
 pi. sous image art. tant de 
 
 attractions for youth. They will try to mislead you, to 
 
 attrait f. oxi. jeunesse f. cTiercher égarer 
 
 corrupt you ; they (will Aiake use of) artifice, raillery, and even 
 employer art. art. même 
 
 ridicule, and, if necessary, they will assume even the mask 
 
 il est prendre jusgzie à masque m. 
 
 of virtue. If you (abandon yourselves) to first impressions, you 
 
 art. se laisser F. aller 
 
 are lost. The poison of example (will insinuate itself) into your 
 
 art. se glisser L. 
 
 hearts, will corrupt the innocence and purity (of them), and will substitute 
 
 altérer en, 
 
 2 violent 'passions for the mild affections which have hitherto formed 
 déchirant f. à doxix faire 
 
 your happiness. 
 
 Do not imagine, my dear children, that in placing before your eyes a 
 
 croire en mettre sous 
 
 picture of the dangers of the world, my intention is to prohibit 
 le tableau m. Q. de interdire 
 
 you every kind of pleasure. (God forbid) ! Pleasure is necessary 
 
 espèce f. à Dieu ne plaise ! art. 
 
 to man ; without it, our existence would be dreadful ; (and therefore) 
 art. lui, affreux; aussi 
 
 Providence, ever attentive to our wants, has multipUed the 
 
 art. f. besoin, -t-elle 
 
 sources of it, both in and out of ourselves. But, in tasting the 
 
 en nous nous. en goûter 
 
 pleasures of the world, never (abandon yourselves) (to them). Take 
 
 se livrer F. y Avoir 
 
 care that they do not govern you ; know how to quit them the 
 
 dominer savoir * * de 
 
 moment they have acquired (too much) sway over you. It is the 
 
 que prendre L. trop de empire Ce 
 
 only way to enjoy with delight that ^exquisite 'pleasure which we 
 
 moyen de volupté de délicieux 
 
 can only find in ourselves, and which has its source in an ^upright ^and 
 
 en dans droit 
 
 ^pure 'conscience. Ah ! why can I not give you all my experience'? 
 t que 
 
176 PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES. 
 
 Why can you not, like me, read the depths of the heart 1 With 
 
 da7is ab'ane sing. pi. 
 
 what astonishment would you often see chagrin, agitation, and 
 
 art. m. art. 
 trouble, dipguised under the appearance of joy and tranquillity; 
 art. m. déguisé soics apparence pi. art. du calme; . 
 
 hatred and envy concealed under the air of confidence and 
 art. f. art. f. caché art. confiaiice f. de 
 
 friendship ; indifference and selfishness affecting the most lively 
 la f. art. égo'lsme vif 
 
 interest; ^the most dreadful and perfidious 'plots contrived deliber- 
 
 trame f. ourdi de saiig 
 ately in the dark ; in a word, '''the most odious > vices endea- 
 froidet téjièbresi.^A. en art. s'e/- 
 
 voring to show themselves under the features of "^(iheu opposite) 
 forcer de traits qui leur sont opposé 
 
 'virtues ! In the world, there is but one (moving principle) ; 
 art. lie que seul mobile m. 
 
 that is 2se|f. Unterest. (To that, every) action refers, 
 
 ce art personnel C^est à lui que toutes art. pi. se rapporter 
 
 every thing tends to that as to its end. I know very well, my dear 
 
 lui fn f. savoir 
 
 children, that your hearts will not be infected by this vice. The senti- 
 
 de 
 ments of ^universal 'benevolence with which I (have always) 
 
 bienveiUance * ne poiiit cesser G. de 
 
 inspired you, and of which I have seen you give (so many) proofs, 
 A. tant de preuve, 
 
 (remove already every fear I might have) upon that subject : but will you 
 
 me rassurent d^ avance sur point m. 
 
 not yield to other vices not less dangerous 1 Cruel idea ! terrible 
 de non f. affreux 
 
 uncertainty ! If this misfortune were to happen,' ah ! my dear children, 
 
 f. * * arriver, H. 
 
 instead of being the joy and consolation of my life, you would be the 
 
 art. f. 
 
 torment, the shame, and the disgrace (of it). You would poison 
 
 hojite f. opprobre en. empoisonner 
 
 my days, and you would plunge a dagger into the ^very 'bosom which 
 
 porter * art. mort f. même sein m. 
 
 gave you life. But whither is my tenderness for you hurrying me? 
 
 art. où emporter F. 
 
 No, my children ; no, I have nothing to fear ; you love me (too much) to 
 J\i'o7i, trop pour 
 
 wish to afflict me so cruelly ; and I shall have the pleasure (as long as) 
 vouloir * tant qxte 
 
 I live of seeing you walk in the ways of honor and virtue. 
 
 L. A. marcher sentier art. pr. art. 
 
( 177) 
 
 PART III. 
 
 IDIOMS; 
 
 OB, 
 
 WORDS CONSIDERED IN TPIEIR PARTICULAR RÎJLES 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 OF THE SUBSTANTIVE. 
 
 519. The substantive performs three functions in language, 
 that of the subject, the regimen, and the apostrophe. 
 
 520. The substantive is the subject whenever it is that of 
 which something is affirmed. When we say Volseau vole^ 
 the bird flies ; le lion ne vole pas, the lion does not fly ; the 
 substantives oiseau and lion are subjects ; because it is affirmed 
 of the first that it flies, and of the second that it does not fly. 
 
 521. It is to the substantive as the subject that every tiling 
 relates in -a sentence. In the following, un homme juste et 
 ferme n'est ébranlé, ni par les clameurs iVune populace 
 injuste, ni par les menaces d'un fier tyran; quand m,ême le 
 monde brisé s^ écroulerait, il en serait frappé, mais non pas 
 ému, the adjectives jws/e and/erme modify the subject homme, 
 and all the rest modify un homme juste et ferme. 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE SUBSTANTIVE. 
 
 1. A hing\ûiO is inaccessible to men is inaccessible to truth also, and 
 passes his life in a ferocious, inhuman grandeur : as he is continually 
 afraid of being deceived, he always unavoidably is, and deserves to be so ; 
 besides, he is at the mercy of slanderers and tale-bearers — a base, malicious 
 tribe, who feed on venom, and invent mischief, rather than cease to injure. 
 
 2. The good which a man does, is never lost ; if men forget it, God 
 remembers and rewards it 
 
 (1.) Is inaccessible also. Vest anss'i— ferocious, sauvage — inîiuman, et farouche — as 
 he is afraid, craignant— is, Test— £o be so, de Vèlre— besides, de plus — tale-bearers, 
 rapporteur — tribe, nation— /cceZ upon, se nourrir de— TzuscAie/", mal — to injure, de nuire. 
 
 (2.) Good, bien — a man, on — remember, s'en souvenir. 
 
 522. The substantive is the regimen, when governed either 
 
178 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE SUBSTANTIVE. 
 
 by another substantive, by an adjective, by a verb, or by a 
 [«reposition ; as, 
 
 La loi de Dieu, The law of God. 
 
 Utile à C homme, Useful to man. 
 
 Aimer son prochain^ To love one's neighbor. 
 
 Chez son père, At his father's. a 
 
 523. In French, a substantive cannot be governed by an- 
 other substantive but by the help of a preposition ; such as de — 
 as, la difficulté de l'entreprise, the difficulty of the undertaking ; 
 or à ox pour — as, r abandon à ses passions, the giving way to 
 one's passions ; le goût pour le plaisir, the love of pleasure. 
 224. General Rule. When two substantives are found 
 together — the one governing, the other governed — the former 
 is generally placed first. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 La beauté des sentimens, la violence The beauty of sentiments, the vio- 
 des passions, la grandeur des lence of passions, the grandeur 
 fTJé^ne/neris et les succès miraculeux of events, and the prodigious 
 des grandes épées des héros, tout successes of the huge swords of 
 cela m'' entraîne comme une petite heroes, all these transport me 
 Jille. — Sévigné. like a little girl. 
 
 525. Remark. This order is not followed — 1. When, in 
 English, two substantives are joined by an s and an apostrophe 
 placed after the first — thus, 's; as, the king^s palace — that is, 
 the palace of the king — le palais du roi. 2. When the two 
 substantives form a compound word ; as, silk-stockings — that 
 is, stockings of silk — bas de soie, 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 1 . The silence of the night, the calmness of the sea, the trembling light of 
 the moon diffused over the surface of the water, and the dim azure of the sky 
 bespangled with glittering stars, served to heighten the beauty of the scene. 
 
 2. Nothing was heard but the -warbling of birds, or the soft breath of 
 the zephyrs sporting in the branches of the trees, or the mjirmnrs of a 
 lucid rill falling from the rocks, or the soîigs of the young swains who 
 attended Apollo. 
 
 S. A smiling boy was, at the same time, caressing a lap-dog, which is 
 his mother^s favorite, because it pleases the child. 
 
 4. There are several gold and silver mines in this beautiful country ; 
 but the inhabitants, simple, and happy in their simplicity, do not even 
 deign to* reckon gold and silver among their riches. 
 
 (1 ) Tremhling tremblant — diffused, répandu— <Zim, sombre — hespangled,-pnxs&iaé 
 — with, ûe— heighten, rehausser— sce/ic, spectacle. 
 
 (2.) Mjf.hing but, on ne plus que — breath, haleine — sporting {which sported), qui 
 se jouer H — branches, rameaux— lucid rill, eau chi'ire— falling, (which fell) — swains 
 bergers — atte)ided, suivre H. 
 
 ;;3.) Smiling boy, enfant d'un air riant— was caressing, caresser— lap-dog, bichon—' 
 pleases, amuser. 
 
 * In the following exercises, when an asterisk [*] is put after an English word, 
 it ehows that that word is not to be expressed in French. 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ARTICLE. 179 
 
 526. The substantive is an apostrophe whenever it is the 
 object addressed ; as, Rois, peuples, terre, mer, et vous, deux 
 écoutez-moi! — Kings, nations, earth, sea and you heaven, 
 listen to me ! In this sentence, the substantives rois, peuples, 
 terre, mer, and deux, form an apostrophe. 
 
 527. N. B. — It is only in highly oratorical language that the 
 address is thus directed to inanimate or absent objects. 
 
 EXAMPLE OF A BEAUTIFUL APOSTROPHE. 
 O, Hippias ! Hippias ! I shall never see thee again ! O, my dear Hip- 
 pias ! it is I, cruel and void of compassion, who taught thee to despise 
 death. Cruel gods ! ye prolonged my life only that I might see the death 
 of Hippias ! O, my dear child, whom I had brought up with so much 
 care, I shall see thee no more. 0, dear shade, summon me to the banks 
 of the Styx ; the light grows hateful to me ; it is thou only, my dear 
 Hippias, whom I wish to see again. Hippias, Hippias ! O, my dear Hip 
 
 -Fénélon. 
 
 JVever, ne plus — void of covipassion, moi impitoyable — taught, apprendre — pro- 
 longed, prolonger — only that I might, pour me faire — brought up, nourrir G.-vith so 
 much care, et qui me coûter G.tani de soins — shade, ombre — summon, appeler — to, 
 suT—bank^, rive — grows hateful, être odieux — / live but to, ne vivre encore que poux 
 —pay, rendre— asAcs, cendre. 
 
 CHAPTER IL 
 OF THE ARTICLE. 
 
 528. General Principle. — The article is to be used before 
 all substantives common, taken in a determinate sense, unless 
 there be another word performing the same office; but it is 
 not to be used before those that are taken in an indeter- 
 minate sense 
 
 Cases in which the Article is to he used. 
 
 529. Rule I. — The article necessarily accompanies all 
 substantives common, which denote a whole species of things 
 or determinate things. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 L'homme se repaît trop souvent de Man too often feeds on chimeras. 
 
 cliimires. 
 
 Les hommes à imagination sont tou- Men of fanciful dispositions are 
 
 Jours malheuren.c, always unhappy. 
 
 L'homme dont vous parlez est très- The man you speak of is very 
 
 instruit, learned. 
 
180 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ARTICLE. 
 
 530. In the first example, the word homme is taken in its 
 fullest sense; it denotes a collective universality. In the 
 second, les hommes à imagination denotes a whole particular 
 class. In the third, V homme denotes but one individual, being 
 restricted by the incidental proposition dent vous parlez. 
 
 531. Remark. — In English, the article is not used before 
 substantives taken in a general sense ; as, Men of genius^ 
 women of sound understanding. 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE ARTICLE. 
 
 1. The moment eleg-ance, the most visible image of fine taste, appears, 
 it is universally admired : me7i differ respecting the other constituent parts 
 of beauty, but they all* unite without hesitation in acknowledging the 
 power of elegance. 
 
 2. Men of superior genius, while they* see the rest of mankind pain- 
 fully* struggling to comprehend obvious truths, glance themselves* 
 through* the most remote consequences, like lightning through a track 
 that cannot be measured. 
 
 3. The mmi tvho lives under an habitual sense of the divine presence, 
 preserves, a perpetual cheerfulness of temper, and enjoys every moment 
 the satisfaction of thinking himself* in company with the dearest and 
 best of friends. 
 
 (1.) The moment, du moment c\nc—fine, délicat — appears, se montrer — is, elle est— 
 respecting, sur — constituent, (which constitute) — hesitation, hésiter — in, pour. 
 
 (2 ) While, tandis que — struggling, se tourmenter — obvious, qui s'offrent d'elle- 
 mèmes— glance, ils pénètrent en un instant — lightning, foudre, f — through, traverse 
 — track, espace — that, qu'on — be measured, mesurer. 
 
 (3.) Under, dans — sense, conv\ç,\ion— preserves, conserver— perpetual, constant— 
 cheerfulness, gaieté — temper, caractère — enjoys, jouir de — of thinking, se croire — in, 
 dans la — with, de. 
 
 532. Rule II. — The article is put before substantives em- 
 ployed in the sense of an extract, or denoting only a part of 
 a species ; but it is omitted if they be preceded by an adjec- 
 tive or a word of quantity. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Du pain et de l'eau 7ne feraient Some bread and water would please 
 
 plaisir, me. 
 
 Je vis hier des savans qui ne pen- I yesterday saw some learned men, 
 
 sejit pas comme vous, who do not think as you do. 
 
 Voilà de beaux tableaux, There are beautiful pictures. 
 
 J^ achetai hier beaucoup de livres, I bought yesterday many books. 
 
 Que de livres f achetai hier ! How many books I bought yesterday ! 
 
 533. Remark. — Among the words of quantity must be 
 teckoneà plus , moins, pas, point, and Jamais. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 rin^t/ eut Jamais plus de lumières, There never was more learning. 
 n y a moins iThabitans à Pans There are fewer inhabitants in Pans 
 
 çm'à Londres, than in London. 
 
 Je ne manque pna (Vamia, I do not want for friends. 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ARTICLE. 181 
 
 534. Exceptions. — Bien is the only word of quantity 
 
 which is followed by the article. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 II a bien de V esprit, He has a great deal of wit. 
 
 FJle a bien de la grâce, She is very graceful. 
 
 535. Remark. — The sense of extract is marked in English 
 by the word some or any, either expressed or understood, 
 which answers to quelques, a particular adjective, and conse- 
 quently to du, de la, de V, des, which are elegantly used 
 instead of quelque, quelques, &c. 
 
 536. These expressions — des petits-maîtres, des petits- 
 pâtés, &c. — are not exceptions to this rule ; l3ecause, in cases 
 of this kind, the substantives are so united with the adjectives 
 as to form but one and the same word. We should likewise 
 say, le propre des belles actions, les sentimens des anciens 
 philosophes, &c. ; because, in expressions of this kind, the 
 substantives are taken in a general sense. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 1. We could not cast our eyes on either shore without seeing opulent 
 cities, co7t7itry houses agreeably situated, lands yearly covered with a golden 
 harvest, meadows abounding in flocks and herds, Ausbandmen bending 
 un(ftr the weight of the fruits, and shepherds who made the echoes around 
 them repeat the sweet sounds of their pipes and flutes. 
 
 2. Provence and Languedoc produce oranges, lemons, Jigs, olives, 
 almonds, chestnuts, peaches, apricots, and grapes, of an uncommon 
 sweetness. 
 
 .3. The man who has never seen this pure light is as* blind* as* one* 
 who is born blind : he dies without having seen any thing ; at most, he 
 perceives nothing but glimmering and false lights, vain shadoxvs and 
 phantoms that have no reality. 
 
 4. Among the Romans, those who were convicted of having used illicit 
 or ufvivorthjf means to obtain an employ, were excluded from it for ever. 
 
 5. Those whof govern are like the celestial bodies, which have great 
 splendor and no rest. 
 
 6. fVhat beauty, siveetness, modesty, and, at the same time, -what 
 nobleness and greatness of soul ! 
 
 7. Themistocles, in order to ruin Aristides, made use of many artifices, 
 which would have covered him with infamy in the eyes of posterity, had not 
 the eminent services which he rendered his country blotted out that stain. 
 
 (1 ) Could, pouvoir, H. — our, les — either, les ûe\i\— seeing, apercevoir, A. — yearly, 
 tous les ans — covered with, qui se couvrent de — abounding in, remplis àe— flocks and 
 herds, troupeau — bending, qui étaient accabl(^s—«?e?^/<t, poids — shepherds, bergers-^ 
 pipes, chalumeau— ;/te echoes, aux échos— around them, d'alentour. 
 
 (3.) Who is born blind, aveugle né — without having, n'avoir jamais, C. — any thing, 
 rien — at most, tout au p\iis—pe7-ceives nothing but, apercevoir ne que — glimmering, 
 sombre — lights, lueur—- no reality, rien de réel. 
 
 (4.) Used, employer — illicit or unworthy means, moyen illicite ou voie indigne, pi. 
 were. H.— from it, en. 
 
 (.5.) Great, beaucoup de— splendor, éclat— no rest (that have no rest), repos. 
 
 (6.) fVhat, que de. (7.) Ruin, perdre — made use of many, employer J. bien—- 
 
 artifif.es, manoeuvres — with, de — infamy, opprobre — in, à — had, si — rendered, G. à— 
 blotted out, effacer, T.—atain tache. 
 
 Q 
 
1 82 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ARTICLE. 
 
 8. The consequences of great passions are blindness of mind and 
 depravity of heart. 
 
 9. J\i'oblemen should never forget that their high birth imposes great 
 duties on* them. 
 
 (9.) J\roblemen, gentilhomme — should, devoir, F. 
 
 537. Rule III. — The article is put before proper names of 
 countries, regions, rivers, winds, and mountains. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 La France a les Pyrénées et la France is bounded on the south by 
 JVTéditerranée an sud, la Suisse the Pyrenees and the Mediterra- 
 et la Savoie à Vest, les Pays- nean, on the east by Switzerland 
 Bas au nord, ei Vocéan à and Savoy, on the north by the 
 Vouest, Netherlands, and on the west by 
 
 the ocean. 
 La Tamise, le Rhone, Vaquilon, The Thames, the Rhone, the north 
 les Alpes, le Cantal, wind, the Alps, the Cantal. 
 
 538. Remark. — By apposition we find the words le mont 
 Parnasse, le mont Valérien, &c., le fleuve Don, &c. But we 
 shouid say, la 'montagne de Tarare, &;c., la rivière de Seine, 
 (fee, though naver le fleuve du Rhône, but simply le Rhône. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 1. Europe is bounded on the north by the Frozen Ocean; on the 
 south by the Mediterranean Sea, which separates it from Africa ; on the 
 east by the continent of Asia ; on the west by the Atlantic Ocean. It 
 contains the following states: — on the north, .Vorwar/, Sive den, Den- 
 mark, and Russia ; in the middle, Polajid, Prussia, Germany, the 
 United Provinces, the Jsi'etherlands, France, Stvitzerland, Bohemia, 
 Hungary, the British Isles ; on the south, Spain, Portugal, Italy, 
 Turkey in Furope. 
 
 2. The principal rivers in Europe are, the Wolga, the lion or Tandis, 
 and the Boristhenes or JVieper, in Muscovy ; the Danube, the Rhine, 
 and the Flbe, in Germany ; the Vistula or Wezel, in Poland ; the Loire, 
 the Seine, the Rhone, and the Garoyine, in France ; the Ebro, the Tagus, 
 and the Douro, in Spain ; the Po, in Italy ; the Thames and the Severn, 
 in England ; and the Shannon, in Ireland. 
 
 3. The principal mountains in Europe are, the Danrne Fields, between 
 Norway and Sweden; Mount Crapel, between Poland and Hungary; 
 
 he Pyrenean Mountains, between France and Spain ; the Alps, which 
 divide France and Germany from Italy. 
 
 4 The bleak north -wind never blows here, and the heat of summer is 
 tempered by the cooUng zephyrs which arrive to refresh the air towards 
 the middle of the day. 
 
 (1.) Bounded, borné — on, à— frozen ocean, mer glaciale, f. — south, sud or midi— 
 Jilediterranean sea, Méditerranée, f. — east, est or orient — west, ouest or occident— 
 British isles, lies Britanniques — Turkey in, Turquie de. 
 
 (2.) Muscovy, Moscovie — Rhine, Rhin, m. — Vistula, Vistule, f. — Loire, f. — Seine,f. 
 — Rhône, m. — Garonne, f. — Ebro, Ebre — Tagus, Tage, m. — Thames, Tamise, f.— 
 Severn, Saverne, f. 
 
 (3.) Pyrenean Jilountains, Pyrénées. 
 
 4-') Bleak, rigoureux — north wind, aquilon — heat, ardeur — cooling, rafraîclHssant 
 ■—arrtve, venir— fo refresh, adoucir 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THF ARTICLE. 183 
 
 539. Exceptions. — The article is not used before the 
 names of countries, 
 
 540. 1, When those countries have the names of their 
 capitals ; as, Naples est un pays délicieux, Naples is a de- 
 lightful country. 
 
 541. 2, When these are governed by the preposition en ; 
 as, il est en France, he is in France ; il est en Espagne, he 
 is in Spain. 
 
 542. 3, When those names are governed by some preceding 
 noun, and have the sense of an adjective ; as, vins de France, 
 French wines ; noblesse d' Angleterre, the English nobility, 
 
 543. 4, When speaking of those countries as of places we 
 come from ; as, je viens de France, I come from France ; 
 j'arrive d* Italie, I am just arrived from Italy. However, when 
 speaking of the four parts of the world, the present practice 
 favors the use of the article ; as, je viens de V Amérique, j^ ar- 
 rive de VAsie. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 1 . JYaples may be called a paradise, from its beauty and fertility. ^ (From 
 
 this country) '(some suppose) Virgil took the model of the Elysian Fields. 
 
 * 2. I have been a* prisoner ni Egypt, as a* Phœnicia'n : under that 
 
 name I have long suffered, and under that name I have been set at liberty. 
 
 3. He has received French and Spanish wines, Italian silks, Provence 
 oil, and English wool. 
 
 4. We set sail/ro7n Holland for the Cape of Good Hope. 
 
 5. I was but just arrived froivéRiissia when I had the misfortune to 
 lose my father. 
 
 6. I had set o^ from America when my brother arrived there. 
 
 (1.) From, à cause de—from this country, que c'est là où— some suppose, quelques 
 personnes penser. 
 (2 ) Prisoner, cdiplW'— under. that name, c'est sous ce nom Que. 
 (4) Set sail, partir— /or, pour se rendre. 
 (5.) /was ôMtJMst, ne faire que de. 
 («.) Set off, partir— tAere, y.- 
 
 544. The article is also used before the names of coimtries, 
 either distant or little known ; as, la Chine, China ; Ic Japon, 
 Japan ; le Mexique, Mexico ; and before those which have 
 been formed from common nouns ; as, le Havre, le Perche, 
 la Flèche, &c. 
 
 545. Remark. — In English the article is generally omitted 
 before the names of countries. 
 
 Cases in which the Article is not used, 
 
 546. Rule I. — The article is omitted before nouns common 
 when, in using them, nothing is said as to the extent of their 
 signification. 
 
184 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ARTICLE. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Le sage rHa ni amour, ni haîne, The wise man has neither love nor hatred. 
 
 Us ont renversé religion, morale, They have overturned religion, morality 
 
 gouvernemeîit, sciences, beaux- government, sciences, fine arts, in a 
 
 arts, en un mot, tout ce qui fait word, every thing which constitutes 
 
 la gloire et la force (Tim Etat, the glory and strength of a state. 
 
 547. Hence the article is not employed before nouns, 
 48. 1, When they are in the form of a title or an address. 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Préface, Preface. E demeure He lives in 
 
 Livre premier, Book the first. Jiiie Piccadilly, Piccadilly, 
 
 Chapitre dix. Chapter the tenth. Qxiartier St. Jaines, St. James's. 
 
 549. 2, When they are governed by the preposition en, 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Regarder en pitié. To look with pity. Vivre en roi, To live as a king. 
 
 550. 3, When they are joined to the verbs avoir ox fairer 
 with which they form only one idea. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Avoir peur, To be afraid. Faire pitié. To excite pity. 
 
 551. 4, Whenthey are used as an apostrophe or interjection. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Courage, soldais, tenez fer7ne. Courage, soldiers, stand firm. 
 
 552. 5, When they serve to qualify a noun or pronoun. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 // est quelquefois plus qu'homme, Tie is sometimes more than man. 
 Son Altesse Royale le Duc d'York, His Royal Highness the Duke 6f 
 prince du sang, &c. York, prince of the blood. 
 
 ■ 553. 6, The article is not put before the substantive begin- 
 ning an incidental sentence, which is opposed to what has 
 been said. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 Tous les peuples de la terre ont une Ail the nations of the earth have 
 idée plus ou moins développée d\in an idea more or less clear of 
 Etre-S^iprême ; preuve évidente a Supreme Being; an evident 
 que le péché originel n'a pas proof that original sin has not te 
 tout-à-fait obscurci l'entendement, tally obscured the understanding. 
 
 554. 7, When they are governed by the words genre, 
 espèce, sorte, or terms of this kind. 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Sorte de fruit, A sort of fruit. 
 
 Genre d'ouvrage, A kind of work. 
 
 Monceau d'argent, A heap of money. 
 
 Bande de voleurs, A band of robbers. 
 
 Pile de livres, A pile of books. 
 
 Meute de chiens, A pack of dogs. 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ARTICLE 185 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 1. The highways are bordered with laurels, pomegranates, jessamines, 
 and other trees, which* are* always green, and always in bloom. The 
 mountains are covered with Jîocks, which yield a tine wool, in great 
 request among all the known nations (of the world).* 
 
 2. The fleets of Solomon, under the conduct of the Phœnicians, made 
 frequent voyages to the land of Ophir and Tharsis (of the kingdom of 
 Sophala, in Ethiopia), whence they returned at the end of three years, 
 laden with gold, silver, ivory, precious stones, and other kinds of 
 merchandise. 
 
 3. 2( Costly furniture) '(is not allowed there), nor magnificent attire, 
 nor sumptïioiis feasts, nor gilded palaces. 
 
 4. We contemplated with pleasure the extensive fields covered with 
 yellow ears of corn, the* rich gifts of bounteous Ceres. 
 
 5. He was in a kind of ecstacy when he perceived us. 
 
 6. In the most corrupt age, he lived and died a ivise man* 
 
 7. Are you surprised that the worthiest men are but men, and betray 
 remains of the weakness of humanity, amid the innumerable snares and 
 difficulties which* are* inseparable from royalty 1 
 
 8. He excited our pity when we saw him after his disgrace. 
 
 9. Hear then, O nations full of valor ! and you, O chiefs, so wise and 
 so united ! bear what I have* to* ofler to you. 
 
 10. Out of this cavern issued, from time to time, a black thick smoke, 
 jyhich made a sort of night at mid-day. 
 
 (I.) Highways, chemin — with, de — pomegranates, grenadier — in bloom, fleuri— 
 yield, fiurniF — wool, laine, pi. — in great request, recherche — among, de. 
 
 (2.) End, bout — laden, chargé. 
 
 (3.) Is not allowed there, on n'y souffre m— furniture, menhle— costly , précieux— 
 attire, ornement— /easts, repas. 
 
 (4) Extensive, vdste— fields, campagne — ears, épi — bounteous, fécond, f. 
 
 (5.) In a kind of, comme en. 
 
 (6) J3ge, sii'cle. 
 
 (7.) That, de ce c\ue— worthy, estimable— but, encore— betray, montrer— remains, 
 teste— difficulties, embarras. 
 
 (8.) He excited our pity, il nous fit pitié. 
 
 (9.) Hear, ccouter. 
 (10.) Out of, de — issued, sortir — thick, et épais — mid-day, milieu du jour. 
 
 555. Rule II. — The article is not used either before nouns 
 preceded by the pronominal adjectives mon, t07i, son, notre^ 
 votre, leur, ce, nul, aucun, chaque, tout, (used for chaque), 
 certain, plusieurs, tel, or before those which are preceded by 
 a cardinal number without any relation whatever. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Nos mœurs mettent le prix à 7ios Our manners fix the value of cm 
 
 richesses, riches. 
 
 Toute nation a ses lois. Each nation has its laws. 
 
 Cent ignorans doivent-ils Vemporter Are a hundred blockheads to be 
 
 sur un homme instruit ? preferred to one learned man Î 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 1. That good father was happy in his children and his children were 
 happy in him. 
 
 q2 
 
,180 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ARTICLE. 
 
 2 Those imitative sounds are common to all languages, and form, 
 as it were, their* real basis. 
 
 3. Bvery man has his foibles, his moments of ill*- humor, even his 
 irregularities. 
 
 4. Each plant has virtues peculiar to it, the knowledge of which 
 could not but be infinitely useful. 
 
 5. In all his instructions, he is careful to remember that grammar, 
 logic, and rhetoric are three sisters that ought never to be disjoined. 
 
 (2.) Common, fondu — to, àvixis— and form, as it were, et ils en sont comme la — 
 real, fondamentale. 
 
 (4.) Peculiar, qiii sont propres— to it, \m— could, N. — not but, ne que. 
 
 (5.) He is careful to remember, il ne point perdre de vue — ought, on devoit — to be 
 disjoined, séparer. 
 
 556. Rule III. — Proper names of deities, men, animals, 
 towns, and particular' places, do not take the article. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Dieu a créé le ciel et la terre, God has made heaven and earth. 
 
 Jupiter était le premier des dieux, Jupiter was the first of the gods. 
 
 Bucephale était le cheval d'Alex- Bucephalus was Alexander's horse. 
 
 andre, 
 
 Rome est une ville d'une grande Rome is a city of great beauty. 
 
 beauté, 
 
 557. Exceptions. — Proper names, however, take the ar 
 tide when used in a limited sense. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Le Dieu des Chrétiens, The God of Christians. 
 
 Le Dieu de paix, The God of peace. 
 
 Le Jupiter d'Homère, Homer's Jupiter. 
 
 Le Bucéphale d' Alexandre, Alexander's Bucephalus, 
 
 Ij' Ancienne Re me, Ancient Rome. - 
 
 La Borne mo dome. Modern Rome. 
 
 558. N. B. — In imitation of the Italians, the French use 
 the article before the names of several painters and poets of 
 that nation, by an elliptical mode of expression, the words 
 peintre, poète, or seigneur being understood. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 1. Jupiter, son of Satiirn and Cyhele or Ops, after having expelled 
 his father from the throne, divided the paternal* inheritance with his two 
 brothers, JVeptuJie and Pluto. 
 
 2. On a dispute, at a feast of the gods, between Juno, Pallas, and 
 Venus, for the pre-eminence of beauty, Jupiter, not being able to bring 
 them to an agreement, referred the decision to Paris, a shepherd of Mount 
 Ida, with directions that a golden apple should be given to the fairest, 
 Paris assigned to Ve7ius the golden* prize. 
 
 3. God said, let there* be light ; and there* was light. 
 
 (1.) Expelled, chasser— divided, en partager J .—inheritance, héritage, 
 
 (2.) On, dans — at a feast, qu'il y eut à un festin — being able, pouvoir — to bring to 
 
 an agreement, accorder — referred, renvoyer — directions^ ordre — that a golden, &c. to 
 
 give a golden apple to—assigned, adjuger 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADJECTIVE. 187 
 
 4. The Apollo di Belvidere and the Venus di Medicis are valuable 
 remains of antiquity. 
 
 5. May and September are the two finest months of the year in the 
 south of France. 
 
 6. The God of Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob was the only true God. 
 
 (4 ) Di Belvidere de Belvéder— <ii, Ae— valuable, précieux. 
 (6.) Only, seul. » 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 Of the Adjective ivith the Article. 
 
 559. Rule I.— «Adjectives used substantively are, like sub- 
 stantives common, accompanied by the article, if the occasion 
 require it. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Les fous inventent les modes, et Fools invent fashions, and wise men 
 les sages s^y conforment, conform to them, 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 1. Were the learned of antiquity to come to Ufe again, they would be 
 much astonished at the extent of our knowledge. 
 
 2. The ignorant have, in a* large stock of presumption, what they want 
 in real knowledge, and that is the reason they are admired by fools. 
 
 (1) Were the, si les — to come again, revenir -11. — life, monde — at,Ae — knon ledge, 
 connaissance, pi. 
 
 (2.) Large stock, forte dose — theij want, il leur manquer — knowledge, science — the 
 reason, ce qui fait que— they are, &cc., the fools admire them. 
 
 560. Rule II.— When a noun is accompanied by two ad- 
 jectives, expressing opposite qualities, the article must be 
 repeated before each adjective. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Les vieux et les nouveaux soldats The.old and the newiy-raîsed soldiers 
 sont remplis d'ardeur, are full of ardor. 
 
 Il faut fréquenter la bonne com- We ought to frequent good and shun 
 pagnie et fuir la mauvaise, bad company. 
 
 561 . Remark. — But if those qualities be nearly similar, the 
 article is not repeated ; as. Le sage et pieux Fénélon If 
 merely different, it is perhaps better to repeat it; as. Le 
 sensible et V ingénieux Fénélon. 
 
 562. N. B. — In French, the substantive must be joined to 
 the iirst adjective, when governed by different wordsf 
 
188 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 1. The ancient and modern writers are not agreed upon that point. 
 
 2. The wise man preserves the same tranquillity of mind in good or 
 had fortune. 
 
 3. The man who is jealous of his reputation frequents good and shuns 
 bad company. 
 
 4. Grand and vigorous thoughts are always the offspring of genius. 
 
 (1 ) Writers, auteur — are agreed, s'accorder. 
 
 (•2.) The wise man, le sage. 
 
 (3.) Vigorous, fort — offspring, fruit. 
 
 563. Rule III. — The article is used before the adjective 
 which is joined to a. proper name, either to express its quality, 
 or to distinguish the person spoken of from those who might 
 bear the same name. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Le sublime Bossuet, Le vertueux Fénélon, Le tendre Racine, 
 
 The sublime Bossuet, The virtuous Fenelon. The tender Racine. 
 
 Louis le Gros, Loids le Juste, Louis le Grand, 
 
 Louis the Fat. Louis the Just. Louis the Great. 
 
 564. Remark. — If the adjective which is joined to a proper 
 name precede that name, it expresses a quality which may be 
 common to many; if it follow, it expresses a distinguishing 
 quality. Thus, Le savant Varron, and Varron le savant, do 
 not convey the same meaning: in the first example, Varron 
 merely obtains the quality oî savant ; in the second, Varron 
 is distinguished for his learning from all of the same name. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 1. The great Corneille astonishes by beauties of the first order and by 
 faults of the worst taste. If the tender Racine does not often rise so high, 
 at least, he is always equal, and possesses the art of always interesting 
 the heart. 
 
 2. The more we read the fables of the good and artless La Fontaine, 
 tiie more we are convinced they are a book for all ages, and the manual 
 of the man of taste. 
 
 3. It was only under the reign of Loids the Just (XTIL), that good 
 taste began to show itself in France ; but it was under that of Louis the 
 Great that it was carried to perfection. 
 
 (1.) By, par des — order, ordre — is always equal, se soutenir — possesses, avoir. 
 (2) Tàe more we, plus on — artless, simple — are convinced, on se convainc — they 
 are, que c'est — a, le— for, tie — manual, manuel. 
 (3.) OjUi/, ne que — carried, porter à. 
 
 565. Rule IV. — When a superlative relative precedes a 
 substantive, the article serves for both ; if it follow, the article 
 must be repeated before each. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Les plus naoiles ^e7ts /b7i^ qicelquefois les pins grdJ^iies fautes ; or 
 Les gens les plus habiles yb)i? quelquefois les fautes les plus grandes, 
 The ablest men sometimes commit the grossest blimdere. 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADJECTIVE. 189 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 1. It has been said of the Telemachus of the virtuous Fénélon, that it 
 is the most useful present the muses have made to mankind ; for, could 
 the happiness of man be produced by a poem, it would be by that. 
 
 2. The smoothest ivaters often conceal the most dangerous gulfs. 
 
 (1.) It has been said, on a dit — present, don que — have made, R,- -could, (if the, &C 
 could H)—be produced by, naître de — would be, naître, N. 
 (2.) Smoothest, tranquille. 
 
 The Place of adjectives. 
 
 566. Rule I. — Pronominal and numerical adjectives pre- 
 cede their substantives as do generally the following sixteen : 
 beau, bon^ brave, cher, chétif, grand, gros, jeune, mauvais, 
 méchant, meilleur, moindre, petit, saint, vieux, and vrai^ 
 when taken in their literal sense. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 jyion père, My father. Plusieurs officiers, Several officers. 
 
 Quel homme, What man. Grand homme. Great man. 
 
 Vieille femme, Old woman, Six arbres, Six trees. 
 
 Dix gui7iées, Ten guineas. Chétive mine, Mean look. 
 
 567 Exception 1, The pronoun quelconque. 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Hune manière quelconque, In whatever manner. 
 
 568. 2, Adjectives of number, joined to proper names, pro- 
 nouns, and substantives, as quotations. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 George Trois, George Third. Chapitre dix, Chapter tenth. 
 
 Ltd dixième, He the Tenth. Page trente. Page the thirtieth. 
 
 569. 3, The above sixteen adjectives, when connected by 
 a conjunction with another adjective, which is to be placed 
 after the substantive. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 C'est une femme grande et bien faite, She is a tall, well-made woman. 
 
 570. Remark. — In English, two or even several adjectives 
 may qualify a substantive, without a conjunction : but in 
 French, this is generally required ; as, c''est un homme aimable 
 et poli, he is an amiable, well-behaved man ; except when 
 custom allows the substantives to be placed between two ad- 
 jectives ; as, c'est un grand homme sec, he is a tall, thin man. 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE PLACE OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 1 . There have been ages when a great man was a sort of prodigy, 
 produced by a mistake of nature. 
 
 2. In almost all nations, the great geniuses that have adorned them 
 were contemporaries. 
 
 Î1.) jJges, lies siècles — when, où—produccd, enfanter. 
 2.) In, chQZ— nations, peuple— adorned, illustrer, G. 
 
190 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 3. Young people, says Horace, are supple to the enticements of vice, 
 lavish, presumptuous, and equally impetuous and light in their passions ; 
 old people, on the contrary, are covetous, dilatory, timid, ever alarmed 
 about the future, always complaining, hard to please, panegyrists of times 
 past, censors of the present, and great givers of advice. 
 
 4. What inan was ever satisfied with his condition and dissatisfied 
 with his abilities 1 
 
 5. Thirty chambers, which have a communication one with another, 
 and each of them an iron door, with six huge bolts, are the places where 
 
 . he shuts himself up. 
 
 (3) People, gens — supple, souple — lavish, prodigue — impetuous, \if— old, f. pi. (the 
 following adjectives in the pi.) — covetous, avare — dilatory, temporiseur— aiout, sur 
 — cowplaining, plaintif— AarfZ, difficile— p/case, contenter — tivies, sing. 
 
 (4.) Dissatisfied, mécontent — abilities, esprit. 
 
 (5.) Have a communication, communiquer — each of them, dont chacun avoir — huge, 
 gros — bolts, verion^places, lieu, sing. — shuts himself, se renfermer. 
 
 571. Rule II. — Adjectives formed from the participle pre- 
 sent of verbs, are generally placed after the substantive : 
 ouvrage divertissant, entertdimïng work; and from the par- 
 ticiple past, always : figure arrondie, round figure ; those 
 expressing form : table ovale, oval table ; color : maison 
 blanche, white house ; taste : herbe amère, bitter herb ; sound : 
 argue harmonieux, harmonious organ; action: procureur 
 actif, active attorney ; effect : coutume abusive, custom 
 founded in abuse ; arrangement : ordre grammatical, gram- 
 matical order ; species : qualité occulte, occult quality ; 
 nation : générosité anglaise, English generosity ; those 
 ending in -esque, -il, -ule, -ic, -ique, -in : 
 
 Style Burlesque, Burlesque style. Bien public. Public welfare. 
 
 Jargon puéril. Childish jargon. Bis sardonigjie, Sardonic grin. 
 
 Femme crédule. Credulous woman, Voix enfantine. Childish voice. 
 
 But in this, custom is the best guide 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 1 . An affected simplicity is a refined imposture. 
 
 2. The s)niling images of Theocritus, Virgil, and Gessner, excite in 
 the soul a soft sensibility. 
 
 3. In that antique palace are to be seen neither -wreathed columns, 
 nor gilded wainscots, nor valuable basso-relievoes, nor ceilings curiously 
 fainted, nor grotesque figures of animals, which never had existence but 
 in the imagination of a child or a madman. 
 
 4. If human life is exposed to many troubles, it is also susceptible of 
 many pleasures. 
 
 5. A ridicidous man is seldom so by halves. 
 
 (1.1 Rcfiued, délicat. 
 
 (-2.) Smiling, riant — excite, porter — soft, doux. 
 
 (3) J3re to be seen, on ns" vail— wreathed, torse — wainscots, lambris— basso-reltevoes, 
 oas relief— ciclings, plafond—curiously, ariistement — had existence, exister. 
 (4.) Many, bien de — troubles, peine. 
 (5.) So, le "by halves, à demi. 
 
ARTICULAR RULFS OF THE ADJECTIVE. 191 
 
 6. Spanish manners have, at first sight, something harsh and uncivilized, 
 
 7. French urbanity has become a proverb among foreig-7i nations. 
 
 (6.) Spanish, espagnol— manwers, mœurs— af first sight, au premier abord— 
 uncivilized, sauvage. 
 (7.) Become, passer en — avwng, chez. 
 
 572. Rule III. — Although it may seem that adjectives 
 expressing moral qualities are placed indifferently before oi 
 after the substantive, yet taste and a correct ear will assign 
 them their proper situation. 
 
 573. In conversation, or in a broken, loose style, it may be 
 indifferent to say, femme aimable or aimable femme ; talens 
 sublimes or sublimes talens, &c. ; but in the dignified style, 
 the place of the adjective may, in a variety of instances, affect 
 the beauty of a sentence. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 1. An amiable woman gives to every thing she says an inexpressible 
 grace ; the more we hear, the more we wish to hear her. 
 
 2. The majestic eloquence of Bossuet is like a river which carries 
 away every thing in its rapid course. 
 
 3. The sublime compositions of Rubens have made "^an ''English 
 ^traveller 'say, that this famous painter was born in Flanders, through a 
 mistake of nature. 
 
 (1.) Give to, répandre sur — we, on. [cours. 
 
 (2.) River, fleuve — carries away, entraîner — its rapid course, la rapidité de son 
 (3.) Say, dire à— famous, célèbre— through, par — mistake, méprise. 
 
 Regimen of Adjectives. 
 
 574. Rule. — A noun may be governed by two adjectives, 
 provided these do not require different regimens ; as, Cet 
 homme est utile et cher à sa famille, that man is useful and 
 dear to his family. But it would be incorrect to say, Cet 
 homme est utile et chéri de sa famille, that man is useful and 
 beloved by his family; because the adjective utile does not 
 govern the preposition de. 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE REGIMEN OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 1. A young man, whose actions are all regulated by honor, and whose 
 only aim is perfection in every thing, is beloved and courtedhy every body. 
 
 2. Cardinal Richelieu was all his life time feared and hated by the 
 great whom he had humbled. 
 
 3. A young lady, mild, polite, and delicate, who sees in the advantage.^ 
 of birth, riches, wit, and beauty nothing but incitements to virtue, is very 
 certain of being beloved and esteemed by every body. 
 
 (].) actions are regulated by honor, l'honneur dirige les actions — whose only aim 
 is, qui ne se propose que — courted, recherché. 
 
 (2.) Young lady, demoiselle — delicate, décent — nothing but. ne que — incitements 
 encouragement — certain, assuré. 
 
192 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADJECTIVES OF NUMBER/ 
 
 Adjectives of Number. 
 
 575. Unième is used only after vingt, trente, quarante, 
 cinquante, soixante, quatre-vingts, cent, and Jinille. C^est la 
 vingt-et-unième fois, it is the twenty-first time. See page 58. 
 
 576. Cent, in the plural, takes s, except when followed by 
 another noun of number ; as, 
 
 lis étaient deux cents, They were two hundred. 
 
 Trois cents hommes, • Three hundred men. 
 
 Us, étaient deux cent dix, They were two hundred and ten. 
 
 577. Vingt, m quatre-vingts 'dud six-vingtstBlso takes 5, 
 when followed by a substantive ; as, 
 
 Quatre-vingts hommes, Eighty men. 
 
 Six-vingts abricots, Six score apricots. 
 
 578. But it takes no s when followed by anothei term ex- 
 pressing number, quatre-vingt-un arbres, quatre-vingt-dix 
 hommes. 
 
 579. The ordinal numbers, collective and distributive, 
 always take the sign of the plural: les premières douzaines, 
 the, first dozens; les quatre cinquièmes, the four-fifths. 
 
 580. For dates, the French write mil ; as, mil sept cent- 
 quatre-vingt-dix-neuf, one thousand seven hundred and 
 ninety-nine, &c. See page 60. 
 
 581. Remark. — Cent and mille are used indefinitely; as, 
 
 II lui Jit cent caresses, He showed him a hundred marks 
 
 of kindness. 
 Faites-lui mille amitiés de ma part, Present him for me a thousa?id 
 
 compHments. 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE ADJECTIVES OF NUMBER. 
 
 1. It was the thirty-Jîrst year after so glorious a peace when the war 
 broke out again, with a fury of which history offers few examples. 
 
 2. There were only three hundred, and in spite of their inferiority in* 
 numbers,* they attacked the enemy, beat, and dispersed them. 
 
 3. He has sold his country house for two thousand Jive hundred and 
 Jlfiy pounds. 
 
 4. Choose out of your nursery eighty fruit-trees and ninety dwarf- 
 trees ; divide them into dozens, and put in the first two dozens of each 
 sort those whose fruits are most esteemed. 
 
 5. When Louis the Fourteenth made his entry into Sfrasburg the 
 Swiss deputies having come to pay their respects to him. Le Tellier, arch- 
 bishop of Reims, who saw among them the bishop of Basle, said to one 
 
 (1.) Year, année- when, que — Iroke out again, se rallumer. 
 
 (2) Only, ne que— ira spite of, malgré. (3.) Poiinds, livres sterling. 
 
 (4.) Out of, dans — nursery, ipépinière— fruit-trees, pied d'arbre fruitier— t^icar/- 
 trees, arbre nain. 
 C5.) Swiss, (of the Swiss\—pay, presenter — respect, hommage — one near kim. son 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADJECTIVES OF NUMBER. 1 93 
 
 near him, " That bishop is apparently some miserable character." " How !" 
 replied the other, " he has a htmdred thousand livres a year." " Oh, oh !" 
 «aid the archbishop^ " he is then a respectable man ;" and showed him a 
 thousand civilities. 
 
 voisin — that bishop, &c., c'est un misérable apparemment que cet évcque — a year 
 de tente— showed, faire— civilities, caresse. 
 
 582. The French say, le onze, du onze, au onze, sur les 
 onze heures, sur les une heure, pronouncing the words onze 
 and une as if they were written with an h aspirated. 
 
 583. The cardinal numbers are used for the ordinal. , 
 
 584. 1. — In reckoning time — that is, the hour of the day, 
 the day of the month, the year of an era ; as, il est trois 
 heures, it is three o'clock ; le vingt de Mars, the twentieth-of 
 March ; Pan mil sept cent dix, &c. See pages 60. 
 
 585. 2. — In speaking of the order of sovereigns ; as, Louis 
 seize, George trois ; except the first two of the series ; as, 
 Henri premier, George second. , Quint for cinq is only said 
 of the Empereur Charles-quint and the Pape Sixte-quint. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 1. They made in the parish and in the neighboring places a collection 
 which produced a hundred and txoenty-one guineas. 
 
 2. William, surnamed the Conqueror, king of England and duke of 
 Normandy, was one of the greatest generals of the eleventh century ; he 
 was born at Falaise, and was the natural son of Robert, duke of Normandy, 
 and of Arlotte, a furrier's daughter. 
 
 3. Make haste ; it will soon be ten o'clock. We shall have a good 
 deal of difficulty to arrive in time. 
 
 4. The winter was so severe in one thousand seven hundred and m?ie 
 that there was but one olive-tree that resisted it,* in a plain where there 
 had been more than ten thousand. 
 
 5. It was the ttventy-first of January, one thousand seven hundred and 
 ninety-three, that the Unhappy Louis the sixteenth was led to the scaffold. 
 
 (1.) They, on — neiirhboring places, voisinage, sing. — collection, quête. 
 (2.) WilUam, Guillaume— /wrrier, fourreur. [in, à. 
 
 (3) Make haste, se dépêcher — will be, F. — a good deal of difficulty bien de la peine- 
 (4.) Severe, rude — but, ne que — had been, H. 
 
 R 
 
194 rARTÏCULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUN?. 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 OP PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 Office of Personal Pronouns. 
 
 586. The personal pronouns have the three characteristics 
 of the substantive — that is, subject, regimen, and apostrophe; 
 but with this difference, that some always form the subject; 
 two only are used as an apostrophe : some always form the 
 regimen, and lastly, others are sometimes the subject and 
 sometimes the regimen. 
 
 587. Je, tu, il, and ils, are always the subject; these four 
 pronouns cannot be separated from the verb which they govern 
 but by personal pronouns acting as a regimen or by the nega- 
 tive ne. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Je ne lui en veux rien dire, I will say nothing to him about it 
 
 Tu en apprendras des nouvelles, Thou wilt hear news of it. 
 // nous raconta son histoire, . He told us his history. 
 Us sont survenus à V improviste, They are come unexpectedly 
 
 588. The two acting as an apostrophe are toi, thou, and 
 vous, you, whether they stand alone or are preceded by the 
 interjection Oi asj, toi^ô tçi: VQUS, o vous,. 
 
 EXERCISE ON PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 1. The better to bear the irksomeness of captivity and solitude, / sought 
 for books ; for / was overwhelmed with melancholy, for want of some 
 knowledge to cherish and support my mind. 
 
 2. Since thou art more obdurate and unjust than thy father, mayest 
 fhou suffer evils more lasting and more cruel than his! 
 
 3. What ! say they ; do not men die fast enough without destroying 
 each other \ Life is so short, and yet it seems that it appears too long to 
 them. Are they sent into the world to tear each other m pieces, and to 
 make themselves wretched ] 
 
 4< O thou, my son, my dear son, ease my heart : restore me what ia 
 dearer to me than my life ! Restore to me my lost son, and restore thy- 
 self to thyself. 
 
 6. O ye, who hear me with so much attention, believe not that I despise 
 men ! No, no ; I am sensible how glorious it is to toil to make them 
 virtuous and happy ; but this toil is full of anxieties and dangers. 
 
 (J.) To bear, supporter — irksomeness, enii'i — overwhelmed with, accablé de— for 
 toant, faute — to cherish, qui pût nourrir — sup-port, soutenir. 
 
 (2 ) Obdurate, dur — mayest, pouvoir, Q,. — lasting, long. 
 
 (3.) Die fast enough, être assez mortel — destroying each other, se donner encore 
 une mort précipitée — sent into, sur — world, terre — tear in pieces, se déchirer — make 
 thcmsifves, se rendre. 
 
 li.) Ease, aoulager — restore, rendre — lost (whom I have lost), perdre. 
 
 (5.) / am sensible, aavoir—glorioîis, grand— to toil, de travailler à— toil travail— 
 anxictias, inquiétude, sing. 
 
PARTiCULAH RULES OF THE PnO^Otfié. 195 
 
 589. J/e, te, se, leur, le, la, les, y, and en are always used 
 as a regimen : direct, when acted upon by the verb — indirect, 
 when referable to the prepositions à or de. (See page 155.) 
 They always precede the verb, except in the imperative when 
 affirmative, and can never be separated from it by any other 
 word, except tout, rien, and jamais, which may intervene 
 before an infinitive. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 C'est leur tout refuser, It is refusing them every thing. 
 
 C'est ne me rien permettre. It is allowing me nothing. [him. 
 
 E a juré de ne lui '^dXûAXs pardonner, He has sworn he would never pardoa 
 
 590. Me, te, se, form a regimen, sometimes direct and 
 sometimes indirect: direct, when they represent moi, toi, 
 soi ; indirect^ when they supply the place of à moi, à toi, à 
 soi. See pages 61 and 62. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Vous me soupçonnez niai à propos, You suspect me unjustly. 
 Je t^en remercie, ~1 thank thee for it. 
 
 iZ se perd de gaieté de cœur. He ruins himself oUt of wanto&nêss. 
 
 Vous me donnez un sage conseil. You ^ve me prudent advice. 
 .Te te donne cela, I give thee that. 
 
 Il se donne bien du mouvement, He is âti active, stirring man. 
 
 591. Leur is always indirect, as it stands for à eux, or à elles. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 Te leur représentai le tort quHls, I represented to them the injury 
 ou qu'elles se fesaient, they did themselves, 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 1. He has been speaking to them with such energy as has astonished 
 them. 
 
 2. Women ought to be very circumspect ; for a mere appearance is 
 éometimes more prejudicial to them than a real fault. 
 
 3. He comes up to me with a smiling countenance, and, pressing my 
 hand, says, " My friend, I expect you to-morrow at my house." 
 
 4. He said to me, " Wilt thou torment thyself incessantly for advan- 
 tages, the enjoyment of which could not render thee more happy 1 Cast 
 thy eyes around thee : see how every thing smiles at thee, and seems to 
 invite thee to prefer a retired and tranquil life to the tumultuous pleasures 
 of a vain world." 
 
 5. The ambitious man* agitates, torments, and destroys himself to 
 obtain the places or the honors to which he aspires ; and when he has 
 obtained them, he is still dissatisfied. 
 
 (1.) Such energy as, une forcie qui. 
 
 (2.^ Mere, simple— more prejudicial, faire plus de tot t. 
 
 (3.) Comes up with, aborder de— pressing, serrer— m*/ hand, la main— says, il me 
 dit — at my house, chez moi. 
 
 (4.) Incessantly, sans cesse — advantages, des biens — could, savoir N.— ca9t, porter 
 '-thy, les — smiles, sourire. 
 
 (1.) Destroys, coûsiiraer— to> poiir. 
 
196 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 592. Ze, /«, les, are always direct regimen ; as, 
 
 Je le vois, je la row, for je vois \m,je vois elle. 
 
 Je les vois, ' ïox je vois e\xx, je vois qWqs. 
 
 593. But y and en are always indirect regimen ; as, 
 Je TLXj entends rien, for je rù entends rien à cela. 
 Ces fnùts sont bons, en voulez-vous ? for voulez-vous d'iceux? 
 Avez-vous reçu de V argent P—oui, for un peu, une certaine sommet 
 
 j'en, ai reçu, or quantité d'argent. 
 
 594. Though seeming to perform the function of regimen 
 direct in this last and other phrases of the same kind, it is 
 obvious that there is in the word en an ellipsis, which may 
 be readily supplied. See pages 65 and 66. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 1. I have known him since his childhood, and I always loved him on 
 account of the goodness of his character. 
 
 2. This woman is always occupied in doing good works : you see her 
 constantly consoling the unhappy, relieving the poor, reconciling enemies, 
 and promoting the happiness of every one around her. 
 
 3. The more you live with men, the more you will be convinced that it is 
 necessary to know them well before you* form a connexion with them. 
 
 4. Enjoy the pleasures of the world, I consent to it s but never give 
 yourself up to them. 
 
 5. I shall never consent to that foolish scheme ; do not mention it 
 any* more. 
 
 6. Have you received some copies of the new work 1 Yes, I have, 
 (received some). 
 
 (1) Have known, connaître F. — loved, G. — on account, à cause — the goodness ofhia, 
 (his good). 
 
 (2.) In, à — works, œuvres, f. — constantly, sans cesse — consoling, A. — relieving, 
 assister— promoting, faire — every one around her, tout ce qui l'environne. 
 
 ^3.) Live, L. — be convinced, se convaincre — before, avant de— form a connexion, vous 
 
 f4.) Enjoy, jouir de — give yourself up, se livrer. [lier A. 
 
 (5.) Scheme, entreprise — mention, parler de. 
 
 (6.) Copies, exemplaires. 
 
 595. The pronouns which are sometimes the subject and 
 sometimes the regimen, are nous, vous, moi, toi, lui, elle, 
 eux, elles. 
 
 596. Nous and vous are the subject in nous aimons, vous 
 aimez ; the regimen direct in ils nous aiment, Us vous aiment; 
 and indirect in ils nous parlent, ils vous parlent. 
 
 597. In general, moi, toi, are only the subject by apposition 
 or reduplication, whether they precede or follow the verb ; as, 
 Jfoi, dont il déchire la réputation, I, whose reputation he is aspers- 
 
 je ne lui ai jamais rendu que de ing, always did him acts of 
 
 bons offices, kindness, 
 
 'Toi, qui fais tant le brave, tu Wouldst thou, who pretendest to 
 
 oserais, &c., be so brave, dare, &c. 
 
 Je prétends, moi, ^ I do maintain, I. 
 
 Tu dis donc, toi Thou sayest then, thou.^ 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUfsTS. 197 
 
 _ 598. Remark. — Sometimes the personal pronouns je and 
 tu are not expressed, but understood; as, 
 
 Moi, trahir le meilleur de mes amis ! I, betray my best friend ! 
 
 Faire une lâcheté, toi ! Thou, be guilty of such baseness ! 
 
 that is, Je voudrais moi, &c. ! tu pourrais toi, Sic. ! 
 
 599. They are likewise the subject when they are placed 
 in a kind of apposition expressed by ce and il in impersonal 
 verbs ; as, qui fut bien aise ? ce fut moi ; ce ne peut être que 
 toi; que vous reste-t-il? — moi. 
 
 600. After a conjunction, they are either the subject or 
 regimen, according to the nature of the phrase ; as, nous y 
 étions mon père et moi ; il ne craint ni toi ni moi. 
 
 601. In phrases which are not imperative, toi and moi can 
 only be the object by apposition before or after the verb; as, 
 voudriez-vous me perdre, moij votre allié, Sic, toi, Je te 
 soupçonnerais de perfidie ! 
 
 602. After a preposition, they alone can be employed ; as, 
 vous servirez-vous de moi? selon moi vous avez raison; il 
 est fâché contre toi. 
 
 603. What has just been remarked of toi and ^oi is appli- 
 cable to lui, but with this difference, that lui can only be the 
 object after ne — que, signifying only, or in distributive 
 phrases ; as, 
 
 JSTaimez que lui, je ne le trouve That you should Hke only him, 1 
 pas mauvais ; mais ne me haïs- do not disapprove, but du not 
 sez pas, hate me. 
 
 604. So, protégez-nous, lui, à cause de, &c. et moi, parce 
 que. Sic. we may likewise say by apposition, aimez-le, lui 
 qui, &c. 
 
 605. JSux is employed in the same manner as lui, but 
 differs from it in this, that it cannot be the regimen indirect, 
 except after a preposition ; as, parliez^vous cVeux? est-ce à 
 eux que vous parlez ? 
 
 606. Remark. — Lui and eux may be the subject in distri- 
 butive phrases without being in apposition ; as. 
 
 Mes frères et mon cousin m^07it My brothers and cousin assisted me 
 secouru ; eux ni ont relevé, et they took me up, and he dressed 
 hd m^a pansé, my wounds. 
 
 607. The natural office of elle and elles is to form the 
 subject ; however, they are susceptible of all the other uses juist 
 mentioned, except that they cannot be the regimen indirect, 
 unless preceded by a preposition ; as, c'est à elles que je parle 
 
 r2 
 
198 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 1. In the education of youth, we should propose to ourselves to culti- 
 vate, to polish their* understanding, and thus to enable them to fill with 
 dignity the different stations assigned them ; but, above all, we ought to 
 instruct them in that religious worship which God requires of them. 
 
 2. What ! you would suffer yourself io be overwhelmed by adversity ! 
 
 3. /.' stoop to the man who has imbrued his hands in the blood of 
 his king ! 
 
 4. Thou ! take that undertaking upon thyself 1 Canst* thou think of it % 
 
 5. Your two brothers and mine take charge of the enterprise ; they find 
 the money, and he will manage the work. 
 
 6. It is / who have engaged him to undertake this journey. 
 
 7. It is thou who hast brought this misfortune on thyself. 
 
 8. When you are at Rome, write to me as often as you can, and give 
 me an account of every thing- that can interest me. 
 
 9. He told it to thee thyself 
 
 10. Fortune, Uke a traveller, shifts firom inn to inn ; if she lodges to-day 
 with me, to-morrow, perhaps, she will lodge ~a)ith thee. 
 
 11. Whom dost thou think we were talking of? — it was of thee. 
 
 12. Descartes deserves immortal praise, because it is he who has made 
 reason triumph over authority in philosophy. 
 
 1 3. He is dissatisfied -with himself 
 
 1 4. She is never satisfied ~u)ith herself 
 
 15. The indiscreet often betray themselves. 
 
 16. Saumaise, speaking of the English authors, said that he had learned 
 more from them than from any other. 
 
 17. To love a person, is to render him, on every occasion, all the ser- 
 vices in our power, and to afford him, in society, every comfort that 
 depends upon iis, 
 
 (1.) Youth, jeunes gens — should, devoir F. — to cultivate, (to them) — to polish, (to 
 theni) orr.er — understanding, l'esprit — enable, disposer — stations, place — (which are) 
 assigned fto) them — worship, culte — recMtres, demander. 
 
 (2.) Suff'er yourself, se laisser N. — to be overwhelmed, abattre. 
 
 (3.) Stoop to, s'abaisser devant Q,.— imbrued, souiller— ira, de. 
 
 4.) TaJce upon thyself, se charger N. — of it, y. 
 
 (5.) Take charge, se charger— ^«d, fournir — money, fonds, pi. — manage, conduire F. 
 
 ((j.) Undertake, fane— journey, voyage. 
 
 (7.) Hast brought on thyself, s'attirer G. 
 
 (8.) Are, L. — ean, l,.—give, faire— ara account, le detail. 
 
 (9.) Told, dire G . 
 
 no ) Shifts from inntoinn,changer d'anherge— iDitk,chez— she will lodge,é\le être L. 
 (ii.) ÎVrrc talking, parler S. 
 (12) Triumph over, triompher de. 
 (13.) Is dissatisfied with, se déplaire. 
 (14 ) Satisfied with, content de. 
 (15.) Betray, se trahir. 
 
 (17.) In our power, dont on être capable— afford, procurer à— comfort, agrément— 
 depends upon, dépendre de. 
 
 071 the Pronoun soi. 
 608. Soi is generally accompanied by a preposition, and 
 is used in phrases where there is an indeterminate pronoun, 
 either expressed or understood : on doit rarement parler de 
 sois il est essentiel de prendre garde à soi. In this case, il 
 is the regimen indirect, but it may be employed without a 
 preposition. 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 199 
 
 609. 1. — With the verb être ; as, JSn cherchant à tromper 
 tes autres, c'est souvent soi que Von trompe, or on est souvent 
 trompé soi-même, in attempting to deceive others, we fre- 
 quently deceive ourselves. In this situation it is the subject. 
 
 610. 2. — After ne que, or by apposition ; as, 
 
 JV'aimer que soi, c^est n^être bon To love only ourselves is being good 
 
 à rien, for very little. 
 
 Penser ainsi, c'est s'aveugler soi- To think in this manner, is to blind 
 
 même, one's-self. 
 
 611. It is in these examples the regimen ; but when de soi 
 and en soi are used in a definitive sense in speaking of things, 
 they mean de sa nature and dans sa nature. 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE PRONOUN SOL 
 
 1. To excuse in one's-self the follies which one cannot excuse in others 
 IS to prefer being a fool one's-self to seeing others so. 
 
 2. To be too much dissatisfied vpith ourselves is a weakness ; but to 
 be too much satisfied fwith ourselves J is (a) folly. 
 
 3. We ought to despise no one : how often have we needed the assist- 
 ance of one more insignificant than ourselves ? 
 
 4. If we did not attend so much to ourselves, there would be less ego- 
 tism in the world. 
 
 5. Vice is odious in itself. 
 
 6. The loadstone attracts iron (to itself J. 
 
 (1.) Follies, sottises — others, autrui— to prefer, aimer mieux— fool, sot — to seeing, que 
 de voir — so, lei. 
 
 (3.) We ought, il falloir F. — how often, combien de fois — we, on — needed the assist' 
 ante, n'avoir pas besoin — insignificant, petit. 
 
 f 4 ) We, on — attend to, s'occuper de — egotism, égoïsme. 
 
 (6.) Loadstone, aimant. 
 
 Cases ivhere the Pronouns elle, elles, eux, lui, leur may 
 apply to things. 
 
 612. The personal pronouns elle and elles, when the regi- 
 men, generally apply to persons only. Thus, in speaking of 
 a woman, we must say. Je m^approchai d'elle, je m^assis 
 près d'elle ; but, in speaking of a table. Je m'en approchai, je 
 ni' assis auprès. 
 
 613. However, with the prepositions avec, après, à, de, 
 dour, en, Sic. they may be applied to things. Thus, it is 
 correct to say — of a river. 
 
 Cette rivière est si rapide, quand That river is so rapid when it over- 
 
 elle déborde, qu'elle entraine avec flows that it carries away every 
 
 elle tout ce qu'elle rencontre ; elle thing it meets with in its course; 
 
 ne laisse après elle que du sable it leaves nothing behind but sand 
 
 et des cailloux, and pebbles. 
 
 614. — Of an enemy's army, 
 
 Xous marchâmes à elle, We marched up to it. 
 
PARTICULAR RFLES OF THE PRdNdTTNS. 
 
 615. — Of things, reasons, truth, &c. ; as, 
 
 Ces choses sont bonnes (V elles-mêmes, These things are good in themselves. 
 J'aime la vérité au point que je I love truth to that degree, that I 
 
 sacrifierais tout potcr elle, would sacrifice every thing for it 
 
 Ces raisons sont solides en elles- Those reasons are solid in them 
 
 mêmes, selves. 
 
 616. After the verb être^ tliey are applied only to persons, 
 and likewise when they are followed by the relatives qui and 
 que; as, Cest à elle, c^est d^ elles que je parle, c'est elle-même 
 qui vient. 
 
 617. The same may be said of the pronoun eux, which is 
 also generally applied to persons only, yet custom allows us 
 10 say, 
 
 Ce chien et ces oiseaux font tout This dog ànd these birds are my only 
 
 mon plaisir ; je n'aime qu'eux ; pleasure ; I love nothing but théin ; 
 
 eux seuls sont mon amusement ; they alone are my diversion;! 
 
 je ne songe qu'à eux, think of nothing else. 
 
 618. Lui and leur are generally applied to persons, but 
 are sometimes used in speaking of anirfta;ls, plants, and even 
 inanimate objects ; as. 
 
 Ces chevaux sont rendus, faites- Those horses are exhausted ; gfive 
 
 leur donner un peu de viri, them a little wine. 
 
 Ces orangers vont périr, si on ne Those orange-trees will die unless 
 
 leur donne de Veau, they have a little water. 
 
 Ces murs sont mal faits, on ne Those walls are not skilfully built ; 
 
 leur a pas donné assez de talus, they are not sufficiently sloped 
 
 upward. 
 
 619. Upon these previous observations, then, may be 
 founded the following 
 
 620. Rule. — The pronouns elle, elles, eux, lui, and leur, 
 ought never to be applied to things, except when custom does 
 not allow them to be replaced by the pronouns y and en, 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 1. Virtue is the first of blessings ; it is from it alone we are to expect 
 happiness. 
 
 2. The labyrinth had been built upon the lake Maeris, and they had 
 given it a prospect proportioned to its grandeur. 
 
 3. Mountains are frequented on account of the air one breathes on them : 
 how many people are indebted to them for the recovery of their health 1 
 
 , 4 War brings in its train numberless evils. 
 
 5. It is a delicate affair which must not be too deeply investigated, it 
 must be lightly passed over. 
 
 (1.) Blessings, bien — are, devoir 
 
 (2 ) Had been built, on bâtir I.— prospect, vue. [recovery, rétablissement. 
 
 (3.) On account, k cause — breathes, respirer — on them, y — are indebted for, devoir— 
 (4.) Brings, entraîner — in its train, avec elle — numberless, bien de. 
 (5.) affair, matière— Twusf, il faut— 6e deeply investigated, approfondir A. — U 
 passed, glisser— wer dessus. 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 201 
 
 6. I have had my house repaired, and have given it quite* a new 
 appearance. 
 
 7. Those trees are too much loaded ; strip them of part of their fruiU 
 
 8. This book cost me a great deal, but I am indebted to it for n)y 
 knowledge. 
 
 9. Self-love is captious ; v^^e, hovi^ever, take it for our* guide ; to it are 
 all our actions directed, onAfroin it we take counsel. 
 
 10. These arguments, although very solid in themselves, yet made no 
 impression upon him,%o powerful a chain is habit. 
 
 11. These reasons convinced me, and by them I formed my decision. 
 
 12. I leave you the care of that bird ; do not forget to give it water. 
 
 (6) Have had, faire G.— appearance, air. 
 (7 ) Strip, ôter— of part, une partie. 
 (8.) JÎ great deal, che.x— knowledge, instruction. 
 
 (9.) We, (it is it that we)— to it, (it is to it that we direct all, &.C.)— direct, rapporter 
 froin it, (and it is from it that, &;c.) 
 flO.) JSTo, ne aucun — so strong, &.C., (so much habit is a, &c.) — habit, habitude. 
 (H.) jînd by, d'après (and it is from them that)— formed my decision, se décider. 
 
 Difficulty respecting the Pronoun le explained. 
 
 621. Le, la, les, are sometimes pronouns and sometimes 
 articles. The article is always followed by a noim— /e roi, 
 la reine, les hommes — whereas the pronoun is always joined 
 to a verb, je le connais, je la respecte, je les estime. 
 
 622. The pronoun le may supply the place of a substantive 
 or an adjective, or even of a member of a sentence. 
 
 623. There is no difficulty when it relates to a w^hold 
 member of a sentence ; it is then always put in the masculine 
 singular ; ?s. 
 
 On doit s* accommoder àl" humeur We ought to accommodate ourselves to 
 des autres autant qiCon le peut, the temper of others as much as we can. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 1. The laws of nature and decency oblige us equally to defend the 
 honor and interest of our parents when we can do it without injustice. 
 
 2. We ought not to condemn, after their death, those who have not 
 been condemned during their life. 
 
 (1) Decency, bienséance. (2.) We ought, falloir — condemned, le. 
 
 624. Nor is there any difficulty when le supplies the place 
 of a substantive ; it then always takes the gender and number 
 of that substantive ; as, Madame, etes-vous la mère de cet 
 enfant? — Oui, je la suis. Madame, are you the mother of 
 that child ? — Yes, I am. Mesdames, êtez-vous les parentes 
 dont Monsieur m'' a parlé? — Oui, nous les sommes. 
 
 625. Remark. — Though the word relating to the following 
 questions is not expressed in English, yet it must always be 
 so in French ; this word is le, which takes either gender or 
 number, according to its relation 
 
202 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 1. Is that your idea? — Can you doubt that it isl 
 
 2. Are you Mrs. Such-a-one 1 — Yes, I am. 
 
 3. Are those your servants 1 — Yes, they are. 
 
 (1.) Idea, pensée — that it is, ce être Q,. 
 (2.) Mrs., Madame — such-a-one, un tel. 
 3.) Those, ce là — they, ce. 
 
 626. It only remains therefore to lay d«wn the following 
 
 627. Rule. — The pronoun le takes neither gender nor 
 number when occupying the place of an adjective. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Madame, etes-vous enrhumée 7 — Oui, je le suis. 
 Mesdames, êtes-vous contentes de ce discours 1 — Oui, nous le sommes. 
 Fut-il jamais une femme plus malheureuse que je le suis % 
 
 628. Remark. — This rule is observed when the substan- 
 tives are used adjectively; as, 
 
 Madame, êtes-vous mère ? — Oui, je le suis. 
 Mesdames, êtes-vous parentes % — Oui, nous le sommes. 
 Elle est fille, et le sera toute sa vie. 
 
 629. But not if the adjectives be used substantively; as, 
 
 Madame, êtes-vous la malade ? — Oui, je la suis. 
 
 630. Therefore this question — Etes-vous fille de M, le duc 9 
 — is to be answered, Oui, je le suis ; but this — Etes-vous la 
 fille de M. le duc ? — Oui, je la suis. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 1. Ladies, are you glad to have seen the new piece? — ^Yes, we are. 
 
 2. I, a* slave ! I, born to command ! Alas ! it is but too true that I am so, 
 
 3. She was jealous of her authority, and she ought to be so. 
 
 4. Was there ever a girl more unhappy, and treated with more ridicule 
 than I am. 
 
 6. You have found me amiable : why have I ceased to appear so to you Î 
 
 6. Have we ever been so quiet as we are 1 
 
 7. Madam, are you married 1 — Yes, I am. 
 
 8. Madam, are you the bride 1 — Yes, I am. 
 
 (1.) Ladies, Mesdames. 
 
 (2.) Slave, esclave — but, ne que. 
 
 (3.) Ought, devoir H. 
 
 (4) TVith more ridicule, plus ridiculement. 
 
 631. The same rule is likewise observed with the article 
 placed before plus or mains and an adjective. It takes neither 
 gender nor number when there is no comparison ; as. 
 
 La lune ne nous éclaire pas autant The moon does not give us so 
 qtie le soleil, même quand elle est much light as the sun, even 
 le phtt brillante, when it shines brightest. 
 
 632. But it takes them when there is comparison , as. 
 
 De toutes les planètes, la lune est Of all the planets, the moon is the 
 la plus brillante pour nous, most brilliant to lis. 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 203 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 1. This father could not bring himself to condemn his children, even 
 v^hen they were most guilty. 
 
 2. This woman has the art of shedding tears, even when she is least 
 afflicted. 
 
 3. Out* of so many criminals, only the most guilty should be punished. 
 
 4. Although that woman displays more fortitude than the others, she 
 is not, on that account, the least distressed. 
 
 (1.) Could, H. —brinff hirn?4lf, sp résoudre. 
 
 (2.) Shedding, répandre àe—emn when, dans le tempg même que. 
 (3.) Only thé most, &c. (one must punish only the most guilty) — only, ne que. 
 (4.) Displays, montret— fortitude, fermeté— 07i that account, pour cela, -distressed, 
 affligé. 
 
 Repetition of the Personal Pronouns. 
 
 633. Rulï: I. — -Pronouns expressing the first and second 
 persons, when the subject, must be repeated before al,l the 
 verbs, if those verbs are in different tenses ; it is always even 
 better to repeat them M'^hen the verbs are in the same tense. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Je sou^ens et je soutiendrai to7i- I maintain, and (I) will always 
 
 Jours, maintain. 
 
 Vans dites, et vous avez toujours You say, and (you) have always 
 
 dit, said. 
 
 Accablé de douleur, je nCécriai et Overwhelmed with sorrow, I ex- 
 
 je dis, claimed and (I) said. 
 
 JsTous nous promenions sur le haut We'were walking upon the sum- 
 
 du rocher, et nous voyions sous mit of the rock, when we saw 
 
 nos pieds, &c. under our feet, &c. 
 
 634. In all cases these pronouns must be repeated, though 
 the tenses of the verbs do not change if the first of these is 
 followed by a regimen ; as. 
 
 Vous aimerez le Seigneur votre You shall love the Lord your God, 
 Dieu, et voîis observerez sa loi, and (you shall) observe his law. 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE REPETITION of the PERSONAL PRONOUN. 
 
 1. My dear child, I love you, and / shall never cease to love you : but 
 it is that very love that I have for you which obliges me to correct you for 
 your faults, and to punish you when you deserve it. 
 
 2. / heard and admired these words, which comforted me a little ; but 
 my mind was not sufficiently at liberty to make him a reply. 
 
 3. Thou art young, and doubtless thou aimest at the glory of surpassing 
 ihy comrades. 
 
 4. God has said, you shall love your enemies, bless those that curse you, 
 do good to those that persecute you, and pray for those who slander you. 
 What a difference between this snorality and that of philosophers ! 
 
 (1 ) Correct for, reprendre de. 
 
 (2.) Heard, écouler H. — words, discours, sing. — mij minrf, &c. (I had not the mind, 
 tx.c.)— sufficiently at liberty, assez libre — to make a reply, répondre à. 
 f3 ) Mmest at, aspiier à — surpassing, l'emporter sur. 
 (4.J Slander, calomnier — letween, de — and that, t celle. 
 
204 PARTICT^LAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 635. Rule IL— The pronouns of the third person, when 
 they form the subject, are hardly ever repeated before verbs, 
 except when those verbs are in different tenses. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 La bonne grâce ne gâte rien ; elle A graceful manner spoils nothing : 
 
 ajoute à la beauté, relève la ma- it adds to beauty, heightens mo- 
 
 destie, et y donne du hcstre, desty, and gives it lustre. 
 
 Iln^ajaynais rien valu, et ne vaudra He never was good for any thing, 
 
 jamais rien, and never will be. 
 
 n est arrivé ce matin, et il repartira He arrived this morning, and (he) 
 
 ce soir, will set off again this evening. 
 
 636. However, perspicuity requires the repetition of the 
 pronoun when the second verb is preceded by a long incidental 
 phrase ; as, 7? fond sur son ennemi, et après V avoir saisi 
 (Tune main victorieuse, il le renverse, comme le cruel aquilon 
 abat les tendres moissons qui dorent la campagne. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 1. ITe took the strongest cities, conquered the most considerable pro- 
 vinces, and overturned the most powerful empires. 
 
 2. jle takes a hatchet, completely cuts down the mast, which wa& 
 already broken, throws it into the sea, jumps upon it amidst the furious 
 billows, calls me by my name, and encourages me to follow him. 
 
 3. He marshals the soldiers, marches at their head, advances in good 
 order towards the enemy, attacks and breaks them, and, after having 
 entirely routed them, (he) cuts them to pieces. 
 
 (1.) Overturned, renverser J. [/(wcs, onde. 
 
 (2.) Completely cuts down, achever de couper— jumps upon it, s'élancer dessus — bil- 
 ls.) Marshals, ranger en bataille — breaks, renverser — entirely routed, achever de 
 mettre en désordre — cuts, tailler. 
 
 637. Rule III. — Any personal pronoun, when the subject, 
 must be repeated before verbs when passing from an affirma- 
 tion to a negative, and vice versa, or when the verbs are 
 joined by any conjunction except et and ni. 
 
 EXAMPLES. - 
 
 Jl veut et ne veut pas, He will and he will not. 
 
 R donne d'excellens principes. He lays down excellent principles, 
 
 parce qu\l sait que les progrès, because he knows that upon them 
 
 ultérieurs en dépendent, depends all further progress. 
 
 II donne et reçoit, He gives and receives. 
 
 n ne donne ni ne reçoit, He neither gives nor receives. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 1. It is inconceivable, how whimsical she is ; from one moment to an- 
 other, she will and she will not. 
 
 2. The Jews are forbidden to work on the sabbath ; they are, as it* 
 were,* locked in slumber ; they light no fire and carry no water. 
 
 fl.) (She is of a whimsical cast inconceivable) JcMmsical cast, bizarrerie, C 
 (2.) (It is forbidden to) forbidden, défendre— sabbatk, jour d!i sa.bhal~lockcd, %n- 
 ehtiiné— slumber, repos— ftg-Af, alliuncr. 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUN. 205 
 
 3. For nearly a week she has neither eaten nor drunk. 
 
 4. The soldier was not repressed by authority, but stopped from 
 
 satiety and shame. 
 
 (3 ) For, depuis — nearly, près de — a week, huit jours — has eaten.. ..drunk, F. 
 (4 \ Repressed, réprimer — stopped, s'arrêter J.— from, par. 
 
 (!38. Rule IV. — Pronouns, when they form the regimen, 
 niust be repeated before any verb. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 L'idée de ses malheurs le poursuit, The idea of his misfortunes pursues 
 le tourmente et V accable, (him), torments (him), and 
 
 overwhelms him. 
 
 n nous ennuie et nous obsède sans He wearies (us) and besets us 
 cesse, miceasingly. 
 
 639. Exception. — It is not repeated before such compound 
 verbs as express the repetition of the same action, when the 
 verbs are in the same tense ; as. 
 
 Je vous ie dis et redis, il le fait et refait sans cesse. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 1. It is taste that selects the expressions — that combines, arranges, and 
 varies them — so as to produce the greatest effect. 
 
 2. Horace answered his stupid critics not so much to instruct them, as 
 to expose their ignorance, and let them see that they did not even know 
 what poetry was. 
 
 3. Man embellishes nature itself; he cultivates, extends, and polishes it. 
 
 (1 ) So as to, de manière à ce qu'elles Q.. 
 
 (2.) Stupid, sot — not so much to, moins pour — as to, pour — show their, (show to 
 Ihem)— let see, faire entendre— teas, c'était que. 
 
 Relation of the Pronouns of the Third Person to a Noun 
 as exprei^ed before. 
 
 640. Rule. — The pronouns of the third person — il, ils^ 
 elle, elles, le, la, les — must always relate to a noun, whether 
 subject or regimen, taken only in a definite sense, before 
 expressed in the same tense ; but they must not be applied 
 to a subject and regimen at the same time. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 La rose est la reine des feurs, The rose is the queen of flowers ; 
 
 aiLssi es^elle fembleme de la therefore it is the emblem of 
 
 beauté, beauty. 
 
 y aime l'ananas ; il est exguis, I like the pine-apple ; it is delicious. 
 
 641. But the two following sentences would be equivocal : 
 
 Racine a imité Euripide, en tout' Racine has imitated Euripides in all 
 ce qu'il a de plus beau dans sa that he has most beautiful in his 
 Phèdre, Phedra 
 
 S 
 
^^: PARTIÇUEAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Le légat publia une sentence The legate published a sentence of 
 4!iait,erdit ; il dura trois mois, interdiction ; it lasted three months 
 
 642. As in the first of these two sentences il may relate 
 either to Racine or to Euripides^ and from the construction 
 of the second sentence, il cannot, as it should, relate to inter- 
 dit. Again, it is not altogether correct to say, 
 
 Nulle paix pour V impie ; il la J\'o peace for the wicked ; he seeks 
 cherche, elle ficit, it, it flies. 
 
 643. Because, from the construction, the pronouns la and 
 elle seem to be used for nulle paix, whereas the meaning 
 requires that they should supply the place of the substantive 
 paix, in the affirmative. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 1. Pfjetry embraces all sorts of subjects; it takes in every thing that 
 is most brilliant in history ; it enters the fields of philosophy ; it soars to 
 the skies ; it plunges into the abyss ; it penetrates to the dead ; it makes 
 the universe its domain ; and if this world be not sufficient, it creates new 
 ones, which it embellishes with enchanting abodes, which it peoples with 
 a thousand various inhabitants. 
 
 2. Egypt aimed at greatness ; and wished to* strike the eye at a dis- 
 tance, always pleasing it by the justness of proportion. 
 
 3. Egypt, satisfied with its own territory, where every thing was in 
 abundance, thought not of conquests ; it extended itself in another man- 
 ner, by sending colonies to every part of the globe, and with them civili- 
 zation and laws. 
 
 4. The Messiah is expected by the Hebrews ; he comes and calls the 
 Gentiles, as it had been announced by the prophecies ; the people that 
 acknowledge hi7n as come are incorporated with the people that expected 
 him, without a single moment of interruption. 
 
 (1) Subjects, matiôre — takes in, se charter de — that is, y avoir de — (in) the fields, 
 soars to, s'élancer dans — plmigcs, s'enfoncer — to, chez — (its domain of the universe) 
 — he sufficient, suffire — ones, monde — enchanting-, enchanter—abodes, demeure — va- 
 rious, divers. 
 
 C2.) Greatness, grand — wished, vouloir — eye, pi. — at a distance, dans l'éloignement 
 — On) pleasing, contenter. 
 
 (3.) fVas in abundance, abonder — thought of, songer à — in, de — by, en — to, par— 
 every part of the globe, toute la terre. 
 
 (4.) Oentiles, Gentil — (the prophecies had announced il)— acknowledges, recon- 
 naître- -wiiA, à — without, sans qu'il y ait — single, seul. 
 
 POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Explanation of some Difficulties attendant on the use of the 
 Possessive Pronouns. 
 
 644. The possessive pronouns son, sa, ses, leur, leurs 
 relate either to persons, to things personified, or simply to 
 things or to pronouns. If they relate to persons, or thingfc 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 207 
 
 personified, their place can never be supplied by others ; but 
 if they relate to things, the following rules must be observed : 
 
 645. The possessive prorouns are always employed, 
 
 646. 1.— ^When the object to which they relate is either 
 named, or designated by a personal pronoun in the same 
 member of a phrase. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 V Amérique étend son commerce par America extends her commerce 
 
 toute la terre, over the whole globe. 
 
 Elle envoie ses Jlottes dans toutes She sends her fleets into every 
 
 les mersy part of the ocean. 
 
 647. 2. — Before a noun, when qualified even by a single 
 adjective, unless the noun form the regimen. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 Ses ressources immenses sont Her immense resources are inex» 
 inépuisables, haustible. 
 
 648. 3. — After every preposition. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 C^est par sa position, jointe à la It is by her situation, joined to the 
 sagesse de son goiivernement, wisdom of ifer government, that 
 qiCelle réunit dans son sein de she unites such vast advantages 
 si grands avantages, within herself. 
 
 649. 4. — Before all words whioh can govern the preposi- 
 tion de. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Son congrès est le sanctuaire de la Her congress is the seat of the 
 plus sage politique, wisest policy. 
 
 Son président nUa de pouvoir que Her president possesses power only 
 pour faire le bien, to do good.' 
 
 650. On all other occasions, the article, with the pronoun 
 ew, placed immediately before the verb, must be substituted. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Tout enfin contribue à nC en faire In short, every thing conspires to 
 aimer le séjour ; j'en admire make me love that residence : I par- 
 surtout V exacte police, en même ticularly admire the strictness of her 
 temps que les lois m'en parais- police, at the same time when her 
 sent extrêmement sages, ' laws appear to me extremely wise. 
 
 EXERCISE ON POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 1. A new custom was a phenomenon in Egypt: for which reason, 
 there never was a people that preserved so long its customs, its laws, and 
 even its ceremonies. 
 
 2. Solomon abandorrs himself to the love of women : -his understanding 
 declines, his heart weakens, and his piety degenerates into idolatry. 
 
 3. That superb temple was upon the summit of a hill : its columns 
 were of Parian marble, and its gates of gold. 
 
 1.) Phenomenon, prodige— /o»; ic/ucA reason, aussi — a, ie— preserved S. 
 Understanding, eèprit — declines, bàigset—viéakens, s'a^aiblir. 
 Summit, haut— kill, coUiiXG— Parian, ûe Faro*. 
 
208 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS 
 
 4. Laocoon is one of the finest statues in France: not only the whole, 
 but all its features, even the least, are admirable. 
 
 5. The Thames is a magnificent river : its channel is so wide and so 
 deep below London-bridge, that several thousands of vessels lie at their 
 ease in it. 
 
 6. This tine country is justly admired by foreigners : its climate is 
 deHghtful, its soil fruitful, its laws wise, and its government just and 
 moderate. 
 
 7. The trees of that orchard have sun enough, yet its fruits are but 
 indiflferent. 
 
 8. The Seine has its source in Burgundy, its mouth is at Havre-de- 
 Grace. 
 
 9. The pyramids of Egj" pt astonish, both by the enormity of their bulk 
 and the justness of their proportions. 
 
 10. Egypt alone could erect monuments for posterity : its obelisks are 
 to this day, as well for their beauty as for their height, the principal orna- 
 ment of Rome. 
 
 11. History and geography throw mutual light on each other: a* per- 
 fect knowledge of them ought to enter into the plan of a good education. 
 
 f4.) In, qu'il y ait en — the whole, l'ensemble — even, jusqu'à. [le— in it, y. 
 
 .5.) Magnificent, superbe — channel, lit — below, au dessous de — lie ai, être à — their, 
 
 '6.3 JiLstly, avec raison— so?Z, sol. 
 
 llS Have snn enougliyeire bien e.xposé — lut indifferent, assez mauvais. 
 
 (8.) Month, enibouchurs — Havre, le Havre. 
 
 (9.) Both, également et — bulk, masse — and, et par. 
 (10.) Egypt alone could, il n'appartenait qu'à l'Egypte de — erect, clever— <o thi$ 
 
 day, encore aujourd'hui — as 2.-. cil for, autant par — heiglil, hauteur. 
 (11.) Throw mutual light, &LC., s'éclairer Vune par l'autre— o/tAem, (their). 
 
 651. Again, when there exists any doubt whether the pos- 
 sessive pronoun ought to be used or not before a noun that is 
 the regimen, the following is the 
 
 652. Rule.' — This article, not the possessive pronoun, must 
 be put before a noun forming the regimen, when a pronoun 
 which is either subject or regimen sufficiently supplies the 
 place of that possessive, or when there is no sort of ambiguity. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 J^ai mal à la tête, 1 have the head-ache. [leg. 
 
 H faudra lui couper l^jainbe, It will be necessary to take off his 
 
 Ce cheval a pris le mors aztx dents, That horse has run away. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 1. During the whole winter he has had bad eyes. 
 
 2. I had a fall yesterday, and hurt my back and head. 
 
 3. It would be better for a man to lose his life than forfeit* his honor 
 by a criminal action. 
 
 4. In this bloody battle he received a wound by a shot in his right 
 arm and another in his left leg : by dint of care, his arm was saved, but 
 it was necessary to amputate his leg. 
 
 (I.) Has had bad, avoir mal à. 
 
 (2.) Had a fall, se laisser tomber— Awrt, se faire mal h—haclt, rein», pi. 
 (3.) Would be better, valoir mieux N. 
 
 (4.) A wound by a shot, un coup de feu — in, à — ly dint, à force — his am, &c. {Jibey 
 saved the arm to him)— wos necessary, falloir J. — to amputate, to him. 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS 209 
 
 653. But should either the personal pronouns or circum- 
 stances not remove all ambiguity, then the possessive pronoun 
 must be joined to the noun ; as, 
 
 Je vois que ras. jambe s'enfle, I see that ray leg is swelling. 
 
 II lid donna sa main à baiser, He gave him his hand to kiss. 
 
 Elle a donné hardiment son bras She courageously presented her arm 
 
 axi chirurgien, to the surgeon. 
 
 654. Ma, not la, because I may also see the leg of another 
 person swelling, &c. ^ 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 1. In this interview they made each other presents: she gave him her 
 portrait and he gave her his finest diamond. 
 
 2. A young surgeon preparing to bleed the great Condé, this prince 
 said to him, smiling, " Do you not tremble to bleed me 1" " I, my lord? 
 no, certainly : it is not I, it is you who ought to tremble." The prince, 
 charmed with the reply, immediately gave him his arm. 
 
 (1.) Interview, entrevue — made each other, se faire mutuellement. 
 (2.) Preparing, se disposer — bleed, saiarner — smiling, d'un air riant — it is not /, (it 
 is not to me) — it is you, (it is to you)— loAo ought to, de — reply, repartie. 
 
 655. Remark I. — Although verbs which are conjugated 
 with two pronouns of the same person generally remove 
 every kind of amphibology, yet custom authorizes some 
 familiar expressions, in which the possessive pronoun seems 
 to be redundant ; as, 
 
 II se tient ferme S2cr ses pieds, Ho stands firm upon his feet. 
 
 Je l'ai vu, de mes propres yeux, I have seen it with my own eyes. 
 
 656. 11. — When speaking of an habitual complaint, the 
 possessive pronoun is properly used ; as, 
 
 Sa migraine Va repris. His head-ache is returned. 
 
 657. The possessive pronouns are subject to the same 
 rules as the article ; they must therefore be repeated before 
 all substantives which are either subject or regimen, and before 
 all adjectives which express different qualities, although this 
 is seldom observed in English ; as. 
 
 Son père, sa mère, et ses frères His father, mother, and brothers are 
 
 sont de retotir, come back. 
 
 Je lui ai montré mes plus beaux I have shewn him my finest and my 
 
 et mes plus vilains habits, ugliest dresses. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 1. Whatever he may do, he always finds himself safe 
 
 2. Can you still doubt the truth of what I tell you 1 Would you ask 
 a stronger proof than that I give you, it is that I heard it — yes, heard it 
 with 7ny own ears. 
 
 (1.) Finds himself , se retrouver— sa/c, sur Bes jambes 
 (2.) Oa/J, ^.— doubt, douter de—asA:, exiger. 
 82 
 
210 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS, 
 
 3. JMy gout does not allow me a moment's repose. 
 
 4. It is in vain that I exhort you to work and study : yoxir idleness, 
 ihat cruel disease under* which you labor, renders useless all the exhorta- 
 tions of friendship. 
 
 .5. If you wish to be beloved, fail not to perform the promises you have 
 just made. 
 
 6. In the retreat that I have chosen for myself, ray study and my garden 
 are my greatest delight. 
 
 7, He brought me into his laboratory, and showed me his large and 
 small vessels. 
 
 (3.) Allow, laisser. 
 
 (4) It is in^min that /, je ai beau — exhort, A. — you labor, vous travaille. 
 
 (5.) Fail no^^e pas manquer — perform, remplir — have just made, venir de faire. 
 
 (6) For myself, (to me) — study, cabinet — are, fahe— greatest, plus cher. 
 
 (7-) Brought, mener — laboratory, laboratoire — vessels, vaisseau. 
 
 RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 658. Qui, when it is the subject, may very properly relate 
 both to persons and things. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 JJhomme qui joue perd son temps, The man who games loses his time. 
 Le livre, qui plaît le plus, n'est The book which pleases most is not 
 pas toujours le plus utile, always the most useful. 
 
 659. But when it is the regimen, it can only be used of 
 persons or of things personified, whether the regimen be 
 direct or indirect. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Quand on est délicat et sage dans He who is wise, and discriminates ir 
 ses goûts, on ne s'attache pas, his choice, does not form an attach- 
 sans savoir qui l'on aime, ment without knowing the person 
 
 he loves. 
 V homme à qui appartient ce beau The man to whom this fine garden 
 jardin est très-riche, belongs is very rich. [iiig. 
 
 ha femme de qui vous paviez. The woman of whom you are speak- 
 
 660. Remark. — When the regimen indirect is expressed 
 by the preposition de, then dont should be preferred to de 
 qui. It is better to say, La femme dont vous parlez; how- 
 ever, when the verb expresses a kind of transfer or convey- 
 ance, de qui must be used ; as, 
 
 Cehd de qui Je tiens cette nouvelle, The person from whom I had that 
 
 intelligence. 
 
 661. Rule I. — Qui must not be separated from its antece- 
 dent when that antecedent is a noun. 
 
 EXAMPLE 
 Vu jeune homme qui est docile A young man who is obedient to the 
 aux conseils qu'on lui donne, advice that is given him, and who 
 et qui aime à en reeevoir, aura loves to receive it, will infallibly 
 infailliblement du mérite, have merit. 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 21 Ï 
 
 662. Remark. — In some phrases, qui may be separated 
 from the substantive by several words — that is, when the 
 sense obliges us to refer it to that substantive ; as, . 
 
 II a fallu, avant toute chose, vous faire lire dans l'écriture sainte, 
 Vhistoire du peuple de Dieu, qui fait le fondement de la religion. 
 
 663. This sentence is very correct; because, as du peuple 
 determines the kind of history, and de Dieu the kind of 
 people, the mind necessarily goes back to the substantive 
 histoire, to which it refers. 
 
 664. Qui may likewise be separated from its antecedent, 
 when this antecedent is a pronoun used as the regimen 
 direct; as, 
 
 H la trouva qui pleurait à chaudes larmes, He found her crying bitterly. 
 Je \q vois (\m joue, I see him playing. 
 
 665. Because, in this case, the true place of the pronoun 
 is before the verb, and it is the same as saying, // trouva 
 elle qui pleurait, &c. je vois lui qui joue. Also in these 
 kinds of sentences, which are real gallicisms : 
 
 Ceux-là ne sont pas les plus mal- Those are not the most unhappy 
 heureux, qui se plaignent le phis, who complain the most. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 1. A 5'^oung man ivho loves vanity of dress, like a v^'oman, is unworthy 
 of wisdom and glory ; glory is only due to a heart that knows how* to* 
 suffer pain and trample upon pleasure. 
 
 2. Thyself, O my son, my dear son, thou* thyself that now enjoyest a 
 youth so cheerful and so full of pleasure, remember that this delightful 
 age is but a flower, -which will be withered almost as soon as blown. 
 
 3. Men pass away like flowers, xuhich open in* the morning, and at 
 night are withered and trampled under foot. 
 
 4. You must have a man that loves nothing but truth and you, that will 
 speak the truth in spite of you, that will force all your entrenchments ; and 
 this necessary character is the very man whom you have sent into exile. 
 
 5. We perceived him waiting for us, quietly seated under the shade 
 of a tree. 
 
 (1.) Vanity of dress, à se parer vainement — trample upon, fouler aux pieds. 
 
 (2.) Cheerful, vif— full of, féconde en— remember, se sonveuir— delightful, bel— 
 withered, sùcher — blown, éclore. 
 
 (3.) Open, s'épanouir — and, (which)— a< night, le soir — ivithered, flétrir — under, à 
 —foot, les pieds. 
 
 (4.) You must have, il vous faut — nothing but, ne que — icill speak, d. — will force, 
 Q, — entrenchments, retranchement — character, homme — man, même — sent into exile, 
 exiler. 
 
 (5.) Waiting for, (who waited) attendre — under, à. 
 
 666. Rule IL'S— The relative qui must always have a 
 jeference to a noun taken in a determinate sense 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Vhomme est un animal raisonable, qui, &c, 
 II me reçut avec une politesse, qui, &c. 
 
ta 
 
 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 667. But we cannot say, 
 
 L'' homme est animal raisonable, qui, &c. 
 U me reçut avec politesse, qui, &c. 
 
 668. Remark. — Though in many phrases the determinate 
 nature of the nouns is not expressed, yet it is clearly under- 
 stood. Thus, all these phrases are correct : 
 
 Jl n^a point de livre, qui ne soit He has not a book that is not of his 
 
 de son choix, own selecting. 
 
 T a-t-il ville dans le royaume qui Is there a city in the kingdom that is 
 
 s oit plus favorisée ? more favored 1 
 
 77 se conduit en homme qui con- He behaves himself like a man who 
 
 naît le monde, knovFs the VForld. 
 
 U est accablé de maux qui ne He is overwhelmed with misfortunes 
 
 Ini laissent pas un instant de that do not allow him a moment's 
 
 repos, rest. 
 
 C^est nne sorte de fruit, qui ne It is a sort oï fruit that does not ripen 
 
 mûrit pas en Europe, in Europe. 
 
 669. From the translation of all the above examples it is evi- 
 dent that Uv7'e, ville, maux, are really determinate, the meaning 
 being, it n^a'pas, un livre qui, <fec. ; y a-t-il une ville qui, &c. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 1. He received us v.'ith such goodness, civility, and grace, as charmed 
 us, and made us forget all we had sulîered. 
 
 2. There is no city in the world xvhere there are more riches and a 
 g'reater population. 
 
 3. Is there a mcji who can say, "I shall live till to-morrow?" 
 
 4. He has no friend but would make for him every kind of sacrifice. 
 
 5. He is surrounded by enemies, -who are continually observing him, 
 .and would be very glad to detect him in a fault. 
 
 6. In liis retreat, he lives Uke a philosopher, xvho knows men and 
 mistrusts them. 
 
 7. The pine-apple is a sort of fruit that in Europe ripens only in 
 hot-houses. 
 
 8. That man is a sort of pedant rvho takes words for ideas, and facts 
 confusedly heaped together for knowledge. 
 
 (1.) 5!zcA 05, un.. .'qui— ciciZifT/, politesse. -(2.) There are, Q,. 
 
 (3.) Can, Q,. (4.) But, qui x\e— would make, S. 
 
 (6.) Like a, en — philosop/ier, sajre — iiiistrusts. se défier de. 
 (7.) Pine-apple, ana.nas—hot-houfes, serre chaude. 
 (8.) Heaped together, entasser — knowledge, savoir. 
 
 670. Que relates both to persons and things. It is always 
 the regimen direct, and cannot subsist without an antecedent 
 expressed, which it generally follows. L'homme que Je vois, 
 la pêche que je mange. We say generally, because in some 
 instances it may be separated from the antecfedent by several 
 words — that is, when the mind necessarily goes back to that 
 antecedent, as in this sentence of Flechier's : 
 Qu'est-ce qu'une armée î — c'est un corps animé d'une infinité de passion? 
 différentes, yu'un homme habile fait mouvoir pour la défense de la patrie 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUXS. 213 
 
 671. Remark. — There are instances where que is appa- 
 rently used as regimen indirect for à qui or dont ; as, C'est à 
 vous que je parle; c'est de lui que je parle; de la façon que 
 j'ai dit la chose. But in this case, qice is a conjunction. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 1. The God ivhom the Hebrews and Christians have always served, 
 has nothing in common with the deities full of imperfection, and even of 
 vice, worshipped hy tlie rest of the world. 
 
 2. The Epic poem is not the panegyric of a hero ivho is proposed as 
 a* pattern, but the recital of great and illustrious actions, -which are 
 -exhibited for imitation. 
 
 3. The good xvhich we hope for* presents itself to us, and disappears 
 like an empty dream, which vanishes when we awake : to teach us that 
 the very things -which we think we* hold fast in* our* hands,* may slip 
 away in an instant. 
 
 4. Plato says that, in writing, we ought to hide ourselves, to disappear, 
 to make the world forget us, that we may present notliing but the truths 
 we wish to impress. 
 
 (1.) (That the rest of the world worshipped). 
 
 (2) Is proposed, on propose — as, pour — pattern, modèle — is exJiibited, on donne— 
 imitation, exemple. 
 
 (3) Good, bien — disappears, s'envoler— empty, vain — vanishes, &c., le réveil fait 
 évanouir— AoW/ds^, tenir F. le mieux — slip away, nous échappent. 
 
 (4 ) We, on — to make the world forget, se faire oublier — that we may present hut, 
 pour ne produire que — wish, vouloir — impress, persuader. 
 
 672. Lequel m., laquelle f., lesquels m. pi., lesquelles f. pi., 
 and dont, relate both to persons and things. But lequel, Slc, 
 ought never to be used, either as a subject or object, except 
 to avoid ambiguity ; for whenever the sense is evident, qui 
 or que must be used. 
 
 673. Lequel, laquelle, lesquels, lesquelles, with the preposi- 
 tion de, is either followed or preceded by a noun, which it 
 unites to the principal sentence. If it be followed, dont is 
 preferable to duquel m., de laquelle f., desquels m. pi., des- 
 quelles f. pi., both for persons and things. Thus: 
 
 Xa Tamise dont le lit, and not de laquelle 
 Le prince dont la protection, and not duquel, 
 
 674. If lequel, laquelle, lesquels, lesquelles, be preceded by 
 the noun, we can only make use of duquel, de laquelle, des- 
 quels, desquelles, when speaking of things ; as, La Tamise, 
 dans le lit de laquelle : and it is always better to use it when 
 speaking of persons ; as, Le prince à la protection duquel : 
 de qui would not be so well. 
 
 675. Lequel, laquelle, lesquels, lesquelles, with the prepo 
 sition à, when speaking of things, requires auquel m., à la- 
 quelle f., auxquels m. pi., auxquelles f. pi.; as. Les places 
 auxquelles il aspire: but we ought to prefer à qui when 
 
214 PARTICUI/AR RULrES OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 speaking of persons ; as, Les rois à qui on doit obéir. Aux- 
 quels would not do so well. 
 
 676. So the relative qui^ preceded by a preposition, never 
 relates to things, but to persons only. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 1 . The grand principle on -which the whole turns is, that all* the world 
 is but one republic, of -which God is the common father, and in -which 
 every nation forms, as it were, one great family. 
 
 2. Homer, -whose genius is grand and sublime like nature, is the greatest 
 poet, and perhaps the most profound moralist of antiquity. 
 
 3. The celebrated Zenobia, -whose noble firmness you have admirei?, 
 pieferred dying with the title of queen, rather than accept the advantage- 
 ous offers which Aurelian made her. 
 
 4. The Alps, on the summ.it of -which the astonished eye discovers 
 perpetual snow and ice, present at sunset the most striking and most 
 magnificent spectacle. 
 
 5. A king, to -whose care we owe a good law, has done more for his 
 ovvn glory than if he had conquered the universe. 
 
 6. The ambitious man* sees nothing but pleasure in the possession of 
 the offices to -which he aspires with so much eagerness, instead of seeing 
 the trouble that is inseparable from them. 
 
 7. Kings, -whom religion makes it our duty to obey, are, upon earth, 
 the true representation of the providence of God. 
 
 (1.) Turns, rouler— erer//, cliaqne— as it were, comme. 
 
 (3) Preferred, aimer mieux — than, que de. 
 
 (4.) Perpetual ,éXiin\G\ — snow, ice, pi. — eunset, soleil couchant — striking, imposant. 
 
 (5.) Care, solicitude. [image. 
 
 (7.) WkXfjM., (to whom)-^7Bdftes it our duty to, nous fait un devoir de — representation 
 
 677. Quoi only relates to things. It is placed after the 
 word to which it relates, but is always preceded by a prepo- 
 sition, and is generally followed by the subject of the phrase 
 with which it is connected; as. 
 
 La chose à quoi on pense ; voilà les conditioris sans quoi la chose ne 
 peut se faire. 
 
 678. To this mode of expression are to be preferred lequel, 
 duquel^ auquel, as being much better ; for quoi is never used 
 with any degree of propriety but when it relates to a vague 
 and indefinite subject, such as ce or rien; as, 
 
 C^est de quoi Je vi^ occupe sans cesse. 
 IL n^y a rien à quoi je sois plus disposé. 
 
 679. Ou, d'^oii, par ou, relate only to things. They are 
 never used but when the nouns to which they refer express 
 some kind of motion or rest, at least metaphorically ; as, 
 
 Voilà le but oil il tend. That is the end he aims at 
 
 C^est une chose d'où dépend le It is a thing upon which the public 
 
 bonheur public, happiness depends. 
 
 Les lieux par où il a passé, The places through which he has passed. 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 215 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 1. Jfliat a young man, who begins the world, ought principally to 
 attend to, is not to give it a high opinion of his understanding, but to 
 gain numerous friends by the qualities of his heart. 
 
 2. A youth passed in idleness, effeminacy, and pleasure, lays up for* 
 us nothing but sorrow and disgust in old age ; this, however, is ivhat we 
 little think of when we are young. 
 
 3. There is nothing by -which we are more afljected. than the loss of 
 fortune, although, being frail and perishable in its nature, it cannot con 
 tribute to our happiness. 
 
 4. A grove, i7i -which I defy the burning heat of the dog-star, a retired 
 valley, lohere I can meditate in peace, a high hill, -whence my eye extends 
 over immense plains, are the places -where I spend the happiest momenta 
 of my life. 
 
 (1.) To ichat, ce à quoi — begins, entrer dans — to attend, s'attacher — it, y — opinton, 
 idée— understanding, esprit — to gain, se faire — numerous, beaucoup de. 
 
 (2.) Idleness, inutilité — effeminacy, mollesse — pleasjire, volnpté — /a y s w^, préparer 
 — of, à — we, on. 
 
 (3.) By, à — we, on — affected, sensible— /rai7, frôle — by, de — cannot, Q,. — our, the. 
 
 (4) Orove, bosquet — defy, hvaver— burning heats, ardeur — dog-star, canicule- 
 spend, passer. 
 
 ABSOLUTE PRONOUNS. 
 
 680. Qui relates only to persons presenting but a vaçue, 
 indeterminate idea; as, 
 
 Qui sera assez hardi pour Who will be bold enough to attack 
 V attaquer P him. 
 
 68 1 . It is likewise used in the feminine and in tlie plural , as, 
 
 Qui est cette personne-^à .? Who is that person ? 
 
 Qui soîit ces femmes-là ? Who are those women 1 
 
 682. Que and quoi relate to things only ; as, 
 
 Que pouvait la valeur eit ce com- What could valor do in that fatal 
 
 bat funeste ? combat \ 
 
 A quoi pensez-vous ? What are you thinidng of? 
 
 683. Que is sometimes used for à quoi, de quoi : as, 
 
 Que sert la science sans la vertu P What avails learning without virtue Î 
 Que sej't à f avare d'avoir des What use is it to the miser to possess 
 trésors P treasures! 
 
 that is, à quoi sert, Sic. de quoi sert, Sic, 
 
 684. Quoi, when relating to a whole sentence, is the only 
 authorized expression that can be used ; as. 
 
 La vie passe comme un songe ; c'est cependant à quoi on ne pense gué res. 
 
 685. Remark. — Que and quoi require the preposition de 
 before the adjective or substantive that follows them; as, 
 
 Que dit-on de nouveau 1 quoi de plus agréable ! 
 Que d'inconséquences dans sa conduite ! 
 
ai© PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 686. Quel m., quelle f., quels m. pi., quelles f. pi., relate 
 both to persons and things ; as, 
 
 Quel homme peut se promettre un bonheur constant 1 
 Quelle grâce ! quelle beauté ! mais quelle modestie ! 
 
 687. Oil, d'oïl, par où, relate but to things. 
 
 EXERCISE ON ABSOLUTE PRONOUNS. 
 
 1. WIio could ever persuade himself, did not daily experience convince 
 us of it, that, out of a hundred persons, there are ninety who sacrifice to 
 the enjoyment of the present all the best-founded hopes of the future 1 
 
 2. JVho would not love virtue for its own sake could he see it in all 
 Its beauty '? 
 
 3. He who does not know how to apply himself in his youth, does not 
 know to hat to do when arrived at maturity. 
 
 4. He was a wise legislator who, having given to his countrymen laws 
 calculated to make them good and happy, made them swear not to violate 
 any of those laws during his absence : after ivhich, he went away, exiled 
 himself from his country, and died poor in a foreign land. 
 
 5. What people of antiquity ever had better laws than the Egyptians ? 
 What other nation ever undertook to erect monuments calculated to 
 triumph over both time and barbarism ] 
 
 6. What more instructive and eyitertaining than to read celebrated 
 authors in their own language 1 Wliat beauty, ivhat delicacy, and grace, 
 which cannot be transcribed into a translation are discovered in them ! 
 
 7. When Ménage had published his book on the Origin of the French 
 Language, Christina, queen of Sweden, said: — "Ménage is ^(the most 
 troublesome) 'man ^(in the world) : he cannot let ^one word 'go without 
 its passport ; he must know -whence it comes, -where it has passed through, 
 and -whither it is going." 
 
 (1.) Bid, si — out of, sur— future, avenir. 
 
 (2.) Its own sake, elle même — could he, si on pouvoir H. [dans l'âge mûr. 
 
 (3.) HoiD, (to what) — irhat, (to what)— (a do, s'occuper — when arrived at maturity, 
 
 (4.) He, ce — calculated, propre — 7iot to, (that they would not) — went away, partir. 
 
 (5.) Calculated to, fait pour — both, également — over. de. 
 
 (.6) Language, langue— delicacy, finesse — jchich cannot, qu'on ne peut — be tran- 
 scribed, faire casser-translation, traduction — are, &c. n'y découvre-ton pas. 
 
 (7.) When, après que — Christina, Christine— troublesome, incommode — in the, du— 
 cannot, ne saurait— ^o, passer — 7mtst, vouloir. 
 
 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 688. Ce, joined to the verb êfi'e, always governs this verb 
 in the singular, except when it is followed by the third person 
 plural. 
 
 C'est moi, c'est toi, c'est lui, c'est nous, c'est vous. 
 
 699. But in different cases we must say, 
 
 Ce sont eux, ce sont elles, Sont-ce les Anglais, qui ont fait cela? 
 
 Ce furent zws ancêtres qui, Est-ce les Anglais que vous aimez .^ 
 
 Fut-ce 710S propres fils qui, Fut-ce nos propres fils que. 
 
 690. Ce, when relating to a person or thing mentioned 
 before, supplies the place of il or elJe 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 217 
 
 691. Ce must always be used when the verb être is fol- 
 lowed by a substantive, accompanied by the indefinite article 
 or the numerical adjective un. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Lisez Homère et Virgile : ce sont Read Homer and Virgil ; they are 
 
 les plus grands poètes de Van- the best poets of antiquity. 
 tiqiiitéy 
 
 La douceur, VaffabiKté, et une Gentleness, affability, and a certain 
 
 certaine urbanité, distinguent urbanity, distinguish the man 
 
 Vhomme qui vit dans le grand who frequents polite company ; 
 
 monde ; ce sont là les marques these are marks by which he 
 
 auxquelles on le reconnaît, may be known. 
 
 Avez-vous lu Platon ? c'est un des Have you read Plato ? he is one of 
 
 phis beaux génies de V antiquité, the greatest geniuses of antiquity. 
 
 692. But when the verb être is followed by an adjective, or 
 by a substantive taken adjectively, il or elle must be used. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Lisez Bémosthhie et Cicéron ; Read Demosthenes and Cicero ; 
 
 ils sont très-éloquens, they are very eloquent. 
 
 J^ai VÎI V hôpital de Greenxvich ; I have seen Greenwich Hospital ; 
 
 il est magnifique et digne d'une it is superb, and worthy of a 
 
 grande nation, great nation. 
 
 Compteriez-vous sur Valère ? ^ Would you rely upon Vale re 1 do 
 
 igjiorez-Tous çw'il est homme you not know that he is a man 
 
 à ne jamais revenir de ses pre- who will never abandon his first 
 
 mitres idées? opinions'? 
 
 EXERCISE ON DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 1. It is tve who have drawn that misfortune upon* ourselves* through 
 our thoughtlessness and imprudence. 
 
 2. It ivas the Egyptians that first observed the course of the stars, 
 regulated the year, and invented arithmetic. 
 
 3. Peruse attentively Plato and Cicero: they are \h.e iwo philoscphers 
 of antiquity who have given us the most sound and luminous ideas upon 
 morality. 
 
 4. If you are intended for the pulpit, read over and over again Bour- 
 daloue and Massillon : they are both very eloquent ; but the aim of the 
 former is to convince, and that of the latter to persuade. 
 
 (1) Have drawn, s'atlirer — thoughtlessness, légèreté. 
 (2.) First, les premiers — star^, astres. 
 (3.) Peruse, \ixe~sound, sain— morality, morale. 
 
 (4.) Jlre intended for, se destiner k— pulpit, chaire — read over and over again, lire 
 et relire sans cesse — aim, but. 
 
 693. Ce, followed by a relative pronoun, relates to things 
 only. It is always masculine singular, as it only denotes a 
 vague object, which is not sufRciently specified to know its 
 gender and number. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Ce qui flatte est plus dangereux What flatters is more dungerouf? 
 que ce qui offense, than what offends. 
 
 T 
 
218 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 694. Ce, joined to the relative pronouns quî, que^ dont, 
 and quoi, has in some instances a construction peculiar to 
 itself. Both ce and the relative pronoun that follows it form, 
 with the verb which they precede, the subject of another 
 phrase, of which the verb is alwa}is être. Now, être may 
 be followed by another verb, an adjective, or a noun. 
 
 695. When e/re, then, is followed by another verb, the 
 demonstrative ce must be repeated ; as, 
 
 Ce que /az'me le phcs, c'est (ïétre seul, What I like most, is to be alone. 
 
 696. When followed by an adjective, the demonstrative is 
 not repeated ; as, 
 
 Ce dont vous venez de me parler What you have been mentioning to 
 est horrible, me is horrid. 
 
 697. When it is followed by a substantive, the demonstrative 
 may either be repeated or not, at pleasure, except in the case 
 of a plural or a personal pronoun. Thus, we may say. 
 
 Ce que je dis, est la vérité, or, c'est la vérité, What I say is the truth, 
 
 698. Though the former is best. But we must say, 
 
 Ce qui mHndigne, ce sont les injus- What provokes me, are the injuries 
 
 tices, qii'on ne cesse de faire, which are continually committed. 
 
 Ce qui ni'arraclie ait sentiment What alleviates the grief that op- 
 cm' irCaccable, c'est vous, presses me, is you. 
 
 699. Most of these rules contribute, to the elegance of the 
 language. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 1. IVJiat is astonishing is not always -what is pleasing. 
 
 2. What the miser thinks least of, is to enjoy his riches. 
 
 .3. What pleases us in the writings of the ancients is to see that they 
 have taken nature as a model, and that they have painted her with a 
 noble simplicity. 
 
 4. What that good king has done for the happiness of his people de- 
 serves to be handed down to the latest posterity. 
 
 5. U^at constitutes poetry is not the exact number and regular 
 cadence of syllables ; but it is the sentiment which animates every thing, 
 the lively fictions, bold figures, and* beauty and variety of the imagery : 
 it is the enthusiasm, fire, impetuosity, force — a something in the words 
 and thoughts which nature alone can impart. 
 
 6. What we justly admire in Shakspeare are those characters always 
 natural and always well* sustained. ^ 
 
 7. What keeps me attached to life is yon, my son, whose tender age 
 has still need of my care and advice. 
 
 (1.) Is astonishing, étonner — is pleasing, plaire. 
 (.2.) IVJiat, (that to which) — miser, avare. 
 (3.) vas a, pour, 
 
 (4.) Deserves, être digne— (o be handed down, être transmis— ?a<cs<, la plus reculée 
 (5.) Constitutes, faire — exact, fixe — lively, vif— imagery, image, pi. — a something, 
 un Je ne sais quoi — words, paroles— iwi;)ar(, donner. 
 
 ^6.1 fVe, on— justly, avec justice — natural, dans la nature-^sustained, soutenu. 
 (7.) Keeps attached, attacher— care, p\.— advice, pi. 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 219 
 
 700. There are two ways of employing celui m., celle f., 
 ceux m. pi., celles f. pi. In the first, they are followed by a 
 noun, or pronoun preceded by the preposition de. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Celui (le vous qui, &c. Whichever of you that, &c. 
 
 Cette montre ressemblera celle de That watch is like that of ycnr 
 votre frère, brother. 
 
 701. In the second, they are followed by gm*, que, or dont; as, 
 Celui qui ne pense qiCà lui seul He who thinks of nobody but himself 
 
 dispense les autres d'y penser, excuses others from thinking of him. 
 Votre nouvelle est plus sure que Your intelligence is more authentic 
 celle qiHon débitait hier, than that which was circulated yes- 
 
 terday. 
 
 702. In these two cases, they are applied both to persons 
 and things. 
 
 703. In the latter of these instances, celui, &;c. are some- 
 times omitted, and this turn gives strength and elegance to 
 the expression ; as, 
 
 ^ui veut trop se faire craindre, He who wishes to make himself too 
 se fait rarement aimer, much feared, seldom makes him- 
 
 self beloved. 
 
 704. Ceci and cela apply only to things : however, in the 
 familiar style, custom authorizes us to say, in speaking of one 
 person individually, or of many collectively. Cela est heureux! 
 cela croupit dans la fange; cela est gueux et fier, &c. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 1. Whichever of you shall be found to excel the others, both in mind 
 and body, shall be acknowledged king of the island. 
 
 2. There are admirable pictures : these are after the manner of Rubens 
 and those after the manner of Van-Huysum. 
 
 3. Why are the statues of the most celebrated modern sculptors, not- 
 withstanding the perfection to which the arts have been carried, so much 
 inferior to those of the ancients 1 
 
 4. He whose soul, glowing, as it were, with divine fire, shall represent 
 to himself the whole of nature, and shall breathe into objects that spirit 
 of life which animates them, those affecting traits which delight and ravish 
 us, will be a man of real genius. 
 
 5. He that judges of others by himself is liable to many mistakes. 
 
 6. He that is easily offended discovers his weak side, and affords his 
 enemies an opportunity of taking advantage of it. 
 
 7. He -who loves none but himself deserves not to be loved by others. 
 
 (\.) Befoundto excelthe others, on jupera vainqueur — both in, et pour— and, et pour 
 
 (2.) There are, voilà de— pictures, tableau— are after, être dans — manner, genre. 
 
 (3.) jîre, (to be placed before so much inferior) — have been carried, on a porté— 
 inferior, au-dessous. 
 
 (4) Olowing with, enflammé de — as it were, pour ainsi dire — the whole of, tout— 
 shall breathe into; répandre sur — affecting, touchant — delight, séduire — real, vrai. 
 
 ^5.) By, d'après — liable, exposé — mistakes, méprises. 
 
 (6.) Is offended, s'oflenser— îwaA side^ faible— t^^ords, fournir à— ^ taldng advan- 
 tage, profiter. 
 
220 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 PRONOUNS INDEFINITE. 
 
 705. Though on may generally be considered as a mascu- 
 line pronoun, as in the phrase on n'^est pas toujours maître 
 de ses passions, there are, however, occasions in which it is 
 evidently feminine; as, on n'' est pas toujours jeune et jolie: 
 it may likewise be followed by a plural ; as, on se battit en 
 désespérés ; est-on des traîtres ? 
 
 706. This pronoun must be repeated before all the verbs 
 of a sentence, and refer to one and the same subject. Thus, 
 the sentence 
 
 On croit être aimé et on ne nous aime pas 
 is incorrect : it should be, 
 
 On croit être aimé et l'on ne l'est pas. 
 
 707. Quiconque is generally masculine : however, it is 
 feminine when speaking of or to females ; as, quiconque de 
 vous, Mesdames, Slc. : though, perhaps, celle de vous, &c., 
 is preferable. 
 
 EXERCISE ON PRONOUNS INDEFINITE. 
 
 1. Do you sincerely think, said Emily to Lucilla, that when women are 
 Bensible and pretty, they are ignorant of* it 1 No, they know it very 
 well : but if they are watchful over their character, they are not proud of 
 these advantages, 
 
 2. We are not slaves, to receive such treatment. 
 
 3. Do you know what they do here 1 They eat, they drink, they dance, 
 they play, they walk — in a word, they kill time in the gayest manner 
 possible. 
 
 4. Whoever of you is bold enough to slander me, I will make him 
 repent it. 
 
 5. Whoever of you is attentive and discreet shall receive a reward that 
 will flatter her. 
 
 (L) Sincerely, de bonne foi — Emily, Emilie — women, on — they, on — know, savoir — 
 watchful over, jaloux de — character, réputation — are proud, s'enorgueillir. 
 (2.) We, on — slaves, des esclaves — to receive, pour essuyer de. 
 (3) They, on— in the gayest manner, le plus gaiment— possible, (that they can). 
 (4.) Is, L. — to slander, pour médire de — it, (of it). 
 (5.) Is, Ju.— that will, fait pour. 
 
 708. Chacun m., chacune f , though always singular, may 
 be followed sometimes by son, sa, ses, and sometimes by 
 ïeur, leurs, which, in many instances, is embarrassing. 
 
 709 There is no difficulty in those phrases where chacun 
 is not contrasted with a plural number : for then son, sa, ses, 
 must be used ; as, 
 
 Do7i7iez a chacun sa part, Give to each his share. 
 
 Que chacun songe à ses affaires, Let evwy one mind his own business. 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 221 
 
 710. Rule. — In phrases where chacun is contrasted with 
 a plural to which it refers, son, sa, ses, must be employed 
 when chacun is placed after the regimen ; but leur, leurs, 
 must be used when chacun is placed before the regimen. 
 
 EXAMPLES OF SOJ\r, S.Î, SES. 
 Remettez ces médailles chacune en Return those medals each into its 
 
 sa place, proper place. 
 
 Les hommes devraient s'aimer cha- Men ought to love one another, 
 
 cun pour son propre intérêt, each for his own interest. 
 
 EXAMPLE OF LEUR, LEURS. 
 
 Les hommes devraient avoir, chacun Men ought, for their own interest, 
 pour leur propre ' iîitérêt, de to have an affection for each 
 Vamour les uns pour les antres, other. 
 
 711. Remark. — In phrases where chacun is contrasted with 
 a plural there are two senses, the collective and the distribu- 
 tive. When chacun is placed after the regimen, the collective 
 sense expressed by the plural is finished ; and the distributive 
 chacun acts separately the part of each individual : but when 
 chacun precedes the regimen, the collective sense remaining 
 incomplete, must be carried on to the end ; and then the pro- 
 noun which follows chacun is put in the plural ; as, 
 
 La reine dit elle-même aux députés, qull était temps qu'ils s'en retour- 
 nassent chacun chez eux. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 1. Go into my library, and put the books which have been sent back 
 to me each into its place. 
 
 2. They have all brought offerings to the temple, every 07ie according 
 to his means and devotion. 
 
 3. Thierry charged Uncelanus to carry his orders to the mutineers, and 
 to make them retire, each under his colors. 
 
 4. Each of them has brought his offering, and fulfilled his religious duty. 
 
 5. Had Ronsard and Balzac, each in his manner of writing, a sufficient 
 degree of merit to form after them any very great man in verse and in prose 1 
 
 6. After a day so usefully spent, we went back each to our own home. 
 
 7. Minds that possess any correctness examine things with attention, 
 in order to give a fair judgment of them ; and they place each of* them 
 in the rank it ought to occupy. 
 
 (2 ) Offering, offrande. 
 
 (3.) TT» carry, aller port'^r — mutineers, mn\.\n — co^rs, drapeau, sing. 
 (4.) (They have brought each their, Sec.)— fulfilled, remplir. 
 (5.) Manner of writing, genre— a stifficient degree, assez — merit, bon — any, un. 
 (6.) Day, journée — went back, retourner — to, chez— our own home, nous. 
 (7 ) Possess any, avoir de — correctness, justesse — giue a fair jtidgvtent, j\igeT avee 
 connais6ance— ;>/ace, mettre — to occupy, avoir. 
 
 712. Personne, used as a pronoun, is always mascuhne ; of 
 course, the adjective relating to it must be of that gender ; as, 
 
 Personne n^est anssi heureux qii^elh. Nobody is so happy as she. 
 
 t2 
 
222 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 713. Vun et Vautre require the verb they govern to be in 
 the plural. See page 147. 
 
 714. Ni Vun ni Vautre likewise generally govern the verb 
 in the plural, when both may at the same time receive the action 
 expressed by the verb : however, the two following modes 
 
 Ni l'un ni l'autre Viont fait leur devoir, or 
 Ni l'un ni l'autre n'o fait son devoir, 
 
 are authorized : but whenever this action applies only to a 
 single object, the verb must be in the singular; as, 
 
 Ni l'un ni l'autre n'est mon père ; ni l'un ni l'autre ne sera nommé à 
 cette ambassade. 
 
 715. But when m Vun ni Vautre elegantly stand after the 
 verb, the verb is always in the plural ; as, 
 
 lis ne sont morts ni l'un ni l'autre. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 1. Nobody is so severe, so virtuous in public, as some women who 
 practise the least restraint in private. 
 
 2. Nobody could be happier than she ; but as a consequence of that 
 levity w^hich you know she has, she has lost all the advantages that she 
 had received from nature and education. 
 
 3. Racine and Fénélon v^^ill be always the delight of feeling minds : 
 both possessed in the highest degree the art of exciting in us at pleasure 
 the most tender and the most lively emotions, 
 
 4. Balzac and Voiture enjoyed in their time great celebrity; but neither 
 has been read since by good taste : the native and simple graces are pre- 
 ferred to the bombast of the former and the affectation of the latter. 
 
 (1.) So, aus?i — some, certain— practise the least restraint, être le moins retenu. 
 
 (2.) Could, H. — that, un — levity, légèreté — know she has, lui connaître. 
 
 (3) always, dans tous les temps — both, l'un et l'autre — in the, au— pleasure, gré. 
 
 (4.) Enjoyed, G. — neither, ni l'un ni l'autre — has been read, (they read them no 
 more) — native, du naturel — simple, de la simplicité — are preferred, depuis que le bon 
 goût a fait préférer les, &c. — bombast, bouffissure. 
 
 716. Tout and rien, when the regimen direct, are placed 
 after the verb in simple tenses, and between the auxiliary and 
 the participle in compound tenses; as, // avoue tout; il 
 n'avoue rien ; il a tout avoué ; il n'a rien avoué. 
 
 717. But when they form the regimen indirect, they are 
 always placed after the verb, both in simple and in compound 
 tenses ; as, // rit de tout ; il ne se mêle de rien; il a pensé 
 à tout ; il n^ a pensé à rien, 
 
 718. Tout is sometimes used as an adverb ; as, 
 
 7Z hii dit tout froidement. He has told him quite coolly, 
 
 719. Sometimes also it represents quoique, encore que, 
 entièrement, quelque, in which case the following rule must 
 be observed : 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 223 
 
 720. Rule.— 7l7W? before an adjective, or a substantive 
 which is used adjectively, never takes either gender or num- 
 ber, except when immediately followed by an adjective femi- 
 nine beginning with a consonant or h aspirated; as, 
 
 Les enfans, tout aimables qu^^'ls sont, Children, amiable as they are. 
 
 Us sont tout interdits, They are quite disconcerted. 
 
 La vertu tout austère qiûelle paraît, Virtue, austere as it may appear. 
 
 Ces images tout amusatites qu^ elles These images, entertaining as they 
 
 sont, may be. 
 
 Cest une tête toute vide, It is quite a vacant head. 
 
 Ces dames, toutes spirituelles qu'elles These ladies, "witty as they may 
 
 sont, be. 
 
 Ces Jleurs sont tout aussi fraîches These flowers are quite as fresh as 
 
 que celles que vous avez, those which you have. 
 
 Ces dames sont, tout ainsi qae vous, These ladies, as well as you, are 
 
 tout comme vous, belles, jeunes et handsome, young, and inge- 
 
 spirituelles, nious. 
 
 721. In this latter sense, tout is little more than a mere 
 expletive. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 1. Children, amiable as they are, have nevertheless many faults, which 
 it is of importance to correct. 
 
 2. The philosophers of antiquity, although very* enlightened, have 
 given us but very confused ideas of the Deity, and very vague notions 
 about the principal duties of the law of nature. 
 
 3. Those flowers, inodorous as they are, are not the less esteemed. 
 
 4. Virtue, austere as it is, makes us enjoy real pleasures. 
 
 5. Fables, although very* entertaining, yet truly interest us only when 
 ihey convey instruction to us, under the disguise of an ingenious allegory. 
 
 6. Although that absurd pedant is an incessant scribbler, yet his head 
 is altogether empty. 
 
 7. Far be from us those maxims of flattery, that kings are born with 
 talents, and that their favored souls come out of God's hands completely 
 noise and learned. 
 
 8. Those fountains glide quite gently through a mead enamelled with 
 flowers. 
 
 9. These peaches are quite as good as those of the south of France. 
 
 (1 ) Have nevertheless, ne laisser pas d'avoir— /awZfs, défaut — of importance, essen- 
 
 (2) Enlightened, éclairés qu'ils étaient — of nature, naturel. [liel. 
 
 (3.) Inodorous, inodore — not, n'en. 
 
 (4) Enjoy, goàter de. [convey, offrir — disguise, voile. 
 
 (5 ) Entertaining, amusantes qu'elles sont — truly, véritablement — only, ne que — 
 6.) Incessant, infatigable — scribbler, écrivailleur — his head is, (he has not less the 
 head) — not, n'en — altogether, tout. 
 
 (7.) Far be, loin — of, de la — are born, naissent — with talents, hsibile— favored, pri- 
 vilégié — come out, sortir — learned, savant. 
 
 (8.) Glide, coaler— gently, doucement — through a mead, sur un gazon. 
 
 722. Quelque — que, sing. m. and f., quelques — que, pi. m. 
 and f., joined to a substantive, either alone or accompanied by 
 an adjective, take the sign of the plural. 
 
224 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Quelques richesses que vous ayez, Whatever riches you may 
 Quelques bonnes œuvres que votis Whatever good actions you may 
 
 fassiez, do. 
 
 Quelques peines affreuses que voiis However dreadful pains you may 
 
 éprouviez, suffer. 
 
 723. But when joined to an adjective separated from its 
 substantive, it does not take the sign of the plural. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Tons les hommes, quelque opposés All men, however opposite they 
 
 quils soient, may be. 
 
 Ces actions, quelque belles qxCon Those actions, however brilliant 
 
 les trouve, they may be found. 
 
 724. Quelque — que^ sing. m. and f., quelques — que^ pi. m. 
 and f., quel que, m. s., quelle que, f. s., quels que, m. pi., 
 and quelles que, f. pi., joined to a substantive (see page 74), 
 have the same meaning, although they are not used indiffer- 
 ently for each other. If the pronoun stands before the sub- 
 stantive, we must make use of quelque — -que ; as. 
 
 Quelques richesses que vous ayez ; 
 
 725. But if the verb intervene, then we make use of qu£l 
 que in two separate words ; as, 
 
 Quelles que soient les richesses que vous ayez. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 1. JVhatever talents you may possess, -whatever advantages you may 
 have received from nature and education, with* -whatever perfections you 
 may be endowed, expect only the suffrage of a small number of men. 
 
 2. Hotvever great services you may have rendered mankind, rather 
 look for their ingratitude than their acknowledgements. 
 
 3. Hoivever useful, hoivever -well -written the works which you have 
 published, yet think not that you will immediately reap the fruits of youi 
 labors : it is but by slow degrees that light introduces itself among men. 
 The course of time is swift ; but it seems to lag when it brings reason 
 and truth along with it. 
 
 4. Whatever may be the obstacles which ignorance, prejudice, and 
 envy oppose to the true principled of an art, yet we ought never to be 
 deterred from propagating them : the sun does not cease to shine because 
 its hght hurts the eyes of night-birds. 
 
 5. JVhatever be yo^ir birth, -whatever your riches and dignities, re- 
 member that you are frustrating the views of Providence, if you do not 
 make use of them for the good of mankind. 
 
 il) Possess, -avoir— have received, tenir — be endowed, posséder — expect, ne s'attendre 
 à — lut, que 
 
 (2.) Jilankind, homme, y>^.— rather look for, compter plutôt — ack-nowledgements, 
 reconnaissance, sing. 
 
 (■3.") Immediately, àe suite— reap, recueillir — lij slow degrees, avec lenteur — among, 
 chez— swift, rapide — ta lag, se traîner — alorig with it, à sa suite. 
 
 (4.) TVe, on — to be deterred, se rehatei— propagating, répandre — shine, éclairer— 
 ils, la — hurts, blesser — night-birds, oiseau de nuit. 
 
 (5.) Art frustrating, frustrer. 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 225 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 OF THE VERB. 
 
 Agreemejit of the Verb with its Subject. 
 
 726. It has been observed that the verb which has two 
 subjects, both singular, is put in the plural ; but to this rule 
 there are the following 
 
 727. Exceptions. — 1, A verb with two subjects in the 
 singular is not put in the plural when the two subjects are 
 only joined together by the conjunctions ou, comme, aussi- 
 bien que, autant que, &lc. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 La séduction ou la terreur Z'a en- Either persuasion or terror has drawn 
 
 traîné dans le parti des rebelles, him into the party of the rebels. 
 
 Le roi, aussi-bien que son minis- The king, as tvell as his ministry, 
 
 tère, veut le bien public, -wishes for the public good. 
 
 Son honnêteté, autant que son es- His honesty, as much as his wit, 
 
 prit, le fait rechercher, makes him be courted. 
 
 V envie, comme V ambition, est Envy, like ambition, is a blind pas- 
 
 une passion aveugle, sion. 
 
 728. 2. — The verb is likewise put in the singular, though 
 preceded by plurals, either when there is an expression which 
 collects all the substantives into one — such as, tout, ce, rien, 
 &c. — or when the conjunction mais is placed before the last 
 substantive, and this is in the singular. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Biens, dignités, honneurs, tout Riches, dignities, honors, every thing, 
 
 disparaît à la mort, vanishes at death. 
 
 Jeux, conversations, spectacles. Games, conversations, shows, no^Aw^ 
 
 rien ne la distrait,. diverts her. 
 
 Perfidies, noirceurs, incendies, Perfidies, enormities, conflagrations, 
 
 massacres, ce 7i'est là qu'une massacres, all this is but a feeble 
 
 faible image, &c. representation, &c. 
 
 JYoji-seulement toutes ses richesses Not only all his riches and honors, 
 
 et tous ses honneurs, mais toute but ail his virtue vanishes. 
 sa vertu s'évanouit, 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE VERB. 
 
 1. Either fear or inability prevented them from moving. [bosom. 
 
 2. The fear of death, or rather the love of life, began to revive in his 
 
 3. Alcibiades, as -well as Plato, was among the disciples of Socrales. 
 
 4. Lycurgus, like Solon, was a wise legislator. 
 
 (1.) Inability, impuissance — moving, remuer. 
 
 (2.) Began to revive, se réveiller— in, au fond dQ— bosom, cœur. 
 
 (3.) Among, au nombre de. 
 
 (4.) Lycurgus, LycurgUQ. 
 
226 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 
 
 5. Euripides, as much as Sophocles, contributed to the glory of the 
 A.thenians. 
 
 6. Riches, dignities, honors, glory, pleasure, every thing loses its 
 charms from the moment we possess it, because none of those things can 
 fill the heart of man. 
 
 7. The gentle zephyrs which preserved in that place, notwithstanding 
 the scorching heat of the sun, a delightful coolness : streams gliding with 
 a sweet murmur through meadows interspersed with amaranths and vio- 
 lets : a thousand springing flowers, which enamelled carpets ever green : 
 a wood of those tufted trees that bear golden apples, and the blossom of 
 which, renewed every season, yields the sweetest of all perfumes ; the 
 warbling of birds : the continual prospect of a fruitful country : in a 
 word, nothing of what till then had made him happy, could assuage the 
 feelings of his grief. 
 
 (6.) We, on — none, rien — those things, tout cela. 
 
 (7.) Preserved, entretenir — scorching heat, ardeur — interspersed with, parsemer 
 de — springing, naissant — carpets, tapis — tvfied, touffu — golden, (of gold) — renewed, 
 (which renews) se renouveler — (in) every season — yields, tépandre— prospect, spec- 
 tacle — made, rendre — assuage, l'arracher &— feeling, sentiment. 
 
 Of the Collective Partitive, 
 
 729. The collectives general have nothing to distinguish 
 them from substantives common, with regard to the laws of 
 agreement ; but the collectives partitive apparently deviate 
 from those laws in some instances. 
 
 730. Rule. — The verb which relates to a collective parti- 
 tive is put in the plural when that partitive is followed by the 
 preposition de and a plural ; but it is put in the singular, either 
 \^hen the partitive is followed by a regimen singular, or when 
 it expresses a determinate quantity, or lastly, when it presents 
 an idea independent of the plural which follows it. 
 
 EXAMPLES OF THE PLURAL. 
 
 La plupart des hommes sont bien The greatest part of men are very 
 prompts clans leurs jiigemens, hasty in their judgments. 
 
 Bien des philosophes se sont Many philosophers have been mis- 
 trompés, taken. 
 
 EXAMPLES OF THE SINGULAR. 
 
 Une infinité de peuple est accourue An immense number of people 
 (regimen singular), flocked together. 
 
 La moitié des soldats a péri (deter- One half of the soldiers has 
 minate quantity), perished. 
 
 Le plus grand nombre des troupes a The greater number of the troops 
 péri (idea independent of plural), has perished. 
 
 731. Thus the substantives partitive la plupart, une infi^ 
 7nté, une foule, un nombre, la plus grande partie, une sorte, 
 Sic, and words signifying quantity — such as peu, beaucoup j 
 asseZi moins, plus, trop, tant, combien, and que used for 
 combien, followed by a noun joined to them, by the preposition 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 227 
 
 de — have not the least influence on the verb, and conse- 
 quently, it is not with them that the verb agrees, but with the 
 noun which follows them. 
 
 732. Remark. — The words infinité and la plupart, used 
 by themselves, require the verb in the plural ; as. Une infinité 
 pensent, la plupart sont cCavis. 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE COLLECTIVE PARTITIVE. 
 
 1. J\Iany persons experience that human life is every where a state in 
 which much is to be endured and little to be enjoyed. 
 
 2. Many poets think that poetry is the art of uniting pleasure with 
 truth, by calling imagination to the help of reason. 
 
 3. Few persons reflect that time, like money, may be lost by unseason- 
 able avarice. 
 
 4. So many years of familiarity were chains of iron which linked me 
 to those men who beset me every hour. 
 
 5. Hoio many -wise men* have thought that, to seclude one's self from 
 the world was to pull out the teeth of devouring animals, to take away 
 from the wicked the use of his pOniard, from calumny its poisons, and 
 from envy its serpents ! 
 
 6. A company of young Phœnicians, of uncommon beauty, clad in 
 fine linen, whiter than snow, danced a* long while the dances of their 
 own* country, then those of Egypt, and lastly those of Greece. 
 
 7. A troop of nymphs, crowned with flowers, whose lovely tresses 
 flowed over their shoulders, and waved with the wind, swam in shoals 
 behind her car. 
 
 8. At the time of the invasion of Spain by the Moors, an innumerable 
 multitude of people retired into the Asturias, and there proclaimed Pela- 
 gius king. 
 
 9. A third-part of the enemy were left dead on the field of battle ; the 
 rest surrendered at discretion. 
 
 10. The innumerable crotvd of carriages which are to be seen in 
 London during the winter astonishes foreigners. 
 
 (1 ) Much is, &c. (one has a groat deal of pains and little of real enjoymenis). 
 
 (3 ) Unseasonable, hors de propos. 
 
 (4 ) Familiarity, habitude — linked, lier — beset, obséder. {takeaway from, ôterk. 
 
 (5.) How many, que de — to seclude one's self, se retirer— ;pMW out of, arracher à — to 
 
 (6.) Company, troupe — clad in, et vêtu de — linen, lin. 
 
 (7.) Lovely, beau — tresses, cheven— flowed, pendre — waved, flotter — with, au gré de 
 —swam, nager H. — shoals, foule — car, char. 
 
 (8.) Moors, Maure — retired, se retirer — Asturias, Asiuries — Pelagius, Pelage, 
 
 (0 ) j3 third-part, un tiers — enemy, pi. — surrendered, se rendre. 
 (10 ) Crowd, quantité — which are, &c. (which one sees). 
 
 Place of the Subject with regard to the Verb. 
 
 733. It has been seen that the subject of a verb is either a 
 noun or a pronoun, and that this subject must always be 
 expressed in French. It remains to speak of the place of this 
 subject with respect to the verb. 
 
 734. Rule. — The subject, whether a noun or pronoun, is 
 generally placed before the verb. 
 
228 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 L'ambition effi-énée de quelques The boundless ambition of a few 
 
 homines, a, dans tous les temps, men has, in all ages, been the 
 
 été la vraie cause des révoltitious real cause of the revolutions of 
 
 des états, empires. 
 
 Quaîid nous nageons daiis Vabon- When we roll in plenty, we 
 
 dance, il est bieîi rare que nous seldom think of the miseries of 
 
 no us occupions des maux d^ autrui, others. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 1. Youth is full of presumption ; it expects every thing from itself: 
 although frail, it thinks itself all-sufficient, and that it has nothing to fear. 
 
 2. Co?nmerce is like certain springs : if you attempt to* divert theii 
 course, t/ow dry them up. 
 
 3. It is enough that falsehood is falsehood, to be unworthy of a man who 
 speaks in the presence of God, and who is to sacrifice every thing to truth. 
 
 4. The ambition and avarice of man are the sources of his unhappiness. 
 
 5. They punished in Crete three \'ices which have remained unpunished 
 in all other nations : — ingratitude, dissimulation, and avarice. 
 
 6. Like the Numidian lion, goaded by cruel hunger, and rushing upon 
 a flock of feeble sheep, he tears, he slays, he wallows in blood. 
 
 (1.) Full of presumption, présomptueux — expects, se promettre — itself all-sufficient, 
 pouvoir tout — that it has, avoir. 
 
 (2.) Springs, source — attempt, vouloir — dry up, faire tarir. 
 
 (3.) It is enough, suffire— falsehood, mensonge — is, Q,.—in, en — is to sacrifice, doit. 
 
 (5.) Punished, H. — hare remained, être — in, chez. 
 
 (6.) Like the, semblable à un — JsTumidian, de Numidie— ^oaf^ed by , k.c. , {IhaX. cruel 
 hunger goads) dévorer — rushing, (which rushes upon) entrer dans — tears, déchirer— 
 slays, égorger — wallows, nager. 
 
 735. Exceptions. — 1, In interrogative phrases, the ques- 
 tion is made either with a pronoun or a noun, as subject of the 
 verb : if with a pronoun, it is always placed after the verb ; as, 
 
 Que dit-on ? irai-je à la campagne ? de qui parle-t-on ? 
 
 736. If with a noun, the noun is sometimes placed before 
 and sometimes after the verb ; it stands before when the pro- 
 noun personal which answers to it asks the question ; as, 
 
 Cette nouvelle est-elle sûre ] les hommes se rendent-ils toujours à la raison 1 
 
 737. It stands after when a pronoun absolute or an interro- 
 gative adverb, placed at the beginning of the phrase, allow 
 the suppression of the personal pronoun ; as, - 
 
 Que dit votre ami 1 à quoi s'occupe votre frère 1 où. demeure votre cousin ? 
 
 738. Remark. — In interrogative sentences, when the verb 
 which precedes il, elle, on, ends with a vowel, the letter -/- is 
 put between that verb and the pronoun ; as, 
 
 Arrive-t-il Î viendra-t-elle 1 aime-t-on les vauriens 1 
 
 739. Whence stands after a verb which ends with e mute, 
 that e mute is changed into e acute; as, Ahné-je? puisse- 
 je ? But when the transposition of ^e after the verb becomes 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 229 
 
 harsh, euphony then requires another turn ; so, iustedd of 
 cours-je? dors-je? which would be intolerable, we must 
 say, est-ce que je cours? est-ce que je dors? 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 1. Have you forgotten all that I*roviclence has done for youl how 
 have you escaped the shafts of your enemies 1 how have you been pre- 
 served from the dangers which surrounded you on all sides ] could you 
 be so blind as not to acknowledge and adore the all-powerful hand that 
 has miraculously saved you 1 
 
 2. What -will posterity say of you if, instead of devoting to the happi- 
 ness of mankind the great talents which you have received from nature, 
 you make use of them only to deceive and corrupt them 1 
 
 3. Do not the misfortimes which we experience often contribute to 
 our* prosperity 1 
 
 4. Why are the tvorhs of nature so perfect? Because each work is a 
 whole, and because she labors upon an eternal plan, from which she never 
 deviates. Why, on the contrary, are the productions of man so imperfect"? 
 It is because the human mind, being unable to create any thing, and inca- 
 pable of embracing the universe at a single glance, can* produce only 
 after having been enriched by experience and meditation. 
 
 (1.) Escaped, échapper à — shafts, Xra.it— preserved, garantir— ow all sides, de toutes 
 parts— so as, assez ponr— saved, conserver. 
 
 (2.) Devoting-,. consacrer — mmkind, homme pi. — deceive, égarer. 
 
 (3.) Experience, éprouver — cuiitribute to, tourner en. 
 
 (4.) Because, C'est qne—and becaïise,et que — being unable, ne pouvoir — incapable, 
 (not being able)— ai, de — giaitce, vue— enriched, fécondé. 
 
 740. 2. — The subject is put after the verb in incidental sen- 
 tences which express that we are quoting somebody's words ; as. 
 
 Je meurs innocent, a dît Louis XVI. I die innocent, said Louis XVI. 
 Je le veux bien, dit-il, I am very willing, said he. 
 
 741. 3. — The subject is put after the verb if the sentence 
 begins with an impersonal verb, or either of these words, tel, 
 ainsi, Slc. ; as, 
 
 Tel était C acliarnement du soldat, Such was the fury of the soldier 
 
 que, &c. that, &c. 
 
 Ainsi Jinit cette sanglante tragédie. Thus ended th^t bloody tragedy. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 1 . True glory, said he, is founded in humanity : whoever prefershis own 
 glory to the feelings of humanity, is a monster of pride, and not a man. 
 
 2. There have happened for these* ten years so many events exceeding 
 all probability, that posterity will find it difficult to credit them. 
 
 3. Such tvas thai incorruptible Phocion who answered the deputies of 
 Alexander, who were telling him that this powerful monarch loved him as 
 the only honest man : Well, then, let him allow me to be and to appear so. 
 
 (1.) Is founded, ne se trouver pas? hors de— /ecZin^5, sentiment. 
 
 (2.) There have happened for, il s'est passé depuis — exceeding, hors de— probability. 
 vraisemhlajice — will find very difficult, avoir bien de la peine — to credit, ajouter foi à 
 
 (3.) Loved, chérir — honest man, homme de bien — well, ho! — to be so, d'être tel— 
 appear so, le paraître. 
 
230 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 
 
 4. Thus ended, by the humiliation of Athens, that dreadful war of 
 twenty-seven years, to* which ambition gave rise, which hatred made 
 atrocious, and which was as fatal to the Greeks as their ancient con- 
 federation had proved advantEÎgeous to them. 
 
 (4.) Ended, se terminer— ^are rise, faire naître — made, rendre — had proved, être I. 
 
 742. 4. — The subject is put after the verb when the sub- 
 junctive is used to express a wish, or to take the place of 
 quand même, whenever, and a conditional ; as, 
 
 l'Hissent tous les peuples se con- May all nations be convinced of 
 
 vaincre de cette vérité, this truth. 
 
 Dussé-Je y périr, firai, Should I perish there, I will go. 
 
 743. 5. — The subject is put after the verb when that subject 
 is followed by several words which are dependent upon it, 
 and form an incidental sentence which, by its length, might 
 obscure the relation of the verb to the subject ; perspicuity 
 then requires that the subject should be displaced. 
 
 744. Sometimes, however, this transposition of the subject 
 is only the effect of taste, to avoid an inharmonious cadence ; 
 or it is used by an orator who wishes to arouse the attention 
 of his hearers by a bold and unexpected turn. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 1. The gods grant that you may never experience such misfortunes ! 
 
 2. May you, O wise old man ! in a repose diversified by pleasing 
 occupations, enjoy the past, lay hold of the present, and charm your latter 
 days with the hope of eternal felicity ! 
 
 3. Whatisnotin the power of the gods ! were you at the lowest depths, 
 the power of Jupiter could draw you from thence ; were you in Olympus, 
 beholding the stars under your feet, Jupiter could plunge you to the bottom 
 of the abyss, or precipitate you into the flames of gloomy Tartarus. 
 
 4. There, through meadows enamelled with flowers, glide a thousand 
 various rivulets, distributing every where their pure (and) limpid waters. 
 
 .5. Already, for the honor of France, there* had come into administra- 
 tion a man more distinguished for his understanding and virtues than for 
 his dignities. 
 
 (1.) Grant, faire — experience, éprouver de. 
 
 (2) Old man, vieillard — lay hold of, saisir — with, de. 
 
 (3.) Is not in the power of, ne peuvent — were, S. — lowest depths, fond de l'abîme — 
 power, puissance — could, pouvoir N. — Olympus, Olympe — stars, astre — gloomy, noir 
 —Tartarus, Tai tare. 
 
 (4.) Through, au milieu de — with, àe— glide, serpenter — rivulets, ruisseau — distri- 
 buting, (which distribute) — their, une. 
 
 (5.) Had come, être entré — administration, (of affairs)— /or, par — understanding, 
 esprit. 
 
 Government of the Verbs. 
 
 745. When the regimen of a verb is a noun, it is generally 
 placed after the verb ; but to this rule there is one exception, 
 besides those which will hereafter be mentioned. 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 231 
 
 746. Exception. — In an interrogative sentence, the regi- 
 men is placed before the verb when this regimen is joined 
 to an absolute pronoun. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Quel objet voyez-vous ? What object do you see 
 
 A quelle science vous appliquez- To what science do you apply 
 
 vous P yourself? 
 
 X>e quelle of aire vous occupez- About what business are you cm- 
 
 vous ? ployed % 
 
 747. Remark. — In French, a verb can never have two 
 regimens direct : therefore, when a verb has two regimens, 
 both nouns, one of them must necessarily be preceded by a 
 preposition. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Donnez ce livre à votre frère. Give that book to your brother. 
 
 On a accusé Cicéron d'imprudence Cicero has been accused of impru- 
 et de faiblesse, dence and weakness. 
 
 748. Though the natural order of the ideas seems to require 
 that the regimen direct be placed before the indirect, the per- 
 spicuity of the sentence does not allow it in all cases. 
 
 749. Rule. — When a verb has two regimens, the shorter 
 is generally placed first ; but if they be of equal length, the 
 regimen direct will precede the indirect. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Les hypocrites s'étudient à parer Hypocrites make it their study to 
 
 le vice des dehors de la vertu, deck vice with the exterior of virtue. 
 
 Les hypocrites s'étudient à parer Hypocrites naake it their study to 
 
 des dehors de la vertu les vices deck with the exterior of virtue 
 
 les plus honteux et les plus the most shameful and most odious 
 
 décriés, vices. 
 
 L'ambition sacrifie le présent à Ambition sacrifices the present to 
 
 V avenir, mais lavolupté sacrifie the future, but pleasure sacrifices 
 
 l'avenir au présent, the future to the present. 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE GOVERNMENT OF THE VERBS. 
 
 1. Illustrious examples teach us that God has hurled /rom their thrones 
 princes -who contemned his laws : he reduced to the condition of a beast 
 the haughty JVebuchadnezzar, -who -wanted to usurp divine honors. 
 
 2. Wretched is* the man who feeds his mind -with chimeras. 
 
 3. Our interest should prompt us to prefer virtue to vice, -wisdom to 
 pleasure, and modesty to vanity. 
 
 (i.) /;Zus£ri<jMs, fameux — teach, apprendre — hurled, renverser — haughty superbe— 
 Nebuchadnezzar, Nabuchodonosor — wanted to, vouloir H. 
 (2.) Feeds, repaître— ioi«A, de. 
 (3.) Should, devoir F.— prompt, porter^p leasure, volupté. 
 
 750. Rule. — A noun may be governed at once by two 
 veibs, provided those verbs do not require different regimens. 
 
f^ PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 On doit aimer et respecter les rois, We ought to love and respect kings. 
 Ce général attaqua et prit la ville, That general attacked and took the city 
 
 751. But w^ must not say, 
 
 Cei officier attaqua et se rendit That officer attacked and made 
 maître de la ville, himself master of the city. 
 
 752. A different turn should be given to the sentence, by 
 placing the noun after the first verb and adding €?i before the 
 second ; as, 
 
 Cet officier attaqua la ville, et 5'en That officer attacked the city, and 
 rendit maître, made himself master of it. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 1. Luxury is like a torrent, which carries aivay and overthrows every 
 thing it meets. 
 
 2. Nothing can* resist the operation of time : it at length undermines, 
 alters, or destroys every thing. 
 
 3. Among the Spartans, pubhc education had tv^o objects : the first, to 
 harden their bodies by fatigue ; the second, to excite and nourish in their 
 minds the love of their country and an enthusiasm for what is great. 
 
 (].) Carries away, entraîner — overthrows, renverser — every thing, tout ce que. 
 (2.) Operation, action — at length., à la longue — undermines, miner. 
 (3.) Among the Spartans, à Sparte — to, de — harden, endurcir — by, ii — their, les— /or 
 tohat is great, les grandes choses. 
 
 On the use, proper or accidental, of Moods and Tenses. 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 753. The present is used to express an existing state ; as. 
 Je suis ici, I am here. 
 
 754. An invariable state ; as, 
 
 pieu est de toute éternité, God is from all eternity. 
 
 755. A future near at hand ; as, 
 
 E est demain fête, To-morrow is a holiday. 
 
 756. Or even a preterit, when, to give a sort of animated 
 picture, we relate a thing past as passing. Thus, we find in 
 Racine, 
 
 J^ ai vuvotrematheureuxjils traîné I have seen your unhappy son 
 par ses chevaux, dragged along by his horses. 
 
 757. But suddenly passing from the preterit to the present, 
 the speaker adds, 
 
 H veut les rappeler, et sa voix les He calls out to stop them, but his 
 effraie, voice frightens them. 
 
 758. In English, the verb to he is frequently used with 
 the participle present ; as, 
 
 I am reading, I am translating, I shall bo writing. 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 233 
 
 759. This construction is not adopted in French ; and, 
 whenever found, it is to be translated in French simply by the 
 verb, put in the tense expressed by the verb to he. Thus, / 
 am readings must be expressed by je lis ; / shall be writing, 
 must be rendered f écrirai, &c. 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE PROPER USE OF MOODS, &c. 
 
 1. ffe is in his chamber, where he is relaxing his mind from the 
 fatigue of business by some instructive and agreeable reading. 
 
 2. Truth, eternal by its nature, is immutable as God himself. 
 
 3. I never let* a day pass without devoting an hour or two to reading 
 the ancients. 
 
 4. It is this week that the new piece comes out. 
 
 5. The armies were in sight : nothing was heard on all sides but 
 dreadful cries : the engagement began. Immediately a cloud of arrows 
 darkens the air and covers the combatants : nothing is heard but doleful 
 cries of the dying, or the clattering of the arms of those who fall in the 
 conflict ; the earth groans beneath a heap of dead bodies, and rivers of 
 blood stream every where ; there is nothing in this confused mass of men 
 enraged against one another but slaughter, despair, revenge, and brutal faiy. 
 
 (1.) Is relaxing, délasser — readings lecture. 
 
 (2) By, de — immutable, immuable. 
 
 (3.) Devoting, consacrer — reading, la lecture de. 
 
 (4.) Come out, on donne. 
 
 (5.) Sight, présence — nothing was, &c. on ne que H. — ike engagement began,on en 
 vint aux mains — cloud, nuée — arrows, trait — darkens, obscurcir — nothing is, &c. on 
 n'entend plusque — doleful, plaintif — clattering, bruit — coiijiict, inèlée — groans, gémii 
 — beneath, sous— heap, monceau — rivers, ruisseau — stream, couler— «Aere is luthing 
 in, &c. ce ne être dans — mass, amas — enraged, acharné — but, que— slaughter, mas 
 sacre. 
 
 760. The hnperfect is used — 1, To denote the recurrence 
 of an action at a time which is past ; as. 
 
 Quand fêtais à Paris, fallals When I was at Paris, I often went 
 souvent anx Champs Elysées, to the Champs Elysées. 
 
 761. 2, For a past which has some duration, especially in 
 narrations; as, 
 
 Rome était d'abord gouvernée par Rome was at first governed by 
 des rois, kings. 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE USE OF THE IMPERFECT. 
 
 1. When I ivas at Paris, I ivent every morning to take a walk in the 
 Champs Elysées or the Bois de Boidogne : afterwards, I caîtie home, 
 where I employed myself till dinner either in reading or writing; and in 
 the evening, I generally luent for amusement to the French Theatre or 
 the Opera. 
 
 2. When I -was in the prime of life, like the light butterfly, \ fluttered 
 from object to object, without being able to settle to any thing : eager for 
 
 (1) Take a walk, se promener — in, à — came home, rentrer chez soi — employed, 
 s'occuper— îTi reading, (say to read)— for amusement, me délasser— ifrencA Theatre. 
 Comédie Française. 
 
 (2.) Prime of life, fleur de Vàgs— butterfly, papillon-^^uWercii, volcr-^eing able 
 
 v2 
 
fl^ PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 
 
 pleasure, I seized every thing that had its appearance : alas ! how far -uraa 
 I then from foreseeing that I should deplore with so much bitterness the 
 loss of that precious time. 
 
 3. For a short time after Abraham, the knowledge of the true God stil) 
 appeared in Palestine and Egypt. Melchisedec, king of Salem, tvas the 
 priest of the Most High God. Abimelech, king of Gerar, and his successor 
 of the same name, feared God, swore by his name, and reverenced hi& 
 power. But in Moses' time, the nations adored even beasts and reptiles 
 Every thing ivas God' but God himself. 
 
 pouvoir— settZe, me fixer— ea^er for, avide âe—had its appearance, m'en présentait 
 l'image— Aow, que— with so muck bitterness, (so bitterly). 
 (3.) Swore, iarei— reverenced, admirer— fÀe nations, on— even, jusqu'à— but, excepté 
 
 762. In French, the preterit definite and the preterit inde- 
 finite are not used indifferently. 
 
 763. The preterit definite is used when speaking of a time 
 which is entirely past, and of which nothing remains ; as, 
 
 Je Jis nn voyage à Bath le mois I took a journey to Bath last 
 
 dernier, month. 
 
 J'écrivis hier à Rome, I wrote yesterday to Rome. 
 
 764. To authorize the use of this tense, there must be the 
 interval of at least one day. It is the most used in the historic 
 style, and for that reason called parfait historique. 
 
 765. The preterit indefinite is used either for a past inde- 
 terminate or for a past of which something still remains ; as, 
 
 J'ai voyagé en Italie, I have travelled in Italy. 
 
 J'ai déjeûné ce matin à Londres, I breakfasted this morning in London 
 et dine à lîichmond, and dined at Kichmond. 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE PROPER USE OF THE PRETERIT. 
 
 Amenophis conceived the design of making his son s, conqueror. He 
 set about it after the manner of the Egyptians — that is, with great ideas. 
 All the children who were born on* the same day as Sesostris, luere 
 brought to court by order of the king : he had them educated as his own 
 children, and with the same care as Sesostris. When he ~u;as grown up, 
 he made him serve his apprenticeship in a war against the Arabs : this 
 young prince learned there to bear hunger and thirst, and subdued that 
 nation, ùU then invincible. He afterwards attacked Lybia, and conquered 
 it. After these successes, he formed the project of subduing the whole 
 world. In consequence of* this,* he entered Ethiopia, which he ynade 
 tributary. He continued his victories in Asia. Jerusalem ivas the first 
 to feel the force of his arms : the rash Rehoboam could not resist him, 
 and Sesostris carried away the riches of Solomon. He penetrated into 
 the Indies, farther than Hercules and Bacchus, and farther than x\lexander 
 did afterward. The Scythians obeyed him as far as the Tanais ; Armenia 
 and Cappadocia ivere subject to him. In a word, he extended his empire 
 from the Ganges to the Danube. 
 
 Making, faire Ae— set about it, s'y prendre— offer, à— ideas, \)ensée— brought, amener 
 •had educated, faire élevev— grown up, grand— made serve, fit (ahe— apprenticeship, 
 apprentissage— in, par— entered, entrer dans— made, rendre— as far as, jusqu'à— Cay- 
 fodocia, Cappadoce. 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 235 
 
 766. The preterit indefinite is sometimes used instead of a 
 future just approaching ; as, 
 
 Avez-vous bientôt Jini ? Have you soon done 1 
 
 Oui,faiJlni dans le moment, Yes, I shall have done in a moment. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 1. Enflamed with the desire of knowing mankind, I have travelled, 
 not only among the most polished nations, but even among the most bar 
 barous. I have observed them in the different degrees of civilization, 
 from the state of simple nature to the most perfect state of society, and 
 wherever I went, the resialt ivas the same : that is to say, I have every 
 where seen beings occupied in drying up the different sources of happiness 
 that nature had placed within their reach. 
 
 2. I have travelled this year in Italy, where I had an* opportunity of 
 seeing several masterpieces of antiquity, and where I made a valuable 
 collection of scarce medals. I there admired the perfection to which they 
 have brought architecture, painting, and music ; but what pleased me 
 most there, was the beauty of the climate of Naples. 
 
 (1.) With, de — mankind, homme, pi. — among, chez — polished nations, peuple policé 
 — barbarous, nalio» sauvage— /rom, ùb^ms— simple, pur — to, jusqu'à — wherever I 
 went, dans tourf les pays — the result loas the same, (I had the same result)— in drying 
 up, à tarir — within their reach, à leur portée. 
 
 (2.) Opportunity, occasion— masterpieces, chefs d'œuvre — scarce, raxe— pleased me 
 most, faire le plus de plaisir— zoas, est. 
 
 767. The two preterits anterior differ in the same manner 
 as the two preceding- preterits ; but they are always accom- 
 panied by a conjunction, or an adverb of time; as, 
 
 Je suis sorti dès que fai ext dîné, I went out as soon as I had dined. 
 J'' eus Jini hier à midi, I had done yesterday at noon. 
 
 768. The pluperfect denotes that a thing took place before 
 another v/hich had itself already taken place ; as, 
 
 J'' avais soupe quand il entra, 1 had supped when he came in. 
 
 EXERCISE. [causes. 
 
 1. As soon as I had examined this phenomenon, I tried to find out its 
 
 2. As soon as we had crossed the river, we found ourselves in a wood 
 where there was not a single foot-path traced. 
 
 3. As soon as the great Sesdstris had satisfied his ambition by the con- 
 quest of so many empires, he returned into Egypt, where he devoted the 
 whole of the day to administering strict justice to his people, and in the 
 evening he recreated himself by holding conferences with the learned, cr 
 by conversing with the most upright people of his kingdom. 
 
 4. I had only received, like most of the grandees, an education in which 
 I had imbibed nothing but sentiments of pride and insensibility ; that is, 
 they had done every thing in their power to stifle in me the happy and 
 benevolent dispositions which I had received from nature. 
 
 (I ) ^s soon as, dès que — tried to find out, en rechercher. 
 
 (2.) Crossed, traverser— /oM7/rf ourselves, se trouver engagée— foot-path, sentier de. 
 
 (3 ) The whole of the day, jour entier — administering, rendre A.— strict, exact — 
 recreated, délasser — by holding conferences, à s'entretenir — upright, honnête — • 
 people, gens. 
 
 (4.) Grandee, grand — imbibed, puiser — they, on— in their power, ce qu'on pouvoir 
 1 —sUfie, èlo\xf£Qi— benevolent, bienfaisant. 
 
236 PARTICULAR RtTLËS OP THE VERB. 
 
 769. As the use of these different preterits is attended with 
 some difficulty, the following analysis is added, in order more 
 clearly to explain the manner in which they are used. 
 
 770. We read in Marmontel the following extract : 
 
 Célicour, à Vàge de quinze ans, Célicour, at the age of fifteen, had 
 avait été dans le inonde ce qu^on been in the world what is called a 
 appelle un petit prodige. little prodigy. 
 
 771. The author employs the pluperfect, as he speaks of a 
 period of time anterior to all those which he is going to mention. 
 
 B fesait des vers les plus galans He composed the most agreeable love- 
 
 du monde ; il ii y a.yait pas dans sonnets imaginable ; there was not 
 
 le voisinage une jolie femme a pretty woman in the neighborhood 
 
 quHln^eCit célébrée : c'était dom- that he had not celebrated : it ivas a 
 
 mag&. de laisser tant de talens pity to let so many talents be buried 
 
 enfolds datis laie petite ville ; in a little town : Paris ivas the the- 
 
 JParis devait en être le théâtre, atre on which they ought to be 
 
 exhibited. 
 
 772. Here the author makes use of the imperfect, because 
 he speaks of the habitual employment of Célicour. 
 
 Et Ton fit si bien, que son père And they co7z^?'ZT»eJ matters so that his 
 se résolut de Vy envoyer, father Jeto^^nmecZ to send him there. 
 
 773. Now, the author passes to the preterit definite, because 
 he is no longer speaking of what Célicour used to do, but what 
 he did at a time past, and of which nothing remains 
 
 Ce pire était un honnête homme, This father -was a good sort of man, 
 
 qid aimait V esprit sans en avoir, who ivas fond of wit, without hav- 
 
 et qui admirait, sans savoir ing any, and admired, without 
 
 pourquoi, tout ce qid venait de knowing why, every thing that 
 
 la capitale. Il avait même des came from the metropolis. Nay, 
 
 relations littéraires, et du nom- he even had some literary con- 
 
 bj^e de ses corresponda7is était nexions, and among his corres- 
 
 un connaisseur nomine M. de pondents was a connaisseur of the 
 
 Fintac, name of Fintac. 
 
 774. Here, again, the author resumes the form of the im- 
 perfect, as he is now speaking of the habitual state of Céli- 
 cour's father in his little town, and because, in this passage, 
 he merely relates what that father was doing, at a time past, 
 which has no kind of relation to the present. 
 
 Ce fut principalement à hd que It ivas particularly to him that Céli- 
 Célicour fut recommandé, cour xvas recommended. 
 
 775. The form of the preterit definite is now resumed, 
 because this is an action passed, at a time of which nothing 
 is left, &c. 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB, 23*7 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 1. God, who had created his angels in holiness, rvonld have their 
 happiness depend upon themselves : they could insure their felicity, by 
 giving themselves willingly to Uieir Creator; but they delighted m them- 
 selves, and not in God : imm jdiately those spirits of light became spirits 
 of darkness. 
 
 2. There is a letter which Philocles has tvritten to a friend of his, about 
 his project of making himself king of Carpathus. I perused that letter, 
 and it seemed to me to be the hand of Philocles. They had perfectly 
 imitated his writing. This letter threti) me into a strange surprise. I 
 read it again and again, and coxdd not persuade myself that it xvas writ- 
 ten* by PhilocTes, when I recalled to my mind the affecting marks which 
 he had given me of his disinterestedness and integrity. 
 
 3. Those who had she-wn the greatest zeal for the state and my person 
 did not think themselves obliged to undeceive me after so terrible an 
 example. I myself ivas afraid lest truth should break through the cloud, 
 and reach me in spite of all my flatterers. I felt within myself that it 
 would have raised in me bitter remorse. My effeminacy, and the dominion 
 which a treacherous minister had gained over me, ihreiv me into a kind 
 of despair of ever recovering my* liberty. 
 
 (1.) Have their happiness depend, (that their happiness) dépendre S.— comW, pouvoir 
 — delighted in, se plaire en — of light, lumineux— c?ar/c«ess, ténèbres. 
 
 (2.) There is, voilà— about, sur— Carpathus, Carpathie— io be, de—therj, on— again 
 and again, sans cesse-by, de— when I recalled to, repasser dans i.— integrity, 
 bonne foi. 
 
 (3.) Did not think themselves obliged to, se croire dispensé de— was afraid lest, 
 craindre q\ie— break through, percer S.— reach, parvenir jusqu'à— i?i spite of malgré— 
 raised in, causer ii— effeminacy, mollesse— dominion, ascendant— treacherous, perfide 
 —gained, prendre— threw, plonger— recovering, rentrer en. 
 
 776. There is this difference between the two future 
 tenses, that the period of time expressed by the future abso- 
 lute may or may not be determined ; as, 
 
 J'irai à la campagne, or j'irai demain à la campagne, 
 while, in the future anterior, the time is necessarily deter- 
 mined; as. 
 
 J'aurai fini, quand vous arriverez. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 1 . Remember that youth is but a flower, which ivill -wither almost as 
 soon as it* opens. Thou -wilt see thyself gradually changed. Smiling 
 graces, sweet pleasures, strength, health, and joy, 7vill vanish like a pleas- 
 ing dream ; nothing but the sad remembrance will be left thee. 
 
 2. I shall next year take a journey into Greece, and I am preparing 
 myself for it by reading the travels of the young Anacharsis. 
 
 3. When you have read the celebrated discourse of Bossuet on Uni- 
 versal History, and studied in it the causes of the rise and fall of states, 
 you ivill be less astonished at the revolutions, more or less sudden, that 
 modern empires have experienced, which appeared to you in the most 
 flourishing state. 
 
 (1.) Willwithcr, (will be almost as soon withered) sécher— opens, éclose— gradually, 
 insenaiblement— lively, riant— pleasing, hean—nothing will be left, il n'en rester L. 
 
 (2.) Take, faire— for it, y— reading, lecture de— the travels, celui. 
 
 (3 ) Have read, M.—and, que vous M.— in it, y—rise, grandeur— /aW, chute— swrfc/fn, 
 Mubite— <that have experieliced the modern empires, which, &c.t appeared, IL 
 
238 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 
 
 CONDITIONAL. 
 
 777. The conditional is used — 1, To express a wish; as, 
 
 Que je serais, or giie f aurais été How glad I should be, or should 
 content de réussir dans cette have been, to succeed in that 
 affaire ! affair ! 
 
 778. 2, AVith si, if, whether, expressing a doubt ; as, 
 
 Deinandez-hd s'il serait venu avec Ask him whether he would have 
 nous supposé quHl n^eût pas eii come with us, had he not been 
 affaire, busy. 
 
 779. 3, Before or after the imperfect, or pluperfect of the 
 indicative, preceded by si ; as, 
 
 J^ous nous épargnerions bien des We should spare ourselves much 
 
 peines, si nous savions modérer pain, did we know how to mode- 
 
 nus désirs, rate our desires. 
 
 Vous auriez été phis heurezix, si You would have been more happy 
 
 vous aviez suivi mes conseils, if j'^ou had followed my advice. 
 
 780. 4, With quand, used instead of si, quoique, or quand 
 même ; the verb preceded by quand is generally in one of 
 the conditionals ; as, 
 
 Quand V avare posséderait tout tor Were the miser to possess all the 
 du monde, il ne serait pas encore gold in the world, still he would 
 content, not be satisfied. 
 
 781. 5, Lastly, for various tenses of the indicative ; as, 
 
 Croiriez-vous votre ^l^ iiigrat ? Could you think your son ungrateful 1 
 
 which means croyez-vous, <fec. 
 
 Jj auriez-vous soupçonné d^un tel Could you have suspected him of 
 vice ? such a vice 1 
 
 which means Vavez-vous, &c. 
 
 Quelle raison pourrait m^ empêcher What cause could prevent me from 
 d'aller vous voir ? ' coming to see you 1 
 
 which means quelle cause pourra, &;c. 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE CONDITIONAL. 
 
 1. If it -ivere even possible for men always to act conformably to equity, 
 as it is the multitude that must judge their conduct, the wicked would 
 always blame and contradict them from malignity, and the good sume- 
 times from mistake. 
 
 2. What false steps I should have made, but for you, at my entrance 
 into the world ! 
 
 3. But for your counsels, I shoidd have failed in this undertaking. 
 
 (1.) If even, quand même— 7cere, 'N.—for men, (that men')— to act, S —judge, juger 
 de — would blame, M. — contradict, croiser M. 
 (iJ) What, que de — steps, d-marche — but for, sans. 
 (3,) But for, sans -failed, échouer. 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 239 
 
 4. How satisfied I should have been if you had sooner informed me of 
 your happiness Î 
 
 5. If we gave to infancy none but just and clear notions, there -would 
 not be by far so many false wits in the world. 
 
 6. Had Alexander conquered the whole world, his ambition -would not 
 have been satisfied ; he xvould still have found himself straitened in it. 
 
 7. Could you believe him vain enough to aspire to that high degree 
 of honor 1 
 
 8. Could you ever have thought him capable of deserting the good 
 cause, to go and side with rebels 1 
 
 9. Would you renounce being useful to the present generation because 
 envy fastens on you 1 
 
 (4 ) Hozc, que. 
 
 (5.) We. on — there icould not he ly far so many, il y aurait bien moins de. 
 
 (6.) (When Alexander would bave conquered) — straitened, trop à l'étroit. [de. 
 
 (8.) Deserting, abandonner — to go and side with, pour se ranger so*us les drapeaux 
 
 (9.) Renounce, renoncer à— fastens, s'attacher— ore you, à vos pas. 
 
 Remark on the use of the Conditional and Future. 
 
 782. Foreigners are very apt to use the future or the con- 
 ditional after si, when meaning supposé que. They say, 
 
 J'irai demain à la campagne, s'il I shall go into the country to-morrow 
 fera beait, if the weather be fine. 
 
 Vous auriez vu le roi, si vous You would have seen the king if you 
 seriez venu, had come. 
 
 783. The impropriety of this construction will be obviated 
 by attending to the following 
 
 784. Rule. — When a verb is preceded by si, meaning 
 supposé que, the present is used instead of the future abso- 
 lute ; the preterit indefinite instead of the future anterior ; 
 the imperfect instead of the conditional present; and the 
 pluperfect instead of the conditional past. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 JHrai demain à la campagne, s'il I shall go to-morrow into the country, 
 
 fait beau, if it be fine weather. 
 
 n aura eu l'avantage, s'il a suivi He will have had the advantage, if 
 
 vos conseils, he has followed your advice. 
 
 Je serais content, si je vous voyais I should be pleased if I saw you 
 
 appliqué, 3^Pply to study. 
 
 J'aurais été contejit, si je vous I should have been pleased if I had 
 
 avais vu appliqîié, seen you attentive to your studies. 
 
 785. Remark. — This rule does not hold good, either when 
 si is placed between two verbs, the first of which implies 
 doubt, uncertainty; as, 
 
 Je ne sais s'il viendra, 
 
 786. Or, with the secoiid conditional past ; as, 
 Vous m'eussiez trouvé, si vous fussiez venu ce matm. 
 
34<l' PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 1. A young man who is just entering the career of letters -will conci- 
 hate the good will of the public, if he consider his first successes only as 
 an encouragement to do better. 
 
 2. That absurd criticism -will have aimised only fools or malicious 
 people,* if attention has been paid to the spirit that pervades the whole, 
 and the manner in which it is written. 
 
 3. Life would possess many more sweets and charms, if men, instead 
 of tearing one another to pieces, /or^ne^/ but one society of brethren. 
 
 4. The Athenians would have found in the young Alcibiades the only 
 man capable of insunng their superiority in Greece, had 7iot that vain, 
 thoughtless people forced him, by an unjust, or, at least, imprudent sen- 
 tence, to banish himself from his country. 
 
 5. I know not whether reason will soon triumph over prejudice and 
 ignorance, but I am certain it will be the case sooner or later. 
 
 6. Rome would have never attained that high degree of splendor and 
 glory which astonishes us, had it not extended its conquests as much by 
 its policy as by its arms. 
 
 (1 > Is just entering, débuter dans— career, carrière — conciliate, s'attirer— ^ood 
 will, bienveillance — consider, regarder. 
 
 (2.) Fools, sot — malicious, méchant— paitf, faire — pervades the whole, régner d'un 
 bout à l'autre — in which, dont. 
 
 (3.) Possess, avoir — tearing one another to pieces, s'entredéchirer. 
 
 ^4.) Superiority, preponderance — thoughtless, léger — sentence, condamnation. 
 
 (5.) Know, savoir — it will be the case, cela être. 
 
 (6.) Mtaived,T^diï\emT à.— policy, politique. 
 
 subjunctive; 
 
 787. There are conjunctions which govern the indicative 
 (page 172), and others which govern the subjunctive (page 
 173). We call principal proposition the phrase which is 
 followed by the conjunction, and incidental or subordiîiate 
 proposition that which is placed after the conjunction. In 
 this sentence, 
 
 Je crois que vous aimez à jouer, 
 
 je crois is the principal proposition, and vous aimez à jouer 
 is the subordinate proposition : que is the conjunction which 
 unites the two phrases. 
 
 788. General Rule. — The verb of the subordinate pro- 
 position must be put in the indicative when the verb of the 
 principal proposition expresses affirmation, in a direct, posi- 
 tive, and independent manner; but it is put in the subjunc- 
 tive when that of the principal proposition expresses doubt, 
 wish, or uncertainty. 
 
 Je sais gu^il est surpris, I know he is surprised. 
 
 Je crois qiûil viendra, I believe he will come. 
 
 Je doute quHl soit surpris, I doubt his being surprised 
 
 Je doute quHl vienne, J doubt his coming. 
 
 Je souhaite qu'il réussisse, I wish he may succeed. 
 
 Je tremble qtt'il ne succombe I tremble lest ho should fail 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 24 1 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 1. The glory which has been ascribed to the Egyptians of being the 
 most grateful of all men, shows that they were likewise the most sociable 
 
 2. In Egypt, when it was proved that the conduct of a dead man* 
 had been bad, they condemned his memory, and he was denied burial. 
 
 3. I am sure that by moderation, mildness, and politeness, you will 
 disarm even* envy itself. 
 
 t. The new philosophers say that color is a sensation of the soul. 
 
 5. I believe you are as honest and disinterested as you seem to be 
 
 6. I doubt whether the Romans would ever have triumphed over the. 
 Gauls if the different chiefs of this warlike people had not been disunited. 
 
 7. I coidd wish that the love which we ought to have for one another, 
 "were the principle of all out actions, as it is the basis of all virtues. 
 
 8. Fear, lest it should be said that you feed upon chimeras, and that 
 you take the shadow fcr the reality. 
 
 9. The new philosv^hers will have color tc be a sensation of the soul. 
 
 10. I will have you to be as honest and disinterested as you seem to be. 
 
 (1.) Which has,&.c. qu'on — ascribed, donner — grateful, reconnaissant. — men, peu- 
 
 (2) Was denied, priver «ie — burial, sépulture. [p!e, sing. 
 
 (3.) By, avec— politeness, honnêteté. 
 
 (5.) Seem to be, le paraître. 
 
 (6.) Whether, que. 
 
 (8) R, on ne^feed upon, se repaître de. 
 
 (9.) Will have, vouloir — color to be, (that color be). 
 
 789. Bo, did, will, would, should, can, could, may, and 
 might, are sometimes, with respect to the French language, 
 simply signs of tenses, at others they are real verbs. 
 
 790. There can be no difficulty about do and did; tliese 
 are mere expletives, denoting interrogation, negation, or 
 merely emphasis, when they are joined to a verb. 
 
 / do love. J'aime. 
 
 I did love, J'aimais, or j'aimai. 
 
 Do I love? Aimé-je ? 
 
 Did I love ? Aimais-je, or aimai-je î 
 
 / do not love. Je n'aime pas. 
 
 / did not love, Je n'aimais pas, or je n'aimai pas, 
 
 91. In ail these cases they are not expressed in French. 
 But when they are followed by a noun or a pronoun, tlien 
 they are real verbs, and mean faire, to do. 
 
 Do me that favor. Faites-moi ce plaisir. 
 
 Jffe did it, II le fit. 
 
 792. In short, they are expressed hy faire to do, when- 
 ever they are followed by any thing else except by the verb 
 with which they are necessarily connected ; as, 
 
 He did more than cotdd have been II fit plus qu'on n'eût pu espérer 
 expected, 
 
 793. Should is only a sign of the conditional when it ex- 
 presses a thing which may happen upon some condition. 
 
 A 
 
242 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 
 
 / should like a country life if my J'aimerais la vie champêtre, si mes 
 affairs -would permit me to in- affaires me permettaient de suivre 
 dulge my inclination, mon goût. 
 
 794. But when it implies duty or obligation, it is a verb, 
 and must be expressed by the verb devoir to owe ; as, 
 
 fTe should never srverve from the Nous ne devrions jamais no as 
 path of virtue, écarter du sentier de la vertu. 
 
 795. Can, could, may, and might, are not so difficult as 
 they appear at first sight ; because, in almost every instance, 
 there is no impropriety in rendering them by the yexh pouvoir. 
 In general, can and could imply a power, a possibility, a ca- 
 pability, &c., and may and m,ight a permission, a probabi- 
 lity, &c. 
 
 796. Do, did, shall, will, <fec. in English, are sometimes 
 used elliptically in the answers to interrogative sentences. 
 The French answer with the repetition of the verb, accom- 
 panied with a pronoun expressive of the idea of the interro- 
 gative sentence ; as. 
 
 Will you do your exercise to-day? Ferez-vous votre thème au jour- 
 Fes, / -will. d'hui ? — Oui, je le ferai. 
 
 Relations between the Tenses of the Indicative. 
 
 797. Rule. — When the first verb is in the imperfect, the 
 preterit, or the pluperfect, and the second denotes a temporary 
 action, this second verb is put in the imperfect, if we mean to 
 express a present. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 Je croyais, fai cru, f avais cm I thought, I have thought, I had 
 que vous étudiiez les mathéma- thought that you were studying 
 tiques, mathematics. *- 
 
 798. The second verb is put in the pluperfect, if we mean 
 to express a past. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 77 m'assura qu'il n^ avait jamais He assured me that he had never 
 tant ri, laughed so much. 
 
 799. The second verb is put in the present of the condi- 
 tional, if we mean to express a future absolute. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 Onm^adit que votre frère viendrait I was told your brother would 
 à Londres V hiver prochain, come to town next winter. 
 
 800. But, although the first verb may be in some of these 
 tenses, yet the second is put in the present when this second 
 verb expresses a thing which is true at all times. 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF 1|IE VERB. 243 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Je vous disais, je vous ai dit. Je I told you, I have told you, I had 
 vous avais dit, que la santé fait told you, that health constitutes 
 la félicité du corps, et le savoir the happiness of the body, and 
 celle de rame, knowledge that of the soul. 
 
 801. Remark.— In phrases where the imperfect is preceded 
 by qye it denotes sometimes a past, sometimes a present, with 
 respect to the preceding verb. It denotes a past when the 
 verb which is joined to it by the conjunction que is in the 
 present or future 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 Vous savez, or cous saurez que le You know, or you must know that 
 peuple Romain était aussi avide the Romans were a people as cove- 
 qu^ ambitieux, tous as they were ambitious. 
 
 802. But it denotes a present when the verb which precedes 
 it is in the imperfect, one of the preterits, or the pkiperfect. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 On disait, on a dit, on avait dit It was said, it has been said, it had 
 
 que Phocio7ieia.it le plus gra7id been said, that Phocion was the 
 
 et le plus honnête homme de son greatest and most upright man of 
 
 temps, X his age. 
 
 Dès qtCon eut appris a Athènes As soon as it was known at Athens 
 
 qiû Alcibiade était à Lacédé- that Alcibiades was at Lacedemon, 
 
 mone, on se repentit de la pré- the Athenians repented of the pre- 
 
 cipitation avec laquelle on cipitation with which they had 
 
 V avait condamné, condemned him. 
 
 803. Nevertheless, the imperfect denotes the past, in this 
 last instance, when it signifies an action which was past 
 before that which is expressed by the first verb. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 En Usant Chistoire des temps In reading the history of heroic 
 
 héroiques, vous devez avoir times, you must have remarked 
 
 remarqué que ces hommes dont that those men who have been 
 
 on a fait des demi-dieux, étaient made demi-gods were ferocious and 
 
 des chefs féroces et barbares, barbarous chiefs, scarcely deserving 
 
 dignes à peine du nom d'homme, the name of men. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 1. I thoiight you -ivere not ignoraiit that, to teach others the principles 
 of an ajt or science, it is necessary to have experience and skill. 
 
 2. I have been told that your sweetest occupation was to form your 
 ta.ste, your heart, and your understanding. 
 
 3. Darius, in his flight, being* reduced to the necessity of drinking 
 water muddy and infected by dead bodies, affirmed that he aever had 
 drunk with so much pleasure. 
 
 (1.) Were ignorant, ignorer— «eacA, instruire dans— it is necessary, avoir besoin— 
 (2.) I have, &c. on m'a dit. [skill, habileté 
 
 v3.) Flighty dcroiite- -muddy, bourbeux— «termed, aseiurer. 
 
244 PARTICULE RULES OF THE VERB. 
 
 4. Care has been taken to inculcate in me, from infancy, that I should 
 sncceed in the world only in proportion as I should join to the desire of 
 pleasing, a great deal of gentleness and civility. 
 
 5. Ovid has said that study softens the manners £ind corrects every 
 thing that is found in us rude and barbarous. 
 
 6. You know that those pretended heroes whom pagan antiquity has 
 made gods, -vere only barbarous and ferocious kings, who overran the 
 earth, not so much to conquer as to ravage it, and who left every where 
 traces of their fury and of their vices. 
 
 7. It has been said of Pericles that his eloquence was like a thunder- 
 bolt, which nothing could resist. 
 
 8. As soon as Aristides had said that the proposal of Themistocles was 
 unjust, the whole people exclaimed that they must not think of it any 
 longer. 
 
 9. Had you read the history of the early ages, you -would know that 
 Egypt was the most enlightened country in the universe, and the original 
 spot* whence knowledge spread into Greece and the neighboring countries. 
 
 (4.) Care has, &c. (active voice) on avoir— in me, me— in proportion, autant— 
 (5.) Corrects, effacer — is found, se trouver de. ^civility, honnêteté. 
 
 (6.) Overran, parcourir — not so much, moins. 
 (7.) It, on — thunderbolt, foudre — (to), which. 
 
 (8.) Exclaimed, s'écnei— they must, falloir U.—ofit, y—any longer, plus. 
 (9.) Ages, Xem^i— the original spot* whence, CQÏxù. Ci où. — neighboring, circonvoisin 
 — countries, lieu. 
 
 Relations between the Tenses of the Subjunctive and those 
 of the Indicative, 
 
 804. Rule I. — When the verb of the principal proposition 
 is in the present or future, that of the subordinate proposition 
 is put in the present of the subjunctive, to express a present 
 or future, but in the "preterit to express a past. We say, 
 
 n faut que celui giii parle se He that speaks should accommodate 
 
 mette à la portée de celui qui himself to the understanding of 
 
 V écoute, ** him that listens. 
 
 E voicdra que votre frère soit de He will wish your brother to be one 
 
 la partie, of the party. 
 
 805. But we must say, 
 
 Pour s'être élevé à ce point de To have risen to that pitch of grand- 
 
 ^randeur, il faut que Rome ait eur, Rome must have had an unin- 
 
 eu une suite non interrompue de terrupted succession of great men. 
 grands hommes, 
 
 806. Exception. — Though the first verb be in the present 
 or future, yet the second may be put in the imperfect, or plu- 
 perfect of the subjunctive, when some conditional expression 
 is introduced into the sentence. 
 
 Jl n'est point d'homme, quelque There is no man, whatever merit he 
 
 mérite qu'il ait, qui ne fût très- may have, that would not feel very 
 
 mortifé, s'il savait tout ce qu'on much mortified were he to know 
 
 peiise de lui, all that is 4iiought of him. 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 245 
 
 OÙ trouvera-t-on un homme qui Where will you find the man who 
 ne fît la même faute, s'il était would not have committed the 
 exposé aux mêmes tentations ? same error, had he been exposed 
 
 to the same temptations 1 
 Je doute que votre frère eût réussi I doubt whether your brother would 
 sans votre assistance, have succeeded, had it not been 
 
 for your assistance. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 1. He who wishes to teach an art, must knotv it thoroughly ; he must 
 give none but clear, precise, and well-digested notions of it : he must 
 instil them, one by one, into the minds of his pupils ; and, above all, he 
 must not overburden their memory with useless or unimportant rules. 
 
 2. He must yield to the force of truth when they shall have suffered 
 it to appear in its real light. 
 
 3. There is no work, however perfect people may suppose it, that 
 would not be liable to criticism, if it were examined with severity and in 
 every point of view. 
 
 4. I doubt whether his piece would have had the approbation of con- 
 naisseurs if he had not determined to make in it the changes you judged 
 necessary. 
 
 (1) It must, (that he who, &c know it)— Ae must (not repeated), que— instil, faire 
 entrer — by, à — overburden, surcharger — unimportant, insignifiant. 
 
 (2.) (It must L. that he)—tjield, se rendre— suffered, permettre— i« to appear, (that 
 It appear) — real light, vrai jour 
 
 (3.) Would be liable, prêter S. — with, severity, à la rigueur — in, sous— j»oi7it of view, 
 face. 
 
 (4.) approbation, suffrage — had determined, se décider — in it, y— judged, G. 
 
 807. Rule II.'— When the first verb is in the imperfect, 
 either of the preterits, the pluperfect, or either of the condi- 
 tionals, the second is put in the imperfect of the subjunctive*, 
 If we mean to express a present or future, but it is put in the 
 pluperfect if we wish to express a past. 
 
 Je voulais, j'ai voulu, j'eus voulu, je voudrais, or 
 J'eusse voulu que vous finissiez cette affaire. 
 Je ne savais pas, J€ n'ai pas su, &c. que vous eussiez étudié les 
 mathématiques. 
 
 808. Remark. — With the preterit indefinite the second 
 verb is put in the present if it expresses an action which is 
 or may be done at all times ; as. 
 
 Dieu a entouré les yeux de tuniques God has surrounded the eyes with 
 
 fort minces, transparantes au very thin tunics, transparent on 
 
 dehors, afin qvHon puisse voir à the outside, that we may see 
 
 travers, through them. 
 
 . 809. And in the preterit if we mean to express a past ; as, 
 
 n a fallu quW ait sollicité ses He must have been obliged to soHcil 
 ja^es, his judges, 
 
246 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 1. Mr. de Turenne never -would buy any thing on credit from tradesmen. 
 for fear, he used to say, they should lose a great part of their demand, if 
 he happened to be killed. All the workmen who were employed about 
 his house had orders to bring in their bills before he set out for the cam- 
 paign, and they were regularly paid. 
 
 3. It -would be better for a man who truly loves himself to lose his life 
 than to forfeit his honor by some base and shameful action. 
 
 3. Lycurgus, in one of his laws, had forbidden to light home* those 
 who came from a feast in the evening, that the fear of not being able to 
 reach their houses might prevent them from getting intoxicated. 
 
 4. People used the bark of trees, or skins, to write upon* before paper 
 ■was known. 
 
 5. Go and* ask that old man, "For whom are you planting"?" he will 
 answer you, " For the immortal gods, who have ordered both that I 
 should profit by the labor of those who have preceded me, and that those 
 who should come after me should profit by mine." 
 
 (1.) Would, vouloir H. — huij on credit, prendre à crédit — of, chez — happened, venir 
 — îcere employed, travailler — about, pour — bills, mémoire — he, on — set out for, se 
 mettre en. 
 
 (2.) To lose, (that he would lose)— forfeit, ternir. 
 
 (3.) Fn, par — to light, que on éclairer S. — that, afin que — reach their houses, se 
 rendre chez eux— getting intoxicated, s'enivrer. 
 
 (4.) People, ou — bark, écorce — skins, peau — known, en usage. 
 
 (5.) Have ordered, vouloir — both, et — by, de. 
 
 810. In interrogative and negative sentences, the second 
 verb is generally put in the subjunctive ; as, 
 
 Quel est l'insensé qui tiejine pour sûr qu'il vivra demain 1 
 
 Vous ne vous persuadiez pas que les choses pussent tourner si mal. 
 
 .811. The verb is likewise in the subjunctive after the super- 
 lative relative, and frequently after an impersonal verb^ as, 
 
 Le meilleur cortege qu'un i^iince puisse avoir, c'est le cœur de ses sujets. 
 
 812. The subjunctive is elegantly used in elliptical phrases, 
 where the principal proposition is omitted ; as 
 
 Qii'il vive! (je souhaite quHlJ, May he live ! 
 
 ÇluHl se soit oublié jusqu'à ce point ! That he should have so far forgot- 
 
 (je suis surpris quHl), ten himself! 
 
 Qui m'aime, me suive J (je veux Whoever loves me, let him follow 
 
 que cehd qui), me ! 
 
 Heureux V homme qui peut, ne fat-ce Happy the man that can, were it 
 
 que dans sa vieillesse, joidr de only in his old age, enjoy the 
 
 toute la force de sa raison ! whole strength of his reason ! 
 
 (quand ce ne serait que), 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 1 . Is there any one who does not feel that nothing is more degrading 
 in a writer than the pains he takes to express ordinary and common 
 things in a singular and pompous style. 
 
 (!.■) ÎS iegraiing in, dégrader— in, de 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 247 
 
 2. Do you think that, in forming the republic of bees, God has not 
 had in view to teach kings to govern with gentleness and subjects to obey 
 witli love 1 
 
 3. You xvill never be at peace, either with yourself or with others, 
 unless you seriously endeavor to restrain your natural impetuosity. 
 
 (2.) Had in view, vouloir. _ 
 
 (3.) Be at peace, avoir la paix — cither, ni — or, ni— endeavor, s'appliquer. 
 
 813. Remark. — The relative pronouns qui, que, quel, dont, 
 and où, govern the subjunctive in similar circumstances. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 1. Who is the 'juriter ihaX does not sometimes experience moments 
 of sterility and languor 1 
 
 2. There is not in the heart of man a good impulse that God does not 
 produce. 
 
 3. Choose a retreat where you may be quiet*, a post whence you may 
 defend yourself. 
 
 4. The most flattering reward that a man can reap from his labors, is 
 the esteem of an enlightened public. 
 
 5. May he live, reign, and long constitute the happiness of a nation 
 which he loves, and by which he is adored ! 
 
 6. That he should thus degrade himself, is what posterity will find very 
 difficult to believe. 
 
 7. A man just and firm is not shaken, either by the clamors of an incon- 
 siderate mob, or by the threats of an imperious tyrant : though* the whole 
 world -ivere to fall into ruins, he would be struck by it, but not moved. 
 
 (2.) Impulse, mouvement. 
 (3.S May, pouvoir. 
 
 (5.) May he, (repeated before every verb)— constitute, fahe— which he loves, chérir. 
 (6.) Find difficult, avoir de la peine — believe, se persuader. 
 
 (7.) Is shaken, ébranler — inconsiderate, insensé — mob, populace — imperious, fier — 
 were, devoir — to fall into ruins, s'écrouler. 
 
 Further Observations upon the Conditional and Subjunctive» 
 
 814. We have said the English auxiliaries should, would, 
 could, may, and might, are not always to be considered as 
 essentially and necessarily appertaining to the conditional and 
 subjunctive. Indeed, it seldom happens that the French tenses 
 are the same as the English ; at least, in subordinate, though 
 they may be in the principal propositions. For instance, 
 
 I wish you would come to-night 
 cannot be translated by 
 
 Je souhaite que vous viendriez ce soir ; 
 
 because " when the verb of the principal proposition is in the 
 present, the verb of the subordinate proposition is put in the 
 present of the subjunctive, if we mean to express a future " 
 Therefore we must say, 
 
 Je souhaite que votis veniez, . 
 
248 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 
 
 815. Or, "if the iirst verb is in either of the conditionals, 
 the second must be in the imperfect of the subjunctive." 
 For which reason we must also say, 
 
 Je voudrais que vous vinssiez. (See Rule IL, page 245.) 
 
 816. Now, in the first example, que vous veniez is marked 
 in the conjunction of the verb by, that you may come, and in 
 the second — que vous vinssiez — by, that you might come, 
 neither of which is in the examples given. Again, 
 
 II n'y a personne qui le cr4âe, 
 
 cannot be translated by, there is nobody who may believe it, 
 although may is the sign of the subjunctive in the meaning ; 
 but the meaning is, 
 
 There is nobody that believes it ; or, simply, nobody believes it. 
 
 Relations between the Tenses of the different Moods. 
 
 817. Remark. — Our intention is not to give the relations 
 which all the tenses bear to each other, but simply to mention 
 some of the principal. 
 
 Relations of the Indicative. 
 
 818. To the imperfect are subjoined three tenses : 
 
 Çquaîid vous écriviez, 
 Staitdabb. — Je lisais •>. quand vous avez écrit, 
 Cquand vous écrivîtes. 
 
 819. The preterit anterior requires the preterit definite ; as, 
 quand f eus fini, vous entrâtes. 
 
 820. To the pluperfect are subjoined the preterit definite, 
 the preterit indefinite, the preterit anterior, and the imperfect. 
 
 f quand vous entrâtes, 
 
 c T> . 7 J quand vous êtes entré. 
 
 Standards. — J avais lu< ^ , /.. . , \ 
 
 I quand vous jutes entre, 
 
 Xjjuand vous entriez 
 
 821. To thë preterit anterior indefinite is subjoined the 
 preterit indefinite ; as, quand f ai eu dîné, voies êtes entré. 
 
 822. In conjunction with si, for supposé que, the future 
 absolute requires the present, and the future anterior the 
 preterit indefinite. 
 
 Stakdakd.- i l"""' P^'f^''^ ''j' ^""^- , 
 
 ( E sera parti, st vous I aveif voaiiu. 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 249 
 
 Relations to the Conditional and of the Conditional. 
 
 823. In conjunction with si, for supposé que, the conditional 
 present is accompanied by the imperfect, and the first condi- 
 tional past by the pluperfect or by the second conditional past- 
 
 Ç Vous partiriez, si je le 
 
 vou 
 
 lais. 
 
 Staîtpabds. — <„ . ^ _. Ç SI je l avais vo2ib/,, 
 
 ) Vous seriez parti -K ■■ ,<, , 
 
 C (_si je L eusse voulu. 
 
 824. The tenses of the conditional present, and of the two 
 conditionals past, are likewise accompanied by themselves. 
 
 ''Quand V avare posséderait tout l'or du monde, il 
 
 ne serait pas encore content. 
 Quand Alexandre aurait conquis tout Vunivers, 
 
 il n'aurait pas été content. 
 ^Vous fussiez parti, si je l'eusse voulu. 
 
 825. It has been observed that when two words are joined 
 by the conjunction que, the second verb is put sometimes in 
 the indicative and sometimes in the subjunctive. (See page 
 170 and following.) 
 
 Standards. — < 
 
 Standard.- ^^^^;^'^^ ^que, < 
 
 Relations of the Present and Future Absolute, of the Indicative 
 to the Tenses of their own Mood, and of the Conditional. 
 
 826. These two tenses may be accompanied by all the 
 tenses of the indicative and conditional. 
 
 'vous partez aujourd'hui, 
 vous partirez demain, 
 vous serez parti, quand, &c. 
 vous partiez hier, 
 vous partîtes hier, 
 vous êtes parti ce matin, 
 vous fûtes parti hier, qticnd, A,c. 
 vous étiez parti hier, quand, &,c, 
 vous partiriez aujourd'hui, si, &c 
 vous seriez parti hier, si, &c. 
 
 jvous fussiez parti plus tôt, si, Sec, 
 
 827. Remark. — The same relation subsists when the sen- 
 tence is negative ; except that for the present absolute of the 
 indicative, the present of the subjunctive is substituted. In- 
 stead of on ne dit pas que vous partez aujourd'hui ; the 
 genius of the French language requires that we should say, 
 on ne dit pas que vous partiez aujourd'hui. 
 
 828. The imperfect, the preterit definite, the preterit inde 
 finite, and the pluperfect, are accompanied either by the 
 impexfect oi by the pluperfect. 
 
250 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 
 
 ^ _jOn ^^fder, \ f^^"^ P^^^''''' aujourJ'hm, 
 
 Stakpakbs.-^ On a dit, ^!?"^' < ,^. ^ ,. 
 
 \^0n avait dit,} [vous étiez partt. 
 
 829. The future anterior requires the preterit indefinite ; 
 as, on aura dit que vous avez menti. 
 
 830. The conditional present may be accompanied by the 
 present, the imperfect, the preterit indefinite, the pluperfect, 
 the future of the indicative, as well as by the three conditionals. 
 
 fguHl se trompe, 
 
 I qu'il se trompait, 
 gti'il s'est trompé, 
 
 Stakdards.-Oti croirait,^ Q'']\\''^f' ^J^'^M 
 ' ] quil se trompera, 
 
 qu'il se tromperait, si, &c. 
 
 qu'il se serait trompé, si, &c. 
 
 qu'il se fût trompé, si, &c. 
 
 831. The first conditional past may be accompanied by the 
 imperfect, the pluperfect, as well as the two other conditionals. 
 
 Çqu'il tombait, 
 
 SxAi^BARDS.-On aurait cru,\ ^''}!, ^i^iKl^mbé 
 ' I quit serait tombé, 
 y^qu'il fût tombé. 
 
 832. The second conditional past may be accompanied by 
 
 the same tenses. 
 
 Principal Relations with the Subjunctive, 
 
 834. To the present, the future absolute, and the future 
 anterior of the indicative, is generally subjoined the present 
 of the subjunctive. 
 
 CJl veut "^ 
 
 Stand ABD. — -^ iZ voïidra > que vous partiez. 
 C_Il aura votilu j 
 
 834 To the imperfect, the preterit definite, the preterit 
 indefinite, the pluperfect, and the preterit anterior, may be 
 subjoined the imperfect of the subjunctive. 
 
 'Je voulais, ~\ 
 
 Je voulus, j 
 Standard. — r^ J^ai voulu y^ue vous partissiez. 
 
 J'avais vouhi, I 
 J'eus voulu, J 
 
 ^835. To the future anterior, the preterit of the subjunctive ; 
 a«, n aura voulu quHl s oit parti. 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF TH^ VERB. 251 
 
 836. The conditional present is accompanied either by the 
 imperfect, or by the pluperfect of the subjunctive. 
 
 cs Ç T J • ? votis partissiez, 
 
 oTAUDARB. — < Je voudrais que, > r ■ ^^• 
 
 (_ j vous fussiez parti. 
 
 837. To the first and second conditionals past is subjoined 
 the pluperfect of the subjunctive. 
 
 c Ç J^ aurais voulu, ~> ^ • ^ ^• 
 
 Standakd. — -5 T» / r (7"^ vous fussiez parti. 
 
 (_ J eusse voulu, 3 
 
 OF THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 838. The preposition to before an infinitive is, according 
 to circumstances, rendered either hj poicr, by a, or by de $ 
 sometimes it is not even expressed at all. 
 
 839. When to means in order to, it is expressed in French 
 by pour ^ as, 
 
 ffe came to speak to me, II vint pour me parler. 
 
 840. As for the other two cases, there is hardly any fixed 
 rule to distinguish whether à or de, is to be used ; the regi- 
 men which the preceding French verb requires after it is the 
 only guide. Thus, 
 
 He likes to play, will be expressed bj il aime à jouer ; he told me to go, 
 by il me dit d'aller ; and he preferred dying, by il aima mieux mourir. 
 
 841. The participle present is used in English both as a 
 substantive and an adjective, and frequently instead of the 
 present of the infinitive. 
 
 His xxxVmg passion is hunting, Sa passion dotninante est' la chasse. 
 
 He is gone a -walking, II est allé se promener. 
 
 Prevent him from doing mischief, Empêchez-le de faire le mal.' 
 
 There is a pleasure in sileîicing II y a plaisir à fermer la bouche anx 
 great talkers, grands parleurs. 
 
 842. It likewise takes almost every other preposition. In 
 the first of the above examples, it is translated by the sub- 
 stantive ; in the second, by the verbal adjective ; and in the 
 others by the present of the infinitive. 
 
 843. Sometimes the participle present must be expressed 
 by the relative qui, with the verb in the indicative, especially 
 when a différent mode might create any ambiguity in the 
 sense ; as, 
 
 I met them riding post. Je les ai rencontrés qui couraient la poste. 
 
 844. Sometimes it must be expressed by the conjunction 
 que, with the verb in the indicative or in the subjunctives as 
 
252 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 
 
 circumstances may require : this is when the participle pre- 
 sent is preceded by a possessive pronoun ; as, 
 The fear of his coming vexed its, La crainte qu'il ne vint nous tourmen- 
 I douht his being faithful, Je doute qu'il soit fidèle, &c. [tait. 
 
 845. It may be proper to observe that, in French, the 
 preposition en alone is followed by the participle present. 
 All other prepositions require the present of the infinitive. 
 
 846. Foreigners are apt to mistake the use of the participle 
 present, because they do not consider that, as it expresses an 
 incidental proposition, it must evidently relate to the word 
 which it restrains and modifies. 
 
 847. Rule. — The participle present always forming a 
 phrase incidental and subordinate to another, must necessarily 
 relate to the subject of the principal phrase, when it is not 
 preceded by another noun, as in this sentence : 
 
 Je Jie puis vous accompagner à la I cannot accompany you into the 
 campagne, ayant des affaires country, having some business 
 qui exigent ma présence, that requires my presence here. 
 
 848. The participle present ayant relates to the subject ^e, 
 since the subordinate proposition, formed by ayant, could 
 have no kind of relation to the principal proposition, if it 
 coult' not be resolved into this : — Parce que fai des affaires 
 qui, &LC. But in this sentence. 
 
 Combien voyons-nous de gens qui, How many people do we see who 
 connaissant le prix du temps, le knowing the value of time, 
 perdent mal-à-propos ! spend it improperly ! 
 
 connaissant relates to the substantive gens, because this is the 
 word which it restrains and modifies, and because the relative 
 qui, placed between that substantive as the regimen and the 
 participle present, obviates every kind of ambiguity. 
 
 849. Remarks. — 1. Two participles ought never to be 
 used together without being united by a conjunction ; as, 
 
 C est un ho7nme aimant et craignant He is a man loving and fearing 
 Dieu, God. 
 
 850. The relative en ought never to be put either before a 
 participle present or before a gerund. We cannot say. 
 
 Je vous ai remis mon fils entre les mains, en voulant faire quelque chose 
 de bon, 
 
 because the sense would be ambiguous : for the meaning is not, 
 
 As I wish to do something good — or, as I wish to do well — I have put 
 my son into vour hands, 
 
 but, 
 
 I have pu^. my son into your hands, as I wish to make something o/" him. 
 
 We should say, Voulant .en faire^ Sic 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 253 
 
 851. Likewise this sentence would be improper: 
 Le prince tempère la rigueur du pouvoir, en en partageant les foncitons, 
 on account of the repetition of the word en, used in two 
 different senses, viz : as a preposition and a relative. An- 
 other turn must then be adopted ; as, 
 
 C'est en partageant les fonctions du pouvoir, qu'un prince en tempère 
 la rigueur. 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 OF PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 852. The office of prepositions is to bring the two terms 
 between which they are placed into a state of relation, and that 
 relation is generally expressed by their own signification; as, 
 
 Avec* sur, pendant, dans, &c. 
 
 853. But f), de, and en express it, either by their primitive 
 and proper meaning, or figuratively and by extension ; so that, 
 in this last case, they are merely prepositions serving to unite 
 the two terms ; whence it happej^s that they often express 
 either the same relations that others do, or opposite relations. 
 For instance, in these two sentences : ' 
 
 Approchcz-vQus du feu, Come near the fire. 
 
 Eloignez-zwus du feu, Go from the fire. 
 
 854. De merely establishes a relation between the two 
 terms, without expressing in the first the relation of approxi- 
 mation, or in the second the relation of distance. In order, 
 therefore, to form a just idea of these three prepositions, it 
 is of importance to consider only their primitive and proper 
 signification. 
 
 855. En and dans have nearly the same meaning ; but 
 they differ in this, that the former is used in a more vague, 
 the latter in a more determinate sense ; as. 
 
 J'étais en Angleterre, dans la piovince de Middlesex. 
 
 856. From what has just been said, it follows, then, that 
 en, on account of its indeterminate nature, ought not to be 
 followed by the article, except in a small number of phrases 
 sanctioned by usage ; such are. 
 
 En la présence de Dieu ; en la grand' chambre du parlement ; en 
 ^'absence d'un tel ; en /'année mil huit cent dix-sept, &c. 
 
 with respect to the expressions 
 
 En rhonneur, en l'âge, it is better to say, à /'honneur, à Hge. 
 Y 
 
254 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PREPOSITIONS, 
 
 857. Avant is a preposition in this phrase : 
 Jivant le jour, Before day-light, 
 but it is an adverb in this : 
 
 J^"* allez pas si avant, Do not go so forward. 
 
 858. Some other prepositions are likewise occasionally 
 adverbs. 
 
 859. Autour and alentour must not be confounded ; autour 
 is a preposition and alentour an adverb ; thus, 
 
 Totis les grands étaient autour du AU the grandees stood round the 
 
 trône, throne. 
 
 Le roi était sur son trôîie, et les The king was upon the throne, and 
 
 grands étaient alejitour, the grandees stood round. 
 
 860. Avant and auparavant are not used indifferently. 
 
 861. Avant is followed by a regimen ; as, 
 Avant Pâques, Before Easter. 
 Avant ce temps, Before that time. 
 
 862. Auparavant is followed by no regimen ; as, 
 
 Si vous partez, venez me voir au- If you set off, come and see me 
 par avant, first. 
 
 863. Prêt à and près de are not the same expressions. 
 Prêt is an adjective :. 
 
 Je suis prêt à faire ce que -abus I am ready to do what you 
 voudrez, please. 
 
 864. But près is a preposition : 
 
 Jlfon ouvrage est près d'être Jlni, My work is nearly finished. 
 
 865. Au travers and à travers differ in this : the first is 
 followed by the preposition de, the second is not ; as. 
 
 Use Jit jour au travers des ennemis, ^'Re fought his way through the 
 Use fit jour à travers les ennemis, (_ enemy. 
 
 866. Avant denotes priority of time and order ; as, 
 II est arrivé avant moi, l'article se met avant le nom. 
 
 867. Devant is used for en présence, vis-à-vis ; 
 II a paru devant le juge ; il loge devant l'église. 
 
 868. Remark. — Levant is likewise a preposition marking 
 order, and is the ^opposite of après ; as, 
 
 11 a le pas devant mot, ■ He has precedence of me. 
 
 Si vous êtes pressé cùùret devant, If you are in a hurry, run before. 
 
 The use of the Article with Prepositions. 
 
 869. Some prepositions require the article before their 
 regimen ; others do not ; and others again sometimes admit, 
 sometimes reject it. 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 255 
 
 870. Rule I. — The following prepositions generally re- 
 quire the article before the noun which they govern : 
 
 avant, depuis, envers, nonobstant, selon, 
 
 après, devant, excepté, parmi, suivant, 
 
 chez, derrière, hors, pendant, touchant, 
 
 dans, durant, hormis, pour, vers, 
 
 avant l'aurore, chez le prince, envers les pauvres, 
 
 après la promenade, dans la maison, devant l'église, &c. 
 
 871. There are, however, exceptions; as, 
 
 avant terme, avant dîner, pour lit une paillasse, 
 
 avant midi, après dîner, depuis minuit, &c. 
 
 872. Rule II. — A noun governed by the preposition en is 
 not, in general, preceded by the article ; as, 
 
 En ville, en campagne, en extase, en songe, en pièces, &c. 
 
 873. Remark. — L'armée est entrée en campagne, means 
 the army had taken the field ; but Mr. N. est allé à la cam- 
 pagne, means, Mr. N. is gone into the country. 
 
 874. Rule III. — These eleven prepositions — «, de, aveCy 
 contre, entre, malgré, outre, par, pour, sur, sans — some- 
 times admit, sometimes reject the article before their regimen. 
 
 875. The article is used in these phrases : 
 
 Jouer snr le velours, «» 
 
 St. Paul veut de la subordination entre la femme et le mari. 
 Sans les passions, où serait le mérite î 
 
 876. It is suppressed in, 
 
 Etre sur pied; un peu de façons ne gâte rien entre mari et femme. 
 Vivre sans passions, c'est vivre sans plaisirs et sans peines 
 
 Repetition of the Prepositions. 
 
 877. Rule I.— The prepositions de, à, and en, must be 
 repeated before all the iiouns which they govern ; as. 
 
 Voyons qui Vemportera de vous, de Let us see wrhich of us vdll excel, 
 
 lui, ou de moi, you, he, or k 
 
 "Elle a de Vhonnêteté, de la douceur, She has politeness, sweetness, 
 
 des grâces, et de V esprit, grace, and ^abilities. 
 
 La loi, que Dieu a gravée au The law which God has deeply 
 
 fond de mon cœur, m'instruit 'engraven on my heart, instructs 
 
 de tout ce que je dois à fauteur me i« every thing I owe to the 
 
 de mon être, au prochain, à moi- author.î:^my being, to my neigh 
 
 même, bor, and to myself. 
 
 En Asie, en Europe, en Afrique, et In Asia, in Europe, in Africa, and 
 
 jusqti'en Amérique, on trouve le even in America, we find the 
 
 même préjugé, same prejudice. 
 
 878. Rule II. — The other prepositions, especially those 
 consisting of two syllables, are generally repeated before 
 
25G PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 nouns which have meaning's totally different; but seldom 
 
 before nouns which are nearly synonymous : 
 
 Rien n^est moins selon Bien et Nothing is less according to God 
 
 selon le monde, and according to the world. 
 
 Cette action est contre Vhonneur et That action Is contrary to honor 
 
 contre toiite espèce de principes, and to every kind of principle. 
 
 879. But we ought to say, 
 
 II perd sa jeunesse dans la mollesse He wastes his youth in effeminacy 
 
 et la volupté, and pleasure. 
 
 Notre loi ne condamne personne Our laws condemn nobody without 
 
 sans V avoir entendu et examiné, having heard and examined him. 
 
 Of the Government of Prepositions 
 
 880. Some prepositions govern nouns- without the help of 
 another preposition ; as, 
 
 Devant la maison, Before the house. 
 
 Hormis son frère. Except his brother. 
 
 Sans son épée. Without his sword, &c. 
 
 881. Others require the help of the preposition de; as, 
 
 Près de la maison, Near the house, 
 
 I ^ Vinsu de son frère, Unknown to his brother. 
 
 Au-dessus du pont, Above the bridge, &c. 
 
 882. These four — -jusque, par rapport^ quant, and sauf—' 
 are followed by the preposition à ; as, 
 
 Jusqxûau mois prochain, Till the next month. 
 
 Quant à moi. As for me, &c. 
 
 883. Practice alone can teach these different regimens. 
 
 884. Rule. — A noun may be governed by two prepositions, 
 provided they do not require different regimens ; thus, we 
 may say with propriety, 
 
 Celui gui écHt selon les circon- He who writes according to circum- 
 stances, pour et contre un parti, stances, both for and against a 
 est un homme bien méprisable, party, is a very contemptible man. 
 
 885. But it would be wrong to say. 
 
 Celui qui écrit en faveur et contre un parti, &c. 
 because en faveur requires the preposition de. 
 
 886. Rule. — Prepositions which, with their regimen, 
 express a circumstance, are generally placed as nearly as 
 possible to the word to which that circumstance relates ; as. 
 
 On voit des personnes qui, avec We see persons who, with a great 
 beaucoup d'esprit, commettent deal of wit, commit very great 
 de trèa-grandes faute», faults. 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADVERB. 257 
 
 /'at envoyé à la poste les lettres I have sent to the post ofRce the let 
 
 qtie vous axez écrites, ters which you have written. 
 
 Croyez-vous pouvoir ramener-par Do you think you can reclaim by 
 
 la douceur ces esprits égarés ? gentleness those mistaken people Î 
 
 887. If we attempt to alter the place of these prepositions, 
 we shall find that the sentences will become ambiguous. 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 OF THE ADVERB? 
 
 Of the Negative ne. 
 
 888. Negation is expressed in French by ne, either alone 
 or accompanied by pas or point. On this point the Academy 
 has examined the four following questions : 
 
 1 . Where is the place of the negatives ? [versa ? 
 
 2. When is pas to be used in preference to pointy and vice 
 
 3. When may both be omitted ? 
 
 4. When ought both to be omitted ? 
 
 889. As this subject is of very material importance, we 
 shall treat it upon the plan of the Academy, and agreeably to 
 their views. 
 
 890. First Question. — Where is the place of the negatives ? 
 
 891. Ne is always prefixed to the verb; but the place of 
 pas and point is variable. 
 
 892. When the verb is in the infinitive, these are placed 
 indiff'erently before or after it ; for we say. 
 
 Pour ne point voir, or, pour ne voir point. 
 
 893. In the other moods, except the imperative, the tenses 
 are either simple or compound. In the simple tenses, pas 
 or point is placed after the verb : 
 
 II ne parle pas ; ne parle-t-il pas 1 
 
 894. In the compound tenses, it is placed between the 
 auxiliary and the participle : 
 
 II n'a pas parlé ; n'a-t-il pas parlé 1 
 
 895. In the imperative, it is placed after the verb : 
 
 Ne bai^inez pas. Ne vous en allez pas. 
 
 896. ^ÈcoND Question. — When is pas to be used in pre- 
 ference to point f and vice versa ? 
 
 y2 
 
258 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADVERB. 
 
 897. Point is a stronger negative than pas ; besides, it 
 denotes something permanent : // ne lit point, means, he 
 never reads. 
 
 898. Pas denotes something accidental : // ne lit pas, 
 means, he does not read now, or he is not reading. 
 
 899. Point de denotes an absolute negation. Thus, // n'a 
 point d'esprit, is to say, he has no wit at all. 
 
 900. Pas de allows the liberty of a reserve. So, H n'a pas 
 d'esprit, is to say, he has nothing of what can be called wit. 
 
 901 . Hence, the Academy concludes that pas is more proper, 
 
 902. 1. — Before plus, moins, si, autant, and other words 
 denoting comparison ; as, 
 
 Milton ji'est pas moins sublime qv!- Milton is not less sublime than 
 Homer e. Homer. 
 
 903. 2. — Before nouns of number ; as, 
 
 H rHy a pas dix ans, It is not ten years ago. 
 
 904. Point is elegantly used, 
 
 905. 1. — At the end of a sentence ; as, 
 
 On s'amusait à ses dépens, et il They were amusing themselves at hia 
 ne s'' en apercevait point, expense, and he did not perceive it. 
 
 . 906. 2. — In elliptical se tences ; as, 
 Je croyais avoir affaire à un hon- I thought I had to deal with an hoixest 
 nête homme ; mais point, man ; but no. 
 
 907. In answer to interrogative sentences ; as, 
 
 Trez-vous ce soir au parc ? — Shall you go this evening to the park ? 
 Point, —No. 
 
 908. The Academy also observes, that when pas or point 
 is introduced into interrogative sentences, it is with meanings 
 somewhat different. We make use of point when we have 
 any doubt on our minds ; as, 
 
 Jsi" avez-vous point été là ? Have you not been there 1 
 
 909. But we use pas when we are persuaded. Thus, 
 J\r' avez-vous pas été là P But you have been there, have you not 1 
 
 910. Third Question. — -When may both pas and point 
 be omitted ? 
 
 911. They may be suppressed, 
 
 912. 1. — After the words cesser, oser, and pouvoir^ but 
 this omission is only for the sake of elegance ; as. 
 
 Je ne cesse de m'en occuper, I am incessantly attentive to it. 
 
 Je n'ose vous en parler, I dare tiot speak to you about it. 
 
 Te ne puts y penser sans frémir, I cannot think of it without sÊuddeihig 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADVERB. 259 
 
 913. We likewise say, but only in familiar conversation, 
 JVe bougez^ Do not stir. 
 
 914. 2. — In expressions of this kind : 
 
 T a-t-il un homme dont elle ne Is there a man that she does not 
 
 médise ? slander ? 
 
 Avez-vous un ami qui ne soit des Have you a friend that is not like- 
 
 miens ? wise mine 1 
 
 915. Fourth Question. — When ought hoih pas ^nd point 
 to be omitted ? 
 
 916. They are omitted, 
 
 917. 1. — When the extent which we mean to give to the 
 negative is sufficiently expressed, either by the words which 
 restrict it, by words which exclude all restriction, or lastly, 
 by such as denote the smaller parts of a whole, and which 
 are without the article. 
 
 918. To exemplify the first part of this remark, we say. 
 
 Je ne sors guère, I go out but seldom. 
 
 Je ne sortirai de trois jours, I shall not go out for three days. 
 
 919. To exemplify the second, we say. 
 
 Je rHy vais javiais, I never go there. 
 
 Je rHy pense plus, I think no more of it. 
 
 JSTid ne sait s'il est digne d'amour, Nobody knows whether he be de- 
 
 0ÎI de haine, serving of love or hatred. 
 
 JV'employez aucun de ces strata- Use none of these stratagems. 
 
 77 ne plait à personne, [gèmes. He pleases nobody. 
 
 JRien n'est plus charmant, Nothing is more charming. 
 
 Je n'y pense nullement, I do not think of it at all. 
 
 920. To exemplify the third, we say, 
 
 H n'y voit goutte. He cannot see at all. 
 
 Je n'en ai cueilli brin, I did not gather a sprig. 
 
 E ne dit mot, He speaks not a word. 
 
 921. But if to mot we join an adjective of number, pas 
 must be added ; as, 
 
 H ne dit pas un mot qid n'intê- He speaks not a word but what is 
 
 resse, interesting. 
 
 Dans ce discours, il n'y a pas trois In that speech, there are not three 
 
 mots à reprendre, words that are exceptionable. 
 
 922. Fas is likewise used with the preposition de ; as, 
 
 n ne fait pas de démarche inutile. He does not take any useless step 
 
 923. Remark. — If, after the sentences we have just men- 
 tioned, either the conjunction que or the relative pronouns 
 
260 PARTICULAR RtJLES OP THE ADVERB. 
 
 qui or dont should introduce a negative sentence, then in this 
 
 last, pas and point are omitted ; as. 
 
 Je ne fais jamais d'excès, que je I never commit any excess without 
 
 n'en sois incommodé, being ill after it. 
 
 Je ne vois personne qui ne vous I see nobody but what commends 
 
 loue, you. 
 
 924. 2. — When two negatives are joined by ni ; as. 
 Je ne Vaime ni ne V estime, I neither love nor esteem him. 
 
 925. And when the conjunction ni is repeated, either in 
 the subject, as, 
 
 J\l'i Vor ni la grandeur ne nous Neither gold nor greatness can make 
 rendent heureux, us happy, 
 
 926. Or, in the attribute ; as, 
 
 /Z n'est 7ii prudent ni sage, He is neither prudent nor wise, 
 
 927. Or, in the regimen ; as, 
 
 Tl n'a ni dettes îù procès, He has neither debts nor law-suits. 
 
 928. Remark. — Fas is preserved when ni is not repeated, 
 and when this last serves only to unite two members of a 
 
 negative sentence ; as. 
 
 Je n'aime pas ce vain étalage I do not like that vain display of eru- 
 
 d'ériidition, prodigxiée sans dition, lavished without choice and 
 
 choix et sans goût, ni ce luxe without taste, nor that pomp of 
 
 de mots qui ne disent rien, words which have no meaning. 
 
 929. 3. — With the verb which follows que, used instead of 
 pourquoi, and with à moins que, or si, used instead of it ; as, 
 
 Que n'êtes-vous aussi posé que Why are you not as sedate as your 
 
 votre frtre? brother? 
 
 Je ne sortirai pas, à moins que I shall not go out, unless you come 
 
 vous 7ie veniez me prefid^^e, to fetch me. 
 
 Je n'irai pas chez lui, s'il ne m'y I shall not go to his house, if he does 
 
 engage, not invite me 
 
 930. 4. — With ne — que, used instead oï seulement ; as. 
 
 Une jeunesse, qui se livre à ses Youth which abandons itself to its 
 passions, ne transmet à la vieil- passions, transmits to old age noth- 
 lesse qu'un corps usé, ing but a worn-out body. 
 
 931. When before the conjunction que, the word rien is 
 understood ; as, 
 
 // ne fait que rire. He does nothing but laugh. 
 
 932. Or when that conjunction may be changed into sinon 
 or si ce n'est ; as, 
 
 U ne tient qu'à vous de réussir, Thesuccesswholly depends upon you. 
 Trop de maîtres à la fois ne ser- Too many masters at once only serve 
 vent qu'à embrouiller l'esprit, to perplex the mind. 
 
 933. 5. — With a verb in the preterit, preceded by the 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADVERB. 261 
 
 conjunction depuis que or by the verb il y a, denoting a 
 certain duration of time ; as, 
 
 Comment vous etes-vous porté depuis How have you been since I saw 
 
 que Je ne vous ai vu ? you 1 
 
 Il y a trois mois que je ne vous ai I have not seen you for these three 
 
 vu, months. 
 
 934. But they are not omitted when the verb is in the 
 present ; as, 
 
 Comment vit-il depuis que nous How does he live, now we do not 
 
 ne le voyons point ? see him î 
 
 n y a six mois que nous ne le We have not seen him these six 
 
 voyons point, months. 
 
 935. 6. — In phrases where the conjunction que is preceded 
 by the adverbs of comparison plus, moins, mieux, &c., or 
 some other equivalent term ; as, 
 
 On méprise ceux qui parlent au' We despise those who speak differ 
 
 trement quHls ne pensent, ently from what they think. 
 
 II écrit mieux qiCil ne parle, He writes better than he speaks. 
 
 C^est pire qvHon ne le disait, It is worse than was said. 
 
 C^est autre chose que je ne croyais, It is different from what I thought. 
 Peu s* en faut qxCt n ne nCait trompé, I have been very near being deceived. 
 
 936. 7. — In sentences united by the conjunction que to the 
 verbs douter, désespérer, nier, and disconvenir, formijig a 
 negative member of a sentence ; as, 
 
 Je ne doute pas qu'il ne vienne, I doubt not that he will come. 
 
 JVe désespérez pas que ce moyen Do not despair of the success of 
 
 ne vous réussisse, these means. 
 
 Je ne nie pas, or je ne disconviens I do not deny that it is so. 
 
 pas que cela ne soit, 
 
 937. The Academy says, that after the last two verbs, ne 
 may be omitted ; as. 
 
 Je ne nie pas, or je ne disconviens pas que cela soit. 
 
 938. 8. — With a verb united by the conjunction que to the 
 verbs empêcher d^nà prendre garde, meaning to take care ; as, 
 
 J^empecherai bien que vous ne I shall prevent your being of the 
 
 soyez du nombre, number. 
 
 Prenez garde qu'on ne vous se' Take care that they do not corrupt 
 
 duise, you. 
 
 939. Remark. — The Academy observes, that in the above 
 acceptation, prendre garde is followed by a subjunctive ; but 
 when it means to reflect, the indicative is used with pas or 
 point; as, 
 
 Prenez garde que vous ne m*en- Mind, you do not understand what 1 
 tendez pas, mean. 
 
 940. 9. — With a verb united by the conjunction que to the 
 
262 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADVERB. 
 
 verb craindre, and those of the same meaning, when we do 
 
 not wish the thing expressed by the second verb ; as, 
 
 Jl craint que son frère ne Vaban- He is afraid his brother should for- 
 
 doîine, sake tiim. 
 
 Je crains que mon ami ne meure, I fear my friend will die. 
 
 941. But pas is not omitted when we wish the thing ex- 
 pressed by the second verb ; as, 
 
 Je crains que mon père n^ arrive pas, I am afraid my father will not come. 
 
 942. 10. — With the verb which follows de peur que, de 
 crainte que, in similar circumstances with craindre. Thus, 
 when we say, 
 
 De crainte qu'il ne perde son procès, 
 we wish that he may gain it ; and when we say, 
 
 De crainte qu'il ne soit pas puni, 
 we wish that he may be punished. 
 
 943. Remark.— -In these phrases. 
 
 Je crains que mon ami ne meure, I ara afraid my friend will die, 
 Fous empêchez qu'on ne chante, You prevent them from singing, 
 the expression ne is not a negation ; it is the ne or quin of 
 the Latins, introduced into the French language, as may be 
 seen by the English translation. 
 
 944. 11. — After ««voir, whenever it has the meaning of 
 pouvoir; as. 
 
 Je ne saurais en venir à bout, I cannot accomplish it. 
 
 945. When it means être incertain, it is the best to omit 
 ■pas and point ; as. 
 
 Je ne sais où le prendre, I do not know where to find him. 
 
 U ne sait ce qu'il dit, He does not know what he says. 
 
 946. Remark. — But pas and point must be used when 
 savoir is taken in its true meaning ; as, 
 
 Je ne sais pas le français, I do not know French. 
 
 947. 12.~We also say, 
 
 J\re vous déplaise, ne vous en Bj your leave, under favor, or let it 
 déplaise, not displease you. 
 
 948. Plus and davantage must not be used indiôerently. 
 
 949. plus is followed by the preposition de or the con- 
 junction que ; as, 
 
 Jl a plus de brillant que de solide, He has more brilliancy than solidity. 
 
 Jl se fie plus à ses lumières qu!à He relies more upon his own know- 
 
 ceiles des autres, ledge than upon that of others. 
 
 950. Davantage is used alone and at the end of sentences ; as. 
 La science est estimable, mais la Learning is estimable, bat virtue is 
 
 vertu Cest davantage, still more so. 
 
OF GRAMMATICAL CONSTRUCTION. 263 
 
 951. Though davantage cannot be followed by the prepo- 
 sition de, it may be preceded by the pronoun en; as, 
 Je tHen dirai pas davantage, I shall not say any more about it. 
 
 952.*It is incorrect to use davantage for le plus. We 
 must say, 
 
 De toutes les fieurs d\in parterre, Of all the flowers of a parterre, the 
 V anémone est celle qid me plait anemone is that which pleases me 
 le plus, most. 
 
 953. Si, aussi, tant, and autant, are always followed by 
 the conjunction que, expressed or understood.^ 
 
 954. Si and aussi are joined to adjectives, adverbs, and 
 participles ; tant and autant to substantives and verbs. 
 
 V Angleterre n'est pas si grande England is not so large as 
 
 que la France, France. [beloved. 
 
 Tl est aussi estimé qu'aimé. He is as much esteemed as he is 
 
 Elle a autant de beauté que de vertu. She has as much beauty as virtue. 
 
 955. ^^m.KRK.'— 'Autant may, however, be substituted for 
 aussi, when it is preceded by one adjective and followed by 
 que and another adjective ; as, 
 
 M est modeste autant que sage. He is as modest as wise. 
 
 956. Aussi and autant are used in the affirmative ; si and 
 tant in negative and interrogative sentences. The two last 
 are, however, alone to be used in aihrmative sentences, when 
 they are put for tellement ; as, 
 
 U est devenu si gros, qu'il a de la He is become so bulky that he can 
 
 peine à marcher, hardly walk. 
 
 II a tant couru qu'il en est hors He has been running so fast that 
 
 d'haleine, he is out of breath. 
 
 957. Jamais takes sometimes the preposition à, and tou- 
 jours the preposition pour ; as, 
 
 Soyez à jamais heureux, Be for ever happy. 
 
 C'est pour toujours, It is for ever. 
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 
 OF GRAMMATICAL CONSTRUCTION. 
 
 958. Grammatical construction is the order which the 
 genius of a language has assigned, in speech, to the different 
 sorts of words into which it is distinguished. Construction 
 is sometimes mistaken for syntax ; but there is this difference, 
 the latter consists in the rules which we are to observe, in 
 order to express the relations of words one to another, whereas 
 
264 OF GRAMMATICAL CONSTRUCTION. 
 
 ^ammatical construction consists in the various arrangements 
 which are allowed while we observe the rules of syntax. 
 Now, this arrangement is irrevocably fixed, not only as phrases 
 may be interrogative, imperative, or expositive, but #lso as 
 each of these kinds m^y be affirmative or negative. 
 
 959. In sentences simply interrogative, the subject is either 
 a noun or pronoun. 
 
 960. If the subject be a noun, the following is the order to 
 be observed : first, the noun, then the verb, then the corres- 
 ponding personal pronoun, the adverb, if any, and the regimen 
 in the simple tenses : in the compound tenses, the pronoun and 
 the adverb are placed between the auxiliary and the participle : 
 Les lumières sont-elles un bien pour Are sciences an advantage to na- 
 
 les peuples ? ont-elles jamais co7i' tions 1 Have they ever contii- 
 tribué à leur boîiheur? buted to their happiness 1 
 
 961. If the subject be a pronoun, the verb begins the series, 
 and the other words follow in the order already pointed out ; as, 
 
 Vous plairez-vous toujours à Will you always take pleasure in 
 
 médire ? slandering 1 
 
 Aurez-vous bientôt fini ? Shall you soon have done 1 
 
 962. N. B. — When the verb is reflected, the pronoun 
 forming the regimen begins the series : this pronoun always 
 preserves its place before the verb, except in sentences 
 simply imperative. 
 
 963. In interrogative sentences, with negation, the same 
 order is observed ; but ne is placed before the verb, and "pas 
 or foint after the verb in the simple tenses, and between the 
 auxiliary and the participle in the compound tenses ; as. 
 
 Votre frère ne viendra-t-il pas Will not your brother come to- 
 
 demain P morrow 1 
 
 J^^ aurez-vous pas bientôt fini ? Shall you not have soon done ? 
 
 964. Remark. — There are in French several other ways 
 of interrogating. 
 
 965. 1. — With an absolute pronoun ; as. 
 
 Qui vous a dit cela ? or ? ^^^ ^^j^ ^^^^ , 
 
 Qui est-ce qui vous a dit cela / 3 "^ 
 
 966. 2. — With the demonstrative pronoun ce; as, 
 Est-ce-vous ? Is it you 1 Est-ce qu'il pleîit P Does it rain ? 
 
 967. With an interrogative adverb ; as. 
 Pourquoi ne vient-il pas P Why does he not come ? 
 CG7nment vous trouvez-vous P How do you find yourself? 
 
 968. Hence we see that the absolute pronouns and the 
 interrogative adverbs always begin the sentence: but the 
 demonstrative pronoun always follows the verb. 
 
OF GRAMMATICAL CONSTRUCTION. 265 
 
 969. In sentences simply imperative, the verb is always 
 placed first, in the first and second persons ; but in the third, it, 
 comes after the conjunction que and the noun or pronoun ; as, 
 
 Jîllohs là. Let us go there. 
 
 Venez ici, Come here. 
 
 QuHls y aillent. Let them go there. 
 
 Que Pierre aille à Londres, Let Peter go to London. 
 
 970. With negation, ne and pas are placed as in interro- 
 gative sentences. 
 
 971. For the place of the pronouns, see page 131, 
 
 972. Sentences are expositive, when we speak without 
 either interrogating or commanding. The following is the 
 order of the words in those which are affirmative : the subject, 
 the verb, the adverb, the participle, the regimen ; as, 
 
 l/n bon prince mérite l'amour de A good prince deserves the lové of 
 
 ses sujets, et P estime de tous les his subjects, and the esteem of all 
 
 peuples, nations. 
 
 César eût inutilemefit passé le Caesar would have crossed the Eubi- 
 
 Rubicon, sHl y eût eu de son con to no purpose had there been 
 
 temps des Fabius, Fabii in his time. 
 
 973. The negative sentences differ from this construction 
 only as ne is always placed before the verb, and pas or point 
 either after the verb, or between the auxiliary and the par- 
 ticiple ; as, 
 
 Un ho7nme riche ne fait pas tou- A rich man does not always do all 
 
 Jours le bien qu^il pourrait, the good he might. 
 
 Cicéron n' eût peut-être pas été un Cicero would not perhaps have been 
 
 si grand orateur, si le désir de so great an orator, had not the 
 
 s'élever aux premières dignités desire of rising to the first dignities 
 
 n'eût enfiammé son ame, inflamed his soul. 
 
 974. Sentences are either simple or compound. They are 
 simple when they contain only one subject and one attribute ; as, 
 
 Vous lisez, You read. Vous êtes Jeune, You are young. 
 
 975. They are compound when they associate several 
 subjects with one attribute, or several attributes with one 
 subject, or several attributes with several subjects, or several 
 subjects with several attributes. 
 
 976. This sentence, Pierre et Paul sont heureux, is com- 
 pound by having several subjects ; this — cette femme est jolie, 
 spirituelle et sensible — is compound by having several attri- 
 butes ; and this — Pierre et Paul sont spirituels et savans — is 
 composed at once of several subjects and several attributes. 
 
 977. A sentence may be compound in various other ways ; 
 by the subject, by the verb, or by the attribute. 
 
 Z 
 
"60 OF GRAMMATICAL CONSTRUCTION. 
 
 978. By the subject, when this is restricted by an inci* 
 .dental proposition ; as, 
 
 Dieu, qui est bon. 
 
 979. By the verb, when it is modified by some circum- 
 stance of time, order, &c. ; as, 
 
 Dieu, qui est bon, n'abandonne jamais. 
 
 980. By the attribute, when this attribute is modified by a 
 regimen which is itself restricted ; as. 
 
 Dieu, qui est bon, n'abandonne jamais les hommes, qui mettent 
 sincèrement leur confiance en lui. 
 
 981. These simple or compound sentences may be joined 
 to others by a conjunction; as. 
 
 Quand on aime V étude, le temps When we love study, time flies with- 
 passe sans qiCon s'en aperçoive, out our perceiving it. 
 
 The two partial phrases here form but one. 
 
 982. Rule. — When a sentence is composed of two partial 
 phrases, joined by a conjunction, harmony and perspicuity 
 generally require the shortest to go first. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Quand les passions nons quittent When our passions leave us, we 
 
 nous nous Jlattons en vain, que in vain flatter ourselves that" it 
 
 c^est nous qui les quittons, is we that leave them. 
 
 On rCest point a plaindre, quand. He is not to be pitied who, for 
 
 au défaut de plaisirs réels, on want of real pleasure, finds 
 
 trouve le moyen de s'occuper de means to grouse himself with 
 
 chimères, chimeras. 
 
 983. Periods result from the union of several partial 
 phrases, the whole of which make a complete sense. Periods, 
 to be clear, require the shortest phrases to be placed first 
 The following example of this is taken from Fléchier : 
 
 N'attendez pas, Messieurs. 
 
 1. Que j'ouvre une scène tragique ; 
 
 2. Que je représente ce grand homme étendu sur ses propres trophées ; 
 
 3. Que je découvre ce corps pâle et sanglant, auprès duquel fume encore 
 la foudre qui l'a frappé ; 
 
 4. Que je fasse crier son sang comme celui d'Abel, et que j'expose à 
 VQS yeux les images de la religion et de la patrie éplorée. 
 
 984. This admirable period is composed of four members, 
 which go on gradually increasing. It is a rule not to give 
 more than four members to a period, and to avoid multiplying 
 incidental sentences. 
 
 985 Obscurity in style is generally owing to those small 
 phrases which divert the attention from the principal sen- 
 tences, and make us lose sight of them 
 
OF GRAMMATICAL CONSTRUCTION. 267 
 
 986. The construction which we have mentioned is called 
 direct or regular, because the words are placed in those sen- 
 tences according to the order which has been pointed out. But 
 this order may be altered in certain cases, and then the con- 
 struction is called indirect or irregular. Now, it may be 
 irregular by inversion, by ellipsis, by pleonasm, or by syl- 
 lipsis ; these are what are called the four figures of words. 
 
 Of Inversion, 
 
 987. Inversion is the transposition of a word into a place 
 different from that which by usage is properly assigned to it. 
 This ought never to be done except when it introduces more 
 perspicuity, energy, or harmony into the language ; for it is 
 a defect in construction whenever the relation subsisting be- 
 tween words is not easily perceived. 
 
 988. There are two kinds of inversion : the one, by its 
 boldness, seems to be confined to poetry ; the other is fre- 
 quently employed even in prose. 
 
 989. We shall speak here of the latter kind only. 
 
 990. The following inversions are authorized by custom. 
 
 991. The subject by which a verb is governed may with 
 propriety be placed after it ; as. 
 
 Tout ce que lui promet V amitié All that the friendship of the Romans 
 des Romains, promises him. 
 
 992. Remark. — This inversion is a rule of the art of 
 speaking and writing whenever the subject is modified by an 
 incidental sentence, long enough to make us lose sight of the 
 relation of the verb governed to the subject governing. 
 
 993. The noun governed by the prepositions de and à may 
 likewise be very properly placed before the verb ; as, 
 
 D^une voix entrecoupée de sanglots, In a voice interrupted by sobs, 
 
 ils s'écrièrent, they exclaimed. 
 
 A tant d'injures, qu'a-t-elle ré- To so much abuse, what answer 
 
 pondu ? did she give 1 
 
 994. The verb is likewise elegantly preceded by the 
 prepositions après, dans, par, sous, contre, <fcc. with their 
 dependencies, as well as by the conjunctions si, quand, 
 parce que, puisque, quoique, lorsque, &c. ; a», 
 
 Par la loi du corps, je tiens à ce By the law of the body, 1 am con 
 
 monde qui passe, nected with this passing world. 
 
 Puisqu'il Ir veut, qu'il le fasse, Since he wishes it, let him do it. 
 
268 OF GRAMMATICAL «ONSTRUCTION. 
 
 Of the Ellipsis. 
 
 995. Ellipsis is the omission of a word, or even several 
 words, which are necessary to make the construction full and 
 complete. In order to form a good ellip&is, the mind must 
 be alDle easily to supply the words omitted ; as, 
 
 J^ accepterais les offres deBari^is, I would accept the offers of Darius, 
 si fêtais Jîlexandre : — et moi if I were Alexander ; — and so 
 aussi, si fêtais Parme7iion, would I, if I were Parmenio. 
 
 Here the mind easily supplies the words je les accepterais in 
 the second number. 
 
 996. The ellipsis is very common in answers to interro- 
 gative sentences ; as, 
 
 Quand viendrez-vous ? — Demain, When will you come ? — To-morrow 
 —that is, je viendrai demain. 
 
 997. In order to know whether an ellipsis be good, the 
 words that are understood must be supplied. It is correct 
 whenever the construction completely expresses the sense 
 denoted by the words which are supplied : otherwise, it is 
 not exact. 
 
 Of the Pleonasm. 
 
 998. Pleonasm, in general, is a superfluity of words ; in 
 ©rder to constitute this figure good, it must be sanctioned by- 
 custom, which never authorizes its use but to give greater 
 energy to language, or to express, in a clearer manner, the 
 internal feeling with which we are affected. 
 
 Et que m'a fait à moi cette Troie où je cours ! 
 , Je me meurs. S'il ne veut pas vous le dire, je vous le dirai, moi. 
 Je l'ai vu de mes propres yeux. 
 Je l'ai entendu de mes propres oreilles. 
 
 — A moi, in the first sentence / me, in the second ; moi, in 
 the third ; de m,es propres yeux, m the fourth ; and de ones 
 propres oreilles, in the fifth, are employed merely for the 
 sake of energy, or to manifest an internal feeling. But this 
 manner of speaking is sanctioned by custom. 
 
 999. Remark. — Expletives must not be mistaken for 
 pleonasms ; as, 
 
 Cest une affaire, où il y va du It is an affair in which the safety of 
 salut de Vêtat, the state is concerned, 
 
 which is better than c'est une affaire, où il va, Slc. by omit- 
 ting y, which is in reality useless on account of om ; but y 
 here, is a mode of expression from which it is not allowable 
 to deviate 
 
OF GRAMiMATlCAL DISCORDANCES. 269 
 
 Of the Syllepsis. 
 
 1000. The syllepsis is a figure by which a word relates 
 more to our meaning than to the literal expressions ; as in these .• 
 
 II est onze heures ; l'an mil sept cent quatre-vingt-dix-neuf. 
 
 1001. When using it, the mind, merely intent upon a 
 precise meaning, pays no attention to either the number or 
 the gender of heures and an. 
 
 1002. There is likewise a syllepsis in these sentences : 
 
 Je crains qu'il ne vienne. 
 J'empêcherai qu'il ne vous nuise. 
 J'ai peur qu'il ne m'oublie, &c. 
 
 1003. Full of a wish that the event may not take place, we 
 are willing to do all we can that nothing should present an 
 obstacle to that wish. This is the cause of the introduction 
 of the negative, which, although unnecessarj'' to complete the 
 sense, yet must be preserved for the idiom. 
 
 1004. There is again a very elegant syllepsis in sentences 
 like the following from Racine : 
 
 Entre le peuple et vous, vous prendrez Dieu pour juge ; 
 Vous souvenant, mon fils, que caché sous ce lin, 
 Comme eux vous fûtes pauvre, et comme eux, orphelin. 
 
 1005. The poet forgets that he has been using the word 
 peuple: nothing remains in his mind but des pauvres and 
 des orphelins f and it is with that idea of which he is so fully 
 impressed that he makes the pronoun eux agree. For the 
 same reason, Bossuet and Mezengui have said. 
 
 Quand le peuple Hébreu entra dans la terre promise, tout y célébrait 
 leurs ancêtres. — Bossuet. 
 
 Moïse eut recours au Seigneur, et lui dit: que ferai-je à ce peuple? 
 bientôt ils me lapideront. — Mezengui. 
 
 1006. Leurs and ils stand for les Hébreux 
 
 CHAPTER X. 
 
 OF GRAMMATICAL DISCORDANCES, AMPHIBOLOGIES 
 AND GALLICISMS. 
 
 1007. We have chiefly to notice two incorrect modes ot 
 construction, which are contrary to the principles laid down 
 in the preceding chapters — grammatical discordances and 
 amphibologies. 
 
 z2 
 
270 OF GRAMMATICAL DISCORDANCES. 
 
 OF DISCORDANCES. 
 
 1G08. In general, there is a discordance in language when 
 the words which compose the various members of a sentence 
 or period do not agree with each other, either because their 
 construction is contrary to analogy, or because they bring 
 together dissimilar ideas, between which the mind perceives 
 an opposition, or can see no manner of affinity. 
 
 1009. The following examples will serve to illustrate this: 
 Notre réputation ne dépend pas des louanges qu'on nous donne, mais 
 
 des actions louables que nous fesons. 
 
 1010. This sentence is not correct, because the first member 
 being negative, and the second affirmative, cannot come under 
 the government of the same verb. It ought to be, 
 
 JVotre réputation dépend, non Our reputation depends, not upon the 
 
 des louanges qu\n nous donne, praises which are bestowed on us, 
 
 mais des actions louables que, but upon the praiseworthy actions 
 
 &c. which we perform. 
 
 1011. But the most common discordances are those which 
 arise from the wrong use of tenses ; as in this sentence : 
 
 II regarde votre malheur comme une punition du peu de complaisance 
 que vous avez eue pour lui, dans le temps qu'il vous pria, &c. ; 
 
 because the two preterits, definite and indefinite, cannot well 
 agree together ; it should be, 
 
 Que vous eûtes pour lui dans le temps qu'il vous pria. 
 
 1012. There is discordance in this sentence : 
 
 On en ressentit autant de joie que d'une victoire complète dans un 
 autre temps; 
 
 because the verb cannot be understood after the que which 
 serves for the com.parison when the verb is to be in a different 
 tense : it should be. 
 
 On en ressentit autant de joie qu'on en aurait ressenti, &c. 
 
 1013. This line of Racine, 
 
 Le flot, qui l'apporta, recule épouvanté, 
 is also incorrect, because the form of the present cannot asso- 
 ciate with that of the preterit definite : it should have been, 
 qid Va apporté. 
 
 OF AMPHIBOLOGIES. 
 
 1014. Amphibology in language is when a sentence is so 
 constrilcted as to be susceptible of two different interpretations : 
 this must be carefully avoided. As we speak only to be un- 
 
^ OF GRAMMATICAL DISCORDANCES. 27^1 
 
 derstood, perspicuity is the first and most essential quality of 
 language ; we should always recollect that what is not clearly 
 expressed in any language^ is no language at all. 
 
 1015. Amphibologies are occasioned, 1. — By the misuse 
 of moods and tenses. 2. — Of the personal pronouns il, le, 
 la, &c. 3. — Of the possessive pronouns son, sa, ses, (fee. 
 4. — By giving a wrong place to nouns. 
 
 Of an Amphibology of the first kind. 
 
 Qu'ai-je fait, pour ve7iir accabler en ces lieux 
 
 Un héros, sur qui seul j'ai pu tourner les yeux 1 — Raciite. 
 
 1016. Pour venir forms an amphibology, because we do 
 not know whether it relates to the person who speaks or to 
 the person spoken to : it should have been, Pour que vous 
 veniez. 
 
 Of an Amphibology of the second kind. 
 
 César voulut premièrement surpasser Pompée ; les grandes richesses 
 de Crassus lui firent croire, qu'il pourrait partager la gloire de ces 
 deux grands hommes. 
 
 1017. This sentence is faulty in its construction, because 
 the pronouns il and lui seem to relate to César, although the 
 sense obliges us to refer them to Crassus. 
 
 Of an Amphibology of the third kind. 
 Valère alla chez Léandre ; il y trouva son fils. 
 
 1018. The pronoun son is ambiguous, because we do not 
 know to which it relates, to Valère or to Léandre, 
 
 Of an Amphibology of the fourth kind. 
 J'ai envoyé les lettres, que j'ai écrites, à la poste. 
 
 1019. A la poste, thus placed, is equivocal, bçcause we do 
 not know whether it is meant that the letters have been writ- 
 ten at the post office or sent to the post office. 
 
 OF GALLICISMS. 
 
 1020. We have distinguished in our " Grammaire Philo- 
 sophique et Littéraire," four sorts of gallicisms : we shall 
 only mention here those of construction. ,> . 
 
 1021. The gallicisms of construction are in gener* irre- 
 gularities and deviations from the customary rules of syntax : 
 
272 OF GRAMMATICAL DISCORDANCES. 
 
 there are some, hovv'ever, which are mere ellipses, and others 
 which can only be attributed to the caprice of custom 
 
 1022. General Principle. — Every gallicism of construc- 
 tion which obscures the meaning of the sentence, ought to be 
 condemned. Those only ought to be preserved which do 
 not impair perspicuity by introducing irregularity of con- 
 struction, and which are at the same time sanctioned by long 
 practice. 
 
 1023. According to this principle, this elliptic gallicism is 
 now rejected: 
 
 Et qu'ainsi ne soit ; meaning, ce que je vous dis est si vrai que, 
 
 because it obscures the sentence. For instance 
 
 J'étais dans ce jardin, et qv^ ainsi ne esit, voilà une fleur que j'y ai 
 cueillie ; that is, Et pour preuve de cela, voilà une fleur, &c. 
 
 Molière and La Fontaine seem to have been the last great 
 writers that have used this expression. 
 
 1024. One of the most common gallicisms is that in 
 which the impersonal verb il y a is used for il est, il existe 
 These expressions, 
 
 II y avait une fois un roi ; il y a cent à parier contre un, 
 
 are gallicisms. There are two in the following sentence : 
 
 H rHy a pas jtcsgu^aux enfans, qui Even children will meddle with it. 
 ne s'en mêlent, 
 
 1025. The verb falloir forms a sort of gallicism with the 
 pronoun en when it is conjugated like pronominal verbs with 
 the double pronouns il se ; as, 
 
 Il s'en faut, il s'en fallait, &c. 
 
 It then means, to he wanting ; and when preceded by an 
 adverb of quantity, the first pronoun is omitted ; as, 
 Peu s'en faut, tant s'en faut 
 
 1026. These several manners of using the verb falloir will 
 be found in the following sentences : 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 II s'en faut bien qu'il soit aussi He is far from being so clever as 
 
 habile qu'il croit l'être, he thinks. 
 
 Peu s'en est fallu qu'il n'ait suc- He was very near failing in that 
 
 combe dans cette entreprise, undertaking. 
 
 n ne s'en est presque rien fallu He was as near as possible being 
 
 qu'il n'ait été tué, killed. 
 
 \qus dites qu'il s'en faut vingt You say it wants twenty pounds 
 
 Uvre&que la somme entière n'y to complete the sum, but you 
 
 soit, mais vous vous trompez, il are mistaken, it cannot want so 
 
 ne peut pas s'en falloir tant, much. 
 
OF GRAMMATICAL CONSTRUCTION. 
 
 273 
 
 His cold is entirely well, or very 
 nearly so. 
 
 How near were these two friends 
 quarrelling 1 
 
 I am not satisfied with your appli- 
 cation to study, far from it. 
 
 So far from this play pleasing me, 
 I think it insufferable. 
 
 I was far from approving your 
 conduct on that occasion. 
 
 Son rhume est entièrement guéri, 
 ou peu s'' en faut, 
 
 Que s'en est-il fallu que ces deux 
 amis ne se soient brouillés ? 
 
 Je ne suis pas content de votre ap- 
 plication à V étude, tant s'en faut. 
 
 Tant s'en faut que cette comédie 
 me plaise, elle me semble au con- 
 traire détestable, 
 
 Il s'en fallait beaucoup que je vous 
 approuvasse dans cette circon- 
 stance, 
 
 1027. The sentences, 
 
 Il n'est rien moins que généreux, He is far from being generous. 
 
 You may say what you please, but, 
 
 &c. 
 By what I can see. As the matter 
 
 appears to me, &c. 
 We began to lament. Here we are 
 
 lamenting, crying, &c. 
 What wretched beings we are ! &c. 
 
 Vous avez beau dire, 
 A ce qu'il me semble, 
 JVous voilà à nous lamenter, 
 
 Qu'est-ce que de nous, 
 are also gallicisms. 
 
 1028. The use which is made of the preposition en, in 
 many sentences is likewise another source of gallicisms ; 
 some of this kind will be found in the following expressions : 
 
 A. qui en avez-vous ? 
 Où en veut'il venir ? 
 
 n lui en vent. 
 
 Whom are you angry with ? 
 
 What does he aim at ] What would 
 
 he be at Î 
 He has a quarrel with him, &c. 
 
 1029. The preposition en changes also sometimes the sig- 
 nification of verbs, and then gives rise to gallicisms. 
 
 1030. The conjunction que produces also a great number 
 of gallicisms ; as, 
 
 Gaming is a terrible passion. 
 It is in vain then that I work. 
 That is not too much. 
 There is nothing like having cou- 
 rage. 
 
 C'est une terrible passion que le Jeu, 
 C'est donc en vain que je travaille, 
 Ce n'est pas trop que cela, 
 n n'est que d^ avoir du courage. 
 
 1031. Many others will be found in the use which is made 
 of the prepositions à, de, dans, après, &c. ; but enough has 
 been said on the subject 
 
 1032. Gallicisms are of very great use in the simple style ; 
 therefore La Fontaine and Madame de Sévigné abound in 
 them. The middling style has not so many, and the solemn 
 oratorical but few, and these even of a peculiar nature. Only 
 
274 OF GRAMMATICAL CONSTRUCTION. 
 
 two examples of this kind, both taken from the tragedy of 
 Iphigenia, by Racine, will be here inserted. 
 
 Avez-vous pu penser qu'au sang d' Agamemnon 
 Achille préférât une fille sans nom, 
 Qui de tout son destin ce qu'elle a pu comprendre. 
 C'est qu'elle sort d'un sang, &c. 
 
 And, 
 
 Je ne sais gui rrC arrête et retient mon courroux. 
 Que par un prompt avis de tout ce qui se passe. 
 Je ne coure des dieux divulguer 2a menace. 
 
 1033. In the first instance, qui is the subject, though with- 
 out relating to any verb ; and in the second, je ne sais qui 
 ni' arrête que je ne coure^ is contrary to the rules of common 
 construction. " But," says Vaugelas, " these extraordinary 
 phrases, far from being vicious, possess the more beauty, as 
 they belong to a particular kind of language." 
 
^275) 
 
 FREE EXERCISES. 
 
 MADAME DE MAINTENON TO HER BROTHER. 
 
 'We can only be unhappy by our own fault ; this shall always be my 
 text, and my reply to youi lamentations. ^Recollect, my dear brother, 
 the voyage to America, ^the misfortunes of our father, of our infancy and 
 our youth ; and you will bless Providence instead of murmuring against 
 fortune. Ten years ago we were both very far ''(below our present situa- 
 tion) ; and our hopes were ^so feeble that we limited our wishes to an 
 6 (income of three thousand livres). At present we have four times '^that 
 sum, and our desires are not yet satisfied ! we enjoy the happy mediocrity 
 which you shave so often extolled ; let us be content. If ^possessions 
 come to us, let us receive them from the hand of God, but 'oiet not our 
 views be "too extravagant. We have '^(every thing necessary) and 
 '^comfortable ; all the rest is '''avarice; all these desires of greatness 
 '^spring from a restless heart. Your debts are all paid, and you may live 
 "'elegantly without '^contracting more. What have you to desire ? '«must 
 '^schemes of wealth and ambition '^Ooccasion the loss of your repose and 
 your health 1 Read the Life of St. Louis: you will see how '-^'unequal 
 the greatness of this world is to the desires of the human heart ; God only 
 can '-^satisfy them. I repeat it, you are only unhappy by your own fault. 
 Your 23uneasiness destroys your health, which you ought to preserve ^'if 
 it were only because I love you. ^sw^tch your ^etemper : if you can 
 render it less '-^''splenetic and less gloomy, 28 (you will have gained a great 
 advantage). This is not the work of reflection only : exercise, amuse- 
 ment, and a regular life 29(are necessary for the purpose). You cannot 
 think well ^o (while your health is affected) ; when the body is ^i debili- 
 tated, the mind is without vigor. Adieu ! write to me more frequently, 
 and in a style less gloomy. ^ 
 
 1 On ne être. ...que — 2 songer à — 3 the misfortunes of our infancy and those of 
 our, &c. — 4 du point où nous sommes au jourd'hui — .'i si peu de chose — G trois mille 
 livies de rente — 7 that sum, en. ...plus— 8 vantiez si fort — i) biens— ]0 let uà not 
 have views — IJ trop vaste — 12 le nécessaire — 13 le commode — 14 cupidité — 15 
 spring from, partir du vide de — 16 délicieusement — 17 contracting more, en faire 
 de nouvelles— 18 viust, faut-il que — 19 projets — 20 coûter Q. — 21 au-dessous de — 
 22 le rassasier — 23 inquiétude pi. — 24 quand ce être N — 25 travailler sur — 26 
 humeur— 27 bilieux— 28 ce être un grand point de gagné— 29 il y faut de— 30 tant 
 que vous se porter mal — 31 dans l'abattement. 
 
 THE CONVERT. 
 
 AN EASTERN TALE. 
 Divine 'mercy had brought a vicious man into a society of sages, whose 
 morals were holy and pure. He was affected by their virtues : ^it was 
 not long "before he imitated them and lost his old habits : he became just, 
 sober, patient, laborious, and benevolent. His deeds nobody could deny, 
 but ''they were attributed to odious motives. They praised his good 
 
 1 Miséricorde— 2 ne pas tarder— 3 à with the A.— 4 On donner des motifs 
 
276 FREE EXERCISES. 
 
 actions without loving his person : they would always judge him by what 
 he had been, not by what he had become. This injustice filled him with 
 grief; he shed tears in the bosom of an ancient sage, more just and more 
 humane than the others. " O, my son," said the old man to him, " thou 
 art better than thy reputation ; be thankful to God for it. Happy the man 
 who can say, my enemies and my rivals censure in me vices of which I 
 am not guilty. ^What matters it, if thou art good, that men persecute 
 thee as wicked 1 Hast thou not, to comfort thee, the two best witnesses 
 of thy actions, God and thy conscience 1" — Saint-Lambert. 
 
 5 Q,u'importe. 
 
 Mr. de Montausier has written a letter to Monseigneur upon the taking 
 of PhiHpsbourgh, which very much pleases me. " Monseigneur, I do not 
 compliment you on the capture of PhiHpsbourgh : you had a good army, 
 bombs, cannon, and Vauban ; neither shall I compliment you upon your 
 valor, for that is an hereditary virtue in your family ; but I rejoice that 
 you are liberal, generous, humane, and that you know how to recompense 
 the services of those who behave well : it is for this that I congratulate 
 you." — Sévigné. 
 
 THE GOOD MINISTER. 
 
 AN EASTERN TALE. 
 The great Aaron Raschild began to suspect that his vizier Giafar was 
 not deserving of the confidence which he had reposed in him. The 
 women of Aaron, the inhabitants of Bagdad, the courtiers, the dervises, 
 censured the vizier with bitterness. The caliph loved Giafar ; he would 
 not condemn him upon the clamors of the city and the court : he visited 
 his empire ; every where he saw the land well cultivated, the country 
 smiling, the cottages opulent, the useful arts honored, and youth full of 
 gaiety. He visited his fortified cities and sea-ports, he saw numerous 
 ships, which threatened the coasts of Africa and of Asia ; he saw warriors 
 disciplined and content ; these warriors, the sea»ien and the peasantry 
 exclaimed, " O God, pour thy blessings upon the faithful, by giving them 
 a caliph like Aaron and a vizier like Giafar." The caliph, affected by 
 these exclamations» enters a mosque, falls upon his knees, and cries out, 
 " Great God, I return thee thanks ; thou hast given me a vizier of whom 
 my courtiers speak ill and my people speak well." — Saint-Lambert. 
 
 Providence conducts us with so much goodness through the different 
 periods of our life, that we '(do not perceive our progress). This loss 
 Stakes place gently : it is imperceptible — it is the shadow of the sun-dial, 
 whose motion we do not see. If,' at twenty years of age, ^we could see 
 in a mirror the face we shall have at three-score, we ''(should be shocked 
 at the contrast) and terrified at our own figure ; but it is day by day we 
 advance : we are to-day as we were yesterday, and shall be to-morrow as 
 we are to-day ; so we go forward without perceiving it, and this is a 
 miracle of that Providence whom I adore. — Sévigné. 
 
 1 Ne le sentons presque pas— 2 va doucement— 3 an nous fesait voir-4 tontber à 
 la renverse. 
 
FREE EXERCISES. 277 
 
 THE MAGNIFICENT PROSPECT. 
 
 This beautiful house was on the declivity of a hill, from whence you 
 beheld the sea, sometimes clear and smooth as glass, sometimes 'idly irri- 
 tated against the rocks on which it broke, ^bellowing and swelling its 
 waves like mountains. On another side was seen a river, in which were 
 islands bordered with blooming limes, and lofty poplars, which raised their 
 proud heads to the very clouds. The several channels which formed those 
 islands seemed ^sporting in the plain. Some rolled their limpid waters 
 with rapidity ; some had a peaceful and still course ; others, by long 
 windings, ran back again to reascend as it were to their source, and 
 seemed not to have power to leave these enchanting borders. At a dis- 
 tance were seen hills and mountains which were lost in the clouds, and 
 formed by their fantastic figure as delightful a horizon ''(as the eye could 
 wish to behold). The neighboring mountains were covered with verdant 
 ^(vine-branches) hanging in festoons ; the grapes, brighter than purple, 
 could not conceal themselves under the leaves, and the vine was over- 
 loaded with its fruit. The fig, the olive, the pomegranate, and all other 
 trees, overspread the plain, and made it one large garden. — Fénélon, 
 
 1 Folleinent -2 en gémir— 3 se jouer— 4 à souhait pour le plaisir des yeux — 5 
 paid pie, m— fi vigne, f. 
 
 Jiong hopes 'wear out joy, as long illness wears out pain. 
 All philosophic systems are only good when one ^(has no use for 
 them). — Sévigné. 
 
 1 User— 2 n'en a que faire. 
 
 A GENERAL VIEW OF NATURE. 
 
 With what magnificence does nature 'shine upon earth ! A pure light, 
 extending from east to west, gilds successively the two hemispheres of 
 this globe ; an element transparent and light surrounds it ; a gentle fecun- 
 dating heat animates, ogives being to the seeds of life ; salubrious running 
 streams contribute to their preservation and growth ; eminences diversified 
 over the level land arrest the vapors of the air, make these springs inex- 
 haustible and always new ; immense cavities, made to receive them, divide 
 the continents. The extent of the sea is as great as that of the earth ; it 
 is not a cold, barren element ; it is a new empire, as rich, as populous as 
 the first. The finger of God has marked their boundaries. 
 
 The earth, rising above the level of the sea, "^is secure from its irrup-- 
 tions ; its surface, enamelled with flowers, adorned with ever-springing 
 verdure, peopled with thousands and thousands of species of different ani- 
 mals, is a place of rest, a delightful abode, where man, placed in order to 
 second nature, presides over all beings. The only one among them all 
 capable of knowing and worthy of admirmg, God has made him spectator 
 of the universe and a witness of his wonders. The divine spark with 
 which he is animated enables him to participate in the divine mysteries ; 
 it is by this light that he thinks and reflects ; by it he sees and reads in 
 the book of the universe as in a copy of the Deity. 
 
 Nature is the exterior throne of the divine Majesty ; the man who con- 
 templates, who studies it, rises by degrees to the interior throne of Omni- 
 potence. Made to adore the Creator, the vassal of Heaven, sovereign of 
 
 1 Ne brillel elle pas 2 faire éclore— 3 à l'abri de , 
 
 2A 
 
278 FREE EXERCISES. 
 
 the earth, he ennobles, peoples, enriches it ; he establishes among living 
 beings order, subordination, harmony ; he embellishes nature herself; he 
 cultivates, extends, affd polishes it ; lops off the thistle and the briar, and 
 multiplies the grape and the rose. — Biiffon. 
 
 ANOTHER GENERAL VIEW OF NATURE. 
 
 Trees, shrubs, and plants are the ornaments and 'clothing of the earth 
 Nothing is so 2melancholy as the prospect of a country naked and ^bare, 
 exhibiting to the eye nothing but stones, mud, and sand. But, vivified 
 by nature, and "clad in its nuptial robe, amidst the course of streams and 
 the singing of birds, the earth presents to man, in the harmony of the 
 three kingdoms, a spectacle full of life, of interest and charms — the only 
 spectacle in the world of which his eyes and heart are never ^weary. 
 
 The more a ^(contemplative man's soul is fraught with sensibility) the 
 more he yields to the ecstasies wriich this harmony produces in him. A 
 soft and deep melancholy then takes possession of his senses, and in an 
 intoxication of delight he loses himself in the immensity of that beautiful 
 system with which he feels himself identified. Then every particular 
 object escapes him : he sees and feels nothing but in the whole. Some 
 circumstance must contract his ideas, and circumscribe his imagination, 
 ^before he can observe by parcels that universe which he was endea- 
 voring to embrace. — J. J. Rousseau. 
 
 1 Vêtement— 2 triste— 3 pelé— 4 revêtu— 5 se lasser— 6 contemplateur a l'arae 
 sensible- 7 pour qu'il. 
 
 CULTIVATED NATURE. 
 How beautiful is cultivated nature ! by the labors of man, how brilliant 
 it is, and how pompously adorned ! He himself is its chief ornament, its 
 noblest part; by multiplying himself, he multiplies the most precious 
 germ ; she also seems to multiply with him ; by his art he '(brings forth 
 to view) all that she ^concealed in her bosom. How many unknown 
 treasures ! What new riches ! Flowers, fruits, seeds, brought to perfec- 
 tion, multiplied to infinity ; the useful species of animals transported, 
 propagated, increased without number ; the noxious species reduced, con 
 fined, banished ; gold — and iron, more necessary than gold — extracted 
 from the bowels of the earth ; torrents ^confined ; rivers directed, "con- 
 tracted ; the sea itself subjected, ^explored, crossed from one hemisphere 
 to the other ; the earth accessible in every part, and every where rendered 
 equally cheerful and fruitful ; in the vailles, delightful meadows ; in the 
 plains, rich pastures and still richer harvests ; hills covered with vines 
 and fruits ; their summits crowned with useful trees and young forests ; 
 deserts changed into cities inhabited by an immense population, which, 
 continually circulating, spreads itself from these centres to their extremi- 
 ties ; roads opened and frequented ; communications established every 
 wnere, as so many witnesses of the strength and union of society ; a 
 thousand other monuments of power and glory sufficiently demonstrate 
 that man, possessing dominion over the earth, has changed, renewed 
 the whole of its surface, and that, at all times, he shares the empire 
 of it witii nature. 
 
 • Mettre au Jour— 2 receler— 3 contenu— 4 resserré— 5 reconnu 
 
FREE EXERCISES. ' 279 
 
 THE SAME SUBJECT CONTINUED. 
 
 However, man only reigns by right of conquest ; he rather enjoys than 
 possesses, and he can preserve only by means of continual labor. If this 
 ceases, every thing droops, every thing declines, everything changes, and 
 again 'returns under the hand of nature ; she reassumes her rights, erases 
 the work of man, covers with dust and moss his most pompous monu- 
 ments, destroys them in time, and leaves him nothing but the regret of 
 having lost through his fault what his ancestors had conquered by their 
 labors. Those times in which man loses his dominion, those ^barbarous 
 ages during which every thing is seen to perish, are always preceded by 
 war, and accompanied by scarcity and depopulation. Man, who can do 
 nothing but by number, who is strong only by union, who can be happy 
 only by peace, is mad enough to arm himself for his misery, and to fight 
 for his ruin. Impelled by an insatiable thirst of having, blinded by ambi- 
 tion still more insatiable, he renounces all the feelings of humanity, turns 
 all his strength against himself, seeks mutual destruction, -^actually destroys 
 himself, and after these periods of blood and carnage, when the smoke of 
 glory has vanished, he contemplates with a sad eye the earth wasted, the 
 arts buried, nations scattered, the people weakened, his own happiness 
 ruined, and his real power annihilated. — Buff on. 
 
 Rentrer— 2 de barbarie— 3 en effet. 
 
 INVOCATION TO THE GOD OF NATURE. 
 
 Almighty God ! whose presence alone supports nature, and maintains 
 the harmony of the laws of the universe : Thou who, from the immove- 
 able throne of the empyrean, seest the celestial spheres roll under thy feet 
 without shock or confusion : who, from the bosom of repose, reproducest 
 every moment their immense movements, and alone governest in profound 
 peace that infinite number of heavens and worlds ; restore, restore at 
 length tranquillity to the agitated earth ! let it be silent at thy voice ; let 
 discord and war cease their proud clamors ! God of goodness ! author 
 of all beings ! thy paternal eye 'takes in all the objects of the creatioD ; 
 but man is thy chosen being ; thou hast ^illumined his soul with a ray 
 of thy immortal light : complete the measure of thy kindness by pene- 
 trating his heart with a ray of thy love : this divine sentiment, diffusing 
 itself every where, will reconcile opposite natures ; man will no longer 
 dread the sight of man ; his hand will no longer wield the murderous 
 ^steel ; the devouring flames of war will no longer ''dry up the sources of 
 population : the human species, now weakened, mutilated, mowed down 
 in the blossom, ^will spring anew, and multiply without number ; nature, 
 overwhelmed under the weight of ^scourges, will soon réassume with a 
 new life its former fruitfulness ; and we, beneficent God, will second it, 
 we will cultivate it, we will contemplate it incessantly, that we may every 
 moment offer thee a new tribute of gratitude and admiration. — Buffon. 
 
 1 Embrasser— 2 éclairer— 3 le fer armer sa main— 4 tarir— 5 germer de nouveau 
 
 —6 fléau. 
 
 Happy they who ^are disgusted with turbulent pleasures, and know 
 2how to be contented with the sweets of an innocent life ! Hanpy \hey 
 
 1 Se dégoûter de— 2 se contenter de. 
 
280 TRIE EXERCISES. 
 
 who delight ^in being instructed, and Avho ^take a pleasure in storing their 
 minds with knowledge ! Wherever adverse fortune may throw them, 
 they always carry entertainment wilh them ; and the disquiet which 
 preys upon others, even in the midst of pleasures, is unknown to those 
 who can employ themselves in reading. Happy they who love to read, 
 and are not like m.e deprived of the ability. As these thoughts were 
 passing in my mind, I went into a gloomy forest, where I immediately 
 perceived an old man, holding a book in his hand. The forehead of this 
 sage was broad, bald, and a little wrinkled : a white beard hung down to 
 his girdle ; his stature was tall and majestic; his complexion stiil fresh 
 and ruddy ; his eyes lively and piercing ; his voice sweet ; his words plain 
 and charming. I never saw so venerable an old man. He was a priest 
 of Apollo, and -officiated in a marble temple, which the kings of Egypt 
 had dedicated to that god in this forest. The book which he held in his 
 hand was a collection of hymns in honor of the gods. He accosted me 
 in a friendly manner, and we discoursed together. He related things 
 past so well, that they seemed present; and yet with such brevity, that 
 his account never tired me. He foresaw the future by his profound 
 knowledge, v/hich made him know men, and the designs of which they 
 are capable. With all this wisdom, he was cheerful and complaisant, 
 and the sprightliest youth has not so many graces as this man had at so 
 advanced an age. He accordingly loved young men when they were 
 teachable, and had a taste for study and virtue. — Fénélon 
 
 3 S'instruire— 4 se plaire— 5 servir— G docile. 
 
 THOUGHTS ON POETRY. 
 
 AVherever I went, î found that poetry was considered as the '(highest 
 teaming), and regarded with a veneration ^ (somewhat approaching to) that 
 which men would pay to angelic nature. 
 
 It yet fills me with wonder that, in almost all countries, the most an- 
 cient poets are considered as the best; whether '^(it be that) every kind 
 of knowledge is an acquisition gradually attained, and poetry is a gift 
 conferred at once ; or that the first poetry of every nation surprised them 
 as a novelty, and retained the credit by consent which it received by acci- 
 dent at first ; or whether, as the ^province of poetry is to describe nature 
 and passion, which are always the same, the first writers ^(took possession) 
 of f(the most striking objects for description), and '(the most probable 
 occurrences for fiction), and left nothing to those that followed them but 
 ^transcriptions of the same events, and -new combinations of the same 
 images. Whatever be the reason, it is commonly observed that the 
 early writers are in possession of nature, and their "^followers of art ; 
 that the first excel in strength and invention, and the latter in elegance 
 and refinement. 
 
 I was desirous to add my name to this illustrious ^'fraternity. I read 
 all the poets of Persia and Arabia, and was able to repeat by memory the 
 volumes that are suspended in the mosque at Mecca. But I soon found 
 that no man was ever great by imitation. My desire of '^excellence 
 ^impelled me 'Ho transfer my attention to nature and to '^life. Nature 
 
 1 Partie la plus sublime de la littérature— 2 qui tenoit de— 3cela viennede ce que 
 —4 but— 5 s'emparer— 6 objets qui fournissaient les plus riches descriptions— 7 évf-ne- 
 mens qui prêtaient le plus à la fiction— 8 de copier— 9 faire de nouvelles combinai- 
 sons— 10 successeurs— 11 famille— 12 exceller— 13 engager— 14 reporter. ..sur— 15 ta- 
 bleau de la vie. 
 
FREE EXERCISES. 281 
 
 was to be my subject, and men to be my auditors : I could never describe 
 vs^hat I had not seen; I could not hope '6 (to move those with delight or 
 terror) whose interests and opinions I did not '^understand. 
 
 16 réveiller le plaisir ou la terreur dans ceux— 17 ne connaître ni. 
 
 THE SAME SUBJECT CONTINUED. 
 
 Being now resolved to be a poet, I saw every thing '8 (with a new 
 purpose) ; my sphere of attention was suddenly magnified : no kind of 
 knowledge '9(was to be overlooked). I ranged mountains and deserts 
 2ofor images and resemblances, and 21 (pictured upon my mind) every 
 tree of the forest and flower of the valley. I observed with equal care the 
 crags of the rock and the pinnacles of the palace. Sometimes I wandered 
 along the mazes of the rivulet, and sometimes watched the changes of the 
 summer clouds. To a poet nothing can be useless. Whatever is beau- 
 tiful and whatever is dreadful must be familiar to his imagination : he 
 must 22(be conversant) with all that 2' (is awfully vast or elegantly little). 
 The plants of the garden, the animals of the wood, the minerals of the 
 earth, and the meteors of the sky, must all concur to store his mind with 
 inexhaustible variety; for every idea is useful for the ^4 (enforcement or 
 decoration) of moral or religious truth ; and he who knows most will 
 have most ^Spower of diversifying his 26scenes, and gratifying his reader 
 with remote allusions and unexpected instruction. 
 
 All the appearances of nature 2?I was therefore careful to study, and 
 fivery country which I have surveyed has contributed something to my 
 poetical powers. 
 
 In so wide a survey, interrupted the prince, you must surely have left 
 much unobserved. I have lived till now within the circuit of these 
 mountains, and yet cannot walk abroad without the sight of something 
 which I had never beheld before or never ^sheeded. 
 
 18 Sous un nouveau jour— 19 je ne devais négliger— 20 pour recueillir— 21 pénétrer 
 mon esprit du tableau de— 22 bien connaître— 23 étonne par sa grandeur ou charme 
 par son élégante petitesse— 24 fortifier, ou embellir— 25 ressources pour— 28 tableau 
 -27 étudier avec soin toutes les, &c -28 remarquer. 
 
 THE SAME SUBJECT CONTINUED. 
 
 The business of a poet, said Imlac, is to examine, not the individual, 
 out the species; to remark general properties and 29 (large appearances) : 
 he does not number the streaks of the tulip or describe the different shades 
 in the verdure of the forest. He is to exhibit, in his portraits of nature, 
 ^Osuch prominent and striking features as rccal the original to every mind ; 
 and must neglect ^'the minuter discriminations, which one may have 
 remarked and another neglected, ^^for those characteristics which 3%re 
 alike obvious to ^''vigilance and ^^carelessness. 
 
 But the knowledge of nature is only •''Shalf the task of a poet: he must 
 be acquainted likewise with ^^all the modes of life. His character requires 
 that he •''Sestimate the happiness and misery of every condition • observe 
 the power of all the passions, in all their combinations, and ''strace the 
 
 29 Considérer les objets en grand— 30 de ces traits saillans et frappans qui,&c.— 
 31 ces petits détails — 32 pour s'appliquer à caractériser, &c. &c. — 33 frappe égale- 
 ment— 34 œil observatenr--35 esprit insouciant — 30 the half of— 37 tous les diffcrene 
 aspects — 38 apprécier — 89 suivre les vicissitudes. 
 
 2 a2 
 
282 FREE EXERCISES. 
 
 changes of the human mind, as they are modified by various institutiona 
 and accidental influences of climate or custom, from the sprightliness of 
 infancy to the despondence of decrepitude. He must ''"divest himself of 
 the prejudices of his age or country ; he must consider ^ 'right and wrong 
 "•^In their abstracted and invariable state ; he must disregard present laws 
 and opinions, and rise to general and transcendent truths, which will 
 always be the same; he must therefore ''s^content himself with the slow 
 progress of his name), contemn the applause of his own time, and commit 
 his claims to the justice of posterity. He must write as the interpreter 
 of nature and the legislator of mankind, and consider himself as ^^pre- 
 siding over the thoughts and manners of future generations, as a being 
 superior to time and place. 
 
 His labor is not yet at an end : he must know many languages and 
 many sciences ; and, that his style may be worthy of his thoughts, he 
 must, by incessant practice, familiarize himself to every delicacy of speech 
 and grace of harmony. — S. Johnson. 
 
 40 Se dépouiller — 41 ce qui est juste ou injuste — 42 abstraction faite de ces divers 
 préjugés — 43 se résigner à voir son nom percer difficilement — 44 influer. 
 
 First follow nature, and your judgment frame 
 
 By her just standard, which is still the same : 
 
 Unerring nature, still divinely bright. 
 
 One clear, unchanged, and universal light, 
 
 Life, force, and beauty must to all impart ;' 
 
 At once the source, and end, and test of art.^ 
 
 Art, from that fund, its just supply provides ; 
 
 Works without show, and without pomp presides ; 
 
 In some fair body thus th' informing soul. 
 
 With spirit feeds, with vigor fills the whole ; 
 
 Each motion guides, and every nerve sustains 
 
 Itself unseen, but in th' effect remains.^ 
 
 Some, to whom Heav'n in wit has been profuse, 
 
 Want as much more to turn it to its use : 
 
 For wit and judgment often are at strife. 
 
 Though meant each other's aid, like man and wife."» 
 
 'Tis more to guide than spur the muse's steed, 
 
 Restrain his fury than provoke his speed :^ 
 
 The winged courser, like a gen'rous horse, 
 
 Shows most true mettle when you check its course.^ — Pope. 
 
 1. Lif;ht, clear, immutable, and universal nature, which nev^r errs, and shines 
 always with a divine splendor, must impart to ali she does life, force, and beauty. 
 
 2. She IS at once the source, &c. 
 
 3. So in a fair body, unseen itself, but always sensible by its effect*!, the soul 
 continually acting, feeds the whole with spirit, fills it with vjgoi, guides every 
 motion of it, and sustains every nerve. 
 
 4. Some to whom Heaven has given wit in profusion, want as much yet to know 
 the use they ought to make of it ; for wit and judgment, though made, like man 
 and wife, to aid each other, are often in opposition. 
 
 5. It is more difficult to guide than spur the courser of the muses, and to restrain 
 its ardor than provoke its impetuosity. 
 
 6. The winged courser is like a generous horse : the more we strive to stop it in 
 Us rapid course, the more it shows unconquerable vigor. . 
 
( 283) 
 
 EXAMPLES OF PHRASES 
 
 PRINCIPAL DIFFICULTIES OF THE FRENCH LANGUAGE 
 
 Sur les Collectifs Partitifs. 
 Ill plupart des fruits verts sont d'un goût 
 
 austère, 
 La plupart des gens ne se conduisent que 
 
 par intérêt, 
 La plupart du monde se trompe. 
 Il nméprise par philosophie les honneurs 
 
 que la plupart du monde recherche, 
 Il devait me fournir tant d'arbres; mais 
 
 j'en ai rejeté la moitié qui ne valait 
 
 rien, 
 Un grand nombre de spectateurs ajoutait 
 
 à la beauté du spectacle, 
 Toute sorte de livres ne sont pas égale- 
 ment bons. 
 Beaucoup de personnes se sont présentées, 
 Bien des personnes se font des principes à 
 
 leur fantasie. 
 
 On the Collective Partitives. 
 The greater part of green fruit is of a 
 
 harsh taste. 
 Most people are guided only by interest. 
 
 The greater part of mankind live in error 
 Jis a true philosopher, he despises those 
 
 honors which mankind in general court. 
 He was to furnish me so many trees, but 
 
 I refused half of them, which zcere good 
 
 for nothing. 
 j3 considerable mimber of spectators added 
 
 to the splendor of the scene. 
 Every kind of books are not equally good. 
 
 Many people presented themselves. 
 Many persons form principles to them- 
 selves, according to their fancy. 
 
 Stir quelques Verbs qiCon ne pevt 
 conjuguer avec Avoir sans faire 
 des barbarismes. 
 
 Il lui est échu une succession du chef de 
 
 sa femme, 
 Il est bien déchu de son crédit, 
 Ne sommes-nous pas convenus du prix? 
 N'est-il pas intervenu dans cette aflaire, 
 
 comme il l'avait promis? 
 Il est survenu à l'improviste, 
 La neige, qui est tombée ce matin, a 
 
 adouci le temps. 
 Que de neige il est tombé ce matin! 
 Toutes les dents lui sont tombées, 
 Ce propos n'est pas tombé à terre, 
 Etes-vous allé voir votre ami ? 
 Ils sont arrivés à midi et sont repartis de 
 
 suite, 
 Ces fleurs sont à peine écloses, 
 Ils est né de parens vertueux, qui n'ont 
 
 rien négligé pour son éducation. 
 Mademoiselle votre sœur est-elle rentrée ? 
 Madame votre mère n'est-elle pas encore 
 
 venue? 
 
 On some Verbs which cannot be con 
 jugated with the verb Avoir with 
 out making barbarous phrases. 
 
 Jin estate fell to him in right of his wift^ 
 
 He has lost much of his credit. 
 
 Have we not agreed about the price? 
 
 Did he not interfere in that affair as hi 
 had promised? 
 
 He came up unawares. 
 
 The snow which fell this morning hai> 
 softened the weather. 
 
 How much snow has fallen this morning I 
 
 Jill his teeth have fallen out 
 
 That remarkwas not alloxced, to escape. 
 
 Have you been to sec your friend? 
 
 They arrived at noon, and set out again 
 immediately. 
 
 These flowers are scarcely blown. 
 
 He was born of virtuous parents, who he- 
 stowed on him the best education. 
 
 Is your sister returned? 
 
 Is not your mother come yet? 
 
 Sur les JMots de Quantité. 
 
 Il a beaucoup d'esprit, mais encore plus 
 
 d'amour propre. 
 Il a assez d'argent pour ses menus plaisirs, 
 1' y avait bien du monde à l'Opira, 
 Il y avait hier au Parc je ne sais combien 
 
 de gens, 
 11 boit autant d'eau que de vin, 
 Il a tant d'amis qu'il ne manquera de 
 
 rien. 
 Personne n'y a plus d'intérft que lui. 
 Il n'a pas plus d'esprit qu'il n^en faut, 
 Trop de loisir perd souvent la jeunesse. 
 
 J'y ^i bien moins d'intérêt que vous, 
 
 On words of Quantity. 
 
 He has a great deal of sense, but still 
 
 more vanity. 
 He has sufficient pocket-money. [Opera. 
 There were a great many people at the 
 There were T do not knoio how many people 
 
 in the Park yesterday. 
 He drinks as much water as wine. 
 He has so many friends that he will want 
 
 for nothing. 
 JVobody has more interest there than he 
 He is not overburdened with sense. 
 Too much leisure time is frequently the 
 
 destruction of youth. 
 I am much less concerned in it than you 
 
284 
 
 PHRASES ON SOME DIFFICULTIES. 
 
 Sur les Pr ononis Personnels. 
 Sors et te retire, 
 Cours vite et ne t'amuse point, 
 Il dit aujourdhui une chose et demain il 
 
 se démentira, 
 Il s'est dementi lai-m?me, 
 La jeunesse est naturellement emportée ; 
 
 elle a besoin de quelque entrave qui la 
 
 retienne. 
 Il ne peut voir personne dans la prospérité 
 
 sans lui porter envie. 
 Ce que vous me dites est une énigme pour 
 
 moi. 
 C'est un homme extrême en tout ; il aime 
 
 et il hait avec fureur, 
 
 Si vous n'y avez jamais été, je vous y 
 mènerai. 
 
 Je l'ai connu doux et modeste ; il s'est 
 bien gâté dans le commerce de ses nou- 
 veaux amis. 
 
 Elle n'est pas encore revenue du saisisse- 
 ment, que lui causa celte nouvelle. 
 
 Il menace de l'exterminer, lui et toute sa 
 
 race. 
 Si vous n'avez que faire de ce livre-là, 
 
 prêtez-le-moi. 
 Je lui avais en'voyé un diamant, il l'a 
 
 refusé, je le lui ai renvoyé, 
 Il apprend facilement et oublie de même. 
 Je lui pardonne facilement d"a\oir voulu 
 
 se faire auteur; mais je ne saurais lui 
 
 pardonner toutes les puérilités dont il a 
 
 farci son livre. 
 Je me plains à vous de vous-mèm.e. 
 Si vous ne voulez pas être pour lui, au 
 
 moins ne soyez pas contre, 
 (iuand sera-ce que vous viendrez nous 
 
 voir ? 
 
 On the Personal Pronouns. 
 
 Go out and retire, withdraw. 
 
 Go quick, and do not loiter. 
 
 He advances a thing to -darj, and will con- 
 tradict himself to-tnorrow. 
 
 He has contradicted himself . 
 
 Tenth is naturally hasty, it needs some 
 check to restrain it. 
 
 He can see the prosperity of nobody with. 
 
 out envying them. 
 What you tell me is a perfect riddle to me. 
 
 He is a man that carries every thing to 
 excess; he is alike violent in his love 
 and in his hatred. 
 
 If you have never been there, I will take 
 you. 
 
 IknezD him when he was mild and modest ; 
 he has been much corriiptcd by asso- 
 ciating with his new acquaintances. 
 
 She is not yet recovered frvm the con- 
 sternation into which that intelligence 
 threw her. 
 
 He threatens to exterminate him and all 
 his family. 
 
 If you have done with this book, lend it 
 me. 
 
 I had sent him a diamond, and he refused 
 it. but I sent him it back again. 
 
 He learns easily and forgets the same. 
 
 lean easily pardon him for having at- 
 tempted to turn author ; but I cannot 
 pardon him. all the absurdities with 
 which he has filled his book. 
 
 I complain to you of yourself. 
 
 If you will not be for him, at hast do noi 
 be against him. 
 
 When will you come to see us ? 
 
 Sur soi, lui, soi-même, et lui-même. On soi, lui, soi-7nême, and hii-mêine. 
 
 duand on a pour soi le témoignage de sa 
 
 conscience, on est bien fort. 
 L'estime de toute la terre ne sert de rien 
 
 •À un homme qui n'a pas le témoignage 
 
 de sa conscience pour lui. 
 Un homme fait mille fautes, parce qu'il 
 
 ne fait point de réflexions sur lui, 
 
 On fait mille fautes, quand on ne fait 
 
 aucune reflexion sur soi. 
 Il aime mieux dire du mal de lui, que de 
 
 n'en point parler. 
 L'égoïste aimera mieux dire du mal de 
 
 soi, que de n'en point parler. 
 
 On a souvent besoin d'un plus petit que 
 
 soi, 
 Cn prince a souvent besoin de beaucoup 
 
 de gens plus petits que lui. 
 C'est un bon moyen de s'élever soi-même, 
 
 que d'exalter ses pareils; et un homme 
 
 adroit s'élève ainsi lui-même. 
 
 Thi approbation of our conscience imparts 
 great courage. 
 
 The good opinion of the whole world is of 
 no use to a man 7cho has not the appro- 
 bation of his oicv conscience. 
 
 JÎ man commits a thousand faults because 
 he does not reflect on future conse- 
 quences. 
 
 We commit a thousand faults when we 
 neglect to reflect on ourselves. 
 
 He had rather speak ill of himself than 
 not speak of himself at all 
 
 The egotist prefers speaking ill of himself 
 rather than not be the subject of his own 
 conversation. 
 
 We frequently want the assistance of one 
 who is beloiD ourselves. 
 
 A prince frequently needs the assistance 
 of many persons inferior to himself. 
 
 It is an excellent method of exalting our- 
 selves to exalt our equals, and a inan of 
 address by this means exalts himself. 
 
 Sur les Pronoms Relatifs. 
 
 Il n'y a rien de si capable d'efieminer le 
 courage, que l'oisiveté et les délices. 
 
 Il faut empêcher que la division, qui est 
 dans cette famille, n'éclate. 
 
 On the Relative Pronouns. 
 JVothing is so calculated to enervate the 
 
 mind as idleness and pleasure. 
 The dissension in that family must be 
 
 prevented from becoming public. 
 
PHRASES ON SOME DIFFICULTIES. 
 
 285 
 
 n'y a bien des évônemens que l'on suppose 
 
 se passer pendant les entr'actes. 
 Je le trouvai qui s'habillait, 
 Q,ui le tirera de cet embarras, le tirera 
 
 d'une grande niis're, 
 Ceux-l.i sont véritablement heureux, qui 
 
 croient l'ùtre. 
 Il n'y a que la vertu, qui puisse rendre un 
 
 homme heureux en cette vie, 
 Il n'y a rrgle, si générale, qui n'ait son 
 
 exception, 
 C'est un orateur qui se possùde et qui ne 
 
 se trouble jamais. 
 Il n'y a pas dans le cœur humain de repli 
 
 que Dieu ne co.nnaisse, 
 On n'a trouvé que quelques fragmens du 
 
 grand ouvrage qu'il avait promis, 
 La faute, que vous avez faite, est plus 
 
 importante que vous ne pensez, 
 Les premières d.-marches qu'on fait dans 
 
 le monde, ont beaucoup d'influence sur 
 
 le reste de la vie. 
 Cette farce est une des plus risibles qu'on 
 
 ait encore vues, ^ 
 /^ massez-vous des 'trésors que les vers et 
 
 la rouille ne puissent point gâter, et que 
 
 les voleurs ne puissent point dérober. 
 L'incertitude, où nous sommes de ce qui 
 
 doit arriver, fait que nous ne saurions 
 
 prendre des mesures justes. 
 Je m'étonne qu'il ne voie pas le danger 
 
 où il est, 
 L'homme dont vous parlez, n'est plus ici. 
 
 Celui de qui je tiens cette nouvelle ne 
 
 vous est pas connu. 
 Celui à qui ce beau château appartient 
 
 ne l'habite presque jamais, 
 Ce sont des événemens auxquels il faut 
 
 bien se soumettre. 
 C'est ce à quoi vous ne pensez guère, 
 
 There are many evevts in a piece which 
 
 are supposed to happen betireen the acts 
 Ifoxind him dressing. 
 Whoeicr extricates him from this difficulty 
 
 will relieve him from much distress. 
 Those are really happy loho think them- 
 
 selves so. 
 Virtue alone can raider a man happy in 
 
 this life. 
 There is no rule so general but it admits 
 
 of exceptions. 
 He is an orator who is master of himself , 
 
 and who is never embarrassed. 
 There is no recess of the human heart but 
 
 God perceives it. 
 Only some fragments of the great work 
 
 he had promised have been found. 
 The error you have committed is of more 
 
 consequence than you imagine. 
 The first steps we take on entering the 
 
 world have considerable influence on the 
 
 rest of our lives. 
 That farce is owe of the most truly comit 
 
 that ever was seen. 
 Lay lip for yourselves treasures which 
 
 neither moth nor rust can corrupt, an.a 
 
 which thieves cannot steal. 
 Our uncertainty as to what shall happen 
 
 makes us incapable of properly pro 
 
 viding against it. 
 I am astonished he does not see the danger 
 
 he is in. 
 The man whom you are speaking of is not 
 
 here noio. 
 The person from whom I received the in- 
 
 tclligence is not known to you. 
 The proprietor of that beautiful scat sel 
 
 dom resides there. 
 These are events to which we must subrMt 
 
 It is what you seldom think of. 
 
 Sur les Pronoms Démonstratifs. 
 
 Ne point reconnaître la divinité, c'est 
 
 renoncer à toutes les lumières de la 
 
 raison. 
 Mentir, c'est mépriser Dieu et craindre 
 
 les hommes. 
 Il y a des épidémies morales, et ce sont 
 
 les plus dangereuses, 
 Je crois que ce que vous dites est bien 
 
 éloigné de ce que vous pensez, 
 Les hommes n'aiment ordinairement que 
 
 ceux qui les flattent, 
 Celiii qui persuade à un autre de faire un 
 
 criiuf;, n'est guère moins coupable que 
 
 celui qui le commet, 
 Penser ainsi, c'est s'aveugler soi-même, 
 
 Ce qu'on rapporte de lui est inconcevable, 
 
 Ce qui m'afflige, c'est de voir le triomphe 
 
 du crime. 
 Connaissez-vous la jeune Emilie? C'est 
 
 une enfant dont tout le monde dit du 
 
 bien. 
 Imitez en tout votre amie: elle est douce, 
 
 appliquée, honnête et compatissante, 
 
 On the Demonstrative Pronouns. 
 JVoi to acknowledge the divinity is totally 
 to renounce the light of reason. 
 
 To lie is to despise God and to fear man. 
 
 There are moral contagious disorders, 
 and these are the most dangerous. 
 
 What you advance is, I think, widely dif- 
 ferent from your sentiments. 
 
 Men in general love only those loho flatter 
 them. 
 
 He who persuades another to the commis- 
 sion of a crime is hardly less guilty 
 than he who commits it. 
 
 To think in this manner is to be wilfully 
 blind. 
 
 The reports concerning him are hardly 
 conceivable. 
 
 What distresses me is to see guilt tri- 
 umphant. 
 
 Do you know little Emily ? She is a chili 
 of whom every body speaks well. 
 
 Imitate your friend in every thing ; shf 
 is mild, assiduous, polite, and comjias 
 fionate. 
 
286 
 
 PHRASES ON SOME DIFFICULTIES. 
 
 6'm7' le verbe Avoir employé à P Im- On Ûïq \ erh Avoir, to have, em^^loyeA 
 
 personnel. impersonally. 
 
 Remarque.— duand le verbe avoir s'em- Jflienthevcrb avoir is used impersonally 
 
 ploie à limpersounel, c'est dans le sens it sigytifies être, to he, and in tJds seiise it 
 
 d'être, et alors il 
 
 joint toujours avec y. 
 Il y a un an que je ne vous ai vu, 
 
 Y a-t-il des nouvelles? 
 Non, il n'y en a pas, du moins que je sache, 
 N'y a-t-il pas cinquante-quatre milles de 
 
 Londres à Brighton ? 
 II y avait déjà beaucoup de monde lorsque 
 
 j'arrivai, 
 Il n'y avait hier presque personne au 
 
 parc, 
 
 Y avait-il de grands débats ? 
 N'y avait-il pas beaucoup de curieux? 
 Je l'avais vu il y avait à peine vingt- 
 quatre heures. 
 
 Il n'y avait pas deux jours qu'il avait He had dined with me not two days before. 
 
 IS always accompanied by the adverb y. 
 It is a twelvemonth since I saw you. 
 Is there any news? 
 JVo, there is none, at least that I know. 
 Is it not fifty-four miles from London to 
 
 Brighton ? 
 There were already a great many people 
 
 ■when I arrived. 
 There was hardly any body in the park 
 
 yesterday. 
 Were there violent debates ? 
 Were there not many curious people? 
 I had seen him scarcely four-and-twenty 
 
 hours before. 
 
 dîné chez moi 
 Y avait-il si long-tempsque vous ne l'aviez 
 Ily eut hier un bal chez M. un tel. [vu? 
 Il n'y eut pas hier de spectacle, 
 y eut-il beaucoup de confusion et de dé 
 
 sordre ? 
 N'y eut-il pas un beau feu d'artifice ? 
 Il y a eu aujourd'hui une foule immense à 
 
 la promenade. 
 Il n'y a pas eu de bal, comme on l'avait 
 
 annoncé, 
 Est-il vrai qu'il y a eu un duel ? 
 N'y a-t-il pas eu dans sa conduite un peu 
 
 trop d'emportement? 
 Quand il y eut eu une explication, les 
 
 esprits se calmèrent. 
 N'y avait-il pas eu un plus grand nombre 
 
 de spectateurs? 
 Il y aura demain un simulacre de combat 
 
 naval. 
 Il n'y aura aucun de vous, 
 
 Y aura-t-il une bonne récolte cette année ? 
 N'y aura-t-il pas quelqu'un de votre fa- 
 mille ? 
 
 A coup sûr il y aura eu bien du désordre. 
 Sur cent personnes, il n'y en aura pas eu 
 dix de satisfaites, 
 
 Y aura-t-il eu un bon soupe ? 
 
 N'y aura-t il pas eu de mécontens ? 
 
 Il y aurait de la malhonnêteté dans ce pro- 
 
 II n'y aurait pas grand mal à cela. [cédé. 
 
 Y aurait-il quelqu'un assez hardi pour 
 l'attaquer ? 
 
 N'y auvait-il pas quelqu'un assez charita- 
 ble pour l'avertir de ce qu'on dit de lui ? 
 Il y aurait eu de l'imprudence à cela. 
 
 Was it so long since you had seen him. 
 There was yesterday a ball at Mr. A's. 
 There was no play yesterday. 
 Was there a great deal of confusion and 
 
 disorder ? 
 Were there not handsome fir eworlcs? 
 There was an immense crowd to-day at 
 
 the public walks. 
 There has not been any ball, as had been 
 
 mentioned. 
 Is it true that there has been a duel? 
 Was there not rather too much hastiness 
 
 in his behaviour? 
 After there had been an explanation, 
 
 tranquillity was restored. 
 Was there not a greater number of spec- 
 tators ? 
 To-morrow there will be the representation 
 
 of a sea-fight. 
 There will be none of you. 
 Will there be a good harvest this year ? 
 Will not there be some of your family ? 
 
 [order. 
 There must certainly have been much dis- 
 Out of a hundred persons, there will not 
 
 have been ten satisfied. 
 Will there have been a good supper ? 
 Will there not have been some dissatisfied ? 
 Such a step icouldhave been ungenteel. 
 There would be no great harm in that. 
 Would there be any one bold enough to 
 
 attack him ? 
 Would there be nobody kind enough tc 
 
 acquaint him with what is said of him ? 
 There would have been some imprudence 
 
 that. 
 II n'y aurait pas eu tant de mésintelli- There would not have been so great a mis 
 
 jence, si Ton m'en avait cru. 
 [1 n'y aurait pas en dix personnes, 
 Y aurait-il eu de l'inconvénient? 
 
 N'y aurait il pas eu de jaloux pour le 
 
 traverser dans ses projets? 
 Je ne crois pas qu'il y ait un spectacle 
 
 plus magnifique. 
 Je désirerais qu'il y eût moins de fausseté 
 
 ians le commerce de la vie. 
 Je n'ai pas ouï dire qu'il y ait eu hier des I have not heard that there was any news 
 
 nouvelles du continent, from the continent yesterday. 
 
 Auriez-vous cru qu'il y eût eu tant de per- Could, you have thought so many persons 
 
 g-onnes compromises dans cette affaire? would have been exposed in that ajfair t 
 
 understanding had T been believe 
 
 There roould not have been ten persons. 
 
 Would there have been any inconve- 
 nience ? 
 
 Would there not have been some envious 
 person to thwart him in his designs? 
 
 I do not think there can be a more superb 
 spectacle. 
 
 I wish there were -less duplicity in the 
 concerns of life. 
 
PHRASES ON SOME DIFFICULTIES. 
 
 287 
 
 Phrases Diverses. 
 Sa vie, ses actions, ses paroles, son air 
 
 •nèine et sa demarche, tout prêche, tout 
 
 idjfioen lui, 
 On craignait qu'il n'arrivât quelque dé- 
 sordre dans l'assemblée, mais toutes 
 
 choses s'y passèrent fort doucement, 
 La vigne et le lierre s'entortillent autour 
 
 des ormes, 
 On ne disconvient point qu'il ne soit 
 
 brave, mais il est un peu trop fanfaron. 
 Le cadet est riche, mais l'aîné l'est encore 
 
 davantage, 
 Le ciel est couvert de nuages, et l'orage 
 
 est prêt à fondre. 
 Après qu'il eut franchi les Alpes avoc ses 
 
 troupes, il entra en Italie, 
 La frugalité rend les corps plus sains et 
 
 plus robustes. 
 Ce discours est peut-être un des plus 
 
 beaux morceaux d'éloquence, qu'il y 
 
 ait jamais eu. 
 C'est un homme qui aime la liberté ; il ne 
 
 se gêne pour qui que ce soit. 
 Il est plus haut que moi de deux doigts, 
 Irez-vous vous exposer à la barbarie et à 
 
 l'inhospitalité de ces peuples? 
 
 A la longue, les erreurs disparaissent, et 
 
 la vérité surnage. 
 Si vous le prenez avec moi sur ce ton de 
 
 fierté, je serai aussi fier que vous. 
 C'est un homme rigide, qui ne pardonne 
 
 rien, ni aux autres ni à lui-même, 
 Les uns montent, les autres descendent, 
 
 ainsi va la roue de la fortune, 
 Je ne vois rien de solide dans tout ce que 
 
 vous me proposez. 
 L'art n'a jamais rien produit de plus beau. 
 Lequel est-ce des deux qui a tort ? 
 On aime quelquefois la trahison, mais on 
 
 hait toujours les traîtres, 
 
 Contimiatioîu 
 
 L'éléphant se sert de sa trompe pour pren- 
 dre et pour enlever tout ce qu'il veut, 
 Plus j'examine cette personne, plus je 
 
 crois l'avoir vue quelque part, 
 La nuit vint, de façon que je fus contraint 
 
 de me retirer, 
 Il faut vivre de façon qu'on ne fasse tort 
 
 à personne. 
 Elle sut qu'on attaquait son mari et 
 
 courut aussitôt tout éperdue pour le 
 
 secourir. 
 Je trouvai ses parens tout éplorès. 
 Cet arbre pousse ses branches toutes 
 
 droites. 
 J'en ai encore la mémoire toute fraîche. 
 Il a voulu faire voir par cet essai qu'il 
 
 pouvait réussir en quelque chose de 
 
 plus grand, 
 Il fut blessé au front et mourut de cette 
 
 blessure, 
 Ces chevaux prirent le mors aux dents et 
 
 entraînèrent le carrosse. 
 C'est un homme qui compose sans chaleur 
 
 ni imagination; tout ce qu'il écrit est 
 
 froid et plat. 
 Ce bâtiment a plus de profondeur que de 
 
 largeur, 
 
 Promiscuous Phrases. 
 His life, his actions, his very look and 
 
 deportment, every thing in hivi instructs 
 
 and edifies. 
 It was apprehended some disorder would 
 
 take place in the assembly, but every 
 
 thing went off very quietly. 
 The vine and ivy twist round the elm». 
 
 They do not deny that he is brave, but he 
 
 boasts rather too much. 
 The youngest is rich, but the eldest is still 
 
 more sot> 
 The sky is covered with clouds, and thé 
 
 storm is preparing to burst, 
 .after having crossed the Alps with his 
 
 troops, he entered Italy. 
 Temperance imparts an increase of health 
 
 and strength to the body. 
 This speech is perhaps one of the finest 
 
 pieces of eloquence that was ever pro- 
 nounced. 
 He is a man fond of liberty, he will be 
 
 restrained by nobody. 
 He is taller than I by two inches. 
 Will you go and expose yourself to the 
 
 barbarity and inhospitality of those 
 
 nations? 
 In time errors vanish and truth survives 
 
 If you treat me with that haughtiness, I 
 
 can be as haughty as you. 
 He is a strange character, who pardons 
 
 nothing, either in himself or others. 
 Some mount, others descend; thus goes 
 
 the 7cheel of fortune. 
 I see nothing certain in all you propose 
 
 to me. 
 It is one of the finest productions of art. 
 Which oj the two is in the wrong? 
 We sometimes love the treason, but iss 
 
 always hate the traitor. 
 
 Continuation. 
 
 The elephant makes use of his trun\ la 
 
 take and lift whatci-er he pleases. 
 The more I look at that per.-ion, the more 
 
 think I have seen him {or her) somewhere 
 J\''ig'M came on, so that I was obliged L. 
 
 retire. 
 We must live in such a manner as ta 
 
 injure nobody. 
 She knew her husband was attacked, and, 
 
 in a state of distraction, ran to Ms 
 
 ussista7ice. 
 I found his relations all in tears. 
 The branches of that tree groio quite 
 
 straight. 
 It is still quite fresh in my memory. 
 He wished to shoio, by that attempt, that 
 
 he could succeed in an enterprise of 
 
 more consequence. 
 He was woundedin the forehead, and died 
 
 of this wound. 
 Those hoises ran away icith the carriage. 
 
 He is a man who writes icithout the least 
 warmth or animation : all his produc- 
 tions are cold and insipid. 
 
 That building is deeper than it is broad 
 
288 
 
 PHRASES ON SOME DIFFICULTIES, 
 
 Cet homme est un prodige de savoir, de 
 science, de valeur, d'esprit, et de mé- 
 moire. 
 
 Il est attaché à l'un et à l'autre, mais plus 
 à l'un qu'à l'autre. 
 
 Ils ont bien de l'air l'un de l'autre, 
 
 Si l'on ruine cet homme-là, le contre-coup 
 retombera sur vous. 
 
 Il serait mort, si on ne l'eût assisté avec 
 soin, 
 
 Ce poème serait parfait, si les incidens, 
 qui le font languir, n'interrompaient la 
 continuité de l'action. 
 
 ^ Continuation, 
 
 Quand je le voudrais, je ne le pourrais pas. 
 Je serai toujours votre ami, quand même 
 
 vous ne le voudriez pas, 
 Q,uand vous auriez réussi, que vous en 
 
 serait-il revenu ? 
 ûuand on découvrirait votre démarche, 
 
 on ne pourrait la blâmer, 
 Quand vous auriez consulté quelqu'un sur 
 
 votre marriage, vous n'auriez pas mieux 
 
 réussi. 
 Le tonnerre et l'éclair ne sont sensibles 
 
 que par la propagation du bruit et de la 
 
 lumi ,re jusqu'à l'œil et à l'oreille. 
 Le langage de la prose est plus simple et 
 
 moins figuré que celui des vers, 
 Le conmiêncement de son discours est 
 
 toujours assez sage ; mais, dans la suite, 
 
 à force de vouloir s'élever, il se perd dans 
 
 les nues: on ne sait plus ni ce qu'on 
 
 voit, ni ce qu'on entend. 
 C'est une faute excusable dans un autre 
 
 homme, mais à un homme aussi sage 
 
 que lui, elle ne se peut pardonner. 
 Il ne suffit pas de paraître honnête homme, 
 
 il faut l'être. 
 Il nous a reçus avec bonté, et nous a 
 
 écoutés avec patience, 
 Tout y est si bien^eint, qu'on croit voir 
 
 ce qu'il décrit, 
 On ne pense rien de vous, qui ne vous soit 
 
 glorieux, 
 Les eaux de citernes ne sont que des eaux 
 
 de pluie ramassées. 
 S'il n'est pas fort riche, du moins a-t-jl de 
 
 quoi vivre h-innétement, 
 Quel quantième du mois avons-nous? 
 [1 lui tarde qu'il ne soit majeur, il compte 
 
 les jours et les mois. 
 Des qualités excellentes, jointes à de rares 
 
 taleiis, font le parfait mérite, 
 n a une mauvaise qualité, c'est qu'il ne 
 
 saurait garder un secret, 
 
 That man is a prodigy of knowledge 
 judgment, courage, sense, and memory 
 
 He is attached to both, but to one more 
 than to the other. 
 
 They very much resemble each other. 
 
 If that vian is ruined, his misfortune icill 
 recoil upon you. 
 
 He would have died, if he had not been 
 kindly assisted. 
 
 That would be a perfect poem, if the inci- 
 dents which give a heaviness to it, did 
 not break the connection of the subject. 
 
 Continuation. 
 
 If I were disposed, I could not do it. 
 
 I will always be your friend, even though 
 
 you should not wish it. 
 Had you even succeeded, what were you 
 
 to have derived from it? 
 Should the steps you have taken be dis- 
 
 covered, they could not be blamed. 
 Had you consulted somebody about yovr 
 
 marriage, you could not have succeeded 
 
 better. 
 Thunder and lightning are only percep- 
 tible by the transmission of sound and 
 
 light to the ear and eye. 
 Prose language is much more simple and 
 
 less fguralive than poetic. 
 The beginning of his speech is always 
 
 tolerably sensible; but afterwards, by 
 
 affecting the sublime, he loses himself, 
 
 and we no longer understand either 
 
 what we see or hear. 
 This fault would be excusable in another 
 
 man, but in a man of his sense it is 
 
 unpardonable. 
 It is not enough to seem an honest man; 
 
 we must be so. 
 He -received us with kindness, and heard 
 
 us patiently. 
 Every tiling in it is so icell delineated, you 
 
 think you see what he describes. 
 They think nothing of you but what is to 
 
 your hf^nor. 
 Cistern-water is only rain-water collected 
 
 If he is not rich, at least he has enough to 
 
 live upon respectably. 
 What day of the month is it? 
 He loT^gs lo be of age, and comits the days 
 
 and vionths. 
 Excellent qualities, joined to distinguished 
 
 talents, constitute perfect merit. 
 He has one bad quality, he cannot keep a 
 
 secret. 
 
 Modèles de phrases dans lesquelles, 
 
 on doit faire usage de Particle. 
 L''nornme est sujet à bien ries vicissitudes. 
 Les hommes d'un vrai génie sont rares, 
 i^es hommes à imagination sont rarement 
 
 heureux, 
 L'homme, dont vous parlez, est un de mes 
 
 arnis, 
 La v\e est un mélange de biens et de maux, 
 Lh perfection en tout genre est le but 
 
 auquel on doit tendre 
 
 Examples of Phrases in which the 
 Article is used. 
 
 JMan is liable to a variety of changes. 
 
 Men of real genius are scarce. 
 
 Men of a visionary character are seldom 
 
 happy. 
 The man you speik of is a friend of mine 
 
 Life is a compound of good and evil- 
 Perfection in every thing cught te be oui 
 çbject. 
 
PHRASES ON SOME DIFFICULTIES. 
 
 289 
 
 La beauté, les graces, et l'esprit sont des 
 avantages bien précieux, quand ils sont 
 relevés par la modestie, 
 Voilà des tableaux d'une grande beauté, 
 Faites-vous des principes, dont vous ne 
 
 vous écartiez jamais, 
 Cet arbre porte des fruits excellens. 
 Ces raisons s^t des conjectures bien 
 
 faibles." 
 Servez- vous des termes établis par l'usage, 
 On doit éviter l'air de l'affectation, 
 
 Le Jupiter de Phidias était d'une grande 
 beauté. 
 
 Beauty, gracefulness, and wit are valu- 
 aile endowments, when heightened by 
 modesty. 
 
 These are very beautiful pictures. 
 
 Establish rules for yourself, and never 
 
 * deviate from them. 
 
 This tree bea7's very excellent fruit. 
 
 These reasons are very idle conjectures 
 
 Use the expressions established by custom. 
 We ought to avoid the appearance ef 
 
 ajfcctation. 
 The Jupiter of Phidias was extremely 
 
 beautiful 
 
 Continuation des mêmes Phrases. 
 La mémoire est le trésor de l'esprit, le 
 
 fruit de l'attention et de la réflexion, 
 l'achetai hier des gravures précieuses et 
 
 rares, 
 La France est le plus beau pays de l'Europe, 
 L'intérêt de l'Allemagne était opposé à 
 
 celui de la Russie. 
 La longueur de l'Angleterre du nord au 
 
 sud est de 360 milles, et sa largeur de 
 
 l'est à l'ouest est de 300. 
 Il arrive de la Chine, du Japon, et des 
 
 Indes Orientales, &c. 
 Il arrive de l'Amérique, de la Barbade, de 
 
 la Jamaïque, &c. 
 Il vient de la Flandre française, 
 Il s'est établi dans la province deMiddlesex, 
 Des petits maîtres sont des êtres insup- 
 portables dans la société. 
 C'est l'opinion des nouveaux philosophes. 
 Elle a bien de la grâce dans tout ce 
 
 qu'elle fait, 
 Cette étoffe se vend une guinée l'aune, - 
 Ce vin coûte 70 livres sterlings la pièce, 
 
 The same Phrases continued. 
 
 Memory is the treasure of the mind, the 
 
 result of attention and rejlection. 
 I yesterday bought some valuable and 
 
 scarce engravings. 
 France is the finest country in Europe. 
 The German interest zcas contrary to the 
 
 Russian. 
 The length of England from north to 
 
 south is 360 miles, and its breadth from 
 
 east to west is 300. 
 He comes from China, Japan, and the ^ 
 
 East Indies. 
 He comes from America, Barbadoes, Ja 
 
 maica, Sf-c. 
 He comes from French Flanders. 
 He has settled in the county of Middlesex, 
 Coxcombs ere insufferable beings in so- 
 ciety. 
 It is the opinion of the new philosophers. 
 She does every thing most gracefully. 
 
 This st2iff sells at a guinea an ell. 
 This wine costs seventy pounds the pipe 
 
 Modèles de Phrases dans lesquelles Examples of Phrases in which the 
 on ne doit pas faire usage de V article. Article is omitted. 
 
 Nos connaissances doivent être tirées de 
 
 principes évidens, 
 Cet arbre porte d'excellens fruits. 
 Ces raisons sont de faibles conjectures. 
 Evitez tout ce qui a un air d'affectation. 
 
 Ces exemples peuvent servir de modèles, 
 
 Il a une grande présence d'esprit, 
 
 La mémoire de raison et d'esprit est plus 
 
 utile que les autres sortes de mémoire. 
 Peu de personnes réfléchissent sur la 
 
 rapidité de la vie, 
 Q,ue d'événemens inconcevables se sont 
 
 succédés les uns aux autres ! 
 Il y a plus d'esprit, mais moins de con-. 
 
 naissances, dans ce siècle que dans le 
 
 siècle dernier. 
 On ne vit jamais autant d'effronterie. 
 Je pris hier beauco«p de peine pour rien. 
 
 Oxir knoioledge ought to be derived from 
 
 evident principles. 
 This tree produces excellent fruit. 
 These reasons are idle conjectures. 
 Avoid whatever bears the appearance of 
 
 affectation. 
 These examples may serve as models. 
 He has great presence of mind. 
 The memory of reason and sense is mort 
 
 useful than any other land of mernort/ . 
 Few persons reflect on the rapidity cf life. 
 
 How many inconceivable events have fol 
 
 lowed in succession ! 
 There is more wit, but less knowledge, in 
 
 this age than the last. 
 
 Candie est une des îles 
 
 de la Méditerranée, 
 Il arrive de Perse, d'Italie, d'Espagne, &c 
 Il est revenu de Suisse, d'Allemagne, &c. 
 
 îiea vins de France seront chers cette 
 année les vignes ont coulé, 
 
 So much assurance never was met wirh. 
 
 I took a great deal of trouble yesteraay 
 about nothing. 
 plus agréables Candia is one of the most agreeable 
 islands in the Mediterranean. 
 
 He comes from Persia, Italy, Spain, ^c. 
 
 He is returned from Switzerland, Ger- 
 many, 8^c. 
 
 French wines will be dear this ycar^ the 
 vinen have besn bliirhted. 
 
290 
 
 PHRASES ON SOME DIFFICULTIES. 
 
 L'empire d'Allemagne est composé de The Qerman c^^pire is composed of great 
 
 grands et de petits états, and small states. 
 
 Les chevaux d'Angleterre sont excellens, English horses are excellent. 
 
 Après mon départ de Suisse, je me retirai After leaving Switzerland, I retired to 
 
 à Rome. Rome. 
 
 Continuation des mêmes Phrases. Continuation of the same Phrases. 
 
 Vous trouverez ce passage page 120, livre 
 premier, chapitre dix. 
 
 Il s'est retiré en Angleterre, 
 
 Il vit dans sa retraite en vrai philosophe, 
 
 Quand il réfléchit sur sa conduite, il en 
 eut honte, 
 
 C'est un homme qui cherche fortune, 
 
 Tl entend malice à tout. 
 
 Ne portez envie à personne, 
 
 Si vous promettez, tenez parole, 
 
 Dans les affaires importantes ne vous 
 décidez jamais sans prendre conseil. 
 
 Courage, soldats, tenons fermes ; la vic- 
 toire est à nous, 
 
 Cette femme n'a ni grâce ni beauté, 
 
 Monseigneur le duc de, &c. prince du sang, 
 alla hier à la campagne. 
 
 Montrer tant de faiblesse, c'est n'être pas 
 homme. 
 
 Cet homme est une espèce de misanthrope, 
 dont les brusqueries sont quelquefois 
 très-plaisantes. 
 
 L'ananas est une sorte de fruit très- 
 commun aux Antilles, 
 
 C'est un genre de vie qui ne me plaît point, 
 
 You will find this passage at page 120, 
 
 book the first, chapter the tenth. 
 He has retired to England. [pker 
 
 He lives in Ms retreat like a real philoso' 
 When he reflected on his conduct, he was 
 
 ashamed of it. 
 He is a man that seeks to make a fortune. 
 He puts a malicious construction on every 
 Envy nobody. [thing. 
 
 If you promise, keep your word. 
 In matters of consequence, never decide 
 
 without advice. 
 Cheer up, soldiers, let us continue firm ; 
 
 the day is our own. 
 This woman is destitute both of grace 
 
 and beauty. 
 The duke of, ^c. a prince of the blood, 
 
 went yesterday into the country. 
 To show so much weakness, is not acting 
 
 like a man. 
 This man is a kind of misanthropist, 
 
 whose oddities are sometimes comical. 
 
 The pine-apple is a kind of fruit very 
 
 common in the .Antilles. 
 Itis akindof lifethatis notagreeable tome 
 
 Continuation des mêmes Phrases. The same Sentences continued. 
 
 Cette dame plaît à tout le monde par son 
 
 honnêteté et sa douceur. 
 Tout homme a des défauts plus ou moins 
 
 sensibles, 
 Cette conduite augmentait chaque jour le 
 
 nombre de ses amis, 
 Tous les biens nous viennent de Dieu, 
 Venus était la déesse de la beauté, et la 
 
 mère de l'amour et des grâces. 
 Selon les païens, Jupiter était le premier 
 
 des dieux, 
 Apollon était frère jumeau de Diane, 
 Rubens a été un grand peintre, 
 Homère et Virgile sont les deux plus 
 
 grands poètes épiques, 
 Londres est la plus belle ville que je 
 
 connaisse. 
 L'eau de rivière est douce, et l'eau de 
 
 mer est salée, 
 C'est un excellent poisson de mer. 
 Voilà une superbe table de marbrp, 
 L'eau de Seine est celle qu'on préfère à 
 
 Paris, 
 Pauvreté n'est pas vice. 
 Citoyens, étrangers, grands, peuples, se 
 
 sont montrés sensibles à cette perte, 
 
 This lady pleases every one by her good 
 
 breeding and mildness. 
 Every one has defects, more or less 
 
 obvious. 
 This behaviour daily increased the num. 
 
 ber of his friends. 
 Every blessing comes from God. 
 Venus was the goddess of beauty, and the 
 
 mother of love and the graces, 
 .according to the heathens, Jupiter was 
 
 the first of the gods. 
 .Apollo was twin-brother to Diana. 
 Rubens was a great painter. 
 Homer and Virgil are the two greatest 
 
 epic poets. 
 London is the finest city that I know. 
 
 River-water is sweet, and sea-water is 
 
 salt. 
 It is an excellent sea-fish. 
 There is a superb marble table. 
 The water of the Seine is preferred at 
 
 Paris. 
 Poverty is not a vice. 
 Citizens, strangers, grandees, people, have 
 
 shown themselves sensible of this loss. 
 
 Modelés de Phrases sur le pronom 
 
 LE. 
 Est-ce là votre opinion ?— Ne doutez point 
 
 que ce ne la soit. 
 Sont ce là vos domestiques ?— Oui, ce les 
 
 sont. 
 Mesdames, êtes-vous les étrangères qu'on 
 
 m'a annoncées?— Oui, nous les sommes. 
 
 Fonns of Phrases upon the pronoua 
 
 LE. 
 Is that your opinion ? — Do not question it 
 
 Arc these your servants ?--Ycs, they are. 
 
 Ladies, are you the strangers that have 
 been announced to mt ? — Yes, ice are. 
 
PHRASES ON SOME DIFFICULTIES. 
 
 291 
 
 Madame, êtes-vous la malade pour la- 
 quelle on ra'a appelé ? — Oui, je la suis. 
 
 Madame, êtes-vous la mère de cet enfant ? 
 — Oui, je la suis. 
 
 Mesdames, êtes-vous contentes de cette 
 musique ?— Oui, nous le sommes. 
 
 Elle est malheureuse, et je crains bien, 
 qu'elle ne le soit toute la vie. 
 
 Madame, êtes-vous mère? — Oui, je le suis. 
 
 Madame, êtes-vous malade ?-Oui, je le suis. 
 
 Madame, depuis quel temps êtes-vous 
 mariée ? — Je le suis depuis un an, 
 
 y a-t-il long temps que vous êtes arrivée ? 
 —Je le suis depuis quinze jours, 
 
 Aristote croyait que le monde était de 
 toute éternité ; mais Platon ne le 
 croyait pas, 
 
 Quoique cette femme montre plus de fer- 
 meté que les autres, elle n'est pas pour 
 cela la moins affligée, 
 
 Cette femme a l'art de répandre des larmes 
 dans le temps même qu'elle est le moins 
 affligée. 
 
 JUadam, are you the sick person for whom 
 
 I have been called? — Yes, I am. 
 Madam, are you the mother of this child? 
 
 — Yes, I am. 
 
 Ladies, are you pleased with this mZLsic ? 
 
 — Yes, we are. 
 
 She is unhappy, and I much fear she will 
 continue so for life. 
 
 Madam, are you a mother? — Yes, Tarn. 
 
 Madam, are you sickl — Yes, I am. 
 
 Madam, how long have you been married? 
 — 4 year. 
 
 Is it long since you arrived? — j3 fort- 
 night. 
 
 .Aristotle believed the world to have been 
 from all eternity, but Plato did not. 
 
 Although this woman shojcs more resolu- 
 tion than the others, she is nevertheless 
 not the least afflicted. 
 
 This woman has the art of shedding tears 
 even when she is least afflicted. 
 
 J\Iodèles de phrases sur les diffê- 
 rentes règles du participe passé. 
 
 La nouvelle pièce a-t-elle été applaudie? 
 
 Vos parens y seront-ils arrivés à temps? 
 
 Elle s'est donné de belles robes. 
 
 Elles nous ont apporté de superbes œillets, 
 
 Cette ruse ne lui a pas réussi, 
 
 La vie tranquille que j'ai menée depuis 
 dix ans, a beaucoup contribué à me faire 
 oublier mes malheurs. 
 
 Les lettres, qui j'ai reçues, m'ont beau- 
 coup affligé, 
 
 due de peines vous vous êtes données ! 
 
 Quelle tâche vous vous êtes imposée ! 
 
 C'est une satire que j'ai retrouvée dans 
 mes papiers, 
 
 Les lettres qu'a écrites Pline le jeune, 
 quelque agréables qu'elles soient, se 
 ressentent néanmoins un peu de la dé- 
 cadence du goût parmi les Romains, 
 
 Je ne serais pas entré avec vous dans tous 
 ces détails de grammaire, si je ne les 
 avais crus nécessaires, 
 
 L'Egypte s'était rendue célèbre par la 
 sagesse de ses lois long-temps avant 
 que la Grèce sortit de la barbarie. 
 
 C'est unedesplusgrandes merveilles qu'on 
 ait vues, 
 
 L'homme de lettres, dont vous m'avez 
 parlé, a un goût exquis. 
 
 Vous avez très-bien instruit vos élèves, 
 
 Lucrèce s'est donné la mort, 
 
 La sécheresse qu'il y a eu au printemps a 
 
 fait périr tous les fruits, 
 le n'ai point réussi, malgré les mesures 
 que vous m'avez conseillé de prendre, 
 
 duelle aventure vous est-il arrivé ? 
 
 Cette femme s'est proposée pour modèle à 
 ses enfans. 
 
 Celte femme s'est proposé d'enseigner la 
 géographie et l'histoire à ses enfans. 
 
 Forms of Phrases upon the different 
 rules of the participle past. 
 
 Did the neio piece meet with applause? 
 
 Will your relations have arrived there in 
 
 She has given hersc/f fine gowns, [time? 
 
 They have brought us beautiful pinks. 
 
 He has not succeeded in this stratagem. 
 
 The quiet life I have led these ten years 
 has greatly contributed to make me 
 forget my misfortunes. 
 
 The letters I have received have afflicted 
 me greatly. [xjourself! 
 
 Wliat a deal of trouble you have given 
 
 What a task you have imposedon yourself/ 
 
 It is a satire that I have again met with 
 in my papers. 
 
 The letters which the younger Pliny has 
 written, however agreeable they may 
 be, savor nevertheless a little of the 
 decline of taste among the Romans. 
 
 I would not have entered into these gram- 
 matical details with you, had I not 
 thought them necessary. 
 
 Egypt had become celebrated for the wis- 
 dom of its laics long before Greece had 
 emerged from barbarism. 
 
 It is one of the greatest wonders that ha^ 
 ever been seen. 
 
 The man of letters you spoke to me of has 
 an excellent taste. 
 
 You haveinstructedyo7ir pupils extremely 
 
 Lvcretia killed herself. [well. 
 
 The dry weather loe had in the spring h^s 
 destroyed all the fruit. 
 
 I have not succeeded, noticithstanding the 
 
 steps you advised me to take. 
 What adventures have you met with? 
 
 Titis icoman proposed herself as a model 
 for her children. 
 
 This woman proposed to teach geography 
 and history to her children. 
 
 Modèles de Phrases S7ir les princi- Forms of Phrases upon the principal 
 
 paux rapports des modes et des temps. relations of moods and tenses. 
 
 Jo l'attendais depuia long-temps, quand il / had waited a long time for him, when 
 
 vint me joinfire, he came to me. ['"£■ 
 
 II 801 til au monicnl même quo j'entrais, He was going out at the time I was enter- 
 
292 
 
 PHRASES ON SOME DIFFICULTIES. 
 
 Je commençai s à avoir des craintes sur la 
 réussite de votre affaire, lorsque j'ai 
 reçu votre lettre, 
 
 Dès que j'eus fait quelques visites indis- 
 pensables, je rentrai chez moi, et je ne 
 sortis plus, 
 
 J'avais déjà tout préparé pour mon départ, 
 ' lorsque des affaires imprévues m'ont 
 forcé à le différer de quelques jours, 
 
 Vous étiez déjà sorti, quand je me pré- 
 sentai chez vous. 
 J'avais déjà livré à l'impression mon 
 
 ouvrage, lorsque vous me demandiez, 
 
 si je le donnerais bientôt au public. 
 Lorsque j'ai eu terminé mon affaire vous 
 
 avez commencé la vôtre. 
 Lorsque j'eus déjeuné je montai à cheval, 
 
 et je fus à Londres, 
 Lorsque j'aurai lu la nouvelle pièceje vous 
 
 dirai avec franchise ce que j'en pense. 
 Triez-vous à Rome si vous le pouviez? — 
 
 Oui, j'irais, 
 Auriez-vous consenti à ces coïKlitions, si 
 
 on vous les avait proposées? 
 Irez-vous demain à Londres, si vous le 
 
 pouvez ? — Oi!i , j'irai. 
 Il sera sûrement parti, si vous l'avez voulu, 
 Vous eussiez laissé échapper une occasion 
 
 si favorable, si l'on ne vous eût averti à 
 
 temps, 
 
 / teas heginning to he apprehensive cf 
 
 the success of your business when I 
 
 received your letter. 
 ^s soon as I had paid some indispensable 
 
 visits, I went home, and did not go out 
 
 afterwards. 
 I had already made every preparation for 
 
 my departure, when some unexpected 
 
 business occurred that obliged me to 
 
 defer it for some days. 
 You were already gone out when I called 
 
 upon you. 
 My work had been sent to be printed 
 
 when you asked me if I should soon 
 
 bring it out. 
 When my business was over, you began 
 
 yours. 
 When I had done breakfast, I got on 
 
 horseback, and went to London. 
 When T have read the new piece, I will 
 
 candidly give you my opinion of it. 
 Woidd you go to Rome if it were in your 
 
 power? — Yes, I would. 
 Would you have agreed to those terms, 
 
 had they been proposed to you ? 
 Shall you go to London to-morrow, if you 
 
 can? — Yes, 1 shall. [wished it. 
 
 He will certainly have set out, if you 
 You would have let so favorable an oppor- 
 tunity slip, had you not been warned in 
 
 time. 
 
 Continnation des mêmes Phrases. 
 On dit que vous partez aujourd'hui pour 
 
 Paris, 
 Tout le monde soutient que vous ac- 
 cepterez la place qu'on vous offre, 
 On soupçonne que vous aviez hier reçu 
 
 cette agréable nouvelle quand on vous 
 
 rencontra. 
 Beaucoup de vos amis croient que vous 
 
 partîtes hier pour la campagne. 
 Le bruit se répand que vous avez fait une 
 
 grosse perte. 
 J'apprends dans l'instant que vous fussiez 
 
 parti il y a trois jours, si des engage- 
 
 mens, que vous aviez contractés depuis 
 
 long-temps, ne vous avaient retenu, 
 N'est-il pas vrai que vous partiriez au- 
 jourd'hui, si vous le pouviez? 
 Est-il vrai que vous seriez parti depuis 
 
 long-temps pour la campagne, si votre 
 
 amour pour les arts ne vous avait retenu 
 
 à la ville ? 
 Je ne crois pas que vous partiez, quoique 
 
 tout le monde l'assure, 
 Je ne croyais pas qu'il fût si-tôt de retour. 
 Il a fallu qu'il ait eu affaire à bien des 
 
 personnes. 
 Je doute que votre ami fût venu à bout 
 
 de ses projets, s'il n'avait pas été forte- 
 ment protégé, 
 II n'est point d'homme, quelque mérite 
 
 qu'il ait, qui ne fût très-mortifié, s'il 
 
 savait tout ce qu'on pense de lui. 
 
 Vous ne vous persuadiez pas que les af- 
 faires pussent si mal tourner. 
 
 Modèles de Phrases sur la négative Forms of Phrases upon the negative 
 
 JVE. NE. 
 
 Il n'y a pas beaucoue d'argent chez ces There is not much money to be found 
 
 gens de lettres, among men cf letters. 
 
 The same Phrases continued 
 It is said that you set off to-day for Paris. 
 
 Every one maintains that you will accept 
 
 of the place that is offered to you. 
 It is suspected that you had received this 
 
 agreeable intelligence when you were 
 
 met yesterday. 
 Many of your friends believe that you set 
 
 out yesterday for the country. 
 There is a report that you have met with 
 
 a considerable loss. 
 I have this moment learned that you would 
 
 have set out three days since, had not 
 
 engagements which you had formed 
 
 long ago detained you. 
 Is it not true that you would set out to-day 
 
 if you could ? 
 Is it true that you would have set out for 
 
 the country long since, had not your 
 
 love for the arts detained you in town ? 
 
 I do not imagine that you will set out, 
 althotigh every body asserts it. 
 
 I did not believe he had gone back so soon. 
 
 He must have had business with a great 
 many persons. 
 
 I doubt that your friend would have suc- 
 ceeded in his plan, had he not been 
 strongly patronized. 
 
 There is not a man, whatever merit he 
 may possess, that would not be very 
 much mortified were he to know ever^ 
 thing that is thought of him. 
 
 Younever persuaded i/ovrselfthatmattera 
 could have taken so unfortunate a turn. 
 
PHRASES ON SOME DIFFICULTIES. 
 
 298 
 
 Il n'^ a point de ressource dans une per- 
 sonne qui n'a point d'esprit, 
 C'est' à tort que vous l'accusez de jouer, 
 
 je vous assure qu'il ne joue point, 
 Entrez dans le salon; vous pourrez lui 
 
 parler ; il rie joue pas. 
 Si pour avoir du bien, il en coûte à la 
 
 probité, je n'en veux point. 
 Rien n'est sûr avec les capricieux; vous 
 
 croyez être bien en faveur, point du " 
 
 lout ; l'instant de la plus belle humeur 
 
 est suivi de la plus fâcheuse. 
 Vous ne cessez de nous répéter les mêmes 
 
 choses. 
 Je n'aurais osé vous en parler le premier. 
 Malgré ses protections, il n'a pu réussir 
 
 dans ses projets. 
 Cet ouvrage serait fort bon, n'était pour 
 
 la négligence du style, 
 Y a-t-il quelqu'un dont elle ne médise. 
 J'ai pris tant de goût pour une vie retirée, 
 
 que je ne sors presque jamais. 
 Voilà ce qui s'est passé; n'en parlez à 
 
 personne, 
 Mon parti est pris ; ne m'en parlez plus. 
 N'employez aucun de ces moyens : ils sont 
 
 indignes de vous. 
 Rien n'est plus joli. 
 Je ne dis rien que je ne pense. 
 Je ne fais jamais d'excès que je n'en sois 
 
 incommodé, 
 
 TTiere are no resources tn a person with- 
 out sense. 
 
 Tou accuse him wrongfully of gaming ; 
 I assure you he never games. 
 
 00 into the room, you may speak to him / 
 he is not playing. 
 
 1 do not wish to make a fortune, if it can 
 only be done at the expense of honesty . 
 
 Nothing is certain with capricious people, 
 you think yourself in favor, by no 
 means; the moment of the best humor 
 is followed by that of the worst. 
 
 You are constantly repeating the same 
 thing to us. [speak to you of it. 
 
 /should not have dared to be the first to 
 
 With all his interest, he has not been able 
 to succeed in his plans. 
 
 This work would be very good, were it 
 not for the negligence of the style. 
 
 Is there any one she does not slander ? 
 
 I have acquired so great a taste for retire- 
 ment that I seldom go abroad. 
 
 This is what has passed ; do not speak of 
 it to any one. [of it. 
 
 My resolution is fixed ; talk to me no more 
 
 Do not employ any one of these measures; 
 they are unworthy of you. 
 
 J^othing is more beautiful. 
 
 I never speak Mit what [ think, 
 
 I never commit any excess without suffer- 
 ing by it. 
 
 Continuation des mêmes Phrases. Continuation of the same Phrases. 
 
 C'est un homme pour qui je n'ai ni amour, 
 ni estime. 
 
 Il n'est ni assez prudent ni assez éclairé. 
 
 Je vous assure que je ne le fréquente ni 
 ne le vois. 
 
 Ne faire que parcourir les différentes 
 branches des connaissances humaines 
 sans s'arrêter à aucune, c'est moins 
 chercher à s'i nstruire, qu'à tuer le temps, 
 
 Q.ue n'ètes-vous toujours aussi cumplai- 
 sarft? 
 
 Il ne le fera pas, à moins que vous ne l'y 
 , ' engagiez. 
 
 Il n'ira pas, si vous ne l'en priez. 
 
 Il nous a menacés de se venger; nous 
 n'avons fait qu'en rire. 
 
 Trop d'insouciance ne peut que nuire, 
 
 Que devenez- vous ? il y a trois mois que 
 nous ne vous avons vu? 
 
 Comment vousêtes-vous porté depuis que 
 nous ne vous avons vu ? 
 
 C'est bien pire qu'on ne le disait. 
 
 Feu s en faut que je n'aie donné tête 
 baissàe dans le piège. 
 
 Dites la vérité en toute occasion ; on mé- 
 prise toujours ceux qui parlent autre- 
 ment qu'ils ne pensent. 
 
 Ne désespérez pas que la vérité ne se fasse 
 jour à la longue, [ainsi. 
 
 Je ne disconviens pas que la chose ne soit 
 
 Prenez garde qu'on ne vous entraîne dans 
 quelque fausse démarche, 
 
 J"emp"cherai bien qu'on ne vous nuise 
 dans cette affaire, 
 ■ Il craint (ju'nii ne le soupçonne d'avoir 
 tretiii>f dans ce complot. 
 
 On lui a donné d'excellens conseils, de 
 crainte qu'il ne manquât l'occasion de 
 faire connaître ce qu'il est en état de 
 fajic. 2 
 
 He is a man for wlwfh I have netUter 
 love nor esteem. [lightened 
 
 He is neither sufficiently prudent nCr cn- 
 
 I assure you I neither associate vcith him 
 nor see him. 
 
 To go through the different branches of 
 human knowledge only, without fixing 
 upon any one of them, is not to seek for 
 instruction, but to kill time. 
 
 Why are you not at all times squally com- 
 plaisant ? 
 
 He will not do it unless yon ■persuade him 
 to it. [him. 
 
 He will not go, ifyoxi do not request it of 
 
 He has threatened us loith vengeance ; we 
 only laughed at him. 
 
 Too great S2ipine7iess cannot but be hurffuL 
 
 What had become of you ? we have not 
 seen you these three months. 
 
 How have you been since we saw you: 
 
 It IS much worse than was said. 
 
 I was near running headlong into th^ 
 
 snare. 
 Tell the truth on all occasions : those who 
 
 speak what they do not think are always 
 
 despised. 
 Do not despair that truth will appear in 
 
 time. 
 I admit that it is so. 
 Take care that you are not led into some 
 
 false step. 
 I shall prevent them from doing you any 
 
 harm in this busines;;. 
 He is apprehensive tkat he is suspected of 
 
 being concerned in tins plot. 
 They have given him excellent advice, lest 
 
 he should losethe nppcriunity of shotoing 
 
 what he was capable vf doing. 
 b2 
 
294 
 
 PHRASES ON SOME DIFFICULTIES 
 
 J'y ai long-temps travaillé ; je ne saurais 
 
 en venir à bout, 
 Vous feriez mieux de vous taire ; vous ne 
 
 savez ce que vous dites, [plaisir. 
 
 Vous ne sauriez me faire un plus grand 
 
 / have been long employea about it; 1 
 
 cannot accomplish it. 
 You had better be silent ; you do not knea 
 
 what you are saying. 
 You cannot do me a greater favor. 
 
 Phrases sur qxielqxies Délicatesses 
 
 de la Langue Française. 
 Irez-vous ce soir à l'opéra? — Oui, j'irai, ' 
 
 Iriez-vous avec plaisir à Rome? — Oui, 
 j'irais, 
 
 La justice qui nous est quelquefois refusée 
 par nos contemporains, la postérité sait 
 nous la rendre. 
 
 Cette grandeur qui vous étonne si fort, il 
 la doit à votre nonchalance. 
 
 Il périt, ce héros, si cher à son pays, 
 
 Je l'avais bien prévu que ce haut degré de 
 grandeur serait la cause de sa ruine, 
 
 Citoyensjétrangers, ennemis, peuples,rois, 
 empereurs, le plaignent et le révèrent, 
 
 L'assembIJe finie, chacun se retira chez 
 soi. 
 
 Heureux le peuple qu'un sage roi gouverne, 
 
 11 refusa les plus grands honneurs, content 
 de les mériter. 
 
 Prières, remontrances, commandemens, 
 tout est inutile, 
 
 Le vent renverse tours, cabanes, palais, 
 •t'giises, 
 
 Notre réputation ne dépend pas du caprice 
 des hommes ; mais elle dépend des ac- 
 tions louables que nous fesons, 
 
 11 y a beaucoup de choses qu'il n'importe 
 point du tout de savoir, 
 
 La vue de Tesprit a plus d'étendue que la 
 vue du corps, 
 
 Ce qui sert n la vanité, n'est que vanité. 
 
 Tout ce qui n'a que le monde pour fonde- 
 ment, se dissipe et s'évanouit avec le 
 monde, 
 
 Cest le privilège des grands hommes de 
 vaincre ren% ie ; le mérite la fait naître, 
 le mérite la fait mourir. 
 
 L'amour-propre est plus habile que le plus 
 habile honmie du monde, 
 
 En quittant le monde, on ne quitte le plus 
 souvent ni les erreurs, ni les folles pas- 
 sions du monde. 
 
 Phrases on some Delicacies of the 
 French Language. 
 
 Shall you go to the opera this evening? — 
 
 Yes, I shall. 
 Would you cheerfully go to Rome? — Yes, 
 
 I would. 
 Posterity knows how to do us that justice 
 
 which is sometimes refused us by our 
 
 contemporaries. 
 That greatness which so much astonishes 
 
 you, he owes to your indifference. 
 That hero, so dear to his country, perished. 
 I foresaw that the greatness of his eleva- 
 tion would be his ruin. 
 Citizens, strangers, enemies, nations, 
 
 kings, emperors, pity and respect him. 
 The assembly being over, each returned 
 
 home. [by a wise king. 
 
 Happy are the people who are governed 
 He refused the greatest honors, satisfied 
 
 with having deserved them. 
 Entreaties, remonstrances, injunctions, 
 
 are all useless. 
 The wind overturns towers, cottages, pa- 
 laces, churches. 
 Our reputation does not depend on the 
 
 caprice of men, but on the commendablt 
 
 actions we perform. 
 There are many things which it is of no 
 
 consequence at all to know. 
 The eye of the mind reaches much farther 
 
 tham. the bodily eye. 
 What promotes vanity is only vanity. 
 All that is confined to this lower world 
 
 disperses and vanishes with the world. 
 
 It is the prerogative of great men to con- 
 
 quer envy ; merit gives it birth*and 
 
 merit destroys it. 
 Self-love is more ingenious than the most 
 
 ingenious man in the world. 
 In renouncing the world, we generally 
 
 renounce neither the errors nor giddy 
 
 passions of the world. 
 
 THE END- 
 
OP VERBS. 
 
 Of Verbs. 
 
 1 A verb is a word which expresses what is affiruied of 
 persons, animals, things, etc. 
 
 2. Or^ as it is more commonly defined, a verb is a word, or 
 that part of speech which signifies to do, to be, or to suffer. 
 
 3. When we say John is polite, we affirm that the quaUty polite, be- 
 longs to John. When we say John is not polite, we also affirm tliat the 
 quahty polite, does not belong to John — in both sentences, the word is, 
 which expresses thg-t affirmation, is a verb. 
 
 Of the different sorts of French Verbs. 
 
 4. There are in French seven sorts of verbs : — the auxiliary 
 verb — the active verb — the neuter verb — the passive verb — the 
 reflected verb — the reciprocal verb — and the unipersonal, or 
 impersonal verb. 
 
 Of Auxiliary Verbs. 
 
 5- A verb is auxiliary when it serves to conjugate some of 
 the tenses of other verbs. 
 
 6. In French there are but two auxiliary verbs, Avoir to have, 
 and Etre to be. 
 
 7. Avoir, is sometimes an auxiliary verb, and sometimes an irregular 
 active verb oTthe third conjugation. 
 
 8. Avoir to have, is an auxiliary verb whenever it is used to conjugate 
 the compound tenses of another verb, as : vous avez parlé you have spoken, 
 <fec. When auxiliary, it is always followed by the participle past of some 
 other verb. 
 
 9. Avoir to have, is an active verb, whenever it is used to indicate the 
 possession of any thing — as, vous avez une pomme you have an apple, &c. 
 
 10. Avoir to have, is used as an auxiliary verb — 1st, to all the active 
 verbs, and 2d, to upward of six hundred neuter verbs. 
 
 11. Eire to be, is sometimes an auxiliary verb and sometimes an 
 irregular neuter verb of the fourth conjugation. It is also called substan- 
 tive verb. 
 
 12. Etre to be, is an auxiliary verb, whenever it is used to conjugate 
 tlie compound tenses of another verb — as, Je suis frappé I am struck, &c. 
 When auxiliary it is always followed by the participle past of some 
 other verb. 
 
 13. Eire to be, is a neuter verb whenever it is used to indicate the 
 state of any person or thing — as, je suis ici I am here — cette table est 
 ronde this table is roimd, Sec. 
 
 14. Eire to be, is used as an auxiUary verb — 1st, To a few neuter verbs, 
 the list of which may be found in page 160. — 2d, To all the passive verbs — 
 und 3d, To all the reflected and re'^iprocal verbs, although these two last 
 kinds of verbs are conjugated vvith to have in English 
 
'i OF ACTIVE, XEUTER, AND PASSIVE VERBS. 
 
 Of Active Verbs. 
 
 15. A verb is active in French when it expresses that an 
 agent called nominative, or subject, performs an action on an 
 object, or regimen, without the help of a preposition — as, Jean 
 frappe Joseph John strikes Joseph, &c. 
 
 Of Neuter Verbs. 
 
 16. A verb is neuter in French — 1st, When it expresses that 
 an agent called nominative, or subject, performs an action, that 
 either is, or can be directed towards an object or regimen, with 
 the help of a preposition — as, Jean parle à Joseph John speaks 
 to Joseph. 2d, When it expresses the state, situation, or man- 
 ner of being, or existing, of the nominative or subject — as, 
 je dors I sleep — J'ean est ici John is here, &c. 
 
 J 7. Note — The words active and neuter, applied to verbs, do not mean 
 that an active verb expresses action, and that a neuter verb expresses 
 inaction. For chanter to sing-, which is an active verb, does not express 
 so much action as courir to rim, which is a neuter verb. It means that 
 the verbs called active, are those after which une personne a person — or 
 une chose a thing ; can be put as an object or regimen, without a prepo- 
 sition — as, frapper une personne to strike a person — -frapper une chose to 
 strike a thing; whereas the verbs called neuter, are those after which 
 une personne a person — or une chose a thing; cannot be put as an object 
 or regimen without a preposition, being either expressed or understood — 
 as, courir à une personne to run to a person; in English the preposition is 
 often understood — as, to run an hour meaning to run during an hour. Some 
 neuter verbs, those that express the state of the nominative, or subject, 
 admit of no object or regimen, either with or without a preposition — as, 
 je dors I sleep — je suis I am. The best division of verbs, I think, is that 
 of Mr. Noah Webster, in his Dictionary, who divides them into transitive 
 and intransitive ; but I could not for the French adopt this division, which 
 would connise the pupil, whose French Dictionary would not be on thai 
 plan. 
 
 Of Passive Verbs. 
 
 18. A verb is passive in French, when it indicates that the 
 nominative, or subject, bears the effect of another's action — as, 
 Jean fut prappé par Joseph John was struck by Joseph — Jean 
 fut tué par une balle John was killed by a ball. 
 
 19. The passive verbs in French, as in English, are formed with the 
 help of the different tenses and persons of the auxiliary verb. Etre to be ; 
 to which is joined the participle past, of the verb to be conjugated — as, je 
 suis frappé I am struck — il sera vendu it will be sold, &c. 
 
 20. All the French active verbs may be employed in the passive voice, 
 except avoir to have. 
 
OP REFLECTED AND RECIPROCAL VERBS, OiC. 3 
 
 21. In French the passive voice of verbs is but very seldom used, we 
 g'enerally make use of the active voice ; for instance, instead of saying- Jean 
 fut frappé par Joseph John was struck by Joseph — we woukl more readily 
 say, Joseph frappa Jean Joseph struck John, &c. 
 
 22. Properly speaking, there are no passive verbs in French ; for être 
 frappé to be struck — je suis frappé I am struck ; is no more a passive verb 
 than être malade to be sick — -je suis malade I am sick, &c. 
 
 Of Refected Verbs. 
 
 23. A verb is refected when it expresses an action wliich 
 falls on the nominative, or subject — as, je me fatte I flatten 
 myself, &;c. 
 
 Of Reciprocal Verbs. 
 '. 24. A verb is reciprocal when it expresses that two or more 
 nominatives, or subjects act upon each other — as, Jean et Joseph 
 s'aiment John and Joseph love one another — Jean, Joseph, et 
 Paul s'aiment John, Joseph, and Paul love each other, &;c. 
 
 Of Unipersonal or Impersonal Verbs. 
 25. A verb is unipersonal or impersonal when it expresses 
 what happens — as, il pleut it rains — il arriva it happened, à;c. 
 
 . 26. They are called by some unipersonal, because they are only used 
 in one person ; the third person singular. 
 
 27. They are called by others impersonal, because the acts indicated by 
 them, are attributed to no person. 
 
 Division of the Verbs. 
 
 28. The above seven different sorts of verbs, are divided into 
 regular, and irregular, perfect, and defective verbs. 
 
 Of Regular Ve7^bs. 
 
 29. Regular Verbs are those whose tenses are conjugated 
 in a uniform manner, according to some general standard. 
 
 Of Irregular Verbs. 
 
 30. Irregular Verbs are those which deviate, in the conjuga- 
 tion of their tenses, from the general standard, given for the 
 conjugation of regular verbs. 
 
 Of Perfect Verbs. 
 
 31. Perfect Verbs have all their moods, tenses, and persons. 
 
 Of Defective Verbs. 
 
 32. Defective Verbs are those which want some of their 
 moods, tenses, or persons. 
 
4 OF MOODS AND TENSES. 
 
 Conjugation of Verbs. 
 
 83. To conjugate a verb, is to write or rehearse it, with all 
 its different inflections, through every mood, tense, number, and 
 person. 
 
 Of Moods. 
 
 34. Mood, signifies manner. We call moods the different 
 manners of using a verb, in order to express the different ways 
 in which an action is performed, or suffered. 
 
 35. A verb may be used in French in five different man- 
 ners, namely, in an indefinite, positive, conditional, imperative, 
 and subordinate manner ; which constitute five moods in verbs, 
 called the infinitive mood, the indicative mood, the conditional 
 mood, the imperative mood, and the subjunctive mood. 
 
 36. The Infinitive mood, is so called, because it expresses 
 an action in an indefinite manner, without any reference to 
 number or person — as, chanter to sing — punir to punish. 
 
 37. The Indicative mood, affirms in a direct, positive, and 
 absolute manner, that a thing is or is not, without depending 
 on any other word, whatever may be the time to which the 
 affirmative relates — as, je connais ces dames I know these 
 .ladies — j''ai vu ces dames I have seen these ladies — je ne 
 porterai pas ce livre I will not carry this book, &c. 
 
 38. The Conditional mood, denotes that a thing or an action 
 would take place, or would have taken place, depending on a 
 condition — as,je vous rendrais service si je le pouvais I would 
 render you service if I could — je vous aurais rendu service si 
 je Vavais pu I would have rendered you service if I had been 
 able, &;c. 
 
 39. The Imperative mood, is used for either commanding, 
 exhorting, entreating, or permitting — as, venez ici come here — 
 faites cela do that — permettez-moi de sortir allow me to go 
 out, &c. 
 
 40. The Subjunctive mood, represents a person or a thing, 
 under a condition, motive, wish, or supposition, and is depen- 
 dant on a conjunction — as, Je souhaite qii'il vienne I wish {thai) 
 he may come, &;c. In English the conjunction is often un- 
 derstood. 
 
 Of Tenses. 
 
 41. Tenses indicate whether an action, is doing, has been 
 done, or will be done : hence three 'tenses, the present, the 
 
NAMES AND NUMBER OF TENSES. 
 
 5 
 
 past, and the future. These tenses have been subdivided, to 
 mark their difference with accuracy. 
 
 42. The tenses of verbs are divided into simple and com- 
 pound. 
 
 43. Simple tenses are those which are conjugated without 
 the help of either the auxiliary, Avoir to have, or Etre to be. 
 
 44. Compound tenses, (which have also other names, which 
 indicate more clearly their use,) are those which are formed 
 with the help of either the auxiliary. Amir to have, or Eire 
 to be ; to which the past participle of the verb to be conjugated, 
 is joined. 
 
 Names and Number of Tenses in each Mood. 
 
 45. Tile Infinitive mood has five tenses ; 
 The present, {which is the root of the verb,) 
 The past or perfect, (or compound of the present,) 
 The participle present or active. 
 
 The compound of the participle present, and 
 The participle past or passive. 
 
 46. The Indicative mood has eight tenses ; 
 The present, 
 
 The perfect or preterit indefinite, {or compound of the present,) 
 
 The imperfect. 
 
 The pluperfect, {or compound of the imperfect,) 
 
 The preterit definite, 
 
 The preterit anterior, {or compound of the preterit definite^ 
 
 Tlie future absolute, and 
 
 The future anterior, {or compound ofthefutU7'e absolute.) 
 
 47. The Conditional mood has two tenses ; 
 The present, and 
 
 The past, {or cojnpound of the presents) 
 
 43. The Imperative mood has but one tense, which is at 
 once present and future. Present with respect to the action 
 of commanding, and future with respect to the thing enjoined. 
 
 49. Ttie Subjunctive mood has four tenses ; 
 The present or future, 
 
 The preterit or past, {or compound of the present,) 
 The imperfect, and 
 The pluperfect, {or compound of the imperfect.) 
 
6 OF NUMBEKS AND PERSONS. 
 
 Of Numbers. 
 
 50. Number, is the form which verbs assume, to denote 
 their agreement with their nominatives. 
 
 51. There are hoo numbers in every tense : the singular, 
 which is employed when only one thing, or one person is men- 
 tioned- — as, la maison tombe the house is falling — Joseph parle 
 Joseph speaks. And the plural^ which is employed when 
 more than one thing, or more than one person are mentioned — 
 as, les maisons tombent the houses are falling— Joseph et Jean 
 parlent Joseph and John speak. 
 
 Of Persons. 
 
 52. Each number has three persons. 
 
 First Person. 
 
 53. The first person is i\\Q person ivho spealîs, or the persons 
 who speak; it is designated by^e I, in the singular — as, Je pense 
 I think • and by nous we, in the" plural — as, nous pensons we 
 think. - 
 
 Second Person. 
 
 54. The second person is the person spoken to, or the per- 
 sons spoken to ; it is expressed by tu thou, for the singular — as, 
 tu penses thou thinkest ; and by vous you, for the plural — as, 
 vous pensez you think. 
 
 55. When in speaking to one person, we wish to be polite and respectflil ; 
 custom has established in modern languages tliat the second person plural 
 be used instead of the second person singular : thus, for instance, a persgn 
 speaking to Mr. A..., instead of saying tu es ici thou art here — will say 
 vous êtes ici you are here ; as he would if he was speaking to several 
 persons « 
 
 56. When one person only is spoken to, if an adjective comes after the 
 verb, that adjective is put in the singular, although, through politeness and 
 custom, the verb be in the plural : thus in speaking to Mr. A..., I shall say 
 vous êtes fort you are strong — whereas in speaking to several persons, the 
 adjective will be in the plural ; speaking to Messrs A... and B..., I shall say 
 vovs êtes forts you are» strong. 
 
 57. Wher* in addressing ourselves to a person, politeness or respect 
 induces us to use a dignifying expression, instead of a personal pronoun 
 of the second person, the verb as well as what relates to that expression, 
 is 'put in the tViird person : for instance, instead of saying Monsieur 
 avez-vous eu la bonté de penser à ce que vous nCavez promis, we say 
 Monsieur a-t-il eu la honte de penser à ce quHl m''a promis 1 Have you 
 been so kind. Sir, as to think of what you promised me? The literal 
 translation of the Frencli is : Sir has he had the goodness to think to 
 what he has promised me. 
 
OF THE DIFFERENT WAYS OF CONJUGATING VERBS. 7 
 
 Third Person, 
 
 53. The third person, is the person spolcen of ox the persons 
 spoken of ; it is expressed by il he or it ; or elle she or it, for the 
 singular, or by any noun in the singular — as, il parle he speaks 
 — elle parle she speaks — Vhomme parle man speaks. And by 
 ils they — elles they, or any noun in the plural — as, ils parlent 
 they speak — elles parlent they speak — les hommes parlent 
 men speak. 
 
 Different Ways of Conjugating Verbs* 
 
 59. There are four ways of conjugating verbs : — 1st, Aff,r- 
 matively ; 2à, Negatively ; Zd^ Interrogatively ; 4th, Nega- 
 tively and Interrogatively, 
 
 First Way. 
 
 60. Affirmatively. When verbs are preceded by their nomi- 
 natives or subjects, and used without any negation, they are said 
 to be conjugated affirmatively — as, je parle I speak — tu parles 
 thou speakest, &c. 
 
 Second Way. 
 
 61. Negatively. Verbs are conjugated we^a^zî^eZ?/, by placing 
 ne immediately after the nominativ-e or subject of the verb ; 
 and pas after the verb, in simple tenses — as, je ne parle pas 
 I speak not, &c. In compound tenses, ne is placed as in the 
 simple tenses, after ths nominative or subject of the verb ; 
 but pas is placed between the auxiliary and the participle past, 
 of the verb — as, je n'ai pas parlé I have not spoken. Ne and pas 
 are generally placed together, before the infinitive present — as, 
 ne pas parler not to speak ; however a few writers place ne before 
 the infinitive present, and pas after ; neparler pas not to speak. 
 
 Third Way. 
 
 62. Interrogatively. Verbs are conjugated interrogatively 
 in French, by placing the pronoun, which is the nominative 
 or subject of the verb, after the verb, in simple tenses ; the 
 pronoun must be joined to the verb by a hy|)]ien — as, parlé-je 
 do I speak — parles-tu dost thou speak — parle-t-il does he 
 speak, &;c. In compound tenses, the pronoun must be placed 
 after the auxiliary, that is, between the auxiliary and the par- 
 ticiple past of the verb ; the pronoun must also be jomed to 
 the auxiliary by a hyphen — as, ai-je parlé have I spoken-^ 
 as tu parlé hast thou spoken — a-t-il parlé has he spoken, &c. 
 
 2 C 
 
8 OF THE DIFFERENT WAYS OF CONJUGATING VERBS. 
 
 63. When a noun instead of a personal pronoun is the nomi- 
 native of the verb, in the interrogative sentence, this noun, 
 subject of the question, is placed before the verb; and either of 
 the pronouns il, elle, ils, or elles, according to the gender and 
 number of the noun, is added and placed after the verb in 
 simple tenses, joined to it by à hyphen ; and in compound 
 tenses, after the auxiliary, joiijed to it by a hyphen. 
 
 Example in Simple Tenses. 
 Mon frère sait-il ? My brother knows he ? 
 
 Meaning Does my brother know ? 
 
 Example in Compound Tenses. 
 
 Mes frères avaient-ils chanté ? My brothers had they sung ? 
 Meaning Had my brothers sung ? 
 
 Observations. 
 
 64. 1st, The first person of the present of tlie indicative mood, ending 
 with e mute, (see page 44 ,) in all the verbs of the first conjugation, and 
 in about fifleen of the irregular verbs of the second, we are obliged, 
 to avoid a disagreeable sound, to put an acute accent on the e mute, when 
 used interrogatively — as, je parle I speak— pa rZé-^'e do I speak — f ouvre 
 I open — ouvré-je do I open, &c. 
 
 65. 2d, When the first person singular of the present of the indicative, 
 of any verb, has only one syllable, we cannot use it interrogatively ; thus, 
 we cannot say, vends-je do I sell — prends-je do I take, &c. We have 
 recourse to a different expression, we say, est-ce que je vends do I sell — 
 est-ce que je prends do I take, &c. The only exceptions that custom 
 authorises — a.Te,fais-je do I do — dis-je do I say — dois-je do I owe — vois-je 
 do I see — ai-je have I — and vais-je do I go. 
 
 66. 3d, V/hen the third person singular of any tense, ends with c or a, 
 we are obliged, to avoid a disagreeable sound, to put a t between two 
 hyphens : thus, -t-, between tlie verb and the pronoun, il or elle — as, a-t-il 
 has he — a-t-elle has she — parle-t-il does he speak — parle-t-elle does she 
 «peak, &c. 
 
 67. 4th, The imperative mood, and the subjunctive mood, cannot be 
 used interrogatively ; we however, can say, in tlie present of the subjunc- 
 tive, puissé-je may I ; and in the imperfect of the subjimctive, dussé-je 
 were I obliged to. 
 
 Fourth Way. 
 
 68. Negatively and Interrogatively. Verbs are conjugated 
 negatively and interrogatively, in French, by placing in simple 
 tenses ne before the verb, the subject or nominative pronoun, 
 after the verb, joined to it by a hyphen, and pas after the 
 pronoun — as, ne parlé-je pas ? do I not speak ? &;c. And in 
 compound tenses, by placing ne before the verb, the subject or 
 nominative pronoun, after the auxiliary ; and pas after the pro- 
 noun ; then comes the participle past of the verb, to be conjuga- 
 ted, which comes last, n'ai-je pas parlé ? have T not spoken ? &c. 
 
OP THE CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERBS. 9 
 
 69. When a noun instead of a personal pronoun, is the nomi- 
 native of the verb, in a sentence both negative and interroga- 
 tive, this noun, subject of the question, is placed before the 
 verb, and either of the pronouns, il, elle, ils, or elles, is added, 
 and placed after the verb in simple tenses, joined to it by a 
 hyphen ; and in compound tenses, after the auxiliary, joined 
 to it by a hyphen. 
 
 Example in Simple Tenses. 
 
 Ma sœur ne sait-elle pas ? My sister knows she not ? 
 
 Meaning Does not my sister know ? 
 
 Example in Compound Tenses. 
 
 ^^'' lYJ^J''''''''''^-^^^'' P""' I My sisters had they not sung? 
 Meaning Had not my sisters sung ? 
 
 70. The four observations made with regard to the conjugation of verbs 
 interrogatively, apply also to verbs conjugated both negatively and inter- 
 rogatively. 
 
 Conjugation of the Auxiliary Verbs. 
 
 71. The auxiliary verbs avoir to have, and être to be, being 
 used in the formation of the compound tenses of all the other 
 verbs, it will be proper to begin by their conjugation. 
 
 72. Avoir to have, is employed as an auxiliary, to conjugate 
 its own compound tenses — so that any compound tenses of 
 avoir to have, is one of its simple tensos, to which tJie participle 
 past has been added ; thus the preterit indefinite, (or compound 
 of the present,) is formed with the present indicative,^ 'ai I have, 
 to which the participle past, eu had, is added — fai eu I have 
 had — tu as eu thou hast had, &c.; and so on of the other com- 
 pound tenses. 
 
 73 The compound tenses of être to be, are formed with the 
 help of avoir to have, so that any compound tense of être to be, 
 is composed of a simple tense of avoir to have, to which the 
 participle past of être to be, is added ; thus the preterit indefi- 
 nite, {or compound of the present,) is formed with the present 
 indicative, j'ai I have, 6î avoir to have, to which the participle 
 past, été been, of être to be, is added ; fai été I have been — 
 tu as été thou hast been, &c.; and so on, of the other compound 
 tenses. 
 
 74. Observe that the terminations of the imperfects, and of the con- 
 ditionals, which are now generally spelt «is, ais, ait, aient, in all verbs, 
 were formerly, and are still now, by a few writers, spelt ois, ois, oit, oient. 
 Both ways are pronounced alike, but the new spelling is nearer tlie pro- 
 nunciation than the old one. 
 
10 
 
 AVOIR 
 
 to have. 
 
 'ami. âne. te. écrit, mère. «tre. idole, g^te. opéra, ôter. ioul, vwîte. 
 2î/. arm. tub. «le. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over, too, fool. 
 
 tCONJUG ATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERB, 
 
 Avoir to have. {Affirmatively, ) 
 
 avoir 
 
 -B- 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 to have 
 
 PAST or PERFECT, 
 or compound of ike present. 
 
 to have had 
 
 PARTICIPLE PRESENT Or ACTIVE. 
 
 having 
 
 avoir eu 
 
 -c- 
 
 ayant 
 
 -D- COMPOUND OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 
 
 ayant eu having had 
 
 -E- PARTICIPLf: PAST or PERFECT Or PASSIVE. 
 
 eu, m. s. eue,/, s. eus, m.p. eues,/, p. had 
 
 INDlCATmE îilOOD. 
 
 avoir 
 
 a voi ra 
 é yan 
 é yan tu 
 u 
 
 J'ai 
 tu as 
 lia 
 
 / have 
 thou hast 
 he has 
 
 tu a 
 ila 
 
 nous avons 
 
 u-e have 
 
 nou za van 
 
 vous avez 
 ils ont 
 
 you have 
 they have 
 
 vcu za vé 
 il zon 
 
 -G- PERFECT or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 
 or compound of the present. 
 
 J'ai eu / have hcd 
 tu as eu tliou hast had 
 il a eu he has had 
 
 jeu 
 tua zu 
 i la u 
 
 nous avons eu 
 vous avez eu 
 ils ont eu 
 
 we have had 
 you have had 
 they have had 
 
 nou za von zu 
 vou za vé zu 
 il zon tu 
 
 -H- 
 
 J'avais 
 tu avais 
 il avait 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 1 had 
 thëu hadst 
 he had 
 
 ja vè 
 tu a vè 
 i la vè 
 
 nous avions 
 
 we had 
 
 uou za vi on 
 
 vous aviez 
 ils avaient 
 
 you had 
 they had 
 
 -vou za vi é 
 il za vè 
 
 -I- PLUPERFECT, 
 
 or compotind of the imperfect. 
 
 J'avais eu I had had 
 
 tu avais eu thou hadst had 
 
 Il avait eu he had had 
 
 ja vè zu 
 tu a vé zu 
 i la vè tu 
 
 nous avions eu 
 
 ice had had 
 
 nou za vi on za 
 
 vous aviez eu 
 ils avaient eu 
 
 you had had 
 they had had 
 Î See page 1, an. 7. 
 
 vou za vi é zu 
 il za Y^ tu 
 
AVOIR 
 
 to have. 
 
 11 
 
 ^mwr. mwr. jeune, jeûne, boite, boztc. ancre, ingrat, onde, wn, aintN. 
 *j, as s in pleasure. gUy as ni in umon, ill, as lli, in ^Yillium, 
 
 -J- 
 
 PRETERIT DEFINITE. 
 
 
 J'eus 
 
 Ihad 
 
 j^ 
 
 tu eus 
 
 thou hadst 
 
 tu u 
 
 il eut 
 
 he had 
 
 ilu 
 
 nous eûmes 
 
 we had 
 
 nou zum 
 
 vous eûtes 
 
 you had 
 
 vou zut 
 
 ils eurent 
 
 they had 
 
 il zur 
 
 -K- 
 
 PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
 
 
 or compound of the preterit. 
 
 
 J'eus eu 
 
 Ihad had 
 
 ju zu 
 
 tu eus eu 
 
 thou hadst had 
 
 tu u zu 
 
 il eut eu 
 
 he had had 
 
 i lu tu 
 
 nous eûmes eu we had had 
 
 nou zura zu 
 
 vous eûtes eu 
 
 you had had 
 
 vou zut zu 
 
 ils eurent eu 
 
 they had had 
 
 il zur tu 
 
 -L- 
 
 FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 
 J'aurai 
 
 I shall or 7vill have 
 
 jo ré 
 
 tu auras 
 
 thou shall or wilt hav^ 
 
 tu o râ 
 
 il aura 
 
 he shall or will have 
 
 i lo ra 
 
 nous aurons 
 
 we shall or 7mll have 
 
 nou zo ron 
 
 vous aurez 
 
 you shall or will have 
 
 vou zo ré 
 
 ils auront 
 
 they shall or will have 
 
 il zo ron 
 
 -M- FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
 
 or compound of the future. 
 
 J'aurai eu I shall or will have had jo ré u 
 
 tu auras eu thou shall or wilt have had tu o râ zu 
 
 il aura eu he shall or will have had i lo ra u 
 
 nous aurons eu we shall or will have had nou zo ron zu 
 
 vous aurez eu you shall or will have had vou zo ré zu 
 
 ils auront eu they shall or will have had il zo ron tu 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 J 'aurais 
 tu aurais 
 il aurait 
 nous aurions 
 vous auriez 
 ils auraient 
 
 / should, would, could^ 
 
 or might have 
 
 thou shouldst, woiddst, 
 
 couldst, or mighfst have 
 he should, would, could, 
 , or might have 
 we should, would, aoidd, 
 or might have 
 you should, would, could, 
 or might have 
 they should, would, could, 
 or might have 
 2 c 3 
 
 jo re 
 tu o rè 
 i lo re 
 nou zo ri on 
 ^rou zo ri é 
 il zo rè 
 
12 
 
 AVOIR 
 
 to have. 
 
 'ami. one. te. écrit, mère, être, îdole. gîte, opéra, ôter. tout, voûte. 
 2a^ arm. tub. ale. mare. th/=re. zdiom. eel. opera, over. too. fool. 
 
 ^y- 
 
 -o- 
 
 J'aurais eu, 
 or J'eusse eu 
 tu aurais eu, 
 or tu eusses eu 
 il aurait eu, 
 or il eût eu 
 nous aurions eu, 
 or 710US eussions eu 
 vous auriez eu, 
 or vo'us eussiez eu 
 ils auraient eu, 
 or ils eussent eu 
 
 -p- 
 
 aie 
 qu''il ait 
 
 ayons 
 
 ayez 
 qu'ils aient 
 
 PAST, 
 
 or compound of the present. 
 
 I shnuld-) would^ could^ 
 
 or might have had 
 thou shouldst, wouldst, 
 couldst, or mightst have had 
 he should, would, could, 
 
 or might have fiad 
 we should, would, could, 
 
 or migJit have had 
 you should, would, could, 
 
 or mi.ghi have had 
 they, should, would, could, 
 or jnisht have had 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 have (thou) 
 let hi77i have 
 let us have 
 have (you) 
 let them have 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 -a- 
 
 Que j'aie 
 que tu aies 
 qu'il ait 
 que nous ayons 
 que vous ayez 
 qu'ils aient 
 
 -R- 
 
 Qne j'aie eu 
 
 que tu aies eu 
 
 qu'il ait eu 
 
 que nous ayons eu 
 
 que vous ayez eu 
 
 qu'ils aient eu 
 
 -s- 
 
 Que j'eusse 
 
 que tu eusses 
 
 qu'il eût 
 
 que no'as eussions 
 
 que vous eussiez 
 
 qu'ils eussent 
 
 •T- 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 that I may have 
 
 that thou mayst have 
 
 that he may have 
 
 that ice may have 
 
 that you may have 
 
 that they may have 
 
 PRETERIT or PAST, 
 or compound of the pregent. 
 
 that I may have had 
 that thou mayst have had 
 that he may have had 
 that ue may have had 
 that you may Jtave had 
 that they may have had 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 that I might have 
 that thou mightst have 
 that he might have 
 that we might have 
 that you might have 
 thai they might have 
 
 PLUPERFECT, 
 
 or compound of tke imperfect 
 
 QxiB j'eusse eu 
 que tu eusses eu 
 qu'il eût eu 
 que nous eussions eu 
 que vous eussiez eu 
 qu'ils eussent eu 
 
 that I might have had 
 that thou mightst have had 
 that he might have had 
 that ice might have had 
 that you might have had 
 that they might have had 
 
 jo re zu 
 jus u 
 tu o rè zu 
 tu us su 
 i lo rè tu 
 i lu tu 
 
 nou zo ri on zq 
 nou zu si on su 
 vou zo ri é zu 
 vou zu si é zu 
 il zo rè tu 
 il zus tu 
 
 e 
 
 kilè 
 é yon 
 é yé 
 kilzè 
 
 ke je 
 
 ke tu è 
 
 kilè 
 
 ke nou zé yon 
 
 ke vou zé yé 
 
 kilzè 
 
 ke je u 
 
 ke tu è zu 
 
 ki le tu 
 
 ke nou zéyon zu 
 
 ke vou zé yé zu 
 
 kil zè tu 
 
 ke jus 
 
 ke tu us 
 
 ki lu 
 
 ke nou zu si on 
 
 ke vou zu si é 
 
 kil zus 
 
 ke JUS u 
 
 ke lu us zu 
 
 ki lu tu 
 
 ke nou zu si on zu 
 
 ke vou zu SI é zu 
 
 kil zus lu 
 
AVOIR 
 
 to have 
 
 13 
 
 Smwr. mûr. jeune, jetine. boite, bofte. ancre. ingraX. onde. un. anieN. 
 ''j, as 5 in pleasure. gTi, as ni in union, ill., as Ui, in WitVtain. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERB. 
 
 Avoir to have (Negatively.) 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 ne pas avoir 
 
 -B- 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 not to have 
 
 PAST or PERFECT, 
 
 or comjiound of the present. 
 
 n'avoir pas eu not to have had 
 
 -C- PARTICIPLE PRESENT Or ACTIVE. 
 
 n'ayant pas yiot having 
 
 -D- COMPOUND OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 
 
 n'ayant pas eu having not had 
 
 ne pâ za voir 
 
 na voir pâ zu 
 né yvt.n pâ 
 né yan pâ zu 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Je n'ai pas 
 
 tu n'as pas 
 
 il n'a pas 
 
 nous n'avons pas 
 
 vous n'avez pas 
 
 ils n'ont pas 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 / have not 
 thou hast not 
 he has not 
 we have not 
 you have not 
 they have not 
 
 PERFECT or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 
 or compound of the present. 
 
 Je n'ai pas eu 
 tu n'as pas eu 
 il n'a pas eu 
 nous n'avons pas eu 
 vous n'avez pas eu 
 ils n'ont pas eu 
 
 / have not had 
 thou hast hot had 
 he has not had 
 we have not had 
 you have not had 
 they have not had 
 
 -H- 
 
 Je n'avais pas 
 tu n'avais pas 
 il n'avait pas 
 nous n'avions pas 
 vous n'aviez pas 
 ils n'avaient pas 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 / had not 
 thou hadst not 
 he had not 
 we had not 
 you had not 
 they had not 
 
 PLUPERFECT, 
 or compound of the imperfect. 
 
 Je n'avais pas eu 
 tu n'avais pas eu 
 il n'avait pas eu 
 nous n'avions pas eu 
 vous n'aviez pas eu 
 ils n'avaient pas eu 
 
 / had not had 
 thou hadst not had 
 he had not had 
 we had not had 
 you had not had 
 they had not had 
 
 je né pâ 
 tu nâ pâ 
 il na pâ 
 nou na von pâ 
 vou na vé pâ 
 il non pâ 
 
 je né pâ zu 
 tu nâ pâ zu 
 il na pâ zu 
 nou na von pàzu 
 vou na vé pâ zu 
 il non pâ zu 
 
 je na vè pâ 
 tu na vè pâ 
 il na vè pâ 
 nou na vi on pâ 
 vou na vie pâ 
 il na vè pâ 
 
 je na vè pâ zu 
 lu na vè pâ zu 
 il na vè pâ zu 
 nounavionpâ zu 
 vou na vi é pâ zu 
 il na vè pâ zu 
 
14 
 
 AVOIR 
 
 to have. 
 
 'ami. tzne. te. écrit, mère. être, idole, gîte, opéra, ôter. tout, \ovie, 
 "^at, arm., tuh. aie. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over, too, fool. 
 
 Je n'eus pas 
 tu n'eus pas 
 il n'eut pas 
 nous n'eûmes pas 
 vous n'eûtes pas 
 ils n'eurent pas 
 
 PRETERIT DEFINITE. 
 
 / had not 
 thou hadst not 
 he had not 
 we had not 
 you had not 
 they had not 
 
 je nu pâ 
 tu nu pâ 
 il nu pâ 
 nou num pâ 
 vou nut pâ 
 il nur pâ 
 
 PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
 or compound of the preterit. 
 
 Je n'eus pas eu 
 tu n'eus pas eu 
 il n'eut pas eu 
 nous n'eûmes pas eu 
 vous n'eûtes pas eu 
 ils n'eurent pas eu 
 
 / had not had 
 thou hadst not had 
 he had not had 
 we had not had 
 you had not had 
 they had not had 
 
 je nu pa zu 
 tu nu pâ zu 
 il nu pâ zu 
 nou num pâ zu 
 vou nut pâ zu 
 il nur pâ zu 
 
 Je n'aurai pas 
 tu n'auras pas 
 il n'aura pas 
 nous n'aurons pas 
 vous n'aurez pas 
 ils n'auront pas 
 
 FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 I shall or will not have 
 thou shall or icilt not have 
 he shall or icill not have 
 we shall or will not have 
 you shall or will not have 
 they shall or will not have 
 
 je no ré pâ 
 tu no râ pâ 
 il no ra pâ 
 nou no ron pâ 
 vou no ré pâ 
 il no ron pâ 
 
 -M- FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
 
 or compound of the future. 
 
 Je n'aurai pas eu 
 tu n'auras pas eu 
 il n'aura pas eu 
 nous n'aurons pas eu 
 vous n'aurez pas eu 
 ils n'auront pas eu 
 
 / shall or icill not have had 
 thou shall or wilt not have had 
 he shall or will not have had 
 we shall or will not have had 
 you shall or will not have had 
 they shall or will not have had 
 
 je no re pa zu 
 tu no râ pâ zu 
 il no ra pâ zu 
 nou no ron pâ zu 
 vou no ré pâ zu 
 il no ron pâ zu 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 Je n'aurais pas 
 tu n'aurais pas 
 il n'aurait pas 
 nous n'aurions pas 
 vous n'auriez pas 
 Us n'auraient pas 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 / should, would, could, 
 or might not have 
 thou shouldst, wouldst, 
 
 couldst, or mightst not have 
 he should, would, could, 
 
 or might not have 
 we should, would, could, 
 
 or might not have 
 you should, would, could, 
 
 or might not have 
 they should, would, could, , 
 or might not have 
 
 je no rè pâ 
 tu no rè pâ 
 il no rè pâ 
 nou no ri on pâ 
 vou no ri é pà 
 il no rè pâ 
 
AVOIR 
 
 to have. 
 
 15 
 
 ^muT mûr. ']eune. jcwne. boite, boite, ancre, ingrat, onde, un, ameN. 
 ■•i. as s in pleasure, gn, as ni in union, ilî^ as /Zi, in WiZZiam- 
 
 ^j,as 
 
 -o- 
 
 PAST, 
 or compound of the present. 
 
 Je n'aurais pas eu, / should, ivould, could, je no rè pâ zu 
 
 or^e n^ensse pas e\i or might not have had je nus pâ su 
 
 tu n'aurais pas eu, thou shouldst, luouldsi, couldst, tu no rè pâ zu 
 
 or tu n'^eussespas eu 
 il n'aurait pas eu, 
 or il nexit pas eu 
 nous n'aurions pas eu, 
 or yiousn'' eussions pas eu 
 
 or mightst not have had 
 
 he should, would, could, 
 
 or might not have had 
 
 we should, loould, could, 
 
 or mis:ht not have had 
 
 vous n'auriez pas eu, you should, would, could, 
 
 or vous n^eussiezpas eu or might not have had 
 
 they should, would could, 
 
 or might not have had 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 have not (thou) 
 let him not have 
 let us not have 
 have not (you) 
 let them not have 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 that I may 
 that thou mayst 
 that he may 
 that we may 
 that you may 
 that they may 
 
 lis n'auraient pas eu, 
 or ils n'eussent pas eu 
 
 -p- 
 
 n'aie pas 
 qu'il n'ait pas 
 
 n'ayons pas 
 n'ayez pas 
 qu'ils n'aient pas 
 
 -a- 
 
 Que je n'aie pas 
 que tu n'aies pas 
 qu'il n'ait pas 
 que nous n'ayons pas 
 que vous n'ayez pas 
 qu'ils n'aient pas 
 
 tu nus pa su 
 il no rè pâ zu 
 il nu pâ su 
 nou no ri on pâ zu 
 nou nu si on pâ zu 
 vou no ri é pâ zu 
 vou nu si épâ zu 
 il no rè pâ zu 
 il nus pâ su 
 
 nepa 
 kil ne pâ 
 né y on pâ 
 né yé pâ 
 kil ne pâ 
 
 kej ne pâ 
 
 ke tu ne pâ 
 
 kil ne pâ 
 
 ke nou né yon pâ 
 
 ke vou né yé pâ 
 
 kil ne pâ 
 
 PRETERIT or PAST, 
 or compound of the present, 
 
 that I may 
 that thou mayst 
 that he may 
 that we may 
 that you may 
 that they may 
 
 Que je n'aie pas eu 
 que tu n'aies pas eu 
 qu'il n'ait pas eu 
 que nous n'ayons pas eu 
 que vous n'ayez pas eu 
 qu'ils n'aient pas eu 
 
 -s- IMPERFECT. 
 
 Que je n'eusse pas that I might 
 
 que tu n'eusses pas 
 
 qu'il n"eût pas 
 
 que nous n'eussions pas 
 
 que vous n'eussiez pas 
 
 qu'ils n'eussent pas 
 
 -T- 
 
 ^ kej ne pâ zu 
 
 S. ke tu ne pâ zu 
 , >' kil ne pâ zu 
 ^ g ke nou né yon pâ z« 
 
 g- ke vou né yé pâ zu 
 
 »- kil ne pâ zu 
 
 that thou mightst I 
 that he might i 2. 
 that we might f ^ 
 that you might | ^ 
 that they might J 
 
 "] kej nus pâ 
 
 ke tu nus pâ 
 kil nu pâ 
 
 ke nou nu si on pâ 
 ke vou nu si é pâ 
 kil nus pâ 
 
 PLUPERFECT, 
 
 or compound of the imperfect. 
 
 Que je n'eusse pas eu that I might "] 
 
 que tu n'eusses pas eu that thoumightst j 
 qu'il n'eût pas eu that he might 1 
 
 que nous n'eussions pas eu thaï we might 
 que vous n'eussiez pas eu that you might 
 qu'ils n'eussent pas eu that they might 
 
 j3 kej nus pâ zu 
 
 2. ke tu nus pâ zu 
 
 g- kil nu pâ zu 
 
 g ke nou nu si on pâ zia 
 
 >• ke vou nu si é pâ zu 
 
 A, kil nus pâ zu 
 
16 
 
 to have. 
 
 %mi. âne. te. écrit, mère. être, zdole. gîte, opéra, ôter. iout, yoûxe. 
 ^at. arm. twb. aie. mare, there. îdioin. eel. opera, over. too. fool. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERB. 
 
 Avoir to have. (Interrogatively.) 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 -F- 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 
 Ai-je 
 
 have I 
 
 éj 
 
 as-tu 
 
 hast thou 
 
 âtu 
 
 a-t-il 
 
 has he 
 
 a til 
 
 avons-nous 
 
 have tve 
 
 a von nou 
 
 avez-vous 
 
 have you 
 
 a vé vou 
 
 ont-ils 
 
 have they 
 
 on til 
 
 -G- PERFECT or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 
 
 
 
 or compound of the present. 
 
 
 Ai-je eu 
 
 have I had 
 
 éju 
 
 as-tu eu 
 
 hast thou had 
 
 â tuu 
 
 a-t-il eu 
 
 has he had 
 
 a til u 
 
 avons-nous eu 
 
 have ice had 
 
 a von nou zu 
 
 avez-vous eu 
 
 have you had 
 
 a vé vou zu 
 
 ont-ils eu 
 
 have they had 
 
 on til zu 
 
 -H- 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 
 Avais-je 
 
 hadl 
 
 a vej 
 
 avais-tu 
 
 hadst thou 
 
 a ve tu 
 
 avait-il 
 
 had he 
 
 a ve til 
 
 avions-nous 
 
 had we 
 
 a vi on nou 
 
 aviez-vous 
 
 had you 
 
 a vi é vou 
 
 avaient-ils 
 
 had they 
 
 a ve til 
 
 -I- 
 
 PLUPE1FECT, 
 
 
 or compound of the imperfect. 
 
 
 Avais-je eu 
 
 had I had 
 
 a vej u 
 
 avais-tu eu 
 
 hadst thou had 
 
 a ve tu u 
 
 avait-il eu 
 
 had he had 
 
 a ve til u 
 
 avions-nous eu 
 
 had ïve had 
 
 a vi on nou zu 
 
 aviez-vous eu 
 
 had you had 
 
 a vi é vou zu 
 
 .avaient-ils eu 
 
 had they had 
 
 a ve til zu 
 
 -J- 
 
 PRETERIT DEFINITE. 
 
 
 Eus-je 
 
 hadl 
 
 "J 
 
 eus-tu 
 
 hadst thou 
 
 u tu 
 
 eut-ii 
 
 had he 
 
 util 
 
 eiimes-nous 
 
 had we 
 
 um nou 
 
 eiitea-vous 
 
 had you 
 
 . ut vou 
 
 eurent-ils 
 
 haa they 
 
 ur til 
 
AVOIR 
 
 to have 
 
 ^muT. vaux, jcwne. jeiine. boite, boîte, ancre, ingrat, onde, un, aineN, 
 ''j, as s in pleasure, g-n, as ni in union, ill, as IIU in WiZ/taiîv 
 
 -K- 
 
 PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
 or compound of the preterit. 
 
 
 Eus-je eu 
 
 had I had 
 
 uj u 
 
 eus-tu eu 
 
 hadst thou had 
 
 u tu u 
 
 eut-il eu 
 
 had he had 
 
 u ti lu 
 
 eûmes-nous eu 
 
 had we had 
 
 um nou zu 
 
 eûtes-vous eu 
 
 had you had 
 
 ut vou zu 
 
 eurent-ils eu 
 
 had they had 
 
 ur til zu 
 
 -L- 
 
 FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 
 Aurai-je 
 
 shall or will I have 
 
 o réj 
 
 auras-tu 
 
 shall or will thou have 
 
 o râ tu 
 
 aura-t-il 
 
 shall or will he have 
 
 o ra til 
 
 aurons-nous 
 
 shall or will we have 
 
 o ron nou 
 
 aurez-vous 
 
 shall or will you have 
 
 o ré vou 
 
 auront-ils 
 
 shall or will they ha.ve 
 
 o ron til 
 
 -M- 
 
 FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
 or compound of the fn ture. 
 
 
 Aurai-je eu 
 
 shall or will I have had 
 
 o réj u 
 
 auras-tu eu 
 
 shall or wilt thou have had 
 
 o râ tu u 
 
 aura-t-il eu 
 
 shall or will he have had 
 
 o ra til u 
 
 aurons-nous eu 
 
 shall or will we have had 
 
 o ron no a zu 
 
 aurez-vous eu 
 
 shall or will you have had 
 
 o ré vou zu 
 
 auront-ils eu 
 
 shall or will they have had 
 
 o ron til zu 
 
 Aurais-je 
 
 aurait-il 
 
 aurions-nous 
 
 auriez-vous 
 
 auraient-ils 
 
 -o- 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 should, would, could, 
 
 or might I have 
 shouldst, wouldsl, couldst, 
 
 or mightst thou have 
 should, would, could, 
 
 or might he have 
 should, would, could, 
 
 or migld we have 
 should, would, could, 
 
 or might you have 
 should, would, could, 
 
 or might they have 
 
 PAST, 
 or compound of the present. 
 
 Aurais-je eu, 
 or eussé-je eu 
 aurais-tu eu, 
 or eusses-tu eu 
 aurait-il eu, 
 or eût-il eu 
 aurions-nous eu, 
 or eussion.i-nous eu 
 auriez-vous eu, 
 or eussiez-vous eu 
 auraient-ils eu, 
 or eussent -ils ei/ 
 
 should, would, could^ 
 
 or might I have had 
 shouldsi, wouldsl, couldst, 
 
 or miglitsl thou have had 
 should, would, could, 
 
 or might he have had 
 should, would, could, 
 
 or might we have had 
 should, would, could, 
 
 or might you have had 
 should, would, could, 
 
 or might they have had 
 
 o rej 
 o re tu 
 o rè til 
 o ri on nou 
 o ri é vou 
 o rè til 
 
 o rej u 
 u séj u 
 o rè tu u 
 us tu u 
 o rè til eu 
 u ti lu 
 
 o ri on nou zu 
 u si on nou zu 
 one vou zu 
 u si é vou zu 
 o rè til zu 
 us til eu 
 
18 
 
 AVOIR 
 
 to have. 
 
 •ami. âne. te. ^crit. mère. être, idole, gzte. opéra, ôter. towt. voj/te 
 "^ai, arm. tub. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERB. 
 
 Avoir to have (Negatively and Interrogatively.) 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 N'ai-je pas 
 n'as-tu pas 
 n'a-t-il pas 
 n'avons-nous pas 
 n'avez-vous pas 
 n'ont-ils pas 
 
 have I not 
 hast thou not 
 has he not 
 have we not 
 have you not 
 have they not 
 
 nej pa 
 nâ tu pâ 
 na til pâ 
 na von nou pâ 
 na vé vou pâ 
 non til pâ 
 
 PERFECT or PRETERIT IxN'DEFINITE, 
 or compound of the present. 
 
 N'ai je pas eu 
 n'as-tu pas eu 
 n'a-t-il pas eu 
 n'avons-nous pas eu 
 n'avez-vous pas eu 
 n'ont-ils pas eu 
 
 have I not had 
 hast thou not had 
 has he not had 
 have we not had 
 have you not had 
 have they not had 
 
 nej pâ zu 
 nâ tu pâ zu 
 na til pâ zu 
 na von nou pâ zu 
 na vé vou i)à zu 
 non til pâ zu 
 
 N'avais-je pas 
 n'avais-tu pas 
 n'avait-il pas 
 n 'avions-nous pas 
 n'aviez-vous pas 
 n'avaient-ils pas 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 had I not 
 hadst thou not 
 had he not 
 had we not 
 had you not 
 had they not 
 
 na vej pâ 
 na vè tu pâ 
 na vè til pâ 
 na vi on nou p 
 na vie vou pâ 
 na vè til pâ 
 
 PLUPERFECT, 
 or compound of the imperfect. 
 
 N'avais-je pas eu 
 n'avais-tu pas eu 
 n'avait-il pas eu 
 n'avions-nous pas eu 
 n'aviez-vous pas eu 
 n'avaient-ils pas eu 
 
 had I not had 
 hadst thou not had 
 had he not had 
 had we not had 
 had you not had 
 had they not had 
 
 na vej pa zu 
 na vè lu pâ zu 
 na vè til pâ zu 
 navionnoupâ zu 
 na vi é vou pâ zu 
 na vè til pâ zu 
 
 N'eus-je pas 
 n'eus-tu pas 
 n'eut-il pas 
 u'eiimes-nous pas 
 n'eûtes-vous pas 
 n'eurent-ils pas 
 
 PREIERIT DEFINITE. 
 
 had I not 
 hadst thou noi 
 had he not 
 had toe not 
 had you not 
 had they not 
 
 nuj pf 
 nu tu pâ 
 nu til pâ 
 num nou pâ 
 nut vou pa 
 nur til pa 
 
AVOIR 
 
 to have. 
 
 m 
 
 ^mur. mtîr. jewne. jeûne, boite, boite, ancre, ingrat, onde, wn, aiacN. 
 ^j, as s in pleasure, gn, as ni in union, ill, as lli, in Willi blvo.. 
 
 PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
 or compound of the preterit. 
 
 N'eus-je pas eu 
 n'eus-tu pas eu 
 n'eut-il pas eu 
 n'eûraes-nous pas eu 
 n'eûtes-vous pas eu 
 n'eurent-ils pas eu 
 
 -L- 
 
 N'aurai-je pas 
 n'auras-tu pas 
 n'aura-t-il pas 
 n'aurons-nous pas 
 n'aurez-vous pas 
 n'auront-ils pas 
 
 -M- 
 
 had I not had 
 hadst thou not had 
 had he not had 
 had we not had 
 had you not had 
 had they not had 
 
 FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 shall or will I not have 
 shalt or icilt thou not have 
 shall or will he not have 
 shall or will we not have 
 shall or will you not have 
 shall or will they not have 
 
 FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
 
 or compound of tke future. 
 N'aurai-je pas eu shall or tvill I not have had 
 
 shalt or wilt thou not have had 
 shall or will he not have had 
 shall or will we not have had 
 shall or will you not have had 
 shall or will they not have had 
 
 n'auras-tu pas eu 
 n'aura-t-il pas eu 
 n'aurons-nous pas eu 
 n'aurez-vous pas eu 
 n'auront-ils pas eu 
 
 nuj pâ zu 
 nu tu pâ zu 
 nu til pâ zu 
 num nou pâ zu 
 nut vou pâ zu 
 nur til pâ zu 
 
 no réj pâ 
 no râ tu pâ 
 no ra til pâ 
 no ron nou pâ 
 no ré vou pâ 
 no ron til pâ 
 
 no réj pâ zu 
 no râ tu pâ zu 
 no ra til pâ zu 
 no ron nou pâ zu 
 no ré vou pâ zu 
 no ron tii pâ zu 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 should, would, could, 
 or might I not have 
 shouldst, wouldst, couldst, 
 or mightst thou not have 
 should, would, could, 
 
 or might he not have 
 should, îcould, could, 
 
 or might we not have 
 should, would, could, 
 
 or might you not have 
 should, would, could, 
 or might they not have 
 
 -O- PAST, 
 
 or compound of tke present. 
 N'aurais-je pas eu, should, would, could, 
 
 or might I not have had 
 shouldst, wouldst, couldst, 
 
 or mightst thou not have had 
 should, would, could, 
 or might he not have had 
 n'aurions-nous pas eu, should, would, could, 
 or n^eussions-nou^ pas eu or might we not have had 
 n'auriez-vous pas eu, should, would, could, 
 or n'ev^siez-vous pas eu or might you not have had 
 n'auraient-ils pas eu, should, would could, 
 or n'ev^sent-ils pas eu or might they not have had 
 2 D 
 
 N'aurais-je pas 
 n'aurais-tu pas 
 n'aurait-il pas 
 n'aurions-nous pas 
 n'auriez-vous pas 
 n'auraient-ils pas 
 
 or n eusse-jepas eu 
 n'aurais-tu pas eu, 
 or n'' eusses-tu pas eu 
 n'aurait il pas eu, 
 or n''eût-il pas eu 
 
 no rèj pâ 
 no rè tu pâ 
 no rè til pâ 
 no ri on nou pâ 
 no ri é vou pâ 
 no rè til pâ 
 
 no rêj pâ zu 
 nu séj pâ zu 
 no rè tu pâ zu 
 nus tu pâ su 
 no rè tu pâ zu 
 nu til pâ su 
 no ri on nou pâ zu 
 nu si on noupâ zu 
 no ri é vou pâ 
 nu si é vou pâ zu 
 no rè til pâ zu 
 nus tu pâ zu 
 
20 
 
 Y AVOIR 
 
 there to be. 
 
 'ami. âne. te. écrit, mere. être, idole, gîte, opéra, ôter. ioui. wuvXn. 
 ^at. arra. tub. aie. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE UNIPERSONAL VERB, 
 Y AVOIR there to he (Affirmatively.) 
 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 
 -A- 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 
 Y avoir 
 
 there to be 
 
 I avoir 
 
 -B- 
 
 PAST or PERFECT, 
 
 or compound of the present. 
 
 
 Y avoir eu 
 
 there to have been 
 
 1 a vol ru 
 
 -c- 
 
 PARTICIPLE PRESENT Or ACTIVE. 
 
 
 Y ayant 
 
 there being 
 
 i éyan 
 
 -D- 
 
 COMPOUND OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 
 
 
 Y ayant eu 
 
 there having been 
 
 i é yan tu 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 there is or there are il ya 
 
 PERFECT or IRETERIT INDEFINITE» 
 or compound of the present. 
 
 there has been or there have been il ya u 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 there was or there were il ya vô 
 
 PLUPERFECT, 
 or compound of the imperfect. 
 
 there had been il ya vè tu 
 
 PRETERIT DEFINITE. 
 
 there was or there were il yu 
 
 PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
 or compound of the preterit, 
 
 there had been il yu tu 
 
 FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 there vyill be il yo ra 
 
 FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
 or compound of the future. 
 
 there will have been il yo ra u 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 there would be il yo re 
 
 PAST, 
 
 er compontid of the present. 
 
 there would have been il yo rè tu 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 that there may be kil yo 
 
 PRETERIT or PAST, 
 or compound of the presenL 
 that there may have been kil yè tu 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 that there might be kil yu . 
 
 PLUPERFECT, 
 or compound of the imperfect. 
 Qu'il y eût eu that there might have been kil yu tu 
 
 Il y a 
 -o- 
 
 II y a eu 
 
 -H- 
 
 II y avait 
 -I- 
 
 D y avait eu 
 
 -j- 
 
 II y eut 
 
 Il y eut eu 
 
 -L- 
 
 II y aura 
 
 -M- 
 
 11 y aura eu 
 
 -N- 
 
 H y aurait 
 -o- 
 
 n y aurait eu 
 
 -Q- 
 Qu'il y ait 
 
 -R- 
 
 Qu'ilyait eu 
 
 -s- 
 
 Qu'il y eût 
 
 -T- 
 
y AVOIR there to he 21 
 
 *nmr. mûr. jewne. jeûne, bo/te. boîte, ancre, ingrat, onde. un. ameN. 
 ''j, as s in pleasure, gn, as ni in union, ill^ as //i, in Wi/ttam. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE UNIPERSONAL VERB. 
 
 Y AVOIR there to be (Negatively.) 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 -A- PRESENT. 
 
 Ne pas y avoir not there to be ne pa zi a voir 
 
 -B- PAST or PERFECT, 
 
 or compound of the present. 
 Ne pas y avoir eu not there to have been ne pâ zi a voi ru 
 
 -C- PARTICIPLE PRESENT Or ACTIVE, 
 
 N'y ayant pas there not being ni é yan pâ 
 
 -D- COMPOUND OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT 
 
 N'y ayant pas eu there not having been ni é yan pâ zu 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 -F- PRESENT, 
 
 II n'y a pas there is not or there are not il gna pâ 
 
 -G- PERFECT or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 
 
 or compound of the present- 
 
 T, , there has not been ., 
 
 ■^ ^ or there have not been ^ " 
 
 -H- IMPERFECT. 
 
 11 n'y avait pas there was not or there were not il gna vè pâ 
 
 -I- PLUPERFECT, 
 
 er compound of the imperfect. 
 II n'y avait pas eu there had not been il gna vè pâ zu 
 
 -J- PRETERIT DEFINITE. 
 
 II n'y eut pas there xvas not or there were not il gnu pâ 
 
 -K- PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
 
 or compoxind of the preterit. 
 
 II n'y eut pas eu there had not been il gnu pâ iu 
 
 -L- FUTURE ABSOLUTE, 
 
 II n'y aura pas there icill not be il gno ra pâ 
 
 -M- FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
 
 or compound of the futvrc. 
 
 II n'y aura pas eu there will not have been il gno ra pâ zu 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 -N- PRESENT. 
 
 11 n'y aurait pas there would not be il gno rè pâ 
 
 -O- PAST, 
 
 or compound of the present. 
 
 II n'y aurait pas eu there would not have been il gno rè pâ zu 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 -a- PRESENT, 
 
 Qu'il n'y ait pas that there mai/ not be kil gnè zu 
 
 -R- PRETERIT Or PAST, 
 
 or compound of the present, 
 
 Qu'il n''y ait pas eu thai there may not have been kil gnè pâ zu 
 
 -s- IMPERFECT. 
 
 Qu'il n'y eût pas that there might not be kil gnu pâ 
 
 -T- PLUPERFECT, 
 
 or compound of the imperfect. 
 
 Qu'il r.'y eût pas eu that there might not have been kil gnu pâ zu 
 
22 Y AVOIR there to be. 
 
 'ami. âne. te. écrit, mère. être, tdole. gzte. opéra, ôter. tout, voûte, 
 ^at. arm. t7.tb. cle. mare, there, zdiom. eel. opera, over. too. fool. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE UNIPERSONAL VERB. 
 
 y AVOIR there to be (Interrogatively,) 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 N 
 
 -F- PRESENT. 
 
 Y a-t-il is there or are there ya til 
 
 -G- PERFECT or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 
 
 or covipoutid of thepresetit. 
 
 Y a-t-il eu has there been or have there been ya ti lu 
 
 -H- IMPERFECT. 
 
 Y avait-il was there or were there ya ve til 
 
 -I- PLUPERFECT, 
 
 or compound of the imperfect. 
 
 Y avait-il eu 
 
 had there been 
 
 ya ve ti lu 
 
 -J- 
 
 PRETERIT DEFINITE. 
 
 
 Y eut-il 
 
 ivas there or were there 
 
 yu til 
 
 -K- 
 
 PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
 or compound of the preterit. 
 
 - 
 
 Y eut-il eu 
 
 had there been 
 
 yu ti lu 
 
 -L- 
 
 FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 
 Y aura-t-il 
 
 will there be 
 
 yo ra til 
 
 -M- FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
 
 or compound of the future. 
 
 Y aura-t-il eu will there have been yo ra ti lu 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 -N- ■ PRESENT. 
 
 Y aurait-il would there be yo rè til 
 
 -O- PAST . 
 
 or cçtnpcund of the present. 
 
 Y aurait-ii eu would there have been yo rè ti ks 
 
Y AVOIR there to be 23 
 
 ^mur. mûr. jeune, jetme. boite, bo/tc. ancre, mgrat. otiàc. un. aracN 
 ■^j, as s in pleasure, gn, as ni in union, t//, as //?, in Wi//iam. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE UNIPERSONAL VERB. 
 
 V AVOIR there to he (Negatively and Interrogatively.) 
 
 INDICATU^ MOOD. 
 
 F- PRESENT. 
 
 N'y a-t-il pas is there not or are there not gna til pa 
 
 -G- PERFECT or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 
 
 or compound of the present. 
 
 N'y a-t-il pas eu has there not been gna til pa zu 
 
 or have there not been 
 
 -H- IMPERFECT. 
 
 N'y avait-il pas was there not or were there not gna vè til pa 
 
 -1- PLUPERFECT, 
 
 or compound of the imperfect. 
 N'y avait-il pas eu had Iherenot been gna vè til pâzu 
 
 -J- PRETERIT DEFINITE. 
 
 N'y eut-il pas was therenot or were there not gnu til pâ 
 
 -K- PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
 
 or compound of the preterit. 
 N'y eut-il pas eu had there not been gnu til pâ zu 
 
 -L- FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 N'y aura-t-il pas will there not be gno ra til pâ 
 
 -M- FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
 
 or compound of the future. 
 N'y aura-t-il pas eu will there not have been gno ra til pâ zu 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 -N- PRESENT. 
 
 N'y aurait-il pas would there not be gno re til pâ 
 
 -O- PAST, 
 
 or compound of the present. 
 
 N'y aurait-il pas eu wovJd there not have been gno tp. i\\ pâ zu 
 
 ■<•• ij ^ 
 
ETRE 
 
 to be. 
 
 •ami. âne. te. écrit, mère. être, idole, gzte. opéra, ôter. towt. voûte, 
 ^at. arm. tub. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 
 
 tCONJUBATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERB. 
 
 Être to be (Affirmatively.) 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 être 
 
 PRESENT^ 
 
 to be 
 
 PAST or PERFECT, 
 or compound of the preseii 
 
 ê tre 
 
 avoir été 
 
 to have been 
 
 a vio re te 
 
 -c- 
 
 PARTICIPLE PRESENT OT ACTIVE. 
 
 
 étant 
 
 being 
 
 é tan 
 
 -D- COMrOUND OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESEN-, 
 
 
 ayant été 
 
 having been 
 
 é yan té té - 
 
 -E- PARTICIPLE PAST OR PERFECT OR PASSIVE 
 
 
 été 
 
 been 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 été 
 
 -F- 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 
 Je suis 
 
 lam 
 
 je su i 
 
 ta es 
 
 thou art 
 
 tuè 
 
 y est 
 
 he is 
 
 ilè 
 
 nous sommes 
 
 tve are 
 
 nou sora 
 
 vous êtes 
 
 you are 
 
 vou zét 
 
 ils sont 
 
 they are 
 
 il son 
 
 -G- PERFECT or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 
 
 
 or compound of the present. 
 
 
 J'ai été 
 
 I have been 
 
 je é té 
 
 tu as été 
 
 thou hast been 
 
 tu â zé té 
 
 il a été 
 
 he has been 
 
 i la é té 
 
 nous avons été 
 
 toe have been 
 
 nou za von zé té 
 
 vous avez été 
 
 you have been 
 
 vou za vé zé té 
 
 ils ont été 
 
 they have been 
 
 il zon té té 
 
 -H- 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 
 J' étais 
 
 I was 
 
 jétè 
 
 tu étais 
 
 thou least 
 
 tu été 
 
 il était 
 
 he ivas 
 
 il été 
 
 ttous étions 
 
 we ivere 
 
 nou zé ti on 
 
 vous étiez 
 
 you were 
 
 vou zé ti é 
 
 ils étaient 
 
 they were 
 
 il zé tè 
 
 -1- 
 
 PLUPERFECT, 
 
 
 or 
 
 compound of the imperfect. 
 
 
 J'avais été 
 
 1 had been 
 
 ja vè zé té 
 
 tu avais été 
 
 thou hadst been 
 
 tu a vè zé té 
 
 il avait été 
 
 he had been 
 
 i la vè té té 
 
 nous avions été 
 
 we had been 
 
 nou za vi on zé té 
 
 vous aviez été 
 
 you had been 
 
 vou za vi é zé té 
 
 ils avaient été 
 
 they had been 
 
 a za vè té té 
 
ÊTRE 
 
 to be. 
 
 25 
 
 ^mîiF. mûr. jcwne. jeûne, bo/te. bofte. ancre, wgrat. onde, wn, aineN. 
 ^j, as 5 in pleasure, gn, as ni in union. tZZ, as Z/i, in Wi //i am 
 
 -J- 
 
 PRETERIT DEFINITE. 
 
 
 Je fus 
 
 Iwas 
 
 je fu 
 
 tu fus 
 
 ihou wast 
 
 tufu 
 
 il fut 
 
 he was 
 
 ilfu 
 
 nous fûmes 
 
 we were 
 
 nou fum 
 
 vous fûtes 
 
 you were 
 
 vou fut 
 
 ils furent 
 
 they were 
 
 il fur 
 
 J'eus été 
 tu eus été 
 il eut été 
 nous eûmes été 
 vous eûtes été 
 ils eurent été 
 
 PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
 or compound of the preterit, 
 
 I had been 
 thou hadst been 
 he had been 
 we had been 
 you had been 
 they had been 
 
 ju zé té 
 tu u zé té 
 i lu té té 
 nou zum zé té 
 vou zut zé ié 
 il zur té té 
 
 Je serai 
 tu seras 
 il sera 
 nous serons 
 vous serez 
 ils seront 
 
 FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 I shall or will be 
 thou shall or wilt be 
 he shall or will be 
 we shall or will be 
 you shall or will be 
 they shall or will be 
 
 je src 
 tu srâ 
 il sra 
 nou sron 
 vou sre 
 il sron 
 
 J'aurai été 
 tu auras été 
 il aura été 
 nous aurons été 
 vous aurez été 
 ils auront été 
 
 FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
 or compound of the future. 
 
 I shall or ivill have been 
 thou shalt or wilt have been 
 he shall or will have been 
 we shall or will have been 
 you shall or will have been 
 they shall or will have been 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 jo ré é té 
 tu o râ zé te 
 il o ra é té 
 nou zo ron zé té 
 vou zo ré zé té 
 il zo ron té té 
 
 Je serais 
 LU serais 
 il serait 
 nous serions 
 vous seriez 
 il» seraient 
 
 / should^ would., couldf 
 
 or might be 
 thou shouldst, wouldst, couldst^ 
 
 or mights t be 
 he should, would, could, 
 
 or might be 
 we should, ivould, could, 
 
 or might be 
 you should, would, could, 
 
 or might be 
 they should, would, couid^ 
 
 or might be 
 
 jo sre 
 tu srè 
 
 il srè 
 
 nou se n on 
 
 vou se n e 
 
 il srè 
 
:j6 
 
 îiTRE 
 
 to he. 
 
 ami. âiie. te. écrit, mère. être, idole, g^te. opéra, ôter. tout, voûte. 
 'al. arm. iuh. aie. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 
 
 PAST, 
 
 or compound of the present. 
 
 .l'aurais été 
 or j'eusse été 
 tu aurais été 
 or lu eusses élé 
 il aurait été 
 or il eûl élé 
 nous aurions été 
 or nous eussions élé 
 vous auriez été 
 or vous eussiez été 
 ils auraient été 
 or ils eussent été 
 
 -p- 
 
 Sois 
 qu'il soit 
 
 soyons 
 
 soyez 
 qu'ils soient 
 
 -a- 
 
 Que je sois 
 que tu sois 
 qu'il soit 
 que nous soyons 
 que vous soyez 
 qu'ils soient 
 -R- 
 
 I should., would, could, 
 
 or might have been 
 thoushoaldsl, wouldst, couldst, 
 
 or miglilst have been 
 he shmild, would, could, 
 
 or might have been 
 we should, would, could, 
 
 or might have been 
 you should, would, could, 
 
 or might have been 
 they should, ivould, could, 
 
 or might have been 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 be Qhou) 
 let liim be 
 let us be 
 be {you) 
 ht them be 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 that I may be 
 that tJiou mayst be 
 that he may be 
 that we may be 
 that you may be 
 that they may be 
 
 PRETERIT or PAST, 
 
 or compound of the present, 
 
 Que j'aie été that I may have been 
 
 que tu aies été thai thou mayst have been 
 
 qu'il ait été that lie may have been 
 
 quo nous ayons été that we may have been 
 
 que VOUS ayez été' that you may have been 
 
 qu'ils aient été that they may have been 
 
 -S- IMPERFECT. 
 
 Que je fusse that I might be ' 
 
 que tu fasses that thou mightst be 
 
 qu'il fût thai he might be 
 
 que nous fussions that ice might be 
 
 que vous fussiez that you might be 
 
 qu'ils fussent that they might be 
 
 -T- PLUPERFECT, 
 
 or compound of the imperfect. 
 
 Que j'eusse été tliat I might have been 
 
 que tu eusses été that thou mightst have been 
 
 qu'il eût été that he might have been 
 
 que nous eussions été that we might have been 
 que vous eussiez été that you might have been 
 qu'ils eussent éré that they might have been 
 
 jo rè zé té 
 
 Jus é té 
 
 tu o rè zé té 
 
 tu us se té 
 
 i lo rè té té 
 
 i lu té té 
 
 nou zo ri on zé té 
 
 nou zu si on zé té 
 
 vou zo ri é zé té 
 
 vou zu si é se té 
 
 il zo rè té té 
 
 il sus lé té 
 
 SOI 
 
 kil soi 
 soi yon 
 soi yé 
 kil soi 
 
 kej soi 
 
 ke tu soi 
 
 kil soi 
 
 ke nou soi yon 
 
 ke vou soi yé 
 
 kil soi 
 
 ke je é té 
 
 ke tu è zé té 
 
 ki le té té 
 
 ke nou zé yon zé té 
 
 ke vou zé yé zé té 
 
 kil zê té té 
 
 kej fus 
 
 ke tu fus 
 
 kilfu 
 
 ke nou fu si on 
 
 ke vou fu si é 
 kil fus 
 
 ke jus é té 
 
 ke tu us zé lé 
 
 ki lu té té 
 
 ke nou zu si on zé té 
 
 ke vou zu si é zé té 
 
 kil zus té té 
 
ETRE 
 
 to be 
 
 27 
 
 ^mur. mwr. jeune, jeûne, boite, boîte, ancre, ingrat, onde. un. ainew. 
 ^j, as s in pleasure, gn, as ni in umon. ^/Z, as IIU in Wi//iani 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERB. 
 
 Être to he (Negatively.) 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 *A- 
 
 Ne pas être 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 not to be 
 
 ne pa zê tre 
 
 -B- PAST or PERFECT, 
 
 or compound of the present. 
 ne pas avoir été not to have been ne pa za vol ré té 
 
 -C- PARTICIPLE PRESENT 07' ACTIVE, 
 
 n' étant pas not being né tan pa 
 
 -D- COMPOUND OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 
 
 n'ajant pas été not having been né yan pa ze té 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Je ne suis pas 
 
 lu n'es pas 
 
 il n'est pas 
 
 nous ne sommes pas 
 
 vous n'êtes pas 
 
 ils ne sont pas 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 / am not 
 tfiou art not 
 he is not 
 we are not 
 you are not 
 they are not 
 
 -G- PERFECT or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 
 
 or compound of the present. 
 Je n'ai pas été / have not been 
 
 tu n'as pas été thou hast not been 
 
 il n'a pas été he has not been 
 
 nous n'avons pas été we have not been 
 vous n'avez pas été you have not been 
 ils n'ont pas été they have not been 
 
 -H- 
 
 Je n'étais pas 
 tu n'étais pas 
 il n'était pas 
 nous n'étions pas 
 vous n'étiez pas 
 ils n'étaient pas 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 / was not 
 thou wast not 
 he was not 
 we were not 
 you were not 
 they were not 
 
 -I- PLUPERFECT, 
 
 or compound of the imperfect. 
 Je n'avais pas été / had not been 
 tu n'avais pas été thou hadst not been 
 il n'avait pas été he had not been 
 
 nous n'avions pas été we had not been 
 vous n'aviez pas été you had not been 
 ils n'avaient pa» été they had not been 
 
 jeN su i pa 
 tu ne pâ 
 il ne pâ 
 nouN sora pâ - 
 vou net pâ 
 il ne son pâ 
 
 je né pâ zé té 
 tu nâ pâ zé té 
 il na pâ zé té 
 nou na von pâ zé té 
 vou na vé pâ zé té 
 il non pâ zé té 
 
 je né tè pâ 
 tu né tè pâ 
 il né tè pâ 
 nou né ti on pâ 
 vou né ti é pâ 
 il né tè pâ 
 
 je na vè pâ zé té 
 tu na vè pâ zé té 
 il na vè pâ zé té 
 nou na vi on pâ zé té 
 vou na vi é pâ zé té 
 il navèpâ 2é té 
 
ÊTRE 
 
 to he. 
 
 'tzmi. cne. te. écrit, mère. être, idole, gîie, opéra, ôter. tout, voûte. 
 ^at. aim. tub. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over, toor fool. 
 
 Je ne fus pas 
 tu ne fus pas 
 il ne fut pas 
 nous ne fûmes pas 
 vous ne fûtes pas 
 ils ne furent pas 
 
 PRETERIT DEFINITE. 
 
 / was not 
 thouwast not 
 he icas not 
 we were not 
 you xcere not 
 they were not 
 
 jeN fu pa 
 tuN fu pa 
 il ne fu pâ 
 no UN fum pâ 
 VOUN fut pâ 
 il ne fur pâ 
 
 PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
 or compound of the preterit. 
 
 Je n'eus pas été 
 tu n'eus pas été 
 il n'eut pas été 
 nous n'eûmes pas été 
 VOUS n'eûtes pas été 
 ils n'eurent pas été 
 
 Ihad not been 
 thou hadst not been 
 he had not been 
 we had not been 
 you had not been 
 they had not been 
 
 je nu pâ zé té 
 tu nu pâ zé té 
 il nu pâ zé té 
 nou num pâ zé té 
 vou nut pâ zé té 
 il nur pâ zé té 
 
 Je ne serai pas 
 tu ne seras pas 
 il ne sera pas 
 nous ne serons pas 
 vous ne serez pas 
 ils ne seront pas 
 
 FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 I shall or will not be 
 thou shall or wilt not be 
 he shall or will not be 
 we shall or will not be 
 you shall or will not be 
 they shall or will not be 
 
 jeN sré pâ 
 tux srâ pâ 
 il ne sra pâ 
 nouN sron pâ 
 vouN sré pâ 
 il ne sron pâ 
 
 FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
 or compound of the future. 
 
 Te n'aurai pas été 
 tu n'auras pas été 
 il n'aura pas été 
 nous n'aurons pas été 
 vous n'aurez pas été 
 ils n'auront pas été 
 
 / shall or icill not have been ' jno ré pâ zé té 
 thou shall ox wilt not have been tu no râ pâ zé té 
 he shall or will not have been il no ra pâ zé té 
 we shall or will not have been nou no ron pâ zé té 
 you shall or icill not have been voii no ré pâ zé té 
 they shall or will not have been il no ron pâ zé té 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 Je ne serais pas 
 tu ne serais pas 
 il ne serait pas 
 nous ne serions pas 
 vous ne seriez pas 
 lis ne seraient pas 
 
 I should, tcQuld., could, 
 
 or might not be je.vsrep 
 
 thoushouldst, wouldst, couldst. 
 
 or mightst not be 
 he should^ ivould, could, 
 
 or might not he 
 we should, would, could, 
 
 or might not be 
 you should, would, could, 
 
 or might not be 
 they should, would, could., 
 
 or 7night not be 
 
 tuN srè pâ 
 il ne srè pâ 
 nouN se ri on pâ 
 vouN se ri é pâ 
 il ne srè pâ 
 
ETRE 
 
 to be. 
 
 29 
 
 ^mwr. mûr. jeune, jeûne, boi'te. hoîic. ancre, zngrat. fi?ule. un^ araeN. 
 ■^j, as s in pleasure, gn, as ni in union. ill, as ZZi, in Wi //i ani 
 
 PAST, 
 or compound of the present. 
 
 Je n'aurais pas été 
 OTJe ii'eusse pas été 
 tu n'aurais pas été 
 or tu n'eusses pas été 
 il n'aurait pas été 
 or il n''eût pas été 
 nous n'aurions pas été 
 
 / should, would, 
 
 could, or might 
 
 thou shouldst, xcouldst, 
 
 couldst, or might st 
 
 he should, would, 
 
 could, or might 
 
 we should, would. 
 
 or nous n'eussions pas été could, or might 
 
 vous n'auriez pas été you should, would, 
 
 or vous n'' eussiez pas été could, or might 
 
 ils n'auraient pas été 
 or ils n^eussent ^^«s été 
 
 Ne sois pas 
 qu'il ne soit pas 
 ne soyons pas 
 ne soyez pas 
 qu'ils ne soient pas 
 
 ihey should, icould, 
 could, or misht 
 
 je no rè pâ zé té 
 je nus pâ zé té 
 tu no rè pâ zé té 
 s tu nus pâ ze té 
 ^ il no rè pâ zé té 
 . I" il nu pâ zé té 
 ' S nou no ri on pâ zé té 
 ^ nou nu si on pâ zé te 
 S vou no ri é pâ zé té 
 vou nu si é pâ zé té 
 il no rè pâ zé té 
 il nus pâ zé té 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 be not (Jhou) 
 let him not he 
 let us not be 
 be not {you) 
 let them not be 
 
 ne soi pâ 
 kil ne soi pâ 
 ne soi yon pâ 
 ne soi yé pâ 
 kil ne soi pâ 
 
 -a- 
 
 Q,ue je ne sois pas 
 
 que tu ne sois pas 
 
 qu'il ne soit pas 
 
 que nous ne soyons» pas 
 
 que vous ne soyez pas 
 
 qu'ils ne soient pas 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 that I may 
 that thou mayst 
 that he may 
 that we may 
 that you may 
 that they may 
 
 -R- PRETERIT Or PAST, 
 
 or compound of the present. 
 
 Que je n'aie pas été that I may 
 
 que tu n'aies pas été that thou mayst 
 
 qu'il n'ait pas été that he may 
 
 que nous n'ayons pas été that we may 
 que vous n'ayez pas été thai you may 
 qu'ils n'aient pas été that they may 
 
 -s- IMPERFECT. 
 
 Que je ne fusse pas that I might 
 
 que tu ne fusses pas that thou mightst 
 
 qu'il ne fût pas that he might 
 
 que nous ne fassions pas that we might 
 
 que vous ne fussiez pas that you might 
 
 qu'ils ne fussent pas that they might 
 
 -T- PLUPERFECT, 
 
 or compound of the imperfect. 
 Que je n'eusse pas été that I might 
 que tu n'eusses pas été that thou mightst 
 qu'il n'eût pas été that he might 
 
 que nous n'eussions pas été that we mi^rht 
 que voua n'eussiez pas été that you might 
 qu'ils n'eussent oas été Jhat they might 
 
 ke jeN soi pâ 
 ke tuN soi pâ 
 kil ne soi pâ 
 ke nouN soi yon pâ 
 ke vouN soi yé pâ 
 kil ne soi pâ 
 
 S kej ne pâ zé té 
 
 S- ke tu ne pâ zé té 
 
 a" kil ne pâ zé té 
 
 ^ ke nou né yon pâ zé té 
 
 S" ke vou né yé pâ zé té 
 
 S kil ne pâ zé té 
 
 ke jeN fus pâ 
 
 ke tuN fus pâ 
 i kil ne fu pâ 
 Ç3- ke nouN fu si on pâ 
 "■ ke VOUN fu si é pâ 
 
 kil ne fus pâ 
 
 s kej nus pâ zé té 
 
 '-^ ke tu nus pâ zé té 
 
 1" kii nu pâ zé té 
 
 S ke nou nu si on pâ zé té 
 
 ^ ke vou nu si é pâ zé té 
 
 S kil nus pâ zé té 
 
30 
 
 to be. 
 
 ■ami. âne. te. écrit, mère. être. îdole. gîiQ. opéra, ôter. tout, voûte. 
 ■at. arm. iuh. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERB. 
 
 Etre to he (Interrogatively,) 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 -F- 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 
 Suis-je 
 
 am I 
 
 suij 
 
 es-tu 
 
 art thou 
 
 ètu 
 
 est-il 
 
 is he 
 
 èto 
 
 sommes-nous 
 
 are we 
 
 som nou 
 
 êtes-vous 
 
 are you 
 
 et vou 
 
 sont-ils 
 
 are thei/ 
 
 son til 
 
 -G- PERFECT or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 
 
 
 or 
 
 compound of the present. 
 
 
 Ai-je été 
 
 have I been 
 
 é je té 
 
 as-tu été 
 
 hast thou been 
 
 â tu é té 
 
 a-t-il été 
 
 has he been 
 
 a tilé té 
 
 avons-nous été 
 
 have we been 
 
 a von nou zé té 
 
 avez-vous été 
 
 have you been 
 
 a vé vou zé té 
 
 ont-ils été 
 
 have they been 
 
 on til zé té 
 
 -H- 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 
 Étais-je 
 
 was I 
 
 étèj 
 
 étais-tu 
 
 wast thou 
 
 été tu 
 
 était-il 
 
 was he 
 
 é tè til 
 
 étions-nous 
 
 were ice 
 
 é ti on nou 
 
 étiez-vous 
 
 were you 
 
 é ti é vou 
 
 éta.ient-ils 
 
 were they 
 
 é tè til 
 
 -i- 
 
 PLUPERFECT, 
 
 
 or c 
 
 ompound of the imperfect 
 
 
 Avais-je été 
 
 had I been 
 
 a vè je té 
 
 avais-tu été 
 
 hadst thou been 
 
 a vè tu é té 
 
 avait-il été 
 
 had he been 
 
 a vè ti lé té 
 
 avicns-nous été 
 
 had we been 
 
 a vi on nou zé té 
 
 aviez-vous été 
 
 had you been 
 
 a vi é vou zé té 
 
 avaient-ils été 
 
 had they been 
 
 a vè til zé té 
 
 -j- 
 
 PRETERIT DEFINITE. 
 
 
 Fus-je 
 
 was I 
 
 fuj 
 
 fus- tu 
 
 wast thou 
 
 fil tu 
 
 fut-il 
 
 was he 
 
 futil 
 
 fûmes-nous 
 
 were tee 
 
 ftirn nou 
 
 fûtes-vous 
 
 were you 
 
 fut vou 
 
 fureut-ils 
 
 were they 
 
 furtiî 
 
ÊTRE 
 
 to be 
 
 31 
 
 ^mur. mûr. jeune, jeûne, botte, boîte, ancre, ingrat, onde. un. amcN. 
 'ji as s m pleasure, ^n, as ni in union, ill^ as lli^ in WiZ/iara, 
 
 -K- 
 
 Eus-je été 
 eus-tu été 
 eut-il été 
 eûmes -no us été 
 eûtes-vous été 
 eurent-ils été 
 
 -L- 
 
 Serai-je 
 
 seras-tu 
 
 sera-t-il 
 
 serons-nous 
 
 serez-vous 
 
 seront-ils 
 
 Aurai-je été 
 auras-tu été 
 aura-t-il été 
 aurons-nous été 
 aurez-vous été 
 auront-ils été 
 
 Serais-je 
 
 serais-tu 
 
 serait-il 
 
 serions-nous 
 
 seriez-vous 
 
 seraient-ils 
 
 PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
 or compound of the preterit. 
 
 had I been 
 hadst thou been 
 had he been 
 had we been 
 ' had you been 
 had they been 
 
 FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 shall or will I be 
 shall or 7vilt Ihoii be 
 shall or tcill he be 
 shall or will we be 
 shall or ivill you be 
 shall or will they be 
 
 FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
 or compound of the future 
 
 shall or will I have been 
 shall or wilt thou have been 
 shall or ivill lie have been 
 shall or loill ive have been 
 shall or will you have been 
 shall or will they have been 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 should^ would, couldf 
 
 or might I be 
 sho7ddst, wouldsi, couldst, 
 
 or mighlsi thou be 
 should, would, couldy 
 
 or might he be 
 should, would, could, 
 
 or might we be 
 should, would, could, 
 
 or might you be 
 should, tvould, could^ 
 
 or might they be 
 
 PAST, 
 or compound of the present. 
 
 Aurais-je été 
 or eusst-je été 
 uurais-tu été 
 or eusses- tu été 
 aurait-il été 
 or eût-il été 
 aurions-nous été 
 or eussions-nous été 
 auriez-vous été 
 or eussies-vous été 
 auraient-ils été 
 or eussent-ils été 
 
 should, woîdd, could, 
 
 or mig/it I have been 
 shouldst, wouldst, couldsi, 
 
 or mightsl thou have been 
 should, would, could, 
 
 or might lie have been 
 should, ivould, could, 
 
 or might ive have been 
 should, ivould, could, 
 
 or might you have been 
 should, ivould, could, 
 
 or miglU Iheij have been 
 2 E 
 
 u je té 
 u tu é té 
 u ti lé té 
 um nou zé té 
 ut vou zé té 
 ur til zé té 
 
 se réj 
 se rà tu 
 se ra til 
 se ron nou 
 se ré vou 
 se ron til 
 
 o ré je té 
 o râ tu é té 
 o ra til é té 
 o ron nou zé té 
 o ré vou zé té 
 o ron til zé té 
 
 se rej 
 se re tu 
 sa rè til 
 se ri on nou 
 se ri é vou 
 se rè til 
 
 o rè je té 
 u se je té 
 o rè tu é té 
 us tu é te 
 o rè ti lé té 
 u ti lé té 
 o ri on nou zé té 
 u si on nou zé te 
 o ri é vou zé té 
 u si é vou zé té 
 o rè til zé té 
 us til zé té 
 
32 
 
 ETRE 
 
 to be. 
 
 'ami. âne. te. écrit, mère. être, idole, gfte. opéra, ôter. toux, voûte. 
 '^at. arm. t«b. aie. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. iool. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERB. 
 
 Etre to be (Negatively and Interrogatively») 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Ne suis-je pas 
 n'es-tu pas 
 n'est-il pas 
 ne sommes-nous 
 n'êtes-vous pas 
 ne sont-ils pas 
 
 am I not 
 art thou not 
 is he not 
 are we not 
 are you not 
 are they not 
 
 ne su ij pa 
 
 ne tu pà 
 ne til pâ 
 ne som nou pâ 
 net vou pâ 
 ne son til pâ 
 
 PERFECT or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 
 or compound of the present. 
 
 N'ai-je pas été 
 n'as-tu pas été 
 n'a-t-il pas été 
 ii'avons-nous pas été 
 n'avez-vous pas été 
 nont-ils pas été 
 
 have I not been 
 hast thou not been 
 has he not been 
 have we not been 
 have you not been 
 have they not been 
 
 néj pâ zé té 
 
 na lu pâ zé té 
 
 na til pâ zé té 
 
 na von nou pâ zé té 
 
 na vé vou pâ zé té 
 
 non til pâ zé té 
 
 N'étais-je pas 
 n"'étais-ta pas 
 n'était-il pas 
 n'étions-nous pas 
 n'étiez-vous pas 
 n'étaient-ils pas 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 was I not 
 wast thou not 
 was he not 
 were we not 
 were you not 
 were they not 
 
 né tèj pâ 
 né tè tu pâ 
 né tè til pâ 
 né ti on nou pâ 
 né ti é vou pâ 
 né te til pâ 
 
 -I- PLUPFRFECT, 
 
 or compound of the imperfect. 
 
 N'avais-je pas été had I not been 
 n'avais-tu pas été hadst thou not been 
 
 n'avait-il pas été had he not been 
 
 n'avions-nous pas été had we not been 
 n'aviez-vous pas été had you not been 
 n'avaient-ils pas été had they not been 
 
 na ve j pâ zé té 
 na vè tu pâ zé té 
 na vè til pâ zé té 
 na vi on nou pâ zé té 
 na vi é vou pâ zé té 
 na vè til pâ zé té 
 
 -j- 
 
 Ne fus-je pas 
 
 ne fus-tu pas 
 
 ne fut-il pas 
 
 ne fûmes-nous pas 
 
 ne futes-vous pas 
 
 ne furent- ils oas 
 
 PRETERIT DEFINITE. 
 
 was I not 
 wast thou not 
 was he not 
 were we not 
 were you not 
 were they not 
 
 ne fuj pâ 
 ne fu tu pâ 
 ne fu til pâ 
 ne fum nou pâ 
 ne fut vou pâ 
 ne fur til pâ 
 
ÊTRE 
 
 to be. 
 
 33 
 
 ^mwr, mwr. jewns. jeûne, boite, boîte, «were, ingrat, onde, un, ameN 
 *j, as* in pleasure, gn, as ni in union. iZZ, as /Zi, in Wi Z/i am. 
 
 -K- PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
 
 or compound of the preterit, 
 
 N'eus-je pas été had I not been 
 
 n'eus-tu pas été hadst thou not been 
 
 n'eut-il pas été had he not been 
 
 n'eûmes-nous pas été had we not been 
 
 n'eûtes-vous pas été had you not been 
 
 n'eurent-ils pas été had they not been 
 
 -L- FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 Ne serai-je pas shall or will I not be 
 
 ne seras-tu pas shall or wilt thou not be 
 
 ne sera-t-il pas shall or will he not be 
 
 ne serons-nous pas shall or will loe not be 
 
 ne serez-vous pas shall or will you not bè 
 
 ne seront-ils pas shall or will they not be 
 
 -M- FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
 
 or compound of the future. 
 N'aurai-je pas été shall or will I not have been 
 n'auras-tu pas été shall or wilt thou not have been 
 n'aura-t-il pas été shall or loill he not have been 
 n'aurons-nous pas été shall or will we not have been 
 n'aurez-vous pas été shall or will you not have been 
 n'auront-ils pas été shall or will they not have been 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 Ne serais-je pas 
 ne serais-tu pas 
 ne serait-il pas 
 ne serions-nous pas 
 ne seriez-vous pas 
 ne seraient-ils pas 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 should,, would, could, 
 
 or might I not be 
 shouldst, wouldst, couldst, 
 
 or mightst thou not be 
 should, iDould, could, 
 
 or might he not be 
 should., would, could, 
 
 or might we not be 
 should, would, could, 
 
 or might you not be 
 should, would, could, 
 
 or might they not be 
 
 PAST, 
 
 or compound of the present. 
 
 N'aurais-je pas été, 
 or n'eussé-je pas été 
 n'aurais-tu pas été, 
 or n'eusses-tupas été 
 n'aurait-il pas été, 
 or n^eût-il pas été 
 n'aurions-nous pas été, 
 
 should, would, 
 could, or might I 
 
 shouldst, wouldst, 
 couldst, or mightst thou 
 
 should, would, 
 could, or might he 
 
 should, would, 
 
 or n" eussions-nous pas été could, or anight we 
 
 n'auriez-vous pas été, should, would, 
 
 or n''eusiiez-vous pas été could, or might you 
 
 n'auraient-ils pas été, should, would, 
 
 or n' eussent-ils pas été could, or might they 
 
 f-s 
 
 nuj pa zé té 
 nu tu pâ zé té 
 nu til pâ zé té 
 num nou pâ zé té 
 nut vou pâ zé té 
 nur til pâ zé té 
 
 ne sréj pâ 
 ne srâ tu pâ 
 ne sra til pâ 
 ne sron nou pâ 
 ne sré vou pâ 
 ne sron tii pâ 
 
 no réj pâ zé té 
 no râ tu pâ zé té 
 no ra til pâ zé té 
 no ron nou pâ zé té 
 no ré vou pâ zé té 
 no ron til pâ zé té 
 
 ne srèj pâ 
 
 ne srè tu pâ 
 
 ne srè til pâ 
 
 ne se ri on nou pâ 
 
 ne se ri é vou pâ 
 
 ne srè til pâ 
 
 no rèj pâ zé té 
 
 nu séj pâ se té 
 u ■) rè tu pâ zé té 
 nv.-s tu pâ zé té 
 no rè til pâ zé té 
 nu 'Al pâ zé lé 
 no ri onnoupâzété 
 nu si on nou pâ zé té 
 no ri é vou pà zé té 
 nu si é voupâ zé té 
 no rè til pâ zé té 
 nus til pâ zé té 
 
34 
 
 OP THE FIKST CONJUGATION. 
 
 Of the different hinds of Conjugations. 
 
 75. There are in French, four Conjugations, (comprising 
 upwards of 3164 verbs,) which are distinguished from each 
 other by the termination of the present of the Infinitive. 
 
 First Conjugation, 
 
 76. The present of the Infinitive of the first conjugation, has 
 for termination er — as, pari er, donn er, &c. 
 
 Second Conjugation. 
 
 77. The present of the Infinitive of the second conjugation, 
 has for termination ir — as, fin ir, pun zr, &c. 
 
 Third Conjugation. 
 
 78. The present of the Infinitive of the third conjugaticMi, 
 has for termination oir — as, recev oir, Sav oir, &c. 
 
 Fourth Conjugation. 
 
 79. The present of the Infinitive of the fourth conjugation, 
 has for termination re — as, vend re, rend re, &c. 
 
 Of the First Conjugation. 
 
 80. All verbs whose present of the Infinitive ends with er, 
 (to the number of about 2500) are of the first conjugation, and 
 if regular, are conjugated like parler to speak ; which is here- 
 after conjugated, to be used as a model. 
 
 81. The only irregular verbs of the first conjugation, are 
 s'en aller to go away, page 112 — aller to go, page 122 — envoyer 
 to send, pagel23 — and renvoyer to send back ; conjugated like 
 envoyer to send. 
 
 82. Some verbs ending in er, although not among the 
 irregular verbs of the first conjugation, are not exactly conju- 
 gated like parler ; these verbs are noticed at page 48. 
 
 83. Conjugate in the same manner — as, pari er to speak ; the 
 following verbs ; — 
 
 accord er 
 
 to grant, 
 
 epouvant er 
 
 to frighten, 
 
 accus er 
 
 to accuse. 
 
 inspir er 
 
 to inspire. 
 
 îiffirm er 
 
 to affirm. 
 
 limer 
 
 to file. 
 
 camp er 
 
 to encamp. 
 
 patin er 
 
 to skate. 
 
 donn er 
 
 to give, 
 
 piquer 
 
 to sting, 
 
 port er 
 
 to carry, 
 
 prépar er 
 
 to prepare, 
 
 montr er 
 
 to show, 
 
 priv er 
 
 to deprive, 
 
 trouv er 
 
 to find, 
 
 propos er 
 
 to propose. 
 
 casse^ 
 
 to break. 
 
 imagin er 
 
 to imagine, 
 
OP THE FORMATION OP THE COMPOUND TENSES. 35 
 
 allum er 
 
 to light, 
 
 import er 
 
 to import, 
 
 pleur er 
 
 to weep, 
 
 improuv er 
 
 to disapprove, 
 
 vol er 
 
 to steal, 
 
 irrit er 
 
 to irritate, 
 
 déjeûn er 
 
 to breakfast, 
 
 invent er 
 
 to invent. 
 
 din er 
 
 to dine. 
 
 pens er 
 
 to think, 
 
 soup er 
 
 to sup. 
 
 vant er 
 
 to praise, 
 
 84. To conjugate the above verbs, or any other regular 
 verb, of the first conjugation : observe that in French a regular 
 verb is divided into two parts : — 1st, The radical -part, which 
 is, that portion of the word which is the same in all tenses and 
 persons of the verb ; 2d5 The termination^ which is, that portion 
 of the word that varies at almost every tense and person ; for 
 instance, in parler to speak ; pari is the radical part, and er is 
 the termination : then pari will be the same in all tenses and 
 persons ; whereas the termination er, will change at every tense 
 and person. Knowing the above, when a verb is to be conju- 
 gated on parler, the only thing to be done, is to place the ter- 
 minations of the different tenses and persons of parler after 
 the radical part of the verb to be conjugated. 
 
 85. In the different conjugations throughout this volume, the 
 radical part, and the terminations have been separated, and the 
 terminations in the model verbs have been besides printed in 
 italics. 
 
 Formation of the Compound Tenses. 
 
 86. The formation of the compound tenses, in all the verbs 
 of the four conjugations, whether regular or irregular, is the 
 same. 
 
 87. When a scholar wants to form a compound tense, he 
 must first ascertain whether, the verb in question, takes the 
 auxiliary avoir to have, or être to be, which he can easily do, 
 by referring to page 1, Art. 10 and 14; afterwards he must 
 take from avoir to have, or être to be, the tense named, and add 
 to it the participle past, of the verb he has to conjugate ; for in- 
 stance, suppose a scholar wants to form the compound of the 
 future absolute, oî parler to speak, he must after having ascer- 
 tained that parler to speak, is one of those neuter verbs thai 
 takes the auxiliary avoir to have, as not being among the neuter 
 verbs, that are put down in pagel61 ; take the future absolute 
 OÎ avoir to have, which is, f aurai I shall or will have, and add 
 to it the participle past of parler to speak, which is, parlé 
 spoken ; then he shall have for the compound of the future ab- 
 solute /azzrai parlé I shall or will have spoken — tu auras parlé 
 thou shalt or wilt have spoken, &;c. 
 
 2 E 2 
 
36 TABLE OP THE TERMINATIONS OF THE REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 Table of the Terminations of the Regular Verbs» 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES. 
 
 INFINITrVE MOOIX 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 
 pari 
 
 er 
 
 fin 
 
 ir 
 
 rec evoir 
 
 vend re 
 
 
 
 PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 
 
 
 
 pari 
 
 ant 
 
 fin issa7i,t 
 
 rec evant 
 
 vend ant 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 PARTICTPLK ; 
 
 PAST OR PASSIVE. 
 
 
 
 VBxlé 
 
 fin 
 
 i 
 
 rec u 
 
 vendtt 
 
 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 
 
 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 
 
 je 
 
 pari 
 
 « 
 
 fin 
 
 is 
 
 reç ois 
 
 vend s 
 
 tu 
 
 
 ea 
 
 
 is 
 
 oia 
 
 a 
 
 il or elle 
 
 
 e 
 
 
 it 
 
 oit 
 
 vend 
 
 noua 
 
 
 CHS 
 
 
 issons 
 
 evona 
 
 ona 
 
 voua 
 
 
 ez 
 
 
 issez 
 
 evez 
 
 ez 
 
 Us or elles 
 
 
 ent 
 
 
 issent 
 
 oivent 
 
 ent 
 
 
 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 
 
 je 
 
 pari 
 
 aïs 
 
 fin 
 
 issais 
 
 rec evaia 
 
 vend aia 
 
 tu 
 
 
 aia 
 
 
 issais 
 
 evais 
 
 ais 
 
 il or elle 
 
 
 aât 
 
 
 issait 
 
 evait 
 
 ait 
 
 nous 
 
 
 ions 
 
 
 issiona 
 
 eviona 
 
 ions 
 
 vous 
 
 
 iei 
 
 
 issiez 
 
 eviez 
 
 iez 
 
 Us or elles 
 
 
 aient 
 
 
 issaient 
 
 evaient 
 
 aien 
 
 
 
 PRETERIT DEnNITE. 
 
 
 je 
 
 pari 
 
 at 
 
 fin 
 
 is 
 
 reç us 
 
 vend ia 
 
 tu 
 
 
 as 
 
 
 is 
 
 ua 
 
 ia 
 
 a or elle 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 it 
 
 ut 
 
 it 
 
 nous 
 
 
 âmes 
 
 
 imes 
 
 ûmea 
 
 tmea 
 
 voua 
 
 
 êtes 
 
 
 îtes 
 
 ûtes 
 
 'ilea 
 
 il3<?relle8 
 
 
 èrent 
 
 
 irent 
 
 urer.t 
 
 irent 
 
 
 
 PCTURK ABSOLUTE. 
 
 
 
 je 
 
 pari 
 
 era» 
 
 fin 
 
 irai 
 
 rec evrai 
 
 vend rai 
 
 tu 
 
 
 eras 
 
 
 iras 
 
 evras 
 
 ras 
 
 il or elle 
 
 
 era 
 
 
 ira 
 
 evra 
 
 ra 
 
 now3 
 
 
 erona 
 
 
 irons 
 
 evrona 
 
 rona 
 
 voua 
 
 
 erez 
 
 
 irez 
 
 evrez 
 
 rex. 
 
 \]a or elles 
 
 
 eront 
 
 
 iront 
 
 evroni 
 
 ronZ 
 
 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 
 
 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 
 
 je 
 
 pari 
 
 eraia 
 
 fin 
 
 irais 
 
 rec evrais 
 
 vend rata 
 
 tu 
 
 
 eraia 
 
 
 irais 
 
 evrais 
 
 rais 
 
 U or elle 
 
 
 erait 
 
 
 irait 
 
 evrait 
 
 rait 
 
 nous 
 
 
 eriona 
 
 
 irions 
 
 evriona 
 
 rioné 
 
 vous 
 
 
 eriez 
 
 
 iriez 
 
 evrtez 
 
 riez 
 
 Us or elles 
 
 
 eraient 
 
 
 iraient 
 
 evraient 
 
 raient 
 
 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 
 
 pari 
 
 e 
 
 fin 
 
 is 
 
 reç oia 
 
 vend s 
 
 qu'il or qu'elle 
 
 
 « 
 
 
 isse 
 
 oive 
 
 e 
 
 
 
 ona 
 
 
 issons 
 
 evona 
 
 ona 
 
 
 
 ez 
 
 
 issez 
 
 evez 
 
 ez 
 
 qu'Us or qu'elles 
 
 
 ent 
 
 
 issent 
 
 oivent 
 
 ent 
 
 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 
 
 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 
 
 que je 
 
 pârl 
 
 e 
 
 fin 
 
 isse 
 
 reç oive 
 
 vend e 
 
 que tu 
 
 
 es 
 
 
 isses 
 
 oivea 
 
 es 
 
 qu'il or qu'elle 
 
 
 « 
 
 
 isse 
 
 oive 
 
 e 
 
 que nous 
 
 
 iom 
 
 
 issions 
 
 eviona 
 
 iona 
 
 que voua 
 
 
 iez 
 
 
 issiez 
 
 eviez 
 
 iiiz 
 
 qu'ils or qu'elles 
 
 
 ent 
 
 
 issent 
 
 oivent 
 
 ent 
 
 
 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 
 
 que je 
 
 pari 
 
 asse 
 
 fin 
 
 isse 
 
 reç usse 
 
 vend isse 
 
 que tu 
 
 
 esses 
 
 
 isses 
 
 usses 
 
 isses 
 
 qu'U or qu'elle 
 
 
 at 
 
 
 ît 
 
 ût 
 
 ît 
 
 que nous 
 
 
 aasiona 
 
 
 issiona 
 
 lissions 
 
 issions 
 
 que vous 
 
 
 assiez 
 
 
 issiez 
 
 lissiez 
 
 issiez 
 
 qu'Us or qu'elles 
 
 
 assent 
 
 
 issent 
 
 ussent 
 
 issent 
 
 
 ^at Conjugation 
 
 
 SiConj. 
 
 3d Conj. 
 
 ith Con 
 
OP THE FOUR REGULAR CONJUGATIONS. 
 
 37 
 
 Of the Four Regular Conjugations. 
 
 COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 ayanf 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 PAST or PERFECT, {oT compound of the present.) 
 
 pari é fin t rec u vend u 
 
 COMPOUND O? THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 
 
 pail é fin t rec « vend u 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 PERFECT or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, {oT compouitd of the present.) 
 
 tu as 
 
 il OT elle a 
 noua avons 
 VOUS avez 
 ils or elles ont 
 
 pari 
 
 fin 
 
 reç 
 
 vend o 
 
 PLUPERFECT, {or compound of the Imperfect.) 
 
 pari é 
 é 
 é 
 
 fin 
 
 reç 
 
 vend 
 
 T'avais 
 
 tu avais 
 
 il or elle avait 
 
 nous avions é 
 
 vous aviez é 
 
 ils or elles avaient é 
 
 PRETERIT ANTERIOR, {or compound of the preterit definite.) 
 
 j'eus pari é fin i reç u vend u 
 
 tu eus é i u u 
 
 il or elle.eut é i u u 
 
 nous eûmes é i u ' u 
 
 vous eûtes è i u u 
 
 ils or elles eurent é i u u 
 
 roTDRE ANTERIOR, (or compound ofthofuture absoîute.) 
 
 vend M 
 
 vend 
 
 j'aurai 
 
 tu auras 
 
 il or elle aura 
 
 pari 
 
 é 
 é 
 é 
 
 fin I reç u 
 i u 
 t tt 
 
 nous aurons 
 
 
 é 
 
 t « 
 
 vous aurez 
 
 ils or elles auront 
 
 j'aurais 
 
 tu aurais^ 
 
 il or elle aurait 
 
 é i u 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 PAST, (or compound qf the present.) 
 pari é fin i rec u 
 é i u 
 
 é i u 
 
 nous aurions 
 
 
 é 
 
 t « 
 
 vous auriez 
 
 ils or elles auraient 
 
 
 é 
 
 i 
 
 » u 
 
 i tt 
 
 JVb Compound of the Imperative. 
 
 quo j aie 
 
 que tu aies 
 
 qu'il or qu'elle ait 
 
 que nous ayons 
 
 que vous ayez 
 
 qu'ils or qu'elles aient 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 PRETERIT or PAST, (or compound of the present.) 
 
 pari é 
 
 é 
 é 
 é 
 
 é 
 
 que j'eusse 
 
 que tu eusses 
 
 qu'il or qu'elle eût 
 
 que nous eussions 
 
 que vous eussiez 
 
 qu'ils or qu'elles eussent 
 
 1st Conjugation. 
 
 pari é 
 
 é 
 i 
 é 
 é 
 
 i reç u 
 
 vend u 
 
 < u 
 
 u 
 
 i tt 
 
 « 
 
 i « 
 
 tt 
 
 i u 
 
 a 
 
 i u 
 
 tt 
 
 of the imperfect.) 
 
 
 i reç « 
 
 -«ad u 
 
 i tt 
 
 u 
 
 » u 
 
 u 
 
 » tt 
 
 u 
 
 t u 
 
 u 
 
 ï tt 
 
 u 
 
 iJonj. 3d Conj. 
 
 ith ConJ. 
 
38 
 
 FIRST CONJUGATION. PARLER tO Speak, 
 
 •ami. Âne. te. écrit, mère. être, zdole. gîte, opéra, ôter. towt. vowte 
 '■'at. arm. tub. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB. 
 
 Parler to speak. (affirmatively.) 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Pari er 
 
 -B- 
 
 Avoir pari t 
 
 -c- 
 
 Parl ant 
 
 -D- 
 
 Ayant pari é 
 
 -E- 
 
 ParU 
 
 -F- 
 
 Je pari e 
 tu pari es 
 il pari e 
 nous pari ons 
 vous pari es 
 ils pari ent 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 to speak 
 
 PAST or PERFECT, 
 
 or compound of tke present. 
 to have spoken 
 
 PARTICIPLE PRESENT Or ACTIVE. 
 
 speaking 
 
 COMPOUND OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 
 
 having spoken 
 
 PARTICIPLE PAST Or PASSIVE. 
 
 spoken 
 
 INDICATIVE IMOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 I speak, do speak, or am speaking 
 thou speakest, dost speak, or art speaking 
 he speaks, does speak, or is speaking 
 we speak, do speak, or are speaking 
 you speak, do speak, or are speaking 
 they speak, do speak, or are speaking 
 
 J'ai pari é 
 
 tu as pari é 
 
 il a pari é 
 
 nous avons pari é 
 
 vous avez pari é 
 
 ils ont pari é 
 
 -H- 
 
 Je pari ais 
 tu pari ais 
 il pari ait 
 nous pari ions 
 vous pari ies 
 ils pari aient 
 
 J'avais pari é 
 tu avais pari é 
 il avait pari é 
 nous avions pari é 
 vous aviez pari é 
 'As avaient pari é 
 
 PERFECT or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 
 
 or compound of the present. 
 
 I have spoken, did speak, or have been speaking 
 thou hast spoken, didst speak, or hast been speaking 
 he has spoken, did speak, or has been speaking 
 we have spoken, did speak, or have been speaking 
 you have spoken, did speak, or have been speaking 
 they have spoken, did speak, or have been speaking 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 / spoke, did speak, or was speaking 
 thou spokest, didst speak, or wast speaking 
 he spoke, did speak, or was sjjeaking 
 we spoke, did speak, or were speaking 
 you spoke, did speak, or loere speaking 
 they spoke, did speak, or were speaking 
 
 PLUPERFECT, 
 or compound of the imperfect. 
 
 I had spoken, or had been speaking 
 thou hadst spoken, or hadst been speaking 
 he had spoken, or had been speaking 
 we had spoken, or had been speaking 
 you had spoken, or had been speaking 
 they had spoken, or had been speaking 
 
FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 PARLER to speak. 39 
 
 ^mwr. mûr. jeune, jeûne, boite, bozte. ancre, ingrat, onde. un. ameN. 
 ^j, as s in pleasure, gn^ as ni in union, i//, as IIU in WiZZiairu 
 
 Je pari ai 
 tu pari as 
 il pari a 
 nous pari âmes 
 vous pari aies 
 il pari cVçn/ 
 
 J'eus pari é 
 tu eus pari é 
 il eut pari é 
 nous eûmes pari é 
 vous eûtes pari é 
 ils eurent pari é 
 
 -L- 
 
 Je pari erai 
 tu pari ems 
 il pari era 
 nous pari erons 
 vous pari ères 
 ils pari eront 
 
 J'aurai pari é 
 tu auras pari é 
 il aura pari é. 
 nous aurons pari é 
 vous aurez pari é 
 ils auront pari é 
 
 - PRETERIT DEFINITE. 
 
 / spoke, or did speak 
 thou svokest, or didsl speak 
 he spoke, or did speak 
 we spoke, or did speak 
 you spoke, or did speak 
 they spoke, or did speak 
 
 PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
 or compound of the preterit. 
 
 I had spoken 
 thou hadst spoken 
 he had spoken 
 we had spoken 
 you had spoken 
 they had spoken 
 
 FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 / shall, or ivill speak 
 thou shall, or wilt speak 
 he shall, or ivill speak 
 we shall, or will speak 
 you shall, or will speak 
 they shall, or will speak 
 
 FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
 or compound of the future. 
 
 I shall, or ivill have spoken 
 thou shall, or wilt have spoken 
 he shall, or will have spoken 
 we shall, or will have spoken 
 you shall, or will have spoken 
 they shall, or will have spoken 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 Je pari erais I should, would, could, or might speak 
 
 tu pari erais thou shouldst, wouldst, couldst, or mightst speak 
 
 il pari erait he should, would, could, or might speak 
 
 nous pari erions we should, would, could, or might speak 
 
 vous pari eriez you should, would, could y or might speak 
 
 ils pari eraient they should, would, could, or might speak 
 
 -O- PAST, 
 
 or compound of the prescrit. 
 
 or^"' ussevarl é \ should, would, could, or might have spoken 
 
 Tr ^u^^ussï^parl é \ ^^°^ shouldst, toouldst couldst, or mightst have spoken 
 
 ciT^U^^''i ^a^l é S ^^ *^0"^^' wou'd, cou-d, or might have spoke?i 
 
40 
 
 FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 PARLER to speak. 
 
 'ami. âne. te. écrit, mère. être, idole, gûe. opéra, ôter. tout, voûte. 
 "^-at. arm. tub. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 
 
 . P \ , > we should, would, could, or might have spoken 
 or nous eussions pari e ^ •> ■> i b r 
 
 > you should, would, could, or might have spoken 
 they should, would, could, or might have spoken 
 
 vous auriez pari é, 
 or vous eussiezparl é 
 ils auraient pari é, 
 or ils eussent pari é 
 
 Pari e 
 qu'il pari e 
 pari ons 
 pari es 
 qu'ils pari ent 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 speak or do speak (Jthou) 
 
 let him speak 
 
 let us speak 
 
 speak or do speak {you) 
 
 let them speak 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 -d- 
 
 Que je pari e 
 que tu pari es 
 qu'il pari e 
 que nous pari ions 
 que vous pari ies 
 qu'ils pari ent 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 that I may speak 
 that thou mayst speak 
 that he may speak 
 that we may speak 
 that you may speak 
 that they may speak 
 
 Que j'aie parH 
 que tu aies pari é 
 qu'il ait pari é 
 que nous ayons pari é 
 que vous ayez pari é 
 qu'ils aient pari é 
 
 PRETERIT or PAST, 
 
 or compound of the present, 
 
 that I may have spoken 
 that thou mayst have spoken 
 that he may have spoken 
 that we may have spoken 
 that you may have spoken 
 that they may have spoken 
 
 Que je pari asse 
 que tu pari asses 
 qu'il pari at 
 que nous pari assions 
 que vous pari assies 
 qu'ils pari assent 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 that I might speak 
 that thou mightst speak 
 that he might speak 
 that we might speak 
 that you might speak 
 that they might speak 
 
 -T- PLUPERFECT, 
 
 or compound of the imperfect. 
 
 Que j'eusse pari é thai F might have spoken 
 
 que til eusses pari é that thou mightst have spoken 
 
 qu'il eût pari é that he might have spoken 
 
 que nous eussions pari é that loe might have spoken 
 
 que vous eussiez pari é that you might have spoken 
 
 qu'ils eussent pari é that they might have spoken 
 
FIRST CONJUGAIION. 
 
 PARLER to speak. 41 
 
 ^muT. mûr. jg7/ne* jewne. boite, bozte. ancre, tngrat. onde. î/n, ame \ 
 % as s in plea s ure. gn , as nz in umon. ill., as /Zi, in Wi Z/i an . 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB. ' 
 
 Parler to speak, [Negatively,) 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 -A- 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 Ne pas pari er 
 
 N'avoir pas pari é 
 -c- 
 
 not io speak 
 
 PAST or PERFECT, 
 or compound of the present. 
 not io have spoken 
 
 PARTICIPLE PRESENT Or ACTIVE, 
 
 Ne pari ant pas not speaking 
 
 -D- COMPOUND OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 
 
 N'ayant pas pari ê not having spoken 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 -F- PRESENT. 
 
 Je ne pari e pas I speak not., do not speak., or am not 
 
 tu ne pari es pas thou speakest not., dost not speak., or art not 
 
 il ne pari e pas he speaks not., does not speak., or is not 
 
 nous ne pari ons pas we speak not, do not speak, or are not 
 
 vous ne pari es pas i/ou speak not, do not speak, or are not 
 
 ils ne pari ent pas they speak not, do not speak, or are not 
 
 -G- PERFECT or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 
 
 or compound of the present. 
 Je n'ai pas pari é I have not spoken, did not speak, or have not' 
 
 tu n'as pas pari é thou hast not spoken, didst not speak, or hast not 
 il n'a pas pari é he has not spoken, did not speak, or has not 
 
 nous n'avons pas pari é we have not spoken, did not speak, or have not 
 
 vous n'avez pas pari é 
 ils n'ont pas pari é 
 
 -H- 
 
 Je ne pari ais pas 
 tu ne pari ais pas 
 il ne pari ait pas 
 nous ne pari ions pas 
 vous ne pari iez pas 
 ils ne pari aient pas 
 -I- 
 
 2/ou have not spoken, did not speak, or have not 
 they have no I spoken, did not speak, oi have not J 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 / spoke not, did not speak, or was not 
 thou spokest not, didst not speak, or ivast not 
 he spoke not, did not speak, or was not 
 we spfike not, did^iot speak, or were not 
 you spoke not, did not speak, or were not 
 they spoke not, did not speak, or were not 
 
 PLUPERFECT, 
 or compound of the imperfect. 
 
 I had not spoken, or had not been 
 thou hadst not spoken, or hadst not been 
 he had not spoken, or had not been 
 nous n'avions pas pari é we had not spoken, or had not been 
 vous n'aviez pas pari é you had not spoken, or had not been 
 ils n'avaient pas pari é they had not spoken, or had not been 
 
 Je n'avais pas pari é 
 tu n'avais pas pari é 
 il n'avait pas pari é 
 
42 
 
 FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 PARLER to Speak, 
 
 'ami. âne. te. écrit, mère. être, zdole. gîte, opéra, ôter. tout, vowte. 
 ^at. arm. tub. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. foo\. 
 
 Je ne pari ai pas 
 tu ne pari as pas 
 il ne pari a pas 
 nous ne pari âmes pas 
 vous ne pari aies pas 
 ils ne pari èrent pas 
 
 PRETERIT DEFINITE. 
 
 / spoke not or did not speak 
 thou spokest not or didst not speak 
 he spoke not or did not speak 
 we spoke not or did not speak 
 you spoke not or did not speak 
 they spoke not or did not speak 
 
 Je n'eus pas pari é 
 tu n'eus pas pari é 
 il n'eut pas pari é 
 nous n'eûmes pas pari é 
 vous n'eûtes pas pari é 
 ils n'eurent pas pari é 
 
 PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
 or compound of the preterit. 
 I had not spoken 
 thou hadst not spoken 
 he had not spoken 
 we had not spoken 
 you had not spoken 
 they had not spoken 
 
 Je ne pari erai pas 
 tu ne pari eras pas 
 il ne pari era pas 
 nous ne pari erons pas 
 vous ne pari erez pas 
 ils ne pari eront pas 
 
 FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 / shall or will not speak 
 thou shall or will not speak 
 he shall or will not speak 
 we shall or ivill not speak 
 you shall or will not speak 
 they shall or will not speak 
 
 Je n'aurai pas pari é 
 tu n'auras pas pari é 
 il n'aura pas pari é 
 nous n'aurons pas pari é 
 vous n'aurez pas pari é 
 ils n'auront pas pari é 
 
 FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
 or compound of the future. 
 
 I shall or will not have spoken 
 thou shall or will not have spoken 
 he shall or will not have spoken 
 we shall or will not have spoken 
 you shall or will not have spoken 
 they shall or will not have spoken 
 
 Je ne pari erais pas 
 tu ne pari erais pas 
 il ne pari erait pas 
 nous ne pari erions pas 
 vous ne pari eries pas 
 ils ne pari er aient pas 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT, 
 
 I should.^ icould, could, or might 
 
 thou shouldsl, wouldst, couldst, or mightst 
 
 he should, would, could, or might 
 
 we should, would, could, or might 
 
 you should, would, could, or might 
 
 they should, would, could, or might 
 
 H 
 
 PAST, 
 or compound of the present. 
 
 Je n'aurais pas pari é, 
 or je n'' eusse pas pari é 
 tu n'aurais pas pari é, 
 or tu n'^eusses pas pari é 
 il n'aurait pas pari e', 
 or il n'eût pas pari é 
 
 I should, would, could, 
 or might not have spoken 
 
 thou shouldst, wouldst, couldst^ 
 or mightst not have spoken 
 
 he should, would, could, 
 or might not have spoken 
 
FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 PARLER to speak. 
 
 43 
 
 -mur. raiîr. jewne. jeî2ne. boite. bo?te. ancre, tngrat. onàe, un. amen 
 ^j, as s in pleasure, gn, as ni in Mnion. ill^ as ///, in Wi/Ztam 
 
 nous n'aurions pas pari é 
 or nous n eussions pas- pari é 
 vous n'auriez pas pari é 
 or vous n^ eussiez pas pari é 
 ils n'auraient pas pari é 
 or ils n'eussent pas pari é 
 
 we should, would, could, 
 or might not have spoken 
 
 you should, icould, could, 
 or might not have spoken 
 
 they should, would, could, 
 or might not have spoken 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Ne parL e pas 
 qu'il ne pari e pas 
 "He pari ans pas 
 ne pari ez pas 
 qu'ils ne pari ent pas 
 
 speak not or do not speak (thou) 
 
 let him not speak 
 
 let us not speak 
 
 speak not or do not speak {you) 
 
 let them not speak 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Que je ne pari e pas 
 que tu ne pari es pas 
 qu'il ne pari e pas 
 que nous ne pari ions pas 
 que vous ne pari iez pas 
 qu'ils ne pari ent pas 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 that I may not speak 
 that thou mayst not speak 
 that he may not speak 
 that ice may not speak 
 that you may not speak 
 that they may not speak 
 
 Que je n'aie pas pari é 
 que tu n'aies pas pari é 
 qu'il n'ait pas pari é 
 que nous n'ayons pas pari é 
 que vous n'ayez pas pari é 
 qu'ils n'aient pas pari é 
 
 PRETERIT or PAST, 
 or compound of the present. 
 
 that I may not have spoken 
 that thou mayst not have spoken 
 that he may nst have spoken 
 that we may not have spoken 
 that you may not have spoken 
 that they may not have spoken 
 
 Que je ne pari asse pas 
 que tu ne pari asses pas 
 qu'il ne pari ât pas 
 que nous ne pari assions pas 
 que vous ne pari assiez pas 
 qu'ils ne pari assent pas 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 that I might not speak 
 that thou 7}iightst not speak 
 that he inigltt not speak 
 that we ynighl not speak 
 ^hatyou might not speak 
 that they might not speak 
 
 PLUPERFECT, 
 or compound of the imperfect. 
 
 Que je n'eusse pas pari é 
 que tu n'eusses pas pari é 
 qu'il n'eût pas pari é 
 que nous n'eussions pas pari é 
 que vous n'eussiez pas pari é 
 qu'ils n'eussent pas pari é 
 
 that I migJtt not have spoken 
 that thou mightst not have spoken 
 that he tnight not have spoken 
 thai we might not have spokm 
 tJial you might not have spoken 
 that they jnight not have spoken 
 2 F 
 
44 
 
 FIRST CONJUGATION, 
 
 PARLER to Speak. 
 
 cmi. âne. te. écrit, mère. ttre. idole, gîte, opéra, ôter. tout, voûte 
 al. arm. tub. ale. mare, there, tdiom. eel. opera, over. too. fool. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB. 
 
 Parler 
 
 to speak. 
 
 (Interrogatively,) 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 -F- PRESENT. 
 
 Pari e-jet do I speak or am I speaking 
 
 pari e5-tu dost thou speak or art thou speaking 
 
 pari c-t-il does he speak or is he speaking 
 
 pari o?w-nous do we speak or are ice speaking 
 
 pari esf-vous do you speak or are you speaking 
 
 pari en/-ils do they speak or are they speaking 
 
 -G- PERFECT or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 
 
 or compound of the present. 
 
 Ai- je pari é have I spoken or did I speak 
 
 as-tu pari é hast thou spoken or didst thou speak 
 
 a-t-il pari é has he spoken or did he speak 
 
 avons-nous pari é have we spoken or did we speak 
 
 avez-vous pari é have you spoken or did you speak 
 
 ont-ils pari é have they spoken or did they speak 
 
 -H- IMPERFECT. 
 
 Pari aiS'je did I speak or was I speaking 
 
 pari aw-tu didst thou speak or wast thou speaking 
 
 pari ai/-il did he speak or icas he speaking 
 
 pari lOTW-nous did we speak or were we speaking 
 
 pari zes-vous did you speak or were you speaking 
 
 pari aient-ila did they speak or were they speaking 
 
 -1- .PLUPERFECT, 
 
 or compound of the imperfect. 
 
 Avais-je pari é had I spoken or had I been speaking 
 
 avais-tu pari ê hadM thou spoken or Jiadst thou been speaking 
 
 avait -il pari é had he spoken or had he been speaking 
 
 avions-nous pari é had we spoken or had we been speaking 
 
 aviez-vous pari é had you spoken or had you been speaking 
 
 avaient-ils pari é had they spoken or had they been speaking - 
 
 -J- PRETERIT DEFINITE. 
 
 Pari az-je did I speak 
 
 pari as-iw didst thou speak 
 
 pari o-t-il did he speak 
 
 pari â7;ic»-noiis did we speak 
 
 pari âtes-voxvs did you speak 
 
 pari èr«7i/-ils did they speak 
 
FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 PARLE» to speak. 45 
 
 hxiuT. mwr. jeune, jeûne, boite, boîte, ancre, ingrat, onde. un. ameN 
 "•j, ass in pleasure, g-n, as ni in union, ill^ as f/i, in Wi iZi am 
 
 Kus-je pari é 
 sus-tu pari é 
 eut-il pari é 
 eûmes-nous pari é 
 eûtes-vous pari é 
 eurent-ils pari é 
 
 PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
 or compound of the preterit, 
 had I spoken 
 hadst thou spoken 
 had he spoken 
 had we spoken 
 had you spoken 
 had they spoken 
 
 Pari erai']e 
 pari eras-tVL 
 pari em-t-il 
 pari erons-nous 
 pari cres-vous 
 pari eroni-ils 
 
 FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 shall or will I speak 
 shall or will thou speak 
 shall or will he speak 
 shall or will we speak 
 shall or will you speak 
 shall or will they speak 
 
 Aurai-je pari é 
 auras-tu pari é 
 aura-t-il pari é 
 aurons-nous pari é 
 aurez-vous parH 
 auront-ils pari é 
 
 FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
 or compound of the future. 
 
 shall or will I have spoken 
 shall or wilt thou have spoken 
 shall or will he have Spoken 
 shall or will ive have spoken 
 shall or will you have spoken 
 shall or will they have spoken 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 Pari erais-je sliould^ would., could., or might I speak 
 
 pari erais-txi shouldst., wouldst, couldst., or mightst thou . 
 
 pari erait-il should., would., could., or might he speak 
 
 pari enonjf-nous should., would., could., or might we speak 
 
 pari eriez-vovis should., would., could., or might you speak 
 
 pari eraient-'iis should^ would, could, or might they speak 
 
 Aurais-je pari é, 
 or eussé-je pari é 
 aurais-tu pari é, 
 or eusses-tu pari é 
 aurait-il pari é, 
 or eût-il pari é 
 ■aurions-nous pari é, 
 or eussions-nous pari 
 auriez-vous pari e, 
 or eussiez-vous pari é 
 auraient-ils pari é, 
 or eussent-ils pari é 
 
 PAST, 
 or compound of the present 
 
 should, would, could, 
 
 or might I have spoken 
 shouldst, wouldst, couldst, 
 
 or mightst thou have spoken 
 should, would, could, 
 
 or might he have spoken 
 should, icoidd, could, 
 : or might we have spoken 
 
 should, would, could, 
 
 or might you have spoken 
 should, would, could, 
 
 or might they have spoken 
 
46 
 
 FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 to speak. 
 
 'aim âne. te. écrit, mère. être, idole, gîte, opéra, ôter. t<mt. vowte 
 "^at. arm. iuh. aie. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB. 
 
 Parler to speak. (Negatively and Interrogatively.) 
 
 -F- 
 
 Ne pari é-je pas 
 ne pari es-tu pas 
 ne pari e-t-il pas 
 ne pari ons-nous pas 
 ne pari es-vous pas 
 ne pari en/-ils pas 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 do I not speak or am I not speaking 
 dost thou not speak or art thou not speaking 
 does he not speak or is he not speaking 
 do we not speak or are we not speaking 
 do you not speak or are you not speaking 
 do they not speak or are they not speaking 
 
 N'ai-je pas pari é 
 n'as-tu pas pari é 
 n'a-t-il pas pari é 
 n'avons-nous pas pari é 
 n'avez-vous pas pari é 
 n'ont-ils pas pari ê 
 
 PERFECT or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 
 or compound of the present. 
 
 have Inot spoken.,did I not speak^ 
 
 or have Inot been speaking 
 hast thou not spoken, didst thou not speak^ 
 
 or hast thou not been speaking 
 has he not spoken, did he not speak: 
 
 or has he not been speaking 
 have ivc not spoken, did we not speak^ 
 
 or have we not been speaking 
 have you not spoken, did you not speak 
 
 or have you not been speaking 
 have they not spoken,, did they not speak^ 
 
 or have they not been speaking 
 
 -H. 
 
 Ne pari ais-je pas 
 ne pari ais- tu pas 
 ne pari ai^-il pas 
 ne pari tons-nous pas 
 ne pari ies-vous pas 
 ne pari aient-ils pas 
 
 -i- 
 
 N'avais-je pas pari é 
 n'avais-tu pas pari é 
 n'avait-il pas pari é 
 n'avions-nous pas pari é 
 n'aviez-vous pas pari é 
 n'avaient-ils pas pari é 
 
 -j- 
 
 Ne pari az-je pas 
 ne pa.rl as-tu pas 
 ne pari a-t-il pas 
 ne pari âmes-nous pas 
 ne pari âies-vous pas 
 ne pari èren/-ils pas 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 did I not speak or was I not speaking 
 didst thou not speak or wast thou not speaking 
 did he not speak or was he not speaking 
 did we not speak or were we not speaking 
 did you not speak or were you not speaking 
 did they not speak or if;ere they not speaking 
 
 PLUPERFECT, 
 or compound of the imperfect. 
 
 had I not spoken or had Inot been "] 
 
 hadst thou not spoken or hadst thou not been 
 had he not spoken or had he not been 
 had we not spoken or had we not been T » 
 
 had you not spoken or had you not been 
 had they not spoken or had they not been 
 
 PRETERIT DEFINITE. 
 
 did I not speak 
 didst thou not speak 
 did he not speak 
 did we not speak 
 did. you not speak 
 did they not speak 
 
 U 
 
FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 PARLER to speak 
 
 \7 
 
 ^mur. ïnili. jeune, jeûne, boite, boîte, ancre, ingrat, oncle, un. amew. 
 ^j, as s m pleasure, gn, as ni in union. i7/, as ZZz, in Willi axa. 
 
 Pî'cus-je pas pari é 
 n'eus-tu pas pari é 
 n'eut-il pas pari é 
 n'eûmes-nous pas pari é 
 n'eûtes-vous pas pari é 
 n'eurent-ils pas pari é 
 
 PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
 
 or compound of the preterit, 
 had I not spoken 
 hadst thou not spoken 
 had he not spoken 
 had ive not spoken 
 had you not spoken 
 had they not spoken 
 
 Ne pari erai-je pas 
 ne pari eras-tu pas 
 ne pari era-t-il pas 
 ne pari erons-nous pas 
 no pari eres-vous pas 
 ne pari eron/-ils pas 
 
 FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 shall or will I not speak 
 shall or wilt thou not speak 
 shall or will he not speak 
 shall or will we not speak 
 shall or tvill you not speak 
 shall or will they not speak- 
 
 N'aurai-je pas pari é 
 n'auras-tu pas pari é 
 n'aura-t-il-pas pari é 
 n'aurons-nous pas pari é 
 n'aurez-vous pas pari é 
 n'auront-ils pas pari é 
 
 FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
 or compound of the. future. 
 
 shall or vhU I not have spoken 
 shall or wilt thou not have spoken 
 shall or will he not have spoknn 
 shall or will ive not have spoken 
 shall or will you not have spoken 
 shall or will they not have spoken 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 Ne pari emw-je pas 
 ne pari erais-tu. pas 
 ne pari erai/-il pas 
 ne pari erzons-nous pas 
 ne pari cn'es-vous pas 
 ne pari eraien/-ils pas 
 
 should, would, could, or might I 
 shouldst, wouldst, couldst, or mightsi thou 
 should, would, could, or might he 
 should, would, could, or might we 
 should, would, couldy or might you 
 should, would, could, or might they 
 
 PAST, 
 or compound of the present 
 
 N'aurais-je pas pari é, 
 or n'eussé-jepas pari é 
 n'aurais-tu pas pari é, 
 or n''eussei-tu pas pari é 
 n'aurait-il pas pari é, 
 or n'' eût-il pas pari é 
 n'aurions-nous pas pari é, 
 or n"" eussions-nous pas pari é 
 n'auriez-vous pas pari é, 
 or n'eussitz-vous pas pari é 
 n'auraient-ils pas pari é, 
 01 n'' eussent-ils pas pari é 
 
 should, would, could^ 
 
 or might I not have spoken 
 shouldst, wouldst, couldst, 
 
 or mightst thou not have spoken 
 should, would, could, 
 
 or might he not have spoken 
 should, would, could, 
 
 or might we not have spoken _ 
 should, would, could, 
 
 or might you not have spoken 
 should, would, could, 
 
 or might they not have spoken 
 
 2 I 2 
 
48 
 
 OBSERVATIONS ON SOME VERBS. 
 
 Of Irregularities in some Verbs of the First Conjugation. 
 
 N. B. Whai Jollov)S tvill le letter studied after the pupil shall have 
 learned the other three conjugations. 
 
 88. Of the verbs of the Jirst conjugation , that is, of all the verbs having 
 the termination of tlie infinitive present, in er, (amounting to about 2500,) 
 four only are, properly speaking, irregular ; that is, carmot take the termi- 
 nations of the model verb, parler to speak, in all their tenses and persons 
 these verbs are, s'en aller, pagellâ.— aZZer, pagel22.-cnt"oyer, pagel23,— 
 and renvoyer, conjugated like envoyer. 
 
 89. However, besides these four irregular verbs, there are some, which 
 though generally classed among the regular verbs of the ^rsf conjugation. 
 undergo some changes in the orthography of some of their tenses and per- 
 sons ; these irregularities deserve so much the more attention, as they are 
 absolutely necessary to a correct pronmiciation. 
 
 90. This subject has not been clearly explained in any books published 
 for the use of the English pupil. The following directions will supply the 
 deficiency : 
 
 91. Some of the vei'bs ending with eler — as, appeler to call, generally 
 speaking, take a second I, in those tenses and persons only, in which the let. 
 ter I is followed by e, es, ent. Those tenses cind persons are the following :— 
 
 j'appelle 
 
 j'appellerai 
 nous appellerons 
 j'appellerais 
 nous appellerions 
 
 0, que j'appelle 
 
 tu appelles 
 
 tu appelleras 
 vous appellerez 
 tu appellerais 
 vous appelleriez 
 appelle 
 
 que tu appelles 
 
 il appelle 
 ils appellent 
 il appellera 
 ils appelleront 
 il appellerait 
 ils appelleraient 
 qu'il appelle 
 qu'ils appellent 
 qu'il appelle" 
 qu'ils appellent. 
 
 92. Conjugale in the same manner: — atteler to put to — amonceler to 
 neap — chanceler to stagger — dételer to unteam — étinceler to sparkle — 
 ficeler to tie with pack thread — niveler to level — rappeler to recall — renou- 
 veler to renew. 
 
 93. Some other verbs, ending also with eler, instead of taking a second I 
 ill those tenses and persons, in which the letter I is followed by c, es, ent 
 take a grave accent upon the e, which precedes the I — as, peler to peal. 
 
 je pèle 
 
 je pèlerai 
 
 nous pèlerons 
 je pèlerais 
 
 nous ]>èlerions 
 
 que je pèle 
 
 tu pèles 
 
 tu pèleras 
 vous pèlerez 
 tu pèlerais 
 vous pèleriez 
 pèle 
 
 que tu pèles 
 
 il pèle 
 ils pèlent 
 il pèlera 
 ils pèleront 
 il pèlerait 
 ils pèleraient 
 qu'il pèle 
 qu'ils pèlent 
 qu'il pèle 
 qu'ils pèlent. 
 
 94. Conjugate in the same manner : — lourreler lo torment — congeler to 
 congeal — dégeler to thaw — geler to freeze — harceler to torment — regder 
 to freeze again 
 
OP THE FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 49 
 
 95. Some of the verbs ending with eter — as, jeter to throw, take a 
 second t, in tliose tenses and persons only in which the letter t is followed 
 hy e, 
 
 ent. 
 je jette 
 
 je jetterai 
 nous jetterons 
 je jetterais 
 nous jetterions 
 
 a que je jette 
 
 tu jettes 
 
 tu jetteras 
 vous jetterez 
 tu jetterais 
 vous jetteriez 
 jette 
 
 que tu jettes 
 
 il jette 
 ils jettent 
 il jettera 
 ils jetteront 
 il jetterait 
 ils jetteraient 
 qu'il jette 
 qu'ils jettent 
 qu'il jette 
 qu'ils jettent. 
 
 96. Conjugate in the same manner : — cacheter to seal — décacheter to un- 
 seal — projeter to project — recacheter to seal again. 
 
 97. Some other verbs, also ending with eter, instead of taking a second t 
 in those tenses and persons in which the t is followed by e, es, enf, take 
 a grave accent upon the c which precedes the t — as, acheter to buy. 
 
 F j'achète 
 
 L j'achèterai 
 
 N j'achèterais 
 p 
 
 Q que j'achète 
 
 tu achètes il acheté 
 
 ils achètent 
 tu achèteras il achètera 
 
 ils achèteront 
 tu achèterais il achèterait 
 
 ils achèteraient 
 achète qu'il achète 
 
 qu'ils achètent 
 que tu achètes qu'il achète 
 
 qu'ils achètent. 
 98 Conjugate in the same manner: — colleter to collar — caqueter to 
 coquet — décolleter to uncover the neck — étiqueter to \a,hG\— suracheter to 
 overpay — trompeter to summon with sound of trumpet. , 
 
 99. Conjugate also, in the same manner, all verbs ending with 
 ecer — as, dépecer to carve, I ever — as, achever to finish, 
 emer — as, semer to sow, evrer — as, sevrer to wean 
 ener — as, mener to lead, j 
 
 100. All verbs ending with 
 
 ébrer — as, célébrer to celebrate, 
 
 ecer — as, rapiécer to piece, 
 
 écher — as, lécher to lick, 
 
 " éder — as, posséder to possess, 
 
 égler — as, régler to regulate, 
 
 égner — diS, régner. to reign, 
 
 égrer — as, réintégrer to reinstate 
 
 éguer — as, alléguer to allege, 
 
 éler — as, révéler to reveal, 
 
 émer — as, blasphémer to blaspheme, 
 
 ener — as, aliéner to alienate^ 
 
 équer — as, hypothéquer to mortgage, 
 
 érer — as, espérer to hope, 
 
 éter — as, inquiéter to make uneasy, 
 
 étrer — as, pénétrer to penetrate 
 
50 
 
 OBSERVATIONS ON SOME VERBS. 
 
 change the acute accent which is on the c of the last syllable but one, 
 (the penultimate,) into a grave accent^ in those tenses and persons in 
 wiiich that penultimate syllable is followed by c, es^ ent — as, <^sptrej to 
 
 j espère 
 
 tu espères 
 
 L 
 
 j'espérerai 
 
 tu espéreras 
 
 
 nous espérerons 
 
 vous espérerez 
 
 N 
 
 j'espèreraiS 
 
 tu espérerais 
 
 
 nous espérerions 
 
 . vous espéreriez 
 
 P 
 
 
 espère 
 
 a 
 
 que j'espère 
 
 que tu espèresi 
 
 hope. 
 
 il espère 
 ils espèrent 
 il espérera 
 ils espérerons 
 il espérerait 
 ils espéreraient 
 qu'il espère 
 qu'ils espèrent 
 qu'il espère 
 qu'ils espèrent. 
 
 101. In verbs ending with cer — as, avancer to advance, a cedilla, that 
 is a small comma, (ç) is put under the c, in those tenses and persons in 
 which the c is followed by a, o, in order to preserve the soft sound the 
 c has in the infinitive present, and in other tenses and persons. See 
 page 11, Art. 40. Cedilla. 
 
 102. In verbs ending with ger — as, négliger to neglect; the g having 
 the sound of J, an e mute must be put after the g, in those tenses and per- 
 sons in whicli the g is followed by a, o ; in order to preserve the sound 
 of j, throughout tlie tenses. 
 
 103. In the verbs ending with 
 
 ayer — as, essayer to try, 
 
 éyer — as, grasseyer to speak thick, 
 
 oyer — as, employer to employ, 
 
 uyer — as, appuyer to support, 
 
 the y is changed into i, in those tenses and persons only, in which 
 the y is followed by e, es, ent ; but y is preserved when followed by any 
 other letters, even when followed by i — as, essayer to try. 
 
 The pronunciation of this verh being very difficult, it is figured unde? 
 every person. 
 
 -A- essayer, 
 é-sè-yé, 
 
 -C- essayant, -e- 
 é-sè-yan. 
 
 essaye, 
 é-sè-yé. 
 
 -F- j'essaie, 
 
 j.é-sè, 
 
 tu essaies, 
 tu é-sè, 
 il essaie, 
 
 il é-sé, 
 
 nous essayons, 
 nou z.é-sè-yon, 
 
 vous essayez, 
 vou z.é-sè-yé, 
 
 ils essaient, 
 il z.é.sè. 
 
 
 -H- j'essayais, 
 j.é-sè.yè,_ 
 
 tu essayais, 
 tu é-se-yè, 
 
 il essayait, 
 il e-sè-yè. 
 
 nous essayions, 
 nou z.é-sé-yion, 
 
 VOUS essayiez, 
 vou z.é-sè-yié, 
 
 ils essayaient 
 il z.é.sè-yè. 
 
 
OP THE FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 51 
 
 -J- j'essayai, 
 
 j.é-sè-yé, 
 tu essayas, 
 
 tu é-sè-yâ, 
 il essaya, 
 
 il é-sè-ya, 
 
 -L- j'essaierai, 
 
 j.é-sè-ré, 
 
 tu essaieras 
 
 tu é-sè-râ 
 
 il essaiera, 
 
 il ,é-sè-ra, 
 
 -N- j'essaierais, 
 
 j.é-sè-rè, 
 tu essaierais, 
 
 tu é-sè-rè, 
 il essaierait, 
 
 il é-sè-rè, 
 
 -p. 
 
 é-sè, 
 
 qu'il essaie, 
 k.il é-sè, 
 
 -Q- que j'essaie, 
 
 ke j.é-sè, 
 que tu essaies, 
 
 ke tu é-sè, 
 qu'il essaie, 
 
 k.il é-sè, 
 
 -s- que j'essayasse, 
 
 ke j.é-sè-yas, 
 que tu essayasses, 
 
 ke tu é-sè-yas 
 qu'il essayât, 
 
 k.il é-sè-ya, 
 
 nous essayâmes, 
 
 nou z.é-sè-yam, 
 VOUS essayâtes, 
 
 vou z.é-sè-yat, 
 ils essayèrent. 
 
 il z.é-sè-yèr. 
 
 nous essaierons, 
 
 nou z.é-sè-ron, 
 VOUS essaierez, 
 
 vou z.é-sè-ré, 
 ils essaieront. 
 
 il z.é-sè-ron. 
 
 nous essaierions, 
 
 nou z.é-sè-rion, 
 VOUS essaieriez, 
 
 vou z.é-sè-rié, 
 ils essaieraient. 
 
 il z.é-sè-rê. 
 
 essayons, 
 
 é-sè -y on, 
 essayez, 
 
 é-sè -y é, 
 qu'ils essaient. 
 
 k.il z.é-sè. 
 
 que nous essayions, 
 ke nou z.é-sè. y ion, 
 
 que vous essayiez, 
 ke vou z.é sè-yié, 
 
 qu'ils essaient. 
 k.il z.é-sè. 
 
 que nous essayassions, 
 ke nou z.é-sè -y a-sion, 
 
 que vous essayassiez, 
 ke vou z.é-sè-ya-sié, 
 
 qu'ils essayassent. 
 k.il z.é-sè-yas. 
 
 104. In verbs whose participle present ends with uant — as, saluant, 
 from saluer to bow ; a diaeresis is put upon the i, thus, ï, to cause the u 
 and Ï to be pronounced separately in the first and second person plural of 
 the imperfect of the indicative : nous salmons we bowed — vous saluiez 
 you bowed; and of the subjunctive présent: que nous salmons that we 
 may bow — que vous saluiez that you may bow. 
 
 105. All the verbs of that kind are found in the first conjugation, except 
 conclure to conclude — and exclure to exclude, which belong to the fourth 
 conjugation. 
 
52 OP THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 
 
 Of the Second Conjugation. 
 
 106. The verbs of the second conjugation, like those of the 
 first, are known by the termination of the present of the in- 
 finitive. 
 
 107. The present of the infinitive of the second conjugation 
 has for terminatio» ir — as, fin ir to finish. 
 
 108. All verbs whose present of the infinitive end with ir, 
 to the amount of about 366, are of the second conjugation ; and, 
 if regular, are conjugated Yike finir to finish ; which is hereaf- 
 ter conjugated to be used as a model. 
 
 109. There are in the second conjugation about 294 regular 
 verbs which take the termination of finir to finish, and 92 ir- 
 regular which are all conjugated in this volume, and which are 
 to be found in the alphabetical list of all the irregular verbs, 
 pagel62. 
 
 110. To diminish the number of the irregiilar verbs of this conjuga- 
 tion, several schemes have been invented. Ajnong others, Levizac, in his 
 grammar, has divided the verbs of this conjugation into four^ what he 
 calls branches; this plan, which is not in accordance with any of our 
 French grammars, affords no advantage over the old one, as every prac- 
 tical teaclier must ha^e found out, to his great annoyance ; it is besides 
 erroneous in many instances. I shall here mention some of the errors 
 alluded to : page 151, Levizac's Grammar, sen tir^ to feel, is there given 
 as the model verb, of all the verbs composing the second branch, page 150, 
 among which, are, dor mir to sleep — redor mir to sleep again — ser vir to 
 serve ; and several others. 
 
 'Now taking any tense of the model verb, sen tir to feel ; the present 
 of the indicative, for instance, we shall have — 
 
 je sen s, je dor s, je ser s, 
 
 tu sen s, tu dor s, tu ser s, 
 
 il sen t, il dor f, il ser t, 
 
 nous sen tons, npns dor tonSy nous ser ions, 
 
 vouj sen tez, vous dor tez, vous ser tez, 
 
 ils sen tent, ils dor tent, ils ser tent. 
 
 Takmg any other tense, the future, for instance, we shall have — 
 
 je sen tirai, je dor tirai, je ser tirai, 
 
 tu sen tiias, tu dor tiras, tu ser tiras, 
 
 il sen tira, il dor tira, il ser tira, 
 
 nous sen tirons, nous dor tirons, nous ser tirons 
 
 vous sen tirez, vous dor tirez, vous ser tii-ez, 
 
 ils sen tirant, ils d^ tiront, ils ser tirant, 
 
 and so on for the otlier tenses, which are by no means correct. The fact 
 is, that Levizac, deceived by the first three persons of the present of the 
 indicati^'e, which happened to be right, concluded, without further inquiry, 
 that the rest would alsc be riglit 
 
OP THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 
 
 53 
 
 These faults, and a great many others, are in the. first edition of 
 Levi/ac's ; since that first edition, the grammar has gone tlirough nine 
 editions in England, and through seven in America, and tlie same faults 
 are still in it, although the preface of every edition announces that the 
 work has been thoroughly revised, corrected, and improved, by the ablest 
 masters. 
 
 111. Hint. The best way for a pupil to ascertain whether a verb end- 
 ing m the present of the infinitive, with ir, is regular or irregular : he 
 must look for it in the alphabetical list of all the irregular verbs, given at 
 page 162, if met there, the scholar will be referred to the page where it is 
 conjugated ; if not to be met in the above mentioned table, it is a regular 
 verb, and is to be conjugated like the model verb, ^mr to finish. 
 
 112. Those who have already learned the verbs, will readily ascertain 
 whether a verb of the second conjugation, is regular or irregular, if they 
 remember that issant is the termination of the participle present, of all the 
 regular verbs of the second conjugation. 
 
 113. Conjugate in the same manner- 
 the following verbs : — 
 
 -as, fin ir to finish, 
 
 adouc ir 
 
 to soften. 
 
 gém ir 
 
 to groan, 
 
 compat ir 
 
 to sympathise, 
 
 noire ir 
 
 to blacken 
 
 démol ir 
 
 to pull down. 
 
 per ir 
 
 to perish, 
 
 éblou ir 
 
 to dazzle. 
 
 pun ir 
 
 to punish, 
 
 établ ir 
 
 to establish, 
 
 rempl ir 
 
 to fill, 
 
 fourn ir 
 
 to furnish. 
 
 sais ir 
 
 to seize. 
 
 114. For the formation of the compound tenses, see page 35, 
 art. 86 and 87. 
 
54 SECOND CONJUGATION. FINIR tO finîsJu 
 
 'ami. âne. te. écrit, mère. être, idole, gîte, opéra, ôter. tout, vaûte 
 "^at. arm. tub. a\e. mare, there, tdiom. tel. opera, over. too. fool. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB. 
 
 Finir to finish. (Affirmatively») 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 -A- 
 
 Fin ir 
 
 Avoir fin i 
 
 -c- 
 
 Fin issant 
 
 Ayant fin i 
 
 -E- 
 
 Fint 
 
 -F- 
 
 Je fin is 
 
 tu fin is 
 
 il fin it 
 
 nous fin issons 
 
 vous fin isses 
 
 ils fin issent 
 
 -G- 
 
 J'ai fin i 
 
 tu as fin i 
 
 il a fin t 
 
 nous avons fin i 
 
 vous avez fin i 
 
 ils ont fin t 
 
 -H- 
 
 Je fin issais 
 tu fin issais 
 il fin issait 
 nous fin issions 
 vous fin issies 
 ils fin usaient 
 
 J'avais fin i 
 tu avais fin t 
 i! avait fin i 
 nous avions fin t 
 vous aviez fin i 
 ils avaient fin t 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 to finish 
 
 PAST or PERFECT, 
 or compound of the present. 
 to have finished 
 
 PARTICIPLE PRESENT Or ACTIVE, 
 
 finishing 
 
 COMPOUND OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 
 
 having finis] ted 
 
 PARTICIPLE PAST Or PASSIVE. 
 
 finished 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 I finish., do finish., or am finishing 
 thoufinishest, dost finish, or art finishing 
 he finishes, does finish, or is finishing 
 we finish, do finish, or are finishing 
 you finish, do finish, or are finishing 
 they finish, do finish, or are finishing 
 
 PERFECT or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 
 or compoimd of the present. 
 I have finished, did finish, or have been 
 thou hast finished, didst finish, or hast been 
 he has finished, did finish, or has been 
 we have finished, did finish, or have been 
 you have finished, did finish, or have been 
 they have finished, did finish, or have been 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 I finished, did finish, or was finishing 
 thou finish edst, didst finish, or wast finishing 
 he finished, did finish; or was finishing 
 we finished, did finish, or were finishing 
 you finished, did finish, or were finishing 
 they finished, did finish, or were finishing 
 
 PLUPERFECT, 
 or compound of the imperfect. 
 I had finished or had been finishing 
 thou hadst finished or hadst been finishing 
 he had finished or had been finishing 
 we had finished or had been finishing 
 you had finished or had beenfinishing 
 they hadfinished or had beenfinishing 
 
 I' 
 
SECOND CONJUGATTON. FINIR tO Jînish, 55 
 
 ^muT. mûr. j^une. jewno. boite, boîte, ancre, ingrat, onde. un. arnsN. 
 ■♦j, as s in pleasure. g-n, as ni in union. ill^ as lli in WiZZiam. 
 
 Je fin is 
 tu fin is 
 il fin i^ 
 ROUS fin imes- 
 vous fini/es 
 ils fin irtnt 
 
 J'eus fin i 
 tu eus fin i 
 il eut fin i 
 nous eûmes fin i 
 vous eûtes fin i 
 ils eurent fin i 
 
 -L- 
 
 Je fin irai 
 tu fin iras 
 il fin ira 
 nous fin irons 
 vous fin irez 
 ils fin iron/ 
 
 -M- 
 
 J'aurai fin t 
 tu auras fin i 
 il auras fin i 
 nous aurons fin i 
 vous aurez fin i 
 ils auront fini 
 
 PRETERIT DEFINITE. 
 
 I finished or did finish 
 thou finishedst or didst finish 
 he finished or did finish 
 we finished or did finish 
 youfinished or did finish 
 they finished or did finish 
 
 PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
 or compound of the preterit, 
 
 I had finished 
 thou hadst finished 
 he had finished 
 we had finished 
 you had finished 
 
 they had finished 
 
 FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 / shall or will finish 
 thou shall or wilt finish 
 he shall or will finish 
 we shall or ^villfinish 
 you shall or ivill finish 
 they shall or ivill finish 
 
 FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
 or compound of the future. 
 
 I shall or will have finished 
 thou shalt or will have finished 
 he shall or will have finished 
 we shall or will have finished 
 you shall or will have finished 
 they shall or will have finished 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 -N- 
 
 Je fin irais 
 tu fin irais 
 il fin irait 
 nous fin irions 
 vous finiriez 
 ils fin iraient 
 
 J'aurais fin i, 
 or f eusse fini 
 tu aurais fin i, 
 or tu eusses fin i 
 il aurait fin i, 
 or il eût fin i 
 
 I should^ xoould^ could, or might finish 
 
 thou shouldst, wouldst, couldst, or mightst finish 
 
 he should, loould, could, or might finish 
 
 we should, would, could, or might finish 
 
 you should, would, could, or might finish 
 
 they should, would, could, or might finish 
 
 PAST, 
 or compound of the present. 
 
 I should, would, could, 
 
 or might have finished 
 thou shouldst, wouldst, couldst-, 
 
 or mightst have finished 
 he should, loould, could, 
 or might have finished 
 2G 
 
56 
 
 SBCOXD CONJUGATION. 
 
 FINIR to finish. 
 
 'ami. âne. te. écrit, mere. ^tre. tdoie. gîte, opéra, ôter. tout, voûte 
 "^at. arm. twb. aie. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over, too. fool. 
 
 nous aurions fin i, 
 or nous eussions fin i 
 vous auriez fin z, 
 or t'oiw eussiez fin i 
 ils auraient fin i, 
 or ils eussent fin i 
 
 we should^ would, could^ 
 or might have finished 
 
 you should, would, could-, 
 or might have finished 
 
 they should, would, could-, 
 or might have finished 
 
 Fin w 
 qu'il fin isse 
 fin issons 
 • fin issez 
 qu'ils fin issent 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 finish (thou) 
 let him finish 
 let us finish 
 finish (you) 
 let them finish 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Que je fin isse 
 que tu fin isses 
 qu'il fin isse 
 que nous fin issions 
 que vous fin issiez 
 qu'ils fin issent 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 that I mayjinish 
 that thou may St finish 
 that he may finish 
 that ice may finish 
 that you may finish 
 that they may finish 
 
 Que j'aie fin i 
 que tu aies fin i 
 qu'il ait fin i 
 que nous ayoïis fin i 
 que vous ayez fin t 
 qu'ils aient fin i 
 
 PRETERIT or PAST, 
 or compound of the present, 
 
 that I may havefinished 
 that thou mayst havefinished 
 that he may havefinished 
 that we may havefinished 
 that you may havefinished 
 that they may havefinished 
 
 Que je fin isse 
 que tu Vin isses 
 qu'il fin ît 
 que nous fin issions 
 que vous fin issiez 
 qu'ils fin issent 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 that 1 might finish 
 that thou mightst finish 
 that he might finish 
 that we might finish 
 that you might finish 
 that they might finish . 
 
 Que j'eusse fin i 
 que tu eusses fin i 
 qu'il eût fin i 
 que nous eussions fin i 
 que vous eussiez fin i 
 qu'ils eussent fin i 
 
 PLUPERFECT, 
 cr compound of the imperfect. 
 
 that I might havefinished 
 that thou mightst havefinished 
 that he might havefinished 
 that we might havefinished 
 that you might havefinished 
 that they might havefinished 
 
SECOND CONJUGATION. 
 
 FINIR to finish. 57 
 
 ^mwr. mûr. jewne. jeûne, boîte, boîte, ancre, ingrat, onde. un. ameN 
 ^j, as6- in pleasure. gUy as ni in union, ill^ as /Zz, in Wi/Ziaïn. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB. 
 
 Finir to finish. (Negatively ) 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 not to finish 
 
 PAST or PERFECT, 
 
 or compound of the present, 
 not to have finished 
 
 PARTICIPLE PRESENT OT ACTIVE. 
 
 not finishing 
 
 -A- 
 
 Ne pas fin ir 
 
 N'avoir pas fin i 
 
 -c- 
 
 Ne fin issant pas 
 
 -D- COMPOUND OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 
 
 N'ayant pas fin i not having finished 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 I finish not, do not finish, or am not 
 thoufinishest not, dost not finish, or art not 
 he finishes not, does not finish, or is not 
 we finish not, do not finish, or are not 
 you finish not, do not finish, or are not 
 they finish not, do 710 1 finish, or are not 
 
 PERFECT or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 
 or compound oj the present. 
 J have not finished, did not finish, or have not "^ 
 ihouhast notfinished, didst not finish,Qvhast not 
 he has riot finished, did not finish, or has not 
 nous n'avons pas fin i we have notfinished, did not finish, or have not 
 vous n'avez pas fin i you have notfinished, did not finish, or have not 
 ils n'ont pas fin i they have notfinished, did not finish, or have not 
 
 -H- 
 
 Je ne fin issais pas 
 tu ne fin issais pas 
 il ne fin issait pas 
 nous ne fin issions pas 
 vous ne fin issiez pas 
 ils no fin issaient pas 
 -I- 
 
 Je ne fin is pas 
 tu ne fin is pas 
 il ne fin it pas 
 nous ne fin issons pas 
 vous ne fin isscs pas 
 il ne fin issent pas 
 
 -G- 
 
 Je n'ai pas fin i 
 tu n'as pas fin i 
 il n'a pas fin i 
 
 Je n'avais pas fin i 
 tu n'avais pas fin % 
 il n'avait pas fin i 
 nous n'avions pas fin i 
 vous n'aviez pas fin i 
 ils n'avaient pas fin i 
 
 IMPERFECT 
 
 I finished not, did not finish, or was 
 thoufinishedst not, didst not finish, or wast 
 he finished not, did not finish, or was 
 we finished not, did not finish, or were 
 you finished not, did not finish, or were 
 they finished not, did not finish, or were 
 
 PLUPERFECT, 
 or compound of the imperfect. 
 I had not finished or had not been 
 thou hadst notfinished or hadst not been 
 he had notfinished or had not been 
 we had notfinished or had not been 
 you had notfinished or had not been 
 they had notfinished or had not been 
 
58 
 
 SECOND CONJUGATION. FINIR tO finiSiU 
 
 ^ami. âne. te. écrit, mère. être, idole. g?te. opéra, ôter. tout, voûte 
 "^at. arm. tub. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 
 
 Je ne fin is pas 
 tu ne fin w pas 
 il ne fin it pas 
 nous ne fin îmts pas 
 vous ne fin itts pas 
 ils ne fin irtnt pas 
 
 PRETERIT DEFINITE. 
 
 1 finished not or did not finish 
 ihoufinishtdst not or didst not finish 
 he finished not or did not finish 
 we finished not or did not finish 
 you finished not or did not finish 
 they finished not or didnot finish 
 
 Je n'eus pas fin î 
 tu n'eus pas fin i 
 il n'eût pas fin i 
 nous n'eûmes pas fin i 
 vous n'eûtes pas fin i 
 ils n'eurent pas fin t 
 
 -L- 
 
 Je ne fin irai pas 
 tu ne uniras pas 
 û ne fin ira pas 
 nous ne fin irons pas 
 vous ne fin irez pas 
 ils ne fin iront pas 
 
 PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
 or compound of the preterit. 
 I had not finished 
 thou hadst not finished 
 he had not finished 
 we had not finished 
 you had not finished 
 they had not finished 
 
 FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 / shall or icill not finish 
 thou shall or icilt not finish 
 he shall or will not finish 
 we shall or icill not finish 
 you shall or will not finish 
 they shall or will not finish 
 
 Je n'aurai pas fm i 
 tu n'auras pas fin i 
 il n'aura pas fin i 
 nous n'aurons pas fin 
 vous n'aurez pas fin i 
 ils n'auront pas fin i 
 
 FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
 or compound of the future. 
 
 I shall or tcill not have finished 
 
 thou shall or wilt not have finished 
 
 he shall or will not have finished 
 
 we shall or ivill not have finished 
 
 you shall or will not have finished 
 
 they shall or will not have finished 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 Je ne fin irais pas 
 tu ne fin ij-ais pas 
 il ne fin irait pas 
 nous ne fin mons pas 
 vous ne fin iiHes pas 
 ils ne fin iraient pas 
 
 / should, would, could, or rnight 
 
 ihou shouldst, wouldst, couldst, or mightst 
 
 he should, ivould, could, or might 
 
 we should, %could, could, or might 
 
 you should, would, could, or might 
 
 Iheyshould, would, could, or might 
 
 ^f 
 
 Je n'aurais pas fin i, 
 or je n^eusse pas fin i 
 tu n'aurais pas fin i, 
 or tu n^eusses pas fin i 
 il n'aurait pas fin i, 
 or il n'eût pas fin i 
 
 or compound of the present. 
 I should, xcould, could, 
 
 or might not have finished 
 ihou shouldst, icouldst, couldsty 
 
 or mightst not havefinishedy 
 he should, would, could, 
 
 or might not have finished 
 
SECOND CONJUGATION. FINIR tO finik. Ô9 
 
 ^mwr. mûr. jeune, jeûne, boite. boîte, ancre, ingrat. e»de. un. ameN. 
 ^j, as5 in pleasure, gn, as ni in union. t7/, as Z/t, in Wi ZZt am. 
 
 nous n'aurions pas fin iy 
 or nous n'' eussions pasjin i 
 vous n'auriez pas fin z, 
 or vous n'' eussiez pasjin i 
 ils n'auraient pas fin i, 
 or ils n'eussent pasjin i 
 
 we should, loould, could-, 
 or might not havejinished 
 
 you should,, would, could^ 
 or might not havejinished 
 
 they should^ ivould,, could^ 
 or might not have Jinished 
 
 Ne fin is pas 
 qu'il ne fin isse pas 
 ne fin issons pas 
 ne fin issez pas 
 qu'ils ne fin issent pas 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Jinish not or do notjinish (thou) 
 
 let him notjinish 
 
 let us notjinish 
 
 Jinish not or do notjinish {you) 
 
 let them not Jinish 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Que je ne fin isse pas 
 que tu ne fin isses pas 
 qu'il ne fin me pas 
 que nous ne fin issinns pas 
 que vous ne fin issiez pas 
 qu'ils ne fin issent pas 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 that I may notjinish 
 that thou mayst notjinish 
 that he may notjinish 
 that ice may notjinish 
 that you may notjinish 
 that they may notjinish 
 
 -R- PRETERIT Or PAST, 
 
 or covipound of the present. 
 
 Que je n'aie pas fin t that I may not have Jinished 
 
 que tu n'aies pas fin i that thou mayst not havejinished 
 
 qu'il n'ait pas fin i that he may not havejinished 
 
 que nous n'ayons pas fin i that we may not havejinished 
 
 que vous n'ayez pas fin i that you may not havejinished 
 
 qu'ils n'aient pas fin i that they may not havejinished 
 
 Que je ne fin isse pas 
 que tu ne fin isses pas 
 qu'il ne fin?^ pas 
 que nous ne fin issions pas 
 que vous ne fin issies pas 
 qu'ils ne fin issent pas 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 that I might notjinish 
 that thou mightst notjinish 
 that he might notjinish 
 that ice might notjinish 
 that you might notjinish 
 that they might notjinish 
 
 • T- PLUPERFECT, 
 
 or compound of the imperfect. 
 Que je n'eusse pas fin i that I might not havejlnùhed 
 que tu n'eusses pas fin i that thou mightsl not havejinished 
 qu'il n'eût pas fini that he might not havejinished 
 
 que nous n'eussions pas fini thattve might not havejinished 
 que vous n'eussiez pas fin i that you might not havejinished 
 qu'ils n'eussent pas fin i that they might not havejinished 
 2 o 2 
 
60 
 
 SECOND CONJUGA.TION. FINIR tO fiuislu 
 
 *ami. dne. te. écrit, mère. être, tdole. g£te, opéra, ôter. tout, voûte. 
 ^at. arm. tub. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB. 
 
 Finir to finish (Interrogatively.) 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 -F- PRESENT. 
 
 Fin w-je do IJinish or am I finishing 
 
 fin 25-tu dost thou finish or art thou finishing 
 
 fin z/-il does he finish or is he finishing 
 
 fin W5o?i5-nous do we finish or are we finishing 
 
 fin isses-voViS do you finish or are you finishing 
 
 fin issent-i\s do they finish or are they finishing 
 
 -G- PERFECT or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 
 
 or compound of the present. 
 
 Ai- je fini have I finished or did I finish 
 
 as-tu fin i hast thou finished or didst thou finish 
 
 a-t-il fin i has he finished or rfjc? he finish 
 
 avons-nous fin i have we finished or did we finish 
 
 avez-vous fin i have you finished or did you finish 
 
 oiit-ils fin i have they finished or did they finish 
 
 -H- IMPERFECT. 
 
 Fin issais-]e did 1 finish or was I finishing 
 
 fin issais-in didst thou finish or wast thou finishing 
 
 fin issait-\\ did he finish or was he finishing 
 
 fin f55toni'-nous c?;(i we finish or ît-ere wefinishing 
 
 fin i55ies-vous (i/c? you finish or zi'cre you finishing 
 
 fin W5aien^-ils rfic? they finish or ri-ere they finishing 
 
 -I- PLUPERFECT, 
 
 or compound of the imperfect, 
 
 avais-je fin t ^ai I finished or Aa^^ I been finishing 
 
 avais-tu fin i hadst thou finished or /iac?5/ thou beenfinishing 
 
 avait-il fini had he finished or had he beenfinishing 
 
 avions-nous fin i had wefinished or had we beenfinishing 
 
 aviez- vous fin i had you finished or had you beenfinishing 
 
 avaient-ils fin i had they finished or Aad they been finishing 
 
 Fin w-je 
 fin is-tu 
 fin it-ii 
 fin £m€5-nous 
 -fin îtes-voMiS 
 fin irenZ-ils 
 
 PRETERIT DEFINITE 
 
 did I finis h 
 didst thou finish 
 did he finish 
 did we finish, 
 did you finish 
 did they finish, 
 
SECOND CONJUGATION. 
 
 FINIR to finish. 61 
 
 *mwr. mûr. jewne. jeûne, boite, boite, ancre, ingrat, onde. un. amew 
 *j, as5 in pleasure, gn, as ni in union, i//, as lli^ in Wi/Ziam. 
 
 Eus-je firwe 
 eus-tu fini 
 eut-il fin i 
 eûmes-nous fin i 
 eûtes-vous fin i 
 eurent-ils fin i 
 
 PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
 or compound of the preterit, 
 had IJinished 
 hadst thoujinished 
 had he finished 
 had we finished 
 had you finished 
 had Ihey finished 
 
 -L- 
 
 Fin irai-^e 
 fin ira5-tu 
 fin ira-t-il 
 fin irons-nous 
 fin ires- vous 
 fin ironZ-ils 
 
 FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 shall or will I finish 
 shall or will Ihou finish 
 shall or will hé finish 
 shall or will we finish 
 shall or ivill you finish, 
 shall or will Ihey finish 
 
 Aurai-je fin i 
 auras-tu fin i 
 aura-t-il fin i 
 aurons-nous fin i 
 aurez-vous fin i 
 auront-ils fin i 
 
 FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
 or compound of the future. 
 
 ihall or will I have finished 
 shall or will Ihou have finished 
 shall or loill he have finished 
 shall or ivill we have finished 
 shall or will you have finished ' 
 shall or will they have finished 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 -N- PRESENT. 
 
 Finirais-jo should., would, could, or might I finish 
 
 fin irai.s-tu shouldst, wouldst, couldst, or mightst thoufinisi' 
 
 fin irai/-il should, would, could, or might he finish 
 
 fin irions-nous should, would, could, or might we finish 
 
 fin iries-vous should, would, could, or might you finish 
 
 fin iraien^-ils should, would, could, or might they finish 
 
 Aurais-je fin i, 
 or eussé-jefin i 
 aurais-tu fin i, 
 or eusses-tufin i 
 aurait-il fin i, 
 or eût-il fin i 
 aurions-nous fin i, 
 or eussions-nous fin i 
 auriez-vous fin i 
 or eu^ssies-vous fin i 
 auraient-ils fin i, 
 or eussent'ilsfin i 
 
 PAST, 
 or compound of the present. 
 
 should, ivould, could, 
 
 or might I have finished 
 shouldst, wouldst, couldst, 
 
 or mightst thou have finis 
 should, would, could, 
 
 or might he have finished 
 should, would, could, 
 
 or might we have finished 
 should, would, could, 
 
 or might you have finished 
 should, would, could, 
 
 or might they have finished 
 
62 
 
 SECOND CONJUGATION. FINIR tO finîsh. 
 
 'ami. âne. te. écrit, mère. être, tdole. gîte, opéra, ôter. towt. voîtle. 
 *c^ «rm. twb. aie. mare, there, zdiom. cel. opera, over. too. fool. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB. 
 
 Finir to finish. (Negatively and Interrogatively.) 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Ne fin M-je pas 
 ne fin w-tu pas 
 ne fin it-ii pas 
 ne fin mon.5-nous pas 
 ne fin issez-vous pas 
 ne fin issent-ils pas 
 
 do I not finish or am I not finishing 
 dost thou not finish or art thou not finishing 
 does he not finish or is he not finishing 
 do we not finish or are we not finishing 
 do you no.t finish or are you not finishing 
 do they not finish or are they not finishing 
 
 N'ai-je pas fin i 
 n'as-tu pas fin i 
 n'a-t-il pas fin i 
 n'avons-nous pas fin i 
 n'avez- vous pas fin i 
 n'ont-ils pas fini 
 
 PERFECT or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 
 
 or compound of the present. 
 
 have Inot finished., did I not finish^ 
 
 or have I not been finishing 
 hast thou not finished, didst thou notfinishf 
 
 or hast thou not been finishing 
 has he notfinished, did he not finish., 
 
 or has he not been finishing 
 have we not finished, did xve not finish^ 
 
 or have we not been finishing 
 have you not finished, did you not finish^ 
 
 or have you not been finishing 
 have they not finished, did they not finish 
 
 or have they not beenfinishing 
 
 Ne fin issais'ie pas 
 ne fin issais-tu pas 
 no lin issait-il pas 
 ne fin issions-nous pas 
 ue fin issiez-Y ous pas 
 ne fin issaient-'ûs pas 
 
 N'avais-je pas fin i 
 n'avais-tu pas fin i 
 n'avait-il pas fin i 
 n'avions-nous pas fiii i 
 n'aviez-vous pas uni 
 n'avaient-ils pas fin i 
 
 '3- 
 
 Ne fin w-je pas 
 ne fin w-tu pas 
 ne fin t/-il pas 
 ne fin fme5-nous pas 
 ne fin îies-vons pas 
 ne fin irent-ils pas 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 did I not finish or was I not finishing 
 didst thou not finish or wast thoy. not finishing 
 did he not finish or was he not finishing 
 did we not finish or were we not finishing 
 did you not finish or were you not finishing 
 did they not finish or were they not finishing 
 
 PLUPERFECT, 
 or compound of the imperfect. 
 
 had I not finished or had I not been 
 hadst thou not finished orhadst thou not been 
 had he not finished or had he not been 
 had we not finished or had we not been 
 had you not fi.nished or hadyoitnot been 
 had they not finished or had they not been 
 
 PRETERIT DEFINITE. 
 
 did I not finish 
 didst thou not finish 
 did he not finish 
 did we not finish 
 did you not finish 
 did they not finish 
 
 ^ 
 
SECOND CONJUGATION 
 
 FINIR to finish* 63 
 
 *mMr. mûr. jeune, jeûne, hoiia. bozte. ancre, ingrat, onde. un. arne^ 
 ■^j, as s in pleasure, g-n, as ni in umon. ill^ as lli^ in Wi/Ziam 
 
 N'eus-je pas fini 
 n'eus-tu pas fin i 
 n'eut-il pas fin i 
 n'eûmes-nous pas fin i 
 n'eûtes-vous pas fin i 
 n'eurent-ils pas fin i 
 
 PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
 or compound of the preterit. 
 had I not finished 
 hadst thou not finished 
 had he not finished 
 had ive not finished 
 had you not finished 
 had they not finished 
 
 Ne fin ir'ai-je pas 
 ne fin iras-iu. pas 
 ne fin ira-t-il pas 
 ne fin irons-nous pas 
 ne fin ires-woiis pas 
 ne fin tron/-ils pas 
 
 FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 shall or will I not finish 
 shall or wilt thou not finish 
 shall or will he not finish 
 shall or will we not finish 
 shall or jvill you not finish 
 shall or will they n^t finish 
 
 N'aurai-je pas fin i 
 n'auras-tu pas fin i 
 n'aura-t-il-pas fin i 
 n'aurons-nous pas fin i 
 n'aurez-vous pas fin i 
 n'auront-ils pas fin i 
 
 FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
 or compound of the future, 
 shall or loill I not have finished 
 shall or wilt thou not have finished 
 shall or will he not have finished 
 shall or ivill we not have finished 
 shall or will you not have finished 
 shall or will they not have finished 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 -N- 
 
 Ne fin irais-ie pas 
 ne fin irais-tn pas 
 ne fin irait-il pas 
 ne fin mons-nous pas 
 i^e fin mes-vous pas 
 ne fin iraienMls pas 
 
 should, would, could, or might I 
 shouldst, wouldstr couldst, or mightst thou 
 should, ivould, could, or might he 
 should, would, could, or might we 
 should, would, couldf or might you 
 should, would, could, or might they 
 
 N'aurais-je pas fin i, 
 or n^usst-je pas fin i 
 n'aurai-s-tu pas fin i, 
 or n'eusses-tu pas fin i 
 n'aurait-il pas fin i, 
 or n'eût-il pas fin i 
 n'aurions-nous pas fin i, 
 or n' eussions-nous pas fin i 
 n'auriez-vous pas fin i, 
 or n'eussies-vous pas fin i 
 n'auraient-ils pas fin i, 
 or n'eusitnt-ils pas fin i 
 
 PAST, 
 compound of the present, 
 
 should, would, could, 
 
 or might I not have finished 
 shouldst, wouldst, couldst, 
 
 or mightst thou not have finished 
 should, would, could, 
 
 or might he not have finished 
 should, would, could, 
 
 or might we not have finished 
 should, vjould, could, 
 
 or might you not have finished 
 should, would, could, 
 
 or might they not have finished 
 
C4 OF TïlE THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 Of the Third Conjugation, 
 
 115. The verbs of the third conjugation, like those of the 
 first and of the second, are known by the termination of the 
 present of the infinitive. 
 
 116. The present of the infinitive, of the third conjugation, 
 has for its termination, oir — as, recevoir to receive. 
 
 117. All verbs whose present of the infinitive ends with oir^ 
 to the amount of 230, are of the third conjugation ; and if 
 regular, are conjugated like I'ecevoir to receive : which is here- 
 after conjugated, to be used as a model. 
 
 118. There are in the third conjugation 7 regular verbs 
 only. The regular verbs of this conjugation are easily known, 
 from the irregular ones ; they all 7 end with evoir, in the 
 present of the infinitive. 
 
 119. There are about 223 irregular verbs in this conjugation ; 
 ihey are all conjugated in this volume, and are to be found in 
 the alphabetical list of all the irregular verbs, page 162. 
 
 120. List of the 7 regular verbs, all conjugated like 
 rec evoir to receive. 
 
 aperc evoir to perceive, 
 
 cone evoir to conceive 
 
 dec evoir to deceive, 
 
 perc evoir to collect taxes 
 
 rec evoir to receive, 
 
 d evoir to owe, 
 
 red evoir to owe again. 
 
 121. When the termination of any tense or person begins 
 with a, 0, w, the c, which terminates the radical part of the 
 five regular verbs — 
 
 aperc evoir to perceive, 
 
 cone evoir to conceive, 
 
 dec evoir to deceive, 
 
 perc evoir to collect taxes, 
 
 rec evoir to receive, 
 
 take a cedilla, thus c, to change the hard sound the c would 
 have before a, o, w, into the soft sound it has in the infinitive 
 present, and in other tenses and persons, when before e. 
 
 122. In conjugating d evoir to owe, and red evoir to owe 
 again, on rec evoir, care must be taken to observe what is the 
 radical part of these two verbs. 
 
OP THE THIRD CONJUaATIOlV^. 65 
 
 lîi3. In the participle past dû owed, from devoir to owe, a 
 circumflex accent is put over the u to distinguish dû owed, 
 from du of the. 
 
 124. The circumflex accent is put on dû owed, in the mas- 
 culine singular only. 
 
 125. The participle past 7'edu owed again, from redevoir to 
 owe again, takes no accent. 
 
 126. Apercevoir to perceive, which is an active verb, is 
 very often used as a reflected verb : thus, s'apercevoir (to per- 
 ceive one's self of) that is, to notice. We say, apercevoir quel- 
 que chose to perceive something — but we say, s'apercevoir de 
 quelque chose (to perceive one's self of somethmg,) that is, to 
 notice something. It must be remembered that the verb 
 s'' apercevoir^ requires the preposition de of, before its object , 
 whereas apercevoir being an active verb, requires no preposition 
 before its object. 
 
 127. Apercevoir to perceive, forms its compound tenses with 
 avoir to have, like all other active verbs. 
 
 128. S^apercevoir to notice, is conjugated like apercevoir to 
 perceive, with this difference ; that, like all other reflected 
 verbs, it forms its compound tenses with être to be, and takes 
 two pronouns. See se lever to rise, page 92. 
 
 129. For the formation of the compound tenses, see page 85. 
 art. 86 and 87 
 
66 THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 RECEVOIR 
 
 to receive» 
 
 'ami. âne. te. ^crit. mère. être, idole, gîte, opéra, ôter. towt. voûte. 
 '*-at. arm. twb. aie. marc, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB. 
 
 Recevoir to receive. (Affirmatively.) 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Rec evoir 
 
 -B- 
 
 Avoir rec u 
 
 -c- 
 
 Rec evant 
 
 -D- 
 
 Ayant rec v, 
 
 -K- 
 
 Reçu 
 
 -F- 
 
 Je rec ois 
 tu reç ois 
 d reç oit 
 oous rec evons 
 vous rec eves 
 ils reç oivent 
 
 J'ai reç u 
 tu as reç u 
 il a reç u 
 nous avons reç u 
 vous avez reç u 
 ils ont reç u 
 
 •H- 
 
 Je rec evais 
 tu rec evais 
 il rec evait 
 nous rec evions 
 vous rec evies 
 ils rec evaieni 
 
 J'avais reç u 
 tu avais reç u 
 il avait reç u 
 nous avions reç u 
 vous aviez reç u 
 ils avaient reç -u 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 to receive 
 
 PAST or PERFECT, 
 
 or compound of the present 
 
 to have received 
 
 PARTICIPLE PRESENT CT ACTIVE. 
 
 receiving 
 
 COMPOUND OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 
 
 having received 
 
 PARTICIPLE PAST Or PASSIVE. 
 
 received 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 / receive^ do receive^ or am receiving 
 thou receivest, dost receive, or art receiving 
 he receives, does receive, or is receiving 
 we receive, do receive, or are receiving 
 you receive, do receive, or are receiving 
 they receive, do receive, or are receiving 
 
 PERFECT or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 
 
 or compouvd of the present. 
 
 I have received, did receive, or have been 
 thou hast received, didst receive, or hast been 
 he has received, did receive, or has been 
 we have received, did receive, or have been 
 you have received, did receive, or hast been 
 they have received, did receive, or have been 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 / received, did receive, or icas receiving 
 thou receivedst, didst receive, or wast receiving 
 he received, did receive, or was receiving 
 we received, did receive^ or were receiving 
 you received, did receive, or were receiving 
 they received, did receive, or were receiving 
 
 PLUPERFECT, 
 or compound of the imperfect. 
 I had received or had been receiving 
 thou hadst received or hadst been receiving 
 he had received or had been receiving 
 we had received or had been receiving 
 you had received or had been receiving 
 they had received or had been reôeiving 
 
THIRD CONJUGATION 
 
 RECEVOIR 
 
 to receive, 67 
 
 •'m«r. mûr jeune, jewne. boite, bozte. ancre, mgrat. onde, wn, ameN, 
 4J, as 5 in pleasure. gn, as ni in nnion. ill, as Z/i in Wi/^^am. 
 
 -j- 
 
 Jo reç ics 
 tu reç Its 
 il reç ut 
 nous reç iftwie» 
 vous roç ûtes 
 ils reç wren/ 
 
 J'eus reç u 
 tu eus reç u 
 il eut reç u 
 nous eûmes reç ?< 
 vous eûtes reç u 
 ils eurent reç u 
 
 -L- 
 
 Je rec evrat 
 tu rec cvra* 
 il rec evra 
 nous rec evrons 
 vous rec eures 
 ils rec evront 
 
 -M- 
 
 J'aurai reç m 
 tu auras reç m 
 il aura reç u 
 nous aurons reç w 
 vous aurez reç u 
 ils auront reç m 
 
 PRETERIT DEFINITE. 
 
 / received or did receive 
 thou receivedst or didst receive 
 he received or did receive 
 we received or did receive 
 you received or did receive 
 they received or did receive 
 
 PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
 01 compound of the preterit. 
 
 I had received 
 
 thou hadst received 
 
 he had received 
 
 we had received 
 
 you had received 
 
 they had received 
 
 FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 / shall or will receive 
 thou shall or wilt receive 
 he shall or will receive 
 we shall or ivill receive 
 you shall or will receive 
 they shall or ivill receive 
 
 FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
 er compound of the future. 
 
 I shall or will have received 
 thou shalt or wilt have received 
 he shall or will have received 
 we shall or will have received 
 you shall or ivill have received 
 they shall or ivill have received 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 Je rec eorais 
 tu rec evrais 
 il rec evrait 
 nous rec cvrions 
 vous rec evriez 
 ils rec ccraient 
 
 J'aurais reç m, 
 or feus se ref u 
 tu aurais reç u. 
 or tu eusses reç u 
 il aurait reç u, 
 or il eût reç a 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 / should, would, could, or might receive 
 
 thou shouldst, wouldst, couldst, or mightst receive 
 
 he should, would, could, or might receive 
 
 we should, would, could, or might receive 
 
 you should, would, could, or might receive 
 
 they should, would, could, or might receive 
 
 PAST, ^ 
 
 or compound of the present 
 I should, would, could^ 
 
 or might have received 
 thou shouldst, wouldst, couldst 
 
 or mightst, have received 
 he should, would, could 
 or might have received 
 
68 THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 RECEVOIR 
 
 to recdve. 
 
 «omi. âne. ie. écrit, mère. être, idole, gîte, opéra, ôter. taut, voûte 
 ^at. arm. tub. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fooL 
 
 nous aurions reç it, 
 or nous eussions reÇ u 
 vous auriez reç w, 
 or vous eussiez reÇ u 
 ils auraient reç m, 
 or ils eussent reç u 
 
 we should^ icould, could^ 
 or might have received 
 
 you should,, would,, couldy 
 or might have received 
 
 they should^ would^ could 
 or might have received 
 
 Reç ois 
 qu'il reç oive 
 rec coons 
 rec eves 
 qu'ils reç aiveni 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 receive {thou) 
 let him receive 
 let us receive 
 receive {you) 
 let them receive 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Que je reç oive 
 que tu reç oives 
 qu'il reç oive 
 que nous rec evions 
 que vous rec emez 
 qu'ils reç oivent 
 
 that I may receive 
 that thou mayst receive 
 that he may receive 
 that we may receive 
 that you may receive 
 that they may receive 
 
 que j'aie reç u 
 que tu aies reç u 
 qu'il ait reç u 
 que nous ayons reç u 
 que vous ayez reç u 
 qu'ils aient reç u 
 
 PRETERIT or PAST, 
 or compound of the present. 
 that I may have received 
 that thou mayst have received 
 that he may have received 
 that we may have received 
 that you may have received 
 that they may have received 
 
 Que je reç usse 
 que tu reç "usses 
 qu 1. reç ut 
 que nous reç ussiona 
 que vous reç ussies 
 qu'ils leç uasent 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 that I might receive 
 that thou mightst receive 
 that he might receive 
 that wc might receive 
 that you might receive 
 that they might receive 
 
 Que j'eusse reç u 
 que tu eusses reç u 
 qu'il eût reç u 
 que uoos eussions reç u 
 que vous eussiez reç u 
 qu'ils eussent reç u 
 
 PLUPERFECT, 
 or compound of the imperfect. 
 
 that I might have received 
 that thou mightst have received 
 that he might have received 
 that we might have received 
 that you might have received 
 tluU they miglU have received 
 
THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 RECEVOIR to receive. 69 
 
 ^mur. mûr. jewne. jtîwne. botte, boîte, ancre, ingrat, onde. un. ameN. 
 ■^j, as * in plea s ure. g n, as ni in union. ilU as lli^ in WiZZiam. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB. 
 
 Recevoir 
 
 -A- 
 
 Ne pas rec evoir 
 
 N'avoir pas rec u 
 
 -c- 
 
 Ne rec evant pas 
 
 to receive. 
 
 (Negatively, ) 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 not to receive 
 
 PAST or PERFECT, 
 or compound of the present. 
 not to have received 
 
 PARTICIPLE PRESENT Or ACTIVE, 
 
 not receivinic 
 
 -D- COMPOUND OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 
 
 N'ayant pas rec u not having received 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 -F- 
 
 Je ne reç ois pas 
 
 tu ne reç ois pas 
 il ne reç oit pas 
 nous ne rec evons pas 
 vous ne rec eves pas 
 ils ne reç oiv-entpas 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 I receive not^ do not receive^ or am not ^ 
 
 thou receivest not^ dost not receive^ or art not 
 he receives not., does not receive^ or is not 
 we receive not^ do not receive^ or are not 
 you receive not, do not receive.^ or are not 
 they receive net, do not receive, or are not 
 
 PERFECT or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 
 OT compound of the present. 
 
 I have not received, did not receive, or have not ^ 
 thou hast not received,didst not receive,orhast not ' 
 
 Je n'ai pas reç u 
 tu n'as pas reç u 
 il n'a pas reç u 
 
 nous n'avons pas reç w we have not received, did not receive, or have not \ 
 vous n'avez pas reç u youhave not received, did not receive,oT havenot 
 theyhavenotreceived,didnotreceive,oxhavenotj 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 / received not, did not receive, or was "^ 
 
 thou receivedst not, didst not receive, or wasi 
 he received not, did not receive, or was 
 we received not, did not receive, or loere 
 you received not, did not receive, or toere 
 they received not, did not receive, or loere 
 
 PLUPERFECT, 
 jr compound of the imperfect. 
 I had not received or had not been 
 thou hadst not received or hadst not been 
 he had not received or had not been 
 nous n'avions pas reç u we had not received or had not been 
 vous n'aviez pas reç u you had not received or had not been 
 ils n'avaient pas reç u they had not received or had not been 
 
 ils n'ont pas reç u 
 
 -TI- 
 
 Jé ne rec evais pas 
 lu ne rec evais pas 
 il ne rec evait pas 
 nous ne rec euion* pas 
 vous ne rec evies pas 
 ils ne rec evaient pas 
 -I- 
 
 Je n'avais pas reç u 
 tu n'avais pas reç u 
 il n'avait pas reç u 
 
70 THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 RECEVQiR to receive. 
 
 •ami. âne. te. écrit, mère. être, idole, gîte, opéra, ôter. tout, vovte 
 ^at. arm. tub. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 
 
 Je ne reç us pas 
 tu ne reç us pas 
 il ne reç ut pas 
 nous ne reç times pas 
 vous ne reç ûtes pas 
 ils ne reç urent pas 
 
 Je n'eus pas reç u 
 tu n'eus pas reç u 
 il n'eut pas reç u 
 nous n'eûmes pas reç u 
 vous n'eûtes pas reç u 
 ils n'eurent pas reç u 
 
 Je ne rec evrai pas 
 tu ne rec evras pas 
 il ne rec evra pas 
 nous ne rec evrons pas 
 vous ne rec evrez pas 
 ils ne rec evront pas 
 
 Je n'aurai pas reç u 
 tu n'auras pas reçu 
 il n'aura pas reç u 
 nous n'aurons pas reç u 
 vous n'aurez pas reç u 
 ils n'auront pas reç u 
 
 PRKTERIT DEFINITE. 
 
 / received not or did not receive 
 
 thou receivedst not or didst not r^^ive i^t 
 
 he received not or did not receive 
 
 we received not or did not receive 
 
 you received not or did not receive 
 
 they received not or did not receive 
 
 PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
 or compound of the preterit. 
 1 had not received 
 thou hadst not received 
 he had 7iot received 
 we had not received 
 you had not received 
 ihey had not received 
 
 FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 I shall or will not receive 
 thou shall or wilt not receive 
 he shall or icill not receive 
 we shall or will not receive 
 you shall or xcill not receive 
 they shall or ivill not receive 
 
 FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
 or compound of the future 
 
 I shall or will not have received 
 thou shall or wilt not have received 
 he shall or will not have received 
 ice shall or ivill not have received 
 you shall or ivill not have received 
 they shall or will not have received 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 .«- PRESENT. 
 
 Je ne rec evrais pas I should, would, could, or might not 
 
 tu ne rec evrais pas thou shouldst, wouldst, couldst, or mightst not 
 
 il ne rec evrait pas he should, would, could, or might not 
 
 nous ne rec evrions pas we should, would, could, or might not 
 
 vous ne rec evries pas you should, would, could, or might not 
 
 ils ne rec evraient pas they should, would, could, or might not 
 
 Je n'aurais pas reç u, 
 ox je n'eusse pas reÇ u 
 tu n'aurais pas reç u, 
 or tu n'' eusses pas reç u 
 il n'aurait pas reç u, 
 or il n'eût pas re£ u 
 
 /AST, 
 or compound of the present. 
 
 I should, would, could, 
 
 or might not have received 
 
 thou shouldst, wouldst, couldst^ 
 
 or mightst not have received 
 
 he should, would, could, 
 
 or misht not have received 
 
THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 RECEVOIR 
 
 to receive. 71 
 
 ^TCiur. mûr. jeune, jeûne, borte. bozte. ancre, ingrat, onde. un. amex. 
 ''j, as s in pleasure, gn., as ni in umon. ill, as IIU m. Wi/Ziaiu. 
 
 nous n aurions pas reç w, 
 or 710US n'' eussions pas ref u 
 vous n'auriez pas reç w, 
 or voî/s n'eussiez pas reç u 
 ils n'auraient pas reç m, 
 or i7i n'eussent pas ref w 
 
 t^e should., would., could., 
 or might not have received 
 
 you should., would, could, 
 or might not have received 
 
 they should, would, could, 
 or might not have received 
 
 Ne reç ois pas 
 qu'il ne reç oive pas 
 ne rec evons pas 
 ne rec eves pas 
 qu'ils ne reç oivent pas 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 receive not or do not receive (thou) 
 
 let him not receive 
 
 let u^ not receive 
 
 receive not or do not receive (jfou) 
 
 let them not receive 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 Que je ne reç oive pas 
 que lu ne reç oives pas 
 qu'il ne reç oive pas 
 que nous ne rec evions pas 
 que vous ne rec evies pas 
 qu'ils ne reç oivent pas 
 
 that I may not receive 
 that thou mayst not receive 
 that he may not receive 
 that we may not receive 
 that you may not receive 
 thai they may not receive 
 
 Que je n'aie pas reç u 
 que tu n'aies pas reç u 
 qu'il n'ait pas reç u 
 que nous n'ayons pas reç u 
 que vous n'ayez pas reç u 
 qu'ils n'aient pas reç u 
 
 PRETERIT or PAST, 
 or compound of the present, 
 
 that I may not have received 
 that thou mayst not have received 
 that he may not have received 
 that we may not have received 
 that you may not have received 
 that they may not have received 
 
 Que je ne reç v^se pas 
 que tu ne reç usses pas 
 qu'il ne reç vt pas 
 que DO us ne reç ussions pas 
 que vous ne reç ussies pas 
 qu'ils ne reç ussent pas 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 that I might not receive 
 that thou migfitst not receive 
 that he might not receive 
 that we might not receive 
 that you might not receive 
 that they might not receive 
 
 -T- PLUPERFECT, 
 
 or compound of the imperfect. 
 Que je n'eusse pas reç u that I might not have received 
 
 que tu n'eusses pas reç u that thou mightst not have received 
 
 qu'il n'eût pas reç u that he might not have received 
 
 que nous n'eussions pas reç it that we might not have received 
 que vous n'eussiez pas reç u that you might not have received 
 qu'ils n'eussent pas reç u that /hey might not have rcceivpd 
 2 H 2 
 
72 THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 RECEVOIR 
 
 to receive. 
 
 ^omi. âne. te. écrit, mère. être, idole, gîte, opéra, ôter. Xoui. voûte 
 2a/. arm. tab. ale. mare, there, tdiom. eel. opera, over. too. fool. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB. 
 
 Recevoir to receive. (Interrogatively.) 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Reç otVje 
 reç ois-tvi 
 reç oi/-il 
 rec evons-nons 
 rec et!es-vous 
 reç oivent-Ws 
 
 Ai-je reç u 
 as-tu reç u 
 a-t-il reç u 
 avous-nous reç u 
 avez-vous reç u 
 ont-ils reç It 
 
 Rec evais-]Q 
 rec evais-in 
 rec evait'il 
 rec evions-nons 
 rec evies-\ons 
 rec evaient-ils 
 
 do I receive or am I receiving 
 dost thou receive or art thou receiving 
 does he receive or is he receiving 
 do we receive or aj-e ice receiving 
 do you receive or are you receiving 
 do they receive or are they receiving 
 
 PERFECT or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 
 or compoîind of the present. 
 
 have I received or did I receive 
 hast thou received or didst thou receive 
 has he-received or did he receive 
 have we received or did we receive 
 have you received or did you receive 
 have they received or did they receive 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 did I receive or was I receiving 
 didst thou receive or wast thou receiving 
 did he receive or was he receiving 
 did we receive or were we receiving 
 did you receive or were you receiving 
 did they receive or were they receiving 
 
 Avais-je reç u 
 avais-tu reç u 
 avait-il reç u 
 a"%'ions-nous reç u 
 aviez-vous reç u 
 avaient-ils reç u 
 
 Reç us- je 
 reç wi-tu 
 reç ut-ï\ 
 reç Û7«es-nou3 
 reç û/ei-vou& 
 reç urent-ilB 
 
 PLUPERFECT, 
 
 or compound of the imperfect. 
 
 had I received or had I been receiving 
 hadst thou received or hadst thou been receiving 
 had he received or had he been receiving 
 had we received or hoA we been receiving 
 had you received or had you been receiving 
 had they received or had they been receiving 
 
 PRETERIT DEFINITE. 
 
 did I receive 
 didst thou receive 
 did he receive 
 did we receive 
 did you receive 
 did they receive 
 
THtRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 RECEVOIR to receive, 73 
 
 ^mwr. mûr. jeune, jeiine. boite. bo-<te. ancre, mgrat. onde. un. amoN, 
 "*], as s in pleasure. gn, as ni in union. ilU as lli in Wi//iam. 
 
 Kusrje reç u 
 eus-tu reç u 
 eut-il reç u 
 eûmes-nous reç u 
 eûtes-vous reç u 
 eurent-ils reç u 
 
 PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
 or compound of the preterit. 
 
 had I received 
 hadsl thou received 
 had he received 
 had we received 
 had you received 
 had they received 
 
 -L- 
 
 Rec ewrat-je 
 rec evras-ivi 
 rec evra-t-il 
 rec evrons-noMS 
 rec ewcs-vous 
 rec evront-i\B 
 
 FUTURE ABSOLUTE, 
 
 shall or will I receive 
 shall or wilt thou receive 
 shall or will he receive 
 shall or will we receive 
 shall or will you receive 
 shall or will they receive 
 
 -M- 
 
 Aarai-je reç u 
 auras-tu reç u 
 aura-t-il reç u 
 aurons-nous reç m 
 aurez-vous reç u 
 auront-ils reç u 
 
 FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
 or compound of the future. 
 
 shall or will I have received 
 shall or wilt thou have received 
 shall or will he have received 
 shall or will we have received 
 shall or will you have received 
 shall or will they have received 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 -N- PRESENT. 
 
 Rec evrais-ie should., would^ could., or might I receive 
 
 rec evrais-tu. shouldst., wouldst, couldst, or mightst thou receive. 
 
 rec evrait-W should., would., could., or might he receive 
 
 rec evrions-nons should., would., could., or might we receive 
 
 rec cvriez-yons should., would., could, or might you receive 
 
 rec evraient-ils should, would., could., or might they receive 
 
 -o- 
 
 Aurais-je reç w, 
 or eussé-je reÇ u 
 aurais-tu reç w, 
 or eusses-tu reÇ u 
 aurait-il reç w, 
 or eût-il reç u 
 aurions-nous reç w, 
 or eussions-nous reç u 
 auriez-vous reç w, 
 or eussiez-vous reç u 
 auraient-ils reç w, 
 or eussent-ils reç u 
 
 PAST, 
 or compound of the present. 
 
 should, would., could, 
 
 or might I have received 
 shouldst, wouldst, couldst, 
 
 or mightst thou have received 
 should, would, could, 
 
 or might he have received 
 should, ivould, could, 
 
 or might we have received 
 should, would, could, 
 
 or might you have received 
 should, would, could, 
 
 or might they have received 
 
74 THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 RECEVOIR 
 
 to receive* 
 
 'ami. âne. te. écrit, mère. être, idole, gfte. opéra, ôter. tout- vowte. 
 '^al. arm. twb. aie. mare, there, zdiom. cel. opera, over. too. fool. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB. 
 
 Recevoir to receive. (Negatively and Interrogatively,) 
 
 -r- 
 
 Ne reç ow-je pas 
 ne reç ow-tu paS* 
 ne reç oit-\l pas 
 ne rec evons-nous pas 
 ne rec cres-vous pas 
 ne Tec oivent-ils pas 
 
 N'ai-je pas reç u 
 n'as-tu pas reç u 
 n'a-t-il pas reç u 
 n'avons-nous pas reç u 
 n'avez-vous pas reç u 
 n'ont-ils pas reç u 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 do I not receive or am I not receiving 
 dost thou not receive or art thou not receiving- 
 does he not receive or is he not receiving 
 do we not receive or are we not receiving 
 do you not receive or are you not receiving 
 do they not receive or are they not receiving 
 
 PERFECT or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 
 
 or compound of the present 
 
 have I not received^ did I not receive^ 
 
 or have I not been receiving 
 hast thou not received, didst thou not receive 
 
 or hast thou not been receiving 
 has he not received, did he not recnve, 
 
 or has he not been receiving 
 have we not received, did we not receive, 
 
 or have we not been receiving 
 have you not received, did you not receive^ 
 
 or have you not been receiving 
 have they not received, did they not receive 
 
 or have they not been receiving 
 
 Ne rec evais-je pas 
 ne rec evais-tu pas 
 cr. rec ct;ai7-il pas 
 r -i rec euions-nous pas 
 ne rec evies-vons pas 
 ne rec evaient-i\s pas 
 
 N'avais-je pas reç u 
 n'avais-tu pas reç u 
 n'avait-il pas reç u 
 n'avions-nous pas reç u 
 n'aviez-vous pas reç u 
 n'avaient-ils pas reç u 
 
 -j- 
 
 Ne reç ws-je pas 
 
 ne reç us-tu pas 
 
 ne reç ut-'d pas 
 
 ne reç ûmes-nons pas 
 
 ne reç ûtes-vous pas 
 
 ne reç wrcn/-ils pas 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 did I not receive or was I not receiving 
 didst thou not receive or wast thou not receiving 
 did he not receive or was he not receiving 
 did we not receive or were we not receiving 
 did you not receive or were you not receiving 
 did they not receive or were they not receiving 
 
 PLUPERFECT, 
 
 or compound of the imperfect. 
 
 had I not received or had I not been 
 hadst thou not received ox hadst thou not been 
 had he not received or had he not been 
 had we not received or had we not been 
 had you not received or had you not been 
 had they not received or had they not been 
 
 PRETERIT DEFINITE. 
 
 did I not receive 
 didst thou not receive 
 did he not receive 
 did we not receive 
 did you not receive 
 did they not receive 
 
THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 RECEVOIR 
 
 to receive. 75 
 
 ^mur. muT, jeune, jcwne. boite, bofte. ancre, ingrat, onde. un. ameN. 
 *\as* m pleasure, gn, as ni in union, ill, as lli, in Wi ZZi am. 
 
 N'eus-je pas reç u 
 n'eus-tu pas reç u 
 n'eut-il pas reç u 
 n'eûmes-nous pas reç u 
 n'eûtes- vous pas reç u 
 n'eurent-ils pas reç m 
 
 PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
 or compound of the preterit. 
 had I not received 
 hadst thou not received 
 had he not received 
 had we not received 
 had you not received 
 had they not received 
 
 Ne rec evrai-je pas 
 ne rec evras-in pas 
 ne rec eura-t-il pas 
 ne rec cwrons-nous pas 
 ne rec evres-vous pas 
 ne rec evron/-ils pas 
 
 FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 shall or will I not receive 
 shall or wilt thou not receive 
 shall or will he not receive 
 shall or will we not receive, 
 shall or will you not receive 
 shall or will they not receive 
 
 N'aurai-je pas reç u 
 n'auras-tu pas reç u 
 n'aura-t-il pas reç u 
 n'aurons-nous pas reç u 
 n'aurez-vous pas reç u 
 n'auront-ils pas reç u 
 
 FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
 or compound of the future. 
 
 shall or will I not have received 
 shalt or wilt thou not have received 
 shall or will he not have received 
 shall or will we not have received 
 shall or will you not have received 
 shall or will they not have received 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 ?N- 
 
 Ke rec evrais^je pas 
 ne rec evrais-iu pas 
 ne. rec evrait-il pas 
 ne rec gwions-nous pas 
 ne rec emes-vous pas 
 ne rec curaien/-ils pas 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 should^ would, could, or might I 
 shouldst, wouldst, couldst, or mightst thou 
 should, would, could, or might he 
 should, would, could, or might we 
 should, would, could, or might you 
 should, would, could, or might they 
 
 N'aurais-je pas reç u, 
 or n'eu^ssé-je pas reg u 
 n'aurais-tu pas reç w, 
 or n'eusses-tu pas reç u 
 n'aurait-il pas reç u, 
 or n'eut-il pas rey u 
 n'aurions-nous pas reç u, 
 or n' eussions-nous pas reç u 
 n'auriez-vous pas reç w, 
 or n'eussiez-vouspas reç u 
 n'auraient-ils pas reç u, 
 or n'eussent-ils pas reç u 
 
 PAST, 
 or compound of the present. 
 
 should, would, could, 
 
 or might I not have received 
 shouldst, wouldst, couldst, 
 
 or mightst, thou not have received 
 should, wouldy could, 
 
 or might he not have receivea 
 , should, would, could, 
 
 or might we not have received 
 should, would, could, 
 
 or might you not have received 
 should, would, cculd, 
 
 or might they not have received 
 
76 
 
 OP THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 
 
 Of the Fourth Conjugation» 
 
 130. The verbs of the fourth conjugation, like those of the 
 first, second, and third, are known by the termination of the 
 present of the infinitive. 
 
 131. The present of the infinitive of the fourth conjugation 
 has for its termination re — as, vend re to sell. 
 
 132. All verbs, whose present of the infinitive ends with re, 
 to the amount of about 240, are of the fourth conjugation ; and 
 if regular, are conjugated like vend re to sell, which is here- 
 after conjugated, to be used as a model. 
 
 133. There are in the fourth conjugation 40 regular verbs 
 which take the termination of vend re to sell. 
 
 134. They are- 
 
 
 
 append re 
 
 to hang up, 
 
 mord re 
 
 to bite, 
 
 attend re 
 
 to wait, to expect, 
 
 morfond re 
 
 to make very cold, 
 
 
 to wait for, 
 
 parfond re 
 
 to melt equally. 
 
 confond re 
 
 to confound, 
 
 pend re 
 
 to hang, 
 
 correspond re 
 
 to correspond, 
 
 perd re 
 
 to lose, to destroy. 
 
 défend re 
 
 to defend, 
 
 pond re 
 
 to lay eggs, 
 
 
 to prohibit, 
 
 pourfend re 
 
 to split, to cut in twoi, 
 
 
 to forbid, 
 
 prétend re 
 
 to pretend. 
 
 démord re 
 
 to give up. 
 
 refend re 
 
 to cleave again. 
 
 
 to cease biting, 
 
 
 to split again, 
 
 dépend re 
 
 to take down. 
 
 refond re 
 
 to melt again, 
 
 
 to depend on or uoon, 
 
 
 to cast again, 
 
 descend re 
 
 to go down. 
 
 remord re 
 
 to bite again, 
 
 
 to descend, 
 
 rend re 
 
 to render, to 
 
 
 to take down, 
 
 ^ 
 
 return, to give back, 
 
 détend re 
 
 to unbend. 
 
 répand re 
 
 to spill, to shed, 
 
 
 to loosen, 
 
 répond re 
 
 to answer, to reply 
 
 détord re 
 
 to untwist, 
 
 retord re 
 
 to twist again, 
 
 distend re 
 
 to distend. 
 
 revend re 
 
 to sell again, 
 
 
 to extend, 
 
 sous-entend re 
 
 to understand. 
 
 entend re 
 
 to hear, 
 
 
 not to express, 
 
 
 to understand, 
 
 survend re 
 
 to sell too dear, 
 
 
 to comprehend. 
 
 suspend re 
 
 to suspend, 
 
 épand re 
 
 to spread, 
 
 tend re 
 
 to hold out. 
 
 étand re 
 
 to spread. 
 
 
 to stretch out. 
 
 fend re 
 
 to cleave. 
 
 
 to bend, 
 
 
 to split, 
 
 tond re 
 
 to shear. 
 
 fondre 
 
 to melt, 
 
 tord re 
 
 to twist, 
 
 mévend re 
 
 to undersell. 
 
 vend re 
 
 to sell. 
 
 135. All the other verbs whose present of the infinitive endg 
 with re, and not included in the above list, are irregular, and 
 are to be found m the alphabetical list of all the irregular 
 verbs, page 162 
 
OP THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 77 
 
 136. Those who have already learned the verbs, will readily 
 ascertain, without having recourse to the above table of the 
 regular verbs, whether a verb, whose present of the infinitive 
 ends with re, is regular or irregular, if they remember that 
 dant terminates the participle present of all the regular verbs 
 of the fourth conjugation. 
 
 137. The third person singular of the present of the indica- 
 tive of this conjugation, consists of the ra<iicaZ _par/ of the verb 
 only, it does not take any termination. 
 
 138. Observe, that when vendre to sell, like several other 
 verbs, mentioned in page 8, art. 65, is conjugated Interroga- 
 tively or Negatively and Interrogatively, the first person sin- 
 gular of the present of the indicative, is not conjugated like 
 other verbs; for the reason of this deviation, see page 8, 
 art. 65. 
 
 139. For the formation of the compound tenses, see page 
 35, art. 86 and 87. 
 
78 FOURTH CONJUGATION. 
 
 VENDRE 
 
 to sen. 
 
 •ami. âne. te. écrit, mère. être. «dole. gîte, opéra, ôter. tout, voûte 
 ^al, orm. twb. aie. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB. 
 
 Vendre to sell. (Affirmatively.) 
 
 -A- 
 
 Vend re 
 
 Avoir vend u 
 • c- 
 Vend ant 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. ^ 
 
 to sell 
 
 PAST or PERFECT, 
 or compound of the present, 
 to have sold 
 
 PARTICIPLE PRESENT Or ACTIVÉ, 
 
 selling 
 
 -D- COMPOUND OF THE PARTICIPLK PRESENT. 
 
 Ayant vend u having sold 
 
 -E- PARTICIPLE PAST Or PASSIVE. 
 
 Vend M sold 
 
 -F- 
 
 Je vend s 
 tu vend* 
 il vend 
 
 nous vend ons 
 VOUS vend ez 
 ils vend ent 
 -a- 
 
 J'ai vend u 
 tu as vend u 
 il a vend u 
 nous avons vend u 
 vous avez vend u 
 ils ont vend u 
 
 -H- 
 
 Je vend ais 
 tu vend ais 
 il vend ait 
 nous vend ions 
 vous vend t'es 
 ils vend aient 
 -I- 
 
 3 'avais vend u 
 tu avais vend u 
 il avait vend u 
 nous avions vend w 
 voas aviez vend u 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 / selU do sell, or am selling 
 thou sellest, dost sell, or art selling 
 he sells, does sell, or is selling 
 we sell, do sell, or arc selling 
 you selly do sell, or are selling 
 they sell, do sell, or are selling 
 
 PERFECT or PRETERIT INDEFINÏTK 
 or compound of the present. 
 I have sold, did sell, or have been selling 
 thou hast sold, didst sell, or hast been selling 
 he has sold, did sell, or has been selling 
 we have sold, did sell, or have been selling 
 you have sold, did sell, or have been selling 
 they have sold, did sell, or have been selling 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 / soldi did sell, or was selling 
 thousoldest, didst sell, or wast selling 
 he sold, did sell, or was selling 
 we sold, did sell, or ivere selling 
 you sold, did sell, or were selling 
 they sold, did sell, or were selling 
 
 PLUPERFECT, 
 
 or compound of the imperfect. 
 
 I had sold or had been selling 
 
 thou hadst sold or hadst been selling 
 
 he had sold or had been selling 
 
 we had sold or had been selling 
 
 you had sold or had been selling 
 
 ils avaient vend u they liad sold or had been selling 
 
FOURTH CONJUGATION. 
 
 VENDRE 
 
 to sell 79 
 
 'mt(r. mwr. jeune, jewne. boite, boîte, ancre, ingrat, onde. un. ameN. 
 ^j, as * in pleasure, gn^ as ni in union, i//, as Z/z, in WiZ/iam. 
 
 Je vend is 
 tu vend is 
 il vend il 
 nous vend îmcs 
 vous vend ites 
 ils vend l'ren/ 
 
 J'eus vend u 
 tu eus vend u 
 il eut vend u 
 nous eûmes vend w 
 vous eûtes vend u 
 ils eurent vend u 
 
 Je vend rai 
 tu vend ro* 
 il vend ra 
 nous vend rons 
 vous vend rez 
 ils vend ront 
 
 J'aurai Vend u 
 tu auras vend u 
 il aura vend u 
 nous aurons vend u 
 vous aurez vend m 
 ils auront vendu 
 
 PRBrERIT DEFINITE. 
 
 I sold or did sell 
 thou soldest, or didst sell 
 he sold or did sell 
 we sold or did sell 
 you sold or did sell 
 they sold or did sell 
 
 PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
 or compound of the preterit. 
 I had sold 
 thou hadst sold 
 he had sold 
 we had sold 
 you had sold 
 they had sold 
 
 FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 / shall or u'ill sell 
 thou shall or wilt sell 
 he shall or ivill sell 
 tve shall or will sell 
 you shall or will sell 
 they shall or will sell 
 
 FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
 or covipound of the futtire. 
 
 1 shall or will have sold 
 thou shall or tcilt have sold 
 he bhall or xvill have sold 
 we shall or will have sold 
 you shall or will have sold 
 they shall or will have sold 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 -N- PRESENT. . 
 
 Je vend rais - I should^ would^ could, or tnight sell 
 
 tu vend rais thou shouldst, wouldsl^couldst, or mightst sell 
 
 il vend rait he should, would, could, or might sell 
 
 nous vend rions we should, would, could, or might sell 
 
 vous vend ries you should, would, could, or might sell 
 
 ils vend raient they should, would, could, or might sell 
 
 -O- PAST, 
 
 or compound of the prescrit. 
 J'aurais vend m, / should, icould. couldj 
 
 or j'eusse vend u or might have sold 
 
 tu aurais vend i<, thou shoulds/, wouldst, couldst, 
 
 or iu eusses vend u or mightst have sold 
 
 il aurait vend m, he should, would, could, 
 
 or il eût vend u or might have sold 
 
 21 
 
so FOURTH CONJUGATION. 
 
 VENDRE 
 
 to sell. 
 
 'ami. âne. te. écrit, mère. être, tdole. gîte, opéra, ôter. tout, voûte, 
 'a/, arm. tub. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 
 
 nous aurions vend u, 
 or nous eussions vend u 
 vous auriez vend w, 
 or voies évasiez vend u 
 ils auraient vend w, 
 or Us eussent vend u 
 
 we should, would, could, 
 or might have sold 
 
 you should, would, could, 
 or might have sold 
 
 they should, would, could, 
 or might have sold 
 
 Vends 
 qu'il vend e 
 vend ans 
 vend es 
 qu'ils vend ent 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 sell {thou) 
 let him sell 
 let us sell 
 sell (jjou) 
 let them sell 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Que je vend e 
 que tu vend es 
 qu'il vend e 
 que nous vend ions 
 que vous vend ies 
 qu'il vend ent 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 that I may sell 
 that thou mayst sell 
 that he may sell 
 that we may sell 
 that you may sell 
 that they may sell 
 
 Que j'aie vend u 
 que tu aies vend u 
 qu'il ait vend u 
 que nous ayons vend t* 
 que vous ayez vend u 
 qu'ils aient vend u 
 
 PRETERIT or PAST, 
 or compound of the present, 
 
 that I may have sold 
 that thou mayst have sold 
 that he may have sold 
 that we may have sold 
 that you may have sold 
 that they may have sold 
 
 Que je vend isse 
 que tu vend isses 
 qu'il vend it 
 que nous vend issions 
 que vous vend issiez 
 qu'ils vend isseni 
 
 IMPBRFBCT. 
 
 that I might sell 
 that thou mightst sell 
 that he might sell 
 that we might sell 
 that you might sell 
 that they might seU 
 
 Que j'eusse vend u 
 que tu eusses vend u 
 qu'il eût vend u 
 que nous eussions vend u 
 que vous eussiez vend u 
 qu'ils eussent vend u 
 
 PLUPERFECT, 
 or compound of the imperfecL 
 
 that I might have sold 
 that thou mightst have sold 
 that he might have sold 
 that we might have sold 
 that you might have sold 
 that they might have sold 
 
FOURTH fîONJUGATION. 
 
 VENDRE 
 
 to sell SA 
 
 'mur. mûr. jewne. jewne. boite, hoîto. ancre, ingrat, onde. un. amcN 
 ♦j, as5 in pleasure, gn, as ni in union, ill^ as ZZi, in WiZ/iani. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB. 
 
 Vendre to sell, (Negatively*) 
 
 Ne pas vend re 
 
 N'avoir pas vend u 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 not to sell 
 
 PAST or PERFECT, 
 or compound of the present. 
 not to have sold 
 
 -C- PARTICIPLE PRESENT Or ACTIVE. 
 
 Ne vend ant pas not selling 
 
 -D- COMPOUND OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 
 
 N'ayant pas vend u not having sold 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 -p- 
 
 Je ne vend s pas 
 
 tu ne vend s pas 
 
 il ne vend pas 
 
 nous ne vend ons pas 
 
 VOUS ne vend ez pas 
 
 ils ne vend ent pas 
 
 -G- 
 
 Je n'ai pas vend u 
 tu n'as pas vendu 
 il n'a pas vend u 
 nous n'avons pas vend u 
 vous n'avez pas vend u 
 ils n'ont pas vend u 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 / sell not^ do not sell, or am not selling 
 thou sellest not, dost not sell, or art not selling 
 he sells not, does not sell, or is not selling 
 we sell not, do not sell, or are not selling 
 you sell not, do not sell, or are not selling 
 they sell not, do not sell, or are not selling 
 
 PERFECT or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 
 or compound of the present. 
 
 I have not sold, did not sell, or have not 
 thou hast not sold, didst not sell, or hast not 
 he has not sold, did not sell, or has not 
 we have not sold, did not sell, or have not 
 you have not sold, did not sell, or have not 
 they have not sold, did not sell, or have not 
 
 I* 
 
 I 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 I sold not, did not sell, or was not selling 
 thou soldest not, didst not sell, or wasf. not selling 
 he sold not, did not sell, or was not selling 
 we sold not, did not sell, or were not selling 
 you sold not, did not sell, or were not selling 
 they sold not, did not sell, or were not selling 
 
 PLUPERFECT, 
 or compound of the imperfect. 
 I had not sold or had not been selling 
 thou hadst not sold or hadst not been selling 
 he had not sold or had not been selling 
 nous n'avions pas vendu we had not sold or had not been selling 
 vous n'aviez pas vend u you had not sold or had not been selling 
 ils n'avaient pas vend u they had not sold or had not been selling 
 
 Je ne vend ais pas 
 tu ne vend ais pas 
 il ne vend ait pas 
 nous ne vend ions pas 
 vous ne vend ies pas 
 ils ne vend aient pas 
 
 Je n'avais pas vend u 
 tu n'avais pas vendit 
 il n'avait pas vend u 
 
82 FOURTH CONJUGATION. 
 
 A'^ENDRE 
 
 to sell 
 
 'ami. âne. te. écrit, mcie. être, idole, gîte, opéra, ôter. towt. vowta 
 ^at. arm. tub. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 
 
 Je ne vend is pas 
 tu ne vend is pas 
 il no vend it pas 
 nous ne vend imes pas 
 vous ne vend îtes pas 
 ils ne xend irenl pas 
 
 Je n'eus pas vend u 
 tu n'eus pas vend u 
 il n'eut pas vend u 
 nous n'eûmes pas vendu 
 vous n'eûtes pas vend u 
 ils n'eurent pas vend u 
 
 Je ne vend rai pas 
 tu ne vend ras pas 
 il ne vend ra pas 
 nous ne vend rons pas 
 vous ne vend rez pas 
 ils ne vend royit pas 
 
 Je n'aurai pas vend u 
 tu n'auras pas vend u 
 il n'aura pas vend u 
 nous n'aurons pas vend u 
 vous n'aurez pas vend u 
 ils n'auront pas vend u 
 
 PRKTERIT DEFINITE. 
 
 / sold not or did not sell 
 thou soldest not or didst not sell 
 he sold not or did not sell 
 we sold not or did not sell 
 you sold not or did not sell 
 they sold not or did not sell 
 
 PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
 or compound of the preterit. 
 
 I had not sold 
 thou hadst not sold 
 he had not sold 
 we had not sold 
 you had not sold 
 they had not sold 
 
 FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 I shall or will not sell 
 thou shall or wilt not sell 
 he shall or will not sell 
 we shall or will not sell 
 you shall or will not sell 
 they shall or will not sell 
 
 FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
 or compound of the future. 
 
 I shall or will not have sold 
 thou shall or wilt not have sold 
 he shall or icill not have sold 
 IV e shall or will not have sold 
 you shall or will not have sold 
 they shall or vnll not have sold 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 Je ne vend rais pas 
 tu ne vend rais pas 
 il ne vend rait pas 
 nous ne vend rions pas 
 vous ne vend ries pas 
 ils ne vend raient pas 
 
 Je n'aurais pas vend w, 
 OT Je n'eusse pas vend u 
 tu n'aurais pas vend m, 
 or tu n^ eusses pas vend u 
 il n'aurait pas vend w, 
 or il n^ eût pas veruî u 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 i ihould, would, could, or might 
 
 thou shouldst, ivouldst, couldst, or mighlst 
 
 he should, ivould, could, or might 
 
 we should, icQuldf could, or might 
 
 you should, would, could, or might 
 
 they should, would, could, or might 
 
 PAST, 
 or compound of the present. , 
 
 I should, would, eouldy 
 
 or might not have sold 
 thou shouldst^ ivouldst, couldsi^ 
 
 or migatst not have sold 
 he should, ivould, could, 
 
 or might not have sold 
 
FOURTH CONJUGATION. 
 
 VENDRE 
 
 to sell, 83 
 
 ^mwr. mûr j^îwne. jeûne, boite, hoîie. ancre, ingrat, onde. un. aineN. 
 *j, as s in pleasure. gn, as ni in union. ill^ as lli in Wi/^iam. 
 
 nous n'aurions pas vend î«, 
 or nous n'' eussions pas vendu 
 vous n'auriez pas vend u 
 or voiis n'' eussiez pa^ vend u 
 ils n'auraient pas vend w, 
 or ils n'eussent pas vend u 
 
 we should^ would^ could. 
 
 or might not have sold 
 you should^ would, could, 
 
 or might not have sold 
 they should, would, could, 
 
 or might not have sold 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD 
 
 Ne vend « pas 
 qu'il no vend e pas 
 ne vend ons pas 
 ne vend es pas 
 qu'ils ne vend ent pas 
 
 sell not or do not sell (^thou) 
 
 let him not sell 
 
 let us not sell 
 
 sell not or do not sell Çyou") 
 
 let ihem not sell 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Que je ne vend e pas 
 que tu ne vend es pas 
 qu'il ne vende pas 
 que nous ne vend ions pas 
 que vous ne vend ies pas 
 qu'ils ne vend ent pas 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 that I may not sell 
 that thou maysl not sell 
 that he may not seCl 
 that we may not sell 
 that you may not sell 
 that they may not sell 
 
 Que je n'aie pas vend m 
 que tu n'aies pas vend u 
 qu'il n'ait pas vend u 
 que nous n'ayons pas vend m 
 que vous n'ayez pas vend u 
 qu'ils n'aient pas vend u 
 
 PRETERIT or PAST, 
 or compound of the present. 
 
 that I may not have sold 
 that thou mayst not have sola 
 that he may not have sold 
 that we may not have sold 
 that you may not have sold 
 that they may not have sold 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 Que je ne vend isse pas 
 que tu ne vend isses pas 
 qu'il ne vendit pas 
 que nous ne vend issions pas 
 que vous ne vend issies pas 
 qu'ils ne vend issent pas 
 
 that I might not sell 
 that thou mightst not sell 
 that he might not sell 
 that we might not sell 
 that you might not sell 
 that they might not sell 
 
 PLUPERFECT, 
 or compound of the imperfect. 
 
 Que je n'eusse pas vend u 
 que tu n'eusses pas vend w 
 qu'il n'eût pas vend u 
 que nous n'eussions pas vend u 
 que vous n'eussiez pas vend u 
 qu'ils n'eussent pas vend u 
 
 2 i 
 
 that I might ?iol have sold 
 that thou mightst not have sold 
 that he might not have sold 
 that we might not have sold 
 thai you might not have sold 
 that they might not have sold 
 
84 FOURTH CONJUGATION. 
 
 VENDRE 
 
 toseU* 
 
 ami. âne. te. écrit, mère. être, idole, gite. opéra, ôter. tout, voûte' 
 ^at. arm. tuh. aie. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB. 
 
 Vendre to sell. (Interrogatively. J 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Est-ce que je vend 5t 
 
 vend j-tu 
 
 vend-il 
 
 vend OTW-nous 
 
 vend cz-vous 
 
 vend en/-ils 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 do I sell or am I selling 
 dost thou sell or art thou selling 
 does he sell or is he selling 
 do we sell or are we selling 
 do you sell or are you selling 
 do they sell or are they selling 
 
 PERFECT or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 
 
 or compound of the present. 
 
 Ai-je vend u 
 as-tu vend u 
 a-t-il vend u 
 avons-nous vend u 
 avez- vous vend u 
 ont-ils vend u 
 
 have I sold or did I sell 
 h^adst thou sold or didst thou sell 
 has he sold or did he sell 
 have ice sold or did we sell 
 have you sold or did you sell 
 have they sold or did they sell 
 
 -U- IMPERFECT. 
 
 Vend ais-je did I sell or was 1 selling 
 
 vend ais-t\i didst thou sell or zvast thou selling 
 
 vend ait-il did hé sell or ivas he selling 
 
 vend zon5-nous did we sell or t£;ere we selling 
 
 vend iez-\o\is did you sell or were you selling 
 
 vend aten/-ils did they sell or were they selling 
 
 A vais- je vend u 
 avais-tu vend u 
 avait-il vend u 
 avions-nous vend u 
 aviez-vous vend u 
 avaient- ils vend u 
 
 Vend M-je 
 vend is-txx 
 vend it-il 
 vend f7ne*-nous 
 vend Ues-vous 
 vend irent-ila 
 
 PLUPERFECT, 
 or compound of the imperfect. 
 
 had I sold or had I been selling 
 hadst thou sold or hadst thou been selling 
 had he sold or had he been selling 
 had we sold or had we been selling 
 had you sold or had you been selling 
 had they sold or had they been selling 
 
 PRETERIT DEFINITF., 
 
 did I sell 
 
 didst thou sell 
 did he sell 
 did we sell 
 did you sell - 
 did they sell 
 
 tÈee page 8, art. 65 
 
rOURTH CONJUGATION. 
 
 VENDRE 
 
 to selL 85 
 
 'mwr. mûr. jewne. jewne. boite, boîte, ancre, ingrat, onde. un. aine.N. 
 ■'j, as* in pleasure, gn. as ni in union, ill^ as lli^ in Willi ann. 
 
 Eus- je vend u 
 eus-ta vend u 
 eut il vend u 
 «•ûmes-nous Vend u 
 eutes-vous vend u 
 curent-ils vend u 
 
 ÎRETEBIT ANTERIOR, 
 er compound of the preterit. 
 had I sold 
 hadst thou sold 
 had he sold 
 had we sold 
 had you sold 
 had they sold 
 
 Vend ?-ai-je 
 vend ra5-tu 
 vend ra-t-il 
 vend rons-nous 
 vend res-vous 
 Vend ron/-ils 
 
 FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 shall or ivill I sell 
 shall or will thou sell 
 shall or will he sell 
 shall or xvill we sell 
 shall or ivill you sell 
 shall or will they sell 
 
 Aurai-je vend u 
 auras-tu vend u 
 aura-t-ii vend u 
 aurons-nous vend u 
 aurez-vous vend u 
 auront-il vend u 
 
 FUTURE ANTKRIOR, 
 or compound of the future. 
 
 shall or ivill I have sold 
 shall or wilt thou have sold 
 shall or will he have sold 
 shall or will we have sold 
 shall or will you have sold 
 shall or will they have sold 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 -N- 
 
 Vend mis-je 
 vend rais-t\x 
 vend rai/-il 
 vend riows-nous 
 vend riez- vous 
 vend raient-ila 
 
 should, would, could, or might I sell 
 shouldst, wouldst, couldst, or mightst thou sell 
 should, would, could, or might he sell 
 should, iDOuld, could, or might we sell 
 should, would, could, or might you sell 
 should, ivould, could, or might they sell 
 
 Aurais-je vend w, 
 or eussé-je vend u 
 aurais-tu vend le, 
 or eusses- tu vendu 
 aurait-il vend u, 
 01 eût-il vendu 
 aurions-nous vendw, 
 or eussions-nous vendu 
 auriez-vous vend u, 
 or eussies-vous vend u 
 auraient-ils vend u, 
 T euiseîil-ils vend u 
 
 PAST, 
 und oj the present 
 
 should, would, could, 
 
 or might I have sold 
 shouldst, wouldst, couldst, 
 
 or mightst thou have sold 
 should, would, could, 
 
 or might he have sold 
 should, would, could, 
 
 or might we have sold 
 should, would, could, 
 
 or might you have sold 
 should, wouid, could, 
 
 or might they have sold 
 
86 FOURTH CONJUGATION. 
 
 VENDRE 
 
 to sen. 
 
 'ami. âne. te. écrit, mère. être, idole, gîte, opéra, ôter. tout, voûle. 
 ^at. arm. tttb. aie. mare, there, zdiom. eel. opera, over. too. fool. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB. 
 
 Vendre to sell, (Negatively and Interrogatively,) 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Est-ce que je ne vend s pas 
 
 ne vend s-tu pas 
 
 ne vend-il pas 
 
 ne vend o^s-nous pas 
 
 ne vend es-vous pas 
 
 ne vend enMls pas 
 
 N'ai-je pas vend u 
 n'as-tu pas vend u 
 n'a-t-il pas vend w 
 n'avons-nous pas vend u 
 n'avez-vous pas vend u 
 n'ont-ils pas vend u 
 
 Ne vend aw-je pas 
 ne vend afs-tu pas 
 ne vend ait-\\ pas 
 ne vend zorw-nous pas 
 ne vend zes-vous pas 
 ne vend aien/-ils pas 
 
 N'avais-je pas vend u 
 n'avais-tu pas vend u 
 n'avait-il pas vend u 
 n'avions-nous pas vend u 
 n'aviez-vous pas vend u 
 n'avaient-ils pas vend u 
 
 -J- 
 
 Ne vend is-je pas 
 ne vend zs-tu pas 
 ne vend i^-il pas 
 ne vei^fi îmes nous pas 
 ne vend îtes-voMS pas 
 ne vend ircnt-ils pas 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 do I not sell or am I not selling 
 dost thou not sell or art thou not selling 
 does he not sell or is he not selling 
 do we not sell or are we not selling 
 do you not sell or are you not selling 
 do they not sell ox are they not selling 
 
 3T or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 
 or compound of the present. 
 
 have I not sold, did I not sell, 
 
 or have I not been selling 
 hast thou not sold, didst thou not selU 
 
 or hast thou not been selling 
 has he not sold, did he not sell, 
 
 or has he not been selling 
 have we not sold, did we not sell, 
 
 or have we not been selling 
 have you not sold, did you not sell, 
 
 or have you not been selling 
 have they not sold, did they not sell, 
 
 or have they not been selling 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 did I not sell or tvas I not selling 
 didst thou not sell or wast thou not selling 
 did he not sell or was he not selling 
 did we not sell or %vere we not selling 
 did you not sell or were you not selling 
 did they not sell or were they not selling 
 
 PLUPERFECT, 
 compound of the imperfect, 
 had I not sold or had I not been 
 hadst thou not sold or hadst thou not been 
 had he not sold, or had he not been 
 had we not sold or had we not been 
 had you not sold or had you not been 
 had they not sold or had they not been 
 
 PRETERIT DEFINITE. 
 
 did I not sell 
 didst thou not sell 
 did he not sell 
 did we not sell 
 did you not sell 
 did they not sell 
 
 
FOURTH CONJUGATION. 
 
 VENDRE 
 
 to sell S7 
 
 'inxiT. mûr. jeune, jtûne. boite, boîte, ancre, ingrat, onde. un. amcN 
 ''j, as s in pleasure, gn,, as ni in umon. ill^ as Ui^ in WiZ/iani 
 
 N'ous-je pas vend u 
 n'eus-tu pas vendw 
 n'eut-il pas vend u 
 n'eûines-nous pas vend u 
 n'eiites-vous pas vend u 
 n'eurent-ils oas vendit 
 
 PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
 
 or compound of the preterit. 
 
 had I not sold 
 hadst lliou not sold 
 had he not sold 
 had ice not sold 
 had you not sold 
 had they not sold 
 
 -L- 
 
 Ne vend rai-je pas 
 ne vend ras-t\x pas 
 ne vend ra-t-il pas 
 ne vend rons-nons pas 
 ne vend rez-wous pas 
 ne vend ron/-ils pas 
 
 FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 shall or tvill I not sell 
 shall or wilt thou not sell 
 shall or will he not sell 
 shall or will we nbt sell 
 shall or will you not sell 
 shall or will they not sell 
 
 N'aurai-je pas vend u 
 n'auras-tu pas vend u 
 n'aura-t-il pas vend u 
 n'aurons-nous pas vend u 
 n'aurez-vous pas vend u 
 n'auront-ils pas vend u 
 
 FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
 or compound of the future. 
 
 shall or will I not have sold 
 shall or wilt thou not have sold 
 shall or will he not have sold 
 shall or will we not have sold 
 shall or will you not have sold 
 shall or loill they not have sold 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 Ne vend rais-je pas 
 ne vend rais-in pas 
 ne vend rait-il pas 
 ne vend rton-s-nous pas 
 ne vend riez-xons pas 
 ne vend razen/-ils pas 
 
 should^ would, couldy or might I 
 shouldsty wouldst, couldst, or mightst thou 
 should., would, could, or might he 
 should, would, could, or might we 
 should, would, could, or might you 
 should, would, could, or might they 
 
 PAST, 
 or compound of the present. 
 
 N'aurais-je pas vend m, 
 or n^eussé-je pas vend u 
 n'aurais-tu pas vend w, 
 or n''eusses-tu pas vend u 
 n'aurait-il pas vend u, 
 or n^eut-il pas vend u 
 n'aurions-nous pas vend u, 
 or n'' eussions-nous pas vend u 
 n'auriez-vous pas vendw, 
 or n'eussiez-vous pas vendu 
 n'auraient-ils pas vend m, 
 or rCeiusent-ils pas vend u 
 
 should, would, could, 
 
 or might I not have sold 
 shouldst, wouldst, couldst, 
 
 or mightst thou not have sold 
 should, would, could, 
 
 or might he not have sold 
 should, would, could, 
 
 or might we not have sold 
 should, would, could, 
 
 or might you not have sold 
 should, would, could, 
 
 or might they not have sold 
 
8» OF PRONOMINAL AND REFLECTED VERBS. 
 
 Of Pronominal Verbs, 
 
 140. The Pronominal verbs, are those in which each perso. i 
 is conjugated through all the tenses, with two personal pro- 
 nouns. 
 
 141. When the verbs begin with a consonant or an h 
 aspirated, the two pronouns are — 
 
 Singular. Plural, 
 
 je me I myself nous nous we ourselves^ 
 
 tu te thou thyself, *vous vous you yourselves, 
 
 il se he himself ils se they themselves, 
 
 elle se she herself elles se they themselves. 
 
 * Sometimes vous vous yoxi yourself^ for thou thyself: see page 6 art. 55. 
 
 142. When the verbs begin with a vowel or an h mute, the 
 two pronouns take the following form : — 
 
 Singular. Plural, 
 
 je m' I myself nous nous we ourselves, 
 
 tu t' thou thyself, *vous vous you yourselves, 
 
 il s' he himself, ils s' they themselves, 
 
 elle s' she herself, elles s' they themselves. 
 
 * Sometimes vous vous you yourself for thou thyself: see page 6, art 55. 
 
 143. The pronominal verbs, comprise the reflected verbs, 
 and the reciprocal verbs. 
 
 Of Reflected Verbs. 
 
 144. There are active and neuter reflected verbs. 
 
 145. A reflected verb is active, when the action of the verb 
 falls upon the subject — as. Je me flatte I flatter myself — il se 
 hue he praises himself. 
 
 146. Almost all the active verbs are susceptible of being 
 used as reflected verbs. 
 
 147. A reflected verb is neuter, when it indicates only a state 
 or a disposition of the subject — tis,je me repens 1 repent. 
 
 148. There are also unipersonal or impersonal reflected 
 verbs ; these are only used in the third person singular ; active 
 verbs frequently assume this form, in a passive sense, for the 
 sake of brevity and energy — as, il se bâtit beaucoup de maisons 
 for beaucoup de maisons sont bâties there are a great many 
 houses building — il se donnera une grande bataille for une 
 grande bataille sera donnée a great battle will be fought. 
 
 149. All the simple tenses of the reflected verbs are con- 
 jugated like those of the verbs of the respective conjugations 
 
OP RECIPROCAL VERBS. 89 
 
 to which they belong ; for instance, se lev er to rise, takes t'ne 
 same terminations as par 1er to speak — s'enrich ir to grow rich, 
 takes the same terminations as fin ir to finish. 
 
 149. When a reflected verb is formed with an irregular verb, 
 it IS conjugated like the irregular verb would be, if not used as a 
 reflected verb, that is with two pronouns ; for instance, se ser mr 
 to make use of, will be conjugated like ser mr to serve, see 
 page ]31. 
 
 151. All the compound tenses of all the reflected verbs, 
 without exception, are conjugated with the auxiliary, être to be, 
 although they be all conjugated in English with the auxiliary 
 avoir to have. 
 
 152. In compound tenses, the participle past must agree in 
 gender and lïumber, with the nominative or subject of the verb, 
 
 je me suis levé (a gentleman,) I have risen, 
 
 je me suis levée (a lady,) I have risen, 
 
 nous nous sommes levés {gentlemen,) we have risen, 
 
 nous nous sommes levées (ladies,) we have risen, 
 
 152. When a reflected verb is governed in the infinitive 
 mood by another verb, the pronoun se, which precedes the pre- 
 sent of the infinitive, must be made to correspond with the 
 nominative of the first verb, thus — 
 
 je veux me moquer de lui / wish to laugh at him, 
 
 tu veux te moquer de lui thou wishest to laugh at himy 
 
 il veut se moquer de lui ' he wishes to laugh at him, 
 
 elle veut se moquer de lui she wishes to laugh at him 
 
 nous voulons nous moquer de lui we wish to laugh at him^ 
 
 vous voulez vous moquer de lui you wish to laugh at him, 
 
 ils veulent se moquer de lui they wish to laugh at him, 
 
 elles veulent se moquer de lui they wish to laugh at him, 
 
 Pupils are very liable, if not put on their guard, to express memselves 
 thus — je veux se moquer de lui — tu veux se moquer de lui, &c., because se 
 is generally put before the infinitive present of all reflected verbs. 
 
 Of Reciprocal Verbs, 
 
 154. A verb is reciprocal, when it expresses that two or 
 more nominatives or subjects act upon each other. 
 
 155. Reciprocal verbs are conjugated like reflected verbs, 
 both in their simple and in their compound tenses ; but they 
 have no singular as they express the reciprocal action of per- 
 sons or of things upon each other ; for instance, John and 
 Joseph will say, 
 
90 
 
 LIST OF REFLECTED VERBS. 
 
 1*^, nous nous secourons l'un l'autre we assist one another. 
 
 Mary and Sarah will say, 
 2d, nous nous secourons l'une l'autre we assist one another» 
 
 John, Joseph, Paul, and any number of others will say, 
 Sd, nous nous secourons les uns les autres we assist one another 
 
 Mary, Sarah, Rebecca, and any number of others will say, 
 i:th, nous nous secourons les unes les autres we assist one another, 
 
 156. Remark that when two persons only, are the nomina- 
 tives or subjects of the verb, one another, is put in the""singular 
 in French ; and if both persons, or one only, is of the masculine 
 gender, one another is rendered by Vun Vautre as in the 1st 
 example ; but if both persons are of the feminine gender, one 
 another is rendered by Vune Vautre, as in the 2d example. 
 
 157. When more than two persons are the nominativco or 
 subjects of the verbs, then one another is put in the plural in 
 French ; and if all the persons, or one only, is of the masculine 
 gender, one another is rendered by les uns les autres, as in the 
 3d example ; but if ail the persons are of the feminine gender, 
 one another is rendered by les unes les autres, as in the 4th 
 example. 
 
 158. A list of Verbs, which, though not admitting in English, 
 the pronouns one^s-self, myself, thyself, himself, herself our- 
 selves, yourselves, themselves, are nevertheless reflected in 
 French. 
 
 to ahstain 
 to agree 
 to apply 
 to bathe 
 
 to hear up against 
 to be angry 
 to be amended 
 to become liquid 
 to he dying 
 to be eager 
 to be eclipsed 
 to begin to thrive 
 to be moved 
 to be obstinate 
 to be out of con- \ 
 ceit with < 
 
 lo he renewed 
 to be resolved 
 to be silent 
 to beware 
 to Pjow 
 to hoaH 
 
 s'abstenir, 
 
 s'accorder, 
 
 s'adresser, 
 
 se baigner, 
 
 se raidir, 
 
 se fâcher, 
 
 se fâcher, 
 
 se liquéfier, 
 
 se mourir, 
 
 s'empresser, 
 
 s'éclipser, 
 
 se remplumer, 
 
 s'attendrir, 
 
 s'opiniâtrer, 
 
 se dégoûter, 
 
 se renouveler, 
 se résoudre, 
 se taire, 
 se garder, 
 s'épanouir, 
 se vanter, 
 
 to hreaJc loose 
 
 to catch cold 
 
 to care for 
 
 to complain 
 
 to come forward 
 
 to confer 
 
 to congeal 
 
 to creep into 
 
 to delight in 
 
 to delight in 
 
 to diminish 
 
 to desist 
 
 to discharge 
 
 to discourse with, 
 
 to distrust 
 
 to determine 
 
 to elapse 
 
 to endeavour 
 
 to exclaiîn 
 
 to expect 
 
 to evaporate 
 
 to fade away 
 
 se déchaîner, 
 
 s'enrhumer, 
 
 se soucier, 
 
 se plaindre, 
 
 s'avancer, 
 
 s'aboucher, 
 
 se figer, 
 
 se glisser, 
 
 se plaire, 
 
 se complaire, 
 
 s'apetissGr, 
 
 se désister, 
 
 s'acquitter, 
 
 s'entretenir, 
 
 se défier, 
 
 se déterminer, 
 
 s'écouler, 
 
 s'eftbrcer, 
 
 se récrier, 
 
 s'attendre, 
 
 s'évaporer, 
 
 se flétrir. 
 
LIST OP REFLECTED VERBS. 
 
 
 
 to faint away 
 to fall asleep 
 to fall asleep again 
 to fall furiously ) 
 
 upon ^ 
 
 to fall tooth and ) 
 
 nail upon \ 
 
 to fancy 
 to fancy 
 to new feather 
 to Jlock in crowds 
 to flow out 
 to fly away 
 tofiy into a passion 
 to gangrene 
 to get intoxicated 
 to get palsied 
 to get preferment 
 to get up 
 to get weary 
 to give over 
 to give up 
 to go away 
 to go forward 
 to go to bed 
 to grieve 
 to grow better 
 to grow bold 
 to grow drowsy 
 to grow familiar 
 to grow impatient 
 to grow milder 
 to grow poor 
 to grow proud 
 to grow rich 
 to grow tired 
 to heal 
 to inquire 
 to intermeddle 
 to intermeddle 
 to keep from 
 kneel down 
 tO laugh at 
 to lay hold of 
 to league 
 to lean on one's ) 
 
 elbow \ 
 
 to lean upon 
 to make haste 
 to make haste 
 to make one'' s escape 
 to make one''s escape 
 to make an alliance 
 to marry 
 to meddle with 
 
 s'évanouir, 
 s'endormir, 
 se rendormir, 
 
 s'acharner, 
 
 s'acharner, 
 
 se figurer, 
 
 s'imaginer, 
 
 se remplumer, 
 
 s'attrouper, 
 
 s'écouler, 
 
 s'envoler, 
 
 s'emporter, 
 
 se gangrener, 
 
 s'enivrer, 
 
 se paraliser, 
 
 s'avancer, 
 
 se lever, 
 
 s'ennuyer, 
 
 se désister, 
 
 se démettre, 
 
 s'en aller, 
 
 s'avancer, 
 
 se coucher, 
 
 s'attrister, 
 
 s'amender, 
 
 s'enhardir, 
 
 s'assoupir, 
 
 se familiariser, 
 
 s'impatienter 
 
 se radoucir 
 
 s'appauvrir, 
 
 s'enorgueillir, 
 
 s'enrichir, 
 
 se lasser, 
 
 se guérir, 
 
 s'enquérir, 
 
 s'entremettre, 
 
 s'ingérer, 
 
 se garder, 
 
 s'agenouiller, 
 
 se moquer 
 
 se saisir, 
 
 se liguer, 
 
 s'accouder, 
 
 s'appuyer, 
 se dépêcher, 
 se hâter 
 s'évader, 
 s'échapper, 
 s'allier, 
 se marier 
 SQ mêlor, 
 
 to melt 
 
 to mistake 
 
 to mistrust 
 
 to move forward 
 
 to mutiny 
 
 to oppose, 
 
 to overflow 
 
 to paint 
 
 to perceive 
 
 to persist 
 
 to putrefy 
 
 quit one'' s country 
 to rebel 
 to recant 
 to rejoice 
 to remember 
 to remember 
 to repent 
 to resign 
 to retract 
 to rise 
 
 to run into debt 
 to i-un away 
 to seize 
 to sell 
 to set off 
 to shrink 
 to sit down 
 to sit down at table 
 to slip 
 to stay 
 to steal away 
 to stick to 
 to stiffen 
 to stoop 
 to stop 
 to strive 
 to struggle 
 to submit 
 to subscribe 
 to surrender 
 to take a strong 7 
 fancy ^ 
 
 to take delight in 
 to take offence 
 to take pet 
 to take refuge 
 to take rest 
 to take root 
 to trust 
 
 to vanish away 
 to walk 
 to withdraw 
 to wonder 
 to wonder 
 2K 
 
 se fondre, 
 se méprendie, 
 se méfier, 
 s'avancer, 
 se mutiner, 
 s'opposer, 
 se déborder, 
 se farder, 
 s'apercevoir 
 s'obstiner, 
 se putréfier, 
 s'expatrier, 
 se révolter, 
 se dédire, 
 se réjouir, 
 se souvenir, 
 se ressouvenir 
 se repantir, 
 se démettre, 
 se rétracter, 
 se lever, 
 s'endetter, 
 s'enfuir 
 se saisir, 
 se vendre, 
 s'acheminer 
 s'apetisser, 
 s'asseoir, 
 s'attabler, 
 se glisser, 
 s'arrêter, 
 s'esquiver, 
 s'attacher, 
 se raidir, 
 se baisser, 
 s'arrêter, 
 s'efforcer, 
 se débattre, 
 se soumettre, 
 s'abonner, 
 se rendre, 
 
 s'entêter, 
 
 se plaire, 
 se formaliser 
 se piquer, ' 
 se réfugier, 
 se reposer, 
 s'enraciner, 
 se fier, 
 s'éclipser, 
 se promener 
 se retirer, 
 s'étonner, 
 s'émerveiller. 
 
92 
 
 PRONOMINAL VERBS. 
 
 •rtiiii. îne. te. écrit, mere. être, idole. g*te. opéra, ôter. tout, voûio 
 2'x/. flriu. tub. ale. marc, tliere. idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE REFLECTED VERB. 
 
 Se lever to rise. (^affirmatively,) 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 A- 
 
 Se lev er 
 
 S'être levé 
 
 -c- 
 
 Se lev ant 
 
 -D- 
 
 S 'étant lové 
 
 -E- ♦ 
 
 Levé 
 
 TRESEiNT, 
 
 to rise 
 
 PAST or PERFECT, 
 
 or compound uf the present, 
 
 to have risen 
 
 PARTICIPLE PRESENT OT ACTIVE, 
 
 rising 
 
 COMPOUND OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 
 
 having risen 
 
 PARTICIPLE PAST OT PASSIVE. 
 
 men 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 -F- PRESENT. 
 
 Je me lev e / rise^ do rise, or am rising 
 
 tu te lev es thou ristsl, dost rise, or art rising 
 
 il se lev e he rises, does rise, or is rising 
 
 nous nous lev ans ice rise, do rise, or are rising 
 
 vous vous lev es you rise, do rise, or are rising 
 
 ils se lev etit they rise, do rise, or are rising 
 
 -G- PERFECT or PRETE2.IT INDEFINITE, 
 
 or compound of the present. 
 
 Je me suis lev é I have risen, did rise, or have been rising 
 
 tu t'es lev é thou hast risen, didst rise, or hast been rising 
 
 il s'est lev é he has risen, did rise, or has been rising 
 nous nous sommes levé^ tee have risen, did rise, or have been rising 
 
 vous vous êtes lev é^ 
 ils se sont lev es 
 
 -n- 
 
 Je me lev ais 
 tu te lev ais 
 il se lev ait 
 nous nous lev ions 
 vous vous lev ies 
 ils se lev aient 
 
 Je m 'étais lev é 
 
 tu t'étais lev é 
 
 il s'ptait lev é 
 
 nous nous étions lev es 
 
 vous vous étiez lev is 
 
 iLâ s'étaieût lev es 
 
 you have risen, did rise, or have been rising 
 they have risen, did rise, or have been riiing 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 / rose, did rise, or was rising 
 thou rosest, didst rise, or irast rising 
 he rose, did rise, or was rising 
 we rose, did rise, or were rising 
 you rose, did rise, or were rising 
 they rose, did rise, or were rising 
 
 PLUPERFECT, 
 or compound of the imperfect. 
 1 had risen or had been rising 
 thou hadst risen or hadst been rising 
 he had risen or had been rising 
 we had risen or had been rising 
 you had risen or had been rising 
 Ûiej/ had risen ot hud been rising 
 
PRONOMINAL VERBS. 
 
 'mwr. mûr. jeune, jeûne, botte. hoi\e. ancre, ingrat, onde. un. amoN. 
 ^j, as 3 in pleasure. gn, as ni in union. ill, as lli in Wi^/taïu. / 
 
 -j- 
 
 Je me lev ai 
 
 tu te lev as 
 
 A se lev a 
 
 nous nous lev âmes 
 
 vous vous ley âtes 
 
 ils se lev èreiii 
 
 Je me fus lev é 
 
 tu te fus lev é 
 
 il se fut lev é 
 
 nous nous fûmes lev es 
 
 vous vous fuies lev es 
 
 ils se furent lev es 
 
 -L- 
 
 Je me lev erai 
 tu te le V eras 
 il se lèv era 
 nous nous lèv erons 
 vous vous lèv erez 
 ils se lè V eront* 
 
 Je me serai lev é 
 
 tu te seras lev é 
 
 il se sera lev é 
 
 nous nous serons lev es 
 
 vous vcfus serez lev es 
 
 ils se seront lev es 
 
 PRETERIT DEFINITE. 
 
 / rose or did rise 
 thou roses I or didst rise 
 he ruse or did rise 
 we rose or did rise 
 you rose or did rise 
 tkey rose or did rise 
 
 PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
 4>r compound of the preterit. 
 I had risen 
 t/iou hadsl risen 
 he had risen • 
 we had risen 
 you had risen 
 they had risen 
 
 FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 / shall or will rise 
 . thou shall or xvill rise 
 he s h an or xoill rise 
 we shall or will rise 
 you shall or ivill rise 
 they shall or will rise 
 
 FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
 or compound of the future. 
 
 1 shall or xidll have risen 
 thou shall or wilt have risen 
 he shall or will have risen 
 we shall or icill have risen 
 you shall or will have risen 
 they shall or icill have risen 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 -N- 
 
 Je me lev erais 
 tu te lèv erais 
 il se lev erail 
 nous nous lèv erions 
 vous vous lèv eriez 
 ils se lèv traient 
 
 Je me serais lev é, 
 or Je me fusse lev é 
 tu te serais lev é, 
 or tu te fusses lev é 
 il se serait lev é» 
 or il se fût lev è 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 / should, would, could, or might rise 
 
 thou shouidst, wouldst, couldst, or mightst rwe 
 
 he should, would, could, or might rise 
 
 we should, would, could, or might rise 
 
 you should, would, couldy or viight rise 
 
 they should, would, could, or mig/it rise 
 
 PAST, 
 or compound of the present. 
 
 J should, tvoiild, could, 
 or might have risen 
 thou shouidst, ivouldst, couldst^ 
 
 or mightst have risen 
 he should, would, could^ 
 or might have risen 
 
94 
 
 PRONOMINAL TERES. 
 
 '^ami, âne. te. écrit, mère, être, idole, gîte, opéra, ôter. tûwt. voûter 
 ^at. arm. tuh. aie. mare, there, zdiom. eel. opera, over. too. fool 
 
 nous nous serions lev és^ 
 or nous nous fussions lev es 
 vous vous seriez lev e'^, 
 or vous vous fussiez lev es 
 ils se seraient lev es, 
 or ils se fussent lev es 
 
 we should, would, could, 
 or might have risen 
 
 you should, would, could^ 
 or might have risen 
 
 they should, would, could^ 
 or might have risen 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Lev e-toi 
 qu'il se lev e 
 lev o/w-nou3 
 loves-vous 
 qu'ils se lev ent 
 
 rise (thou) 
 let him rise 
 let us rise 
 rise {you) 
 let them rise 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 -a- 
 
 Que je me lev e 
 
 que tu te lev e* 
 
 qu'il se lev e 
 
 que nous nous lev ions 
 
 que vous vous lev iez 
 
 qu'ils se lev ent 
 
 that I may rise 
 that thou mayst rise 
 that he may rise 
 that %De may rise 
 that you may rue 
 that they may rise 
 
 Que je me sois lev é 
 que tu te sois lev é 
 ■ qu'il se soit lev é 
 que nous nous soyons lev es 
 que vous vous soyez lev es 
 qu'ils se soient lev es 
 
 PRETERIT or PAST, 
 or compound of the present. 
 
 that I may have risen 
 thai thou mayst have risen 
 that he may have risen 
 that we may have risen 
 that you may have risen 
 that they may have risen 
 
 Que je me lev asse 
 que tu te lev asses 
 qu'il se lev ât 
 Que' nous nous lev assions 
 quo vous vous lev assies 
 qu'ils se lev assent 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 that I might rise 
 that thou mightst rise 
 that he might rise 
 that we might rise 
 that you might rise 
 that they might rise 
 
 PLUPERFECT, 
 or compound of the imperfect. 
 
 Que je me fusse lev é 
 que tu te fusses lev é 
 qu'il se fût lev é 
 que nous nous fussions lev é 
 que vous vous fussiez lev es 
 qu'ils se fussent lev es 
 
 that I might have risen 
 that thou mightst have risen 
 that he might have risen 
 that we might have risen 
 that you might have risen 
 that they might have risen 
 
PRONOMINAL VERBS. 95 
 
 *niur. nmr. jeune, jeûne, boite. hoîto, ancre, ingrat, onde. un. ameN. 
 ^j, asa m pleasure, gn, as ni in umon. ill, as lit, in Willi a.m. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE REFLECTED VERB. 
 
 Se lever to rise, (Negatively,) 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 -A- PRESENT. 
 
 Ne pas se lev er not to rise 
 
 -B- PAST or PERFECT, 
 
 or compound of the present. 
 Ne pas s'être lev é not to have risen 
 
 -C- PARTICIPLE PRESENT Or ACTIVE. 
 
 Ne se lev ant pas not rising 
 
 -n- COMPOUND OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 
 
 Ne s'étant pas lev é not having risen 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 -F- PRESENT. 
 
 Je ne me lev e pas / rise not, do not rise, or am not 
 
 tu ne te lev es pas thou risestnol, dost not me, or art not 
 
 il ne se lev e pas he rises not, does not rise, or is not 
 
 nous ne nous lev ons pas we rise not, do not rise, or are not 
 
 vous ne vous lev ez pas you rise not, do not rise, or are not 
 
 ils ne se lev ent pas they rise not, do not rise, or are not 
 
 -G- PERFECT or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 
 
 or compound of the present. 
 Je ne me suis pas lev é I have not risen, did not rise, 
 
 or have not been rising 
 tu ne t'es pas lev é thou hast not risen, didst not rise^ 
 
 or hast not been rising 
 il ne s'est pas lev é he has not risen, did not rise^ 
 
 or has not been rising 
 nous ne nous sommes pas lev es we have not risen, did not rise^ 
 
 or have not been rising 
 vous ne vous êtes pas lev es you have not risen, did not rise, 
 
 or have not been rising 
 ils ne se sont pas lev es they have not risen, did not rise, 
 
 or have not been rising 
 
 -n- IMPERFECT. 
 
 Je ne me lev ais pas / rose not, did not rise, or was 
 
 tu ne te lev ais pas thou rosest not, didst not rise, or wast 
 
 il ne se lev ait pas he rose not, did not rise, or was 
 
 nous ne nous lev ions pas we rose not., did not rise, or ivere 
 
 vous ne vous lev ies pas you rose not, did not rise, or were 
 
 ils nese lev aient pas they rose not, did not rise, or were 
 
 -1 PLUPERFECT, 
 
 or compound of the imperfect. 
 Jo ne m'étais pas lev é I had not risen or had not been 
 
 tu ne t'étais pas lev é thou hadst not risen or hadst not been 
 
 il ne s'était pas lev é he haçl not risen er had not been 
 
 nous ne nous étions pas lev es we had not risen or had not been 
 voua ne vous étiez pas lev es you had not risen or liad not been 
 Us ne s'étaient pas lev é\^ Hiey had rwi risen or had not been 
 
 2 k2 
 
96 PRONOMINAL VERBS. 
 
 ^ami. âne. te. ^crit. mère. être, idole, gîte, opéra, ôter. tout, voûte, 
 ^at. arm. twb. aie. mare, there, tdiom. eel. opera, over. too. fool. 
 
 -J- PRETERIT DEFINITE. 
 
 Je ne me lev ai pas I rose not or did not rise 
 
 tu ne te lev as pas ihou rosest not or dids^t not rise 
 
 il ne se lev a pas he rose not or did not rise 
 
 nous ne nous lev âmes pas ive rose not or did not rise 
 
 vous ne vous lev âtes pas you rose not or did not rise 
 
 ils ne se lev èrent pas they rose not or did not rise 
 
 -K- PRETERIT A,\TERI0R, 
 
 or compound of the preterit. 
 Je ne me fus pas lev é Ihad not risen 
 
 tu ne te fus pas lev é thou hadst not risen 
 
 il ne se fut pas lev é he had not risen 
 
 nous ne nous fûmes pas lev es we had not risen 
 vous ne vous fûtes pas lev es you had not risen 
 ils ne se furent pas lev es they had not risen 
 
 -L FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 Je ne me lev erai pas / shall or will not rise 
 
 tu ne te lev eras pas thou shall or wilt not rise 
 
 il ne se lev era pas he shall or will not rise 
 
 nous ne nous lev erons pas we shall or will not rise 
 
 vous ne vous lev ères pas you shall or will not rise 
 
 ils ne se lev eront pas they shall or will not rise 
 
 -M- FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
 
 or compound of the future. 
 Je ne me serai pas lev é I shall or will not have risen 
 
 tu ne te seras pas lev é . thou shalt or wilt not have risen 
 
 il ne se sera pas lev é he shall or will not have risen 
 
 nous ne nous serons pas lev es we shall or loill not have risen 
 vous ne vous serez pas lev es you shall or ivill not have risen 
 ils ne se seront pas lev es they shall or will not have risen 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 -N- ' PRESENT. 
 
 Je ne me lev erais pas / should, would., could., or might 
 
 tu ne te lev erais pas thou shouldst,wouldst, couldst, or mightst 
 
 11 ne se lev erait pas he should., would., could., or might 
 
 nous ne nous lev erions pas we should, would, could, or might 
 vous ne vous lev eriez pas you should, would, could, or might 
 ils ne se lev er aient pas they should, would, could, or might 
 
 •O- PAST 
 
 or compound of the present. 
 
 Je ne me serais pas lev é, I should, would, could, 
 or je ne me fusse pas lev é or might not have risen 
 
 tu ne te serais pas lev é, thou shouldst, wouldst, couldst, 
 or tu ne te fusses pas lev é or mightst not have risen 
 
 il ne se serait pas lev é, he should, ivould, could, 
 or il ne se fût pas levé or might not have risen 
 
PRONOMINAL VERBS. 97 
 
 'mur. mwr. jeune, jeûne, boite, boîte, ancre, «ngrat. onde. un. ameN* 
 ^j, as s in pleasure, gn, as ni in um'on. ill, as Z/i, in WiiViam, 
 
 nous ne nous serions pas lev es, we should, would, could, 
 or nous ne nous fussions pas lev is or might not have risen 
 
 vous ne vous seriez pas lev es, you should, would, could, 
 or vous ne vous fussiez pas lev es or might not have risen 
 
 ils ne se seraient pas lev es, they should, would, could, 
 o ils ne se fussent pas lev es or might not have risen 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Ne te lev e pas rise not or do not rise (thouj 
 
 qu'il ne se lev e pas let him not rise 
 
 ne nous lev ons pas let us not rise 
 
 ne vous lev es pas rise not or do not rise (you) 
 
 qu'ils ne se lev ent pas let them not rise 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Que je ne me lev e pas that I may not rise 
 
 que tu ne te lev es pas that thou mayst not rise 
 
 qu'il ne se lev e pas that he may not rise 
 
 que nous ne nous lev ions pas that we may not rise 
 
 que vous ne vous lev iez pas that you may not rise 
 
 qu'ils ne sp lev ent pas that they may not rise 
 
 -R- PRETERIT Or PAST, 
 
 or compound of the present, 
 
 Que je ne me sois pas lev é that I may not have risen 
 
 que tu ne te sois pas lev é that thou mayst not have risen 
 
 qu'il ne se soit pas lev é that he may not have risen 
 
 que nous ne nous soyons pas lev es that we may not have risen 
 
 que vous ne vous soyez pas lev es that you may not have risen 
 
 qu'ils ne se soient pas lev es that they may not have risen 
 
 -S- IMPERFECT. 
 
 Que je ne me lev asse pas that I might not rise 
 
 que tu ne te lev asses pas that thou mightst not rise 
 
 qu'il ne se lev ât pas that he might not rise 
 
 que nous ne nous lev assions pas that we might not lise 
 
 que vous ne vous lev assiez pas that you might not rise 
 
 qu'ils ne »e lev assent pas that they might not rise 
 
 -T- PLUPERFECT, 
 
 or compound of the imperfect. 
 
 Que je ne me fusse pas lev é that I might not have risen 
 
 que tu ne te fusses pas lev é that thou mightst not have risen 
 
 qu'il ne se fût pas lev é that he might not have risen 
 
 que nous ne nous fussions pas lev es that we might not have risen 
 
 que vous ne vous fussiez pas le/ es that you might îiot have risen 
 
 qu'ils ne se fussent pas lev es that they might not have risen 
 
98 
 
 PRONOMINAL VERBS. 
 
 ■«mi. âne. te. écrit, mère. être. «dole. g?^te. opéra, ôter. tout, vowte. 
 ^at. arm. tub. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE REFLECTED VERB. 
 
 Se lever to rise. (Interrogatively.) 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Me lev e'-je 
 
 te lev es-iu. 
 
 Be lev e-t-il 
 
 nous lev ons-nous 
 
 vous lev e^-vous 
 
 se lev en/-ils 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 do I rise or am I rising 
 dost thou rise or art thou rising 
 does he rise or is he rising 
 do we rise or are we rising 
 do you rise or are you rising 
 do they rise or are they rising 
 
 -G- PERFECT or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 
 
 or compound of the present. 
 
 Me suis-je lev ê have I risen or did I rise 
 
 t'es-tu lev é hadst thou risen or didst thou rise 
 
 e'est-il lev é has he risen or did he rise 
 
 nous sommes-nous lev é^ have we risen or did we rise 
 vous êtes-vous lev es have you risen or did you rise 
 Be sont-ils lev es have they risen or did they rue 
 
 -H- 
 
 Me lev ais-']e 
 te lav aw-tu 
 Be lev ai7-il 
 nous lev zons-nous 
 vous lev ies-vous 
 se lev aient-ils 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 did I rise or was I rising 
 didst thou rise or wast thou rising 
 did he rise or was he rising 
 did we rise or were we rising 
 did you rise or were you rising 
 did they rise or were they rising 
 
 M'étais-je lev é 
 t'étais-tu lev é 
 s'était-il lev é 
 nous étions-nous lev es 
 vous étiez-vous lev es 
 s'étaient-ils lev es 
 
 PLUPERFECT, 
 or compound of the imperfect, 
 had I risen or had I been rising 
 hadst thou risen or hadst thou been rising 
 had he risen or had he been rising 
 had we risen or had we been rising 
 had you risen or had you been rising 
 had they risen or had they been rising 
 
 Me lev m'-je 
 
 te lev as-iu. 
 
 se lev a-t-il 
 
 nous lev âwie^-nous 
 
 vous lev âtes-Yous 
 
 8© lev èrent'ils 
 
 PRETERIT DEFINITE, 
 
 did I rise 
 didst thou rise 
 did he rise 
 did we rise 
 did you rise 
 did they rise 
 
PRONOMINAL VERBS. 
 
 99 
 
 ^mur. mûr. jeune, jewne. boite, hoîte. ancre, ingrat, onde. un. amex 
 4j, as s in pleasure. gn., as ni in union. ill, as lli in Willia-m, 
 
 Me fus-je lev é 
 
 te fus-tu lev é 
 
 se fut-il lev é 
 
 nous fûmes-nous lev é^ 
 
 vous fûtes-vous lev es 
 
 se furent ils lev es 
 
 PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
 or compound of the preterit. 
 
 had I risen 
 hadst thou risen 
 had he risen 
 had we risen 
 had you risen 
 had they risen 
 
 -L- 
 
 Me lev erai-ie 
 te lev eras- tu 
 se lev era- t-il 
 nous lev eron^-nous 
 vous lev eres-vous 
 se lev cronMls 
 
 FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 shall or ivill I rise 
 shall or wilt thou rise 
 shall or xvill he rise 
 shall or will we rise 
 shall or will you rise 
 shall or will they rise 
 
 -M- 
 
 Me serai- je lev é 
 te seras-tu lev é 
 se sera-t-il lev é 
 nous serons-nous lev es 
 vous serez-vous lev es 
 se seront-ils lev es 
 
 FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
 or compound of the future. 
 
 shall or will I have risen 
 shall or ivilt thou have risen 
 shall or will he have risen 
 shall or will v>e have risen 
 shall or will you have risen 
 shall or will they have risen 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD 
 
 N- PRESENT, 
 
 Me lev emis-je should, would, could, or might I rise 
 
 te lev emw-tu shouldsty wouldst, couldst, or viightst thou rv» 
 
 se lev erai^-il should, would, could, or might he rise 
 
 nous lev erions-nowQ should, would, could, or might we rise 
 
 vous lev eries-vous should, would, could, or might you rise 
 
 se lev eraien/-ils should, would, could, or might they rise 
 
 PAST, 
 
 or compound of the present. 
 
 Me serais-je lev é, 
 
 or mefussé-je lev é 
 
 te serais-tu lev ^, 
 
 or tefusses~tu lev é 
 
 Be serait-il lev é, 
 
 or se fût-il lev é 
 
 nous serions-nous lev es, 
 
 or nous fussions-nous lev es 
 
 vous seriez-vous lev es, 
 
 or vous fussies-vous lev es 
 
 se seraient-ils lev es, 
 
 or 5e fassent-ils lev es 
 
 should, ivould, could, 
 
 or might I have risen 
 shouldst, wouldst, couldst^ 
 
 or mightst thou have risen 
 should, would, could, 
 
 or might he have risen 
 should, would, could, 
 
 or might we have 7ise7i 
 should, would, could, 
 
 or might you have risen 
 should, would, could, 
 
 or might they have risen 
 
100 PRONOMINAL VERBS. 
 
 'omi. âne. te. écrit, mère. être, idole, gîte, opéra, ôter. tout. voî2te 
 ^ai. arm. tub. aïe. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE REFLECTED VERB. 
 
 Se lever to rise, (Negatively and Interrogatively.) 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 -F- PRESENT. 
 
 Ne me lev é-je pas do I not rise or am I not rising 
 
 ne te lev es-tu pas dost thou not rise or art thou not rising 
 
 ne se lev e-t-il pas does he not rise or is he not rising 
 
 ne nous lev oris-nous pas do we not rise or are we not rising 
 
 ne vous lev es-vous pas do you not rise or are you not rising 
 
 ne se lev ent-ûs pas do they not rise or are they not rising 
 
 -G- PERFECT or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 
 
 or compound of the present. 
 
 Ne me suis- je pas lev é have I not risen, did I not rise^ 
 
 or have I not been rising 
 ne t'es-tu pas lev é hast thou not risen., didst thou not rise^ 
 
 or hast thou not been rising 
 ne s'est-il pas lev é has he not risen., did he not rise., 
 
 or has he not been rising 
 ne nous spmmes-nous pas lev es have we not risen., did we not rise^ 
 
 ^ or have we not been rising 
 
 ne vous êtes-vous pas lev es have you not risen, did you not rise^ 
 
 or have you not been rising 
 ne 6« sont-ils pas lev es have they not risen, did they not rise, 
 
 or have they not been rising 
 
 -H • IMPERFECT. 
 
 Ne me lev a?>-je pas did I not rise or was I not rising 
 
 ne te lev ais-l\i pas didst thounot rise or wast thou not rising 
 
 tfe se lev ai7-il pas did he not rise or was he not rising 
 
 no nous lev ions-no\xs pas did we not rise or were we not rising 
 
 ne vous lev zes-vous pas did you not rise or were you not rising 
 
 ne se lev aient-'û.s pas did they not rise or were they not rising 
 
 -I- PLUPERFECT, 
 
 or compound of the imperfect. 
 Ne m'étais-je pas lev é had I not risen or had I not "| 
 
 ne fétais-tu pas lev é hadst thou not risen or hadst thou not ^ 
 
 ne s'était-il pas lev é had he not risen or had he not [ '^ 
 
 ne nous étions-nous pas lev 'es had ice not risen or had we not \ ^ 
 
 ne vous étiez- vous pas lev 'es had you not risen or had you not 
 ne s'étaient-ils pas lev es had they not risen or had they not 
 
 -J- PRETERIT DEFINITE. 
 
 Ne me lev ai-je pas did I not rise 
 
 ne te lev a5-tu pas didst thou not rise 
 
 ne se lev a-t-il pas did he not rise 
 
 ne nous lev âmes-noMs pas did we not rise 
 
 ne vous lev âtes-wons pas did you not rise 
 
 ae se lev èrent-x\s pas did they not rise 
 
 # 
 
PRONOMINAL VERBS. 101 
 
 ^in«r. mùr. jewne. jeûne, boite, hoiio. ancre, wgrat. onde. un. ameN 
 <j, as * in pleasure, gn, as ni in union, iii, as /Zi, i n Wi Ui am 
 
 • K- PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
 
 or compound of the preterit. 
 
 Ne me fus-je pas lev é had I not risen . 
 
 ne te fus-tu pas lev é hadst thou not risen 
 
 ne se fut-il pas lev é had he not risen 
 
 ne nous fumes-nous pas lev es had we not risen 
 
 ne vous fûtes-vous pas lev es had you not risen 
 
 ne se furent-ils pas lev es had they not risen 
 
 -L- FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 Ne me lev emi-je pas shall or will I not rise 
 
 ne te lev cms-tu pas shall or wilt thou not rise 
 
 ne se lev em-t-il pas shall or will he not rise 
 
 ne nous lev erons-nous pas shall or will we not rise 
 
 ne vous lev ercs-vous pas shall or will you not rise 
 
 ne se lev eron/-ils pas shall or will they not rise 
 
 -M- FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
 
 or compound of the future. 
 
 Ne me serai-je pas lev é shall cr will I not have risen 
 
 ne te seras-tu pas lev é shall or wilt thou not have risen 
 
 ne se sera-t-il pas lev é .shall or will he not have risen 
 
 ne nous serons-nous pas lev es shall or will we not have risen 
 
 ne vous serez-vous pas lev es shall or ivill you not have risen 
 
 ne se seront-ils pas lev es shall or will they not have risen 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 .N- PRESENT. 
 
 Ne me lev erais-ie pas should^ would, could, or might I "*, 
 
 ne te lev erais-tu pas shouldst,wouldst, couldst, oi mightst thou j 4 
 
 ne se lev erait-û pas should, would, could, or might he 
 
 ne nous lev erions-nous pas should, would, could, or might we 
 
 ne vous lev eries-vous pas should, would, could, or might you 
 
 ne se lev eraien/-ils pas should, would^ could^ or miglU they j 
 
 -O- PAST, 
 
 or compound of the present. 
 
 Ne me serais-je pas lev é, should, would, could, 
 
 or ne mtfussé-je pas lev é or might I not have risen 
 
 ne te serais-tu pas lev é, shouldst, wouldst, couldst, 
 
 or ne te fusses-tu pas lev é or mightst thou not have risen 
 
 ne se serait-il pas lev é, should, would, could, 
 
 or ne se fût-il pas lev é or might he not have risen 
 
 ne nous serions-nous pas lev es, should, would, could, 
 or ne nous fussions-nous pas lev es or might we not have risen 
 
 ne vous seriez-vous pas lev es, should, would, could, 
 
 or ne vous fasnez-vous pas lev es or might you not have risen 
 
 ne se seraient-ils pas lev es should, would, could, 
 
 or ne se/vment'ils pas levés or might they not have risen 
 
 \i 
 
102 PRONOMINAL VERBS. 
 
 •ami. âne. te. écrit, mère. être. «dole. gîte, opéra, ôter. towt. voîUo. 
 ^at. arm. twb. aie. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE REFLECTED VERB. 
 
 Se bien porter to be well, (affirmatively. J 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 -A- PRESENT. 
 
 Se bien porter to be well 
 
 -S- PAST or PERFECT, 
 
 or compound of the present. 
 S'être bien port é to have been well 
 
 C- PARTICIPLE PRESENT Or ACTIVE, 
 
 Se port ant bien being well 
 
 -D- COMPOUND OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 
 
 S'étant bien port é having been well 
 
 -E- PARTICIPLE PAST Or PASSIVE. 
 
 Bien port é been well 
 
 1ND1CATI\^ MOOD. 
 
 -F- PRESENT. 
 
 Je me port e bien / am well 
 
 tu te port es bien thou art well 
 
 il se port e bien he is well 
 
 nous nous port ons bien we are xcell 
 
 vous vous port ez bien you are well 
 
 'is se port ent bien they are well 
 
 G- PERFECT or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 
 
 or compound of the present. 
 Je me suis bien port é I have been well 
 
 tu f es bien port é thou hast been well 
 
 u s'est bien port é he has been well 
 
 nous nous sommes bien port es we have been well 
 
 rous .vous êtes bien port es you have been vjell 
 
 ;ls se sont bien port es they have been well 
 
 -H- IMPERFECT. 
 
 Je me port ais bien / was well 
 
 tu te port ais bien thou wast well 
 
 il se port ait bien he was iccll 
 
 nous nous port ions bien we were well 
 
 vous vous port ies bien you were well 
 
 ils se port aient bien they were well 
 
 -I- PLUPERFECT, 
 
 or compound of the imperfect. 
 
 Je m'étais bien port é I had been well 
 
 tu t'étais bion port é thou hadst been %oe]- 
 
 il s'était bien port é he had been well 
 
 nous nous étions bien port es we had been well 
 
 vous vous étiez bien port ts you had been well 
 
 lis "s'étaient bien port es they had been well 
 
PRONOMINAL VERBS. 103 
 
 'mur. m//r. jeune, jeune, boite, boîte, ancre, mgrat. onde. un. araeN. 
 ''j, as s in pleasure, gn, as ni in union, ill, as lu, in William. 
 
 -i- PRETERIT DEFINITE. 
 
 Je me port at bien I ivas well 
 
 tu te port ds bien thou wast well 
 
 il se port a bien he was well 
 
 nous nous port âmes bien we were well 
 
 vous vous port aies bien you were well 
 
 ils se port èrent bien they were well 
 
 -K- PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
 
 or compound of the preterit. 
 Je me fus bien port é I had been well 
 
 tu te fus bien port é thou hadst been well 
 
 il se fut bien port é he lead been well 
 
 nous nous fûmes bien port es we had been well 
 vous vous fûtes bien port é* you had been well 
 ils se furent bien port es tkey had been well 
 
 -L- - FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 Je me port erai bien I shall or loill be ivell 
 
 tu te port eras bien thou shall or wilt be well 
 
 tl so port era bien he shall or will be well 
 
 nous nous port erons bien we shall or ivill be well 
 
 vous vous port erez bien you shall or will be well 
 
 ils se port erânt bien they shall or will be well 
 
 -M- FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
 
 or compound of the future. 
 Je me serai bien port é I shall or will have been well 
 
 tu te seras bien port é tliou shall or wilt have been well 
 
 il se sera bien port é he shall or will have been well 
 
 nous nous serons bien port es we shall or will have been ivell 
 vous vous serez bien port is you shall or will have been ivell 
 ils se seront bien port es they shall or will have been well 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 -N- PRESENT. 
 
 Je me port erais bien / should, would, could, or might 
 
 tu te port erais bien thou shouldst, ivouldsl, couldsl, or mightst 
 
 il se port erait bien he should, would, could, or might 
 
 nous nous port erions bien we should, xvoald, could, or might 
 
 vous vous porteries bien you should, ivould, could, or might 
 
 ils se portcrazc7t/ bien they should, would, could, or might 
 
 -O- PAST, 
 
 or compound of the present. 
 Je me serais bien port é, / should, would, could, 
 
 or je me fusse bien port é or might have been well 
 
 tu te serais bien port é, thou shouldst, wouldst, couldst 
 
 or tu te fusses bien port é or mightst have been well 
 
 il se serait bien port c, he should, would, could, 
 
 or il iefût bien port é or might haxe been well 
 
 2L 
 
 \ 
 
104 PRONOMINAL VERBS. 
 
 ^ami, âne. te. écrit, mère. être, idole, gîte, opéra, ôter. towt. vonta. 
 *af. arm. twb. aie. mare, there, zdiom. eel. opera, over. too. fo»yl, 
 
 nous nous serions bien port és^ we should, would, could, 
 or nous nous fussions bien port es or might have been well 
 
 vous vous seriez bien port es, you should, would, could, 
 or vous vous fussiez bien port es or might have been well 
 
 ils se seraient bien port es, they should, xoould, could, 
 or Us se fussent bien port es or might have been well 
 
 -p- IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Port e-toi bien . be well {thou) 
 
 qu'il se port e bien " let him be well 
 
 port oTis-nous bien ^ let us be well 
 
 port cs-vous bien be well (you) 
 
 qu'ils se port ent bien let them be well 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 -a- PRESENT. 
 
 Que je me port e bien that I may be well 
 
 |ue tu te port es bien thai thou mayst be well 
 
 qu'il se port e bien that he may be well 
 
 que nous nous port ions bien that xve may be well 
 
 que vous vous portées bien ' that you may be well' 
 qu'ils se port ent bien that they may be well 
 
 -R- PRETERIT Or PAST, 
 
 or compound of the present. 
 
 Que je me sois bien port é that I may have been well 
 
 que tu te sois bien port é that thou mayst hade been well 
 
 qu'il se soit bien port é that he may have been well 
 
 que nous nous soyons bien port es thai we may have been well 
 
 que vous vous soyez bien port es thai you may have been well 
 
 qulls se soient bien port es thai they may have been well 
 
 -S- IMPERFECT. 
 
 Que je rae port asse bien that I might be udl 
 
 que tu te port asses bien that thou mighist be well 
 
 qa'il se port ât bien that he might be well 
 
 que nous nous port assions bien that we might be well 
 
 que vous vous port assiez bien that you might be well 
 
 qu'ils se port assent bien thai they might be well 
 
 -T- PLUPERFECT, 
 
 or compound of the imperfect. 
 
 Que je me fusse bien port é that I might have been well 
 
 que tu te fusses bien port é that thou mighlsi have beeti well 
 
 qu'il se fût bien port é thai he might have been tvdl 
 
 que nous nous fussions bien port es that we rnighi have been ivell 
 
 que w)us vous fussiez bien port es that you might have been well 
 
 qu'ils se fussent bien port es that they might have been well 
 
PRONOMINAL VERBS. ' lOÔ 
 
 'mur. mûr. jeune, jeine. boite, bozte. ancre, ingrat, onde. un. amoN, 
 
 ^j, as s in pleasure. g-n, as ni in union. ill, as lli in WiZ/iam. 
 
 , . — * 
 
 , CpNJUGATION OF THE REFLECTED VERB. 
 
 Se bien porter to be well, (Negatively ) 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 -A- PRESENT. 
 
 Ne se pas bien port er not to be icell 
 
 -B- PAST or PERFECT, 
 
 or compound of the present. 
 Ne s'être pas bien porté nol to have been well 
 
 -C- PARTICIPLE PRESENT OV ACTIVE. 
 
 Ne se port ant pas bien not being well 
 
 -D- COMPOUND OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 
 
 Ne s'étant pas bien port é not having been well 
 
 ' INDICATIVE MOOD 
 
 -F- PRESENT. 
 
 Je ne me port e pas bien ^I am nol well 
 
 tu ne te port es pas bien Ihou art not well 
 
 il ne se port e pas bien he is not îvell 
 
 nous ne nous port ons pas bien we are not well 
 
 VOUS ne vous port es pas bien you are not well 
 
 ils ne se port ent pas bien Ihey are not well 
 
 -G- PERFECT or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 
 
 or compound of the present. 
 Je ne me suis pas bien port é I have not been icell 
 
 tu ne t'es pas bien port é thou hast not been well 
 
 il ne s'est pas bien port é he has not been ivell 
 
 nous ne nous sommes pas bien porte's we have nol been well 
 vous ne vous êtes pas bien port c'a you have nol been well 
 
 ils ne se sont pas bien port es they have not been well 
 
 -H- IMPERFECT. 
 
 Je ne me port aw pas bien / ivas not well 
 
 tu ne te port ais pas bien thou wast not well 
 
 il ne se port ait pas bien he ivas not well 
 
 nous ne nous port ions pas bien we were not well 
 
 vous ne vous port ies pas bien you tcere not well 
 
 ils ne se port aient pas bien they were not well 
 
 -1- PLUPERFECT, 
 
 or compound of the imperfect 
 Je ne m''étais pas bien port é I had not been well 
 
 tu ne t'étais pas bien port é thou hadst not been well 
 
 il ne s'était pas bien port é he had not been well 
 
 nous ne nous étions pas bien port es we had nol been well 
 vous ne vous étiez pas bien port t$ you had not been well 
 
 Us ne s'étaient pas bien port es they had not been vieil 
 
106 PRONOMINAL VERBS. 
 
 'ami. âne. te. écrit, mère. être, idole, gîte, opéra, ôter. tout, voûte 
 "^at. arm. twb. aie. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 
 
 -J- PRETERIT DEFINITE. 
 
 Je ne me port ai pas bien / was not well 
 
 tu ne te port as pas bien thou wast not icell 
 
 il ne se port a pas bien he was not well 
 
 nous ne nous port âmes pas bien we were not well 
 
 vous ne vous port âtes pas bien t/ou were not well 
 
 ils ne se port èrent pas bien they were not well 
 
 -K- PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
 
 or compound of the preterit. 
 Je ne me fus pas bien port é / had not been well 
 
 tu ne te fus pas bien port é thou hadst not been well 
 
 il ne se fut pas bien port é he had not been well 
 
 nous ne nous fumes pas bien port es we had not been well 
 vous ne vous fûtes pas bien port es you had not been well 
 il ne se furent pas bien port es they had not been well 
 
 -L- ' FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 Je ne me port erai pas bien / shall or will not be well 
 
 tu ne te port eras pas bien thou shall or loilt not be well — 
 
 il ne se port era pas bien he shall or will not be well 
 
 nous ne nous port erons pas bien we shall or will not be well 
 
 vous ne vous port erez pas bien you shall or will not be well 
 
 ils ne se port eront pas bien they shall or will not be well 
 
 -M- FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
 
 or compound of the future. 
 
 Je ne me serai pas bien port é I shall or will not have 
 
 tu ne te seras pas bien port é thou shalt or xvilt not have 
 
 il ne se sera pas bien port é he shall or will not have \ 3 
 
 nous ne nous serons pas bien port es we shall or will not have \ § 
 
 vous ne vous serez pas bien port es you shall or will not have 
 
 ils ne se seront pas bien port es they shall or will not have 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 -N- PRESENT. 
 
 Je ne me port ereds pas bien / should., would., could^ 
 
 or might not be well 
 tu ne te port erais pas bien tliou shouldst, wouldsl, couldst^ 
 
 or mightst not be jcell 
 il ne se port erait pas bien he should., would^ could, 
 
 or might not be well 
 nous ne nous port erions pas bien we should, would, could, 
 
 or might not be veil 
 vous ne vous port eriez pas bien you should, icould, could, 
 
 or might not be vrell 
 ils ne se port eraient pas bien they should, would, could, 
 
 or might not be well 
 
 ►O- PAST, 
 
 or compound of the present. 
 Je ne me serais pas bien port é I should, would, could, 
 
 ox je ne me fusse pas bien port é or might not have been well 
 
 tu ne te serais pas bien port é, thou shouldst, wouldst, couldsî, 
 
 or tu ne te fusses pas bien port é or mightst not have been well 
 
PRONOMINAL VERBS. 107 
 
 ^mwr. mûv. jewne. jeûne, boite, hoîtc. ancre, wgrat. onde. un. amsN. 
 ^j, as s in plea s ure. gn, as ni in union. t/Z, as Z^z, in Wi '/i am. 
 
 il ne se serait pas bien port é, he should, xvould, could»., 
 
 ox il ne se fût pas bien port é or might not have been well 
 
 nous ne nous serions pas bien port é*, we should, would, could, 
 
 or nous ne nous fussions pas bien port cs or might not have been well 
 
 vous ne vous seriez pas bien port es, you should, would, could, 
 
 or vous ne vous fussiez pas bien port es or might not hnvp been well 
 
 ils ne se seraient pas bien port es, they should, would, could, 
 
 or il ne se fussent pas bien port es or might not have been well 
 
 -p- IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Ne te port e pas bien be not well or do p-ot be well (Jthoii) 
 
 qu'il ne se port e pas bien let him not be well 
 
 ne nous port ons pas bien let us not be well 
 
 ne vous port es pas bien be not well or do not be well (^i/oit) 
 
 qu'ils ne se port ent pas bien let them not be well 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 -a- PRESENT. 
 
 Que je ne me port e pas bien that I may not be ivell 
 
 que tu ne te port es pas bien that thou mayst not be well 
 
 qu'il ne se port e pas bien that he may not be well 
 
 que nous ne nous port ions pas bien that we may not be well 
 
 que vous ne vous port tes pas bien that you may not he well 
 
 qu'ils ne se port ent pas bien that they may not be well 
 
 -R- PRETERIT OT PAST, 
 
 or compound of the present^ 
 
 Que je ne me sois pas bien port é that I may not have been well 
 
 que tu ne le sois pas bien port é that thou wMyst not ^ave been 
 
 well 
 qu'il ne se soit pas bien port e that he may not have been well 
 
 que nous ne nous soyons pas bien port es that we may not have been well 
 que vous ne vous soyez pas bien port es that you may not have been well 
 qu'ils ne se soient pas bien port es thai they may not have been well 
 
 •S- IMPERFECT. 
 
 Que je ne me port asse pas bien that I might not he well 
 
 que tu ne te port asses pas bien that thou mightsi not he well 
 
 qu'il ne se port ât pas bien that he might not he well 
 
 que nous ne nous port assions pas bien that we might not he well 
 
 que vous ne vous port assiez pas bien that you might not be well 
 
 qu'ils ne se port assent pas bien that they might not be well 
 
 -T- PLUPERFECT. 
 
 or compound of tlie impcrfcr.l 
 Que je ne me fusse pas bien port é that I might not have 
 
 que tu ne te fusses pas bien port é that thou mightsi not have 
 
 qu'il ne se fût pas bien port é that he might not have I § 
 
 que nous ne nous fussions pas bien port es that we might not have j S 
 
 que vous ne vous fussiez pas bien port es that you might not have 55 
 
 qu'ils ne se fassent pas bien port es that they might not have 
 
 2l2 
 
108 PRONOMINAL VERBS. 
 
 'ami. âne. te. écrit, mère. être, idole., gîte, opéra, ôter. tout. voûl& 
 '*at. arm. tuh. aie. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE REFLECTED VERB. 
 
 Se bien porter to be well. (Interrogatively.) 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 -F- PRESENT. 
 
 Me port e'-je bien am I well 
 
 to port es-tu bien art thou well 
 
 se port e-t-il bien is he xrell 
 
 nous port on.5-nous bien are we well 
 
 rous port es-vous bien are you well 
 
 se port ent-'ils bien are they well 
 
 -G- PERFECT or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 
 
 or compound of the present. 
 
 Me auis-je bien port é have I been well 
 
 t'es-tu bien port c hast thou been iceU 
 
 s'est-il bien port é has he been well 
 
 nous sommes-nous bien port is have ice been rcell 
 
 vous êtes-vous bien port es have you been well 
 
 se sont-ils bien port es have they been well 
 
 -H- IMPERFECT. 
 
 Me port aw-je bien was I well 
 
 te port aw-tu bien wast thou well 
 
 se port ait-'i\ bien was he well 
 
 nous port ions-nows bien were we icell 
 
 vous port ies-vous bien were you icell 
 
 se port aien' -ils bien rcere they well 
 
 '1- PLUPERFECT, 
 
 or compound of the imperfect. 
 M'étais-je bien port é had I been well 
 
 t'étais-tu bien port é Iiadst thou been well 
 
 s'était-il bien port é had he been well 
 
 nous étions-nous bien port es had we been well 
 
 vous étiez-vous bien portés had y oil been well 
 
 s'étaient-ils bien port es had they been well 
 
 -J- PRETERIT DEFINITE. 
 
 Me portci-je bien icaslwell 
 
 te port cw-tu bien wast thou well 
 
 se port a-t-il bien xcas he icell 
 
 nous port âme^-nous bien were we weU 
 
 vous port â/e5-vous bien were you well 
 
 se port èren/-ils bien were they well 
 
PRONOMINAL VERBS. 109 
 
 'mwr. mûr. jeune, jeûne, boite, hoîte. ancre, mgrat. onde, nn. amew 
 *j, as 5 in pleasure, gn, as ni in umon. ili, as lit, in Willi irm, 
 
 -K- PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
 
 or compound of the preterit. 
 
 Me fus-je bien port é had I been xvell 
 
 te fus-tu bien port é hadst thou been well 
 
 se fut-il bien port é " had he been well 
 nous fûmes-nous bien port es had we been well 
 
 vous fûtes- vous bien port es had you been well 
 
 se furent-ils bien port es had they been well 
 
 -L- FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 Me port erai-]e bien s?tall or will I be well 
 
 te port eras-iu bien shalt or ivilt thou be well 
 
 se port era -t-il bien shall or ivill he be well 
 
 nous port erons-nous bien shall or will ive be well 
 
 Vous port eres-v ous bien shall or will you be well 
 
 se port ero?il-i.\s bien shall or will they be well 
 
 -M- FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
 
 or compound of the future. 
 Me serai-je bien port é shall or will I have been well 
 
 te seras-tu bien port é shalt or wilt thou have been well 
 
 se sera-t-il bien port é shall or will he have been tvell 
 
 nous serons-nous bien port es shall or will we have been well 
 
 vous serez-vous bien port es shall_or ivill you have been well 
 
 sc seront-ils bien port es shall or will they have been well 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 -N- PRESENT. 
 
 Me port erais-]e bien should, would, could, or might I 
 
 te port crais-tn bien shouldst,wouldst,couldst,ormightstthou 
 
 se port erait-i\ bien should, would, could^ or might he 
 
 nous port eriorw-nous bien should, would, could, or might ive 
 
 vous port erzes-vous bien should, would, could, or might you 
 
 se port eraient-i\s bien should, would, cduld, or might they 
 
 -O- PAST, 
 
 or compound of the present. 
 
 Me serais-je bien port e, should, loould, could^ 
 
 or mefussé-je bien porté or might I have been well 
 
 te serais-tu bien port é, shouldst, icouldst, couldst, 
 
 or tefusses-tu bien port é or mightst thou have beeyi well 
 
 se serait-il bien port é, should, would, could, 
 
 or se fut-il bien port é or might he have been well 
 
 nous serions-nous bien port es, should, would, could, . 
 or nous fussions-nous bien port es or might we have been well 
 
 vous seriez-vous bien port es, should, would, could, 
 
 or vous fussies-vous bien port es or might you have been well 
 
 se seraient-ils bien port es, should, would, could, 
 
 or se fussent-ils bien port es or might they have been well 
 
110 PRONOMINAL VERBS. 
 
 ami âne. te. écrit, mère. être, idole. gUe, opéra, ôter. tottt. voûte 
 ^cU. arm. tub. ale. mare, there, tdiom. eel. opera, over. too. fool. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE REFLECTED VERB. 
 
 Se bien porter to he well. (Negatively and Interrogatively ) 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 -F- PRESENT. 
 
 Ne me port é-je pas bien am I not well 
 
 ne te port e^-tu pas bien art thou not well 
 
 ne se port e-t-il pas bien is he not xcell 
 
 Qe nous port ons-nous pas bien are we not well 
 
 ne vous port es-\o\\s pas bien are you not well 
 
 ne se port ent-ï\s pas bien are they not well 
 
 -G- PERFECT or PRETERIT INDEFIXITE, 
 
 or compound of the present. 
 
 Ne me suis-je pas bien port é have I not been well 
 
 ne t'es-tu pas bien port é hasl thou not been well 
 
 ne s'est-il pas bien port é has he not been well 
 
 ne nous sommes-nous pas bien port es have we not been well 
 
 ne vous êtes-vous pas bien port es have you not been well 
 
 ne se sont-ils pas bien port ts have they not been well 
 
 -U- IMPERFECT. 
 
 Ne me pert ais-^e pas bien was I not xcell 
 
 ne te port ois-tu pas bien xcast thou not well 
 
 ne se port a;7-il pas bien teas he not well 
 
 ne nous port ions-nons pas bien were we not well 
 
 ne vous porties-vous pas bien were you not well 
 
 ae se port aienMls pas bien were they not well 
 
 -I- PLUPERFECT, 
 
 or compound of the imperfect. 
 
 Ne m'étais-je pas bien port c had I not been well 
 
 ne t'étais-tu pas bien porte' hadst ihou not been well 
 
 ne s'était-il pas bien porté had he not been well 
 
 ne nous étions-nous pas bien port es - had we not been well 
 
 ne vous étiez-vous pas bien port es had you not been well 
 
 ne s'étaient-ils pas bien port es had they not been well 
 
 .T- PRETKRIT DEFINITE. 
 
 Ne me port ai-je pas bien was I not well 
 
 ne te port as-tu pas bien wast thou not well 
 
 nc se porl a-t-il pas bien was he not well 
 
 ne nous port âmes-nous pas bien were we not well 
 
 ne vous port â/es-vous pas bien rrere you not well 
 
 ue se poi t 'erent-ils pas bien were they not xcdl 
 
PRONOMINAL VERBS. Ill 
 
 'mur. mur. jewne. jewne. boite. bo?te. ancre, ingrat, onde. un. amcN. 
 *j, as s in plea s ure. gn^ as ni in u nion. ill, as lit, in Wi V.i am. 
 
 -K- PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
 
 or compound of the preterit. 
 
 Ne me fus-je pas bien port é had I not been well 
 
 ne te fus-tu pas bien port é hadst Ihou not been well 
 
 ne se fut-il pas bien porté had he not been well 
 
 ne nous fûmes-nous pas bien port es had we not been well 
 
 ne vous fûtes-vous pas bien ^orXés had you not been well 
 
 ne se furent-ils pas bien port es had lltey not been well 
 
 -L- FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 Ne me port emi-je pas bien shall or will I not be well 
 
 ne te port eras-iu pas bien shall or wilt thou not be well 
 
 ne se port era-t-il pas bien shall or will he not be well 
 
 ne nous port eron^-nous pas bien shall or will we not be well 
 
 ne vous port e?-es-vous pas bien shall or icill you not be well 
 
 ne se port eron/-ils pas bien shall or will iliev not be well 
 
 -M- FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
 
 or compound of the future. 
 Ne me serai-je pas bien port é shall or will I not have ' 
 
 ne te seras-tu pas bien port é shall or wilt thou not have 
 
 ne se sera-t-il pas bien port é shall or will he not have 
 
 ne nous serons-nous pas bien port es shall or will we not have 
 ne vous serez-vous pas bien port es shall or will you not have 
 ne se seront-ils pas bien port es shall or will they not have_^ 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 -N- PRESENT. 
 
 Ne me port erais-ie pas bien should, would, couldy 
 
 or might I not be well 
 ne te port erai5-tu pas bien shouldst, wouldst, couldsi. 
 
 or mightst thou not be weli 
 ne se port craif-il pas bien should, would, could, 
 
 or might he not be well 
 ne nous port grions-nous pas bien should, would, could, 
 
 or might we not be well 
 no vous port eries-vous pas bien should, would, could, 
 
 or might you not be util 
 ne se port erazcn^-ils pas bien should, would, could, 
 
 or might they not be well 
 
 -O- PAST, 
 
 or compound of the present. 
 Ne me serais-je pas bien port é, should, would, could, 
 
 or ne mefussé-je pas bien port é or might I not have been trell 
 
 ne te serais-tu pas bien port é, shouldst, wouldst, couldsl, 
 
 or ne te fusses-tu pas bien port é or mightst thou not have oetn wdî 
 
 ne se serait-il pas bien port é, should, would, could^ 
 
 or ne sefùt-il pas bien port é or might he not have been well 
 
 ne nous serions-nous pas bien port es, should, would, could, 
 or ne nov^ fussions-nous pas bien port es or might we not have been well 
 ne vous seriez-vous pas bien port es, should, would, could, 
 or ne vou^ fussiez-vous pas bi'n port es or might you not have been weii 
 ne se seraient-ils pas bien poit es, shouid, would, could, 
 
 or ne se fussent-Us pas bien port es oi might they not have been weS 
 
112 
 
 PRONOMINAL VERBS 
 
 ami. âne. te. écrit, mère, être, idole, gîte, opéra, ôter. tout, voûte, 
 ^at. arm. tub. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE REFLECTED VERB. 
 
 S'en aller to go away» (^affirmatively.) 
 
 -A- 
 
 S'en aller 
 
 S'en être allé 
 
 •c- 
 
 S'en allant 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 M 
 PRESENT. 
 
 to go away 
 
 PAST or PERFECT, " 
 
 or compound of the present. 
 
 to have gone away 
 
 PARTICIPLE PRESENT Or ACTIVE, 
 
 going away 
 
 -D- COMPOUND OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 
 
 S'en étant allé having gone away 
 
 -E- PARTICIPLE PAST Or PASSIVE. 
 
 En allé gone away 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 -F- PRESENT. 
 
 Jo m'en vaist I go aicay^ do go away^ or am 
 
 tu t'en vas thou goest away^ dost go away^ or art 
 
 il s'en va he goes away^ does go aivay, or is 
 
 nous nous en allons we go aicay^ do go away., or are 
 
 VOUS VOUS en allez you go away, do go atcay, or are 
 
 ils s'en vont they go away, do go away, or are 
 
 -G- PERFECT or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 
 
 or compound of the present. 
 Je m'en suis allé / went away, did go away, or have 
 
 tu t'en es allé thou wentest away, didst go away, oi hast 
 
 il s'en est allé he went away, did go away, or has 
 
 nous nous en sommes allés we went aivay, did go away, or have 
 
 vous\ous en êtes allés 
 ils s'en sont allés 
 
 H- 
 
 Je m'en allais 
 
 tu t'en allais 
 
 il s'en allait 
 
 nous nous en allions 
 
 vous vous en alliez 
 
 ils s'en allaient 
 
 -I- 
 
 Je m'en étais allé 
 
 lu t'en étais allé 
 
 il s'en était allé 
 
 uous nous en étions allés 
 
 vous vous en étiez allés 
 
 ils s'en>étaient allés 
 
 you went away, did go away, or have 
 they went away, did go away, or have 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 / went away, did go away, or was 
 thou wentest away, didst go away, or wast 
 he went a^vay, did go away, or wa^ 
 we went away, did go away, or were 
 you went away, did go away, or were 
 they went away, did go away, or were 
 
 PLUPERFECT, 
 c compound of the imperfect. 
 I had gone away 
 thou hadst gone away 
 he had gone away 
 we had gone away 
 you had gone away 
 they had gone away 
 
PRONOMINAL VERBS. 
 
 113 
 
 'mur. mûr. jeune, jeûne, botte, botte, ancre, ingrat, onde. un. ameN 
 4j, as s in pleasure. gn, as ni in union. id, as Ih in Wi/^tam 
 
 -j- 
 
 Je m'en allai 
 
 tu t'en allas 
 
 il s'en alla 
 
 nous nous on allâmes 
 
 vous vous en allâtes 
 
 ite s'en allèrent 
 
 Je m'en fus allé 
 
 tu t'en fus allé 
 
 il s'en fut allé 
 
 nous nous en fûmes allés 
 
 vous vous en fûtes allés 
 
 ils s'en furent allés 
 
 Je m'en irai 
 
 tu t'en iras 
 
 il s'en ira 
 
 nous nous en irons 
 
 vous vous en irez 
 
 ils s'en iront 
 
 Je m'en serai allé 
 
 tu t'en seras allé 
 
 il s'en sera allé 
 
 nous nous en serons allés 
 
 vous vous en serez allés 
 
 ils s'en seront allés 
 
 PRETERIT DEFINITE. 
 
 / went away or did go away 
 thou w entes t away or didst go away 
 he went away or did go away 
 we went away or did go away 
 you went away or did go away 
 they went away or did go away 
 
 RETERIT ANTERIOR, 
 compound of the preterit. 
 
 I had gone away 
 
 thou hadst gone away 
 
 he had gone away 
 *%e had gone away 
 
 you had gone away 
 
 they had gone away 
 
 FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 / shall or will go away 
 thou shalt or wilt go away 
 he shall or will go away 
 we shall or will go away 
 you shall or will go away 
 they shall or will go away 
 
 FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
 or compound of the future. 
 
 I shall or ivill have gone away 
 thou shalt or wilt have gone away 
 he shall or will have gone axoay 
 we shall or will have gone away 
 you shall or will have gone away 
 they shall or will have gone away 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 -N- PRESENT, 
 
 Je m'en irais I should, would, could, or might go away 
 
 tu t'en irais thou shouldst, wouldst, couldst, or mightst go away 
 
 il s'en irait he should, would, could, or might go away 
 
 nous nous en irions we should, would, could, or might go away 
 
 vous vous en iriez you should, would, could, or might go away 
 
 ils s'en iraient they should, would, could, or might go away 
 
 -O- PAST, 
 
 or compound of the present. 
 Je m'en serais allé, / should, would, could, 
 
 OTje tn'en fusse allé or might have gone away 
 
 tu t'en serais allé, thou shouldst, wouldst, couldst, 
 
 or tu Cen fusses allé or mightst have gone away 
 
 il s'tîn serait allé, he should, would, could, 
 
 or U s^enfût allé ot might have gone away 
 
114 
 
 PRONOMINAL VERBS. 
 
 'ami. âne. te. écrit, mère. être, idole, gîte, opéra, ôter. towt. voûte, 
 -at. arm. tiib. ale. mare, there, tdiom. eel. opera. o\qt. too. fool. 
 
 nous nous en serions allés, 
 or nous nous en fussions allés 
 vous vous en seriez allés, 
 or vous vous enfussies cûlis 
 ils s'en seraient allés, 
 or ils s'en fussent allés 
 
 we shoiddy would^ could, 
 or might have gojie away 
 
 you should, would, could, 
 or might have gone away 
 
 they should, tcould, could, 
 or might have gone away 
 
 Va-t'en 
 
 qu'il s'en aille 
 
 allons-nous-en 
 allez-vous-en 
 
 qu'ils s'en aillent 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 go away (Jhou) 
 let him go away 
 let us go away 
 go away (you) 
 let therltgo away 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 -a- 
 
 Que je m'en aille 
 
 que tu t'en ailles 
 
 qu'il s'en aille 
 
 que nous nous en allions 
 
 que vous vous en alliez 
 
 qu'ils s'en aillent 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 that I may go away 
 that thou mayst go away 
 that he may go away 
 that we may go away 
 that you may go away 
 that they may go away 
 
 Que je m'en sois allé 
 
 que tu t'en sois allé 
 
 qu'il s'en soit allé 
 
 que nous nous en soyons allés 
 
 qutf vous vous en soyez allés 
 
 Qu'ils s'en soient allés 
 
 PRETERIT er PAST, 
 i r compound of the present, 
 
 that I may have gone away 
 thai thou mayst have gone awa^ 
 that he may have gone away 
 that we may have gone away 
 that you may have gone axcay 
 that they may have gone away 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 Que je m'en allasse 
 
 que tu t'en allasses 
 
 qu'il s'en allât 
 
 que nous nous en allassions 
 
 que vous vous en allassiez 
 
 qu'ils s'en allassent 
 
 that I might go aie ay 
 that thou mightst go away 
 that he might go away 
 that we might go away 
 that you might go aicay 
 that they might go away 
 
 Que je m'en fusse allé 
 
 que tu t'en fusses allé 
 
 qu'Ll s en fût allé 
 
 que nous nous en fussions allés 
 
 que vous vous en fussiez allés 
 
 qu'ils s'en fussent allés 
 
 PLUPERFECT, 
 or compound of the imperfect. 
 
 that I might have gone away 
 that thou mightst have gone away 
 that lie might have gone aioay 
 that we might have gone away 
 that you might have gone away 
 that they might have gone away 
 
PRONOMINAL VERBS. 115 
 
 ^muT. mï/r. jcwne. jeûne, hotte, hoîie. ancre, ingrat, onde. un. aiiieN. 
 ^j, as 5 in pleasure, gn, as ni in union, ill^ as ZZi, in Willi vlxol. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE REFLECTED VERB. 
 
 S'en aller to go away. (Negatively,) 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 -A- PRESENT. 
 
 Ne pas s'en aller not to go away 
 
 -B- PAST or PERFECT, 
 
 or compound of the present. 
 
 Ne pas s'en être allé not to have gone away 
 
 -C- PARTICIPLE PRESENT Or ACTIVE. 
 
 Ne s'en allant pas not going away 
 
 -D- COMPOUND OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 
 
 Ne s'en étant pas allé not having gone away 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 -F- PRESENT. 
 
 Je ne m'en vais pas ' / do not go away or am not 
 
 tu ne t'en vas pas thou dost not go away cr art uot 
 
 il ne s'en va pas he does not go away or is not 
 
 nous ne nous en allons pas we do not go away or are not 
 
 vous ne vous en allez pas you do not go away or are not 
 
 ils ne s'en vont pas they do not go away or are not 
 
 -G- PERFECT or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 
 
 or comvound of the present. 
 Je ne m'en suis pas allé / did not go away or have not 
 
 tu ne fen es pas allé thou didst not go away or hast not 
 
 il ne s'en est pas allé he did not go away or has not 
 
 nous ne nous en sommes pas allés we did not go away or have not 
 vous ne vous en êtes pas allés you did not go axvay or have not 
 
 ils ne s'en sont pas allés thcy did not go away or have not 
 
 ~H- IMPERFECT. 
 
 Je ne m'en allais pas / did not go away or rvas not "^ 
 
 tu ne t'en allais pas thou didst not go away oi wast not 
 
 il ne s'en allait pas he did not go away or roas not [ 
 
 nous ne nous en allions pas we did not go away or were not [ 
 
 vous ne vous en alliez pas you did not go away or xoere not I 
 
 ils ne s'en allaient pas they did not go away or were not \ 
 
 -I- PLUPERFFCT, 
 
 or compound of the imperfect. 
 Je no m'en étais pas allé / had not gone away 
 
 tu ne t'en étais pas allé thou hadst not gone awap 
 
 il ne s''en était pas allé he had not gone axvay 
 
 nous ne nous en étions pas allés we had not gone away 
 vous ne vous en étiez pas allés you had not gone away 
 
 ils ne s'en étaient pas allés they had not gone away 
 
 
116 PRONOMINAL VERBS. 
 
 'ami. âne. te. ^crit. mere. être, idole, gîte, opéra, ôter. tout, voûto. 
 ^ai. arm. twb. aie. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 
 
 -J- PRETERIT DEFINITE. 
 
 Je ne m'en allai pas / did not go away 
 
 tu ne t'en allas pas thou didst nol go away 
 
 il ne s'en alla pas he did not go away 
 
 nous ne nous en allâmes pas we did not go away ' 
 
 vous ne vous en allâtes pas you did not go away 
 
 ils ne s'en allèreiflt pas ikey did not go away 
 
 -K- PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
 
 or compound of the preterit. 
 Je ne m'en fus pas allé / had not gone away 
 
 tu ne t'en fus pas allé thou hadst not gone away 
 
 il ne s'en fut pas allé he had not gone away 
 
 nous ne nous en fûmes pas allés we had not gone away 
 vous ne vous en fûtes pas allés you had not gone away 
 ils ne s'en furent pas allés they had not gone away 
 
 -L- FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 Je ne m'en irai pas / shall or ivill not go aioay 
 
 tu ne t'en iras pas thou shalt or wilt not go away 
 
 il ne s'en ira pas he shall or will not go away 
 
 nous ne nous en irons pas we shall or ivill not go away 
 
 vous ne vous en irez pas you shall or icill not go aicay 
 
 ils ne s'en iront pas they shall or will not go away 
 
 -M- FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
 
 or compound of the future. 
 Je ne m'en serai pas allé / shall or will not have gone away 
 
 tu ne t'en seras pas allé thou shalt or wilt not have gone away 
 
 il ne s'en sera pas allé he shall or will not have gone cxvay 
 
 nous ne nous en serons pas allés we shall or loill not have gone away 
 vous ne vous en serez pas allés you shall or will not have gone awav 
 ils ne s'en seront pas allés they shall or will nol have gone awa^ 
 
 .CONDITIONAL MOOD 
 
 -N- PRESENT. 
 
 Je ne m'en irais pas / should., would, could, or might 
 
 lu ne t'en irais pas thou shouldst,wouldst.,couldsl, or mightst 
 
 il ne s'en irait pas he should., would, could, or might 
 
 nous ne nous en irions pas ive should, would, could, or might 
 
 vous ne vous en iriez pas you should, would, could, or might 
 
 ils ne s'en iraient pas they should, would, could, or might 
 
 -O- PAST, 
 
 or compound of the present. 
 
 Je ne m'en serais pas allé, / ihould, would, could, 
 
 OTj'e ne m'^enfu^se pas allé or might not have gone away 
 
 tu ne t'en serais pas allé, thou shouldst, wouldsl, couldst, 
 
 or tu ne t'en fusses pas allé or mightst not have gone away 
 
 il ne s'en serait pas allé, he should, would, could, 
 
 or il ne e'en fût poi allé or might not have gone away 
 
PRONOMINAL VERBS. 117 
 
 ^mur. mur. jewne. jewno. botte, boîte, ancre, ingrat, onde. un. amew, 
 ^j, as* in pleasure, g-n, as ni in union, ill, as lli, in VVitViarn. 
 
 nous ne nous en serions pas allés, we should, would, could, 
 
 or nous ne nous en fussions pas allés or might not have gone away 
 
 vous ne vous en seriez pas allés, you should, would, could, 
 
 or vous ne vous en fussiez pas allés or might not have gone away 
 
 ils ne s'en seraient pas allés, they should, wouldy could, 
 
 or ils ne s'^en fussent pas allés or might not have gone away 
 
 -p- IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Ne t'en va pas do not go away Qhou) 
 
 qu'il ne s'en aille pas let him not go away 
 
 ne nous en allons pas let us not go away ** 
 
 ne vous en allez pas do not go away (you) 
 
 qu'ils ne s'en aillent pas let them not go away 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 -a- PRESENT. 
 
 Que je ne m'en aille pas that I may not go away 
 
 que tu ne t'en ailles pas that thou mayst not go away 
 
 qu'il ne s'en aille pas that he may not go away 
 
 que nous ne nous en allions pas that we may not go away 
 
 que vous ne vous en alliez pas that you may not go away 
 
 qu'ils ne s'en aillent pas that they may not go away 
 
 -R- PRETERIT Or PAST, 
 
 or compound of the present. 
 Que je ne m'en sois pas allé that I may not have gone 
 
 que tu ne t'en sois pas allé that thou mayst not have gone 
 
 qu'il ne s'en soit pas allé that ht may not have gone 
 
 que iious ne nous en soyons pas allés that v)e may not have gone 
 que vous ne vous en soyez pas allés that you may not have gone 
 qu'ils ne s'en soient pas allés that they may not have gone ^ 
 
 -S- IMPERFECT. 
 
 Que je ne m'en allasse pas that I might not go away 
 
 que tu ne t'en allasses pas that thou mighlst not go away 
 
 qu'il ne s'en allât pas that he might not go away 
 
 que nous ne nous en allassions pas that we might not go away 
 
 que vous ne vous en allassiez pas that you might not go away 
 
 qu'ils ne s'en allassent pas that they might not go away 
 
 -T- PLUPERFECT, 
 
 or compound of the imperfect. 
 Que je ne m'en fusse pas allé that l might not have '\ 
 
 que tu ne t'en fusses pas allé that thou tnighlst not have ^ 
 
 qu'il ne s'en fût pas allé that he might not have ! S 
 
 que nous ne nous en fussions pas allés thai we might not have [ g 
 
 que vous ne vous en fussiez pas allés that you might not have ^ 
 
 qu'ils ne s'en fussent pas allés that they might not have J 
 
118 
 
 PRONOMIN'AL VERBS. 
 
 'omi. âne. te. écrit, mère. être, idole, gîte, opéra, ôter. towt. yoûte. 
 ^at. arm. lub. aie. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE REFLECTED VERB. 
 
 S'en aller to go away. (Interrogatively.) 
 
 •^^ 
 
 M'en vais-je 
 
 t'en v^-tu 
 
 e'en va-t-il 
 
 nous en allons-nous 
 
 vous en allez-vous 
 
 e'en vont-ils 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 do I go away or am I going away 
 dost thou go away or art thou going away 
 does he go away or is he going away 
 do we go away or are we going away 
 do you go away or are you going away 
 do they go away or are they going away 
 
 M'en suis-je allé - 
 
 t'en es-tu allé 
 
 s'en est-il allé 
 
 nous en sommes-nous allés 
 
 vous en êtes-vous allés 
 
 s'en sont-ils allés 
 
 PERFECT or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 
 or compound of the present. 
 
 did T go away or have I 
 didst thou go away or hadst thou 
 did he go away or has he 
 did we go away or have we 
 did you go away or have you 
 did they go away or have they 
 
 I 
 
 M'en allais- je 
 t'en allais-tu 
 s'en allait-il 
 nous en allions-nous 
 vous en alliez-vous 
 s'en allaient-ils 
 
 05 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 did I go away or was 1 
 
 didst thou go away or wast thou I "g 
 
 did he go away or was he [ ^ 
 
 did we go away or were we [' a 
 
 did you go away or were you ' ^ 
 
 did they go away or were they ' ^ 
 
 -I- 
 
 M'en étais-je allé 
 
 l'en étais-tu allé 
 
 s'en était-il allé 
 
 nous en étions-nous allés 
 
 vous en étiez-vous allés 
 
 s'en étaient-ils aUés 
 
 PLUPEUFECT, 
 
 or compound of the imperfect, 
 had I gone away 
 hadst thou gone awa;^ 
 had he gone away 
 had we gone away 
 had you gone away 
 had they gone away 
 
 M'en allal-je 
 
 t'en allas-tu 
 
 b'en alia-t-il 
 
 nous en allâmes-nous 
 
 vous en allâtes-vous 
 
 s'en allèrent-ils 
 
 PRETERIT DEFINITE. 
 
 did I go away 
 didst thou go away 
 did he go away 
 did we go away 
 did you go away 
 dic^ they go awa^y 
 
PRONOMINAL VERBS. 
 
 119 
 
 ^rawr. mwr. jewiie. jeûne, boite, boîte, ancre, ingrat, onde. un. araeN. 
 ■•j, as s in pleasure, g-n, as ni in union, ill, as Z/i, in William. 
 
 -K- PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
 
 or compound of the preterit. 
 M'en fus-je allé fj,ad I gone axoay 
 
 t'en fus-tu allé hadst thou gone away 
 
 s'en fut-il allé had he gone away 
 
 nous en fûmes-nous allés had we gone away 
 
 vous en fûtes-vous allés had you gone away 
 
 s'en furent-ils allés had they gone away 
 
 -L- 
 
 M'en irai-je 
 t'en iras-tu 
 s'en ira-t-il 
 nous en irons-nous 
 vous en irez-vous 
 s'en iront-ils 
 
 FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 shall or will I go away 
 shall or wilt thou go away 
 shall or will he go away 
 shall or will we go away 
 shall or will you go away 
 shall or will they go away 
 
 M'en serai-je allé 
 
 t'en seras-tu allé 
 
 s'en sera-t-il allé 
 
 nous en serons-nous allés 
 
 vous en serez-vous allés 
 
 s'en seront-ils allée 
 
 FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
 or compound of the future. 
 
 shall or will I have gone away 
 shalt or wilt thou have gone away 
 shall or will he have gone away 
 shall or will we have gone away 
 shall or will you have gone away 
 shall or will they have gone away 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 -N- PRESENT. 
 
 M'en irais-je should, would, could, or might I go a%cay 
 
 t'en irais-tu shouldst, wouldst, couldst, or mightst thou go away 
 
 s'en irait-il should, would, could, or might he go away 
 
 nous en irions-nous should, would, could, or might we go axoay 
 
 vous en iriez-vous should, would, could, or might you go away 
 
 e'en iraient-ils should, would, could, or might they go away 
 
 M'en serais-je allé, 
 
 or m'enfussé-je allé 
 
 t'en serais-tu allé, 
 
 or C en fusses-tu allé 
 
 s'en s«rait-il allé, 
 
 or s'en fut-il allé 
 
 jious en serions-nous allés, 
 
 or nous en fussions-nous allés 
 
 vous en sericz-vous allés, 
 
 or vous en fuisicz-vous allés 
 
 s'en seraient-Us allés, 
 
 or s' en fussent-ils allés 
 
 PAST, 
 or compound of the present. 
 
 should, would, could, 
 
 or might I have gone away 
 shouldst, tvouldst, couldsl, 
 
 or mightst thou have gone away 
 should, would, could, 
 
 or might he have gone away 
 should, would, could, 
 
 or might we have gone away 
 should, would, could, 
 
 or might you have gone away 
 should, would, could, 
 
 or migfii they have gone away 
 
120 
 
 PRONOMINAL VERBS. 
 
 'aim, âne. te. écrit, mère. être, idole, gîte, opéra, ôter. tout. vcrûtB. 
 ^at. arm. tub, ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE REFLECTED VERB. 
 
 S'eîî aller to go aumy. (Negatively and Interrogatively.) 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Ne m'en rais-je pas 
 
 ne t'en vas-tu pas 
 
 ne s'en va-t-il pas 
 
 ne nous en alions-nous pas 
 
 ne vous en allez-vous pas 
 
 ne s'en vont-ils pas 
 
 Ne m'en suis-je pas allé 
 
 ne t'en es-tu pas allé 
 
 ne s'en est-il pas allé 
 
 ne nous en sommes-nous pas allés 
 
 ne vous en êtes-vous pas allés 
 
 ne s'en sont-ils pas allés 
 
 Ae m'en allais-je pas 
 
 ne t'en allais-tu pas 
 
 ne s'en allait-il pas 
 
 ne nous en allions-nous pas 
 
 ne vous en alliez-vous pas 
 
 ne s'en allaient-ils pas 
 
 -1- 
 
 PBESENT. 
 
 do I not go away or am I not 
 dost thou not go away or art thou not 
 does he not go away or is he not 
 do we not go away or are we not 
 do you not go aicay or are you not 
 do they not go away or are they not 
 
 PERFECT or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 
 or compouTid of the present. 
 
 did I not go away 
 
 or have I not gone away 
 didst thou not go away 
 
 or hast thou not gone away 
 did he not go away 
 
 or has he not gone away 
 did ice not go away 
 
 or have we not gone away 
 did you 7iot go away 
 
 or have you not gone away 
 did they not go away 
 
 or have they not gone away 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 did I not go away or was I not 
 didst thou not go away or wast thou not 
 did he not go away or was he not 
 did we not go away or were we not 
 did you not go away or were you not 
 did they not go away or were they not ^ 
 
 PLUPERFECT, 
 
 0^ 
 
 I 
 
 or compound of the imperfect. 
 
 Ne m'en étais-je pas allé 
 
 ne t'en étais-tu pas allé 
 
 ne s'en était-il pas allé 
 
 ne nous en étions-nous pas allés 
 
 ne vous en étiez-vous pas allés 
 
 ne s'en étaient-ils pas allés 
 
 -J- PRETERIT DEFINITE 
 
 had I not gone away 
 hadst thou not gone away 
 had he not gone away 
 had ice not gone away 
 had you not gone away 
 had they not gone away 
 
 Ne m'en allai-je pas 
 
 ne t'en allas-tu pas 
 
 ne s'en alla-t-il pas 
 
 ne nous en allâmes-nous pas 
 
 ne vous en allàtes-vous pas 
 
 ne s'en allèreut-ils pas 
 
 did I not go away 
 didst thou not go away 
 did he not go away 
 did we not go away 
 did you not go away 
 did they not go away 
 
PR<)NÔMINAL VERBS. 
 
 12t 
 
 hvur. mûr. jeune, jewne. boite, boîte, ancre, zngrat. onde. un. ame?î. 
 ^j, as s in pleasure. gn, as ni in umon. ill., as Ui m W'i^/iatn. 
 
 Ne m'en fus-je pas allé 
 
 oe t'en fus-tu pas allé 
 
 ae s'en fut-il pas allé 
 
 ne nous en fûmes-nous pas allés 
 
 ne vous en fûtes-vous pas allés 
 
 ne s'en furent-ils pas allés 
 
 PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
 or compound of the preterit. 
 
 had I not gone away 
 hadst thou not gone away 
 had he not gone away 
 had we not gone away 
 had you not gone away 
 had they not gone away 
 
 -L- 
 
 Ne m'en irai-je pas 
 
 ne t'en iras- tu pas 
 
 ne s'en ira-t-il pas 
 
 ne nous en irons-nous pas 
 
 ne vous en irez-vous pas 
 
 ne s'en iront-ils pas 
 
 FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 shall or will I not go away 
 shall or tvilt thou not go away 
 shall or will he not go away 
 shall or will we not go away 
 shall or will you not go away 
 shall or will they not go away 
 
 FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
 or compound of the future. 
 
 Ne m'en serai-je pas allé 
 
 ne t'en seras-tu pas allé 
 
 ue s'en sera-t-il pas allé 
 
 ne nous en serons-nous pas allés 
 
 ne vous en serez-vous pas allés 
 
 ne s'en seront-ils pas allés 
 
 shall or will I not have 
 shall or wilt thou not have 
 shall or tvill he not have 
 shall or will ive not have 
 shall or will you not have 
 shall or will they not have^ 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 -N- PRESENT. 
 
 Ne m'en irais-je pas should., would., could., or might 1 
 
 ne t'en irais-tu pas shouldst., wouldst., couldsl, or mightsi thou 
 
 ne s'en irait-il pas should., would., could., or might he 
 
 ne nous en irions-nous pas should., would., could., or might we 
 
 ne voua en iriez- vous pas should, would., could., or might you 
 
 ne s'en iraient-ils pas should, would, could, or might they 
 
 PAST, 
 or compound of the present. 
 
 Ne m'en serais-je pas aller 
 
 or ne m'en fuss é-Je pas allé 
 
 ne t'en serais-tu pas allé, 
 
 or ne f en fusses-tu pas allé 
 
 ne s'en serait-il pas allé, 
 
 or ne s"* en fût-il pas allé 
 
 ne nous en serions-nous pas allés, 
 
 or ne nous en fussions-nous pas allés 
 
 ne vous en seriez-vous pas allés, 
 
 or ne vous en fussiez-vous pas allés 
 
 ne s'en seraient-ils pas-aHés, 
 
 or ne s'cnfussent-iis pas allés 
 
 should, would, could, 
 
 or might I not have gone away 
 shouldst, wouldst, couldst, 
 
 or mightst thou not have gone away 
 should, would, could, 
 
 or might he not have gone away 
 should, would, could, 
 
 or might we not have gone away 
 should, would, could, 
 
 or might you not have gone away 
 should, would, could, 
 
 or might they not have gone away 
 
122 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS 
 
 Irregular Verbs are those, which differ in the variations of 
 some of their tenses and persons, from the verbs which serve as models 
 to the four regular conjugations. 
 
 However great the irregularity of a verb may be, its irregu- 
 larities never occur but in the simple tenses ; the compound are always 
 regular, and consequently conjugated as the compound tenses of the 
 verbs given as models of the four regular conjugations. 
 
 Defective Verbs, are those, which are not employed in all 
 tenses or persons. 
 
 Unipersonal Verbs, or, as commonly called Impersonal Verbs, 
 are tliose, %vhich are only employed in the third person singular, as li 
 importe, it matters ; Il pleut, it rains^ &c. 
 
 
 Aller to go. 
 
 
 -A- Aller. 
 
 -c- Allant. -E- 
 
 Allé. 
 
 -F- Je vais; 
 nous allons, 
 
 tu vas, 
 vous allez. 
 
 il va, 
 ils vont. 
 
 -H- J'allais, 
 
 nous allions. 
 
 tu allais, 
 vous alliez, 
 
 il allait, 
 ils allaient. 
 
 -j- J'allai, 
 
 nous allâmes, 
 
 tu allas, 
 vous allâtes, 
 
 il alla, 
 
 ils allèrent. 
 
 -L- J'irai, 
 
 nous irons. 
 
 tu iras, 
 vous irez, 
 
 il ira, 
 ils iront, 
 
 -N- J'irais, 
 
 nous irions. 
 
 tu irais, 
 vous iriez. 
 
 il irait, 
 ils iraient. 
 
 -p. 
 
 allons, 
 
 va, 
 allez. 
 
 qu'il aille, 
 qu'ils aillent. 
 
 -a- Que j'aille, 
 
 que nous allions. 
 
 que tu aille, 
 que vous alliez. 
 
 qu'il aille, 
 qu'ils aillent. 
 
 -s- Que j'allasse, 
 
 que nous allassions, 
 
 que tu allasses, 
 , que vous allassiez. 
 
 qu'il allât, 
 qu'ils allassent. 
 
 The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Être, to be. 
 
 There is a very common error prevalent in France, even among 
 pretty well informed people, in the application of the Compound Tenses 
 of the above verb Aller, to go ; people are very liable to use the Com- 
 pound Tenses Etre allé, je suis allé, tu es allé., il est allé, Szc. instead of 
 using the Compound Tenses of Etre, to be; avoir été, f ai été, tu as été, 
 il a été, izc. 
 
 The general rule to follow is, that, whenever the return from the 
 place mentioned, has not taken place, être allé, Je suis allé, tu es allé^ 
 il est allé, &c. must be used ; for instance — Jtan est allé à Vécole ce matin, 
 John lias gone to school this morning; means that John has gone to 
 school, and has not yet returned. 
 
 Whenever the return from the place mentioned, has taken place^ 
 Avoir été, fai été, tu as été, il a été, &c- must be used, for instance- 
 Jean a été à Vécole ce matin, John has been to school this morning ; 
 rauans that John has been to school and has returned, or at least had 
 left the schooi. 
 
OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 12'd 
 
 The following mode of expression, / will come aiid sec you— -Je 
 vtendrai vous voir; is frequently erroneously used in English, instead of 
 I will go and see you — JHrai vous voir. Venir, to come, must be used 
 in the sense of coming again to the place where the person speaking is ; 
 and Aller, to go^ in the sense of going from the place where one is, to 
 any other place ; for instance — being at a person's house, I must say, 
 Je viendrai vous voir demain — I will come and see you to-morrow ; but 
 being at any place out of the house of the person to whom I speak, I must 
 say, JHrai vous voir demain — I will go and see you to-morrow. In French 
 this distinction must absolutely be made. 
 
 S'en aller, to go away^ is conjugated, page 112. 
 
 'k- Envoyer. 
 
 -F- J'envoie, 
 
 nous envoyons, 
 
 •H- J'envoyais, 
 nous envoyions, 
 
 •J- J'envoyai, 
 
 nous envoyâmes, 
 
 -L- J'enverrai, 
 
 nous enverrons, 
 
 -N- J'enverrais, 
 
 nous enverrions, 
 
 -p- 
 
 envoyons, 
 
 -Q- Que j'envoie, 
 
 que nous envoyions, 
 
 -s- Que j'envoyasse, 
 
 que nous envoyassions 
 
 Envoyer to send. 
 
 -G- Envoyant. -e- Envoyé. 
 
 tu envoies, 
 vous envoyez, 
 
 tu envoyais, 
 vous envoyiez, 
 
 tu envoyas, 
 vous envoyâtes, 
 
 tu enverras, 
 vous enverrez, 
 
 tu enverrais, 
 vous enverriez, 
 
 envoie, 
 envoyez, 
 
 que tu envoies, 
 que vous envoyiez, 
 
 que tu envoyasses. 
 
 il envoie, 
 ils envoient. 
 
 il envoyait, 
 ils envoyaient. 
 
 il envoya, 
 
 ils envoyèrent. 
 
 il enverra, 
 ils enverront. 
 
 il enverrait, 
 ils enverraient. 
 
 qu'il envoie, 
 qu'ils envoient. 
 
 qu'il envoie, 
 qu'ils envoient. 
 
 qu'il envoyât. 
 
 que vous envoyassiez, qu'ils envoyasseni. 
 Conjugate after the same manner — Renvoyer, to send back. 
 The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
 
 Defective and Uhipersonal Verbs of the First Conjugation. 
 
 The following verbs are conjugated as Parler, to speak; but are 
 employed, at the third persons singular only. 
 
 Neiger 
 
 to snow. 
 
 -A- Neigfir 
 • c- Neige on/ 
 
 -e- II neig c 
 -li- II a neig é 
 -u- 11 neige ait 
 
 B- Avoir neigé to have snowed. 
 D- Ayant neig é having snowed, 
 snowed. 
 
 to snow. 
 
 snowing. 
 
 -E- Neig é 
 it snows^ it does snow, it is snowing. 
 it has snowed, it did snow, it has been snoinng, 
 it snowed, it did snow, it was snowing. 
 
124 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONÂL VERBS 
 
 -I- II avait neige 
 -J- I] neige a 
 -K- II eut neig é 
 -L- II neig era 
 -M- II aura neig é 
 -N- II neig erait 
 -o- II aurait neig e, 
 or U eût neig é 
 -a- Qu'il neig e 
 -R- Qu'il ait neig" é 
 -s- Qu'il neige ât 
 -T- Qu'il eût neig é 
 
 it had snowed or had been snowing. 
 
 it snowed or did snow, 
 
 it had snowed. 
 
 it will snow 
 
 it will have snowed. 
 
 it sliould^ would^ could^ or might snow 
 
 > it should, wouldy could^ or might have snowed 
 
 that it may snow. 
 
 that it may have snowed. 
 
 that it might snow. 
 
 that it might have snowed. 
 
 See the verb Parler, to speak, page 38, and conjugate like it, 
 the above verb Kegatively, Interrogatively, and Negatively and Interroga^ 
 lively; in the third person singular of every tense. 
 
 Conjugate after the same manner, the following verbs. 
 
 tl arriv e 
 
 it happens. 
 
 11 grel e 
 
 it hails. 
 
 11 bruin e 
 
 it drizzles. 
 
 11 grésill e 
 
 it rimts. 
 
 n dégel e 
 
 it thaws. 
 
 11 import c 
 
 it matters. 
 
 11 éclaire 
 
 it lightens. 
 
 11 result c 
 
 it follows. 
 
 Il gèle 
 
 ilfreezes. 
 
 U tonne 
 
 it thunders. 
 
 Irregular^ Defective, and Unipersonal Verb^ of the Second 
 Conjugation. 
 
 to acquire. 
 
 -A- Acquérir. 
 
 -F- J'acquiers, 
 
 nous acquérons, 
 
 -H- J'acquérais, 
 nous acquérions, 
 
 -j- J'acquis, 
 
 nous acquîmes, 
 
 -L- J'acquerrai, 
 
 nous acquerrons, 
 
 -2f- J'acquerrais, 
 
 nous acquerrions, 
 
 -p. 
 
 acquérons, 
 
 -a- Que j'acquière, 
 
 que nous acquérions, 
 
 -s- Que j'acquisse, 
 
 que nous acquissions 
 
 AcquÉRiR 
 
 -c- Acquérant. 
 
 tu acquiers, 
 vous acquérez, 
 
 tu acquérais, 
 vous acquériez, 
 
 tu acquis, 
 vous acquîtes, 
 
 tu acquerras, 
 vous acquerrez, 
 
 tu acquerrais, 
 vous acquerriez, 
 
 acquiers, 
 acquérez, 
 
 que tu acquières, 
 que vous acquériez. 
 
 -E- Acquis. 
 
 il acquiert, 
 ils acquièrent. 
 
 il acquérait, 
 ils acquéraient. 
 
 il acquit, 
 
 ils acquirent. 
 
 il acquerra, 
 ils acquerront. 
 
 il acquerrait, 
 "ils acquerraient. 
 
 qu'il acquière, 
 qu'ils acquièrent. 
 
 qu'il acquière, 
 qu'ils acquièrent. 
 
 que tu acquisses, qu'il acquît, 
 
 nous acquissions, que vous acquissiez, qu'ils acquissent. 
 
 The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
 
OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 
 
 125 
 
 Conjugated after tlie same manner — 
 Requérir to require. S'enquérir to inquire. 
 
 Conquérir to conquer Quérir to fetch. 
 
 Reconquérir to conquer again. 
 
 Conquérir, to conquer^ {defective} only used in -a- the present of the 
 infinitive^ in -j- the preterit definite^ in -s- the imperfect of the subjunctive^ 
 and in the compound tenses. 
 
 Reconquérir, to conquer again, (defective) chiefly used in -e- the past 
 participle. 
 
 S'enquérir, to inquire, (defective) very little used, except in -a- ihe pre- 
 sent of the infinitive, and in the compound tenses. 
 
 Quérir, to fetch, (defective) is only used in -a- the present of the infiniiive, 
 with the verbs Venir to come. Aller to go, and Envoyer to send, as 
 il est venu quérir Jean — he has come to fetch John ; allez me qutnr 
 Jean — go and fetch me John ; fai envoyé quérir Jean — I have sent for 
 John ; this verb is only used in common conversation. 
 
 Assaillir 
 
 to assault. 
 
 •A- Assaillir. 
 
 •F- J'assaille, 
 
 nous assaillons, 
 
 •H- J'assaillais, 
 nous assaillions, 
 
 ■j- J'assaillis, 
 
 nous assaillîmes. 
 
 J'assaillirai, 
 nous assaillirons, 
 
 -N- J'assaillirais, 
 nous assaillirions, 
 
 -p- 
 
 assaillons, 
 
 -a- Que j'assaille, 
 
 que nous assaillions. 
 
 -L- 
 
 •c- Assaillant, 
 
 tu assailles, 
 vous assaillez, 
 
 tu assaillais, 
 vous assailliez, 
 
 tu assaillis, 
 vous assaillîtes, 
 
 tu assailliras, 
 vous assaillirez, 
 
 tu assaillirais, 
 vous assailliriez, 
 
 assaille, 
 assaillez, 
 
 que tu assailles 
 que vous assailliez, 
 
 -s- Que j'assaillisse, 
 
 que nous assaillissions. 
 
 î- Assailli. 
 
 il assaille, 
 ils assaillent. 
 
 il assaillait, 
 ils assaillaient, 
 
 il assaillit, 
 ils assaillirent. 
 
 il assaillira, 
 ils assaillLronL 
 
 il assaillirait, • 
 ils assailliraient. 
 
 qu'il assaille, 
 qu'ils assaillent 
 
 qu'il assaille, 
 qu'ils assaillent. 
 
 qu'il assaillît. 
 
 que tu assaillisses, 
 
 que vous assaillissiez, qu'ils assaillissent 
 Conjugated after the same manner, Tressaillir, to start, to 
 
 [leap for. 
 The compound tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
 
 Bouillir 
 
 to boil. 
 
 -A- Bouillir. 
 
 -F- Je bous, 
 
 nous bouillons, 
 
 -H- Je bouillais, 
 nous bouillions, 
 
 -c- Bouillant. 
 
 tu bous, 
 vous bouillez, 
 
 tu bouillais, 
 vous bouilliez. 
 
 -E- Bouilli. 
 
 il bout, 
 
 ils bouillent. 
 
 il bouillait, 
 ils bouillaient. 
 
126 
 
 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS 
 
 -J- Je bouillis, 
 
 nous bouillîmes, 
 
 -L- Je bouillirai, 
 nous bouillirons, 
 
 -N- Je bouillirais, 
 nous bouillirions. 
 
 tu bouillis, 
 vous bouillîtes, 
 
 tu bouilliras, 
 vous bouillirez 
 
 tu bouillirais, 
 vous bouilliriez, 
 
 bous, 
 bouillez, 
 
 que tu bouillcB, 
 que vous bouilliez, 
 
 il bouillit, 
 ils bouillirent. 
 
 il bouillira, 
 ils bouilliront. 
 
 il bouillirait, 
 ils bouilliraient. 
 
 qu'il bouille, 
 qu'ils bouillent. 
 
 qu'il bouille, 
 qu'ils bouillent. 
 
 que tu bouillisses. qu'il bouillît, 
 que vous bouillissiez, qu'ils bouillissent. 
 
 bouillons, 
 
 -1- Que je bouille, 
 que nous bouillions, 
 
 -s- Que je bouillisse, 
 
 que nous bouillissions, 
 
 Conjugate after the same manner, Ébouillir, to boil away, 
 Rebouillir, to boil again. 
 
 The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
 
 The above verbs are but seldom employed in any persons, ex- 
 cept the third person singular and plural of their different tenses, simple 
 and compound — as Feau bout — the water boils ; les pois ont bouilli — the 
 peas have boiled, &c. If any other person of these verbs is want- 
 ing, the verb^ Faire, to make, is used with the present of the infinitive 
 Bouillir, Ebouillir, or Rebouillir, which is put after — thus we 
 ^^7i J^ /«w bouillir — I boil ; je ferai bouilUr — I shall boil, Sic. 
 
 Courir 
 
 to run. 
 
 -A-'^Courir. -c- Courant, 
 
 -F- Je cours, 
 
 nous courons, 
 
 -H- Je courais, 
 nous courions, 
 
 j- Je courus, 
 nous courûmes, 
 
 -X- Je courrai, 
 nous courrons, 
 
 -N- Je courrais, 
 nous courrions. 
 
 .(i- Que je coure, 
 que nous courions, 
 
 -s- Que je courusse, 
 que nous courussions. 
 
 Conjugate after the 
 
 -E- Couru. 
 
 tu cours, 
 vous courez. 
 
 1 court, 
 ils courent 
 
 tu courais, 
 vous couriez. 
 
 il courait, 
 ils couraient. 
 
 tu courus, 
 vous courûtes. 
 
 il courut, 
 ils coururent. 
 
 tu courras, J 
 vous courrez, ' i 
 
 1 courra, 
 Is courront. 
 
 tu courrais, 
 
 vous courriez, i 
 
 1 courrait, 
 Is courraient. 
 
 cours, ( 
 courez, < 
 
 lu'il coure, 
 qu'ils courent. 
 
 que tu coures, < 
 que vous couriez, < 
 
 ju'il coure, 
 qu'ils courent. 
 
 que tu courusses, ( 
 que vous courussiez. 
 
 lu'il courût, 
 [julls courussent 
 
 same manner — 
 
 
OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 
 
 127 
 
 Accourir, 
 Concourir, 
 Discourir, 
 Kncourir, 
 
 to run to. 
 to concur, 
 to discourse, 
 to incur. 
 
 Parcourir, to run over. 
 Recourir, to have recourse. 
 Secourir, to succour, to help. 
 
 Tu? Compound Tenses, of the above verbs, are conjugated with 
 Avoir, to have ; those of Accourir, to run to^ are also sometimes con- 
 jugated with Etre, to be. 
 
 Cueillir to gather. 
 
 -A- 
 
 Cueillir. 
 
 -c- Cueillant, 
 
 -K- Cueilli. 
 
 -F- 
 
 Je cueille, 
 nous cueillons, 
 
 tu cueilles, 
 vous cueillez. 
 
 il cueille, 
 ils cueillent. 
 
 -H- 
 
 Je cueillais, 
 nous cueillions, 
 
 tu cueillais, 
 vous cueilliez. 
 
 il cueillait, 
 ils cueillaient. 
 
 -3- 
 
 Je cueillis, 
 nous cueillîmes, 
 
 tu cueillis, 
 vous cueillîtes. 
 
 il cueillit, 
 ils cueillirent. 
 
 -L- 
 
 Je cueillerai, 
 nous cueillerons, 
 
 tu cueilleras, 
 vous cueillerez. 
 
 il cueillera, 
 ils cueilleront. 
 
 N- 
 
 Je cueillerais, 
 nous cueillerions. 
 
 tu cueillerais, 
 vous cueilleriez. 
 
 il cueillerait, 
 ils cueilleraient. 
 
 'P- 
 
 cueillons. 
 
 cueille, 
 cueillez. 
 
 qu'il cueille, 
 qu'ils cueillent. 
 
 -a- 
 
 • Que je cueille, 
 que nous cueillions. 
 
 que tu cueilles, 
 que vous cueilliez. 
 
 qu'il cueille, 
 qu'ils cueillent. 
 
 -s- Que je cueillisse, que tu cueillisses, qu'il cueillît, 
 
 que nous cueillissions, que vous cueillissiez, qu'ils cueillissent. 
 
 The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
 Conjugated after the same manner — 
 
 Accueillir, to welcome. | Recueillir, to gather, to reap 
 
 -A- Dormir. 
 
 -F- Je dors, 
 
 nous dormons, 
 
 -II- Je dormais, 
 nous dormions, 
 
 -j- Je dormis, 
 
 nous dormîmes, 
 
 L- Je dormirai, 
 nous dormirons, 
 
 N- Je dormirais, 
 nous dormirions. 
 
 Dormir to sleep. 
 
 -c- Dormant. 
 
 tu dors, 
 vous dormez, 
 
 Uu dormais, 
 vous dormiez, 
 
 tu dormis, 
 vous dormîtes, 
 
 tu dormiras, 
 vous dormirez, 
 
 tu dormirais, 
 vous dormiriez, 
 
 3. M 
 
 -E- Dormi. 
 
 il dort, 
 
 ils dorment. 
 
 il dormait, 
 ils doimaient. 
 
 il dormit, 
 ils dormirent. 
 
 il dormira, 
 ils dormiront. 
 
 il dormirait, 
 ils dormiraient. 
 
128 
 
 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS 
 
 dormons, 
 
 Que je dorme, 
 que nous dormions, 
 
 Que je dormisse, 
 aue nous dormissions. 
 
 dors, 
 dormez, 
 
 que tu dormes, 
 que vous dormiez. 
 
 qu'il dorme, 
 qu'ils dorment. 
 
 qu'il dorme, 
 qu'ils dorment. 
 
 qu'il dormit, 
 
 que tu dormisses, 
 
 que vous dormissiez, qu'ils dormissent. 
 
 The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have 
 
 Conjugate after the same manner — 
 Endormir, to lull asleep. I Redormir, to sleep again. 
 S'endormir, to fall asleep. | Se rendormir, to fall asleep again. 
 
 The Compound Tenses of S'endormir, and Se rendormir, are 
 conjugated with Etre, lo 6e, as all pronominal verbs are. 
 
 -A- Faillir, 
 
 -J- Je faillis, 
 
 nous faillîmes. 
 
 Faillir 
 -c- Faillant. 
 
 to fail 
 
 -E- Failli. 
 
 tu faillis, 
 vous faillîtes, 
 
 il faillit, 
 ils faillirent. 
 
 This verb is defective^ and only used in the above tenses, and in 
 all the compound tenses, which are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
 
 Fleubir 
 
 to blossom, to flourish. 
 
 This verb is regular and conjugated like Finir, when speaking 
 ot plants and flowers; but when speaking of the prosperity of a king- 
 dom, or of a town, -c- the participle present, is florissant ; and -h- 
 the imperfect of the indicative, jeflorissais, luflorissais, &c. 
 
 Refleurir, to blossom, or flourish again, follows the same rule. 
 
 -A- Fuir. 
 
 -F- Je fuis, 
 
 nous fuyons, 
 
 -H- Je fuyais, 
 nous fuyioQS, 
 
 -j- Je fuis, 
 
 nous fuîmes, 
 
 -L- Je fuirai, 
 nous fuirons, 
 
 •N- Je fuirais, 
 nous fuirions, 
 
 fuyons, 
 
 Fuir to 
 
 /y- 
 
 
 •c- Fuyant. 
 
 
 -E- Fui. 
 
 tu fuis, 
 vous fuyez. 
 
 
 il fuit, 
 ils fuient. 
 
 , tu fuyais, 
 vous fuyiez, 
 
 
 il fuyait, 
 ils fuyaient. 
 
 tu fuis, 
 vous fuîtes. 
 
 
 il fuit, 
 iis fuirent. 
 
 tu fuiras, 
 vous fuirez, 
 
 
 il fuira, 
 iiS fuiront. 
 
 tu fuirais, 
 vous fuiriez, 
 
 
 il fuirait, 
 ils fuiraient. 
 
 fuis, 
 fuyez, 
 
 
 qu'il fuie, 
 qu'ils fuient. 
 
OF THR SECOND CONJUGATION. 
 
 129 
 
 -a- Que je fuie, 
 
 quo nous fuyions, 
 
 -s- Que je fuisse, 
 
 que nous fuissions, 
 
 quo tu fuies, 
 que vous fuyiez, 
 
 que tu fuisses, 
 que vous fuissiez. 
 
 qu'il fuio, 
 qu'ils fuient. 
 
 qu'il fuît, 
 quïls fuissent. 
 
 The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
 Conjuffated after the same manner, S'enfuir, to run away. 
 
 Gésir 
 
 to lie. 
 
 This verb, (defective) which formerly signified to he lying down 
 is no longer in use ; we however, say sometimes, il gît; ci-gît, here lies, 
 IS the common form by which an epitaph begins. 
 
 Haïr 
 
 to hate. 
 
 This verb is regular, and conjugated like Finir, except in the 
 first three persons singular of -f- the present of the indicative. Je hais, 
 I hate ; tu hais, thou hatest ; il hait, he hates ; and in the second person 
 singular of -p- the imperative, hais^ hate. 
 
 A diseresis ( •• ) is required over the ï in all tenses and persons, 
 except in those above mentioned ; this diaeresis is to cause the a and i to 
 be pronounced as two syllables. 
 
 
 Mourir 
 
 to die 
 
 ', 
 
 -A- Mourir. 
 
 -c- Mourant. 
 
 -E- 
 
 Mort. 
 
 -F- Je meurs, 
 nous mourons 
 
 tu meurs, 
 vous mourez. 
 
 
 il meurt, 
 ils meurent. 
 
 -H- Je mourais, 
 nous mourions. 
 
 tu mourais, 
 vous mouriez, 
 
 
 il mourait, 
 ils mouraient. 
 
 -j- Je mourus, 
 
 nous mourûmes, 
 
 tu mourus, 
 vous mourûtes. 
 
 
 il mourut, 
 ils moururent. 
 
 -L- Je mourrai, 
 
 tu mourras. 
 
 
 il mourra. 
 
 nous mourrons, 
 
 vous mourrez. 
 
 
 i.s mourront. 
 
 -N- Je mourrais, 
 nous mourrions. 
 
 tu mourrais, 
 vous mourriez. 
 
 
 il mourrait, 
 ils mourraient. 
 
 -p- 
 
 mourons. 
 
 meurs, 
 mourez. 
 
 
 qu'il meure, 
 qu'ils meurent. 
 
 Q- Que je meure, 
 que nous mourions 
 
 que tu meures, 
 , que vous mouriez. 
 
 qu'il meure, 
 qu'ils meurent. 
 
 -e- Que je mourusse. 
 
 que tu mourusses, 
 
 qu'il mourût. 
 
 que nous mourussions, que vous mourussiez, qu'ils mourussent. 
 The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Etre, to be. 
 Conjugated after the same manner, Se mourir, to be dj/ing 
 
lî^O IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERDS 
 
 Ouïr to hear. 
 
 This verb, (defective) can only be used in -a- the present of the 
 infinitive, ouïr, to hear ; in -j- the preterit definite, fouis, I heard ; 
 i7 ouït, he heard ; in -s- the imperfi3ct of the subjunctive, que fouisse, 
 that I might hear ; qu'il ouït, that he might hear ; and in its compound 
 tenses, which are formed with the simple tenses of Avoir, to have^ and 
 its past participle ouï, a.sfai ouï, 1 have heard, /u as ouï, Szc. 
 
 
 Ouvrir to open. 
 
 
 -A- 
 
 Ouv rir. 
 
 -c-Ouv rant. -e 
 
 - Ouv ert. 
 
 -F- 
 
 J'ouvre, 
 
 nous ouv rons^ 
 
 tu ouv res, 
 vous ouv res. 
 
 il ouvre, 
 ils ouvrent. 
 
 -H- 
 
 J'ouv rais, 
 nous ouv rions. 
 
 tu ouv rais, 
 vous ouv ries, 
 
 il ouv rait^ 
 ils ouv raient. 
 
 -J- 
 
 J'ouv ris, 
 nous ouv rîmes, 
 
 tu ouv ris, 
 vous ouvrîtes, 
 
 il ouv ri/, 
 ils ouvrirent. 
 
 -L- 
 
 J'ouv rirai, 
 nous ouv rirons, 
 
 tu ouv riras, 
 vous ouv rires, 
 
 il ouv rira, 
 ils ouv riront. 
 
 -N; 
 
 J'ouv rirais, 
 nous ouv ririons, 
 
 tu ouvrirais, 
 vous ouv riries. 
 
 il ouv rirait, 
 ils ouv riraient. 
 
 -P- 
 
 ouv ronSy 
 
 ouv re, 
 ouv res. 
 
 qu'il ouvre, 
 qu'ils ouv rcnf. 
 
 -Q- 
 
 Que j'ouv re, 
 
 que nous ouv rions, 
 
 que tu ouv res, 
 que vous ouv n'es, 
 
 qu'il ouv rc, 
 qu'ils ouvrent. 
 
 -s- Que j'ouv rme, que tu ouvrisses, qu'il ouv rî/, 
 
 que nous ouv ri55iorw, que vous ouv ris fies, qu'ils ouv rissen/. 
 
 Compound Tenses are conjugated wi ;h Avoir, to have. 
 Conjugated after the same manner—. 
 
 Rouv rir., to open again. 
 
 Entr'ouvnV, to half open. 
 
 Couv rir^ to cover. 
 
 Recouv rir, to cover again. 
 
 Découvrir, to discover, 
 
 OftVir, to offer. 
 
 MésoffnV, to underbid 
 
 SoufF n'r to suffer. 
 
 -A- Sen /ir. 
 
 -F- Je sen s, 
 
 nous sen tons, 
 
 -B- Je sentais, 
 nous sen iions 
 
 J. /Je sen tis, 
 nous sen times 
 
 Sentir 
 
 -c- Sen /an/. 
 
 to feel. 
 
 tu sen J, 
 vous sen tez. 
 
 tu sen tais, 
 vous sen /l'es, 
 
 tu sen tis, 
 vous sen iîtes^ 
 
 F« Sen ti, 
 
 il sen /, 
 ils sen/en^ 
 
 il sen /ai/, 
 ils sen taient 
 
 il sen /t/, 
 ils sen tirenL 
 
OF THE SECOND OONJUGATION. 
 
 181 
 
 »L- Je sen tirai^ 
 nous sen tirons, 
 
 -N- Je sen tirais, 
 aons sen lirions, 
 
 -p. 
 
 sen tons, 
 
 •0,- Que je sen te, 
 que nous sen tions, 
 
 -s- Que je sen /me, 
 
 que nous sen tissions. 
 
 tu sen liras, 
 vous sen tires, 
 
 tu sen tirais, 
 vous sen tiriez, 
 
 sen 5, 
 sen tes, 
 
 quo tu sen tes, 
 que vous sen liez, 
 
 que tu sen tisses, 
 que vous sen tissiez. 
 
 The Compound Tenses are conjugated with 
 Conjugate after the same manner— 
 
 il sen ttra. 
 ils sen /iron/, 
 
 il sentirait, 
 ils sen tiraient. 
 
 qu'il sen te, 
 qu'ils sen tent. 
 
 qu'il sen /e, 
 qu'ils sen /en/. 
 
 qu'il sen tît, 
 qu'ils sen tissent. 
 
 Avoir, to have. 
 
 Consen tir, to consent^to agree. 
 Pressen^tV, to foresee. 
 Ressen tir, to resent, to feel still. 
 Men tir, to lie. 
 
 Démentir, to give the lie, to be- 
 [Jie, to contradict. 
 Repar iir, to reply. 
 
 The Compound Tenses of the first six of the above verbs, are 
 conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
 
 Those of Se ressentir and Se repentir, as all other pronomi- 
 nal verbs, are conjugated with Etre, to be. 
 
 And those of Partir, Repartir, Sortir, and Rbssortir, some- 
 times with A VOIP, sometimes with Etre. 
 
 Se ressen tir, to feel still. 
 Se repen tir, to repent. 
 
 Par tir, to set out, to depart. 
 Repar tir, to set out again, 
 S or tir, to go out, 
 Ressor tir, to go out agairu 
 
 
 s 
 
 ERviR ta serve. 
 
 
 •A- 
 
 Ser vir. 
 
 -c- Ser wan/. 
 
 -K- 
 
 Ser vi. 
 
 -F- 
 
 Je ser s. 
 
 tu ser s. 
 
 
 il ser /, 
 
 
 nous ser vans. 
 
 voua ser vez, 
 
 
 ils ser vent. 
 
 H- 
 
 Je ser vais, 
 nous ser vions. 
 
 tu ser vais, 
 vous ser vies. 
 
 
 il ser vait, 
 ils servaient. 
 
 J- 
 
 Je ser m, 
 nous ser vîmes. 
 
 tu ser m, 
 vous ser vîtes. 
 
 
 il servit, 
 ils servirent. 
 
 •L- 
 
 Je servirai, 
 nous ser virons. 
 
 tu ser viras, 
 vous ser virez. 
 
 
 il serczm, 
 ils serviront. 
 
 ■N- 
 
 Je servirais, 
 
 tu servirais, 
 
 
 il servirait. 
 
 
 nous servirions, 
 
 vous ser viriez. 
 
 
 ils ser viraitiU 
 
 -P- 
 
 eer vons. 
 
 ser 5, 
 ser ves,' 
 2 K 2 
 
 
 qu'il ser ve, 
 qu'ils ser cent 
 
132 
 
 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS 
 
 -a- Que je serve, que tu serws, qu'il serve, 
 
 que nous servions^ que vous servies, qu'ils servent, 
 
 -s- Que je ser visse, que tu ser visses, " qu'il ser vît, 
 
 que nous ser vissions, que vous servîmes, qu'ils aei vissent. 
 
 Conjugated after the same manner — 
 
 Desser vir, to clear a table, to do an ill office to somebody. 
 Se ser vir, to make use, to use. 
 
 The Compound Tenses of Servir and Desservir, are conju 
 gated w^ith Avoir ; those of Se servir, with Etre. 
 
 Asservir, to subject, is regular, and conjugated like Finir. 
 
 Tenir 
 
 to hold. 
 
 • A- 
 
 TeniV. 
 
 -c- T enant. 
 
 -E- T enu 
 
 -F- 
 
 Je tiens, 
 nous t enons. 
 
 tu tiem, 
 vous t encs. 
 
 il t l'en/, 
 ils t iennent. 
 
 -II- 
 
 Je t enais, 
 nous t enions^ 
 
 tu t enais, 
 vous t eniez. 
 
 il t enatt, 
 ils t enatent. 
 
 -J- 
 
 Je tins, 
 nous t înmes, 
 
 tu t ins, 
 vous t întes. 
 
 il t mf, 
 ils t inrent. 
 
 -i- 
 
 Je tiendrai, 
 nous t tendrons. 
 
 tu t tendras, 
 vous t tendres, 
 
 il tiendra, 
 ils t tendront. 
 
 -N- 
 
 Je t tendrais, 
 nous t tendrions. 
 
 tu tiendrais, 
 vous t tendriez, 
 
 il tiendrait, 
 ils t tendraient. 
 
 *- 
 
 t enons. 
 
 t tens, 
 t enez. 
 
 qu'il tienne, 
 qu'ils tiennent. 
 
 -Q. 
 
 Que je tienne, 
 que nous t enions, 
 
 que tu t iennes, 
 que vous t entez. 
 
 qu'il t icnnc, 
 qu'ils tiennent. 
 
 -S- 
 
 Que jet insse, 
 que nous t inssions. 
 
 que tu t insses, 
 que vous tmssies. 
 
 qu'il tîn/, 
 qu'ils t inssent. 
 
 The Compound Teiises are conjugated vi^ith Avoir, ^o Aave. 
 Conjugate after tne same manner — 
 
 *Appart enîr, to belong. 
 Av enzr, to happen. 
 *Circonv enir, to circumvent. 
 *Cont enzV, to contain. 
 *ContrevemV, to contravene. 
 Conv emV, to agree, to suit. 
 *Déprév enir, to unprepossess. 
 *DétemV, to detain. 
 Dev mir, to become. 
 
 Disconv enir, to disagree 
 *Entret enir, to entertain. 
 Interv enir, to intervene. 
 *MaintemV, to maintain. 
 Mésavenir, to succeed ill. 
 *0\iienir, to obtain. 
 Parv enir, to attain. 
 *Prév enir,to prevent, to inform. 
 Prov emV, to proceed from. 
 
OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 
 
 139 
 
 Redev enir, to become again. 
 *Ret emV, to retain. 
 Rev enir, to come again, 
 
 \Jo come back. 
 S'abst enir, to abstain. 
 *Sout enir, to sustain,fo support. 
 
 Se ressouv enir, to recollect. 
 Se souvemV, to remember. 
 *Subv enir, to relieve. 
 S\xrYenir,to come unexpectedly. 
 y enir, to come. 
 
 Those of the above verbs, which are marked with an asterisk (* ), 
 are conjugated in their compound tenses, with Avoir, to have^ and the 
 others, with Etre, to be. 
 
 Avenir, to happen, is only used in the third person singulai, of 
 -F- the present of the indicative, as sHl avient, if it happens. 
 
 Provenir, (o proceed from, is employed in its third persons sin- 
 gular, and plural; as cela provient de, that proceeds from ; Tous ses mal- 
 heurs proviennent de, &c. ail his misfortunes proceed from, <fec. 
 
 Vêtir 
 
 to clothe. 
 
 -A- Vêt ir. 
 
 -c- Vêt ant. 
 
 -E- Vêt u. 
 
 -F- Je vêt^y, 
 nous vêt 071*, 
 
 tu vêt s, 
 vous vêtes. 
 
 il vêt, 
 ils vêt ent. 
 
 -H- Je vêt ais, 
 nous vêt ions. 
 
 tu vêt ais, 
 vous vêt iez. 
 
 il vêtais, 
 ils vêt aient. 
 
 -j- Je vêtw, 
 
 nous vêt îmcs, 
 
 tu vêt is, 
 vous vêt îles. 
 
 il vêt it, 
 ils V et irmf 
 
 -L- Je vêt irai, 
 nous vêtirons, 
 
 tu vêtiras, 
 vous vêt irez, 
 
 il vêt ira, 
 ils vêt iront. 
 
 -N- Je wèt irais, 
 nous vêtmoTW, 
 
 tu vêt irais, 
 vous vêt iriez, 
 
 il vêt irait, 
 ils vêtiraient. 
 
 -p- 
 
 vêt ans. 
 
 vêt 5, 
 vêt es. 
 
 qu'il vêt e, 
 qu'ils vêt ent. 
 
 -a- Que je vêt e, 
 
 que nous vêt ions. 
 
 que tu vêt es, 
 que vous veniez. 
 
 qu'il vêt e, 
 qu'ils vêt e?it. 
 
 -s- Que je vêtwse, 
 
 que nous vêtissions. 
 
 que tu vêt issea, 
 que vous vêtissiez. 
 
 qu'il vêt ît, 
 qu'il vêtissent. 
 
 The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
 Conjugated after the same manner— 
 
 Revêtir, to clothe. 
 Dé\èiir, to strip, to undress. 
 
 Se vêtir, To dress, or clothe on e^ s 
 [self. 
 Se dévêtir, to divest one^s self 
 
 The Compound Tenses of Se vêtir, and Se dévêtir, are conjuga 
 ted with Etre, to be; as all other pronominal verbs are. 
 
134 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS 
 
 Irregular^ Defective, and Unipersonal Verbs of the Tliird 
 
 Conjugation. 
 
 Avoir to have. 
 
 This verb, {active and auxiliary) if» one of the most irregular. 
 See its conjug-ation, page 10. 
 
 Ravoir 
 
 to have again. 
 
 This verb, (active and defective) is only used in -a- the present 
 of the infinitive. 
 
 Y AVOIR there to be* 
 
 This verb, (unipersonal) is conjugated, page 20, 
 
 S'asseoir 
 
 to sit dozen. 
 
 S'asseyant, 
 
 tu t'assieds, 
 
 vous vous asseyez, 
 
 tu t''asseyais, 
 vous vous asseyiez, 
 
 tu t'assis, 
 
 vous vous assîtes, 
 
 tu t'asseyeras, 
 ta t'asseieras, 
 tu t'assiéras, 
 vous vous asseyerez, 
 or nous nous asseierons, vous vous assoierez, 
 or nous nous assiérons, vous vous assiérez. 
 
 -A- S'asseoir. 
 
 -F- Je m'assieds, ■ 
 
 nous nous asseyons, 
 
 -H- Je m'asseyais, 
 
 nous nous asseyions, 
 
 -j- Je m'assis, 
 
 nous nous assîmes, 
 
 -L- Je ra'asseyerai, 
 or je m'asseierai, 
 or je m'assiérai, 
 nous nous Essayerons, 
 
 -N- Je m'asseyerais, 
 or je m'asseierais, 
 or je m'assiérais, 
 nous nous asseyerions, 
 or nous nous asseierions, 
 or nous nous assiérions, 
 
 -p- 
 
 asseyons-noua, 
 
 -tt- Que je m'asseye, 
 or que je m'asseie, 
 que nous nous asseyions, 
 
 -s- Que je m'assisse, 
 
 que nous nous assissions, 
 
 tu t'asseyerais, 
 tu t'asseierais, 
 tu t'assiérais, 
 vous vous asseyeriez, 
 vous vous asseieriez, 
 vous vous assiériez, 
 
 assieds-toi, 
 
 asseyez-vous, 
 
 que tu t'asseyes, 
 or que tu t'asseies, 
 que vous vous asseyiez, 
 
 que tu t'assisses, 
 
 que vous vous assissiez, 
 
 -E- Assis 
 
 il s'assied, 
 ils s'asseyent, 
 or ils s'asseient, 
 
 il s'asseyait, 
 ils s'asseyaient, 
 
 il s'assit, 
 
 ils s'assirent. 
 
 il s'asseyera, 
 il s'asseiera, 
 il s'assiéra, 
 ils s'asseyeront, 
 ils s'asseieront, 
 ils s'assiéront. 
 
 il s'asseyerait, 
 il s'asseierait, 
 il s'assiérait, 
 ils s'asseyeraient, 
 ils s'asseieraient, 
 ils s'assiéraient. 
 
 qu'il s'asseye, 
 or qu'il s'assei^. 
 
 qu'ils s'asseyent, 
 or qu'ils s'asseient. 
 
 qu'il s'asseye, 
 or qu'd s'asseie, 
 qu'ils s'asseyent, 
 or qu'ils s'asseient 
 
 qu'il s'assît, 
 qu'ils s'assissent. 
 
OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 135 
 
 Conjugated after the same manner, Se rasseoir, to sitdoxvn again. 
 
 The Compound Tenses of these two verbs, are conjugated with 
 Etre, to be ; as all other pronominal verbs are. 
 
 Conjugate after the same manner, without the second pronoun, 
 fne, /e, 5e, &c. Asseoir, to set, or to lay something, or somebody down. 
 
 The compound tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
 
 The different ways of writing and pronouncing some of the 
 tenses and persons of the above verbs, render them very difficult ; par- 
 ticular attention must be paid to their conjugations. Of the three ways 
 of v/riting and pronouncing, -l- the future, and -n- the conditional pre- 
 sent J I would recommend the third as being the easiest, and I believe 
 the most used. 
 
 Some Grammarians have imagined, to do away with the difficul- 
 ties these verbs offer, even to French people, to conjugate them as 
 follows — 
 
 S'assoir 
 
 to sit dourru 
 
 -A- S'assoir. 
 
 -F- Je m'assois, 
 
 nous nous assoyons, 
 
 -H- Je m'assoyais, 
 
 nous nous assoyions, < 
 
 • j- Je m'assis, 
 
 nous nous assîmes, 
 
 -L- Je m'assoirai, 
 
 nous nous assoirons, 
 
 -N- Je m'assoirais, 
 
 nous nous assoirions, 
 
 -p- 
 
 assoyons-nous, 
 
 •-C- S'assoyant. 
 
 tu t'assois, 
 
 vous vous assoyez, 
 
 tu t'assoyais, 
 vous vous assoyiez, 
 
 tu t'assis, 
 
 vous vous assîtes, 
 
 tu t'assoiras, 
 vous vous assoirez, 
 
 tu t'assoirais, 
 vous vous assoiriez, 
 
 assois-toi, 
 assoyez-vous. 
 
 -E- Assis. 
 
 il s'assoit, 
 ils s'assoient, 
 
 il s'assoyait, 
 ils s'assoyaient 
 
 il s'assit, 
 ils s'assirent. 
 
 il s'assoira, 
 ils s'assoiront. 
 
 il s'assoirait, 
 ils s'assoiraient. 
 
 qu'il s'assoie, 
 qu'ils s'assoient 
 
 -a- Que je m'assoie, que tu t'assoies, qu'il s'assoie, 
 
 que nous nous assoyions, que vous vous assoyiez, qu'ils s'assoient. 
 
 -s- que je m'assisse, que tu t'assisses, qu'il s'assît, 
 
 que nous nous assissions, que vous vous assissiez, qu'ils s'assissent. 
 
 It is certain that this way of conjugating the above, is much 
 more convenient; and I should like to recommend it; but although 
 much used in some parts of France, it is not yet generally received as 
 correct by most of those of the Old School — who in every country seem 
 to bo opposed to every thing that can facilitate knowledge, lest wc 
 sliould now acquire in a sJiort time, and with little trouble, what has 
 cost them much time and great trouble. 
 
 Choir to fall. 
 
 This verb is not used, except in -a- the present of the infinitive 
 
13Ô IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS 
 
 Déchoir to decay. 
 
 This verb is seldom used, except in -a- the present of the infini- 
 tive, and in its compound tenses, which are conjugated sometimes vpith 
 Etre, sometimes with Avoir. 
 
 E( 
 
 to fall to, to expire^ to he due, to fall due. 
 
 This verb is only used in the third person of -f- present of the 
 indicative, iZ échoit^ sometimes pronounced iléchet; in -i- il échut ; in 
 -L- il écherra ; in -n- il écherrait ; in -s- qrCil échût^ &c. in -a- échoir * 
 in -c- échéant ; in -b- échu; and in the compound tenses, which are con- 
 jugated sometimes with Avoir, and sometimes with Etre. 
 
 Falloir 
 
 to be necessary. 
 
 -F- II faut, 
 -H- II fallait, 
 -J- II fallut, 
 -L- 11 faudra, 
 -N- II faudrait, 
 -p- (none) 
 -a- Qu'il faille, 
 -s- Qu'il fallût, 
 
 The Compound Tenses of this verb, {unipersonal and defective') 
 are formed by the addition of its participle past, /aZ/w, to the third person 
 singular of the verb Avoir, as il a fallu, it has been necessary, &c. 
 
 The expressions, / must^ he must, we must, you must, they must, 
 Szc. are rendered by it must that I— it must that he, &?. the verb which 
 follows is put in the subjunctive mood, and in the person indicated by the 
 personal pronoun, which is before must, in the English; as I must write — 
 ll faut que f écrive ; you must drink — il faut que vous buviez, &c. we 
 say also, il mefaul écrire, il vous faut boire. 
 
 it is necessary. 
 
 tt was necessary. , 
 
 it was necessary. 
 
 it shall or will be necessary. 
 
 tt should, loould, could, or migld be necessary 
 
 that it may be necessary, 
 that it might be necessary. 
 
 Mouvoir 
 
 to move. 
 
 -A- Mouvoir. 
 
 -F- Je meus, 
 
 nous mouvons, 
 
 -H- Je mouvais, 
 nous mouvions, 
 
 -j- Je mus, 
 
 nous mûmes, 
 
 -1,- Je mouvrai, 
 nous mouvrons, 
 
 •c- Mouvant. 
 
 tu meus, 
 vous mouvez, 
 
 tu mouvais, 
 vous mouviez, 
 
 tu mus, 
 vous mûtes, 
 
 tu mouvras, 
 vous mouvrez. 
 
 -E- Mu. 
 
 il meut, 
 
 ils meuvent. 
 
 il mouvait, 
 ils mouvaient. 
 
 il mut, 
 ils murent. 
 
 il mouvra, 
 ils mouvront. 
 
OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 137 
 
 -N- Je mouvrais, 
 nous mouvrions. 
 
 -Q- Que je meuve, 
 
 que nous mouvions, 
 
 -s- Que je musse, 
 
 que nous mussions, 
 
 tu mouvrais, 
 vous mouvriez, 
 
 meus, 
 mouvez, 
 
 que tu meuves, 
 que vous mouviez, 
 
 que tu musses, 
 que vous mussiez. 
 
 il mouvrait, 
 ils mouvraient, 
 
 qu'il meuve, 
 qu'ils meuvent, 
 
 qu'il meuve, 
 qu'ils meuvent. 
 
 qu'il mût, 
 qu'ils mussent. 
 
 This verb is very little used, except in -a- the present of the 
 infinitive. 
 
 The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
 The object in giving, here, all its tenses, is to have a model, for — 
 
 Emouvoir, to move. I S'émouvoir, to he concerned. 
 
 Promouvoir, to promote. | 
 
 which are conjugated like it. The compound tenses of S'émouvoir^ are 
 conjugated with Etre. 
 
 Promouvoir-t is only used in -a- the present of the infinitive, and 
 in the compound tenses. 
 
 Pleuvoir 
 
 to rain. 
 
 -A- Pleuvoir, to rain. 
 
 -c- Pleuvant, raining. 
 
 -E- Plu, rained. 
 
 -F- II pleut, it rains, does rain, or is raining. 
 
 -H- II pleuvait, it rained, did rain, or was raining. 
 
 -J- II plut, it rained or did rain. 
 
 -L- II pleuvra, it will rain. 
 
 -N- II pleuvrait, it would rain. 
 
 -p- (none.) 
 
 -a- Qu'il pleuve, that it may rain. 
 
 -s- Qu'il plût, that it might rain. 
 
 The compound tenses, of the above unipersonal verb, are formed 
 by the addition of-E- its participle passive, plu, to the third person sin- 
 gular of the simple tenses of Avoir; as il a plu, it has rained, &:c. 
 
 -A- Pourvoir. 
 
 Pourvoir to provide. 
 
 -c- Pourvoyant. -e- Pourvu. 
 
 -F- Je pourvois, 
 
 nous pourvoyons, 
 
 -H- Je pourvoyais, 
 nous pourvoyions, 
 
 tu pourvois, 
 vous pourvoyez, 
 
 tu pourvoyais, 
 vous pourvoyiez 
 
 il pourvoit, 
 ils pourvoient. 
 
 il poui voyait, 
 ils pourvoyaient. 
 
138 
 
 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS 
 
 -J- Je pourvus, 
 
 nous pourvûmes, 
 
 -L- Je pourvoirai, 
 nous pourvoirons, 
 
 -N- Je pourvoirais, 
 nous pourvoirions, 
 
 ■p- 
 
 p our voyons, 
 
 tu pourvus, 
 vous pourvûtes, 
 
 tu pourvoiras, 
 vous pourvoirez, 
 
 tu pourvoirais, 
 vous pourvoiriez, 
 
 il pourvut, 
 ils pourvurent 
 
 il pourvoira, 
 ils pourvoiront. 
 
 il pourvoirait, 
 ils pourvoiraient. 
 
 pourvois, qu'il pourvoie, 
 
 pourvoyez, qu'ils pourvoient. 
 
 a- Que je pourvoie, que tu pourvoies, qu'il pourvoie, 
 
 que nous pourvoyions, que vous pourvoyiez, qu'ils pourvoient. 
 
 g- Que je pourvusse, que tu pourvusses, qu'il pourvût, 
 
 que nous pourvussions, que vous pourvussiez, qu'ils pourvussent. 
 
 The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
 
 Pouvoir 
 
 to be able. 
 
 -A- Pouvoir. 
 
 -F- Je puis or jo peux, 
 nous pouvons, 
 
 -H- Je pouvais, 
 nous pouvions, 
 
 -j- Je pus, 
 
 nous pûmes, 
 
 -L- Je pourrai, 
 nous pourrons, 
 
 -N- Je pourrais, 
 nous pourrions, 
 
 -p- 
 
 -d- Que je puisse, 
 
 que nous puissions, 
 
 s- Que je pusse, 
 que nous pussions. 
 
 -c- Pouvant. 
 
 -E- Pu. 
 
 tu peux, 
 vous pouvez, 
 
 tu pouvais, 
 vous pouviez, 
 
 tu pus, 
 vous pûtes, 
 
 tu pourras, 
 vous pourrez, 
 
 tu pourrais, 
 vous pourriez, 
 
 (none) 
 que tu puisse, 
 que vous puissiez, 
 
 que tu pusses, 
 que vous pussiez. 
 
 il peut, 
 ils peuvent. 
 
 il pouvait, 
 ils pouvaient. 
 
 il put, 
 ils purent. 
 
 il pourra, 
 ils pourront. 
 
 il pourrait, 
 ils pourraient. 
 
 qu'il puisse, 
 qu'ils puissent, 
 
 qu'il pût, 
 qu'ils pussent. 
 
 Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
 
 Savoir 
 
 to know. 
 
 -A- 
 
 t^avoir 
 
 -0- Sachant. 
 
 -E- Su. 
 
 -F- 
 
 Je sais, 
 nous savons. 
 
 .tu sais, 
 vous savez, 
 
 il sait, 
 ils savent. 
 
 -11- 
 
 Je savais, 
 nous savions. 
 
 tu savais, 
 vous saviez. 
 
 il savait, 
 ils savaient 
 
 -J- 
 
 Je sus, 
 nous sûmes 
 
 tu sus, 
 vous sûtes. 
 
 il sut, 
 ils surent. 
 
OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 139 
 
 -L- Je saurai, 
 nous saurons, 
 
 ►N- Je saurais, 
 nous saurions, 
 
 -p- 
 
 sachons, 
 
 -a- Que je sache, 
 
 que nous sachions, 
 
 tu sauras, 
 vous saurez, 
 
 tu saurais, 
 vous sauriez, 
 
 sache, 
 sachez, 
 
 que tu saclies, 
 que vous sachiez, 
 
 il saura, 
 ils sauront. 
 
 il saurait, 
 ils sauraient. 
 
 qu'il sache, 
 qu'ils sachent. 
 
 qu'il sache, 
 qu'ils sachent. 
 
 qu'il sût, 
 qu'ils sussent. 
 
 -s- Que je susse, que tu susses, 
 
 que nous sussions, que vous sussiez, 
 
 The -Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avom, to have. 
 
 Savoir^ to know ; must not be confounded with Connaître, to 
 i now. Connaître, is mostly used, in the sense of, to be acquainted with ; 
 and Savoir^ in other circumstances. 
 
 -A- Seoir. 
 
 -E- II sied, 
 
 -H- Il seyait, 
 
 -j- 
 
 -L- 11 siéra, 
 
 -N- il siérait, 
 
 -p- 
 
 -Q- Qu'il siée, 
 
 -s- 
 
 Seoir tojit, to become, to Jit well. 
 
 Sis. 
 
 thei/ Jit. 
 
 -c- Seyant. 
 it JUs. 
 it fitted, 
 (none') 
 it will fii. 
 it would fit. 
 {none) 
 
 that it may fit. 
 (none) 
 
 ils siéent, 
 ils seyaient, 
 
 ils siéront, 
 ils siéraient. 
 
 they fitted. 
 
 they will fit. * 
 they would fit. 
 
 qu'ils siéent, that they may fit. 
 
 This verb, which is only employed in the third person o" t 
 singular, and of the plural, of some tenses, has no compound tenses. 
 
 Surseoir 
 
 to reprieve, to put off 
 
 This verb is seldom used, except in -a- the present 
 infinitive. 
 
 
 Valoir 
 
 to he 
 
 worth. 
 
 -A- Valoir. 
 
 -c- 
 
 Valant. 
 
 -E- Valu. 
 
 F- Je vaux, 
 nous valons, 
 
 
 tu vaux, 
 vous valez. 
 
 il vaut, 
 ils valent. 
 
 H- Je valais, 
 nous valions, 
 
 
 tu valais, 
 vous valiez. 
 
 il valait, 
 ils valaient. 
 
 ■j- Je valus, 
 
 r:ous valûmes. 
 
 
 tu valus,' 
 vous valûtes, 
 20 
 
 d valut, 
 ils valurent 
 
Î4G IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS 
 
 -L- 
 
 Je vaudrai, 
 nous vaudrons, 
 
 tu vaudras, 
 vous vaudrez, 
 
 il vaudra, 
 ils vaudront. 
 
 -N- 
 
 Je vaudrais, 
 nous vaudrions, 
 
 tu vaudrais, 
 vous vaudriez. 
 
 il vaudrait, 
 ils vaudraient. 
 
 -P- 
 
 valons, 
 
 vaux, 
 valez. 
 
 qu'il vaille, 
 qu'ils vaillent. 
 
 -a- 
 
 Que je vaille, 
 que nous valions. 
 
 que tu vailles, 
 que vous valiez. 
 
 qu'il vaille, 
 qu'ils vaillent. 
 
 -s- 
 
 Que je valusse, 
 que nous valussions. 
 
 que tu valusses, 
 que vous valussiez. 
 
 qu'il valût, 
 qu'ils valussent. 
 
 The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoirs to have. 
 Conjugated after the same manner — 
 
 Pré valoir, to prevail. 
 
 Re valoir, to return like for like* 
 Ëqui valoir, to be equivalent, \ 
 
 This last, makes in -a- the subjunctive, que je prévale^ que tu 
 prévales^ qu'il prévale^ que nous prévalions^ que vous prévaliez, qu^ih 
 prévalent. 
 
 Voir 
 
 ta see. 
 
 -A- Voir. 
 
 Voyant. 
 
 B- Vu. 
 
 -r- Je vois, 
 
 nous voyons, 
 
 tu vois, 
 vous voyez. 
 
 il voit, 
 ils voient. 
 
 -H- Je voyais, 
 nous voyions. 
 
 tu voyais, 
 vous voyiez. 
 
 il voyait, 
 ils voyaient. 
 
 -j- Je vis, 
 
 nous vîmes. 
 
 tu vis, 
 vous vîtes. 
 
 il vit. 
 ils virent. 
 
 -L- Je verrai, 
 nous verrons. 
 
 tu verras, 
 vous verrez. 
 
 il verra, 
 ils verront. 
 
 -N- Je verrais, 
 nous verrioi «, 
 
 tu verrais, 
 vous verriez. 
 
 il verrait, 
 ils verraient. 
 
 voyons. 
 
 vois, 
 voyez, . 
 
 qu'il voie, 
 qu'ils voient. 
 
 -a- Que je voie, 
 
 que nous voyl«ms, 
 
 que tu voies, 
 que vous voyiez. 
 
 qu'il voie, 
 qu'ils voient. 
 
 »s- Que je visse, * 
 que nous vissions, 
 
 que tu visses, 
 que vous vissiez, 
 
 qu'il vît, 
 qu'ils vissent 
 
 The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, lo home. 
 Conjugate afler the same manner — 
 
 Re voir, to see again, I Entre voir, to have a glimpse of. 
 
OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 
 
 Pré voir to joresee. 
 
 HI 
 
 This verb is conjugated like Voir, to see, except in -l- the 
 future, and in -n- the present of the conditional. 
 
 -L- 
 
 Je prévoirai, 
 nous prévoirons, 
 
 tu prévoiras, 
 vous prévoirez, 
 
 il prévoira, 
 ils prévoiront. 
 
 -N 
 
 - Je prévoirais, 
 nous prévoirions, 
 
 tu prévoirais, 
 vous prévoiriez. 
 
 il prévoirait, 
 ils prévoiraient 
 
 
 VOULOIB 
 
 to be willing. 
 
 -A- 
 
 Vouloir -c- 
 
 Voulant, 
 
 -E- Voulu, 
 
 -F- 
 
 Je veux, 
 nous voulons, 
 
 tu veux, 
 vous voule», 
 
 il veut, 
 ils veulent 
 
 -H- 
 
 Je voulais, 
 nous voulions, 
 
 tu voulais, 
 vous vouliez. 
 
 il voulait, 
 ils voulaient. 
 
 -J- 
 
 Je voulus, 
 nous voulûmes, 
 
 tu voulus, 
 vous voulûtes, 
 
 il voulut, 
 ils voulurent. 
 
 -L- 
 
 Je voudrai, 
 nous voudrons, 
 
 tu voudras, 
 vous voudrez. 
 
 il voudra, 
 ils voudront 
 
 N- 
 
 Je voudrais, 
 nous voudrions. 
 
 tu voudrais, 
 vous voudriez, 
 
 il voudrait, 
 ils voudraient. 
 
 P- 
 
 
 veuillez, (is 
 
 the only person) 
 
 a 
 
 ■ Que je veuille, 
 que nous voulions. 
 
 que tu veuilles, 
 que vous vouliez, 
 
 qu'il veuille, 
 qu'ils veuillent. 
 
 -s- 
 
 Que je voulusse, 
 
 que nous voulussions. 
 
 que tu voulusses, qu'il voulût, 
 que vous vouln|siez, qu'ils voulussent 
 with avoir. 
 
 Irregular, Defective, and (Impersonal Verbs of the Fourth 
 Conjugation, 
 
 Battre 
 
 to beat 
 
 •B- 
 
 Battre. 
 
 -0- Battant. 
 
 -E- Battu. 
 
 F- 
 
 Je bats, 
 nous battons, 
 
 tu bats, 
 vous battez, 
 
 •1 bat, 
 
 lis battent. 
 
 n- 
 
 Je battais, 
 nous battions. 
 
 tu battais, 
 vous battiez. 
 
 il battait, 
 ils battaient 
 
 -j- 
 
 Je battis, 
 nous battîmes, 
 
 tu battis, 
 vous battîtes. 
 
 il battit, 
 
 ils battirent. 
 
 -L- 
 
 Je battrai, 
 nous battrons. 
 
 tu battras, 
 vous battrez. 
 
 il battra, 
 ils battront. 
 
142 
 
 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPEiRSONAL VERBS 
 
 -M- Je battrais, 
 nous battrions, 
 
 -p- 
 
 battons, 
 
 -a- Que je batte, 
 
 que nous battions, 
 
 -s- Que je battisse, 
 
 que nous battissions, 
 
 tu battrais, 
 vous battriez, 
 
 bats, 
 battez, 
 
 que tu battes, 
 que vous battiez, 
 
 que tu bâtisses, 
 que vous battissiez, 
 
 il battrait, 
 ils battraient. 
 
 qu'il batte, 
 qu'ils battent, 
 
 qu'il batte, 
 qu'ils battent. 
 
 qu'il battît, 
 qu'ils battissent. 
 
 The compound tenses are conjugated with Avoir, /o ham. 
 Conjugate after the same manner — 
 
 A battre, to pull down. 
 Com battre, to Jight, 
 Dé battre, to debate. 
 Ra battre, to pull down agaih, 
 [to abate. 
 
 Re battre, to beat again. 
 S'é battre, to make orbe merry 
 Se dé battle, to struggle. 
 
 The compound tenses of S^èbattre^ and Se débattre^ are coûjuga- 
 ted with Etre, to be. 
 
 BoiRB 
 
 to drink. 
 
 -A- Boire. 
 
 -c- Buvant. 
 
 -K- Ba. 
 
 -F- Je bois, 
 
 nous buvons, 
 
 -fl- Je buvais, 
 nous buvions, 
 
 -j Je bus, 
 
 nous bûmes, 
 
 -L- Je boirai, 
 naus boirons, 
 
 -N- Je boirais, 
 nous boirions, 
 
 -p- 
 
 vuvons, 
 
 -ft- Que je boive 
 
 que nous buvions, 
 
 -s- Que je busse, 
 
 que nous bussions, 
 
 tu bois, 
 vous buvez.> 
 
 ta buvaisy 
 vous buviea, 
 
 tu bus, 
 vous bûtes, 
 
 tu boiras, 
 vous boirez, 
 
 tu boirais, 
 vous boiriez, 
 
 bois, 
 buvez, 
 
 que tu boive, 
 que vous buviez^ 
 
 que tu busses, 
 que vous bussiez. 
 
 The Compound Tenses are conjugated 
 Conjugate after the same ma,nner, Re 
 
 il boit, 
 ils boivent^ 
 
 il buvait, 
 ils buvaient, 
 
 il but, 
 ils burent. 
 
 il boira, 
 ils boiront. 
 
 iî boirait, 
 ils boiraient. 
 
 qu'il boive, 
 qu'ils boivenê. 
 
 qu'il boive, 
 qu'ils boivent. 
 
 qu'il bût, 
 qu'ils bussent. 
 
 with Avoir, to havà. 
 BOIRE, io drink ao:(im^ 
 
OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 
 
 143 
 
 Clore 
 
 to close. 
 
 -A- Clore. 
 
 (none) 
 
 -E- Clos. 
 
 -K- Je clos, 
 
 tu clos. 
 
 il clot. 
 
 -L- Je clorai, 
 nous clorons, 
 
 tu cloras, 
 vous clorez, 
 
 il clora, 
 ils cloront. 
 
 -N- Je clorais, 
 nous clorions, 
 
 tu clorais, 
 vous cloriez, 
 
 il clorait 
 ils cloraient. 
 
 This verb, {defective) is only used in the above few tenses, and 
 persons, and in all the compound tenses, which are forraea with 
 Avoir, to have. Some write this verb with double r 
 
 Conjugated after the same manner. En cloive, to enclose. 
 
 
 Conclure to conclude 
 
 -A- 
 
 Conclure. -c 
 
 - Concluant. 
 
 -E- Conclu. 
 
 -F- 
 
 Je conclus, 
 nous concluons, 
 
 tu conclus, 
 vous concluez. 
 
 il conclut, 
 ils concluent. 
 
 -H- 
 
 Je concluais, 
 nous concluions, 
 
 tu concluais, 
 vous concluiez, 
 
 il concluait, 
 ils concluaient. 
 
 -J- 
 
 Je conclus, 
 nous conclûmes. 
 
 tu conclus, 
 vous conclûtes. 
 
 il conclut, 
 
 ils conclurent. 
 
 -L- 
 
 Je conclurai, 
 nous conclurons. 
 
 tu concluras, 
 vous conclurez. 
 
 il conclura, 
 ils concluront. 
 
 -N- 
 
 Je conclurais, 
 nous conclurions, 
 
 tu conclurais, 
 vous concluriez. 
 
 Il conclurait, 
 ils concluraient- 
 
 -P- 
 
 concluons, 
 
 conclus, 
 concluez, 
 
 qu'il conclue, 
 qu'ils concluent. 
 
 -a- 
 
 Que je conclue, 
 que nous concluions. 
 
 que tu conclues, 
 que vous concluiez. 
 
 qu'il conclue, 
 qu'ils concluent. 
 
 Que je conclusse, que tu conclusses, qu'il conclût, 
 
 que nous conclussions, que vous conclussiez, qu'ils conclussent. 
 
 The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, toTiave. 
 Conjugated after the same manner, Exclure, to exclude. 
 
 Confire 
 
 to pickle. 
 
 -*- Confire. 
 
 -K- Jc confix, 
 
 nous conf isoTW, 
 
 -H- Je confisais, 
 ' nous confisions. 
 
 -c- Confisant, 
 
 tu conf w, 
 vous conf wes, 
 
 tu confisais, 
 vous conf wiee, 
 * o -4 
 
 -K- Confit, 
 
 il confit^ 
 ils confisent, 
 
 il confisait, 
 ils confisaient. 
 
144 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS 
 
 -J- Je confia, 
 
 nous confîmes, 
 
 -L- Je confirai, 
 nous conf irorw, 
 
 -N- Je confirais^ 
 nous confirtona, 
 
 confisons, 
 
 -a- Que je confise, 
 
 que nous conf ision*, 
 
 -s- Que je confisse, 
 
 que nous conf iwionj, 
 
 tu confis, 
 TOUS conf i/M, 
 
 tu confiras, 
 vous confirez, 
 
 tu conf irai5, 
 vous confine», 
 
 confis, 
 confises, 
 
 que tu confises, 
 que vous conf isics, 
 
 il conf i/, 
 ils confirent. 
 
 il confira, 
 ils confiront. 
 
 il confirait, 
 ils confiraient. 
 
 qu'il confise, 
 qu'ils confisent. 
 
 qu'il confise, 
 quils confisent. 
 
 que tu confisses, qu'il conf i/, 
 
 que vous conf issies, qu'ils confissent. 
 
 The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
 Conjugate after the same manner — 
 
 Suffire, to suffice. [ Circoncire, to circumche. 
 
 Coudre 
 
 to sew 
 
 "A- Coudro. 
 
 -F- Je couds, 
 
 nous cousons, 
 
 -R- Je cousais, 
 nous cousions, 
 
 -j- Je cousis, 
 
 nous cousîmes, 
 
 -L- Je coudrai, 
 nous coudrons, 
 
 -:s- Je coudrais, 
 
 nous coudrions, 
 
 -a- Que je couse, 
 
 que nous cousions, 
 
 -s- Que je cousisse, 
 que nous cousissions 
 
 -c- Cousant. 
 
 -Js CousQ. 
 
 tu couds, 
 
 il coud. 
 
 vous cousez. 
 
 ils cousent. 
 
 tu cousais, 
 vous cousiez. 
 
 il cousait, 
 ils cousaient. 
 
 tu cousis, 
 vous cousîtes. 
 
 il cousit, 
 ils cousirent. 
 
 tu coudras, 
 vous coudrez. 
 
 il coudra, 
 ils coudront. 
 
 tu coudrais, 
 vous coudriei. 
 
 il coudrait, 
 ils coudraient. 
 
 couds, 
 cousez, 
 
 qu'il couse, 
 qu'ils cousent. 
 
 que tu couses 
 que vous cousiez. 
 
 qu'il couse, 
 qu'ils cousent. 
 
 que tu cousisses, 
 que vous cousissiez. 
 
 qu'il cousît, 
 qu'ils cousissent. 
 
 The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to Itave. 
 Conjugate after the same manner— 
 
 Dé coudre, to rîp J Re coudre, to sew agcdn. 
 
OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 
 
 Croire to believe. 
 
 145 
 
 -A- Croire. 
 
 -F- Je crois, 
 
 nous croyons, 
 
 -H- Je croyais, 
 nous croyions, 
 
 -j- Je crus, 
 
 nous crûmes, 
 
 -L- Je croirai, 
 nous croirons, 
 
 -N- Je croirais, 
 nous croirions, 
 
 -p- ~ 
 
 croyons, 
 
 -a- Que je croie, 
 
 que nous croyions, 
 
 -s- Que je crusse, 
 
 que nous crussions, 
 
 Croyant. 
 
 tu crois, 
 vous croyez, 
 
 tu croyais, 
 vous croyiez, 
 
 tu crus, 
 vous crûtes, 
 
 tu croiras, 
 vous croirez, 
 
 tu croirais, 
 vous croiriez. 
 
 -E- Cru. 
 
 il croit, 
 ils croient. 
 
 il croyait, 
 ils croyaient. 
 
 il crut, 
 ils crurent. 
 
 il croira, 
 ils croiront. 
 
 il croirais, 
 ils croiraient. 
 
 qu'il croie, 
 qu'ils croient. 
 
 crois, 
 croyez, 
 
 que tu croies, 
 que vous croyiez, 
 
 que tu crusses, 
 que vous crussiez, 
 
 The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir,^ lo have 
 Accroire, to make one believe, to impose upon one, 
 
 Is only used in -a- the present of the infinitive with the verb Faire^ 
 which serves as an auxiliary. 
 
 qu'il croie, 
 qu'ils croient. 
 
 qu'il crût, 
 qu'ils crussent. 
 
 
 
 Croître to grow 
 
 ^ 
 
 -A- 
 
 Croître. 
 
 -c- 
 
 Croissant. -e- 
 
 Crû. 
 
 ■F- 
 
 Je croîs, 
 
 nous croissons. 
 
 
 tu croîs, 
 vous croissez. 
 
 il croît, 
 
 ils croissent. 
 
 •H- 
 
 Je croissais, 
 nous croissions, 
 
 
 tu croissais, 
 vous croissiez, 
 
 il croissait, 
 ils croissaient. 
 
 •J- 
 
 Je crûs, 
 nous crûmes. 
 
 
 tu crûs, 
 vous crûtes, 
 
 il crût, 
 ils crûrent. 
 
 L- 
 
 Je croîtrai, 
 nous croîtrons. 
 
 
 tu croîtras, 
 vous croîtrez. 
 
 il croîtra, 
 ils croîtront. 
 
 N- 
 
 Je croîtrais, 
 nous croîtrions. 
 
 
 tu croîtrais, 
 vous croîtriez, 
 
 il croîtrait, 
 ils croîtraient. 
 
 -?- 
 
 croissons. 
 
 
 croîs, 
 croissez, 
 
 qu'il croisse, 
 qu'ils croissent. 
 
 •d- Que je croisse, 
 que nous croissions. 
 
 que tu croisses, 
 que vous croissiez, 
 
 qu'il croisse, 
 qu'ils croissent. 
 
 •s- 
 
 Que je crûsse, 
 que nous crûssions. 
 
 que tu crûsses, 
 que vous crûssiez. 
 
 qu'il crût, 
 qu'ils crûssent. 
 
146 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS 
 
 The compound tenses are conjugated sometimes, with AvoiR) 
 Kometimes with Etre ; with Avoir, when it expresses the action of 
 growing, and with Etre, when it denotes the state in which one ia. 
 
 Conjugate after the same manner — 
 
 Ac croître, to increase. j Dé croître, to decrease. 
 
 Dire. 
 
 Dire 
 
 -c- Disant. 
 
 to say 
 
 •E- Dit. 
 
 -F- Je dis, 
 
 nous disons, 
 
 tu dis, 
 vous dites, 
 
 il dit, 
 ils disent. 
 
 -H .8 disais, 
 nous disions, 
 
 tu disais, 
 vous disiez, 
 
 il disait, 
 ils disaient. 
 
 -j- Je dis, 
 
 nous dîmes. 
 
 tu dis, 
 vous dîtes, 
 
 il dit, 
 ils dirent. 
 
 -L- Je dirai, 
 nous dirons. 
 
 tu diras, 
 vous direz, 
 
 U dira, 
 ils diront. 
 
 -N- Je dirais, 
 nous dirions, 
 
 tu dirais, 
 vous diriez. 
 
 il dirait, 
 ils diraient. 
 
 • p- 
 
 disons, 
 
 dis, 
 dites. 
 
 qu'il dise, 
 qu'ils disent. 
 
 -tt- Que je dise, 
 
 que nous disions, 
 
 que tu dises, 
 que vous disiez. 
 
 qu'il dise, 
 qu'ils disent. 
 
 -s- Que je disse, 
 
 que nous dissions. 
 
 que tu disses, 
 que vous dissiez. 
 
 qu'il dît, 
 qu'ils dissent. 
 
 The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
 Conjugate after the same manner, Re dire, to say again. 
 The following verbs — 
 
 Centre dire, 
 Dé dire, 
 Inter dire, 
 Mau dire, 
 
 to contradict, 
 to disown, 
 to interdict. 
 to curse. 
 
 Mé dire. 
 Pré dire. 
 Se dé dire, 
 
 to slander, 
 to foretell, 
 to recant. 
 
 are also conjugated like Dire^ except in the second person plural of -] 
 the indicative present, and of -r- the imperative, in which they make 
 
 Conti'e disez 
 Dé disez. 
 Inter disez. 
 
 Mau dissez. Mé disez. 
 Pré disez. 
 Dé disez. 
 
 Mau dire, takes two s''s in -c-, maudissant ; in the three persons 
 plural of -F-, nous maudissons, vous maudissez, ils maudissent ; in ail the 
 persons of -h-, je maudissais, &ic.; in the third person singular, and in 
 the thiee persons plural, of -p-, qu'il maudisse, que nous maudissons &c.; 
 and also in the three persons plural, of -a-, que nou^ maudissions, &c.; in 
 its otlier peiKons and tenses it is conjugated like Dirk 
 
OF THE FOUHTH CONJUGATION. 
 
 EoLORE to hatch, to blow, to open. 
 
 14T 
 
 "-A- Eclore. 
 -F- 11 éclot, 
 
 (none) 
 
 -E- Éclos. 
 ils écl osent. 
 
 -H- 
 
 -J- 
 
 -L- 11 éclora, 
 -N- 11 éclorait, 
 
 (none) 
 (none) 
 
 ils écloront. 
 ils écloraient. 
 
 -p. 
 
 -Q- Qu'il éclose, 
 
 (none) 
 
 qu'ils éclosent. 
 
 -s- 
 
 (none) 
 
 
 The Compound 
 
 Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, 
 
 É 
 
 CRIRE 
 
 to write. 
 
 j-E 
 
 ciivaTU 
 
 -E- Écr it. 
 
 -A- Ecr ire. 
 
 -F- J'écr M, 
 
 nous écrtwn*, 
 
 -H- J'écr ivaisu 
 nous écr ivions^ 
 
 -j- J'écr im, 
 
 nous écr ivîmu_ 
 
 -li- J'écr irai, 
 nous écr irons, 
 
 -»? J'écr irais, 
 nous écr irions, 
 
 -p- 
 
 écr ivons, 
 
 -a- Que j'écr iî;e, 
 
 que nous écr ivions, 
 
 -s- Que j'écr ivisse, 
 
 que nous écr ivissions, que vous écr ivissiez, qu'ils écrivissent. 
 
 The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
 Conjugate after the same manner — 
 
 to circumscribe, 
 to describe, 
 to inscribe, 
 to prescribe. 
 
 tu écr it, 
 vous écr ivez. 
 
 il écrit, 
 ils écr ivent. 
 
 tu écr ivais, 
 vous écr iviez. 
 
 'û écr ivait, 
 ils écr ivaient. 
 
 tu écr ivis, 
 vous écr ivîtes. 
 
 il écr ivit, 
 ils écr ivirent. 
 
 tu écr iras, 
 vous écr irez. 
 
 il écr ira. 
 ils écr iron/. 
 
 tu écr irais, 
 vous écr iriez. 
 
 il écr irait, 
 ils écr iraient. 
 
 écris, 
 écr ivez. 
 
 qu'il écr ive, 
 qu'ils écr ivent. 
 
 que tu écr ives^ 
 que vous écr iviez. 
 
 qu'il écr ivc, 
 qu'ils écr ivent. 
 
 que tu écr ivisses. 
 
 qu'il écr ivît. 
 
 Oirconscr ire, 
 Décr ire, 
 Inscr ire, 
 Prescr ire, 
 
 Proscr ire, to proscribe. 
 Récr ire, to ivrite again 
 Souscrire, to subscribe, 
 Transcr ire, to transcribe 
 
 Etre 
 Seo its conjugation, page 24. 
 
 to ht. 
 
148 
 
 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS 
 
 Faire 
 
 to make, to do, to cause. 
 
 -A- Faire. 
 
 -c- Fesant. 
 
 -K- Fait, 
 
 -F- Je fais, 
 
 nous fcsons. 
 
 tu fais, 
 vous faites, 
 
 il fait, 
 ils font. 
 
 -H- Je fesais, 
 nous fesions, 
 
 tu fesais, 
 vous fesiez, 
 
 il fesait, 
 ils fesaiont. 
 
 -j. Je fis, 
 
 nous fîmes. 
 
 tu fis, 
 vous fîtes. 
 
 il fit, 
 ils firent 
 
 -h- Je ferai, 
 nous ferons, 
 
 tu feras, 
 vous ferez. 
 
 il fera, 
 ils feront. 
 
 -N- Je ferais, -. 
 nous ferions, 
 
 tu ferais, 
 vous feriez, 
 
 il ferait, 
 ils feraient 
 
 -p- 
 
 fesons, 
 
 fais, 
 faites. 
 
 qu'il fasse, 
 qu'ils fassent. 
 
 •Q- Que je fasse, 
 
 que nous fassions, 
 
 quo tu fasses, 
 que vous fassiez. 
 
 qu'il fasse, 
 qu'ils fassent. 
 
 -s Que je fisse, 
 
 que nous fissions, 
 
 que tu fisses, 
 que vous fissiez, 
 
 qn'il fît, 
 qu'ils fissent. 
 
 The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have» 
 Conjugate after the same manner — 
 
 Contre faire, to counterfeit, 
 
 [to mimic. 
 Dé faire, to undo. 
 Redé faire, to undo again. 
 
 Observe, that in the spelling of this verb, 1 have adopted the 
 orthography of most modern writers. 
 
 Re faire, to do again. 
 Satis faire, to satisfy. 
 Sur faire, to ask to much. 
 
 Frire 
 
 tofry. 
 
 -A- Frire. 
 
 (none) 
 
 -K- Frit. 
 
 F- Je fris, 
 
 tu fris, 
 
 il frit. 
 
 L- Je frirai, 
 nous frirons, 
 
 tu friras, 
 vous frirez. 
 
 il frira, 
 ils friront. 
 
 N- Je frirais, 
 nous fririons. 
 
 tu frirais, 
 vous fririez. 
 
 il frirait, 
 ils friraient. 
 
 -p- fris. 
 
 This verb, (defective) is only used in the above few persons and 
 tenses, and in all the compound tenses, which are formed with Avoir. 
 
 To supply the persons and tenses which are wanting, we use 
 the different tenses of Faire, to make, with the infinitive present of 
 Frire ; as nous fesons frire, vous faites frire, ils font frire- &c. 
 
OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 
 
 149 
 
 -A- Joi ndre, 
 
 -F- Je joi nSf 
 
 nous \oi grumSf 
 
 -H- Je joi gnaist 
 nous joignions, 
 
 -J- Je joi gnis, 
 
 nous joi g-nîme», 
 
 -L- Je joi ndraU 
 nous joi ndronSf 
 
 -N- Je joi ndrais, 
 nous joi ndrions., 
 
 -F- 
 
 }oi gnons^ 
 -a- Que je joi gne, 
 
 Joindre 
 -o- Joi gnant. 
 
 tu joi 7M, 
 
 to join. 
 
 -E- Joi nL 
 
 vous joignait 
 
 tu joi gnais^ 
 TOUS joi gniezi 
 
 tu joi gntj, 
 vous joi gnîtes^ 
 
 tu joi ndras^ 
 vous joi ndrez^ 
 
 tu joi ndrais^ 
 vous joineJrtes, 
 
 joi n*, 
 joignez, 
 
 il joi n/, 
 ils joi gncn/. 
 
 il joi gnaiU 
 il? joi gnaient, 
 
 il joigm/, 
 ils joi gninnt. 
 
 il joi nrfm, 
 ils joi ndront. 
 
 il joi ndrait^ 
 ils joi ndraieni 
 
 qu'il joi gn«, 
 qu'ils joi gncn/. 
 
 qu'il joigne, 
 qu'ils joignent. 
 
 que tu JOI gnes^ 
 que nous joignions, que vous joi gmc«, 
 
 -B- Que je joi gmwe, que tu joi gntwe*, 
 
 que nous joi gnissions, que vous }oi gnissiezt 
 
 Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
 
 Conjugate after the same manner — all verbs, whose present of 
 the infinitive ends 
 
 faindre as Craindre, 
 
 in < eintlre as Pei ndre, 
 
 |_ oindre as Poindre, 
 
 also. 
 
 Etei ndre, to put out, to extin- 
 
 qu'il joignît^ 
 qu'ils joignissent. 
 
 to fear, 
 to paint, 
 to dawn. 
 
 Astrei ndre, to subject, to com- 
 Ipel. 
 
 Attei ndre, to reach, to overtake, 
 Cei ndre, to gird. 
 Contrai 7w/rc, to constrain, to 
 Iforce. 
 Enfreindre, to infringe. 
 
 [^guisfi 
 
 Kei ndre, to feign, to pretend, 
 Viai ndre, to pity, 
 Restrei ndre, to restrain- 
 Tel ndre, to dye. 
 
 
 LiRB ta read. 
 
 
 -A- Lire. 
 
 -0- Lisant. -k- 
 
 La. 
 
 -*- Je lis, 
 
 nous lisons. 
 
 tu lis, 
 vous lisez. 
 
 a lit, 
 ils lisent. 
 
 -H- Je lisais, 
 nous lisions, 
 
 tu lisais, 
 vous lisiez. 
 
 il lisait, 
 ils lisaient 
 
 -j- Je lus, 
 nous lûmes. 
 
 tu lus, 
 vous lûtes, 
 
 il lut, 
 ils lurent. 
 
iSO 
 
 [RREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS 
 
 -L- Je lirai, 
 nous lirons. 
 
 tu liras, 
 vous lirez. 
 
 il lira, 
 ils liront. 
 
 -N- Je lirais, 
 nous lirions, 
 
 tu lirais, 
 vous liriez, 
 
 il lirait, 
 ils liraient. 
 
 lisons. 
 
 lis, 
 lisez, 
 
 qu'il lise, 
 qu'ils lisent. 
 
 -a- Que je lise, 
 
 que nous lisions. 
 
 que tu lises, 
 que vous lisiez. 
 
 qu'il lise, 
 qu'ils lisent. 
 
 -s- Que je lusse, 
 
 que nous lussions, 
 
 que tu lusses, 
 que vous lussiez. 
 
 qu'il lût, 
 qu'ils lussent. 
 
 The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, io hav&. 
 Conjugrate after the same manner — 
 Re lire, to read agairu j É lire, to elect. 
 
 » 
 
 iIettre to put. 
 
 
 -A- Mettre. 
 
 -c- Mettant. -k- 
 
 Mis. 
 
 -p- Je mets, 
 
 nous mettons, 
 
 tu mets, 
 
 vous mettez, v 
 
 il met, 
 
 ils mettent. 
 
 -H- Je mettais, 
 nous mettions, 
 
 tu mettais, 
 vous mettiez, 
 
 il mettait, 
 ils mettaient. 
 
 -j- Je mis, 
 
 nous mîmes. 
 
 tu mis, 
 vous mîtes. 
 
 il mit, 
 ils mirent. 
 
 -L- Je mëty^i, 
 nous mettrons, 
 
 tu mettras, 
 vous mettrez. 
 
 il mettra, 
 ils mettront 
 
 -w- Je mettrais, 
 nous mettrions. 
 
 tu mettrais, 
 vous mettriez. 
 
 il mettrait, 
 ils mettraient. 
 
 mettons. 
 
 mets, 
 mettez. 
 
 qu'il mette, 
 qu'ils mettent. 
 
 -a- Que je mette, 
 
 que nous mettions, 
 
 que tu mettes, 
 que vous mettiez, 
 
 qu'il mette, 
 qu'ils mettent 
 
 -s- Que je misse, 
 
 que nous missions, 
 
 que tu misses, 
 que vous missiez, 
 
 qu'il mît, 
 qu'ils missent. 
 
 Tho Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
 Conjugate after the same manner — 
 
 Ad mettre, to admit. 
 Com mettre, io commit, 
 Compro mettre, to compromise. 
 De mettre, to disjoint, to put 
 [out. 
 O mettre, to omit. 
 Per mettre, to permit. 
 
 Pro mettre, to promise. 
 Re mettre, to put again, to set 
 [again, to replace. 
 Sou mettre, to submit. 
 Trans mettre, to transmit. 
 Se dé mettre, to resign. 
 S'entre mettre, to interpose. 
 
 The two last have their compound tenses conjugated with E ijib 
 
OF THE rOURTH CONJUGATION. 
 
 151 
 
 ■A- Moudro. 
 
 •F- Je mouds, 
 nous moulons, 
 
 •H- Jo moulais, 
 nous moulions, 
 
 j- Jo moulus, 
 nous moulûmes, 
 
 L- Je moudrai, 
 nous moudrons, 
 
 N- Je moudrais, 
 nous moudrions. 
 
 -a- Que jo moule, 
 que nous moulions, 
 
 •s- Que je moulusse. 
 
 Moudre 
 
 -c- Moulant. 
 
 tu mouds, 
 vous moulez. 
 
 to grind, 
 
 -K- Moulu. 
 
 tu moulais, 
 vous mouliez, 
 
 tu moulus, 
 vous moulûtes, 
 
 tu moudras, 
 vous moudrez, 
 
 tu moudrais, 
 vous moudriez, 
 
 mouds, 
 moulez, 
 
 que tu moules, 
 que vous mouliez. 
 
 il moud, 
 ils moulent. 
 
 il moulait, 
 ils moulaient. 
 
 il moulut, 
 ils moulurent. 
 
 ilmoudra, 
 ils moudront. 
 
 il moudrait, 
 ils moudraient. 
 
 qu'il moxile, 
 qu'ils moulent. 
 
 qu'il moule, 
 qu'ils mouknt. 
 
 que tu moulusses, qu'il moulût, 
 
 que nous moulussions, que vous moulussiez, qu'ils moulussent. 
 
 The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
 Conjugated after the same manner — 
 
 Re moudre, to grind again. | É moudre, to gnndy to ivliet. 
 
 Naître 
 
 -A- Naître. -c 
 
 ■F- Je nais, 
 
 nous naissons, 
 
 •H- Je naissais, 
 nous naissions, 
 
 •j- Je naquis, 
 
 nous naquîmes, 
 
 •L- Je naîtrai, 
 nous naîtrons, 
 
 •N- Je naîtrais, 
 nous naîtrions, 
 
 -p- 
 
 naissons, 
 
 -a- Que je naisse, 
 
 que nous naissions, 
 
 >s- Que je naquisse, 
 que nous naquissions, 
 
 1 to he born. 
 
 Naissant. -k- 
 
 •Né. 
 
 tu nais, 
 vous naissez. 
 
 il naît, 
 
 ils naissent. 
 
 tu naissais, 
 vous naissiez. 
 
 il naissait, 
 ils naissaient. 
 
 tu naquis, 
 vous naquîtes, 
 
 il naquit, 
 ils naquirent 
 
 tu naîtras, 
 vous naîtrez. 
 
 il naîtra, 
 ils naîtront. 
 
 tu naîtrais, 
 vous naîtriez, 
 
 il naîtrait, 
 ils naîtraient. 
 
 nais, 
 naissoz. 
 
 qu'il naisse, 
 qu'ils naissent. 
 
 que tu naisse, 
 que vous naissiez. 
 
 qu'il naisse, 
 qu'ils naissent. 
 
 que tu naquisse, 
 que vous naquissiez, 
 
 qu'il naquît, 
 qu'ils naquisseï 
 
J 52 IRREGULAR, DEFEOTIVE, AND UNIPÇRSONAL VERBS 
 
 The Compound tenses are conjugated with Etre, to be. 
 Conjugate after the same manner — 
 
 Re naître, to revive. 
 
 
 Paître to graze. 
 
 
 -A- Paître. 
 
 
 -o- Paissant -e- 
 
 ■Pu. 
 
 -F- Je pais, 
 
 nous paissonSf 
 
 
 tu pais, 
 vous paissez. 
 
 il paît, 
 
 ils paissent. 
 
 'H- Je paissais, 
 nous paissions, 
 
 
 tu paissais, 
 vous paissiez. 
 
 il paissait, 
 ils paissaient. 
 
 -J- 
 
 (none) 
 
 
 -L- Je paîtrai, 
 nous paîtrons, 
 
 
 tu paîtras, 
 vous paîtrez. 
 
 il paîtra, 
 ils paîtront 
 
 -N- Je paîtrais, 
 nous paîtrions, 
 
 
 tu paîtrais, 
 vous paîtriez. 
 
 il paîtrait, 
 ils paîtraient 
 
 paisfions. 
 
 
 pais, 
 paissez, 
 
 qu'il paisse, 
 qu'ils paissent 
 
 -a- Que je paisse, 
 
 que nous paissions. 
 
 que tu paisses, 
 qUe vous paissiez. 
 
 qu'il paisse, 
 qu'ils paissent 
 
 -s- (none) 
 
 This verb is very little used ; it has no compound tenses. 
 Conjugate after the same manner — 
 
 Re paître, to feed. | Se re paître, to feed one's self. 
 
 These last two verbs, have a preterit definite, and an imperfect 
 of the subjunctive. 
 
 -J- Je repus, 
 
 nous repûmes, 
 
 'S- Que je repusse, 
 
 que nous repussions. 
 
 tu repus, 
 vous repûtes, 
 
 que tu repusses, 
 que vous repussiez, 
 
 il reput, 
 ils repurent. 
 
 qu'il repût, 
 qu'ils repussent. 
 
 The compound tenses of Repaître^ are conjugated with Avoir, 
 and those of .Se repaître, with Etre. 
 
 Paraître 
 
 to appear. 
 
 A- Tniaître. 
 
 •F- Je par ais 
 
 nous par azssonsy 
 
 -H- Je par aùsais^ 
 nous par aissions 
 
 -G- Par aissant. 
 
 -B- Par M. 
 
 tu par aw, 
 vous par aissez, 
 
 tu par aissais^ 
 vous par aiui^z^ 
 
 il par ait^ 
 
 ils par aissenU 
 
 il par aissait^ 
 ils par aiasaient. 
 
OF t&t; ^ÔÙÎitH CONjtfGA^lOlï. 
 
 Isa 
 
 -J- Je par tw, 
 
 nous par ûrhes^ 
 
 -L- Je par aîtraiy 
 nous par aîtrons^ 
 
 -N- Je par aîtrais, 
 nous par aîtrionSy 
 
 tu part», 
 voua par w/m, 
 
 tu par aîtraSf 
 vous par aîtrez, 
 
 tu par aîtrais^ 
 vous par aîtriez^ 
 
 il par u/, 
 ils par itren/. 
 
 il par ai^m, 
 ils par aîtront. 
 
 il par aîtraiU 
 ils par auraient. 
 
 par aw, qu'il par awse, 
 
 par aissesi qu'ils par aissent. 
 
 que tu par ai«iè«, 
 que vous par aissies, 
 
 que tu parwwfij, 
 
 que vous par ussiez^ 
 The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
 Conjugated after the same manner- 
 
 par aissons^ 
 
 -Q- Que je par ame, 
 
 que nous par aissions^ 
 
 -s- Que je parwso'c, 
 
 que nous parM55ton*, 
 
 qu'il par aisse^ 
 qu'ils par aissenii 
 
 qu'il par t//, 
 qu'ils parMWcn/. 
 
 Appar aitre^ to appear. 
 Comparaître, to appear. 
 Conn aitre^ to know. 
 Disparaî/re, to disappear. 
 M é conn aitre, to mistake, to 
 '[forget, to neglect. 
 The compound tenses of the last verb, are conjugated with Etrc 
 
 Reconnaître, to recognize, to 
 
 [to know again. 
 
 Repar attre, to appear again. 
 
 Se méconn aître, to forget oné^ê 
 
 [.self. 
 
 
 Plaire to please. 
 
 PI cire. 
 
 
 -0- Pi aisant. 
 
 B-PIW. 
 
 Je pi ûfw, 
 nous pi aisons. 
 
 
 tu pi ai*, 
 vous plaides, 
 
 il pi a^f, 
 ils pi aisent. 
 
 Je pi aisaisy 
 nous pi aisions^ 
 
 
 tu plaidais, 
 vous plaiiiear, 
 
 il pi aisait, 
 ils pi aisaient. 
 
 Je pltw, 
 nous pi ûmest 
 
 
 tu pi us^ 
 vous pi ûtes. 
 
 il pi w^ 
 ils pi wren/. 
 
 Je pi airai, 
 nous pi airons^ 
 
 
 tu pi aira*, 
 vous pi airc3r, 
 
 il pl aira^ 
 ils pl airont. 
 
 Je pi airais^ 
 nous pi airions^ 
 
 
 tu pi airais^ 
 vous plairiez, 
 
 il pl airain, 
 ils pl airaient. 
 
 pi aisons, 
 
 
 pi aisy 
 pi aises. 
 
 qu'il pl aise, 
 qu'ils pl aisent. 
 
 Que je pi awe, 
 que nous pi aisions^ 
 
 que tu pi aise3y 
 que vous pi aisies^ 
 
 qu'il pl aise, 
 qu'ils pl aisent. 
 
 Que je pi usse^ 
 quo nous pi ussions^ 
 
 que tu pi usses^ 
 que vous pi ussiez^ 
 
 qu'il pl w/, 
 qu'ils pl ussent. 
 
 The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, lo ^ave. 
 Conjugated after the same manner— 
 
154 
 
 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS 
 
 Compl aire, to humour, to please, 
 
 Dépl aire, to displease. 
 
 T aire, to conceal, to keep secret. 
 
 The oompoxmd tenses of .Se Taire^ are conjugated witli Etrb,^o 6e 
 
 Se T aire, to forbear talking, to 
 [be silent, to hold one's tongue. 
 
 Poindre to shoot forth, to daivn, 
 
 A- Poindre. -f- II point. -l- II poindra. 
 
 Are the only tenses and persons used. 
 
 
 Prendre to take. 
 
 A- 
 
 Prendre, -c- 
 
 Prenant. 
 
 -B- Pris. 
 
 -F- 
 
 Je prends, 
 nous prenons, 
 
 tu prends, 
 vous prenez. 
 
 il prend, 
 
 ils prennent. 
 
 -n 
 
 . Je prenais, 
 nous prenions, 
 
 tu prenais, 
 vous preniez. 
 
 il prenait, 
 ils prenaient. 
 
 -j- 
 
 Je pris, 
 nous prîmes. 
 
 tu pris, 
 vous prîtes, 
 
 il prit, 
 ils prirent. 
 
 -L- 
 
 Je prendrai, 
 nous prendrons, 
 
 tu prendras, 
 vous prendrez. 
 
 . il prendra, 
 ils prendront. 
 
 -N- 
 
 Je prendrais, 
 nous prendrions. 
 
 tu prendrais, 
 vous prendriez, 
 
 il prendrait, 
 ils prendraient. 
 
 -P- 
 
 prenons, 
 
 prends, 
 prenez, 
 
 qu'il prenne, 
 qu'ils prennent. 
 
 -a- 
 
 Que je prenne, 
 que nous prenions. 
 
 que tu prennes, 
 que vous preniez. 
 
 qu'il prenne, 
 qu'ils prennent. 
 
 -s- 
 
 Que je prisse, 
 que nous prissions. 
 
 que tu prisse, 
 que vous prissiez, 
 
 qu'il prît, 
 qu'ils prissent. 
 
 The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
 Conjugate after the same manner — 
 
 Ap prendre, to learn. 
 Com prendre, to comprehend, 
 [to understand. 
 Dé prendre, to loosen, to dis- 
 [engage. 
 Dé sap prendre, to unlearn. 
 Entre prendre, to undertake. 
 
 Rap prendre, to learn again. 
 Re prendre, to take again, to 
 
 [resume. 
 Sur prendre, to surprise, to 
 
 [deceive. 
 Se mé prendre, to mistake, 
 S'é prendre, to be smitten. 
 
 The compound tenses of Se méprendre^ and S^éprendre, are con- 
 jugated with Etre, to be ; S'éprendre^ is used only in -e- the participle 
 past, and in all the compound tenses. 
 
OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 
 
 Réduire to reduce. 
 
 155 
 
 -A- Rédui re. 
 
 0- Rédui sant. -k 
 
 -Rédui/. 
 
 -F- Je rédui 5, 
 
 nous rédui sonSy 
 
 tu rédui », 
 vous rédui w», 
 
 il rédui «, 
 ils rédui seni. 
 
 -H- Je rédui sais^ 
 nous rédui iions^ 
 
 tu rédui sais, 
 vous rédui «es, 
 
 il réduirai/, 
 ils rédui salent. 
 
 -J- Je rédui «5, 
 
 nous rédui sîmes^ 
 
 tu rédui sis, 
 vous rédui «î/c*, 
 
 il rédui «7, 
 ils rédui tirent 
 
 -L- Je rédui raù 
 nous rédui rons. 
 
 tu rédui row, 
 vous rédui rcsr, 
 
 il rédui m, 
 ils rédui ront. 
 
 -N- Je rédui rais, 
 nous rédui rions^ 
 
 tu rédui rai», 
 vous rédui rtesr, 
 
 il rédui rait, 
 ils rédui raient. 
 
 -p- 
 
 rédui sonsy 
 
 rédui s, 
 rédui sez. 
 
 qu'il rédui 5c, 
 qu'ils rédui jÉ7i< 
 
 -Q- Que je rédui 5e, 
 
 que nous rédui sions^ 
 
 que tu rédui s«, 
 que vous rédui siez. 
 
 qu'il rédui se, 
 qu'ils rédui wn/. 
 
 -s- Que je rédui mw, que tu rédui sisses, qu'il rédui sît, 
 
 que nous rédui sissions, que vous rédui sissiez, qu'ils rédui sissent 
 
 The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
 Conjugate after the same manner — 
 
 Conduire, to conduct, to lead. 
 Construi re, to construct. 
 Cui re, to bake. 
 
 Dédui re, to deduct,io take from, 
 Détrui re, to destroy. 
 Econdui re, to discard in a po- 
 
 [lite manner. 
 Endui re, to plaster. 
 Entre-lui re, to shine a little, to 
 
 \_glow a little, 
 Indui re, to induce. 
 Instrui re, to instruct. 
 Introdui re, to introduce. 
 
 Lui re, ^0 «Aine, /o glow 
 Nui re, ^0 Awr^. 
 Produire, to produce, 
 Recondui re, /o recoyiduct, to 
 [lead back, 
 Reconstrui re, to construct ; 
 
 Recui re, fo 6aÂ:e again. 
 Relui re, ^0 shine, to glow, 
 Rendui re, /o plaster again. 
 Reprodui re, ^0 reproduce. 
 Sédui re, ^0 seduce, 
 Tradui re, /o translate. 
 
 Résoudre 
 
 /o dissolve, to resolve. 
 
 -A- Ré soudre. 
 
 -F- Je ré sous, 
 
 nous ré Suivons, 
 
 -H- Je ré Suivais, 
 nous ré solvions, 
 
 -c- Ré solvant, 
 
 tu ré sous, 
 vous ré solvez, 
 
 tu ré solvais, 
 vous ré solviez, 
 
 Ré solu or ré soiW. 
 
 il ré sont, 
 ils ré solvent. 
 
 il ré solvait, 
 ils ré solvaieni. 
 
156 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS 
 
 -J- Je lé solus, 
 
 nous ré solûmes, 
 
 -L- Je ré soudrai, 
 nous ré soudrons, 
 
 -N- Je ré soudrais, 
 nous ré soudrions, 
 
 ré solvons, 
 
 •a- Que je ré solve, 
 que nous ré solvions, 
 
 tu ré solus, 
 vous ré solutes, 
 
 tu ré soudras, 
 vous ré soudrez, 
 
 tu ré soudrais, 
 vous ré soudriez, 
 
 ré sous, 
 ré solvez, 
 
 que tu ré solve, 
 que vous ré solviez. 
 
 il ré solut, 
 ils ré solurent. 
 
 il ré soudra, 
 ils ré soudront. 
 
 il ré soudrait, 
 ils ré soudraient. 
 
 qu'il ré solve, 
 qu'ils ré solvent. 
 
 qu'il ré solve, 
 qu'ils ré solvent. 
 
 HS- Que je ré solusse, que tu ré solusses, qu'il ré solût, 
 
 que nous ré solussions, que vous ré solussiez, qu'ils ré solussent. 
 
 The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
 
 The above verb has two -e- participles past. Résolu, is used 
 when Résoudre, is employed to express, to resolve; and Résous, is used 
 when employed to express, to dissolve. 
 
 Conjugate after the same manner — 
 Se ré sou (Ire, to be dissolved, to melt» 
 
 Compound lenses with Etre, to be, 
 Ab soudre, to absolve, | Dis soudre, to dissolve* 
 
 These two last verbs, have no -j- preterit definite, nor -s- im- 
 perfect of the subjunctive. 
 
 Their compound tenses are conjugated with the simple tenses 
 of Avoir, to have; to which is added the -e- participle past. Absous. 
 
 
 Rire to 
 
 laugh. 
 
 
 -A- Hire. 
 
 -c- Riant. 
 
 -B- 
 
 Ri. 
 
 -F- Je ris, 
 nous rions. 
 
 tu ris, 
 vous riez. 
 
 
 il rit, 
 ils rient 
 
 -n- Je riais, 
 nous riions, 
 
 tu riais, 
 vous riiez. 
 
 
 il riait, 
 ils riaient. 
 
 •j- Je ris, 
 nous rîmes. 
 
 tu ris, 
 vous rîtes. 
 
 
 il rit, 
 ils rirent. 
 
 L- Je rirai, 
 nous rirons, 
 
 tu riras, 
 vous rirez, 
 
 
 il rira, 
 ils riront. 
 
 •N- Je rirais, 
 nous ririons. 
 
 tu rirais, 
 vous ririez, 
 
 
 il rirait, 
 ils riraient. 
 
 rions. 
 
 ris, 
 riez. 
 
 
 qu'il rie, 
 qu'ils rient. 
 
 •Q- Que je rie, 
 q'ie nous riions. 
 
 que tu ries, 
 que vous riiez, 
 
 qu'il rie, 
 qu'ils rient. 
 
OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 
 
 157 
 
 que tu risses, 
 quo vous rissiez. 
 
 qu'il rît, 
 qu'ils rissent. 
 
 -B- Que je risse, 
 
 quo nous rissions, 
 
 Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
 Conjugate after the same manner — 
 
 Sou rire, to smile, \ Se rire de, to laugh at. 
 
 The compound tenses of Se rire de, are conjugated witli Etrs. 
 
 Rompre to break. 
 
 -A- Rompre. 
 
 Rompant. -k- 
 
 Rompu. 
 
 -F- Je romps, 
 
 nous rompons, 
 
 tu romps, 
 vous rompez, 
 
 il rompt, 
 ils rompent. 
 
 -H- Je rompais, 
 nous rompions. 
 
 tu rompais, 
 vous rompiez, 
 
 il rompait, 
 ils rompaient. 
 
 • j- Je romois, 
 
 nous rompîmes. 
 
 tu rompis, 
 vous rompîtes, 
 
 il rompit, 
 ils rompirent. 
 
 -L- Je romprai, 
 nous romprons, 
 
 tu rompras, 
 vous romprez. 
 
 il rompra, 
 ils rompront. 
 
 -N- Je romprais, 
 nous romprions, 
 
 tu romprais, 
 vous rompriez, 
 
 il romprait, 
 ils rompraient. 
 
 -p. 
 
 rompons. 
 
 romps, 
 rompez. 
 
 qu'il rompe, 
 qu'ils rompent. 
 
 -a- Que je rompe, 
 que nous rompions. 
 
 que tu rompes, 
 que vous rompiez. 
 
 qu'il rompe, 
 qu'ils rompent. 
 
 -s- Que je rompisse, 
 
 que nous rompissions. 
 
 que tu rompisses, 
 que vous rompissiez, 
 
 qu'il rompît, 
 qu'ils rompissent. 
 
 The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
 Conjugate after the same manner — 
 
 Cor rompre, to corrupt. | Inter rompre, to interrupt 
 
 Suivre 
 
 to follow. 
 
 -A- Suivre. 
 
 -c- Suivant. 
 
 -E- Suivi. 
 
 -F- Je suis, 
 
 nous suivons. 
 
 tu suis, 
 vous suivez. 
 
 il suit, 
 
 ils suivent. 
 
 -H- Je suivais, 
 nous suivions, 
 
 tu suivais, 
 vous suiviez, 
 
 il suivait, 
 ils suivaient. 
 
 •a- Je suivis, 
 
 nous suivîmes, 
 
 tu suivis, 
 vous suivîtes. 
 
 il suivit, 
 ils suivirent. 
 
158 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS 
 
 L- Je suivrai, 
 
 tu fluivrîts, 
 
 nous suivrons, 
 
 vous suivrez, 
 
 N- Je suivrais, 
 
 tu suivrais, 
 
 nous suivrions, 
 
 vous suivriez. 
 
 p- 
 
 suis, 
 
 suivons. 
 
 suivez. 
 
 il suivra, 
 ils suivront. 
 
 il suivrait, 
 ils suivraient. 
 
 qu'il suive, 
 qu'ils suivent, 
 
 que tu suives, qu'il suive, 
 
 que vous suiviez, qu'ils suivent. 
 
 que tu suivisses, qu'il suivît, 
 
 que vous suivissiez, qu'Us suivissent. 
 
 The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
 Conjugate after the same manner — 
 Pour suivre, to purstce, to prose- 1 S'en suivre, to follow, to 
 [cute. I [result. 
 
 This last verb is only used in the third person singular of 
 ©very tense. 
 
 -a- Que je suive, 
 
 que nous suivions, 
 
 HS- Que je suivisse, 
 
 que nous suivissions, 
 
 
 Traire to milk. 
 
 -A- Traire. 
 
 -c- Trayant. 
 
 E- Trait. 
 
 -F- Je trais, 
 
 nous trayons, 
 
 tu trais, 
 vous trayez. 
 
 il trait, 
 ils traient. 
 
 'H- Je trayais, 
 nous trayions, 
 
 -J- 
 
 -Lr Je trairai, 
 nous trairons. 
 
 tu trayais, 
 vous trayiez, 
 
 (none) 
 
 tu trairas, 
 vous trairez. 
 
 il trayait, 
 ils trayaient. 
 
 il traira, 
 ils trairont. 
 
 •M- Je trairais, 
 nous trairions, 
 
 tu trairais, 
 vous trairiez. 
 
 il trairait, 
 ils trairaient. 
 
 îrayons, 
 
 trais, 
 trayez. 
 
 qu'il traie, 
 qu'ils traient. 
 
 -a- Que je traie, que tu traies, 
 que nous trayions, que vous trayiez, 
 
 qu'il traie, 
 qu'ils traient. 
 
 -S- (none) 
 
 The Compound Tenses are conjugated 
 Conjugate after the same manner— 
 
 with Avoir, to have. 
 
 Abs traire, ta abstract. 
 
 At traire, to attract, to entice. 
 
 Dis traire, to distract, to divert. 
 
 Ex traire, to extract. 
 
 Ren traire, to fine draw. ^ 
 
 Re traire, to redeem an estate. 
 
 Se soustraire à, is conjugated with Etre, to be 
 
 Sous traire, to subtract, to hide, 
 [to conceal, to take away. 
 
 Se sous traire à, to avoid, to 
 [escape, to withdraw one's 
 [self from. 
 
 à 
 
OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 
 
 159 
 
 Vaincre 
 
 to vanquish, to conquer. 
 
 -A- Vaincre. 
 
 -E- Jo vaincs. 
 
 nous vainquons, 
 
 -H- Je vainquais, 
 nous vainquions, 
 
 -j- Je vainquis, 
 
 nous vainquîmes, 
 
 -L- Je vaincrai, 
 nous vaincrons, 
 
 -N- Je vaincrais, 
 nous vaincrions. 
 
 -c- Vainquant. -k- Vaincu. 
 
 -P- 
 
 vainquons, 
 
 -a- que je vainque, 
 que nous vainquions, 
 
 tu vamcs, 
 vous vainquez, 
 
 tu vainquais, 
 vous vainquiez, 
 
 tu vainquis, 
 vous vainquîtes, 
 
 tu vaincras, 
 vous vaincrez, 
 
 tu vaincrais, 
 vous vaincriez, 
 
 vaincs, 
 vainquez 
 
 que tu vainques, 
 que vous vainquiez. 
 
 il vainc, 
 
 ils vainquent. 
 
 il vainquait, 
 ils vainquaient. 
 
 il vainquit, 
 ils vainquirent. 
 
 il vaincra, 
 ils vaincront. 
 
 il vaincrait, 
 ils vaincraient- 
 
 qu'il vainque, 
 qu'ils vainquent. 
 
 qu'il vainque, 
 qu'ils vainquent. 
 
 Que je vainquisse, que tu vainquisses, qu'il vainquît, 
 
 que nous vainquissions, que vous vainquissiez, qu'ils vainquissent. 
 
 The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to hate. 
 Conjugate after the same manner — 
 
 Con vaincre, to convince. 
 
 Vivre 
 
 to live. 
 
 -A- Vivre. 
 
 -c- Vivant. 
 
 -K- Vécu. 
 
 ■F- Je vis, 
 
 nous vivons. 
 
 tu vis, 
 vous vivez, 
 
 il vit, 
 ils vivent. 
 
 -H- Je vivais, 
 nous vivions. 
 
 tu vivais, 
 vous viviez. 
 
 il vivait, 
 ils vivaient. 
 
 ■j- Je vécus, 
 nous vécûmes, 
 
 tu vécus, 
 vous vécûtes. 
 
 il vécut, 
 ils vécurent. 
 
 -L- Je vivrai, 
 nous vivrons. 
 
 tu vivras, 
 voua vivrez, 
 
 il vivra, 
 ils vivront. 
 
 -N- Je vivrais, 
 nous vivrions. 
 
 tu vivrais, 
 vous vivriez. 
 
 il vivrait, 
 ils vivraient. 
 
 vivons. 
 
 vis, 
 vivez, 
 
 qu'il vive, 
 qu'ils vivent. 
 
i^b 
 
 AtI*HAëÈ'TICAL LIST OF VERliS, &C. 
 
 -a- Que je vive, 
 que nous vivions, 
 
 que tu vives, 
 que vous viviez. 
 
 qu'il vive, 
 qu'ils viventi 
 
 s- Que je vécusse, que tu vécusses, qu'il vécut, 
 
 que nous vécussions, que vous vécussiez, qu'ils vécussent. 
 
 The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
 Conjugate after the same manner — 
 
 Re vi^ 
 
 to revive. | Sur vivre, to survive. 
 
 Alphabetical List of Verbs^ thai form the Compound Tenses 
 with être ; or sometimes with avoir, and sometimes with être. 
 
 1. There are in the French language about six hundred 
 neuter verbs, which, like the active verbs, take the auxiliary 
 verb avoir to have, to form their compound tenses. The only 
 exceptions are the following: of which some take ètre^ and 
 some take either être or avoir, according to the sense in 
 which the verT) is to be einployed. 
 
 2. ê put after some of the following verbs indicates tha 
 they form their compound tenses in French, with être to be 
 although, perhaps, conjugated with avoir to have, in English 
 a, ê, put after some of the following verbs, indicate that they 
 sometimes form their compound tenses with avoir to have, and 
 sometimes with être to be. 
 
 3. Those verbs marked a, é, take avoir when they are 
 meant to express the action, thus : 
 
 Monsieur A... a demeuré à Paris. 
 Mr. A... has lived in Paris. 
 
 4. They take être when they are meant to express the 
 state, thus : 
 
 Monsieur A... est demeuré à Paris pour ses affaires. 
 Mr. A... has remained in Paris for his business. 
 
 A Border, a, è, io land. 
 
 accoucher, a, ê, to bring forth 
 
 accourir, a, ê, to run to. 
 
 accroître, a, è, to increase. 
 
 ftiler c, io go. 
 
 apparaître, a, é, to appear. 
 arriver, ê, to arrive, to happen 
 
 avenir, c, to happen, to chance 
 
 cesser, a, ê, to cease, to leave off 
 
 changer, «, ê, to change. 
 
ALPHABETICAL LIST OF VERBS, dcC. 
 
 16J 
 
 choir, I, 
 convenir, a, è *, 
 croître, a ê, 
 décamper, a, ê, 
 
 décéder, ê, 
 déchoir, a, ê, 
 décroître, a, ê, 
 demeurer, a, c, 
 descendre, o, ê, t 
 
 devenir, ê, 
 disconvenir, ê, 
 disparaître, a, ê, 
 échapper, a, é, 
 éclioir, ê, 
 
 échouer, a, ê, 
 
 éciore, ê, 
 
 empirer, a, e, 
 
 entrer, a, é, t 
 
 expirer, a, ê, 
 intervenir, ê, 
 mésavenir, ê, 
 monter, a, ê, t 
 
 mourir, é. 
 
 to fall. 
 
 to agree, to suit, to 
 to grow. [become, 
 to decamp, to run 
 
 away, 
 to die, to decease, 
 to decay, 
 to decrease, 
 to remain, to stay, 
 to come down, to go 
 
 down, to descend, 
 to become, 
 to deny, to disown, 
 to disappear, 
 to escape, 
 to become due, to fall 
 
 to the lot of. 
 to run aground, to 
 
 miscarry, 
 to be hatched, to blow, 
 
 to blossom, 
 to embellish, 
 to make worse, to 
 
 grow worse, 
 to enter, to go in, to 
 
 come in. 
 to expire, 
 to intervene, 
 to succeed ill. 
 to ascend, to go up, 
 
 to come up. 
 to die. 
 
 naître, c, 
 partir, é, 
 parvenir, ê, 
 passer, a, ê, t 
 périr, a, ê, 
 provenir, ê, 
 
 rajeunir, a, ê, 
 redescendre, a,ê, 
 
 redevehir, ê, 
 remonter, a, ê, t 
 
 rentrer, a, é, f 
 
 repartir, ê, ** 
 repasser, a, ê, 
 
 ressortir, a, ê, 
 rester, a, ê, 
 résulter, a, é, 
 retomber, é, 
 retourner, ê, 
 revenir, ê, 
 
 sortir, a, ê, t 
 survenir, ê, 
 tomber, ê, 
 vieillir, a ê, 
 venir, e. 
 
 to be born. 
 
 to depart, to set oJF 
 
 to attain, to reach, 
 
 to pass. 
 
 to perish. 
 
 to proceed, to come 
 
 from. 
 to become young, 
 to come down again, 
 
 to go down again, 
 to become again, 
 to ascend again, to 
 
 go up again, to 
 
 cofne up again. 
 to re-enter, to go in 
 
 again, 
 to set off again, 
 to pass again, to re 
 
 pass, 
 to go out again, 
 to remain, to stay, 
 to result, to follow, 
 to fall again, 
 to return, to go back, 
 to come again, to 
 
 come back again, 
 to go out. 
 
 to befall, to happen, 
 to fall. 
 
 to become oid 
 to come. 
 
 * Convenir to agree, takes anoir to have, and convenir to suit, to be 
 come, to Jit, to be expedient, to be proper, takes être to be. 
 
 t Several grammarians conjugate with avoir to have, the verbs which 
 are marked thus t in the above list, only v/hen they have a direct object :\ 
 thus, nous avons passé le fleuve we have crossed the river. They con- 
 jugate the same verbs with être to be, when they have no direct object, 
 thus : La procession est passée the procession has past. 
 
 However, most of the grammarians use these verbs as they do any 
 other marked a,ê, that is, they conjugate them with avoir to have, whether 
 they have a direct objecit or not, if they are meant to express an action, 
 and they conjugate them with être to be, when they are meant to express 
 the state. 
 
 ** Repartir to set off again, is conjugated with être to be, but repartir 
 to reply, is conjugated with avoir to have. 
 
 I By direct object we underatand, in P'rencli, the noun or pronoun which is governed 
 in the objective case by the verb, and not by any preposition. 
 
162 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND tjNIPERSONAL VERBS. 
 
 Alphabetical List of all the Irregular, Defective, and Uniper- 
 sonal Verbs, of the four conjugations, with reference to the 
 pages where they are to be found conjugated. 
 
 However numerous the irregularities of an irregular verb 
 may be, they never occiir but in the simple tenses ; the com- 
 pound tenses of all the verbs regular or irregular, defective or 
 unipersonal, are all formed in the same manner ; that is, with 
 the addition of avoir to have, or être to be, to the participle 
 past of the verb to be conjugated. 
 
 Some verbs have the compound tenses conjugated with avoirj 
 others with être, others sometimes with avoir, sometimes with 
 être, according to the sense in which the verb is to be em- 
 ployed. In the following list the letter é put after a verb in- 
 dicates that the compound tenses of that verb are to be conju- 
 gated in French with être, although perhaps conjugated with 
 avoir to have, in English. And the letters a, ê, indicate that 
 the compound tenses of that verb are to be conjugated some- 
 times with être, sometimes with avoir. Those verbs after 
 which neither ê nor a, ê, are put, have, of course, their com- 
 pound tenses conjugated with avoir. 
 
 A list of all the verbs, whose compound tenses are to be 
 conjugated with être, or sometimes with être and sometimes 
 with avoir, is given, page 160. 
 
 N. B. Any verb not found in this list, is regular, and must 
 be conjugated on parler if the present of the infinitive ends 
 with er ; on finir if it ends with ir ; on recevoir if it ends with 
 evoir ; and on rendre if it ends with re. 
 
 *^* Some verbs, although regular, have been put in this list of irregular 
 
 verbs, in order to call the attention of the learner to some peculiarities con- 
 cerning these verbs. 
 
 A 
 
 Abattre . ... to pull down, to throw down, to fell . battre . . 141 
 
 to fall down battre . . 141 
 
 to land (see page 160) parler . . 38 
 
 to absolve . .- résoudre . 155 
 
 to abstain, to refrain tenir . . 132 
 
 to abstract traire . . 158 
 
 to bring forth (see page 160) . . . parler . . 38 
 
 to run to, to hasten to (see page 160.) courir . . 126 
 
 to make one believe croire , . 145 
 
 to increase, to accrue, to augment (see 
 
 page 160) . croître , 
 
 to increase croître . 
 
 to welcome, to receive well, to receive 
 
 kindly cueillir. . 127 
 
 acheter . ... to buy, to purchase (see page 49, art. 
 
 97 & 99) parler . , 39 
 
 s'anattre, e . 
 aborder, a, ê 
 absoudre. . 
 s'abstenir, ê 
 abstraire . 
 accouche., a, e 
 accourir, a, ê 
 «ccroire . . 
 accroître, a, ê 
 
 s'accroître, ê 
 accueillir 
 
 145 
 155 
 
IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS. 
 
 163 
 
 achever . . 
 
 acquérir . 
 adjoindre 
 
 admettre . 
 aliéner . 
 alléguer . 
 aller, ê . 
 s'en aller, ê 
 amener . 
 amonceler 
 apparaître, a 
 
 appartenir 
 appeler , 
 apprendre 
 appuyer . 
 arriver, ê 
 
 arriver, ê 
 assaillir . 
 
 s'asseoir, ô 
 s'assoir, ê 
 astreindre, 
 
 s'astreindre, 
 atteindre . 
 atteler 
 attraire . 
 avancer . 
 aveindre . 
 avenir, ê . 
 
 avoir . . 
 y avoir . 
 
 battre . . 
 se battre, ê 
 blasphémer 
 boire . . 
 bouillir . 
 bourreler . 
 braire 
 bruiner . 
 bruire 
 
 cacheter . 
 ceindre . 
 celer . . 
 célébrer . 
 
 to finish, to accomplish (see page 49, 
 
 art. 97 & 99) parler. 
 
 to acquire acquérir 
 
 to associate, to adjoin, to give an as- 
 sistant, to give a colleagiLC . . . joindre 
 
 to admit, to allow of mettre . 
 
 to alienate (see page 49, art. 97 & 99) parler . 
 
 to allege (see page 49, art. 100) . . parler . 
 
 to go aller 
 
 to go away s'en allei 
 
 to bring (see page 49, art. 97 & 99) . parler . 
 
 to heap (see page 48, art. 91) . . . parler . 
 to appear, to make Okie's appearance 
 
 (see page 160) paraître 
 
 to belong to, to become well .... tenir . 
 
 to call (see page 48, art. 91) . . . parler . 
 
 to learn, to hear of prendre 
 
 to support (see page 50, art. 103) . parler . 
 to happen, to chance, to fall out, to 
 
 come to pass (see page 160) . . . neiger . 
 
 to arrive (see page 160) parler . 
 
 to assault assaillir 
 
 to set something or somebody down, to 
 
 lay some thing or some body down s'asseoir 
 
 idem, s'assoir 
 
 to sit down (one^s self^ s'asseoir 
 
 to sit down (one's self) s'assoir 
 
 to subject, to oblige, to compel, to force, 
 
 to constrain joindre 
 
 to confine onz's self joindre 
 
 to overtake, to reach, to catch .... joindre 
 
 to put to (see page 48, art. 91) . . parler . 
 
 to allure, to attract, to entice . . . traire , 
 
 to advance (see page 50, art. 101) . parler . 
 
 to take out, to fetch out joindre 
 
 to happen, to chance, to coine to pass, 
 
 to fall out (see page 160) . . . tenir . 
 
 to have avoir . 
 
 there to be y avoir 
 
 B 
 
 to beat, to strike battre . 
 
 to fight, IÙ combat battre . 
 
 to blaspheme (see page 49, art. 100) . parler . 
 
 to drink boire . 
 
 to boil bouillir 
 
 to torment (see page 48, art. 93) . . parler . 
 
 to bray traire . 
 
 to drizzle neiger . 
 
 to roar, to make a great noise to 
 
 rustle, to rattle .' . réduire 
 
 C 
 
 to seal (see page 49, art. 95) . . . parler , 
 
 to gird, to encompass joindif 
 
 to conceal (see page 49, art. 100) . . {wrIer , 
 
 to celebrate (see page 49, art. 100) . parlez , 
 2 i4 
 
 155 
 
 38 
 
 149 
 38 
 38 
 
164 
 
 IKREGULARj DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAI VERES. 
 
 chanceler 
 changer, a, ê 
 chou-, ê . . 
 circonscrire . 
 circonvenir . 
 
 clore . . . 
 colleter . . 
 combattre . 
 commettre . 
 comparaître 
 complaindre 
 complaire . 
 se complaire, ê 
 comprendre 
 
 compromettre 
 66 compromettre, ê 
 conclure . 
 concourir 
 conduire . 
 
 confire . 
 
 congeler . 
 
 conj oindre 
 
 connaître 
 
 conquérir 
 
 consentir 
 
 construire 
 
 contenir 
 
 se contenir, 
 
 contraindre 
 
 contredire 
 contretaire 
 
 contrevenir 
 convaincre 
 convenir, a, 
 
 coqueter . 
 aorrompre 
 coudre 
 courir 
 couvrir 
 craindre 
 croire . 
 se croire, ê 
 croître, a, ê 
 
 cueillir . 
 cuire . . 
 
 débattre . . 
 se débattre, ê 
 
 to cease, to leave ojj, to discontinue, 
 
 (see page 160) parler . . 38 
 
 to stagger (see page 48, art. 91) . . parler . , 38 
 
 to change (see p. 100 & 59, art. 102) parler . . 38 
 
 to fall (see page 160-^ choir . . 135 
 
 to circumscribe écrire . . 14? 
 
 to circumvent, to deceive, to delude, to 
 
 cozen tenir . . 132 
 
 to shut, to close clore . . 143 
 
 to collar (see page 49, art. 97 & 99) . parler . . 38 
 
 to fight, to combat battre . . 141 
 
 to commit mettre , . 150 
 
 to appear, to give evidence .... paraître . 152 
 
 to complain to . . joindre . 149 
 
 to humour, to please, to comply . . plaire . . 153 
 to delight, to take delight in . . . plaire . . 153 
 to understand, to include, to compre- 
 hend, to contain, to inclose . . . prendre . 154 
 to compromise, to expose .... mettre . . 150 
 
 to expose one's self mettre . . 150 
 
 to conclude (see page 51, art. 104) . conclure . 143 
 
 to concur eourir . . 12ô 
 
 to conduct, to lead, to carry, to take a 
 
 person to a place réduire . 155 
 
 to preserve, to pickle confire . . 143 
 
 to congeal (see page 4S, sal. 93) . . parler . . 38 
 
 to conjobi . . , joindre . 149 
 
 to know, to be acquainted with . . paraître . 152 
 
 to conquer, to vanquish acquérir . 134 
 
 to consent, to agree sentir . . 130 
 
 to construct, to build réduire . 155 
 
 to contain, to hold . tenir . . 132 
 
 to refrain tenir . . 133 
 
 to constrain, to force, to compel, to 
 
 oblige joindre. . 149 
 
 to contradict dire . . . 1 16 
 
 to counterfeit, to imitate, to Tnimic, 
 
 to forge, faire . . 148 
 
 to infringe, to act contrary to . . . tenir . . 132 
 
 to convince, to persuade vaincre . 159 
 
 to suit, to fit, to become, to agree, to he 
 
 expedient, to be properÇsee-pdigeWO) tenir . . 132 
 
 to coquet (see page 49, art. 97 & 99 . parler . . 38 
 
 to corrupt rompre . . 157 
 
 to sew, to stitch coudre . . 144 
 
 to run, to hunt eourir . . 126 
 
 to cover, to shelter ouvrir • . 130 
 
 to fear, tobeapprehensive,tohe afraid joindre. . 149 
 
 to believe, to think croire . . 145 
 
 to rely upon one^ s own judgment . croire . . 145 
 to grow, to increase, to augment (see 
 
 page 160) croître . . 145 
 
 to gather, to pick up, to collect . . cueillir . . 127 
 
 to cook, to bake, to smart .... réduire . 155 
 
 D 
 
 to debate battre . . 141 
 
 to atruggle battre . . 141 
 
IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS 
 
 165 
 
 décacheter . 
 décamper, a, ê 
 décéder, êj 
 déceler . 
 déchoir, ê, 
 
 déclore . 
 décolleter 
 
 déconfire 
 déconstruire 
 découdre 
 découvrir 
 décrire . 
 décroire . 
 décroître, a 
 décuire . 
 dédire . , 
 se dédire, ê, 
 déduire . 
 défaillir . 
 défaire . , 
 se défaire, ê 
 
 dégeler . 
 
 déjoindre 
 
 démentir 
 
 se démentir, ê 
 
 démettre 
 
 se démettre, ê 
 
 demeurer, a, ê 
 d émouvoir . 
 départir . . 
 
 se départir, ê 
 dépecer . . 
 dépeindre . 
 déplaire . . 
 se déplaire, ê 
 dépourvoir 
 déprendre . 
 déprévenir 
 dérompre . 
 désapprendre 
 
 desservir 
 
 déteindre 
 dételer . 
 détenir . 
 détruire . 
 se détruire, 
 
 devenir ê 
 
 to unseal (see page 49, art, 95) . . parler . 
 
 to decamp, to run away (see page 160^ parler . 
 
 to die (see page 160 & p. 49, art. 100) parler . 
 
 to betray, to detect (see p. 49, art. 100) parler . 
 to decay, to have fallen frovi, to have 
 
 abated from déchoir 
 
 to unclose clore 
 
 to uncover the neck (see page 49, art. 
 
 97 & 99) parler . 
 
 to defeat totally confire . 
 
 to take to pieces, to disunite, to analyze réduire 
 
 to rip coudre . 
 
 to discover, to uncover ouvrir . 
 
 to describe, to depict écrire . 
 
 to disbelieve croire . 
 
 to decrease, to become less, (p. 160) croître , 
 
 to render syrup more liquid . . . réduire 
 
 to disown, to unsay dire . . 
 
 to recant, to retract dire . . 
 
 to deduct, to take from ■ réduire 
 
 to fail, to faint, to svjoon, to decay . faillir . 
 
 to undo, to defeat faire 
 
 to part with, to get rid of, to rid one's 
 
 s^f of . faire 
 
 to thaw (see page 48, art. 93) . . . neiger . 
 
 to disjoin joindre 
 
 to contradict, to belie, to give the lie . sentir , 
 to belie one's self, to contradict one's 
 
 self . ^ . sentir . 
 
 to disjoint, to put out of joint . . . mettre . 
 to resign, to have put out of joint one's 
 
 wrist or ankle mettre . 
 
 to dwell, to live, to inhabit (p. 160) . parler . 
 
 to cause one to desist mouvoir 
 
 to distribute, to divide, to share, to 
 
 allot sentir . 
 
 to desist, to give up, to swerve . . . sentir .- 
 
 to carve (see page 49, art. 97 & 99) . parler . 
 
 to describe joindre 
 
 to displease plaire . 
 
 to be displeased with plaire . 
 
 to deprive, to leave destitute . . . pourvoir 
 
 to loosen, to disengage prendre 
 
 to unprepossess tenir . ' 
 
 to break down rompre 
 
 to unlearn prendre 
 
 to descend, to come down, to go down 
 
 (see page 160) .' . vendre . 
 
 to clear a table, to take away, to do an 
 
 ill office to servir . 
 
 to discolour joindre 
 
 to unteam,, to unyoke (p. 48, art. 91) parler . 
 
 to detain, to keep . lenir . 
 
 to destroy, to annihilate réduire 
 
 to kill one's self, to decay, to fall to 
 
 ruin réduire 
 
 to become^ to become of (sec 'p-àge 160) tenir . 
 
 Î55 
 
 13a 
 
166 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNJPERSONAL VERBS. 
 
 dévêtir . . 
 se dévêtir, ê 
 
 dire . . 
 disconvenir, 
 discourir . . 
 disjoindre , 
 disparaître, a, ô 
 dissoudre 
 se dissoudre, ê 
 distraire . . 
 
 dormir . . 
 
 s'ébattre, ê . . 
 
 ébouillir . . . 
 échapper, a, ê . 
 échoir, ê . . . 
 
 éclairer . . 
 échouer, a, ê 
 
 éclore, ê . . 
 
 éconduire . 
 
 écrire . . . 
 élire . . . 
 embattre 
 embellir, a, ê 
 s'emboire, ê 
 émettre . . 
 emmener 
 é moudre , . 
 émouvoir 
 3' émouvoir . 
 empirer, a, ê 
 employer 
 empreindre . 
 enceindre , 
 enclovre . • 
 encourir . . 
 endormir T 
 s'endormir, ê 
 enduire . . 
 enfriendre . 
 s'enfuir, è . 
 enjoindie 
 s'enquérir, ê 
 entreluire . 
 s'entremettre, ê 
 entrer, a, ê . • 
 entreprendre 
 ejitretenir , . 
 
 to sirip, to undress vêtir . 
 
 to divest one^s self, to leave off part 
 
 of 07ie^s clothes vêtir . 
 
 to sai/, to tell dire 
 
 to deny, to disown (see page 160) . tenir . 
 
 to discourse, to talk about .... courir . 
 
 to disjoin . . joindre 
 
 to disappear (see page 160) . . . paraître 
 
 to dissolve, to melt, to break up . . résoudre 
 
 to dissolve, to be dissolved .... résoudre 
 to distract, to divert, to amuse, to take 
 
 from traire . 
 
 to sleep dormir . 
 
 E 
 to take one's pleasure, to make merry, 
 
 to be merry battre . 
 
 to boil away bouillir 
 
 to escape (see page 160) parler . 
 
 to chance, to happen, to fall out, to 
 fall to, to expire, to be due, to fall 
 
 due (see page 160) échoir . 
 
 to lighten neiger . 
 
 to run aground, to miscarry, (see 
 
 page 160) . parler . 
 
 to come to life, to be hatched, to blos- 
 som, to ope'n,to Moîo (see page 160) éclore . 
 to refuse, to discard in a polite man- 
 ner, to refuse delicately .... réduire 
 
 to write écrire . 
 
 to elect, to choose lire . . 
 
 to lay the tire of a wheel .... battre . 
 
 to embellish (see page 160) .... finir 
 
 to imbibe, to soak in boire . 
 
 to express, to set forth mettre . 
 
 to take auxiy (see p. 49, art. 97 cfc 99) parler . 
 
 to whet, to sharpen, to grind knives . moudre 
 
 to move, to stir up, to excite . . . mouvoir 
 
 to be moved, to be concerned . . . mouvoir 
 
 to m,ake worse, to grow worse (p. 160) parler . 
 
 to employ, (see p. 50, art. 103) . . parler . 
 
 to imprint, to stamp joindre 
 
 to enclose, to encompass joindre 
 
 to surround, to enclose clore . 
 
 to incur courir . 
 
 to cause to sleep, to lull asleep . . . dormir , 
 
 to fall asleep dormir . 
 
 to planter, to do over réduire 
 
 to transgress, to infringe, to violate joindre 
 
 to run away fuir . . 
 
 to enjoin joindre 
 
 to inquire acquérir 
 
 to shine a little réduire 
 
 to interpose, to meddle mettre . 
 
 to enter, to come in, to go in (p. 160) parler , 
 
 to undertake prendre 
 
 to entertain, to maintain, to keep up tenir 
 
 133 
 
 133 
 146 
 132 
 126 
 149 
 152 
 153 
 155 
 
 158 
 127 
 
 141 
 125 
 
 38 
 
 136 
 123 
 
 38 
 
 147 
 
 155 
 147 
 149 
 141 
 
 54 
 142 
 150 
 
 38 
 151 
 136 
 136 
 
 33 
 
 sa 
 
 149 
 149 
 143 
 126 
 127 
 127 
 155 
 149 
 128 
 149 
 124 
 155 
 150 
 38 
 154 
 132 
 
IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS. 1Ô7 
 
 s'entretenir, ô 
 entr'ouïr . 
 entrevoir 
 s'entrevoir, ê 
 entr'ouviir 
 envoyer . 
 épreindre 
 s'éprendre, ê 
 équivaloir 
 espérer . 
 essayer . 
 éteindre . 
 étinceler 
 étiqueter 
 être . . 
 étreindre 
 exclure . 
 expirer, a, ê 
 extraire . . 
 
 failUr . 
 faire . 
 falloir . 
 feindre 
 ficeler 
 fleurir 
 
 forclore 
 forfaire 
 frire . 
 fuir . 
 
 geindre . 
 geler . . 
 gésir . . 
 grasseyer 
 grêler . . 
 grésiller . 
 
 haïr . . . 
 harceler . . 
 hypothéquer 
 
 importer . 
 induire , 
 inquiéter 
 inscrire . 
 s'inscrire, c 
 instruire . 
 interdire''. 
 i:iterrom])re 
 intervenir, ( 
 introduire 
 
 to discourse with ....... tenir 
 
 to hear imperfectly ouïr 
 
 to glimpse at, to have a glimpse of . voir 
 
 to see each other voir 
 
 to open a little ouvrir . 
 
 to send envoyer 
 
 to squeeze out, to wring joindre 
 
 to he smitten prendre 
 
 to be equivalent valoir . 
 
 to hope (see page 49, art. 100) . . . parler . 
 
 to try (see page 50, art. 103) . . . parler . 
 
 to extinguish, to put out .... joindre 
 
 to sparkle (see page 48, art. 91) . . parler . 
 
 to label (see page 49, art. 97 & 99) . parler . 
 
 to he être 
 
 to bend close, to tie close joindre 
 
 to exclude (see page 51, art. 104) . . conclure 
 
 to expire (see page 160) parler . 
 
 to extract traire . 
 
 F 
 
 to fail, to have like to faillir r 
 
 to do, to make, to cause faire 
 
 to he necessary (must) falloir . 
 
 to feign, to dissemble, to pretend . . joindre 
 
 to tie with pack thread(j>. 48, art. 91) parler . 
 to bloom, to blossom to be prosperous, 
 
 to flourish fleurir . 
 
 to debar clore . 
 
 to fail, to trespass faire 
 
 to fry frire 
 
 to run away, to fly, to flee, to avoid, 
 
 to shun fuir . . 
 
 G 
 
 to whine, to moan joindre 
 
 to freeze (see page 48, art, 93) . . neiger . 
 
 to lie gésur . 
 
 to lisp (see page 50, art. 103) . . . parler . 
 
 to hail (see page 49, art. 100) . . . neiger . 
 
 to rime neiger . 
 
 H 
 
 to hate haïr 
 
 to torment (see page 48, art. 93) . . parler . 
 
 to mortgage (see page 49, art. 100) . parler . 
 
 I 
 
 to matter neiger . 
 
 to ijiduce, to engage réduire 
 
 to make uneasy (see p. 49, art. 100) . parler . 
 
 to inscribe, to write down .... écrire . 
 
 to enter one's name in a register , . écrire . 
 
 to instruct, to teach réduire 
 
 to interdict, to forbid dire 
 
 to interrupt rompre 
 
 to intervene (see page 160) . . . tenir . 
 
 to introduce réduire 
 
 2 a 2 
 
 132 
 
 130 
 
 140 
 
 140 
 
 130 
 
 123 
 
 149 
 
 154 
 
 139 
 
 38 
 
 38 
 
 149 
 
 38 
 
 38 
 
 24 
 
 149 
 
 143 
 
 38 
 
 158 
 
 128 
 
 148 
 136 
 149 
 
 38 
 
 128 
 143 
 148 
 148 
 
 128 
 
 149 
 123 
 129 
 38 
 123 
 123 
 
 129 
 38 
 38 
 
 123 
 155 
 
 38 
 147 
 147 
 155 
 146 
 157 
 132 
 155 
 
168 
 
 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERSS. 
 
 jeter 
 
 se jeter, ô . . . 
 
 l'oindre .... 
 
 se joindre, ê . . 
 
 lécher .... 
 
 lire 
 
 luire 
 
 maintenir . . . 
 
 se maintenir, ê . 
 
 malfaire .... 
 
 maudire .... 
 
 méconnaître . . 
 
 se méconnaître, ê 
 
 mecroire . . . . 
 
 médire .... 
 
 méfdire . , . . 
 
 mener .... 
 
 mentir .... 
 
 se méprendre, ê . 
 
 mesavenir, e . . 
 
 mcsoi&ir . . . 
 
 mcsseoir, . . . 
 
 mettre .... 
 
 monter, a, ê . . 
 
 moudre .... 
 
 mourir, e . . . 
 
 se mounr, e . . 
 
 mouvoir .... 
 
 se mouvoir, ô . . 
 
 naître, ê . . . . 
 
 uéçrliger . . . . 
 
 neiger . . . . 
 
 niveler . . . . 
 
 mure 
 
 obtenir .... 
 
 oiirir 
 
 s'offiir, ê . . . 
 
 oindre . . . . 
 
 omettre .... 
 
 ouïr . , . . . 
 
 oa%Tir . . . . 
 
 paître .... 
 
 se paître .... 
 
 parfaire . . . . 
 
 J 
 
 to throw, to cast (see page 49, art. 95 
 to cast one's self (see page 49, art. 95 
 
 to join, to unite 
 
 to unite 
 
 to lick (see p. 49, art. 100) .... 
 
 to read 
 
 to shine, to glitter, to sparkle . . . 
 
 M 
 
 to maintain, to keep up 
 
 to keep up ......... 
 
 to do mischief . . ■ 
 
 to curse 
 
 to disown, to mistake, to neglect, to 
 
 forget, not to know 
 
 to forget one^s self 
 
 to disbelieve 
 
 to slander, to speak ill of ... . 
 
 to 'misdo, to do wrong 
 
 to lead, to take to (p. 49, art. 97 & 99) 
 
 to lie, to tell a lie . 
 
 to viistake 
 
 to succeed ill (see page 160) . . . 
 
 to underbid 
 
 to be unbecoming 
 
 to put, to place 
 
 to mount, to ascend, to go up (p. 160) 
 
 to grind Çgrain) 
 
 to die (see page 160) 
 
 to be dying 
 
 to move, to stir 
 
 to move 
 
 N 
 to be born (see page 160) . . 
 to neglect (see page 50, art. 102) 
 
 to snow 
 
 to level (see page 48, art. 91_) . 
 to hurt, to do an ill office . . 
 
 parler . 
 
 38 
 
 parler . 
 
 38 
 
 joindre 
 
 149 
 
 joindre 
 
 149 
 
 parler . 
 
 38 
 
 lire , . 
 
 149 
 
 réduire 
 
 155 
 
 tenir . 
 
 1.32 
 
 tenir . 
 
 132 
 
 faire . 
 
 148 
 
 dire. . 
 
 146 
 
 paraître 
 
 152 
 
 paraître 
 
 152 
 
 crone . 
 
 145 
 
 dire. . 
 
 146 
 
 faire . 
 
 148 
 
 parler . 
 
 38 
 
 sentir . 
 
 130 
 
 prendre 
 
 154 
 
 tenir . 
 
 132 
 
 ou\"nr . 
 
 130 
 
 seoir . 
 
 139 
 
 mettre . 
 
 150 
 
 parler . 
 
 38 
 
 moudre 
 
 151 
 
 mounr. 
 
 129 
 
 mounr . 
 
 129 
 
 mouvou: 
 
 136 
 
 mouvoir 
 
 136 
 
 naître . 
 
 . 151 
 
 parler . 
 
 . 38 
 
 neiger . 
 
 . 123 
 
 parler . 
 
 . 38 
 
 réduire 
 
 155 
 
 to obtain 
 
 to offer, to propose, to present a person 
 
 with 
 
 to offer one's self, or itself .... 
 
 to anoint 
 
 to omit 
 
 to hear 
 
 to open . 
 
 tenir 
 
 133 
 
 to graze, to feed . . 
 to feed upon . . . . 
 to perfect, to complete 
 
 ouvrir . 
 
 . 130 
 
 ouvnr . 
 
 \ 130 
 
 joindre 
 
 . 149 
 
 mettre . 
 
 . 150 
 
 ouïr . 
 
 . 130 
 
 ouvnr . 
 
 . 130 
 
 paître . 
 
 . 152 
 
 paître . 
 
 . 152 
 
 faire . 
 
 . 148 
 
IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS. 169 
 
 paraître . ... to appear, to seem paraître 
 
 l>arcourir . . . to run over, to go through .... courir . 
 
 pajtir, a, ê . .to set out, to go away, to depart (see 
 
 page 160) sentir . 
 
 parvenir, e ... to arrive, to attain, to reach (p. 160) tenir . 
 
 passer, a, ê . . . to pass (see page 160) parler . 
 
 payer to pay (see page 50, art, 103) . . . parler . 
 
 peindre . ... to paint, to describe joindre 
 
 peler to peal (see page 48, art. 93) . . . parler . 
 
 pénétrer - ... to penetrate (see p. 49, art. 100) . . parler . 
 
 périr, a, ê . . . ta perish (see psige 160) finir . 
 
 permettre . . . to permit, to allow mettre . 
 
 plaindre .... to pity joindre 
 
 se plaindre, è . . to complain joindre 
 
 plaire to please plaire . 
 
 pleuvoir . ... to rain pleuvoir 
 
 poindre . ... to dawn, to shoot forth, to peep . . poindre 
 
 posséder . ... to possess (see page 49, art. 100) . . parler . 
 
 poursuivre . . . to pursue, to prosecute suivre . 
 
 pourvoir . ... to provide, to furnish with, to supply 
 
 with pourvoir 
 
 se pourvoir, ê . .to provide one's self pourvoir 
 
 pouvoir . ... to be able, to can, to be at liberty to, 
 
 t may pouvoir 
 
 prédire .... to foretell, to predict dire 
 
 prélire . ... to read over previously lire , . 
 
 prendre . ... to take prendre 
 
 prescrire . ... to prescribe, to order, to command . écrire . 
 
 se prescrire, è . . to lose by prescription écrire . 
 
 pressentir . . . to foresee, to have a foresight of . . sentir . 
 prévaloir . . . to prevail, to predominate, to be pre- 
 valent valoir . 
 
 se prévaloir, g . . to take advantage, to glory in, to 
 
 pride in valoir . 
 
 prévenir . . , . to anticipate, to prevent, to prejudice, 
 
 to prepossess, to forewarn . . . tenir . 
 
 prévoir .... to foresee prévoir 
 
 produire . ... to produce, to bring forth .... réduire 
 
 se produire, è . . to put one's self forward .... réduire 
 
 projeter . ... to project (see page 49, art. 95) . . parler . 
 
 promettre . . . to promise mettre . 
 
 se promettre, ê . to hope for mettre . 
 
 promouvoir . . . to promote, to advance mouvoir 
 
 proscrire . ... to proscribe, to banish, to outlaw . . écrire . 
 
 provenir, ê . . . /o proceed from, to come from (p. 160) tenir . 
 
 a 
 
 q^uérir .... 1o go and fetch, to send for^ to come 
 
 for , acquérir 
 
 R 
 
 rabattre . , , . to abate, to beat down again ^ to bring 
 
 down battre , 
 
 se rabattre, è . . to turn about battre . 
 
 racheter. . . . fo 6uy ag^ain (see p. 49, art. 97 & 99) parler . 
 
 rajeunir, a, ê . . to become young r finir . 
 
 rapiécer . , .to piece (see page 49, art. 100) . . parler 
 
 152 
 126 
 
 130 
 
 132 
 
 38 
 
 38 
 
 149 
 
 38 
 
 38 
 
 54 
 
 150 
 
 149 
 
 149 
 
 153 
 
 137 
 
 154 
 
 38 
 
 157 
 
 137 
 137 
 
 138 
 146 
 149 
 154 
 147 
 147 
 130 
 
 139 
 
 139 
 
 132 
 141 
 155 
 155 
 
 38 
 150 
 150 
 136 
 147 
 132 
 
 124 
 
 141 
 
 141 
 
 38 
 
 54 
 
 38 
 
170 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS. 
 
 rappeler . 
 rapprendre 
 rasseoir . 
 
 se rasseoir, 
 ratteindre 
 ravoir 
 re battre . 
 reboire . 
 reboaillir 
 recaciieter 
 receler . 
 
 rechoir . 
 reclure . 
 reconduire 
 reconnaître 
 
 *e reconnaître, ê 
 reconquérir . 
 reconstruire 
 
 recoudre . 
 recourir . 
 recouvrir . 
 récrire . 
 recroître 
 recueillir 
 se recueillir, 
 recuire . 
 
 redéfaire . 
 redescendre 
 redevenir, ê 
 redire 
 redormir . 
 réduire . 
 se réduire, 
 refaire 
 se refaire, < 
 refleurir . 
 refrire . 
 cegeler . 
 
 régler , . 
 régner . 
 réintégrer 
 rejointe 
 relire . . 
 reluire . 
 remettre . 
 
 se remettre, ê 
 s'en remettre, ( 
 re moudre . 
 
 to recall (see page 48, art. 91) . . 
 
 to learn again 
 
 to set down again some body or some 
 th ing at his or its place .... 
 
 to sit down again 
 
 to catch again, to overtake again . . 
 
 to have again 
 
 to heat again 
 
 to drink again 
 
 to boil again 
 
 to seal again (see p. 49, art. 95) . . 
 
 to secrete, to receive stolen goods (see 
 page 49, art. 100) 
 
 to fall again 
 
 to shut up 
 
 to conduct back again 
 
 to recognize, to know again, to ac- 
 knowledge, to confess, to he thank- 
 ful, to reconnoiter 
 
 to recognize one's self 
 
 to reconquer 
 
 to construct again, to rebuild, to build 
 again 
 
 to sew again 
 
 to have recourse, to run again . . 
 
 to cover again 
 
 to write again, to write anew . . . 
 
 to grow again 
 
 to gather, to reap 
 
 to recollect one's self 
 
 to bake again, to boil again, to roast 
 again, to do again ..... 
 
 to undo again 
 
 to come down again (see page 160) . 
 
 to become again (see page 160) , . 
 
 to say again, to repeat, to tell again 
 
 to sleep again 
 
 to reduce 
 
 to amou7it to, to be reduced to . . . 
 
 to make again, to do over again . . 
 
 to recover 
 
 to blossom again, to flourish again . 
 
 to fry again 
 
 to freeze again (see page 48, art. 
 93) 
 
 to regulate (see page 49, art. 100) . 
 
 to reign (see page 49, art. 100) . . 
 
 to reinstate (see page 49, art. 100) . 
 
 to join again, to rejoin 
 
 to read over again 
 
 to glitter, to shine, to sparkle . . . 
 
 to remit, to set^again, to replace, to 
 deliver up, to put back, to put again, 
 to recognise a person . . . . . 
 
 to recollect, to recover 
 
 to refer a thing to somebody . . . 
 
 to grind over again ...... 
 
 parler . 
 
 38 
 
 prendre 
 
 IM 
 
 s'asseoir 
 
 134 
 
 s'asseoir 
 
 134 
 
 joindre 
 
 149 
 
 ravoir . 
 
 lii 
 
 battre . 
 
 141 
 
 boire . 
 
 142 
 
 bouillir 
 
 125 
 
 parler . 
 
 38 
 
 parler . 
 
 38 
 
 choir . 
 
 135 
 
 conclure 
 
 143 
 
 réduire 
 
 155 
 
 paraître . 
 
 152 
 
 paraître . 
 
 152 
 
 acquérir . 
 
 124 
 
 réduire 
 
 155 
 
 coudre . . 
 
 144 
 
 counr . . 
 
 126 
 
 ouvrir . . 
 
 130 
 
 ecnre . . 
 
 147 
 
 croître . . 
 
 145 
 
 cueillir 
 
 127 
 
 cueillir 
 
 127 
 
 réduire . 
 
 155 
 
 faire . . 
 
 148 
 
 vendre . . 
 
 132 
 
 tenir . . 
 
 132 
 
 dire . . 
 
 146 
 
 dormir . , 
 
 127 
 
 réduire . 
 
 155 
 
 réduire . 
 
 155 
 
 faire . . 
 
 148 
 
 faire . . 
 
 148 
 
 fleurir . . 
 
 128 
 
 frire . . 
 
 148 
 
 neiger . . 
 parler . . 
 
 123 
 
 38 
 
 parler . . 
 
 38 
 
 parler . . 
 
 38 
 
 joindre . 
 
 149 
 
 lire. . . 
 
 149 
 
 réduire . 
 
 155 
 
 mettre . . 
 
 150 
 
 mettre . . 
 
 150 
 
 mettre . . 
 
 150 
 
 moudre . 
 
 151 
 
IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS. 171 
 
 remonter, a, ô . . to ascend again, to mount again (see 
 
 page 160). parler . . 38 
 
 renaître . ... to revive, to be horn again, to spring 
 
 up again, to become alive again . naître . . 151 
 
 rendormir . . , to lull to sleep again dormir . . 127 
 
 se rendormir, ê . to Jail asleep again ..,,.. dormir . . 127 
 
 renduire . ... to plaster anew réduire . 155 
 
 renouveler . . . to renew (see page 48, art 91) . . parler . . 38 
 
 rentraire . . . to darn traire . . 158 
 
 rentrer, a, ê . . . to reenter (see page 160) .... parler . . 38 
 
 renvoyer . . , to send hack, to return envoyer , 123 
 
 repaître .... to feed paître . . 152 
 
 se repaître, é . . to thirst after, to delight in . . paître . . 152 
 
 reparaître . . . to reappear, to appear again . . . paraître . 152 
 
 repartir, ê . . . to set o^ again (see page 161) . . sentir . , 130 
 
 reoartir . ... to reply, to answer (see page 161) . sentir . . 130 
 
 repasser, a, ê . , to pass again, to repass (see p. 160) parler . . 38 
 
 repeindre . . , to paint again joindre . 149 
 
 se repentir, è , . to repent sentir . . 130 
 
 reprendre . , . to retake, to take again, to correct, to 
 
 chide, to resume prendre , 154 
 
 se reprendre . . to recollect one^s self to correct one's 
 
 self prendre . 154 
 
 reproduire , , . to reproduce réduire . 155 
 
 requérir . ... to request, to beg, to require, to exact acquérir , 124 
 résoudre . ... to resolve, to solve, to decide, to un- 
 riddle résoudre . 155 
 
 se résoudre, è . . to resolve, to be resolved, to change, 
 
 to turn into résoudre . 155 
 
 ressentir . ... to resent, to be sensible of, to feel still, 
 
 to have a deep sense of ... . sentir . , 130 
 se ressentir, è , . to feel still, to have remains of, to 
 
 have suffered by sentir . . 130 
 
 ressortir, a, ê . . to go out again (see page 160) . . sentir . . 130 
 
 se ressouvenir, ê . to remember, to recollect .... tenir . . 132 
 
 rester, a, ê . . . to remain, to stay (see page 160) . . parler . . 38 
 
 restreindre . . . to restrain, to confine joindre . 149 
 
 résulter, a, ê . . to follow, to result (see ^dLgel&Q) . . neiger. . 'i23 
 
 retenir . ... to retain, to detain, to hold back . . tenir . . 132 
 
 se retenir, ê . . to forbear, to stop tenir . . 132 
 
 retomber, ê . . . to fall again (see page 160) . . . parler . . 38 
 
 retourner,©. . . to return, to go back {^ee '^a.ge l&ï) . parler . . 38 
 
 retraire . ... to redeem an estate traire . . 158 
 
 revaloir . ... to return like for like, to repay . . valoir . . 139 
 
 révéler . ... to reveal, to disclose (p. 49, art. 100) . parler . , 38 
 revenir, ê . . . to come back, to return, to come again 
 
 (see page 160) tenir . . 133 
 
 revêtir . ... to give other clothes, to clothe, to 
 
 dress, to invest vêtir . 133 
 
 se revêtir, ê . . . to put on one's clothes ..... vêtir . . 133 
 
 revi\Te . ... to revive vivre . . 159 
 
 revoir to see again , voir . . 140 
 
 rire to laugh rire . . , 156 
 
 se rire, è . . . to laugh at rire . . 156 
 
 rompre, . ... to break rompre . 157 
 
 se rompre, q , . to break ' rompre . 157 
 
 rouvnr . to reopen, to open again .... ouvrir. . 130 
 
172 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS. 
 
 saillir 
 
 saluer 
 satisfaire 
 savoir 
 secourir . 
 se secourir, 
 séduire . 
 semer 
 sentir 
 seoir . . 
 senir . . 
 se servir, ê 
 severer . 
 sortir, a, ê 
 soudre . 
 souifrir . 
 soumettre 
 se soumettre, 
 sourire . / 
 souscrire . 
 se souscrire, ô 
 Boustraire . 
 
 se soustraire, ê 
 
 soutenir . . . 
 
 se soutenir, ô 
 se souvenir^ ê 
 subvenir . 
 suffire . 
 suivre 
 s'en suivre, 
 iuracheter 
 surcroitre 
 surfaire . 
 surprendre 
 surseoir . 
 sm-venir, ê 
 
 taire . . 
 se taire, ê 
 
 teindre . 
 tenir . . 
 se tenir, ê 
 s'en tenir, 
 tomber, ê 
 tonner . 
 traduire . 
 traire . . 
 transcrire 
 
 S 
 
 to project, to jut out, to gush out, to 
 
 leap assaillir 
 
 to salute, to bote (see p. 51, art. 104) parler . 
 
 to satisfy, to content, to comply with faire 
 
 to know savoir . 
 
 to succour, to assist, to help . . . courir . 
 
 to help one another courir . 
 
 to seduce, to bribe réduire 
 
 to sow (see page-49, art. 97 & 99) . . parler . 
 
 to feel, to smell sentir . 
 
 toftt, to fit well, to become .... seoir . 
 
 to serve, to icait upon, to be of use . servir . 
 
 to use, to make use, to avail one^s self servir . 
 
 to wean (see page 49, art. 97 & 99) . parler . 
 
 to go out (see page 160) sentir . 
 
 to solve, to resolve résoudre 
 
 to suffer, to allow, to undergo . . . ouvrir . 
 
 to submit, to subdue, to conquer . . mettre . 
 
 to submit, to yield, to give up . . . mettre . 
 
 to smile rire . . 
 
 to subscribe écrire . 
 
 to subscribe one's self écrire . 
 
 to subtract, to deduct, to hide, to con- 
 ceal, to take away, to withdraw . traire . 
 
 to avoid, to escape, to withdraw one's 
 
 self traire . 
 
 to maintain, to sustain, to support, to 
 
 bear tenir . 
 
 to stand up, to hold out tenir . 
 
 to recollect, to remember, to remind . tenir . 
 
 to relieve, to assist tenir . 
 
 to suffice, to be sufficient .... confire . 
 
 to follow suivre . 
 
 to follow from, to result sxiivre . 
 
 to overpay (see p. 49, art. 97 & 99) . parler . 
 
 to grow out croîtra . 
 
 to exact, to ask too much .... faire . 
 
 to surprize, to astonish, to deceive . prendre 
 
 to supersede, to put off, to suspend . surseoir 
 
 to befall, to happen, to come in umx- 
 
 pectedly, to come upon (see p. 160) tenir . 
 
 to survive^ to outlive ...... vivre . 
 
 T 
 
 to conceal, to keep secret plaire . 
 
 to forbear talking, to keep silent, to 
 
 hold one's tongue plaire . 
 
 to die, to colour joiadre 
 
 to hold, to keep tenir . 
 
 to stand, to hold one's self .... tenir . 
 
 tc abide by tenir . 
 
 to fall (see page 160) ...... parler . 
 
 to\hunder nejger . 
 
 to translate, to bring to justice . . réduire 
 
 to milk traire . 
 
 to transcribe ....... . écrire . 
 
 125 
 38 
 14S 
 138 
 126 
 126 
 155 
 38 
 130 
 139 
 131 
 131 
 38 
 130 
 155 
 130 
 150 
 150 
 156 
 147 
 147 
 
 158 
 
 158 
 
 132 
 132 
 132 
 132 
 143 
 157 
 157 
 38 
 145 
 148 
 154 
 139 
 
 ]32 
 159 
 
 153 
 
 153 
 149 
 132 
 132 
 132 
 38 
 123 
 155 
 158 
 147 
 
IKREGUIAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS. 173 
 
 transmettre , 
 tressaiEir . 
 trompeter , 
 
 raincre . . 
 valoir . . . 
 valoir mieux 
 venir, ê . . 
 vêtir . . . 
 se vêtir, ê . 
 vieillir, a, ê . 
 vivre . . . 
 voir . , . 
 se voir, ê 
 vouloir , . 
 
 to transmit, to convey ..... mettre . 
 
 to start up, to leap for assaillir 
 
 to summon with the sound of the 
 
 trumpet (see page 49, art, 97 & 99) parler . 
 
 V 
 
 to vanquish, to conquer, to surpass . vaincre 
 
 to be worth valoir . 
 
 to be better valoir . 
 
 to come (see page 160) tenir . 
 
 to clothe, to dress vêtir . 
 
 to dress, to clothe one^s self .... vêtir . 
 
 to become old (see page 160) . . , finir . 
 
 to live vivre . 
 
 to see voir 
 
 to see one's self, to visit one another voir . 
 to be willing, to will, to tcish, to wish 
 
 for vouloir 
 
 150 
 125 
 
 38 
 
 169 
 139 
 139 
 132 
 133 
 133 
 54 
 159 
 140 
 140 
 
 141 
 
<4>. 
 
 ■4< 
 
 ■tMWMÉVtf '